2017 DPWH Department Orders

VOLUME II
PART A - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

Pay Item Suffix Valid Values
Description Unit Of Measure
(Number) (Subscript) Thickness/Sizes Class Others
A.1.1 Offices and Laboratory for the Engineer
Construction of Combined Field Office, Laboratory and
A.1.1 (1) Lump Sum
Living Quarters Building for the Engineer
Construction of Combined Field Office and Laboratory
A.1.1 (2) Lump Sum
Building for the Engineer
A.1.1 (3) Construction of Field Office for the Engineer Lump Sum
A.1.1 (4) Construction of Field Laboratory for the Engineer Lump Sum
A.1.1 (5) Construction of Living Quarters for the Engineer Lump Sum
Provision of Combined Field Office, Laboratory and
A.1.1 (6) Living Quarters Building for the Engineer (Rental Month
Basis)
Provision of Combined Field Office and Laboratory
A.1.1 (7) Month
Building for the Engineer (Rental Basis)
Provision of Field Office for the Engineer (Rental
A.1.1 (8) Month
Basis)
Provision of Laboratory for the Engineer (Rental
A.1.1 (9) Month
Basis)
Provision of Living Quarters for the Engineer (Rental
A.1.1 (10) Month
Basis)
Provision of Furnitures/Fixtures, Equipment &
A.1.1 (11) Lump Sum
Appliances for the Field Office for the Engineer
A.1.1 (12) Lump Sum
Appliances for Laboratory Building for the Engineer
Provision of Furnitures/Fixtures & Appliances for the
A.1.1 (13) Lump Sum
Living Quarters for the Engineer
Provision of Laboratory Testing Equipment, Apparatus
A.1.1 (14) Lump Sum
and Publications for the Engineer
Operation & Maintenance of Temporary Field Office,
A.1.1 (15) Laboratory and Living Quarters Building for the Month
Engineer
Operation & Maintenance of Field Office for the
A.1.1 (16) Month
Engineer
Page 1
VOLUME II
Operation & Maintenance of Laboratory Building for

A.1.1 (17) Month
the Engineer
Operation & Maintenance of Living Quarters for the
A.1.1 (18) Month
Engineer
A.1.2 Vehicles for the Engineer
Provision of 4x4 Pick Up Type Service Vehicle for the
A.1.2 (1) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (2) Month
Engineer on Bare Rental Basis
A.1.2 (3) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (4) Month
Operation and Maintenance of 4x4 Pick Up Type
A.1.2 (5) Month
Service Vehicle for the Engineer
A.1.2 (6) Month
A.1.2 (7) Provision of 4x4 Van Type Service Vehicle (12-seater) Each
Provision of 4x4 Van Type Service Vehicle on Rental
A.1.2 (8) Month
Basis (12 Seater)
Operation and Maintenance of 4x4 Van Type Service
A.1.2 (9) Month
Vehicle (12-seater)
A.1.3 Assistance to the Engineer
Provision of Field Office Staff for the Assistance to the
A.1.3 (1) Month
Engineer
Provision of Survey Equipment for the Assistance to
A.1.3 (2) Lump Sum
the Engineer
Provision of Survey Personnel for the Assistance to
A.1.3 (3) Month
the Engineer
Provision of Laboratory Personnel for the Assistance
A.1.3 (4) Month
to the Engineer
A.1.4 Photographs
A.1.4 (1) Provision of Progress Photographs Month
A.1.5 Communication Facility
A.1.5 (1) Provision of Communication Facility for the Engineer Each
Operation and Maintenance of Communication Facility
A.1.5 (2) Each
for the Engineer
Page 2
VOLUME II
PART B - OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Offices, Shops, Stores and Workmens Accommodation
B.1 Lump sum
for Contractor
B.2 Medical Room and First Aid Facilities Lump sum
B.3 Permits and Clearances Lump sum
B.4 (1) Construction survey and staking Kilometer
B.4 (2) Slope, reference, and clearing and grubbing stakes Kilometer
B.4 (3) Centerline reestablishment Kilometer
B.4 (4) Culvert survey and staking Each
B.4 (5) Bridge survey and staking Lump sum
B.4 (6) Retaining wall survey and staking Lump sum
B.4 (7) Grade finishing stakes Kilometer
B.4 (8) Permanent monuments and markers Each
B.4 (9) Miscellaneous survey and staking Hour
B.4 (10) Miscellaneous survey and staking Lump sum
B.5 Project Billboard / Signboard Each
B.6 Installation of ODA Recognition Plate Lump sum
B.7 Occupational Safety and Health Program Month
B.8 Traffic Management Month
B.9 Mobilization / Demobilization Lump sum
B.10 Dayworks PS
B.11 Provisional Sum PS
B.12 Removal and Relocation of Utilities Lump sum
B.13 Additional Geotechnical Investigation Lump sum
B.14 Environmental Management and Monitoring Month
B.15 (1) Detour/Access Road Lump sum
B.15 (2) Detour/Access Road Linear Meter
B.16 Recognition Plate/Project Marker Each
B.17 Temporary Diversion of Waterway Lump Sum
B.18 (1) Craneway Lump sum
B.18 (2) Craneway Linear Meter
B.19 Geotechnical Exploration Linear Meter
PART C - EARTHWORK
ITEM 100 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING
(Number) (Subscript)
Page 3
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix

100 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Hectare
100 (2) Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
100 (3) a1 Individual Removal of Trees 150 - 300 mm dia. Small Each
100 (3) a2 Individual Removal of Trees 301 - 500 mm.dia Small Each
100 (4) Individual Removal of Trees above 900mm dia. Large Each
ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

101 (1) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Lump Sum
101 (2) Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction Each
101 (3) a1 Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction 0.15 m thick PCCP (Reinforced) Square Meter
101 (3) b1 Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction 0.15 m thick PCCP (Unreinforced) Square Meter
101 (3) c1 Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction 0.05 m thick ACP Square Meter
101 (3) d Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction 0.10 m thick Sidewalk Square Meter
101 (4) a1 Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction 610 mm dia. RCPC Linear Meter
101 (4) b Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction Curb Linear Meter
Page 4
VOLUME II
101 (4) c Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction Curb and Gutter Linear Meter
101 (5) a1 Removal of Pipes other than Pipe Culverts 50 mm dia. PVC Linear Meter
101 (5) b1 Removal of Pipes other than Pipe Culverts 150 mm dia. Concrete Linear Meter
High Density
101 (5) c1 Removal of Pipes other than Pipe Culverts 50 mm dia. Polyethylene Linear Meter
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
101 (6) Removal of Structures and Obstruction Concrete Cubic Meter
101 (7) a Removal of Structures and Obstruction Steel Kilogram
101 (7) b Removal of Structures and Obstruction Steel H-Piles Kilogram
101 (7) c Removal of Structures and Obstruction RSB Kilogram
101 (8) Removal of Existing Guardrails Linear Meter
101 (9) Removal of Existing Guardrail Posts Each
Page 5
VOLUME II
101 (10) Removal of Existing Road Signs Each
ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION

102 (1) Unsuitable Excavation Cubic Meter
102 (2) Surplus Common Excavation Cubic Meter
102 (3) a Surplus Rock Excavation Soft Cubic Meter
102 (3) b Surplus Rock Excavation Hard Cubic Meter
102 (4) Surplus Unclassified Excavation Cubic Meter
ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

103 (1) a Structure Excavation Common Soil Cubic Meter
103 (1) b Structure Excavation Soft Rock Cubic Meter
103 (1) c Structure Excavation Hard Rock Cubic Meter
103 (2) a Bridge Excavation Common Soil Cubic Meter
103 (2) b Bridge Excavation Soft Rock Cubic Meter
103 (2) c Bridge Excavation Hard Rock Cubic Meter
103 (3) Foundation Fill Cubic Meter
103 (4) Excavation ordered below Plan elevation Cubic Meter
103 (5) a Shoring, cribbing and related works Shoring Lump sum
Cribbing/Cofferdammin
103 (5) b Shoring, cribbing and related works Lump sum
g
103 (6) a Pipe culverts and drain excavation Common Soil Cubic Meter
103 (6) b Pipe culverts and drain excavation Soft Rock Cubic Meter
103 (6) c Pipe culverts and drain excavation Hard Rock Cubic Meter
ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT

104 (1) a Embankment from roadway excavation Common Soil Cubic Meter
104 (1) b Embankment from roadway excavation Soft Rock Cubic Meter
104 (1) c Embankment from roadway excavation Hard Rock Cubic Meter
104 (2) a Embankment from borrow Common Soil Cubic Meter
104 (2) b Embankment from borrow Soft Rock Cubic Meter
104 (2) c Embankment from borrow Hard Rock Cubic Meter
Granular Coarse
104 (2) d Embankment from borrow Cubic Meter
Material
Page 6
VOLUME II
104 (2) e Embankment from borrow Granular Fine Material Cubic Meter
104 (3) a Selected Borrow for topping Case 1 Cubic Meter
104 (3) b Selected Borrow for topping Case 2 Cubic Meter
104 (4) Earth Berm Cubic Meter
104 (5) Boulder Fill Cubic Meter
104 (6) Preload, relocated, and compacted Common Borrow Cubic Meter
Item 105 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION

105 (1) a Subgrade Preparation Common Material Square Meter
105 (1) b Subgrade Preparation Existing Pavement Square Meter
105 (1) c Subgrade Preparation Unsuitable Material Square Meter
105 (1) d Subgrade Preparation Hard Rock Material Square Meter
105 (1) e Subgrade Preparation Soft Rock Material Square Meter
105 (1) f Subgrade Preparation Unclassified Material Square Meter
ITEM 106 – COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS

106 (1) Compaction Equipment and Density Controls Strips Common Material Square Meter
*Unless otherwise provided, the cost of constructing the control strip will be considered incidental to the cost of the work item for which a control strip is required. Payment for the work item shall be deemed to
include compensation for performing the work herein specified and the furnishing of all materials, labors, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to construct the density control strip. No payment will be made for
any material used in the construction of unacceptable control strip.
ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL

107 (1) Overhaul Cubic Meter
107 (2) Overhaul Kilometer
107 (3) Overhaul of Borrow Case 1 Cubic Meter
107 (4) Overhaul of Borrow Case 1 Kilometer
PART D – SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE

ITEM 200 – AGGREGATE SUBBASE COURSE
200 (1) Aggregate Subbase Course Cubic Meter
Page 7
VOLUME II
ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

201 (1) Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter
ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

202 (1) Crushed Aggregate Base Course Cubic Meter
ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

203 (1) a Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course New Soil Aggregate Cubic Meter
Salvaged Soil
203 (1) b Lime Stabilized Road Mix Base Course Cubic Meter
Aggregate
ITEM 204 – PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

204 (1) a Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course New Soil Aggregate Cubic Meter
Salvaged Soil
204 (1) b Portland Cement Stabilized Road Mix Base Course Cubic Meter
Aggregate
Item 205 – ASPHALT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

205 (1) a Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course New Soil Aggregate Cubic Meter
Salvaged Soil
205 (1) b Asphalt Stabilized Road Mix Base Course Cubic Meter
Aggregate
ITEM 206 – CHEMICALLY STABILIZED ROAD MIX SUB-BASE/BASE COURSE

206 (1) Polymer-Based Chemical Soil Additive Liter
ITEM 207 – PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE
Page 8
VOLUME II

207 (1) a Portland Cement treated Plant Mix Course New Soil Aggregate Cubic Meter
Salvaged Soil
207 (1) b Portland Cement treated Plant Mix Course Cubic Meter
Aggregate
ITEM 208 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE

208 (1) Aggregate Stockpile Cubic Meter
ITEM 209 – ASPHALT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE

209 (1) Asphalt Treated Plant Mix Base Course Cubic Meter
PART E - SURFACE COURSES

ITEM 300 – AGGREGATE SURFACE COURSE
300 (1) Gravel Surface Course Cubic Meter
300 (2) Crushed Aggregate Surface Course Cubic Meter
ITEM 301 – BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT

301 (1) a Bituminous Prime Coat - MC– Cut-back Asphalt Grade 30 Square Meter
301 (1) b Bituminous Prime Coat - MC– Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Square Meter
301 (1) c Bituminous Prime Coat - MC– Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Square Meter
301 (1) d Bituminous Prime Coat - MC– Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Square Meter
301 (1) e Bituminous Prime Coat - MC– Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Square Meter
301 (2) a Bituminous Prime Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Square Meter
301 (2) b Bituminous Prime Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Square Meter
301 (2) c Bituminous Prime Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Square Meter
301 (2) d Bituminous Prime Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Square Meter
ITEM 302 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

302 (1) a Bituminous Tack Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Square Meter
Page 9
VOLUME II
302 (1) b Bituminous Tack Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Square Meter
302 (1) c Bituminous Tack Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Square Meter
302 (1) d Bituminous Tack Coat - RC – Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Square Meter
302 (2) Emulsified Asphalt Square Meter
ITEM 303 – BITUMINOUS SEAL COAT

303 (1) a Cover Aggregate Type 2 Tonne
303 (1) b Cover Aggregate Type 3A Tonne
303 (1) c Cover Aggregate Type 3B Tonne
303 (2) a Bituminous Seal Coat - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 30 Tonne
303 (2) b Bituminous Seal Coat - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Tonne
303 (2) c Bituminous Seal Coat - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Tonne
303 (2) d Bituminous Seal Coat - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Tonne
303 (2) e Bituminous Seal Coat - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Tonne
303 (3) a Bituminous Seal Coat - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Tonne
303 (3) b Bituminous Seal Coat - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Tonne
303 (3) c Bituminous Seal Coat - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Tonne
303 (3) d Bituminous Seal Coat - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Tonne
303 (4) Asphalt Cement Pen. Gr. Tonne
ITEM 304 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

304 (1) Aggregate Grading Tonne
304 (2) Asphalt Cement Pen. Grade Tonne
304 (3) a Bituminous Surface Treatment - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Tonne
304 (3) b Bituminous Surface Treatment - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Tonne
304 (3) c Bituminous Surface Treatment - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Tonne
304 (3) d Bituminous Surface Treatment - RC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Tonne
304 (4) a Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 30 Tonne
304 (4) b Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Tonne
Page 10
VOLUME II
304 (4) c Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 250 Tonne
304 (4) d Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 800 Tonne
304 (4) e Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 3000 Tonne
304 (5) Emulsified Asphalt Tonne
ITEM 304A – SLURRY SYSTEM FOR ROAD SURFACE TREATMENT

304A (1) Slurry Surface Treatment (SST) Square Meter
304A (2) Slurry Seal Square Meter
304A (3) Micro-surfacing Square Meter
ITEM 305 – BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM PAVEMENT

305 (1) Aggregates Tonne
305 (2) Asphalt Cement Tonne
Bituminous Penetration Macadam Pavement - RC-Cut-
305 (3) a Grade 70 Tonne
back Asphalt
305 (3) b Grade 250 Tonne
back Asphalt
305 (3) c Grade 800 Tonne
back Asphalt
305 (3) d Grade 3000 Tonne
back Asphalt
ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE

306 (1) Aggregate for Bituminous Road Mix Surface Course Tonne
Bituminous Material for Bituminous Road Mix Surface
306 (2) Tonne
Course
ITEM 307 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX SURFACE COURSE - GENERAL

*The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of Square Meters (m²) of asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the Thickness/Sizes and densities of the cores taken.
Page 11
VOLUME II
ITEM 308 – BITUMINOUS PLANT- MIX SURFACE COURSE, COLD-LAID

308 (1) Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course, Cold-Laid Square Meter
ITEM 309 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX (STOCKPILE MAINTENANCE MIXTURE)

309 (1) Bituminous Plant-Mix (Stockpile Maintenance Mixture) Cubic Meter
ITEM 310 – BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, HOT-LAID

Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, Hot-
310 (1) a1 30 mm Square Meter
Laid
Laid
Laid
310 (2) Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Hot-Laid 50 mm Square Meter
Asphaltic Concrete With Lahar as Fine Aggregate
310 (3) Square Meter
Replacement
Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, Stone
Mastic
Mastic
Mastic
Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Stone
310 (5) 50 mm Square Meter
Mastic
310 (6) a1 Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, PMB 30 mm Square Meter
Page 12
VOLUME II
ITEM 311 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

311 (1) a Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.15 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) b Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) c1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.23 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) d1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.25 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) e1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.28 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) f1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.30 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) g1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.33 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (1) h1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.35 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 13
VOLUME II
311 (2) a Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.15 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) b Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) c1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.23 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) d1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.25 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) e1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.28 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) f1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.30 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) g1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.33 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (2) h1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.35 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 14
VOLUME II
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced
311 (3) a1 0.23 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
311 (3) b1 0.25 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
311 (3) c1 0.28 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
311 (3) d1 0.30 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
311 (3) e1 0.33 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
311 (3) f1 0.35 m thick 14 days Square Meter
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
Page 15
VOLUME II
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Materials as Coarse Aggregates (Unreinforced)





Materials as Coarse Aggregates (Reinforced)




Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Dolomites
as Aggregates (Unreinforced)
Page 16
VOLUME II

as Aggregates (Reinforced)
ITEM 313 - ROCK ASPHALT, HOT LAID

313 (1) Rock Asphalt Square Meter
PART F - BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

ITEM 400 – PILING
400 (1) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished Meter
400 (2) Treated Timber Piles, preservative, furnished Meter
400 (3) a Steel H-Piles, furnished 305mmx305mm 79 kg/m Meter
400 (3) b Steel H-Piles, furnished 305mmx305mm 94 kg/m Meter
400 (3) c Steel H-Piles, furnished 305mmx305mm 110 kg/m Meter
400 (3) d Steel H-Piles, furnished 305mmx305mm 125 kg/m Meter
400 (4) a1 Precast Concrete Piles, furnished 400x400 mm Meter
400 (5) a1 Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished 400x400 mm Meter
400 (6) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400 (7) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished Meter
400 (8) Untreated Timber Piles, driven Meter
400 (9) Treated Timber Piles, driven Meter
400 (10) Steel H-Piles, driven Meter
400 (11) Steel Pipes Piles Meter
400 (12) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (13) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven Meter
400 (14) Precast Concrete Piles, driven Meter
400 (15) Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, driven Meter
Page 17
VOLUME II
400 (16) Test Piles, furnished and driven Meter

400 (17) a1 Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 0.80 Meter
400 (18) a1 Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells 400mm dia. Meter
400 (19) a1 Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes 400mm dia. Meter
400 (20) Pile Shoes Each
400 (21) Splices Each
400 (22) Load Tests Each
400 (23) a1 Bored Piles 0.80 Meter
Page 18
VOLUME II

400 (24) a1 Permanent Casing 0.80 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) b1 Permanent Casing 0.90 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) c1 Permanent Casing 1.00 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) d1 Permanent Casing 1.10 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) e1 Permanent Casing 1.20 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) f1 Permanent Casing 1.30 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) g1 Permanent Casing 1.40 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) h1 Permanent Casing 1.50 10mm thick Meter
400 (24) i1 Permanent Casing 1.60 12mm thick Meter
Page 19
VOLUME II
400 (24) j1 Permanent Casing 1.70 12mm thick Meter

400 (24) k1 Permanent Casing 1.80 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) l1 Permanent Casing 1.90 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) m1 Permanent Casing 2.00 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) n1 Permanent Casing 2.10 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) o1 Permanent Casing 2.20 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) p1 Permanent Casing 2.30 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) q1 Permanent Casing 2.40 12mm thick Meter
400 (24) r1 Permanent Casing 2.50 16mm thick Meter
400 (24) s1 Permanent Casing 2.60 16mm thick Meter
400 (24) t1 Permanent Casing 2.70 16mm thick Meter
400 (24) u1 Permanent Casing 2.80 16mm thick Meter
400 (24) v1 Permanent Casing 2.90 16mm thick Meter
400 (24) w1 Permanent Casing 3.00 16mm thick Meter
400 (25) Permanent Casing Kilogram
400 (26) Splicing of R.C. Piles with Epoxy Each
400 (27) a Pile Integrity Testing Crosshole-Sonic Each
400 (27) b Pile Integrity Testing Low Strain Each
400 (28) High Strain Dynamic Testing (P.D.A) Each
400 (29) a1 Sand Compaction Pile 0.6 Meter
400 (30) a1 Gravel Compaction Pile 0.6 Meter
Page 20
VOLUME II
ITEM 401 – RAILINGS

401 (1) a Metal Railing Steel Meter
401 (1) b Metal Railing Aluminum Meter
401 (2) a Concrete Railing Standard Meter
401 (2) b Concrete Railing Balluster Meter
401 (2) c Concrete Railing Parapet Meter
401 (3) Wooden Railing Meter
401 (4) Stone and Brick Railing Meter
ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES

402 (1) Timber Structure Span
402 (2) Timber Structure Meter
ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES

403 (1) Structural Steel, furnished Kilogram
403 (2) Structural Steel, fabricated Kilogram
403 (3) Structural Steel, erected Kilogram
403 (4) Structural Steel, furnished, and fabricated Kilogram
403 (5) Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated, and erected Kilogram
403 (6) Structural Steel, painting works Square Meter
ITEM 404 - REINFORCING STEEL

404 (1) a Reinforcing Steel Grade 40 Kilogram
404 (1) b Reinforcing Steel Grade 60 Kilogram
ITEM 404A - EPOXY-COATED REINFORCING STEEL BARS

404A (1) a Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars Grade 40 Kilogram
404A (1) b Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars Grade 60 Kilogram
Page 21
VOLUME II
ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

405 (1) a1 Structural Concrete 20.68MPa A 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (1) b1 Structural Concrete 27.58 Mpa A 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (1) b2 Structural Concrete 27.58 MPa A 14 days Cubic Meter
405 (2) a Structural Concrete 20.68MPa B Cubic Meter
405 (2) b Structural Concrete 27.58 Mpa B Cubic Meter
405 (3) a Structural Concrete 20.68MPa C Cubic Meter
405 (3) b Structural Concrete 27.58 Mpa C Cubic Meter
405 (4) a1 Structural Concrete 34.47 Mpa P 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (4) b1 Structural Concrete 41.37 Mpa P 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (5) Seal Concrete Cubic Meter
405 (6) Structural Concrete, painting works Square Meter
ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES

(Number) (Subscript) Thickness/Sizes Class/Type Others
406 (1) a1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 9.00 m. Type I I-Girders Each
406 (1) b1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 11.00 m. Type II I-Girders Each
Page 22
VOLUME II
406 (1) c1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 15.00 m. Type III I-Girders Each
406 (1) d1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 19.00 m. Type IV I-Girders Each
406 (1) e1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 23.00 m. Type IV-A I-Girders Each
406 (1) f1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 23.00 m. Type IV-B I-Girders Each
406 (1) g1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 26.00 m. Type V I-Girders Each
Page 23
VOLUME II
406 (1) h1 Prestressed Structural Concrete Members 33.00 m. Type VI I-Girders Each
406 (2) a Prestressed Concrete T-Girder Lump Sum
406 (2) b Prestressed Concrete Box Girder Lump Sum
406 (3) a Prestressed Concrete T-Girder Cubic Meter
406 (3) b Prestressed Concrete Box Girder Cubic Meter
ITEM 407– CONCRETE STRUCTURES

Page 24
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix

407 (1) Concrete (Refer to Item 405) A Cubic Meter
407 (2) Concrete Post/Baluster Railings (Refer to Item 401) Each
407 (3) Parapet Walls Cubic Meter
407 (4) Piling (Refer to Item 400) Linear Meter
407 (5) Structure Excavation (Refer to Item 103) Cubic Meter
407 (6) Sidewalk Concrete (Refer to Item 601) Cubic Meter
407 (7) Reinforcing Steel Bars (Refer to Item 404) Grade 40 Kilogram
407 (8) Lean Concrete (Refer to Item 901) Class B (16.5 Mpa) Cubic Meter
*When more than one item is specified, means of identification shall be inserted in parenthesis immediately after the Pay Item and letter suffixes shall be included within the parenthesis of the Pay Item Number.
ITEM 408– STEEL BRIDGES

408 (1) Steel Bridges Lump Sum
*The quantities, measured as prescribed above, shall be paid for at the contract until price for the several Pay Items which price and payments shall be full compensation for furnishing, preparing, fabricating,
transporting, placing and erecting all structural steel and all other materials for the complete structure; for all shop work, painting and field work; for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the
Item. Such payment shall constitute full payment for the completed structure ready for use, and no allowance shall be made for cofferdam construction, falsework, or other erection expenses.
ITEM 409 – WELDED STRUCTURAL STEEL

409 (1) Welded Structural Steel Lump Sum
*Unless otherwise provided in the Special Provisions, welded structural steel structures shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract price for other
Items.
ITEM 410 – TREATED AND UNTREATED TIMBER

410 (1) Timber Cubic Meter
410 (2) Treated Timber Cubic Meter
ITEM 411 – PAINT

411 (1) Paint Lump Sum
411 (2) Paint Square Meter
*Painting shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the Items where called for.
Page 25
VOLUME II
ITEM 412 – ELASTOMERIC BEARING PADS

412 (1) Elastomeric Bearing Pads Each
ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK JOINT EXPANS ION FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING AND STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION
413 (1) a Preformed Sponge Rubber Joint Expansion Cubic Meter
413 (1) b Preformed Cork Joint Expansion Cubic Meter
ITEM 414 - FORMS AND FALSEWORKS

414 (1) Forms and Falsework Lump Sum
ITEM 415 – ELASTOMERIC, HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANT WITH SINGLE-SIZED AGGREGATES FOR BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS
Elastomeric, Hot-Applied Expansion Joint Sealant
415 (1) Cubic Meter
(with Single-Sized Aggregates)
ITEM 416 – CARBON FIBER SHEET AND GLASS FIBER

416 (1) a Carbon Fiber Sheet 1 Layer Square Meter
416 (1) b Carbon Fiber Sheet 2 Layers Square Meter
416 (1) c Carbon Fiber Sheet 3 Layers Square Meter
416 (2) Glass Fiber Square Meter
ITEM 416A – CARBON FIBER PLATE

416A (1) Carbon Fiber Plate Square Meter
ITEM 417 – BEARING DEVICES

Page 26
VOLUME II
417 (1) a Bearing Devices Steel Bearing Each

417 (1) b Bearing Devices Rubble Bearing Each
High Dumping Rubble
417 (1) c Bearing Devices Each
Bearing
ITEM 418 – ASPHALTIC PLUG JOINTS (APJ) FOR BRIDGES

418 (1) Asphaltic Plug Joints (APJ) for Bridges Each
PART G - DRAINAGE AND SLOPE PROTECTION STRUCTURES

ITEM 500 - PIPE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAIN
500 (1) a1 Pipe Culverts 610 mm dia. Class II RCPC Linear Meter
500 (1) b1 Pipe Culverts 610 mm dia. Class IV RCPC Linear Meter
500 (2) Storm Drain Linear Meter
ITEM 501- UNDERDRAINS

501 (1) Underdrain 150 mm dia. Linear Meter
501 (2) Blind drain Linear Meter
501 (3) Granular backfill filter material for underdrains Cubic Meter
ITEM 502 – MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS

502 (1) a1 Manholes 610 mm dia. Concrete Each
Page 27
VOLUME II

502 (1) b1 Manholes 610 mm dia. CHB Each
502 (2) a1 Inlets, type 610 mm dia. Each
502 (3) a1 Catch basins 610 mm dia. Each
502 (4) a1 Concrete covers 610 mm dia. Each
502 (5) Metal frames and gratings, type Pair
502 (6) Metal frames and covers Pair
502 (7) Adjusting manholes Each
502 (8) Adjusting catch basin Each
ITEM 503 – DRAINAGE STEEL GRATING WITH FRAME

503 (1) Metal frames and grating Set
503 (2) Metal frames and grating Kilogram
ITEM 504 - CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

504 (1) a1 Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 610 mm dia. Linear Meter
Page 28
VOLUME II
Removing, cleaning, and relaying salvaged culvert
504 (2) a1 610 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
610 mm dia., half-
504 (3) a1 Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
760 mm dia., half-
silted
910 mm dia., half-
silted
1070 mm dia., half-
silted
1220 mm dia., half-
silted
1520 mm dia., half-
silted
504 (4) Reconditioning drainage structures Each
*If more than one type of drainage structure is described for an Item in the Bid Schedule, letter suffixes shall be added to the item Number to differentiate between such structures.
*If no Pay Item from the list above appears in the Bid Schedule, the pipe removed will be considered as included in the work Item 101, Removal of Structures and Obstructions.
ITEM 505 - RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP

505 (1) a Riprap A Cubic Meter
Page 29
VOLUME II
505 (1) b Riprap B Cubic Meter

505 (1) c Riprap C Cubic Meter
505 (1) d Riprap D Cubic Meter
505 (2) a Grouted Riprap A Cubic Meter
505 (2) b Grouted Riprap B Cubic Meter
505 (2) c Grouted Riprap C Cubic Meter
505 (2) d Grouted Riprap D Cubic Meter
505 (3) Filter layer of granular material Cubic Meter
ITEM 506 – STONE MASONRY

506 (1) Stone Masonry Cubic Meter
ITEM 507 – RUBBLE CONCRETE

507 (1) Rubble Concrete Cubic Meter
ITEM 508 – HAND-LAID ROCK EMBANKMENT

508 (1) Hand-Laid Rock Embankment Cubic Meter
ITEM 509 - SHEET PILES

509 (1) Sheet Piles Timber Furnished and Driven Linear Meter
509 (2) a Sheet Piles Steel Slope Protection Linear Meter
509 (2) b Sheet Piles Steel Cofferdamming Linear Meter
509 (3) a Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished Linear Meter
509 (3) b Sheet Piles Concrete Driven Linear Meter
509 (3) c Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished and Driven Linear Meter
ITEM 510 – CONCRETE SLOPE PROTECTION

Page 30
VOLUME II
510 (1) Bed Course Granular Material Concrete Cubic Meter

510 (2) Concrete Slope Protection Cubic Meter
ITEM 511 – GABIONS AND MATTRESSES

511 (1) Gabions Cubic Meter
511 (2) Mattresses Cubic Meter
511 (3) Filter Cloth Square Meter
ITEM 512 - EROSION CONTROL MATS, ROVING, AND CELLULAR CONFINEMENT SYSTEMS
512 (1) a Erosion Control Mat Type 1 Square Meter
512 (1) b Erosion Control Mat Type 2 Square Meter
512 (1) c Erosion Control Mat Type 3 Square Meter
512 (1) d Erosion Control Mat Type 4 Square Meter
512 (1) e Erosion Control Mat Type 5 Square Meter
512 (2) Roving Square Meter
512 (3) Cellular Confinement Systems Square Meter
ITEM 513 – PERMANENT GROUND ANCHORS

513 (1) Permanent Ground Anchor Linear Meter
ITEM 514 – SHOTCRETE (CONCRETE SPRAY)

514 (1) Shotcrete with reinforcing steel Square Meter
514 (2) Shotcrete with reinforcing fibers Square Meter
ITEM 515 – MECHANICALLY-STABILIZED EARTH (MSE) RETAINING WALLS

515 (1) Mechanically-Stabilized Earth (MSE) Retaining Walls Square Meter
515 (2) Select Granular Backfill Cubic Meter
515 (3) Structural Backfill Cubic Meter
Page 31
VOLUME II
ITEM 516 – WET STONE MASONRY (COBBLE STONE)

516 (1) Wet Stone Masonry Linear Meter
516 (2) Wet Stone Masonry Cubic Meter
ITEM 517 – DRAIN PIPE

517 (1) a Drain Pipe Galvanized Linear Meter
517 (1) b Drain Pipe PVC Linear Meter
ITEM 520 – HYDROSEEDING

520 (1) Hydroseeding Square Meter
ITEM 522 – ROCKFALL PROTECTION SYSTEM

522 (1) Rockfall Netting Square Meter
522 (2) Rockfall Barrier Linear Meter
ITEM 522A – PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR UNSTABLE SLOPE

522A (1) Active Protection System Square Meter
522A (2) Passive/Rockfall Barrier Linear Meter
PART H – MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURES

ITEM 600 – CURB AND GUTTER
600 (1) Concrete Curb Cast in place Linear Meter
600 (2) Asphalt Curb Cast in place Linear Meter
600 (3) Concrete Gutter Cast in place Linear Meter
600 (4) Curb and Gutter Cast in place Linear Meter
600 (5) Concrete Curb Precast Piece
600 (6) Concrete Gutter Precast Piece
Page 32
VOLUME II
600 (7) Curb and Gutter Precast Piece
ITEM 601 – SIDEWALK

601 (1) Sidewalk 100 mm thk. Square Meter
ITEM 602 – MONUMENTS, MARKERS AND GUIDE POSTS

602 (1) a Right-of-Way monuments Timber Each
602 (1) b Right-of-Way monuments Concrete Each
602 (2) a Maintenance marker posts Cast-in-place Each
602 (2) b Maintenance marker posts Precast Each
602 (2) c Maintenance marker posts Timber Each
602 (3) a Kilometer posts Cast-in-place Each
602 (3) b Kilometer posts Precast Each
1000±50 high,
100mm±5 wide, Timber with 3" dia.
602 (4) a Guide Posts Each
50mm±5 thick, (75mm) reflector
500mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
100mm±5 wide, Non-timber with 3" dia.
602 (4) b1 Guide Posts Flexible Each
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
602 (4) b2 Guide Posts Semi-flexible Each
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
602 (4) b3 Guide Posts Rigid Each
500mm depth (min)
602 (5) Precast Guide posts Rectangular Each
602 (6) Cast-in-place Guide posts Precast Each
ITEM 603 – GUARDRAIL

603 (1) Guardrail (Wire rope or Wire cable) Linear Meter
Page 33
VOLUME II
603 (2) Cable Guardrail (Chain Link Fabric) Linear Meter

603 (3) a1 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post W-Beam Linear Meter
603 (3) a2 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Thrie-Beam Linear Meter
603 (4) a Metal Beam End Piece Fish Tail Each
603 (4) b Metal Beam End Piece Bull Nose Each
Eccentric Loader
603 (4) c Metal Beam End Piece Breakaway Cable Each
Terminal (ELT)
603 (5) Guardrail (Timber) Linear Meter
ITEM 604 – FENCING

604 (1) Fencing Barbed wire Linear Meter
604 (2) Fencing Chain Link Fence Fabric Linear Meter
604 (3) Fencing Posts Each
604 (4) Fencing Gates Each
604 (5) Concrete Fence including Post Square Meter
ITEM 605 – ROAD SIGN

Horizontal Alignment
605 (1) a1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-1A Each
Sharp Turn L or R
605 (1) a2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-1B Each
Sharp Turn L or R
605 (1) a3 Warning Signs 900 mm W1-1C Each
Sharp Turn L or R
605 (1) b1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-2A Each
Reverse Turn L or R
605 (1) b2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-2B Each
Reverse Turn L or R
605 (1) b3 Warning Signs 900 mm W1-2C Each
Reverse Turn L or R
Page 34
VOLUME II
605 (1) c1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-3A Each
Curve L or R
605 (1) c2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-3B Each
Curve L or R
605 (1) c3 Warning Signs 900 mm W1-3C Each
Curve L or R
605 (1) d1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-4A Each
Reverse Curve L or R
605 (1) d2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-4B Each
605 (1) d3 Warning Signs 900 mm W1-4C Each
605 (1) e1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-5A Each
Winding Road L or R
605 (1) e2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-5B Each
Winding Road L or R
605 (1) f1 Warning Signs 600 mm W1-6A Each
Hairpin Bend L or R
605 (1) f2 Warning Signs 750 mm W1-6B Each
Hairpin Bend L or R
Intersection and
605 (1) g1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-1A Junction Signs Cross Each
Road
Intersection and
605 (1) g2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-1B Junction Signs Cross Each
Road
Intersection and
605 (1) g3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-1C Junction Signs Cross Each
Road
Page 35
VOLUME II
Intersection and
605 (1) g4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-1D Junction Signs Cross Each
Road
Intersection and
Junction Signs
605 (1) h1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-2A Each
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
605 (1) h2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-2B Each
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
605 (1) h3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-2C Each
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
605 (1) h4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-2D Each
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
605 (1) i1 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-3A Junction Signs Skewed Each
Intersection
Intersection and
605 (1) i2 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-3B Junction Signs Skewed Each
Intersection
Intersection and
605 (1) i3 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-3C Junction Signs Skewed Each
Intersection
Intersection and
605 (1) j1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-4A Junction Signs T- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) j2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-4B Junction Signs T- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) j3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-4C Junction Signs T- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) j4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-4D Junction Signs T- Each
Junction
Page 36
VOLUME II
Intersection and
605 (1) k1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-5A Junction Signs Y- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) k2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-5B Junction Signs Y- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) k3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-5C Junction Signs Y- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) k4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-5D Junction Signs Y- Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) l1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-6A Junction Signs Side Each
Road Junction L or R
Intersection and
605 (1) l2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-6B Junction Signs Side Each
Intersection and
605 (1) l3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-6C Junction Signs Side Each
Intersection and
605 (1) l4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-6D Junction Signs Side Each
Intersection and
605 (1) m1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-7A Junction Signs Each
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
605 (1) m2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-7B Junction Signs Each
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
605 (1) m3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-7C Junction Signs Each
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
605 (1) n1 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-8B Junction Signs Priority Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) n2 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-8C Junction Signs Priority Each
Junction
Page 37
VOLUME II
Intersection and
605 (1) n3 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-8D Junction Signs Priority Each
Junction
Intersection and
605 (1) o1 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-9B Junction Signs Priority Each
Merging
Intersection and
605 (1) o2 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-9C Junction Signs Priority Each
Merging
Intersection and
605 (1) o3 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-9D Junction Signs Priority Each
Merging
Intersection and
605 (1) p1 Warning Signs 450 mm W2-10A Junction Signs Priority Each
Cross
Intersection and
605 (1) p2 Warning Signs 600 mm W2-10B Junction Signs Priority Each
Cross
Intersection and
605 (1) p3 Warning Signs 750 mm W2-10C Junction Signs Priority Each
Cross
Intersection and
605 (1) p4 Warning Signs 900 mm W2-10D Junction Signs Priority Each
Cross
Advance Warning of
605 (1) q1 Warning Signs 600 mm W3-1A Traffic Control Device Each
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) q2 Warning Signs 750 mm W3-1B Traffic Control Device Each
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) q3 Warning Signs 900 mm W3-1C Traffic Control Device Each
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) q4 Warning Signs 1200 mm W3-1D Traffic Control Device Each
Signs Signals Ahead
Page 38
VOLUME II
Advance Warning of
605 (1) r1 Warning Signs 450 mm W3-2A Traffic Control Device Each
Signs Stop Sign Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) r2 Warning Signs 600 mm W3-2B Traffic Control Device Each
Advance Warning of
605 (1) s1 Warning Signs 750 mm W3-2C Traffic Control Device Each
Advance Warning of
Traffic Control Device
605 (1) s2 Warning Signs 450 mm W3-3A Each
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) s3 Warning Signs 600 mm W3-3B Each
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
605 (1) s4 Warning Signs 750 mm W3-3C Each
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t1 Warning Signs 450 mm W4-1A Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t2 Warning Signs 600 mm W4-1B Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t3 Warning Signs 750 mm W4-1C Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t4 Warning Signs 450 x 700 mm W4-1PA Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t5 Warning Signs 600 x 900 mm W4-1PB Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
605 (1) t6 Warning Signs 750 x 1200 mm W4-1PC Each
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign Road
605 (1) u1 Warning Signs 450 mm W4-2A Each
Narrows
605 (1) u2 Warning Signs 600 mm W4-2B Each
Narrows
Page 39
VOLUME II

605 (1) u3 Warning Signs 750 mm W4-2C Each
Narrows
605 (1) u4 Warning Signs 450 x 700 mm W4-2PA Each
Narrows
605 (1) u5 Warning Signs 600 x 900 mm W4-2PB Each
Narrows
605 (1) u6 Warning Signs 750 x 1200 mm W4-2PC Each
Narrows
Road Width Sign
605 (1) v1 Warning Signs 450 mm W4-3A Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
605 (1) v2 Warning Signs 600 mm W4-3B Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
605 (1) v3 Warning Signs 750 mm W4-3C Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
605 (1) v4 Warning Signs 900 mm W4-3D Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
605 (1) w1 Warning Signs 450 mm W4-4A Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
605 (1) w2 Warning Signs 600 mm W4-4B Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
605 (1) w3 Warning Signs 750 mm W4-4C Each
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
605 (1) w4 Warning Signs 900 mm W4-4D Each
Divided Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) x1 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-1B Each
Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) x2 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-1C Each
Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) y1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-2A Each
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) y2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-2B Each
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) y3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-2C Each
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) y4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-2D Each
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) z1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-3A Each
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) z2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-3B Each
Hump
Page 40
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

605 (1) z3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-3C Each
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) z4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-3D Each
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) aa1 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-4B Each
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) aa2 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-4C Each
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) aa3 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-4D Each
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ab1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-5A Each
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ab2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-5B Each
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ab3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-5C Each
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ac1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-6A Each
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ac2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-6B Each
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ac3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-6C Each
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ac4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-6D Each
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ad1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-7A Each
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ad2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-7B Each
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ad3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-7C Each
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ad4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-7D Each
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ae1 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-8B Each
Falling Rocks L or R
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ae2 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-8C Each
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ae3 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-8D Each
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-9A Each
Slippery Road
Page 41
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

605 (1) af2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-9B Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-9C Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-9D Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af5 Warning Signs 450mm X 700 mm W5-9PA Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af6 Warning Signs 600mm X 900 mm W5-9PB Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) af7 Warning Signs 750mm X 1200 mm W5-9PC Each
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ag1 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-10B Each
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ag2 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-10C Each
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ag3 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-10D Each
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ah1 Warning Signs 450 mm W5-11A Each
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ah2 Warning Signs 600 mm W5-11B Each
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ah3 Warning Signs 750 mm W5-11C Each
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
605 (1) ah4 Warning Signs 900 mm W5-11D Each
Aircraft
Pedestrian and School
605 (1) ai1 Warning Signs 600mm X 600 mm W6-1B Signs Pedestrian Each
Crossing Ahead

605 (1) ai2 Warning Signs 750mm X 750 mm W6-1C Signs Pedestrian Each
Crossing Ahead
Signs Slow Down
605 (1) ai3 Warning Signs 450mm X 750 mm W6-1P Each
Pedestrian Crossing
Ahead
605 (1) aj1 Warning Signs 600mm X 600 mm W6-2B Each
Signs Children Crossing
Page 42
VOLUME II

605 (1) aj2 Warning Signs 750mm X 750 mm W6-2C Each
605 (1) ak1 Warning Signs 300mm X 450 mm W6-3 Signs Cross Only At Each
Ped Xing
605 (1) al1 Warning Signs 450mm X 450 mm W6-4A Signs Wheel Chair Each
Crossing
605 (1) al2 Warning Signs 600mm X 600 mm W6-4B Signs Wheel Chair Each
Crossing
605 (1) al3 Warning Signs 750mm X 750 mm W6-4C Signs Wheel Chair Each
Crossing
605 (1) am1 Warning Signs 400mm X 900 mm W6-5A Each
Signs Bike Lane Ahead

605 (1) am2 Warning Signs 600mm X 900 mm W6-5B Each
Railway Level Crossing

605 (1) an1 Warning Signs Railroad Cross Position W7-1 Signs Railroad Crossing Each
Position

605 (1) ao1 Warning Signs 600 mm W7-2B Signs Railway Crossing Each
without signal

605 (1) ao2 Warning Signs 750 mm W7-2C Signs Railway Crossing Each
without signal

605 (1) ao3 Warning Signs 900 mm W7-2D Signs Railway Crossing Each
without signal
Page 43
VOLUME II

605 (1) ap1 Warning Signs 600 mm W7-3B Signs Railway Crossing Each
with signal

605 (1) ap2 Warning Signs 750 mm W7-3C Signs Railway Crossing Each
with signal

605 (1) ap3 Warning Signs 900 mm W7-3D Signs Railway Crossing Each
with signal
Signs Alternative
605 (1) aq1 Warning Signs 700mm X 900 mm W7-4 Each
Railway Crossing
Position
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ar1 Warning Signs 600mm X 400 mm W8-1A Each
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ar2 Warning Signs 750mm X 500 mm W8-1B Each
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ar3 Warning Signs 900mm X 600 mm W8-1C Each
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) as1 Warning Signs 600mm X 400 mm W8-2A Each
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) as2 Warning Signs 750mm X 500 mm W8-2B Each
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) as3 Warning Signs 900mm X 600 mm W8-2C Each
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) at1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-3A Each
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) at2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-3B Each
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) at3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-3C Each
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) au1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-4A Each
Distance … km
Page 44
VOLUME II
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) au2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-4B Each
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) au3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-4C Each
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) av1 Warning Signs 600mm X 400 mm W8-5A Each
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) av2 Warning Signs 750mm X 500 mm W8-5B Each
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) av3 Warning Signs 900mm X 600 mm W8-5C Each
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) aw1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-6A Each
Blind
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) aw2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-6B Each
Blind
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) aw3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-6C Each
Blind
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ax1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-7A Each
Aged
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ax2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-7B Each
Aged
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ax3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-7C Each
Aged
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ay1 Warning Signs 600mm X 400 mm W8-8A Each
Playground
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ay2 Warning Signs 750mm X 500 mm W8-8B Each
Playground
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ay3 Warning Signs 900mm X 600 mm W8-8C Each
Playground
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) az1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-9A Each
School
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) az2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-9B Each
School
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) az3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-9C Each
School
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ba1 Warning Signs 600mm X 200 mm W8-10A Each
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ba2 Warning Signs 750mm X 250 mm W8-10B Each
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
605 (1) ba3 Warning Signs 900mm X 300 mm W8-10C Each
Disabled
Page 45
VOLUME II
Other Warning Signs

605 (1) bb1 Warning Signs 1500mm X 600 mm W9-1A Vertical Clearance; Each
CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb2 Warning Signs 1950mm X 600 mm W9-1B Vertical Clearance; Each
LOW CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb3 Warning Signs 1060mm X 600 mm W9-2A Slow Down Accident Each
Prone Area
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb4 Warning Signs 1060mm X 600 mm W9-2B Bumagal Madalas Ang Each
Aksidente Dito
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb5 Warning Signs 1060mm X 600 mm W9-3 Slow Down Merging Each
Traffic Ahead
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb6 Warning Signs 950mm X 600 mm W9-4 Each
Lane Ends - Merge Left
Other Warning Signs
605 (1) bb7 Warning Signs 1060mm X 600 mm W9-5 Slow Down Each
Weighbridge Ahead
605 (2) a1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 450 mm R1-1A Priority Signs Stop Each
605 (2) a2 Regulatory Signs 600 x 600 mm R1-1B Priority Signs Stop Each
605 (2) a3 Regulatory Signs 750 x 750 mm R1-1C Priority Signs Stop Each
605 (2) a4 Regulatory Signs 900 x 900 mm R1-1D Priority Signs Stop Each
605 (2) b1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R1-2A Priority Signs Give Way Each
605 (2) b2 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R1-2B Priority Signs Give Way Each
605 (2) b3 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R1-2C Priority Signs Give Way Each
605 (2) b4 Regulatory Signs 640 x 900 mm R1-2P Priority Signs Give Way Each
Priority Signs Left

605 (2) c1 Regulatory Signs 500 x 750 mm R1-3 Each
Turner Must Give Way
Direction Signs NO
605 (2) d1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R2-1A Each
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
Page 46
VOLUME II
Direction Signs KEEP

RIGHT; Disc Type
Direction Signs LANE
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
605 (2) d6 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R2-6A MERGING TRAFFIC; Each
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
605 (2) e1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R2-1B Each
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
605 (2) e6 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R2-6B MERGING TRAFFIC; Each
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
605 (2) f1 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R2-1C Each
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Page 47
VOLUME II
Direction Signs
605 (2) f6 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R2-6C MERGING TRAFFIC; Each
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
605 (2) g1 Regulatory Signs Disc Size 400 mm R2-1PA TURNS; Plate Type; Each
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ONE
605 (2) g2 Regulatory Signs Disc Size 400 mm R2-2PA WAY; Plate Type; 450 Each
x 750 mm
605 (2) g3 Regulatory Signs Disc Size 400 mm R2-3PA RIGHT; Plate Type; Each
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ALL
605 (2) g4 Regulatory Signs Disc Size 400 mm R2-5PA TRAFFIC; Plate Type; Each
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs
MERGING TRAFFIC;
605 (2) g5 Regulatory Signs Disc Size 400 mm R2-6PA Each
Plate Type; 450 x 750
mm
Other Directional Signs
605 (2) h1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R2-7PA Each
TWO WAY
605 (2) h2 Regulatory Signs 900 x 700 mm R2-7S SALUBONG NA Each
TRAPIKO
605 (2) h3 Regulatory Signs 450 X 750 mm R2-8A (R) RIGHT LANE MUST Each
TURN RIGHT
605 (2) h4 Regulatory Signs 450 X 750 mm R2-8A (L) LEFT LANE MUST Each
TURN LEFT
605 (2) h5 Regulatory Signs 600 X 1000 mm R2-8B (R) RIGHT LANE MUST Each
TURN RIGHT
605 (2) h6 Regulatory Signs 600 X 1000 mm R2-8B (L) LEFT LANE MUST Each
TURN LEFT
Page 48
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
605 (2) i1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-1A Restrictive Signs No Each
Entry for All Vehicles
Prohibitive or
605 (2) i2 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R3-1B Restrictive Signs No Each
Prohibitive or
605 (2) i3 Regulatory Signs 400 x 600 mm R3-1PA Restrictive Signs No Each
Prohibitive or
605 (2) i4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 900 mm R3-1PB Restrictive Signs No Each
Prohibitive or
605 (2) i5 Regulatory Signs 800 x 1200 mm R3-1PC Restrictive Signs No Each
Prohibitive or
605 (2) j1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R3-2A Restrictive Signs No Each
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Motorcycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs No
605 (2) j8 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R3-9A Each
Entry for Trucks with
Trailer
Page 49
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pedestrians
Prohibitive or
Entry for Animal Drawn
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
605 (2) k1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-2B Restrictive Signs No Each
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
605 (2) k8 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-9B Each
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Page 50
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
605 (2) l1 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R3-2C Restrictive Signs No Each
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
605 (2) l8 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R3-9C Each
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Page 51
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
605 (2) m1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 600 mm R3-10P1 Restrictive Signs Use Each
Overpass
Prohibitive or
605 (2) m2 Regulatory Signs 450 X 600 mm R3-10P2 Restrictive Signs Use Each
Pedxing
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs Bawal
605 (2) m3 Regulatory Signs 300 X 350 mm R3-10P3 Each
tumawid gamitin ang
Overpass
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) n1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-13A Each
Turning Prohibition; No
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) n2 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R3-13B Each
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) n3 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R3-13 PA Each
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) n4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R3-13 PB Each
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) o1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-14A Each
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) o2 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R3-14B Each
Left Turn
Page 52
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) o3 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R3-14 PA Each
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) o4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R3-14 PB Each
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) p1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-15A Each
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) p2 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R3-15B Each
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) p3 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R3-15 PA Each
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) p4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R3-15 PB Each
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) q1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R3-16A Each
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) q2 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R3-16B Each
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) q3 Regulatory Signs 600 x 900 mm R3-16 PA Prohibition of Each
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Page 53
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) q4 Regulatory Signs 750 x 1000 mm R3-16 PB Prohibition of Each
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Speed Signs Speed
605 (2) r1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R4-1A Each
Restriction (Maximum )
Speed Signs Speed

605 (2) r2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R4-1B Each
Speed Signs Speed

605 (2) r3 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R4-1C Each
Speed Signs Speed

605 (2) r4 Regulatory Signs 450 x 450 mm R4-2A Each
Restriction (Minimum)
Speed Signs Speed De-
605 (2) s1 Regulatory Signs 600 x 600 mm R4-2B Each
restriction Signs
605 (2) s2 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R4-2PA Each
restriction Signs
605 (2) s3 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R4-2PB Each
restriction Signs
605 (2) s4 Regulatory Signs 800 x 1334 mm R4-2PC Each
restriction Signs
Speed Signs Speed
605 (2) s5 Regulatory Signs 900 mm R4-3A Each
Restriction Signs
Parking Signs No
605 (2) t1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R5-1SA Each
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) t2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R5-1SB Each
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) u1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-1PA Parking (Pilipino Each
Worded) (Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) u2 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R5-1PC Parking (Pilipino Each
Worded) (Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) v1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-2PA Parking - Loading Only Each
(Plate)
Page 54
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
605 (2) v2 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R5-2PB Parking - Loading Only Each
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) w1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-3PA Parking - Anytime Each
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) w2 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R5-3PB Parking - Anytime Each
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) x1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-3CA Parking - Tow Away Each
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
605 (2) x2 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R5-3CB Parking - Tow Away Each
(Plate)
Parking Signs
605 (2) y1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-4 Restricted Parking; Each
Meter Parking
Parking Signs
605 (2) y2 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-4A Restricted Parking; 2 Each
Hour Parking
Parking Signs Loading
605 (2) z1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-4B Each
Signs; Loading Zone

605 (2) z2 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-4C Signs; Loading and Each
Unloading Zone
Parking Signs No
605 (2) aa1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-5 Each
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
605 (2) aa2 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-5A Each
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
605 (2) aa3 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-5B Each
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ab1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-6 Loading and Unloading Each
Signs
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ab2 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-6A Loading and Unloading Each
Signs
Page 55
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
Loading/Unloading
605 (2) ab3 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-7 Each
Within Red-Painted
Curb
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ac1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 750 mm R5-8 Each
Stopping Anytime
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ac2 Regulatory Signs 400 x 900 mm R5-9A Parking or Stopping Each
Signs; BUS Stop
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ac3 Regulatory Signs 400 x 900 mm R5-9B Parking or Stopping Each
Signs; PUJ Stop
Parking Signs No
605 (2) ac4 Regulatory Signs 400 x 900 mm R5-9C Parking or Stopping Each
Signs; Bus-PUJ Stop
Parking Signs Do Not
605 (2) ad1 Regulatory Signs 400 x 600 mm R5-10 Each
Block Intersection
Parking Signs Right
605 (2) ae1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 600 mm R5-11 Turners Cross at Each
Broken White Lines
Miscellaneous Signs
Prohibition on Use of
605 (2) af1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-1 Each
Audible Warning
Device
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ag1 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-2 Load and Dimension Each
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Page 56
VOLUME II
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ah1 Regulatory Signs 450 x 675 mm R6-7 Each
Use Seat Belt Sign
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ai1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R6-8A Each
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ai2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-8B Each
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ai3 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R6-8C Each
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) aj1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R6-9A School Children Each
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) aj2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-9B School Children Each
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) aj3 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R6-9C School Children Each
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ak1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R6-10A Each
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ak2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-10B Each
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) ak3 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R6-10C Each
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) al1 Regulatory Signs 450 mm R6-11A Wheel Chair Crossing Each
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) al2 Regulatory Signs 600 mm R6-11B Wheel Chair Crossing Each
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
605 (2) al3 Regulatory Signs 750 mm R6-11C Wheel Chair Crossing Each
Signs
Advance Direction
605 (3) a1 Guide or Information Signs G1-1 Each
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Page 57
VOLUME II
Advance Direction
605 (3) b1 Guide or Information Signs G1-4 Signs Diagrammatic Each
Direction Signs
Advance Direction
Direction Signs
Intersection Direction
605 (3) c1 Guide or Information Signs G2-1 Each
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Reassurance Direction
605 (3) d1 Guide or Information Signs G3-1 Each
Signs
Signs
Finger Board Direction
605 (3) e1 Guide or Information Signs G4-1 Each
Signs
Signs
Signs
605 (3) f1 Guide or Information Signs G5-1 Street Name Signs Each
605 (3) f2 Guide or Information Signs G5-2A Street Name Signs Each
605 (3) f3 Guide or Information Signs G5-2B Street Name Signs Each
Town Name and
605 (3) g1 Guide or Information Signs G6-1 Geographical Feature Each
Signs Town Name
Town Name and

Signs Province Name
Town Name and
Geographical Feature
605 (3) g3 Guide or Information Signs G6-3 Each
Signs Geographic
Feature
Page 58
VOLUME II
Town Name and

Signs Local
Government Boundary
Service Signs Service
605 (3) h1 Guide or Information Signs G7-1 Each
Center 2km
Service Signs
Weighbridge Station
Service Signs Parking
and Restrooms
Service Signs Gasoline
605 (3) h4 Guide or Information Signs G7-3A Station and Restaurant Each
or Cafes
Service Signs Rest Area
605 (3) h5 Guide or Information Signs G7-4 and Truck Parking Turn Each
Left 300m
Service Signs Shopping
Center
Tourist Information
605 (3) i1 Guide or Information Signs G8-1 and Tourist Destination Each
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Route Markers Route
605 (3) j1 Guide or Information Signs G9-1 Each
Number
605 (3) j2 Guide or Information Signs G9-2 Route Markers Each
605 (3) j7 Guide or Information Signs G9-7 Route Markers END Each
Page 59
VOLUME II

Asian Highway Route
605 (3) k1 Guide or Information Signs 600mm X 750 mm G10-1A Each
Markers
Asian Highway Route
605 (3) k2 Guide or Information Signs 900 mm G10-1B Each
Markers
Expressway Approach
605 (4) a1 Signs on Expressways GE1-1 Each
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway
Information Signs
605 (4) b1 Signs on Expressways GE2-1A Each
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
605 (4) b2 Signs on Expressways GE2-1B Each
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
605 (4) b3 Signs on Expressways GE2-1C Each
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs Toll
605 (4) b4 Signs on Expressways GE2-2 Each
Charges (Advance
Information)
Expressway
605 (4) b5 Signs on Expressways GE2-3 Information Signs Lane Each
Direction Signs
Advance Exit Signs
605 (4) c1 Signs on Expressways GE3-1 Advance Exit with Each
distance
Advance Exit Signs
Advance Exit with
605 (4) c2 Signs on Expressways GE3-2 Each
Distance plus RIGHT
LANE
Page 60
VOLUME II
Advance Exit Signs

605 (4) c3 Signs on Expressways GE3-3 Supplementary Each
Advance (NEXT EXIT)
Expressway Exit
605 (4) d1 Signs on Expressways GE4-1 Direction Signs Exit Each
signs with Destination
Expressway Exit
605 (4) d2 Signs on Expressways GE4-2 Direction Signs NEXT Each
EXIT…..KM
Expressway Exit
605 (4) d3 Signs on Expressways GE4-3 Each
Direction Signs EXIT
Expressway Exit
605 (4) d4 Signs on Expressways GE4-3A Direction Signs Each
Numbered exit
Expressway Service
605 (4) e1 Signs on Expressways 2800mm X 1500 mm GE5-1 Signs Rest Area Right Each
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
605 (4) e2 Signs on Expressways 2800mm X 1500 mm GE5-1A Signs Rest Area Right Each
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
605 (4) e3 Signs on Expressways 2500mm X 1100 mm GE5-2 Each
Signs Rest Area 2km
Expressway Service
Signs Rest Area
Expressway Service
605 (4) e5 Signs on Expressways 2800mm X 1500 mm GE5-4 Signs Service Center Each
2km
Expressway Service
605 (4) e6 Signs on Expressways 2240mm X 1800 mm GE5-5 Signs Truck Parking Each
2km
Expressway Service
605 (4) e7 Signs on Expressways 3240mm X 1800 mm GE5-6 Signs Restaurant Next Each
Exit
Expressway Service
exit
End of Expressway
605 (4) f1 Signs on Expressways 2300mm X 1500 mm GE6-1 Each
END EXPRWAY 1 Km
Page 61
VOLUME II
End of Expressway
605 (4) f2 Signs on Expressways 1200mm X 600 mm GE6-1A Each
END EXPRWAY 2 Km
End of Expressway
START EXPRWAY
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY
Toll Signs Toll Plaza
605 (4) g1 Signs on Expressways 2600mm X 1600 mm GE7-1 Each
Ahead
Toll Signs Stop At Toll
Gates
Toll Signs Pay Toll
Ahead
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) h1 Signs on Expressways 2300mm X 1470 mm GE8-1 Each
Regulatory Signs
Wrong Way – Go Back
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs Right
Lane Ends …..m
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Lanes Ends Merge Left
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs Lane
Ends Merge Left
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Merge Left
Page 62
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs Slow
Vehicle Use Right Lane
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs Check
Brakes
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) i1 Signs on Expressways 2600mm X 2000 mm S1-4E Each
Regulatory Signs
Reduced Speed Now
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) j1 Signs on Expressways 900 Disc R4-1C (XXX) Each
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) j2 Signs on Expressways 1200 Disc R4-1D (XXX) Each
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) k1 Signs on Expressways 900 Disc R4-3A (XX) Each
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) k2 Signs on Expressways 1200 Disc R4-3B (XX) Each
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) l1 Signs on Expressways 900 Disc R4-2C Each
Regulatory Signs
Speed De-restrictions
Page 63
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
605 (4) l2 Signs on Expressways 1200 Disc R4-2D Each
Regulatory Signs
Supplementary Signs
605 (5) a1 Traffic Instruction Signs 600mm X 300 mm S1-1 Each
USE OVERPASS
Supplementary Signs
605 (5) a2 Traffic Instruction Signs 600mm X 450 mm S1-2 USE PEDESTRIAN Each
CROSSING
Supplementary Signs
605 (5) a3 Traffic Instruction Signs 800mm X 600 mm S1-3A Each
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
605 (5) a4 Traffic Instruction Signs 1000mm X 750 mm S1-3B Each
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
CHECK BRAKES
Movement Instruction
605 (5) b1 Traffic Instruction Signs 1500mm X 750 mm S2-1 Each
Signs REDUCE SPEED
605 (5) b2 Traffic Instruction Signs 450mm X 750 mm S2-2 Signs STOP HERE ON Each
RED SIGNAL
605 (5) b3 Traffic Instruction Signs 400mm X 600 mm S2-3L Signs TURN LEFT Each
WITH CARE
605 (5) b4 Traffic Instruction Signs 750mm X 500 mm S2-3R Signs TURN RIGHT Each
ANYTIME WITH CARE
Signs DETOUR FOR
605 (5) b5 Traffic Instruction Signs 1300mm X 350 mm S2-4A Each
HIGH VEHICLES (L or
R)
Page 64
VOLUME II
Signs DETOUR FOR
605 (5) b6 Traffic Instruction Signs 1400mm X 350 mm S2-4A(L)(R) Each
HEAVY VEHICLES (L or
R)
605 (5) b7 Traffic Instruction Signs 900mm X 600 mm S2-5 Signs GIVEWAY TO Each
PEDESTRIANS
605 (5) b8 Traffic Instruction Signs 500mm X 800 mm S2-6 Signs NO RIGHT TURN Each
ON RED SIGNAL
605 (5) b9 Traffic Instruction Signs 950mm X 1100 mm S2-7 Signs SLOW VEHICLES Each
USE RIGHT LANE
Signs MABAGAL NA
605 (5) b10 Traffic Instruction Signs S2-7A Each
SASAKYAN MAMALAGI
SA KANAN
Signs TRAK AT BUS
605 (5) b11 Traffic Instruction Signs S2-7B MAMALAGI SA KANAN Each
MALUBAN KUNG
LULUSOT
605 (5) b12 Traffic Instruction Signs 600mm X 400 mm S2-8A Signs NO THROUGH Each
ROAD
605 (5) b13 Traffic Instruction Signs 900mm X 600 mm S2-8B Signs NO THROUGH Each
ROAD
Signs ROAD CLOSED
Page 65
VOLUME II
605 (5) b15 Traffic Instruction Signs 600mm X 800 mm S2-10 Signs FORM ONE Each
(TWO) LANE
605 (5) b16 Traffic Instruction Signs 2100mm X 350 mm S2-11 Signs ALT ROUTE for Each
TRUCKS and BUSES
One-Way Hazard
605 (6) a Hazard Markers 1600mm X 400 mm HM 2 Each
Markers
605 (6) b1 Hazard Markers 1800mm X 400 mm HM 3 Obstruction Marker Each
Two-Way Hazard
605 (6) c1 Hazard Markers 2000mm X 400 mm HM 4A Each
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
605 (6) c2 Hazard Markers 1200mm X 400 mm HM 4B Each
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
605 (6) c3 Hazard Markers 400mm X 1000 mm HM 5 Each
Markers
605 (6) d1 Hazard Markers 225mm X 450 mm HM 6A Width Marker (L or R) Each
605 (6) d2 Hazard Markers 450mm X 900 mm HM 6B Width Marker (L or R) Each
ITEM 606 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS

Premixed
606 (1) a1 Pavement markings White Square Meter
Reflectorized
Premixed
606 (1) a2 Pavement markings Yellow Square Meter
Reflectorized
Reflectorized
606 (1) b1 Pavement markings White Square Meter
Thermoplastic
Reflectorized
606 (1) b2 Pavement markings Yellow Square Meter
Thermoplastic
ITEM 607 – REFLECTIVE PAVEMENT STUDS

607 (1) a Reflectorized Pavement Studs Flush Type Mono-Directional Each
607 (1) b Reflectorized Pavement Studs Flush Type Bi-Directional Each
Page 66
VOLUME II
607 (2) a Reflectorized Pavement Studs Raised Profile Type Mono-Directional Each
607 (2) b Reflectorized Pavement Studs Raised Profile Type Bi-Directional Each
Internally Illuminated (Solar) Pavement Levelled
607 (3) a Mono-Directional Each
Marker/Stud Flush Type
607 (3) b Bi-Directional Each
ITEM 608 – TOPSOIL

608 (1) Furnishing and Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter
608 (2) Placing Topsoil Cubic Meter
ITEM 609 - SPRIGGING

609 (1) Sprigging 100 Square Meter
609 (2) Sprigging Square Meter
ITEM 610 – SODDING

610 (1) Sodding Square Meter
ITEM 611 – TREE PLANTING

611 (1) Trees Furnishing and Transplanting Each
611 (2) Trees Transplanting Each
ITEM 612 – REFLECTIVE THERMOPLASTIC STRIPING MATERIAL (SOLID FORM)

612(1) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Markings White Square Meter
Reflectorized Thermoplastic Pavement Markings
612(2) Square Meter
Yellow
Page 67
VOLUME II
Removal of Existing Reflectorized Thermoplastic

612(3) Square Meter
Pavement Markings
ITEM 613 - CONCRETE JOINT SEALANT (HOT-POURED ELASTIC AND COLD-APPLIED TYPES)
613 (1) Concrete Joint Sealant ( Hot-Poured Elastic Type) Kilogram
613 (2) Concrete Joint Sealant ( Cold-Applied Type) Kilogram
ITEM 614 - WATERSTOPS

614 (1) a1 Waterstop 100 mm. Meter
614 (2) Waterstop Lump sum
ITEM 618 - REFLECTORIZED THERMOPLASTIC RUMBLE STRIPS

618 (1) Reflectorized Thermoplastic Rumble Strips Square Meter
ITEM 620 – CHEVRON SIGNS

620 (1) a1 Chevron Signs 450x600mm Each
ITEM 622 – COCONET BIO-ENGINEERING SOLUTIONS

622 (1) a Coco-net CN 400 Square Meter
622 (1) b Coco-net CN 700 Square Meter
622 (1) c Coco-net CN 900 Square Meter
622 (2) a Coco-logs/Fascine CN 100 Linear Meter
622 (2) b Coco-logs/Fascine CN 200 Linear Meter
622 (2) c Coco-logs/Fascine CN 300 Linear Meter
622 (2) d Coco-logs/Fascine CN 400 Linear Meter
622 (2) e Coco-logs/Fascine CN 500 Linear Meter
Page 68
VOLUME II
622 (3) a Vegetation Grass-Cover Square Meter

622 (3) b Vegetation Vetiver Grass System Square Meter
ITEM 623 – TRAFFIC SIGNALIZATION PROJECTS

623 (1) Local Controller Footing TSC1 Unit
623 (2) a Footing TSC2 Type A (w/pedestal) Unit
623 (2) b Footing TSC3 Type A (w/o pedestal) Unit
623 (2) c Footing TSC4 Type B Unit
623 (2) d Footing TSC5 Type C Unit
623 (2) e Footing TSC5 Type D Unit
623 (3) a Handhole TSC6 Type B Unit
623 (3) b Handhole TSC7 Type A Unit
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (4) a Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC8 Linear Meter
Pavement
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (4) b Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC9 Linear Meter
Pavement
P.E. Pipe on Asphalt
623 (4) c Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC10 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (4) d Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC11 Linear Meter
Pavement
P.E. Pipe on Concrete
623 (4) e Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC12 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
623 (4) f Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC13 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (4) g Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC14 Linear Meter
Surface
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (4) h Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC15 Linear Meter
Surface
623 (5) Concrete Bollard TSC16 Unit
623 (6) Protection Cage for Local Controller TSC17 Unit
623 (7) Traffic Signal Flasher Controller TSE1 Unit
623 (8) a1 Local Controller Microprocessor type TSE2 8 Signal Group Unit
623 (9) a1 Detector Card/Board TSE5 8 Channel Unit
Page 69
VOLUME II
623 (10) a1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE7 Amber Lens Set
623 (10) a2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE8 Red Lens Set
623 (10) a3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE9 Green Lens Set
623 (10) b1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 2 Aspect TSE10 Set
623 (10) c1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE15 Amber Lens Set
623 (10) c2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE16 Red Lens Set
623 (10) c3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE17 Green Lens Set
623 (10) d1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSE18 Set
623 (11) Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSE23 Set
623 (12) Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TSE24 Set
623 (13) a1 Mounting Bracket 200mm TSE25 Set
623 (14) a1 Arrow Mask 200mm TSE27 Piece
Target Board Polycarbonate or Powder-coated
623 (15) a1 200mm 3 Aspect TSE29 Piece
Aluminum Substrate for Traffic Signal Head
Type A Mast Arm 4m
623 (16) a Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE37 Unit
outreach
Page 70
VOLUME II
623 (16) b Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE38 Type B Unit
623 (16) c Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE39 Type C Unit
623 (16) d Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE40 Type D Unit
623 (17) a1 Traffic Signal Control Cable 4 Core TSE41 Meter
623 (18) Loop Detector Cable TSE46 Meter
623 (19) Loop Feeder Cable TSE47 Meter
623 (20) Loop Sealant TSE48 Pail
623 (21) Splicing Kit TSE49 Piece
623 (22) Grounding Cable TSE50 Meter
623 (23) Electricity/Power Supply Cable TSE51 Meter
623 (24) Main Circuit Breaker TSE52 Piece
623 (25) Mounting Strap TSE53 Roll
623 (26) Mounting Buckle TSE54 Box
623 (27) Terminal Board (20P) TSE55 Piece
623 (28) Terminal Lugs TSE56 Piece
623 (29) Grounding Rod & Connector TSE57 Set
623 (30) a1 Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 2 Aspect TSI1 Set
623 (30) b1 Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSI6 Set
623 (31) Install Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSI11 Set
623 (32) Install Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TSI12 Set
Installation of Local Controller inc. Testing &
623 (33) TSI13 Unit
Commissioning
623 (34) Loop Detector Installation TSI14 Slot
Complete Installation of Local Wiring & Connection to
623 (35) TSI15 Site
Local Controller
Supply & Install Meter Base, Service Entrance & Main
623 (36) TSI16 Site
Circuit Breaker
623 (37) Customization of Local Controller TSI17 Unit
Page 71
VOLUME II
ITEM 624 - ROADWAY LIGHTING

624 (1) a1 Single Arm Post, with Street Light 8m LED 130W Each
624 (1) b1 Single Arm Post, with Street Light 8m HPS 150W-250W Each
624 (1) b2 Single Arm Post, with Street Light 9m HPS 250W Each
624(1) b4 Single Arm Post, with Street Light 12m HPS 400W Each
624 (2) a1 Double Arm Post, with Street Light 8m LED 130W Each
624 (2) b1 Double Arm Post, with Street Light 8m HPS 150W-250W Each
624 (2) b2 Double Arm Post, with Street Light 9m HPS 250W Each
624 (3) a Undercarriage Luminaire LED 75W Each
624 (3) b Undercarriage Luminaire HPS 150W Each
624 (4) Warning Light, Complete with Conduits Each
624 (5) Lighting Control Panel Each
624 (6) Main Feeder Distribution System Lump Sum
624 (7) Photoelectric Cells Each
ITEM 625 - ROAD SAFETY AND TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

200mm X 100mm X
Zinc anneal plate with
3mm thick plate with
625 (1) a1 Delineators Button type glass reflector of Each
3" dia. (75mm)
prismatic lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
G.I. plate with glass
625 (1) a2 Delineators Button type reflector of prismatic Each
3" dia. (75mm)
lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
3mm thick plate with Zinc anneal plate with
625 (1) a3 Delineators Button type Each
3" dia. (75mm) retrorflective sheeting
retroflective sheeting
Page 72
VOLUME II
200mm X 100mm X
3mm thick plate with G.I. plate with
Panel Type -
625 (1) b1 Delineators 4" X 4" Aluminum Each
Retroflective Sheeting
Panel Type -
625 (1) b2 Delineators 4" X 4" GI Each
Panel Type -
Panel Type -
Panel type (L-Shaped) -

625 (1) c1 Delineators 2"X 4" Aluminum Each

625 (1) c2 Delineators 2"X 4" GI Each
625 (2) a1 Linear Delineation System (LDS) 34"X 4" Aluminum Rib Type Each
625 (2) a2 Linear Delineation System (LDS) 34"X 4" GI Rib Type Each
1000mm (40") X
625 (3) a1 Tubular Markers Surface Mounted Collapsible Bollards Each
75mm (3") dia.
1000mm (40") X In-ground
625 (3) a2 Tubular Markers Collapsible Bollards Each
75mm (3") dia. Mounted
625 (4) a Road Safety Barrier System Semi-rigid Box-Beam Steel Each
Concrete Safety Shape

625 (4) b Road Safety Barrier System Rigid Each
(F-Shape/Jersey Type)
625 (4) c Road Safety Barrier System Rigid Concrete Single Slope Each
Jersey Type -
625 (4) d Road Safety Barrier System Plastic Each
Waterfilled
Page 73
VOLUME II
625 (4) e Road Safety Barrier System Steel Guard Fence Each
625 (5) a1 Impact Attenuator/Crash Cushion Stationary Gating - Waterfilled Each
Gating - Sand Filled
625 (5) a2 Impact Attenuator/Crash Cushion Stationary Each
Barrels
Non-gating -
625 (5) a3 Impact Attenuator/Crash Cushion Stationary Independent Each
collapsible bays
Non-gating - High
Molecular Weight/High
625 (5) a4 Impact Attenuator/Crash Cushion Stationary Density Polyethylene Each
(HMW/HDPE) side
panels
Non-gating - Shock
625 (5) a5 Impact Attenuator/Crash Cushion Stationary Absorbing Cable Each
Mechanism
Truck-Mounted-
Attenuator (TMA)
Plastic, Rubber, Temporary Bollard -
625 (6) a1 Traffic Control Devices 36'' x 3'' dia. Each
Synthetic Rubber Surface Mounted
1000 mm (40'') x 75 Plastic, Rubber, Temporary Bollard -

625 (6) a2 Traffic Control Devices Each
mm (3'') dia. Synthetic Rubber Surface Mounted
Plastic, Rubber, Reflective Striped

625 (6) a3 Traffic Control Devices 28'' high Each
Synthetic Rubber Traffic Cone

Temporary Hazard
625 (6) a5 Traffic Control Devices 1500 x 450 mm T5-4 Each
Markers
Temporary Hazard
Markers
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
625 (6) a7 Traffic Control Devices Timber Barrier Boards Each
mm - 200 mm)
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
625 (6) a8 Traffic Control Devices Plastic Barrier Boards Each
mm - 200 mm)
Lightweight Plastic
625 (6) a9 Traffic Control Devices Containment Fences Each
Units
625 (7) a1 Traffic Control Devices 100mm wide Tapes Containment Fences Meter
Page 74
VOLUME II
625 (7) a2 Traffic Control Devices 1 m high Mesh Fencing Containment Fences Meter
Expanded
625 (8) a1 Traffic Control Devices Polystyrene (EPS) Antiglare Screen Set
Foam
Double Reverse
Corrugated (DRC)
625 (8) a2 Traffic Control Devices Antiglare Screen Set
Galvanized Steel
Fabric
High Impact
625 (9) a1 Traffic Control Devices Antiglare Screen Each
Polymer
625 (9) a2 Traffic Control Devices Flashing Lamps Each
625 (10) Traffic Control Devices Concrete Temporary Curb Linear Meter
Interlocking
625 (11) a1 Traffic Control Devices Temporary Curb Each
Blocks
HMW/HDPE
Plastic
Vehicle Mounted
625 (11) a3 Traffic Control Devices Rotating Lights Each
Equipment
Flashing Arrow Vehicle Mounted
Board Equipment
625 (11) a5 Traffic Control Devices Variable Message Signs Each
625 (11) a6 Traffic Control Devices Portable Traffic Signals Each
ITEM 626 - TEMPORARY SIGNS (ROADWORKS)

626 (1) a1 Advance Warning Signs 1800 x 600 mm T1 - 1 Roadwork Ahead Each
626 (1) a2 Advance Warning Signs 1800 x 600 mm T1 - 2 Bridgework Ahead Each
626 (1) a3 Advance Warning Signs 1200 x 600 mm T1 - 3 Road Machinery Ahead Each
626 (1) a4 Advance Warning Signs 900 x 600 mm T1 - 4 Grader Ahead Each
626 (1) a5 Advance Warning Signs 900 x 600 mm T1 - 5 Workmen Ahead Each
626 (1) a6 Advance Warning Signs 1800 x 600 mm T1 - 24 Roadwork Next km Each
Roadwork On Side
626 (1) a7 Advance Warning Signs 1800 x 600 mm T1 - 25 Each
Road
626 (1) a8 Advance Warning Signs 600 x 600 mm T1 - 28 Next 2 km Each
626 (1) a9 Advance Warning Signs 1800 x 600 mm T2 - 16 End Roadwork Each
Page 75
VOLUME II
626 (2) a1 Regulatory Control Signs 450 mm diameter T7-2 Stop Hand Held Sign Each
626 (2) a2 Regulatory Control Signs 450 mm diameter T7 - 1 Slow Hand Held Sign Each
626 (2) a3 Regulatory Control Signs 900 x 600 mm T1 - 18 Prepare To Stop Each
626 (2) a4 Regulatory Control Signs 600 x 800 mm (size B) R4 - 1 (T) Speed Restriction Each
626 (2) a5 Regulatory Control Signs 600 x 400 mm (size B) R4 - 3 (T) Road Work Each
600 x 1000 mm (size
626 (2) a6 Regulatory Control Signs R4 - 2P End Speed Restriction Each
B)
626 (2) a7 Regulatory Control Signs 600 x 800 mm (size B) R4 -2 (T) De - Restriction Each
626 (3) a1 Detour Signs 1200 x 600 mm T1 - 6 Detour Ahead Each
626 (3) a2 Detour Signs 1200 x 300 mm T5 - 1 (R) Detour (Right) Each
626 (3) a3 Detour Signs 1200 x 300 mm T5 - 1 (L) Detour (Left) Each
626 (3) a4 Detour Signs 450 x 450 mm T5 - 6A Detour Marker Each
626 (3) a5 Detour Signs 900 x 600 mm G9 - 40 -2 Local Traffic Only Each
626 (3) a6 Detour Signs 1200 x 600 mm T2 - 23 End Detour Each
626 (4) a1 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 - 1 Wet Tar Each
626 (4) a2 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 - 3 Slippery Each
626 (4) a3 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 -6 Soft Edges Each
626 (4) a4 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 - 7 Rough Surface Each
626 (4) a5 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 - 9 Loose Stones Each
626 (4) a6 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 -13 Gravel Road Each
626 (4) a7 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T3 - 14 Loose Surface Each
No Lines Do Not
626 (4) a8 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 1500 x 900 mm T3 - 12 Each
Overtake Unless Safe
626 (4) a9 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 1200 x 900 mm T1 - 10 Traffic Hazard Ahead Each
626 (4) a10 Road Conditions and Hazard Signs 900 x 600 mm T2 - 25 Trucks Entering Each
Power Line Works in
Progress
626 (5) a1 Lane and Road Closure Signs 1800 x 300 mm T2 - 4 Road Closed Each
626 (5) a2 Lane and Road Closure Signs 1200 x 900 mm T2 -6 -1 Lane Status Each
626 (5) a3 Lane and Road Closure Signs 1800 x 900 mm T2 - 6 -2 Lane Status Each
Blasting Area Switch
626 (6) a1 Blasting Signs 1200 x 600 mm T4 - 2 Each
Off Radio Transmitters
626 (6) a2 Blasting Signs 1200 x 450 mm T4 - 3 End Blasting Area Each
Page 76
VOLUME II
Pedestrians Watch
626 (7) a1 Pedestrian Control Signs 900 x 600 mm T8 - 1 Each
Your Step
626 (7) a2 Pedestrian Control Signs 1200 x 300 mm T8 -2 (R) Pedestrians (Right) Each
626 (7) a3 Pedestrian Control Signs 1200 x 300 mm T8 -2 (L) Pedestrians (Left) Each
626 (7) a4 Pedestrian Control Signs 900 x 600 mm T8 - 3 Use Other Path Each
PART I - MATERIALS DETAILS

ITEM 700 – HYDRAULIC CEMENT
700 (1) Portland Cement and Masonry Cement Bag
ITEM 701 – CONSTRUCTION LIME (HYDRATED)

701 (1) Construction Lime (Hydrated) Bag
ITEM 702 – BITUMINOUS MATERIALS

702 (1) Bituminous Materials Metric Ton
ITEM 703 – AGGREGATES

703 (1) Aggregates Cubic Meter
ITEM 703A – MINERAL FILLER

703A (1) Mineral Filler Cubic Meter
ITEM 704 – MASONRY UNITS

704 (1) Masonry Units Each
ITEM 705 – JOINT MATERIALS

Page 77
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix

705 (1) Joint Materials Cubic Meter
ITEM 706 – CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND FIBER PIPE

706 (1) Concrete, Clay, Plastic and Fiber Pipe Linear Meter
ITEM 707 – METAL PIPE

707 (1) Metal Pipe Linear Meter
ITEM 708 – CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES FOR CONCRETE

708 (1) Chemical Admixtures for Concrete Liters
ITEM 709 – PAINTS

709 (1) Paints Liters
ITEM 710 – REINFORCING STEEL AND WIRE ROPE

710 (1) Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope Kilogram
ITEM 711 – FENCE AND GUARDRAIL

711 (1) Fence and Guardrail Square Meter
ITEM 712 – STRUCTURAL METAL

712 (1) Structural Metal Kilogram
Page 78
VOLUME II

713 (1) Treated and Untreated Timber Board-Foot
ITEM 714 – WATER

714 (1) Water Liter
ITEM 715 – GEOTEXTILES

715 (1) a Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) b Separation Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) c Drainage Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) d Paving Fabric Square Meter
715 (1) e Hydraulic Filter Square Meter
715 (2) Silt Fence Linear Meter
715 (3) Remaining Sediment Cubic Meter
ITEM 716 – DRILLING SLURRY

716 (1) Drilling Slurry Liter
ITEM 719 - EPOXY–RESIN–BASE BONDING SYSTEMS FOR CONCRETE

719 (1) Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete Linear Meter
*Epoxy-resin-base bonding system shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called for.
ITEM 726 – COAL TAR SURFACE TREATMENT

726 (1) Coal Tar Surface Treatment Square Meter
ITEM 727 – NON-SHRINK GROUT

Page 79
VOLUME II
727 (1) Non-Shrink Grout Kilogram

*Non-shrink grout shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called for.
ITEM 729 – PROTECTIVE COATING FOR CONCRETE

729 (1) Protective Coating for Concrete Liter
*Protective coating shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called for.
ITEM 733 – ZINC (HOT-DIP GALVANIZED) COATINGS ON IRON AND STEEL PRODUCTS
Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
733 (1) Liter
Products
*Zinc (Hot-dip galvanized) coating shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the Items where called for.
ITEM 734 – STONE MASTIC ASPHALT (SMA)

Stone Mastic Asphalt with Cellulose Fiber Surface
734 (1) 0.05 m thick Square Meter
Course, Hot-Laid
ITEM 735 - POROUS ASPHALT MIXTURE

Porous Asphalt Pavement with Polymer Modified
Bitumen
ITEM 737 – MECHANICAL COUPLERS FOR REINFORCING STEEL

* Mechanical Coupler for Reinforcing Steel shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract unit price of the items where called for.
ITEM 738 – EPOXY RESIN ADHESIVES FOR BONDING TRAFFIC MARKERS TO HARDENED PORTLAND CEMENT AND ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
* Epoxy resin adhesives for bonding traffic markers to hardened Portland cement and asphalt concrete shall not be measured and paid for separately, but the cost thereof shall be considered as included in the contract
unit price of the items where called for.
Page 80
VOLUME II
ITEM 739 - ALUMINUM CLADDING

739 (1) Aluminum Cladding Square Meter
ITEM 740 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE INJECTION AND CRACK REPAIR

740 (1) Structural Concrete Injection and Crack Repair Lump Sum
ITEM 741 – INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCKS

741 (1) Concrete Paving Blocks Square Meter
741 (2) Articulated Concrete Blocks Square Meter
Page 81
VOLUME III
PART I - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER
*Refer to Blue Book Volume II, Part A
PART II - OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
*Refer to Blue Book Volume II, Part B
PART III - CIVIL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND SANITARY/PLUMBING WORKS
DIVISION I – GENERAL
PART A - EARTHWORK
ITEM 800 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING
800 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Square Meter

801 (3) a Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction PCCP Square Meter
Page 1
VOLUME III
801 (3) b Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction ACP Square Meter
801 (3) c Removal of Actual Structures/Obstruction Sidewalk Square Meter

High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
Page 2
VOLUME III
High Density
HDPE
801 (8) Relocation of Utilities Lump Sum
801 (9) Relocation of Structures Lump Sum
801 (10) Removal of Structures and Obstruction (Offshore) Steel Kilogram
801 (11) Removal of Structures and Obstruction (Offshore) Concrete Cubic Meter


803 (1) c Structure Excavation Solid Rock Cubic Meter
803 (2) Trimming Works Square Meter
803 (3) Soil Stabilization Square Meter

From
804 (1) a Embankment roadway/structure Cubic Meter
excavation
804 (1) b Embankment From borrow Cubic Meter
Page 3
VOLUME III

804 (4) Gravel fill Cubic Meter
ITEM 805 – DREDGING

805 (1) Dredging - soils Cubic Meter
805 (2) Dredging - coral material Cubic Meter
ITEM 806 – RECLAMATION

806 (1) Reclamation Cubic Meter
ITEM 807 – SITE DEVELOPMENT

807 (1) Site Development Lump Sum
807 (2) Softscape Lump Sum

807 (3) a1 Softscape Trees Each
807 (3) a2 Softscape Shrubs Each
807 (4) Softscape Grass Square Meter
807 (5) Hardscape Lump Sum

807 (6) a1 Hardscape fountains Each
807 (6) a2 Hardscape benches Each
807 (6) a3 Hardscape gazebos Each
807 (7) Garden Soil Cubic Meter
807 (8) a1 Aquatic Plants Each
807 (8) a2 Aquatic Animals Each
807 (9) Paver Blocks Square Meter
807 (10) Curbs Linear Meter
807 (11) Column Guards Pieces
807 (12) Wheel Guards Pieces
807 (13) Fence CHB Square Meter
807 (14) Gate Lump Sum
PART B – PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORK

ITEM 900 – REINFORCED CONCRETE
Page 4
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

900 (1) a1 Structural Concrete A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) a2 Structural Concrete (Footings and Slab on Fill) A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) a3 Structural Concrete (Footing Tie Beams) A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) a4 Structural Concrete (Columns) A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) a5 Structural Concrete (Suspended Slab) A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) a6 Structural Concrete (Beams/Girders) A 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b1 Structural Concrete A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b2 Structural Concrete (Footings and Slab on Fill) A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b3 Structural Concrete (Footing Tie Beams) A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b4 Structural Concrete (Columns) A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b5 Structural Concrete (Suspended Slab) A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) b6 Structural Concrete (Beams/Girders) A 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c1 Structural Concrete A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c2 Structural Concrete (Footings and Slab on Fill) A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c3 Structural Concrete (Footing Tie Beams) A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c4 Structural Concrete (Columns) A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c5 Structural Concrete (Suspended Slab) A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (1) c6 Structural Concrete (Beams/Girders) A 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (2) a Structural Concrete B 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (2) b Structural Concrete B 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (2) c Structural Concrete B 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (3) a Structural Concrete C 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (3) b Structural Concrete C 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (3) c Structural Concrete C 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (4) a Structural Concrete P 7 days Cubic Meter
900 (4) b Structural Concrete P 14 days Cubic Meter
900 (4) c Structural Concrete P 28 days Cubic Meter
900 (5) Structural Concrete AA Cubic Meter
900 (7) Reinforced Concrete Cubic Meter
ITEM 901 – PLAIN/LEAN CONCRETE

901 (1) Lean Concrete Cubic Meter

Page 5
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

902 (1) a1 Reinforcing Steel (Deformed) Grade 40 Kilogram
902 (1) b Reinforcing Steel (Plain/Round) Kilogram
ITEM 903 – FORMWORKS AND FALSEWORKS

903 (1) Formworks and Falseworks Lump Sum
903 (2) Formworks and Falseworks Square Meter
DIVISION II – BUILDINGS
PART C – FINISHINGS AND OTHER CIVIL WORKS
ITEM 1000 – TERMITE CONTROL WORK
1000 (1) Soil Poisoning Liter
1000 (2) Wood Preservative Liter
1000 (3) Powder Termicide Kilogram
ITEM 1001 – STORM DRAINAGE AND SEWERAGE SYSTEM

(Number) (Subscript) Size Class Others
1001 (1) a1 Pipe 50 mm dia. PVC Series 600 Meter
1001 (1) b1 Pipe 150 mm dia. Concrete Meter
Page 6
VOLUME III
High Density
1001 (1) c1 Pipe 50 mm dia. Polyethylene Meter
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
(Elbow, 1/8 Bend (45
1001 (2) a1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Each
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1001 (2) b1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Each
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 7
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1001 (2) c1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Clean Out with Plug Each
1001 (2) d1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Coupling Each
1001 (2) e1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC P-trap Each
1001 (2) f1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Sanitary Tee Each
1001 (2) g1 Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Sanitary Wye Each
Page 8
VOLUME III
50mm dia. x 32mm

1001 (2) h1 Fittings PVC Sanitary Tap Tee Each
dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
1001 (2) i1 Fittings PVC Reducer-Bushing Each
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
1001 (2) j1 Fittings PVC Reducer-Coupling Each
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
1001 (2) k1 Fittings PVC Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm

dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
Page 9
VOLUME III
75mm dia. x 50mm

1001 (2) l1 Fittings PVC Reducer - Sanitary Wye Each
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
1001 (2) m1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Each
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Clean Out Plug with
1001 (2) n1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Each
Adaptor
Clean Out Plug with
Adaptor
Clean Out Plug with
Adaptor
1001 (2) o1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Coupling Each

Page 10
VOLUME III
1001 (2) p Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE P-trap Each
1001 (2) q1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Straight - Sanitary Tee Each
1001 (2) r1 Fittings 75 mm x 50mm HDPE Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
1001 (2) r2 Fittings 100mm x 50mm HDPE Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
1001 (2) r4 Fittings 150mm x 75 mm HDPE Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
Straight - Sanitary Wye
1001 (2) s1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Each
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
Page 11
VOLUME III
75mm dia. x 50mm Reducer - Sanitary Wye

1001 (2) t1 Fittings HDPE Each
dia. 45 deg.

dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
1001 (2) u1 Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE Each
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
Page 12
VOLUME III

90 deg.
1001 (2) v1 Fittings HDPE Each
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.

dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
75mm dia. x 50mm
1001 (2) w1 Fittings HDPE Reducer - Bushing Each
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
Page 13
VOLUME III
200mm dia. x 150mm

dia.
250mm dia. x 200mm
dia.
300mm dia. x 200mm
dia.
300mm dia. x 250mm
dia.
1001 (3) Concrete Gutter Meter
1001 (4) Concrete Canal Meter
1001 (5) Wrought Iron Grating Square Meter
1001 (6) a Catch Basin Each
Concrete
1001 (6) b Catch Basin CHB Each
1001 (7) a Junction Box Each

Concrete
1001 (7) b Junction Box CHB Each
1001 (8) Sewer Line Works Lump Sum
1001 (9) Storm Drainage and Downspout Lump Sum
ITEM 1002 – PLUMBING

1002 (1) a1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe 50 mm dia. Piece
1002 (2) a1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Piece
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1002 (2) b1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Piece
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 14
VOLUME III

deg.))
1002 (2) c1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Long Sweep Piece
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1002 (2) d1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Plugs Piece
1002 (2) e1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. P-Trap Piece
1002 (2) f1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Sanitary Tee Piece
50mm dia. x 40mm
1002 (2) g Fittings - Cast Iron Sanitary Tap Tee Piece
dia.
1002 (2) h1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Piece
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
1002 (2) i1 Fittings - Cast Iron Piece
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
Page 15
VOLUME III

1002 (2) j1 Fittings - Cast Iron 50 mm dia. Piece
(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
1002 (2) k1 Fittings - Cast Iron Piece
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
1002 (3) a1 Galvanized Iron Pipes 13 mm dia. Piece
1002 (4) a1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron 13 mm dia. Piece
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 16
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
1002 (4) b1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron 13 mm dia. Tee (Equal) Piece
20mm dia. x 13mm Reducer - Tee

1002 (4) c1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron Piece
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
Page 17
VOLUME III

dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
1002 (4) d1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron 13 mm dia. Socket/Coupling Piece
20mm dia. x 13mm
1002 (4) e1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron Reducer - Coupling Piece
dia.
25mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
Page 18
VOLUME III
25mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 25mm

dia.
40mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
Page 19
VOLUME III
100mm dia. x 40mm

dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
1002 (4) f1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron 13 mm dia. Union Patente Piece

1002 (4) g1 Fittings - Galvanized Iron 100 mm dia. Flanges Piece
1002 (5) a1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 13 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) b1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 20 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) c1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 25 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) d1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 32 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
Page 20
VOLUME III
1002 (5) e1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 40 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) f1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 50 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) g1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 63 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) h1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 75 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (5) i1 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes 100 mm dia. PN 10 Piece
1002 (6) a1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Piece
deg.))
deg.))

deg.))

deg.))
deg.))
Page 21
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1002 (6) b1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Piece
deg.))

deg.))

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
1002 (6) c1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Tee (Equal) Piece
Page 22
VOLUME III
1002 (6) d1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm x 13 mm dia. Female Threaded Tee Piece
1002 (6) e1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm x 13 mm dia. Female Elbow Piece
20mm dia. x 13mm

1002 (6) f1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Tee (Unequal) Piece
dia.
25mm dia. x 13mm

dia.
25mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
Page 23
VOLUME III
50mm dia. x 25mm

dia.
50mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
110 mm x 50 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 63 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 75 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 90 mm x
110 mm dia.
Female Threaded
1002 (6) g1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Piece
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Page 24
VOLUME III
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
1002 (6) h1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Male Threaded Adaptor Piece
Female Threaded
1002 (6) i1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Piece
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Page 25
VOLUME III
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
1002 (6) j1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. Male Threaded Union Piece
1002 (6) k1 Fittings - Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) 13 mm dia. End Cap Piece
1002 (7) a1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. Piece
Page 26
VOLUME III

1002 (7) b1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. Piece
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Female Threaded
1002 (7) c1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. (Elbow, 1/4 Bend Piece
(90deg.))
Female Threaded
(90deg.))
Female Threaded
(90deg.))
1002 (7) d1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. PVC Tee (Equal) Piece
Page 27
VOLUME III
1002 (7) e1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. PVC Female Threaded Tee Piece
20 mm dia. x 13 mm
1002 (7) f1 PVC Pipes (blue) PVC Tee Reducer (Unequal) Piece
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
32 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
32 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
40 mm dia x 20 mm
dia.
40 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 32 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 40 mm
dia.
20 mm dia. x 13 mm
1002 (7) g1 PVC Pipes (blue) PVC Elbow Reducer Piece
dia.
25 mm dia. x 13 mm
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
1002 (7) h1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. PVC Socket/Coupling Piece

20 mm dia. x 13 mm
1002 (7) i1 PVC Pipes (blue) PVC Reducer Piece
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
Page 28
VOLUME III
32 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
40 mm dia. x 32 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 40 mm
dia.
1002 (7) j1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. PVC Male Threaded Adaptor Piece
Female Threaded
1002 (7) k1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. Piece
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
1002 (7) l1 PVC Pipes (blue) 13 mm dia. Cap Piece
1002 (8) Plumbing Fixtures Lump Sum

1002 (9) a1 Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (9) a2 Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Flush Type Set
Water Closet, Elongated, Automatic Flush Valve,
1002 (9) a3 Sensor Type Set
Complete
1002 (9) b1 Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (9) b2 Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Flush Type Set
Water Closet, Round Front, Automatic Flush Valve,
1002 (9) b3 Sensor Type Set
Complete
1002 (10) a1 Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Push Button Type Set
1002 (10) a2 Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Lever Arm Type Set
1002 (10) a3 Urinal, Automatic Flush Valve, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (11) a1 Kitchen Sink, Complete Stainless Set
Page 29
VOLUME III
1002 (11) a2 Kitchen Sink, Complete Aluminum Set

1002 (12) Scrub Up Sink, Complete Set
1002 (13) Slop Sink, Complete Set
1002 (14) a1 Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (14) a2 Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (15) a1 Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (15) a2 Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (16) a1 Floor Drain Plates 50 mm dia. Stainless Set
1002 (16) b1 Floor Drain Plates 50 mm dia. Brass Set
1002 (17) Toilet Soap Holder Piece
1002 (18) Liquid Soap Dispenser Piece
1002 (19) Toilet Tissue Holder Piece
1002 (20) Toilet Tissue Dispenser Piece
1002 (21) Bidet Piece
1002 (22) Stainless Steel Grab Bar, 40mm dia. Linear Meter
1002 (23) Shower Head/Shower Valve Set
1002 (24) Facial Mirror Square Meter
1002 (25) Faucet Piece
1002 (26) Hose Bibb Piece
1002 (27) a1 Water Meter 13 mm dia. Piece
1002 (28) Cold Water Lines Lump Sum
1002 (29) Hot Water Lines Lump Sum
ITEM 1003 – CARPENTRY AND JOINERY WORKS

1003 (1) a1 Ceiling 4.5 mm Metal Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (1) a2 Ceiling 4.5 mm Wood Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (1) b1 Ceiling 4.5 mm Metal Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (1) b2 Ceiling 4.5 mm Wood Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (1) c1 Ceiling 6 mm Metal Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (1) c2 Ceiling 6 mm Wood Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
Page 30
VOLUME III
1003 (1) d1 Ceiling 6 mm Metal Frame Ordinary Plywood Square Meters
1003 (1) d2 Ceiling 6 mm Wood Frame Ordinary Plywood Square Meters
1003 (1) e1 Ceiling Metal Frame Gypsum Board Square Meters
1003 (1) e2 Ceiling Metal Frame Prepainted Metal Panel Square Meters
Aluminum Metal
1003 (1) e3 Ceiling Metal Frame Square Meters
Cladding
1003 (2) a1 Wall 4.5 mm Metal Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (2) a2 Wall 4.5 mm Wood Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (2) b1 Wall 6 mm Metal Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (2) b2 Wall 6 mm Wood Frame Fiber Cement Board Square Meters
1003 (2) c1 Wall 4.5 mm Metal Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (2) c2 Wall 4.5 mm Wood Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (2) d1 Wall 6 mm Metal Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (2) d2 Wall 6 mm Wood Frame Marine Plywood Square Meters
1003 (2) e1 Wall 6 mm Metal Frame Ordinary Plywood Square Meters
1003 (2) e2 Wall 6 mm Wood Frame Ordinary Plywood Square Meters
Aluminum Metal
1003 (2) f Wall Square Meters
Cladding
1003 (3) Cabinets Square Meters
1003 (4) Cabinets Piece
1003 (5) Roof Frame Wood Board Foot
1003 (6) Floor Frame Wood Board Foot
1003 (7) Flooring Wood Square Meters
1003 (8) Flooring Wood Board Foot
1003 (9) Wall Frame Wood Piece
1003 (10) Wall Frame Wood Meter
1003 (11) a1 Fascia Board 19 mm Fiber Cement Board Meter
1003 (11) a2 Fascia Board 25 mm Lumber Meter
1003 (12) Fascia Board Metal Kilogram
1003 (13) Phenolic Board Piece
1003 (14) Phenolic Board Square Meters
1003 (15) a Moulding Wood Meter
1003 (15) b Moulding Concrete Meter
1003 (16) Pressurized Laminated Wood Particles Square Meters
1003 (17) Carpentry and Joinery Works Lump Sum
1003 (18) Lawanit Square Meters
Page 31
VOLUME III
1003 (19) Wooden Post Good Lumber Board Foot

1003 (20) Coco Lumber Board Foot
Item 1004 – HARDWARE

1004 (1) a Rough Hardware Nails Kilo
1004 (1) b Rough Hardware Screws Kilo
1004 (1) c Rough Hardware Bolts Kilo
1004 (2) a Finishing Hardware Lockset Set
1004 (2) b Finishing Hardware Latches Set
1004 (2) c Finishing Hardware Bolts Set
1004 (2) d Finishing Hardware Door Closer Set
1004 (2) e Finishing Hardware Knobs Set
1004 (2) f Finishing Hardware Handles Set
1004 (2) g Finishing Hardware Hinges Set
1004 (2) h Finishing Hardware Ladder Set
1004 (2) i Finishing Hardware Grab Bar Set
1004 (4) Hardware Lump Sum
ITEM 1005 – STEEL WINDOWS

1005 (1) Residential Casement Square Meters
1005 (2) Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilator Square Meters
1005 (3) Projected Ventilator Square Meters
1005 (4) Awning Ventilator Square Meters
1005 (5) Grille Window Square Meters
1005 (6) Steel Window Lump Sum
1005 (7) Window Accessory Lump Sum
ITEM 1006 – STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

1006 (1) Hollow Steel Door Square Meter
1006 (2) Flush Door Square Meter
1006 (3) Grille Door Square Meter
1006 (4) Steel Louver Door Square Meter
1006 (5) Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door Square Meter
Page 32
VOLUME III
1006 (6) Steel Doors and Frames Lump Sum
ITEM 1007 – ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS

1007 (1) a Aluminum Glass Door Sliding Type Square Meter
1007 (1) b Aluminum Glass Door Swing Type Square Meter
1007 (2) Aluminum Glass Door Lump Sum
ITEM 1008 – ALUMINUM GLASS WINDOWS

1008 (1) a Aluminum Glass Windows Sliding Type Square Meter
1008 (1) b Aluminum Glass Windows Casement Type Square Meter
1008 (1) c Aluminum Glass Windows Awning Type Square Meter
1008 (1) d Aluminum Glass Windows Fixed Type Square Meter
1008 (2) Aluminum Glass Windows Lump Sum
ITEM 1009 – JALOUSIE WINDOWS

1009 (1) a Jalousie Windows Glass Square Meter
1009 (1) b Jalousie Windows Wood Square Meter
1009 (2) Jalousie Windows Lump Sum
ITEM 1010 – WOODEN DOORS AND WINDOWS

Jambs, Sills, Head,
1010 (1) Frames Set
Transoms and Mullions
1010 (2) a Doors Flush Square Meter
1010 (2) b Doors Wood Panel Square Meter
1010 (2) c Doors Glass Panel Square Meter
1010 (3) Window Sashes Square Meter
1010 (4) Wooden Doors and Windows Lump Sum
ITEM 1011 – ROLL-UP DOORS

Page 33
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1011 (1) a Roll-Up Door Steel Set
1011 (1) b Roll-Up Door Aluminum Set

1011 (2) Roll-Up Doors Lump Sum
ITEM 1012 – GLASS AND GLAZING

1012 (1) Float Glass 5.6mm Square Meter
1012 (2) Ordinary window & Sheet Glass 5.6mm Square Meter
1012 (3) a1 Plate Glass 8mm Square Meter
1012 (4) a1 Tempered Glass Doors 10mm Square Meter
1012 (5) a1 Tempered Glass Windows 8mm Square Meter
1012 (6) a1 Tempered Glass Walls/Barriers, etc. 6mm Square Meter
1012 (7) Glass and Glazing Lump Sum
ITEM 1013 – CORRUGATED METAL ROOFING

1013 (1) Corrugated Metal Roofing gauge 26 Square Meter
1013 (2) a Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013 (2) b Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013 (2) c Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013 (2) d Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
1013 (2) e Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013 (2) f Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter
1013 (3) Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Plain GI Sheet Piece
1013 (4) Roof Ventilators Each
ITEM 1013A – CORRUGATED ASPHALT ROOFING

Page 34
VOLUME III
1013A (1) Corrugated Asphalt Roofing gauge 26 Square Meter

1013A (2) a Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013A (2) b Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013A (2) c Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013A (2) d Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
1013A (2) e Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013A (2) f Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter
1013A (3) Roof Ventilators Each
ITEM 1014 – PREPAINTED METAL SHEETS

1014 (1) a1 Prepainted Metal Sheets below 0.427 mm Corrugated Type Short Span Square Meter
1014 (1) a2 Prepainted Metal Sheets below 0.427 mm Rib Type Short Span Square Meter
1014 (1) b1 Prepainted Metal Sheets above 0.427 mm Corrugated Type Long Span Square Meter
1014 (1) b2 Prepainted Metal Sheets above 0.427 mm Rib Type Long Span Square Meter
1014 (2) Perforated Aluminum Ceiling Panels Eaves Square Meter
ITEM 1015 – CLAY ROOF TILE

1015 (1) Clay Roof Tile Square Meter
ITEM 1016 – WATERPROOFING

1016 (1) a Waterproofing Cement-base Square Meter
1016 (1) b Waterproofing Liquid Square Meter
1016 (2) Built-up and Preformed Membrane Square Meter
ITEM 1017 – ROOF DRAINS WITH STRAINERS

1017 (1) a1 Roof Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set
Page 35
VOLUME III
1017 (2) b1 Canopy Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set

1017 (3) c1 Gutter Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set
ITEM 1018 – CERAMIC/GRANITE TILES

1018 (1) Glazed Tiles and Trims Square Meter
1018 (2) Unglazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (3) Granite Tiles Square Meter
1018 (4) Synthetic Granite Tiles Square Meter
1018 (5) a Countertop Finish Granite Square Meter
1018 (5) b Countertop Finish Cement Plaster Square Meter
1018 (5) c Countertop Finish Glazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (5) d Countertop Finish Unglazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (6) Counter Edging Linear Meter
1018 (7) Glazed Tiles Square Meter
ITEM 1019 – WOOD TILES

1019 (1) a Wood Tile Narra Square Meter
1019 (1) b Wood Tile Tanguile Square Meter
1019 (1) c Wood Tile Others Square Meter
1019 (1) d Wood Tile Laminated Square Meter
ITEM 1020 – VINYL FLOOR TILES

1020 (1) Vinyl Floor Tile Square Meter
ITEM 1021 – CEMENT FLOOR FINISH

Page 36
VOLUME III
1021 (1) a Cement Floor Finish Plain Square Meter
1021 (1) b Cement Floor Finish Colored Square Meter
1021 (1) c Cement Floor Finish with Floor Square Meter

1021 (2) Stamped Concrete Square Meter
1021 (3) a Floor Topping Plain Square Meter
1021 (3) b Floor Topping Trowelled Finish Square Meter
1021 (4) Straight to Finish Square Meter
1021 (5) Cement Broom Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1022 – STUCCO FINISH

1022 (1) Stucco Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1023 - GRANOLITHIC MARBLE WORK

1023 (1) Corridors and Stair Landings Square Meter
1023 (2) Treads and Risers, etc. Linear Meter
1023 (3) Rooms and others Square Meter
ITEM 1024 - PEA GRAVEL WASHOUT FINISH

1024 (1) Pea –Gravel Washout Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1025 – BUSH HAMMERED FINISH

1025 (1) a Hammered Finish Bush Square Meter
1025 (1) b Hammered Finish Fluted Bush Square Meter
ITEM 1026 – PEBBLE WASHOUT FINISH

1026 (1) Pebble Washout Square Meter
ITEM 1027 – CEMENT PLASTER FINISH

Page 37
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1027 (1) Cement Plaster Finish Square Meter
1027 (2) Simulated Red Bricks PN 142 Square Meter
ITEM 1028 – SYNTHETIC ADOBE

1028 (1) a Synthetic Adobe Finish Bush Hammered Square Meter
1028 (1) b Synthetic Adobe Finish Fluted Bush Hammered Square Meter
1028 (2) Synthetic Finish Piqueta Tool Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1029 – GRANATITE WASHOUT FINISH

1029 (1) Granatite Washout Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1030 – ACOUSTICAL CEILING

1030 (1) Acoustical Ceiling Panel Square Meter
ITEM 1031 – ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT

1031 (1) a Acoustical Tile Square Meter
1031 (1) b Acoustical Board Square Meter
1031 (1) c Acoustical Panel Square Meter
1031 (2) Sprayed-on acoustical material Square Meter
ITEM 1032 – PAINTING, VARNISHING AND OTHER RELATED WORKS

1032 (1) a Painting works Masonry/Concrete Square Meter
1032 (1) b Painting works Wood Square Meter
1032 (1) c Painting works Steel Square Meter
1032 (2) Varnishing Square Meter
1032 (3) Sea-mist Finish Square Meter
1032 (4) Ducco Finish Square Meter
Page 38
VOLUME III
1032 (5) Texture Finish Square Meter
ITEM 1033 – METAL DECK

1033 (1) Metal Deck Panel Linear Meter
ITEM 1034 – DAMPPROOFING

1034 (1) a Damp proofing Asphalt Square Meter
1034 (1) b Damp proofing Polyethylene Sheet Square Meter
ITEM 1035 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

1035 (1) Furring Channel Linear Meter
ITEM 1036 – POLYCARBONATE SHEETS/PANELS

1036 (1) a Polycarbonate Sheets Linear Meter
1036 (1) b Polycarbonate Panels Linear Meter
ITEM 1037 – CONCRETE ROOF TILE

1037 (1) Concrete Roof Tile Square Meter
ITEM 1038 – REFLECTIVE INSULATION

1038 (1) Reflective Insulation Square Meter
ITEM 1039 – ALUMINUM CLADDING

Page 39
VOLUME III
ITEM 1040 – METAL LATH AND ACCESSORIES

1040 (1) Metal Lath and Accessories Lump Sum
ITEM 1041 – GYPSUM BOARD

1041 (1) a Gypsum Board for Walls Square Meter
1041 (1) b Gypsum Board for Ceilings Square Meter
ITEM 1042 – STAINLESS STEEL DOOR AND FRAMES

1042 (1) Stainless Steel Door and Frames Square Meter
1042 (2) Stainless Steel Door and Frames Set
ITEM 1043 – PVC DOORS AND FRAMES

1043 (1) PVC Doors and Frames Square Meter
1043 (2) PVC Doors and Frames Set
ITEM 1044 – FOLDING DOOR/PARTITION

1044 (1) a Folding Door Wooden Square Meter
1044 (1) b Folding Door Steel/Aluminum Square Meter
1044 (1) c Folding Door Plastic Square Meter
1044 (2) a Folding Partition Wooden Square Meter
1044 (2) b Folding Partition Steel/Aluminum Square Meter
1044 (2) c Folding Partition Plastic Square Meter
ITEM 1045 – ALUMINUM PANEL

1045 (1) Perforated Ceiling Panels Square Meter
Page 40
VOLUME III
ITEM 1046 – MASONRY WORKS

1046 (1) a1 CHB Load Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel) 100 mm Square Meter
1046 (2) a1 CHB Non Load Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel) 100 mm Square Meter
1046 (3) Louver Blocks Square Meter

1047 (1) Structural Steel Lump Sum
1047 (2) a Structural Steel Trusses Kilogram
1047 (2) b Structural Steel Purlins Kilogram
1047 (3) a Metal Structure Accessories Bolts Piece
1047 (3) b Metal Structure Accessories Sagrods Piece
1047 (3) c Metal Structure Accessories Turnbuckle Piece
1047 (3) d Metal Structure Accessories Cross Bracing Piece
1047 (4) Metal Structure Accessories Cross Bracing Kilogram
1047 (5) Metal Structure Accessories Steel Plates Piece
1047 (6) Metal Structure Accessories Steel Plates Kilogram
1047 (7) a Metal Structure Accessories Bolts Kilogram
1047 (7) b Metal Structure Accessories Sagrods Kilogram
1047 (7) c Metal Structure Accessories Turnbuckle Kilogram
1047 (8) Structural Steel Roof Framing Lump Sum
1047 (9) Stainless Steel Pipe Flagpole Post Kilogram
ITEM 1048 – CARBON AND GLASS FIBER

ITEM 1048A – CARBON AND GLASS FIBER

Page 41
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

ITEM 1049 – JET GROUTING

1049 (1) a1 Jet Grouting 0.80 Meter


1051 (1) Railing Meter
1051 (5) Metal Railing Meter
ITEM 1052 – PILING

1052 (3) Steel H-Piles, furnished Meter
Page 42
VOLUME III

1052 (18) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells 400-500 mm dia. Meter
1052 (19) Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes 400-500 mm dia. Meter
Page 43
VOLUME III

Page 44
VOLUME III

1052 (25) Splicing of R.C. Piles with Epoxy Kilogram
1052 (29) Micro Piles 0.20 Meter
1052 (30) Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.20 Kilogram
ITEM 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARES

Page 45
VOLUME III
1053 (1) Steel Tubular Mouldings Meter

1053 (2) a1 Stainless Steel Railings 38 mm dia. Meter
1053 (3) a1 G.I. Pipe Railings 38 mm dia. Meter
1053 (4) Tubular Steel Handrails 150mm x 50mm Meter
1053 (5) Square Bar Railings (Solid) 19 mm Meter
Meter
1053 (6) Stair Brass Metal Nosing
ITEM 1054 – GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CONCRETE CLADDING PANELS

Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete (GFRC) Cladding
Panels
ITEM 1055 – INTERIOR CEMENTITIOUS FIREPROOFING

1055 (1) Sprayed Cementitious Fireproofing Square Meter
ITEM 1056 – ASPHALT ROOFING SHINGLES

1056 (1) Asphalt Roofing Shingles Square Meter
PART D - ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1100 – CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS
(Number) (Subscript) Diameter Class Others
1100 (1) a1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
1100 (1) a2 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 20 mm dia x 3m Length
Page 46
VOLUME III
1100 (2) a1 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
1100 (2) a2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 20 mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (3) a1 Flexible Metal Conduit 15 mm dia. x 3m Meter
1100 (3) a2 Flexible Metal Conduit 20 mm dia x 3m Meter
1100 (4) a1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
1100 (4) a2 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 20 mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (5) a1 Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 10 mm dia. x 3m Meter
1100 (5) a3 Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 20 mm dia x 3m Meter
1100 (6) a1 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 20 mm dia x 3m Meter
Page 47
VOLUME III

1100 (7) a1 Conduit Coupling 15 mm dia. RSC Piece
1100 (7) a2 Conduit Coupling 20 mm dia RSC Piece
1100 (7) b1 Conduit Coupling 15 mm dia. IMC Piece
1100 (7) b2 Conduit Coupling 20 mm dia IMC Piece
1100 (7) c1 Conduit Coupling 15 mm dia. EMT Screw Type Piece
1100 (7) c2 Conduit Coupling 20 mm dia EMT Screw Type Piece
Page 48
VOLUME III
1100 (8) a1 PVC/uPVC Coupling 20 mm dia. Piece

1100 (9) a1 Locknut & Bushing 15 mm dia. RSC Pair
1100 (9) a2 Locknut & Bushing 20 mm dia RSC Pair
1100 (9) b1 Locknut & Bushing 15 mm dia. IMC Pair
1100 (9) b2 Locknut & Bushing 20 mm dia IMC Pair
1100 (10) a1 PVC/uPVC Adapter 20 mm dia. Piece
Page 49
VOLUME III
1100 (11) a1 Conduit Elbow 15 mm dia. x 90 deg. RSC Piece
1100 (11) b1 Conduit Elbow 15 mm dia. x 90 deg. IMC Piece
Page 50
VOLUME III
1100 (11) c1 Conduit Elbow 15 mm dia. x 90 deg. EMT Piece
1100 (11) c8 Conduit Elbow 80 mm dia x 90 deg. EMT Piece
1100 (12) a1 PVC/uPVC Elbow 20 mm dia. x 90 deg. Piece
1100 (12) a3 PVC/uPVC Elbow 32 mm dia . x 90 deg. Piece
Page 51
VOLUME III
1100 (12) a7 PVC/uPVC Elbow 75 mm dia. x 90 deg Piece
1100 (12) a10 PVC/uPVC Elbow 110 mm dia x 90 deg. Piece
1100 (13) a1 Straight Connector 15 mm dia. EMT Piece

1100 (13) a2 Straight Connector 20 mm dia EMT Piece
Hot Dipped
1100 (14) a1 End Bell 15 mm dia. Piece
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
1100 (14) a2 End Bell 20 mm dia Piece
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Page 52
VOLUME III
Hot Dipped
1100 (14) a11 End Bell Piece
125 mm dia. Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
1100 (14) b1 End Bell 20 mm dia PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (14) b2 End Bell 25 mm dia. PVC/uPVC Piece

Rigid Steel, Hot
1100 (15) a1 Weatherhead Condulet 15 mm dia. Dipped Piece
Rigid Steel, Hot
1100 (15) a2 Weatherhead Condulet 20 mm dia Dipped Piece
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
1100 (16) a1 Conduit Clamp 15 mm dia Metal Piece
Page 53
VOLUME III

1100 (16) b1 Conduit Clamp 15 mm dia PVC Piece
1100 (17) a1 G.I. Wire GA #14 Kilo
1100 (17) a2 G.I. Wire GA #16 Kilo
1100 (18) PVC Solvent Cement 400 cc Can
1100 (19) a Octagonal Junction Boxes Metal Piece
1100 (19) b Octagonal Junction Boxes PVC/uPVC Piece

1100 (20) a Utility Boxes Metal Piece
1100 (20) b Utility Boxes PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (21) a Pull Box Metal Piece
1100 (21) b Pull Box PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (22) a Square Box Metal Piece
1100 (22) b Square Box PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (23) Reinforced Concrete Pedestal Pole Lot
1100 (24) Red Lead Paint 1000 cc Can
1100 (25) a Grounding Rod Copper clad 16mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (25) b Grounding Rod Copper clad 20mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (25) c Grounding Rod Copper clad 25mm dia x 3m Length
Page 54
VOLUME III
1100 (26) Apitong or Approved Equal Creosoted Wood Pole Piece

1100 (27) Anchor Rod Piece
1100 (28) Anchor Log Piece
1100 (29) Powerload Studs with Nuts Piece
1100 (30) Conduits, Boxes & Fittings Lump Sum

1100 (31) Hacksaw Blade Piece
ITEM 1101 – WIRES AND WIRING DEVICES

1.6 mm dia. Roll
1101 (1) a1 Electric Wire
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
8.0mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
14mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
22mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
30mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 55
VOLUME III
Roll
60mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
100mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
1.6 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
2.0 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia. Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia. Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
8.0mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 56
VOLUME III
Meter
14mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
22mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
30mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
60mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
100mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
1101 (3) a1 Electric Wire 1C X 4 XLPE Roll
Page 57
VOLUME III
a8 Roll
1101 (3) Electric Wire 1C X 95 XLPE
Roll
1101 (3) b1 Electric Wire 2C X 4 XLPE
1101 (3) b2 Electric Wire 2C X 6 XLPE Roll
c1 Roll
1101 (3) c2 Electric Wire 3C X 6 XLPE Roll
1101 (4) a1 Electric Wire 1C X 4 XLPE Meter
Page 58
VOLUME III
Meter
1101 (4) a7 Electric Wire 1C X 70 XLPE
Meter
1101 (4) b2 Electric Wire 2C X 6 XLPE Meter
Meter
1101 (4) c1 Electric Wire 3C X 4 XLPE
1101 (4) c2 Electric Wire 3C X 6 XLPE Meter
1101 (5) ACSR Wire/Cable Roll
1101 (6) ACSR Wire/Cable Meter
Meter
1101 (7) a1 Bare Copper Wire 2.0 mm2
1101 (7) a2 Bare Copper Wire 3.5 mm2 Meter
Page 59
VOLUME III

1101 (7) a5 Bare Copper Wire 14 mm2 Meter
1101 (8) Single Pole Wall Switch on one switch plate Set
Duplex (2 Single Pole Wall Switches on one switch Set
1101 (9)
plate)
Triplex (3 Single Pole Wall Switches on one switch Set
1101 (10)
plate)
1101 (11) Three-way Switch Set
1101 (12) Four-way Switch Set
1101 (13) Double Pole Switch Set
1101 (14) Three Pole Switch Set
1101 (15) Dimmer Switch Set
1101 (16) Master Selector Switch Set
1101 (17) Automatic Door Switch Set
1101 (18) Switch Bank Set
1101 (19) a Passive Infra-Red (Presence) Detector/Switch Surface Mounted Set
1101 (19) b Passive Infra-Red (Presence) Detector/Switch Recessed Set
Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Set
1101 (20)
Type (GT)
Set
1101 (21) Duplex Convenience Outlets/Receptacles (GT)
1101 (22) Heavy Duty Convenience Outlet/Receptacles (GT) Set
Weatherproof Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle

1101 (23) Set
(GT)
Weatherproof Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle
1101 (24) Set
(GT)
Page 60
VOLUME III
Special Purpose Outlet/Receptacle, (GT) for ACU, WH,

1101 (25) Set
etc.
Pop-up type/Floor Single Convenience
1101 (26) Set
Outlet/Receptacle (GT)
Pop-up type/Floor Duplex Convenience

1101 (27) Set
Pop-up type/Floor Triplex Convenience
1101 (28) Set
Explosion Proof type Single Convenience
1101 (29) Set
Explosion Proof type Duplex Convenience
1101 (30) Set
Single Convenience Outlet with Ground Fault Circuit
1101 (31) Set
Interrupter (GFCI)
1101 (32) Duplex Convenience Outlet with GFCI Set
1101 (33) a1 Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 8.0 mm2 Piece
1101 (33) a2 Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 14 mm2 Piece
1101 (34) PVC Tape 19 mm dia x 18 mm Roll
1101 (35) Rubber Tape/ Friction Tape 19 mm dia x 227 g Roll
1101 (36) a1 Mica Tubing 6.35mm (1/4") Meter
1101 (36) a4 Mica Tubing 25.40mm (1") Meter
1101 (37) Messenger Wire Meter
1101 (38) Guy Wire Meter
1101 (39) Vibrating Bell Set
1101 (40) Push button Set
Page 61
VOLUME III
1101 (41) Buzzer Set
1101 (42) Wires and Wiring Devices Lump Sum
ITEM 1102 – POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS

Unit Of Measure
1102 (1) a1 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (1) a2 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (1) a3 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a4 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a5 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a6 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (1) b1 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (1) b2 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (1) b3 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b4 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b5 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b6 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (2) a1 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (2) a2 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
1102 (2) a3 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a4 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a5 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a6 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (2) b1 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (2) b2 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (2) b3 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
Page 62
VOLUME III
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b4 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b5 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b6 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Free-Standing Set
4X
NEMA 1
1102 (3) a1 Safety Switch, Fusible Type Surface Type Set
Enclosure
NEMA 3R or NEMA
4X
1102 (4) a1 Safety Switch, Non-Fusible Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
NEMA 3R or
1102 (4) a2 Safety Switch, Non-Fusible Type Surface Type Set
NEMA 4X
1102 (5) a1 Fuse Cut-out Box NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (5) a2 Fuse Cut-out Box NEMA 1 Surface Type Set

NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (5) a3 Fuse Cut-out Box Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (5) a4 Fuse Cut-out Box Surface Type Set
4X
1102 (6) a1 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (6) a2 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
1102 (6) a3 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a4 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a5 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a6 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (7) b1 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (7) b2 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (7) b3 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (7) b4 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Surface Type Set
4X
Page 63
VOLUME III
Motor Control Center with Main, Branch Breakers and

1102 (8) a1 NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
Motor Starters/controllers
1102 (8) a2 NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (8) a3 NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
Motor Control Center with Main, Branch Breakers and NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (8) a4 Flushed Type Set
Motor Starters/controllers 4X
1102 (8) a5 Surface Type Set
1102 (8) a6 Free-Standing Set
1102 (9) Cupper Bus Bar NEMA I Enclosure Surface Mounted Set
1102 (10) a Pad Mounted Transformer (OISC) Free Standing Set
1102 (10) b Pole Mounted Transformer (OISC) Pole type Set
1102 (11) Dry Type Transformer Set
1102 (12) a Generator Stand-by Set
1102 (12) b Generator Continuous Set
1102 (13) b1 High Voltage Switch Gear without metering facilities Free Standing Set
1102 (14) b2 Low Voltage Switch Gear without metering facilities Free Standing Set
1102 (15) c Synchronizing Panel for Generator Free Standing Set
1102 (16) Aluminum Copper Steel Reinforce (ACSR) Meter
1102 (17) Transformer bracket Set
1102 (18) Power fuse assembly Set
1102 (19) Lightning Arrester with fuse cut-off Set
1102 (20) Creosoted pole Piece
1102 (21) Concrete pole Piece
1102 (22) Pin type insulator Piece
1102 (23) Pole top pin Piece
1102 (24) Machine bolt Piece
1102 (25) Washer Piece
1102 (26) Kilowatt Meter with base Set
1102 (27) Power Load Center, Switchgear and Panelboards Lump Sum
ITEM 1103 – LIGHTING FIXTURE

1103 (1) Lighting Fixtures Lump Sum
Page 64
VOLUME III
1103 (2) a1 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) a5 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
1103 (2) a9 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) a13 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
1103 (2) a17 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) a21 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
1103 (2) a25 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) a29 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
1103 (2) a33 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) a37 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
1103 (2) a41 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
Page 65
VOLUME III
1103 (2) a45 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Box Type Recessed/Coved Set
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b1 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b5 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b9 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 66
VOLUME III
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b13 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b17 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b21 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 67
VOLUME III
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b25 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b29 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b33 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 68
VOLUME III
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b37 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
1103 (2) b41 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts / Polycarbonate Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
1103 (2) b45 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
1103 (2) c1 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 69
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
1103 (2) c11 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 70
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
1103 (2) c21 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 71
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
1103 (2) c31 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 72
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm Surface
1103 (2) c41 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 73
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
1103 (2) c51 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 74
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
1103 (2) d1 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) d5 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 18/20watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) d9 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 26watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
Page 75
VOLUME III
1103 (2) d13 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 26watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) d17 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/HPF-NCPF Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (2) d21 Fluorescent Lighting Fixture w/Electronic Ballast 1 - 36/38/40watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
Louvre / Prismatic
1103 (3) a1 Compact Fluorescent Lighting Fixture 11watts Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
1103 (3) a8 Compact Fluorescent Lighting Fixture 11watts Recessed Set
Diffuser
Page 76
VOLUME III
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Compact Fluorescent Lamp (CFL) w/Medium Base,

1103 (4) a1 7watts Surface Mounted Set
Keyless type, Porcelain Receptacle Outlet


Page 77
VOLUME III

1103 (5) a1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) a2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) a3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts Recessed Set
1103 (5) a4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
1103 (5) b1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) b2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) b3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts Recessed Set
1103 (5) b4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
1103 (5) c1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (255mmØ (10")) 1 - 18watts Recessed Set
Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mm (6")
1103 (5) d1 7watts to 16watts Surface Mounted Set
square)
1103 (5) d2 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
square)
1103 (5) d3 7watts to 16watts Recessed Set
square)
1103 (5) d4 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
square)
1103 (6) a1 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Tube lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (6) a2 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 2 - 8watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
1103 (6) a5 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Box Type Recessed /Coved Set
Page 78
VOLUME III
w/Prismatic
1103 (6) b1 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Surface Mounted Set
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
1103 (6) b5 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Recessed /Coved Set
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 79
VOLUME III
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
1103 (6) c1 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Aluminum Louvre, Set
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 80
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 81
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 82
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
1103 (6) d1 LED Tube Lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Industrial Type Surface Mounted Set
Page 83
VOLUME III
LED Bulb w/Medium Base, Keyless Type, Porcelain

1103 (7) a1 5.5watts E27 Base Surface Mounted Set
Receptacle Outlet
1103 (7) a2 7watts E27 Base Surface Mounted Set
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
1103 (8) a1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (76.2mmØ (3")) 2watts to 4watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (100mmØ (4")) 4watts to 5.5watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (152mmØ (6")) 5.5watts to 9watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (203mmØ (8")) 9watts to 12watts Recessed Set
Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (100mm (4")
1103 (8) a5 5.5watts Recessed Set
Square)
1103 (8) a6 9watts Recessed Set
Square )
Square)
Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED Bulb (152mmØ
1103 (8) a8 5.5watts to 10watts Recessed Set
(6"))
1103 (8) a9 5.5watts to 10watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
(6"))
Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED Bulb (152mm (6")
Square)
Square)
Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED Bulb (203mm
1103 (8) a12 12watts to 18watts Recessed Set
(8"))
1103 (8) a13 12watts to 18watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
(8"))
Self contained Double Sided Exit Sign, Maintained Polycarbonate
1103 (9) a1 8watts, T5 Recessed Set
3hrs. duration w/ fluorescent lamp prismatic
Polycarbonate
Self contained Single Sided Exit Sign, Maintained 3hrs.
1103 (9) a2 8watts, T5 wall mounted Set
duration w/ fluorescent lamp
prismatic
Page 84
VOLUME III
Self contained Emergency Lighting Pack, Non-

1103 (9) a3 2 - 10watts Wall Mounted Set
Maintained 3hrs duration with Quartz Halogen Lamps
1103 (9) a4 6watts, 230volts Wall Mounted Set
Maintained 3hrs duration with 2- LED Lamps
Stainless Steel
Bracket Body and
Ribbed Surface or Pole
1103 (10) Obstruction Lighting Fixture 70w/80watts HPS-E Set
borosilicate glass Mounted
with wire retaining
harness
1103 (11) a1 High Bay Aluminum Reflector, Dome Luminaire 250w, HPS /MH Surface Mounted Set
Die-Cast Aluminum Floodlight with electrocoat paint
1103 (12) a1 250w, HPS /MH Wall Mounted Set
finish
finish
Die-Cast Aluminum Spot - Floodlight with electrocoat
gray paint finish inside and out. Enclosed, gasketed,
filtered optical with aluminum reflector and tempered
glass closure
Wall Type Luminaire (Bracket Light) with acrylic
1103 (13) polycarbonate globe diffuser complete with all Set
accessories
1103 (14) Post Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum
1103 (15) Garden Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum
1103 (16) Flood Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum
ITEM 1104 - AUXILLARY SYSTEM

1104 (1) Auxillary System Lump Sum
ITEM 1105 - NETWORK CABLING

1105 (1) a Data Cabinet Wall type Set
1105 (1) b Data Cabinet Free standing Set
1105 (2) a Distribution Frame Panel Sub Set
Page 85
VOLUME III
1105 (2) b Distribution Frame Panel Main Set

1105 (3) Terminal Block Set
1105 (4) UTP patch Panel Set
1105 (5) Fiber Management Panel Set
1105 (6) UTP CAT5 Cable Roll
1105 (8) Fiber Optic Cable Roll
1105 (9) Fiber Connector Set
1105 (10) Fiber Fusion Splicer Set
1105 (11) Patch Cord CAT5 Set
1105 (13) Fiber Patch Cord Set
1105 (14) Modular Jack Set
1105 (15) a1 Wall Plate Single Set
1105 (15) a2 Wall Plate 2 port Set
1105 (16) a1 Floor Mounted 2 port Set
1105 (17) Network Equipment Set
1105 (18) Network Cabling Lump Sum
ITEM 1106 - CCTV SYSTEM

1106 (1) CCTV System Lump Sum
1106 (2) IP - Fixed Dome Camera Set
1106 (3) IP - Pinhole Type Camera Set
1106 (4) Movable Camera Set
1106 (5) Weather Proof Camera Set
1106 (6) Data Video Recorder Set
1106 (7) Network Video Recorder Set
1106 (8) Centralized Power Supply with UPS Set
1106 (9) LCD, LED Monitor Set
1106 (10) CCTV Console Set
1106 (11) Server CCTV Unit
1106 (12) RG59 Coaxial Cable Meter
ITEM 1107 - PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

Page 86
VOLUME III
1107 (1) Public Address System Lump Sum

1107 (2) Management System Amplifier Set
1107 (3) Power Amplifier Set
1107 (4) Voice Announcement Board Set
1107 (5) Remote Microphone Set
1107 (6) Ceiling Speaker Set
1107 (7) Wall Mount Speaker Set
1107 (8) CD/DVD Player Unit
1107 (9) AM/FM Tuner Unit
1107 (10) Fabricated Rack Set
1107 (11) Booster Transformer Set
ITEM 1108 - DOOR ACCESS AND CARD READER SYSTEM

1108 (1) Door Access and Card Reader System Lump Sum
1108 (2) Security Cabinet Unit
1108 (3) Magnetic Card Piece
1108 (4) Magnetic Door Contact Set
ITEM 1109 - GROUNDING SYSTEM

1109 (1) Grounding System Lump Sum
1109 (2) Exothermic Weld Connector Piece
1109 (3) Cadweld connector Piece
1109 (4) Air Terminal Set
1109 (5) MD BCW Meter
ITEM 1110 - NURSE CALL SYSTEM

1110 (1) Nurse Call System Lump Sum
1110 (2) Area Control Unit Set
1110 (3) Nurse Call Console Set
1110 (4) Bed Station Set
1110 (5) Corridor Light Set
PART E - MECHANICAL
ITEM 1200 – AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM
Page 87
VOLUME III

1200 (1) Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) inverter type Set
1200 (2) a1 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) Set
1200 (2) a2 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) wall mounted type Set
1200 (2) a3 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) ceiling mounted Set
1200 (2) a4 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) floor standing type Set
1200 (2) a5 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) ceiling cassette type Set
1200 (2) a6 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) duct type Set
1200 (3) a1 Air Cooled Condensing Unit (ACCU) Set
1200 (3) a2 Air Cooled Condensing Unit (ACCU) Modular Type, 8HP Set
1200 (4) a1 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU Set
1200 (4) a2 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU wall mounted Set
1200 (4) a3 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU floor standing type Set
1200 (4) a4 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU ceiling mounted Set
1200 (4) a5 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU wall mounted inverter Set
1200 (4) a6 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU standing type inverter Set
ceiling mounted
inverter
1200 (5) a1 Window type airconditioning unit Set
1200 (5) a2 Window type airconditioning unit non-inverter type Set
1200 (5) a3 Window type airconditioning unit unit inverter type Set
1200 (6) Diffusers Piece
1200 (7) a1 Supply Ceiling Diffuser (SCD) 300mm x 300mm Piece
1200 (8) a1 Return Ceiling Diffuser (RCD) 300mm x 300mm Piece
1200 (9) a1 Supply Linear Diffuser (SLD) 1600mm x 100mm Piece
1200 (10) a1 Return Linear Diffuser (RLD) 1350 x 100mm Piece
Page 88
VOLUME III

1200 (11) a1 Exhaust Air Grilles (EAG) Piece
1200 (11) a2 Exhaust Air Grilles (EAG) 450mm x 300mm Piece
1200 (12) a1 Fresh Air Grille Piece
1200 (12) a2 Fresh Air Grille 150mm x 100mm Piece
1200 (13) a1 Backdraft Damper Piece
1200 (13) a2 Backdraft Damper 250mm x 250mm Piece
1200 (14) Ventilating Equipment Lump Sum
1200 (15) a Oscillating Stand Fan Set
1200 (15) b Oscillating Wall Fan Set
1200 (15) c Oscillating Ceiling Fan Set
1200 (16) Stand Fan, Industrial Type Set
1200 (17) a Propeller Wall Mounted Fan Set
1200 (17) b Propeller Ceiling Fan Set
Tube Axial Roof
1200 (17) c Propeller Set
Mounted
1200 (18) a Exhaust fan ceiling cassette Set
1200 (18) b Exhaust fan wall mounted Set
wall mounted,
1200 (18) c Exhaust fan Set
Industrial Type
1200 (18) d Exhaust Fan Tubular In Line Set
Page 89
VOLUME III
1200 (19) Supply fan, ceiling cassette Set

1200 (20) Centrifugal Cabinet in line Ducted type (CCI) Set
1200 (21) Centrifugal Backward Incline Set

1200 (22) Kitchen Hood Set
1200 (23) Induced Jet Fan Set
1200 (24) Chiller Unit
1200 (25) Chilled Water Pump Unit
1200 (26) Cooling Tower Unit
1200 (27) Cooling Tower Pump Unit
Refrigerant Copper Pipe, Refrigerant Copper Pipe
1200 (28) Linear Meter
Fittings & Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation
1200 (29) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Linear Meter
1200 (29) a2 Refrigerant Copper Pipe 6.35 mmØ type L Hard Drawn Linear Meter
1200 (30) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Fittings Piece
1200 (30) a2 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Fittings 6.35 mmØ Copper Elbow 90⁰ Piece
1200 (31) a1 Branch Joint CMY-Y302-G2 Piece
1200 (31) a3 Branch Joint CMY-Y102L-G2 Piece
1200 (31) a4 Branch Joint CMY-Y102S-G2 Piece
1200 (31) a5 Branch Joint (Header) CMY-Y108-G Piece
1200 (32) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation Linear Meter
1200 (32) a2 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation 6.35 mmØ X 3/4" thk Rubber Insulation Linear Meter
Page 90
VOLUME III
1200 (32) a11 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation 15 mmØ X 1/2" thk Rubber Insulation Linear Meter
1200 (33) Ducts and Duct Insulation Linear Meter
Rectangular Galvanized Steel Sheet Air Duct, Supply &
Return
1200 (35) a1 Duct Fabrication (GI Sheet) gauge 26 Linear Meter
1200 (36) a1 Aluminum Flexible Duct Linear Meter
1200 (36) a2 Aluminum Flexible Duct 100 mmØ Linear Meter
1200 (37) a1 Aluminum Flexible Duct Connector Piece
1200 (37) a2 Aluminum Flexible Duct Connector 100 mmØ Piece
Page 91
VOLUME III

1200 (38) Rectangular Duct Work Insulation Square Meter
25mmØ, 32 kg/m3 w/
1200 (39) Fiberglass Insulation Square Meter
aluminum foil
1200 (40) Air Conditioning and Ventilating System Lump Sum
1200 (41) a1 Freon (Gas) 23 Kilograms
1200 (41) b1 Freon (Gas) 134a Kilograms
1200 (41) b2 Freon (Gas) 134b Kilograms
1200 (41) c1 Freon (Gas) 410a Kilograms
1200 (41) c2 Freon (Gas) 410b Kilograms
1200 (42) Sand Trap Louver Square Meter
ITEM 1201 - WATER PUMPING SYSTEM

1201 (1) Water Pumping System Lump Sum
1201 (2) Centrifugal pump with control Set
1201 (3) Submersible multi-stage deepwell pump with control Set
1201 (4) Submersible sump pump with control Set
1201 (5) Submersible sewage ejector pump with control Set
1201 (6) Booster pump with control Set
1201 (7) Jet pump with control Set
1201 (8) Water tank Set
1201 (9) a Overhead Tank Stainless Set
1201 (9) b Overhead Tank Galvanized Iron Set
1201 (9) c Overhead Tank Polyethylene Set
1201 (10) a Pneumatic Stainless Set
1201 (10) b Pneumatic Galvanized Iron Set
1201 (11) Air Compressor Set
1201 (12) Valves Piece
1201 (13) a1 Gate Valve 12mm dia. Piece
1201 (13) a6 Gate Valve 50mm dia Piece
Page 92
VOLUME III
1201 (14) a1 Check Valve 12mm dia. Piece

1201 (14) a6 Check Valve 50mm dia Piece
1201 (15) a1 Foot Valve 25mm dia. Piece
1201 (15) a4 Foot Valve 50mm dia Piece
1201 (15) a7 Float Valve 25mm dia. Piece
1201 (15) a10 Float Valve 50mm dia Piece
1201 (16) Electrode Set
ITEM 1202 – AUTOMATIC WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1202 (1) Automatic Water Sprinkler System Lump Sum
Fire Pump complete with control and standard

1202 (2) Set
accessories
Jockey Pump complete with control and standard

1202 (3) Set
accessories
1202 (4) a1 Sprinkler Head, upright 20 mm dia. Piece
1202 (4) a2 Sprinkler Head, pendent 20 mm dia. Piece
1202 (4) a3 Sprinkler Head, wall 20 mm dia. Piece
1202 (5) a1 Alarm check valve 80 mm dia Piece
1202 (6) a1 Flow meter 80 mm dia Piece
1202 (7) a1 OS & Y Gate valve 175 psi 80 mm dia Piece
Page 93
VOLUME III
1202 (8) a1 Pressure gauge 25 mm dia Piece
1202 (9) a1 Pressure relief valve 23 mm dia Piece
1202 (10) a1 Floor control valve 100 mm dia Piece
1202 (11) Inspector test valve 25 mm dia Piece
1202 (12) Inspector test connector 25 mm dia Piece

1202 (13) a1 B.I. Pipes 25 mm dia. Length
1202 (14) a1 B.I. 90 elbow 25 mm dia. Piece
1202 (14) a6 B.I. 90 elbow 80 mm dia Piece
1202 (15) a1 B.I. Tee 25 mm dia. Piece
1202 (15) a6 B.I. Tee 80 mm dia Piece
1202 (16) a1 Bell Reducer 25/15 mm dia. Piece
Page 94
VOLUME III

1202 (16) a6 Bell Reducer 80/65 mm dia Piece
1202 (17) a1 Blind Flange 50 mm dia. Piece
1202 (18) a1 Slip Flange 50 mm dia. Piece
1202 (19) a1 Riser nipple 25 mm dia. Piece
1202 (20) a1 Threadolet 25 mm dia. Piece
1202 (21) a1 Pipe sleeve 65 mm dia. Piece
Fire hose valve siames 150mm dia x 2w x 65mm dia
1202 (22) 150 mm dia. Set
with cap
1202 (23) Fire hose cabinet Set
1202 (24) a1 Fire Extinguisher 10 lbs ABC with bracket Set

CO2/HCFC123 with
1202 (24) a3 Fire Extinguisher 10 lbs Set
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 with
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 wheeled
type
ITEM 1203 – ELECTRIC ELEVATOR
Page 95
VOLUME III

1203 (1) Electric Elevator Set
1203 (2) Traction or Hydraulic Machine and Car Set
Hoistway Doors, Counterweights, Guide Rails,
1203 (3) Piece
Annunciators, and Hall Position Indicators
1203 (4) Electrical Wires and Conduits Length
1203 (5) Electrical Wires and Conduits Meter
ITEM 1204 – ELECTRIC DUMBWAITER

1204 (1) Machine Set
1204 (2) Car, Door and Cable Piece
1204 (3) Electric Wires and Conduits Length
1204 (4) Electric Wires and Conduits Meter
ITEM 1205 – OXYGEN, NITROUS OXIDE, VACUUM AND FUEL GAS

Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Gas Manifold and Duplex Set
1205 (1)
Vacuum Pump
Piece
1205 (2) Humidifier, Vacuum Trap Bottle, Outlets, Valves
1205 (3) a1 Pipes and Tubings 12 mm dia. Copper Tubes Length
ITEM 1206 – HEATING SYSTEM

Boilers, Fuel Pump, Storage Tank and Fuel Day Tank
1206 (1) Set
including Foundation
1206 (2) Pipes Length
1206 (3) Valves and Fittings Piece
ITEM 1207 - BOILER

Page 96
VOLUME III
Steam Boilers, Air Compressor, Heat Exchanger & Fuel

1207 (1) Set
Pump
1207 (2) Pipes with Insulation Length
ITEM 1208 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1208 (1) Fire Alarm System Lump Sum
1208 (2) Smoke Detector with base Set
1208 (3) Heat Detector with base Set
1208 (4) Fire Alarm Bell Set
1208 (5) Fire Alarm Control Panel Set
1208 (6) Manual Pull Station Switch Set
1208 (7) Back-up Battery Pack Set
1208 (8) Automatic Voltage Regulator Set
1208 (9) Extended Power Supply Set
1208 (10) Loop Expander Module Set
1208 (11) Loop Control Module Set
1208 (12) Annunciator Addressable Module Set
DIVISION III – PORTS AND HARBORS

PART F – PILING
ITEM 1300 – PILING TO INCLUDE SHEET PILING
1300 (1) a1 Timber Pile Untreated Supply Linear Meter
1300 (1) a2 Timber Pile Untreated Drive Linear Meter
1300 (1) a3 Timber Pile Untreated Splice Linear Meter
1300 (1) b1 Timber Pile Treated Supply Linear Meter
1300 (1) b2 Timber Pile Treated Drive Linear Meter
1300 (1) b3 Timber Pile Treated Splice Linear Meter
1300 (2) a1 Steel Pile Supply Linear Meter
1300 (2) a2 Steel Pile Drive Linear Meter
1300 (2) a3 Steel Pile Splice Linear Meter
1300 (2) b1 Steel Pile Tubular Supply Linear Meter
1300 (2) b2 Steel Pile Tubular Drive Linear Meter
1300 (2) b3 Steel Pile Tubular Splice Linear Meter
1300 (3) a1 Concrete Piles Supply Linear Meter
Page 97
VOLUME III
1300 (3) a2 Concrete Piles Drive Linear Meter

1300 (3) a3 Concrete Piles Splice Linear Meter
1300 (3) b1 Concrete Piles Prestressed Supply Linear Meter
1300 (3) b2 Concrete Piles Prestressed Drive Linear Meter
1300 (3) b3 Concrete Piles Prestressed Splice Linear Meter
ITEM 1301 –TEST PILE

1301 (1) a Timber Untreated Linear Meter
1301 (1) b Timber Treated Linear Meter
1301 (2) a Test Pile Steel Linear Meter
1301 (2) b Test Pile Concrete Linear Meter
1301 (2) c Test Pile Tubular Linear Meter
PART G – PROTECTIVE WORKS AND ACCESSORIES

ITEM 1400 – MOORING FIXTURES
1400 (1) Cleat with Accessories Set
1400 (2) Post with Accessories Set
1400 (3) Bitt with Accessories Set
1400 (4) Bollard with Accessories Set

1400 (5) Cleat Replacement Each
1400 (6) Post Replacement Each
1400 (7) Bitt Replacement Each
1400 (8) Bollard Replacement Each
ITEM 1401 – TIMBER WALING

1401 (1) Timber Waling Linear Meter
ITEM 1402 – FENDER CLUSTERS AND DOLPHINS

1402 (1) a Pile Cluster 3 Set
1402 (1) b Pile Cluster 4 Set
1402 (1) c Pile Cluster 5 Set
Page 98
VOLUME III
1402 (1) d Pile Cluster 7 Set

1402 (1) e Pile Cluster 9 Set
1402 (1) f Pile Cluster 12 Set
1402 (2) Concrete Dolphin Set
1402 (3) Tubular Steel Dolphin Set
ITEM 1403– RUBBER DOCK FENDERS

1403 (1) Installation of Rubber Dock Fenders Set
ITEM 1404– FILTER FABRIC

1404 (1) Filter Material Square Meter
ITEM 1405 – REINFORCING MAT

1405 (1) Reinforcing Materials Square Meter
ITEM 1406 – DEFLECTOR WALL, BULKHEAD CURBS, AND STAIR LANDING

1406 (1) Deflector Wall Linear Meter
1406 (2) Bulkhead Curbs Linear Meter
1406 (3) Stair Landing Linear Meter
ITEM 1407 – PRECAST BREAKWATER STRUCTURE

1407 (1) Tetrapad Piece
1407 (2) Tetrapad Cubic Meter
1407 (3) Hexapad Piece
1407 (4) Hexapad Cubic Meter
PART H – BULKHEADS
ITEM 1500 – SAND MATTRESS
Page 99
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1500 (1) Sand Mattress Cubic Meter
ITEM 1501 – ROCKWORKS

1501 (1) Rock Works Class I Rock Tonne
1501 (2) Rock Works Class II Rock Tonne
1501 (3) Rock Works Class III Rock Tonne
ITEM 1502 – FILTER MATERIALS

ITEM 1503 – EXCAVATION FOR BULKHEADS AND RECLAMATION

1503 (1) Excavation for Bulkheads and Reclamation Cubic Meter
DIVISION IV – FLOOD CONTROL, DRAINAGE AND WATER SUPPLY

PART I – WATER SUPPLY
ITEM 1600 - EXCAVATION
1600 (1) Excavation Beneath Proposed Structures Cubic Meter
1600 (2) Pipeline Trench Excavation Cubic Meter
1600 (3) Dewatering Lump Sum
ITEM 1601 – BACKFILL AND FILL

1601 (1) Fill and Backfill Cubic Meter
ITEM 1602 – INSTALLATION OF PIPELINE

1602 (1) Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe Lump Sum
Page 100
VOLUME III
1602 (2) Cast Iron Water Pipe Lump Sum

1602 (3) Asbestos-Cement Water Pipe Lump Sum
1602 (4) PVC Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe Lump Sum
1602 (5) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe Lump Sum
ITEM 1603 – INSTALLATION OF VALVES

1603 (1) Valve Lump Sum
Part J – FLOOD CONTROL AND DRAINAGE

Part I-A – EARTHWORK
1700 (3) a1 Individual Removal of Trees 150-300 mm dia. Small Each

ITEM 1701 – CHANNEL EXCAVATION

1701 (3) Surplus Rock Cubic Meter

Page 101
VOLUME III

1702 (5) a Shoring, cribbing and drain excavation Shoring Lump Sum
1702 (5) b Shoring, cribbing and drain excavation Lump Sum
g

1703 (1) Dredging-soils Cubic Meter
ITEM 1704– EMBANKMENT

1704 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter
ITEM 1705 - FILL AND BACKFILL

1705 (2) Backfill Sand Cubic Meter
ITEM 1706 – HAULING AND DISPOSAL/OVERHAUL

1706 (1) Overhaul Cubic Meter-Kilometer
1706 (2) Overhaul of Borrow Case 1 Cubic Meter-Kilometer


Page 102
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix


PART I-B – BANK AND SLOPE PROTECTION WORKS

ITEM 1710 – RIPRAP AND GROUTED RIPRAP
1710 (1) a Riprap Class A Cubic Meter
1710 (1) b Riprap Class B Cubic Meter
1710 (1) c Riprap Class C Cubic Meter
1710 (1) d Riprap Class D Cubic Meter
1710 (2) a Grouted Riprap Class A Cubic Meter
1710 (2) b Grouted Riprap Class B Cubic Meter
1710 (2) c Grouted Riprap Class C Cubic Meter
1710 (2) d Grouted Riprap Class D Cubic Meter


1712 (1) Bed Course Granular Material Cubic meter in-place
1712 (2) Concrete Slope Protection Cubic meter in-place

Page 103
VOLUME III

ITEM 1715 – FILTER FABRIC


Page 104
VOLUME III

1716 (24) a1 Permanent Casing 0.80 Meter

1716 (29) a Painting Works Concrete Structures Square Meter
1716 (29) b Painting Works Steel Structures Square Meter
ITEM 1717 – SHEET PILES

1717 (1) Sheet Piles Timber Meter
1717 (2) a1 Sheet Piles Steel Slope Protection Meter
1717 (2) a2 Sheet Piles Steel Cofferdamming Meter
1717 (3) a1 Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished Meter
1717 (3) a2 Sheet Piles Concrete Driven Meter
Page 105
VOLUME III
1717 (3) a3 Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished and Driven Meter

1717 (4) a1 Furnishing of Steel Sheet Pile U-Type Grade 40 Kilogram
1717 (4) b Furnishing of Steel Sheet Pile Z-Type Grade 50 Kilogram
1717 (4) c Furnishing of Steel Sheet Pile Hat Type Grade 50 Kilogram
1717 (4) d Furnishing of Steel Sheet Pile Pipe Type Grade 50 Kilogram
1717 (5) a1 Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile U-Type Grade 40 Meter
1717 (5) a Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Z-Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) b Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Hat Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) c Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Pipe Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (6) Steel Sheet Pile Flexible Joint Type 2 Meter
1717 (7) End Connection Type 1 Piece
PART I-C – DRAINAGE WORKS

ITEM 1718 – PILE CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS
1718 (1) Pipe Culverts Linear Meter
ITEM 1719 – UNDERDRAINS

1719 (1) Underdrain Linear Meter

Page 106
VOLUME III

ITEM 1721 – CLEANING AND RECONDITIONING EXISTING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

1721 (1) Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter

pipe
1721 (3) Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
ITEM 1722 – FENCE AND RAILINGS

1722 (1) a Fence CHB Square Meter
1722 (1) b Fence Precast Square Meter
1722 (1) c Fence Cyclone/Welded Wire Square Meter
1722 (2) Fence Precast Plant Box Linear Meter
Page 107
VOLUME III
1722 (3) Railings Linear Meter
ITEM 1723 – DREDGING WORKS

1723 (1) Dredging Works Cubic Meter
1723 (2) a Disposal of dredged material Type A Cubic Meter
1723 (2) b Disposal of dredged material Type B Cubic Meter
1723 (2) c Disposal of dredged material Type C Cubic Meter
ITEM 1724 – MAIN PUMPING STATION

1724 (1) a Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (1) b Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (1) c Horizontal Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (2) a Suction Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt & Nuts 6 -10mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
Discharge Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt &

1724 (2) b 6 -10mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
Nuts
1724 (3) Flapper Valve 12mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
1724 (4) Butterfly Valve 12mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
1724 (5) a Water Elevation Indicator Meter Stick Set
1724 (5) b Water Elevation Indicator Electronic Sensor Set

1724 (6) Bulk Fuel Storage Tank 20,000 ltrs. Set
1724 (7) Fuel Day Tank 1500 ltrs. Set
1724 (8) Fuel Transfer pump 0.187-0.75kW Set
1724 (9) Overhead Water Tank with Pump stainless 2-5cu.meter Set
1724 (10) Water supply Centrifugal pump 0.75 - 2.24kW Set
1724 (11) Portable submersible pump 0.75 -3.73kW Set
ITEM 1725 – INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION

1.0 m3/s cap and
1725 (1) a Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
Page 108
VOLUME III
1.0 m3/s cap and

1725 (1) b Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
1725 (2) a Suction Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt & Nuts 10mmt 700mmØbelow Meter

1725 (2) b 10mmt 700mmØ below Meter
Nuts
1725 (3) Flapper Valve 12mmt carbon steel 700mmØ below Set
1725 (4) Fuel transfer Pump 0.187-0.75kW Set
1725 (5) Fuel Storage Tank 5,000 ltrs. Set
1725 (7) Steel Grating Stainless steel Set
1725 (8) Meter Stick Set
(0.5 ton capacity chain
1725 (9) a1 Gantry Crane Set
hoist with trolley)
(1 ton capacity chain
hoist with trolley)
(1.5 tons capacity
chain hoist with trolley)
(2 tons capacity chain

hoist with trolley)
(2.5 tons capacity

ITEM 1726 – ELECTRO MECHANICAL FOR PUMPING STATION

1726 (1) Motor Control Center (for main pumps and facilities) Lump Sum
1726 (2) Generator Set KvA Lump Sum
1726 (3) Local Panel Control center (for Auxiliary Equipment) Lump Sum
ITEM 1727 - AUXILIARY AND FACILITY EQUIPMENT

1727 (1) Hoist Crane tons Set
Page 109
M7. /J..~jJe.J1I
Republic of the Philippines OJ- - ¥_ .J.f)1?
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Manila
'22 FEe 2017
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Revised Guidelines on the

Installation of Project Billboards
NO.
21 )
~
Series of 201<t3~'l'.'1'1. f7 )
For the information and guidance of the public about the on-going projects being
undertaken by the Department, the following guidelines shall be observed by all concerned
implementing offices in the preparation and installation of project billboards:
1. The new billboard design layout, dimension and letter sizes on white background, as
shown on the attached drawing, shall be depicted on a standard billboard measuring
1220mm x 2440mm (4ft. x 8ft.) using 12.S0mm (1/2 inch) thick marine plywood or
tarpaulin of the same size posted on Smm (3/16 inc'i) marine plywood.
2. All existing billboards of on-going projects shall be replaced with new one adopting
the above guidelines.
3. For each building project, the billboard shall be installed in front of the project site.
4. For each road/bridge/flood control project, two billboards shall be installed, one at
the beginning and one at the end of the project.
S. For road projects with length of 10 kilometers or more, additional billboard shall also
be installed at every S-kilometer interval.
6. Name(s) and/or picture(s) of any personages should not appear in the billboard.
7. No other billboards shall be allowed to be installed 100 meters before and 100
meters after all DPWH projects and in-between the project limits or within the road
right-of-way.
8. DPWH contractors shall not be allowed to place names of politicians or carry political
billboard on their equipment.
This order supersedes Department Order No. 141, Series of 2016, and shall take effect
immediately.
~~--
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
5.1.3 cbdjDLBjDBP
Departrrent of Public Works and Highways

Office of the Secretary
1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7R01389
~
CONSTRUCTION OF (Name of Project and Location)
Sl CONTRACfOR
lilor:=
lil DATE STARTED
or:= CONTRACf COMPLETION DATE
lilor:=
lil CONTRACf COST :
EE lilor:= IMPLEMENTING OFFICE / CONTACf No. :
a
N
Sl SOURCES OF FUND
N
~ ~
DEPARTMENT OF
PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
TEXT 2920 or call (02)165-02 for any concern on this project
www.dpwh.gov.ph
t
320
2440mm
DPWH STANDARD PROJECT BILLBOARD

MANUAL ON STREAMFLOW
Technical Services for Support to the National
Hydrologic Data Collection Program –
Digitization of Streamflow Data
OCTOBER 2016
This publication was produced for review by the United States Agency
for International Development. It was prepared by Royal Haskoning DHV with Woodfields
Consultants, Inc.
MANUAL ON STREAMFLOW
Technical Services for Support to the National
Hydrologic Data Collection Program –
Digitization of Streamflow Data
Submitted to:
USAID Philippines
Prepared by:
Royal Haskoning DHV with Woodfields Consultants, Inc.
Report No. 24
DISCLAIMER:
The authors’ views expressed in this document do not necessarily reflect the views of the United
States Agency for International Development or the United States Government.
BE4302 Digitization of Streamflow Data i

Document title: ................ Technical Services for Support to the National Hydrologic Data Collection
Program – Digitization of Streamflow Data
Status: ................................ Manual on Streamflow - Final
Date:................................... 25 October 2016
Project name: ................... Technical Services for Digitization of Streamflow Data
Project number: ............... BE4302
Client: ................................ AECOM International Development
Client contact: .................. Ariel Lapus, Shiela Dela Torre
Reference: ................................ BE4302/R0013/WdH/Phil

Drafted by: ....................... Adorable Jacinto, Joseph Ocampo, Mariane Pajarillo
Checked by:....................... Mary Labitan
Date / initials check: ......... 24 October 2016
Approved by:..................... Wouter de Hamer
Date / initials approval:.... 25 October 2016
BE4302 Digitization of Streamflow Data ii

CONTENTS
1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 5
1.1 Purpose and Scope ........................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Streamflow Records ...................................................................................................... 5
1.3 General Stream Gaging Procedures .......................................................................... 5
1.4 International Standards in Stream Gaging ................................................................ 6
2. Surface water Data and Information ................................................................................. 8
2.1 Definition......................................................................................................................... 8
2.2 Gage height, stage and elevation ................................................................................ 8
2.3 Stream Velocity ............................................................................................................. 8
2.3.1 Discharge Information .................................................................................................. 8
2.3.2 Unit value ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.3.3 Daily values ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.4 Units of measurement .................................................................................................. 9
3. Selection Of Gaging Station Sites .................................................................................... 10
3.1 Considerations in specific site selection ................................................................... 10
4. Gaging Station Controls..................................................................................................... 12
4.1 Types of Controls ........................................................................................................ 12
4.2 Section control ............................................................................................................. 12
4.2.1 Channel control ........................................................................................................... 12
4.2.2 Permanent Controls ................................................................................................... 12
4.2.3 Shifting Controls .......................................................................................................... 12
4.3 Attributes of a satisfactory control ........................................................................... 13
5. Stream Gaging Station Structures ................................................................................... 14
5.1 The Staff Gage.............................................................................................................. 14
5.2 Datum of Gage ............................................................................................................. 15
5.3 The Local Observer (Gage Keeper) ......................................................................... 15
6. Collection of Streamflow Data ......................................................................................... 17
6.1 Measurement of Gage Height ................................................................................... 17
6.1.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 17
6.1.2 Basic requirements for collecting gage height data ............................................... 17
6.1.3 Factors affecting the accuracy of the Gage Height Record .................................. 17
BE4302 Digitization of Streamflow Data 1

6.1.4 Non-recording gages (Staff gage).............................................................................. 18
6.1.5 Stage accuracy requirements .................................................................................... 18
6.1.6 Sources of stage measurement errors ..................................................................... 18
6.1.6.1 Datum errors ........................................................................................................ 18
6.1.6.2 Gage reading errors............................................................................................. 18
6.1.6.3 Verification errors................................................................................................ 19
6.1.7 Field Procedure ............................................................................................................ 19
6.1.7.1 Field Notes ............................................................................................................ 19
6.1.7.2 Data Storage ......................................................................................................... 19
6.1.7.3 Data Transmission ............................................................................................... 19
6.2 Measurement of Discharge ........................................................................................ 20
6.2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 20
6.2.2 Instrument and Equipment ........................................................................................ 21
6.2.2.1 Current Meters..................................................................................................... 21
6.2.2.2 Sounding and Suspension Equipment ............................................................... 26
6.2.2.3 Width Measuring Equipment ............................................................................. 27
6.2.2.4 Equipment for Measurement from Bridge ...................................................... 27
6.2.2.5 Equipment for Measurements from Boat ........................................................ 28
6.2.2.6 Miscellaneous Equipment ................................................................................... 29
6.2.3 The Current Meter Measurement Site .................................................................... 30
6.2.4 The Current Meter Measurement Procedures....................................................... 31
6.2.4.1 Measurement of Width ....................................................................................... 31
6.2.4.2 Spacing of the Measuring Verticals ................................................................... 31
6.2.4.3 Measurement of Depth ....................................................................................... 32
6.2.4.4 Measurement of Velocity .................................................................................... 32
6.2.4.5 Performing the Current Meter Measurement ................................................ 33
6.2.5 Computation of Current Meter Measurement ....................................................... 37
6.2.5.1 The Arithmetic Mid-section Method ................................................................ 37
6.2.5.2 The Arithmetic Mean-section Method ............................................................. 41
6.2.6 Accuracy of Current Meter Measurements ............................................................ 41
6.2.6.1 Qualitative Evaluation ......................................................................................... 41
6.2.7 Uncertainties in Discharge Measurements ............................................................. 42
6.2.8 Measurement of Discharge by Float Method .......................................................... 43

6.2.9 Quality Assurance and Quality Control ................................................................... 44
6.2.10 Safety Requirements ................................................................................................... 45
6.2.11 Field Procedures .......................................................................................................... 45
7. Computation of Discharge using Simple Stage-Discharge Relation ........................... 49
7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 49
7.2 The Stage-Discharge Relation ................................................................................... 49
7.2.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 49
7.2.2 The Stage-Discharge Control .................................................................................... 50
7.2.3 The Point of Zero Flow............................................................................................... 50
7.2.4 Complexities of Stage Discharge Relations ............................................................. 51
7.3 Establishment of Discharge Rating Curve ............................................................... 51
7.3.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 51
7.3.2 Simple Stage-Discharge Relations ............................................................................ 51
7.3.2.1 List of Discharge Measurements ....................................................................... 51
7.3.2.2 Graphical Plot of Discharge Measurements .................................................... 52
7.3.3 Procedures for Establishing the Discharge Rating Curve ..................................... 61
7.3.4 Rating Tables ................................................................................................................ 62
7.3.4.1 Rating Table Smoothness analysis .................................................................... 62
7.3.4.2 Verification of the Rating Curve ........................................................................ 62
7.3.5 Extrapolation of Rating Curves ................................................................................. 63
7.3.5.1 General .................................................................................................................. 63
7.3.5.2 The Stage-Velocity-Area Method ...................................................................... 63
7.3.5.3 The Manning Formula Method .......................................................................... 63
7.3.6 Shifting Control............................................................................................................ 65
7.3.6.1 General .................................................................................................................. 65
7.3.6.2 The Stout Method ................................................................................................ 65
7.3.6.3 The Stout Method when control is shifting ..................................................... 66
7.3.6.4 Computation of Shifts for stage-discharge ratings ......................................... 66
8. Primary computations........................................................................................................ 68
8.1 Daily value computations ........................................................................................... 68
8.1.1 Daily Mean Values........................................................................................................ 68
8.1.1.1 Daily Minimum and Maximum Values .............................................................. 68
8.1.1.2 Summary of primary computations.................................................................. 68

8.1.1.3 Daily values ........................................................................................................... 68
8.2 Hydrograph plots ......................................................................................................... 68
8.3 Computation of Extremes ......................................................................................... 69
8.3.1 Annual peak stage and discharge .............................................................................. 69
8.3.2 Annual minimum discharge ....................................................................................... 69
8.4 Estimating missing records ........................................................................................ 69
8.4.1 Simple Interpolation ................................................................................................... 69
8.4.2 Drainage Area Weighting .......................................................................................... 70
8.4.3 Regression method ...................................................................................................... 70
8.5 Monthly and annual value computations ................................................................. 70
8.5.1 Monthly and annual values of stage .......................................................................... 71
8.5.2 Monthly and annual values of discharge ................................................................... 71
9. Review, Approval, and Finalization of Records .............................................................. 72
10. Archiving ............................................................................................................................... 73
11. Application of Streamflow Data ....................................................................................... 74
11.1 Flood Frequency Analysis ........................................................................................... 74
11.2 Flow Duration Analysis ............................................................................................... 75
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................ 77
Reference Citations .................................................................................................................... 79
Acknowledgement ...................................................................................................................... 81

1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose and Scope
The purpose of this manual is to provide a comprehensive description of standardized stream gaging
procedures within the scope of streamflow data collection and processing of such data for the
determination of stage-discharge relation. This manual was prepared by adopting several
international standards in stream gaging which are already being implemented in different countries
around the world and are considered appropriate for use in the Philippines as well. The list of the
international standards is presented in the succeeding section. These standards have been used
extensively in the preparation of this manual; hence citations of sources are made accordingly.
The procedures discussed in this manual includes: (a) Establishing streamflow stations, (b) Operation
and maintenance of these stations to collect basic streamflow data, and (c) Processing, compiling and
presenting the collected data. It should be mentioned that procedures on field measurements are
limited to the equipment’s that are currently being used by Department of Public Works and
Highways (DPWH) and the associated observational techniques only. This manual will require
updating in the future when the use of new and modern equipment is implemented to include the
standardized procedures associated with the new technologies for streamflow gaging.
This manual is intended for use as a training guide and reference text, primarily for the
Hydrographers of DPWH Regional Offices and Engineers at the Bureau of Design (BOD) or other
stream-gaging practitioners.
1.2 Streamflow Records

Streamflow serves man in many ways. It supplies water for domestic, commercial, and industrial use;
irrigation water for crops; dilution and transport for removal of wastes; energy for hydroelectric
power generation; transport channels for commerce; and a medium for recreation. Records of
streamflow are the basic data used in developing reliable surface water supplies because the records
provide information on the availability of streamflow and its variability in time and space. The
records are therefore used in the planning and design of surface-water related projects, and they are
also used in the management or operation of such projects after the projects have been built or
activated.
Occurrence of excess stream flow can create floods causing extensive damage and hazard to life.
Records of flood events obtained at gaging stations serve as the basis for the design of bridges,
culverts, dams, and flood-control reservoirs, and for flood-plain delineation and flood-warning
systems.
1.3 General Stream Gaging Procedures

After the general location of a gaging station has been determined from a consideration of the need
for streamflow data, its precise location is so selected as to take advantage of the best locally
available conditions for stage and discharge measurement and for developing a stable stage-discharge
relation.
A continuous record of stage is obtained by installing a structure (non-recording gage in the case of
DPWH) to be monitored by a competent local observer and record the water-surface elevation in
the stream. Discharge measurements are initially made at various stages to define the relation
between stage and discharge. Discharge measurements are then made at periodic intervals, usually
monthly, to verify the stage-discharge relation or to define any change in the relation caused by
changes in channel geometry and (or) channel roughness. At many sites the discharge is not a unique
function of stage; variables other than stage must also be continuously measured to obtain a

discharge record. For example, stream slope is measured by the installation of a downstream
auxiliary stage gage at stations where variable backwater occurs. At other sites a continuous
measure of stream velocity at a point in the cross section is obtained and used as an additional
variable in the discharge rating. The rate of change of stage can be an important variable where flow
is unsteady and channel slopes are flat. However, for this manual, only the simple stage-discharge
relation has been discussed.
Artificial controls such as low weirs or flumes are constructed at some stations to stabilize the
stage-discharge relations in the low flow range. These control structures are calibrated by stage and
discharge measurements in the field.
The data obtained at the gaging station are reviewed and analysed by engineering personnel at the
end of the water year. Discharge ratings are established, and the gage-height record is reduced to
mean values for selected time periods. The mean discharge for each day and extremes of discharge
for the year are computed. The data are then prepared for publication.
1.4 International Standards in Stream Gaging

The following are standards used extensively in the preparation of this Manual:
 The World Meteorological Organization (WMO) which was formed in 1950 is a specialized
agency of the United Nations for meteorology. It provides a framework for international
cooperation in the development of meteorology and operational hydrology and their practical
application. WMO publishes guides and technical reports on stream gaging which are circulated
to its 191 member countries. The Manual on Stream Gaging (WMO-No. 519) first released in
1980 and later updated by WMO-No. 1044 in 2010 encompasses the topics of gage height
measurement, stream velocity and stream discharge in Volume I while Volume II focuses on the
discharge rating relationship.
 The United States Geologic Survey (USGS) has several publications, in particular the manuals on
Measurements and Computation of Streamflow (Water Supply Paper 2175, 1982 by S.E. Rantz
and others), Volume I - Measurement of Stage and Discharge and Volume II – Computation of
Discharge. These manuals were prepared with the purpose of providing a comprehensive
description of standardized stream gaging procedures and are intended for use as a training
guide and reference text, primarily for USGS personnel but also for use by other stream gaging
practitioners in the USA and elsewhere in the world. Likewise, Discharge Measurements at
Gaging Stations Chapter 8 of Book 3, Section A (Techniques and Methods 3-A8) as well as the
Standards for the Analysis and Processing of Surface Water Data and Information Using
Electronic Method – USGS Water Resources Investigation Report 01- 4044 which provide
standards from which a completely automated electronic processing system is developed have
also been used as references in the preparation of this Manual.
 The Manual on Procedures in Operational Hydrology prepared jointly by the Ministry of Water,
Energy and Minerals of Tanzania and the Norwegian Agency for International Development
(NORAD). Authored by Osten A. Tilrem, senior hydrologist at the Norwegian Water
Resources and Electricity Board, the manual consists of five volumes dealing with establishment
and operation of stream gaging station, discharge measurement by current meter method and
relative salt dilution, stage-discharge relations at stream gaging stations and sediment transport in
streams.

 The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) in 1964 set up a technical committee
on streamflow measurement known as ISO/TC 113. The technical committee deals with the
standardization of methods, procedures, instruments, and equipment relating to techniques for
hydrometric determination of gage height, velocity, discharge and sediment transport in open
channels, precipitation and evapotranspiration, availability and movement of groundwater,
including: terminology and symbols, collection, evaluation, analysis, interpretation and
presentation of data and evaluation of uncertainties. To date ISO/TC 113 have 19 participating
countries and 16 observing countries and have published a total of 65 ISO Standards.
 The Indian Bureau of Standards published several standards on Measurement of Liquid Flow in
Open Channels which are mostly adaptation of ISO published standards.

2. SURFACE WATER DATA AND INFORMATION
Surface water data and information are composed of a number of measured and computed variables.
This section describes some of these variables, and will define some of the terminology used
throughout the manual. These definitions will be the adopted standards by the DPWH – BOD for
stream gaging.
2.1 Definition
Common terms as defined by Sauer (2002) and presented in the WMO and USGS standards, the
words data and information have special meanings. The term data is used for the results obtained
from the measurement of basic variable, which cannot be repeated. Data can be accepted as they
are, qualified, or rejected, but they cannot be modified without compromising their identity as data.
Any change or modification of a data value converts that value into information. Gage height
observations submitted by Gage Keepers are considered data as well as the discharge measurement
values obtained by the Hydrographic Engineers when they conduct the measurements in the field.
In such a case that the original gage heights have to be adjusted due to correction in gage datum
elevation, then the new value of gage heights are considered information. Another example is the
conversion of gage height into discharge value through the stage-discharge relationship or rating
curve. The computed discharge value is information. Unlike data, information can be modified, as in
the case when stage-discharge relation has to be revised due to changes in river condition. Data are
generally treated as primary record, whereas information are usually treated as secondary record.
2.2 Gage height, stage and elevation

Gage height, stage and elevation are interchangeable terms used to define the height of the surface
of a water feature, such as a stream, reservoir, lake, or canal. For a stream gaging station, gage height
is the more appropriate terminology, but the more general term “stage” is sometimes used
interchangeably. For lakes, reservoirs and tidal streams, the height of the water surface usually is
referred to as elevation. Gage height (also stage) is measured above an arbitrary gage datum whereas
elevation is measured above an established vertical datum, such as mean sea level. Gage heights and
elevations are principal data elements in the collection, processing, and analysis of surface-water data
and information. Gage heights and elevations are measured in various ways, such as by direct
observation of a gaging device, or by automatic sensing through the use of floats, transducers, gas-
bubbler manometers and acoustic methods. Gage heights and elevations should be measured and
stored as instantaneous unit values. Subsequent data processing and analysis will provide the means
for any required analysis, such as averaging.
2.3 Stream Velocity

Stream velocity is another data element in a stream gaging system. Unit values of stream velocity
are measured at some sites for the purpose of computing stream discharge. This is done most
commonly where variable backwater conditions are present. Unit values of stream velocity are
measured at some sites where variable backwater is not present to improve the calculation of
discharge.
2.3.1 Discharge Information

Streamflow or river discharge is the volume of water flowing past a given point in the river in a given
period of time. It is the variable usually required for hydrological analysis but continuous
measurement of flow past a river section is usually impractical or prohibitively expensive. Discharge
cannot be computed directly. It is computed from other measured variables namely; gage height,
stream depth, stream width and stream velocity. Therefore, discharge is considered to be
information rather than data. Since gage heights can be observed continuously with comparative
ease and economy, hence it is common practice to develop a rating curve which is the relationship

between gage height and discharge at a cross-section of a river to transform the observed gage
heights into the corresponding discharges. Daily mean values of discharge are computed from the
daily mean values of gage height.
2.3.2 Unit value

Unit value used to denote a measured or computed value of a variable parameter that is associated
with a specified instantaneous time and date. In addition, unit values generally are part of a time-
series data set. For surface water records, unit values for all parameters always should be
instantaneous values. Some parameters, such as velocity, tend to fluctuate rapidly and a true
instantaneous value would be difficult to use in the analysis and processing of the records. Some
instruments are designed to take frequent (for example, every second) readings, temporarily stored
these readings, and then compute and store a mean value for a short time period. For these
situations, the field instruments are programmed to record mean unit values for very short time
intervals, so they can be considered for practical purposes to be instantaneous unit values. Data
recorded for very short time intervals are sometimes referred to as a high-resolution data.
2.3.3 Daily values

Daily values are measured or computed values for a specific date only. The time of the daily value is
not usually required although for certain values, time is stated. Examples of daily values are daily
mean gage heights, maximum instantaneous gage height for a day and minimum instantaneous gage
height for a day, which are also considered extreme values. In the case of maximum and minimum
instantaneous values for a day, the time of occurrence usually is stated.
2.4 Units of measurement

The units of measurement used for this manual is the International System of Units (SI) units in
accordance with the appropriate parts of ISO 31, which is revised by ISO 80000-1:2009 and ISO
1000:1992.

3. SELECTION OF GAGING STATION SITES
3.1 Considerations in specific site selection
After the general location of a gaging station has been determined, a specific site for its installation
must be selected. For example, if the outflow from a reservoir is to be gaged to provide the
streamflow data needed for managing reservoir release, the general location of the gaging station
will be along the stretch of stream channel between the dam and the first stream confluence of
significant size downstream from the dam. From the standpoint of convenience alone, the station
should be established close to the dam, but it should be far enough downstream from the outlet
gates and spillway outlet so that the flow is fairly uniformly established across the entire width of
the stream. On the other hand the gage should not be located so far downstream that the stage of
the gaged stream may be affected by the stage of confluent stream. Between those upstream and
downstream limits for location of the gage, the hydraulic features should be investigated to obtain
stage and discharge measurement and for developing a stable stage-discharge relation if the velocity
area method is to be used.
If the proposed gaging station is to be established for purely hydrologic purposes, unconnected
with the design or operation of a project, the general location for the gage will be the reach of
channel between two large tributary or confluent streams. The gage should be far enough
downstream from the upper tributary so that flow is fairly uniformly established across the entire
width of stream; and far enough upstream from the lower steam confluence to avoid variable
backwater effect. Those limits often provide a reach of channel of several kilometers whose
hydraulic features must be considered in selecting a specific site for the gage installation.
The ideal gage site satisfies the following criteria as stated in the WMO Manual on Stream Gaging
Volume I, many of which are defined in ISO 1100-1 and adapted by IS 15119-1:
a. The general course of the stream is straight for about 10 times the stream width, upstream and
downstream from the gage site if the control is a river reach (channel control). If the control is
a section control, the downstream conditions must be such that the control is not drowned.
The water entering a section control should have low velocity;
b. The total flow is confined to one channel at all stages and no flow bypasses the site as
subsurface flow;
c. The stream-bed is not subject to scour and fill and is relatively free of aquatic vegetation;
d. Banks are permanent, high enough to contain floods, and are free of brush;
e. Unchanging natural controls are present in the form of a bedrock outcrop or other stable riffle
for low flow and a channel constriction for high flow – or a waterfall or cascade that is un-
submerged at all stages. If a natural control is not available, then channel conditions should
allow for the construction of an artificial control such as weir or flume;
f. A pool is present upstream from the control at extremely low stages to ensure a recording of
stage at extremely low flow. The sensitivity of the control should be such that any significant
change in discharge should result in a measurable change in stage;
g. A gage site is far enough upstream from the confluence with another stream or from tidal
effect to avoid any variable influence the other stream or the tide may have on the stage at the
gage site;
h. A satisfactory reach for measuring discharge at all stages is available within reasonable
proximity of the gage site. It is not necessary for low and high flows to be measured at the
same stream cross-sections;
i. The site is readily accessible for ease in installation and operation of the gaging station;
j. Within reach of a suitable telemetry system, for future development.

Rarely will an ideal site be found for a gaging station and judgment must be exercised in choosing
between adequate sites, each of which has some shortcomings. More often, it is possible these
adverse conditions are present in considering the installation of an essential gaging station, and that
such condition must be accepted. For example, all streams in a given region may have unstable
beds and banks, which result in continually changing stage-discharge relations.

4. GAGING STATION CONTROLS
4.1 Types of Controls
The conversion of a record of gage height to a record of discharge is done by use of a stage-
discharge relation. The physical element or combination of elements that controls the relation is
known as the control. The channel characteristic forming the station control include the cross-
sectional area and shape of the stream channel, the channel sinuosity, the expansions and
restrictions of the channel, the stability and roughness of the stream bed and banks, and the
vegetation cover, all of which collectively constitute the factors determining the channel
conveyance.
Controls are mainly differentiated as section controls and channel controls. Another classification
differentiates between natural and artificial controls. Artificial controls are structures built for the
specific purpose of controlling the stage-discharge relation, such as weir, flume, or small dam (a
highway bridge or paved floodway channel that serves incidentally as a control is not classed as an
artificial control). A third classification differentiates between complete, partial, and compound
controls.
4.2 Section control

A section control exists when the geometry of a single cross section a short distance downstream
from the gage is such as to constrict the channel, or when a downward break in bed slope occurs
at the cross section. The constriction may result from a local rise in the streambed; at a natural
riffle or rock ledge outcrop, or at a constructed weir or dam; or it may result from a local
constriction in width, which may occur naturally or be caused by some man-made channel
encroachment, such a bridge whose waterway opening is considerably narrower than the width of
the natural channel. Examples of a downward break in bed slope are the head of a cascade or the
brink of a falls.
4.2.1 Channel control

Channel control exists when the geometry and roughness of a long reach of the channel
downstream from the gaging station, are the elements that control the relation between the stage
and discharge. The length of channel that is effective as a control increases with discharge.
Generally speaking, the flatter the stream gradient, the longer the reach of channel controls.
4.2.2 Permanent Controls

Regardless of how stable and permanent a control may appear, it is always possible that a change
may occur in the original physical features forming the control. The fact that a change in a generally
recognized permanent control may not be readily identified is no assurance that the stage-discharge
relation has remained unchanged. The nature of the change is more often a result of non-
observance of changes in the controlling elements during routine inspections. On the other hand,
some of the physical characteristics of a control may appear to have changed, yet the nature of the
change may be such as not to include those features which materially affect the stage-discharge
relation. Positive assurance that a change has not occurred in the stage-discharge relation is
attainable only by comparing the results of discharge measurements with the previously established
discharge rating curve.
4.2.3 Shifting Controls

The term shifting controls as used in stream gaging signifies that the stage-discharge relation does
not remain permanent but varies or changes with time. In such cases, the physical features forming
the station control undergo changes, either abruptly or gradually; the stage-discharge relation will
also vary in that the stage corresponding to a given discharge will deviate from the discharge rating
curve as defined before the change.

It should be recognized that most natural controls shift slightly. However, shifting control exists
where the stage-discharge relation changes frequently, either gradually or abruptly because of
changes in the physical features that form the control of the station. The frequency and magnitude
of such shifts are generally dependent upon the climatic, physiographic, geologic, and vegetal and
soil conditions in the drainage basin. Usually, shifts in a control are caused by erosion of the stream
channel, deposition of sediment, or vegetal and aquatic growth in the stream channel.
4.3 Attributes of a satisfactory control

The two attributes of a satisfactory control are permanence (stability) and sensitivity. If the control
is stable, the stage-discharge relation will be stable. If the control is subject to change, the stage-
discharge relation is likewise subject to change, and frequent discharge measurements are required
for the continual recalibration of the stage-discharge relation. In this case, it increases the operating
cost of a gaging station, and results in impairment of the accuracy of the streamflow record. The
primary cause of changes in natural controls is the high velocity associated with high discharge. Of
the natural section controls, a rock ledge outcrop will be unaffected by high velocities, but boulder,
gravel, and sand-bar riffles are likely to shift, boulder riffles being the most resistant to movement
and sand bars the least resistant. Of the natural channel controls those with unstable bed and
banks, as found in sand-channel streams, are the most likely to change as a result of velocity-
induced scour and deposition. Another cause of changes in natural controls is vegetal growth. The
growth of aquatic vegetation on section controls increases the stage for a given discharge,
particularly in the low-flow range. Vegetal growth on the bed and banks of channel controls also
affects the stage-discharge relation by reducing velocity and the effective waterway area. In the
temperate climates, accumulations of waterlogged fallen leaves on section controls each autumn
clog the interstices of alluvial riffles and raise the effective elevation of all natural section controls.
The first ensuing stream rise of any significance usually clears the control of fallen leaves.
Controls, particularly those for low flow, should be sensitive; that is, a small change in discharge
should be reflected by a significant change in stage. To meet that requirement it is necessary that
the width of flow at the control be greatly constricted at low stages. In a natural low-water control
such constriction occurs if the control is in effect notched, or if the controlling cross section
roughly has a flat V-shape or a flat parabolic shape. Those shapes will ensure that the width of flow
over the control decreases as discharge decreases. Generally speaking, a low-water control is
considered to be sensitive if a change of no more than 2 percent of the total discharge is
represented by a change of one unit of recorded stage.
This unit is usually taken to be 3 mm in the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
and the USA, and may also be adopted in the Philippines. Therefore, for the low-water control to
be regarded as sensitive, a change in stage of 0.003 m or 3 mm should represent a change of no
more than about 2 percent of the total discharge.
In the interest of economy a gaging station should be located upstream from a suitable natural
control. However, where natural conditions do not provide the stability or the sensitivity required,
artificial controls should be considered. The artificial controls are all section controls; it is not
feasible to pave or otherwise improve a long reach of channel solely for the purpose of stabilizing
the stage-discharge relation.

5. STREAM GAGING STATION STRUCTURES
There are several structures used at gaging stations namely;
1. Water level gage and benchmark. The gage is usually a non-recording vertical staff gage or an
inclined staff gage set at a chosen datum and referred to a benchmark;
2. Automatic water-level recorder. The automatic recorder is usually a float-actuated recorder
with house and stilling well;
3. A structure for taking current-meter measurements, usually a cableway or a footbridge;
4. An artificial control such as flume or a weir.
At present, only the first item is available in all the stream gaging stations nationwide. There used
to be gaging stations equipped with an automatic water level recorder with housing and stilling well
operated by the then National Water Resources Council (NWRC), however it was reported that
none of these stations are operational. The third item may or may not be needed depending on the
gaging conditions at existing bridges and the natural condition at site.
The highway bridges used in making streamflow measurements must be utilized as they are found.
The only problem they present is whether or not they will be practicable for making discharge
measurements. The only advantage of using existing bridges is the saving in construction and
maintenance costs that is associated with cableways, but this advantage is often outweighed by the
poor measuring conditions at the bridge; the inconvenience entailed in using some bridges, and the
safety hazard caused by traffic conditions. A bridge that is used regularly for discharge
measurements is marked at suitable intervals on the handrail or some similar feature of the bridge
for convenient spacing of the verticals during discharge measurements. No standard design for
footbridges for stream gaging is recommended, because each footbridge installation presents its
own particular and unique condition. The type of footbridge used will depend on span, availability
of material, stability of banks, accessibility of the site, type of equipment to be used and funds
available. Footbridges should be designed so that they give the hydrographer room to move about
and to operate the current meter equipment comfortably.
If there are plans to construct facilities for a gaging station, it should be very carefully planned to be
certain that the resulting structures are correctly located, safe, and economical to operate and
maintain.
5.1 The Staff Gage

The staff gage is the type of gage ordinarily used at non-recording gaging stations. The staff gage
may be either vertical or an inclined gage following the contour of the bank of the stream. The
vertical staff gage usually consists of standard painted wood. The graduations of a gage may be
marked directly on the surface of the wood. The sections are supplied in lengths of 1.00 and 0.50
meter and are graduated in 0.01 or 0.02 meter. The sections are usually screwed to a board which
is fastened to a suitable support. Preferably, the gage should be placed near the side of the stream
so that a direct reading of the water level may be made.
The gage should be located near to the current meter measuring section without affecting the flow
conditions at this point. It should not be placed where the water is disturbed by turbulence or
where there is danger of damage by drift. Bridge abutments or piers are generally unsuitable
locations. Where ever the gage is situated, it must be readily conveniently accessible so that the
observer may make readings as near as possible at eye level. Where necessary, the construction of
a flight of steps to give convenient access is recommended. Gages may also be fixed to piles, either
driven firmly into the river bed or banks or set in concrete in order to avoid sinking, tilting or
washing away. In either case, the anchorage should extend below the ground surface to a level free
of any disturbing effects. Where the range of water levels exceeds the capacity of a single vertical

gage section, additional sections may be installed on the line of the cross section normal to the
direction of flow.
An inclined gage usually consists of heavy wood securely attached to a permanent foundation. The
graduations of an inclined gage may be marked directly on the surface of the wood or may be
carried on manufactured gage plates designed to be set for particular slopes. Except where use is
made of manufactured gage plates, an inclined gage should be calibrated in situ by accurate levelling
from the station benchmark. Usually, various sizes of bronze numerals are used for the graduations.
An inclined gage should be installed so that it follows the contour of the bank. The profile of the
bank may be such that a gage of a single slope may be installed; frequently, however, it may be
necessary to construct the gage in several sections, each with a different slope. It is often
convenient to construct a flight of steps alongside the inclined gage to facilitate taking readings. The
accuracy of readings of an inclined gage may be improved if a small portable stilling tube made of
transparent material is used when reading it.
5.2 Datum of Gage

For gage height data to be useful for their intended purposes, requirements for maintaining a
permanent gage datum and meeting specified accuracy limits are important. The datum of the gage
may be a recognized datum, such as mean sea level, or an arbitrary datum plane chosen for
convenience. An arbitrary datum plane is selected for the convenience of using relatively low
numbers for gage heights. The arbitrary datum plane for a stream gaging site should be selected so
that negative values of gage height do not occur. This requires the arbitrary datum plane to be
below the lowest expected gage height, which will be at, or below, the elevation of zero flow on
the control for all conditions.
A permanent gage datum should be maintained, if at all possible, so that only one datum for the
gage height record is used for the life of the gaging station. To maintain a permanent datum, each
gaging station requires at least two or three reference marks; that is, permanent points of known
gage-height elevation that are independent of the gage structure. The datum at each gaging station
is periodically checked by running levels from the reference marks to the gages at the station. If an
arbitrary datum plane is used, it is desirable that it be referred by levels to a benchmark of known
elevation above mean sea level, so that the arbitrary datum may be recovered if the gage and
reference marks are destroyed. Levels should be run at least once a year at new gage sites and at
sites where the datum is not stable. After it is confirmed that the datum is fairly stable, levels can
be run every 2 or 3 years, and in some cases an even longer time between levels may be
acceptable.
The gage datum may require a change when excessive channel scour, or a manmade channel
change, occurs. It is recommended that such a change be in increments of whole meter so the new
datum can be easily related to the old datum. In some instances the gage itself may need to be
relocated to another site. The relation between the datum for the new gage site and the datum for
the old gage site should be defined by levelling; however, it is not usually necessary to use the same
datum at both sites. A permanent record of all datum changes should be maintained.
5.3 The Local Observer (Gage Keeper)

The reading of staff gauges is the first basic step in hydrometric work. It is important that this task
is performed accurately and properly, if not, the rest of the activities related to operating a gaging
station will have a greatly reduced value. The frequency of gauge readings for non-recording gauges
will be an important factor in the accuracy of the continuous discharge record to be converted
from these readings. In order to ensure uninterrupted operation of a non-recording station, the
routine attendance of a competent local observer is essential, especially under extreme conditions
(i.e. during typhoons or torrential rains). Normally, the staff gage is read three times a day,

additional readings are required when the gage height is changing more rapidly than usual especially
during storm events.
Given this case, an observer will be needed at a gaging station; the site selected should be near a
populated area where people of sufficient ability to perform the duties of an observer are available.
The necessity of having a station near adequate roads becomes more important if an observer is
needed, because few people are willing to move great distances to become a gaging station
caretaker/observer.

6. COLLECTION OF STREAMFLOW DATA
6.1 Measurement of Gage Height
The collection of stage data, either manually or automatically, requires that various instruments be
installed at a gaging site. For stage data to be useful for their intended purposes, requirements for
maintaining a permanent gage datum and meeting specified accuracy limits are important. This
section of the Manual provides definitions of the components, as well as the basic accuracy
requirements.
6.1.1 General
Records of gage height are used with a stage-discharge relation in computing records of stream
discharge. The reliability of the discharge record is therefore dependent on the reliability of the
gage height record as well as on the accuracy of the stage-discharge relation. Records of stream
stage are also useful in themselves for such purposes as the design of structures affected by stream
elevation and the planning of flood-plain use. The gage-height record of a lake or reservoir
provides, in addition to elevations, indexes of surface area and volume of the water body.
A record of stage may be obtained by systematic observations of a non-recording gage or by means

of a water-stage recorder. The advantages of the non-recording gage are the low initial cost and
the ease of installation. The disadvantages are the need for an observer and the lack of accuracy of
the estimated continuous-stage graph drawn through the plotted points of observed stage. For
long-term operation the advantages of the recording gage far outweigh those of the non-recording
gage. While DPWH continues to use the non-recording gages, future upgrading and expansion of
the gages will have to migrate to recording-gages. In this case, one or more non-recording gages
should be maintained as auxiliary gages for the operation of the recording station.
6.1.2 Basic requirements for collecting gage height data

The collection of gage height data requires installation of instruments at a gaging site. For gage
height data to be useful for their intended purposes, requirements for maintaining a permanent
gage datum and meeting specified accuracy limits are important. A record of gage height could be
obtained by systematic observation of a non-recording gage. As mentioned earlier, the main
advantage of a non-recording gage is the low initial cost however; disadvantages include the need
for an observer and lack of accuracy as the observation is as good as the observer.
The currently used type of non-recording station in the Philippines is the staff gage. At such stations
the staff gage is read three times daily by an observer, preferably at 8:00 AM, 12:00 NOON and
5:00 PM. Additional readings should be made during periods of rapidly changing gage height
possibly every hour as long as the life and safety of the observer will not be put at risk. The
observer systematically records and reports his readings to headquarters. The record book is used
to log permanent gage height readings. This will also serve as a back-up copy of gage height
observations should the electronic files of such are destroyed or corrupted.
On each routine visit to a non-recording stream-gaging station, the gagekeeper also visits the
observer to collect and enter in the stage-record book the gage reading(s) that the gagekeeper has
made. At that time, he also inspects the record book to check for discrepancies in the observer’s
readings.
6.1.3 Factors affecting the accuracy of the Gage Height Record

Continuous records of discharge at a gaging station are computed from the record of stage and the
stage-discharge relation. For that purpose stage records having an accuracy of 0.01 ft. (0.003 m) are
generally required. The accuracy of any gage concerns the maintenance of the gage datum to the
accuracy criterion of 0.003 m. That is achieved by running levels to reference marks for the gage

and, if necessary, adjusting the gage to restore the original datum. Levels should be run at least
once every 2-3 years and more often if conditions are known to be unstable.
6.1.4 Non-recording gages (Staff gage)

Settlement or uplift of the structure(s) supporting the staff gage may disturb the gage datum.
Where levels from a reference mark show that the datum of an inclined staff gage has been
disturbed, the gage is recalibrated by removing the staples used for the graduations and replacing
them at the proper elevations. Vertical staff gages are usually made up of several lumber boards,
each about 1.0 m to 2.0 m long and bearing permanent graduations. Where levels from a reference
mark show disturbance of the datum of a vertical staff gage, it is necessary to reset the individual
gage sections.
It is often difficult to accurately detect the water line when making staff-gage observations under
the conditions of poor light and (or) clear water. Under those conditions it is helpful to float a
matchstick or some similar floatable material against the gage and thereby define the water line.
When the water surface is surging rapidly as a result of wave action, the stage to be recorded is
the mean of the elevations of the peak and trough of the waves.
6.1.5 Stage accuracy requirements

The primary use of gage height data is for computation of streamflow records, consequently gage
height accuracy requirements are very stringent. In accordance with this primary use and because
the use of gage height data cannot be predicted, the overall accuracy of gage height data established
for gaging station is either 0.003 m, or 0.2 percent of the effective height, whichever is greater. For
example, the required accuracy would be 0.02 m at a 10 m effective height, 0.006 m at 3 m and
0.003 m for at all effective stages less than 1.75 m.
The accuracy criteria applies to the complete stream gaging station configuration and is a
composite of errors, or total error, from all of the components necessary for recording and
retrieving the data. When field conditions such as high velocities, wave action or channel instability
make it impossible to collect accurate gage height data or to define an accurate stage-discharge
relation, gage height data should be collected with the greatest accuracy feasible.
6.1.6 Sources of stage measurement errors

The measured stage of a stream or other water body at any given point in time is subject to
numerous sources of incremental errors. The combined effect of these errors should be within the
accuracy requirements stated in section 6.1.5. The accuracy requirement for any single component
of a stage measuring system will generally be more stringent than the requirement for the system
as a whole. However, it is not always possible to isolate, or pinpoint an error and attribute it to
one specific component. This part of the report describes the various sources of error in general.
6.1.6.1 Datum errors

The gage datum is described in Section 6 of this manual. Movement of a gage caused by uplift or
settlement of the supporting structure can cause datum errors that can only be detected by
running levels. Gage datum for reference gages should be maintained to an accuracy of 0.003 m,
which can usually be achieved by running levels to established reference marks every 2 or 3 years.
Levels may be required at more frequent intervals where conditions are not stable. Generally,
gages need not be adjusted unless datum discrepancies exceed 0.006 m.
6.1.6.2 Gage reading errors

Errors can result from inaccurate gage readings where it may be difficult to detect the water line
against a staff gage because of poor lighting or very clear water. In other instances accurate gage
readings may be difficult to make because of water surge. These errors can be reduced or
eliminated by careful observation and in the case of surge by averaging several observations. Other

errors can be caused by site conditions such as the reading of a wire-weight gage with the weight
lowered from a very high bridge. In almost all cases gages should be read to the nearest 0.003 m. If
gages cannot be read to this accuracy, notes should be made and the error magnitude estimated.
6.1.6.3 Verification errors

Stage readings require frequent and consistent verification to ensure that errors are reduced or
eliminated. Failure to perform proper verification standards can be significant in some cases.
Verification procedures include frequent observation of high water marks, redundant recording of
peaks and troughs by the use of maximum/minimum indicators, and regular maintenance of gage
datum by levels.
6.1.7 Field Procedure

The local observer (gage keeper) collects the gage height data in the field regularly three times a
day. Preferably, the readings shall be made at 8:00 AM, 12 NOON and 5:00 PM. However,
arrangements were made to have additional readings when the gage height is changing more rapidly
than usual especially during storm events. If possible, readings should be made every hour so long
that the observer is safe to stay in the gaging site. It is important that the local observer record the
exact time and the correct date of each gage observation. The station gage keeper will be provided
with a mobile device and the gage keeper is required to transmit the observed gage height
promptly.
6.1.7.1 Field Notes

Field Notes are documents used to annotate and record information gathered at the station.
They are data sheet and should be treated as such. Therefore, they should be written, legible,
and complete. To avoid confusion and loss of data, a new sheet should be used every month at
each gaging station. Field notes should be initialled and dated by the collecting gagekeeper.
6.1.7.2 Data Storage

All completed paper copies of forms and data sheets should be maintained with the appropriate
station notebook. The data from the field notes data sheets should be collected by the Regional
Hydrographers every month and should be stored properly.
6.1.7.3 Data Transmission

Onsite gage height observations should be sent immediately to the server through SMS by the
designated gage keeper. The instruction for sending the field measurement data is shown below
and should be followed strictly to avoid error and failure of transmission to the server. The
gage keeper is also instructed to remain at the station until the server sends a message
confirming the receipt of the transmitted data.
Gage height: 0.00

Date: DDMMMYYYY
Time: 00:00
Comment: any text
GAGE HEIGHT space DATE space TIME space COMMENT

GAGE HEIGHT˽ DATE˽ TIME˽ COMMENT
Example: 2.35˽ 02Jun2016˽ 07:00˽ No rain
Figure 6-1 shows the standard data flow, from the field observation of gage heights to
transmission to the server, validation and verification of Regional Hydrographers to the accuracy
and integrity of the data and finally submission of such data to the central server to be archived as
collected streamflow data. Figure 6-2 shows the detail of SMS transmission to the server.

Quality assurance of the data collected includes the timely transmission of field observations
through SMS and accurate documentation in paper records, regional personnel auditing of such
records consistently and conscientiously using the procedures to ensure integrity and data quality.
Figure 6-1. Data flow for Water Level Data Collection
Figure 6-2. Detail of SMS transmission to the server
6.2 Measurement of Discharge
6.2.1 Introduction
Streamflow, or discharge of a stream, is defined as the volume of water flowing through a cross-
section of the stream per unit of time, including any substances suspended or dissolved in the
water. Discharge is usually expressed in cubic meters per second (m3/s). Discharge is the most
important parameter in hydrology; its measurement usually involves consideration of both gage
height and velocity of flow.
Discharge measurements are made at each gaging station to determine the discharge rating for the
site. The discharge rating may be a simple relation between stage and discharge or a more complex

relation in which discharge is a function of stage, slope, rate of change of stage, or other factors.
Initially the discharge measurements are made with the frequency necessary to define the station
rating as early as possible, over a wide range of stage or gage heights. Measurements are then made
at periodic intervals, usually monthly, to verify the rating or to define any changes in the rating
caused by changes in stream channel conditions.
The Current Meter Method is the method employed by the DPWH in discharge measurements.
Also known as the area-velocity method, because of its flexibility to a wide range of flow velocities
and is practically unrestricted with respect to the total discharge which can be measured, provided
the flow is not turbulent. Stream discharge is by definition the product of velocity and cross-
sectional area of flow and this method evaluates these two terms for a particular cross section at a
particular time. This section describes the discharge measurement using the conventional current-
meter method.
With velocity-area method, discharge of a stream is computed as the product of the area and
velocity. A current-meter measurement is the summation of the products of the subsection areas
of the stream cross section and their respective average velocities. Equation 1 represents the
computation of discharge.
𝑸 = ∑𝒏𝒊=𝟏(𝒂𝒊 𝒗𝒊 ) (1)
Where
Q = total discharge in cubic meter per second,
ai = cross-section area, in square meter, for the ith segment of the n
segments into which the cross section is divided, and,
vi = the corresponding mean velocity, in meter per second of the flow
normal to the ith segment, or vertical
6.2.2 Instrument and Equipment
6.2.2.1 Current Meters

A point-velocity current meter is a precision instrument calibrated to measure the velocity of
flowing water in a single point. There are several types of current meters available for use that
include the rotating-element mechanical meters, electromagnetic meters, acoustic Doppler
Velocimeters (ADVs or FlowTrackers), acoustic digital current meters (ADCs), and optical meters.
However, the rotating-element mechanical meter is the only instrument currently being used by
the Regional Hydrographers of DPWH. The principle of operation for a mechanical meter is based
on the proportionality between the velocity of the water and the resulting angular velocity of the
meter rotor. By placing a mechanical current meter at a point in a stream and counting the number
of revolutions of the rotor during a measured interval of time, the velocity of water at that point
can be determined from the meter rating.
The meter most commonly used by the USGS to measure open-channel velocities in rivers and
streams as well as in the Philippines, is the vertical-axis, mechanical current meter. The original
prototype for this kind of current meter was designed and built in 1882 by W.G. Price, while he
was working with the Mississippi River Commission. The Price current meter has evolved through
a number of different models and refinements since 1882, but the basic theory and concepts
remain the same. The Price AA meter is the most commonly used mechanical current meter for
discharge measurements made by the USGS; however there are other variations of this meter,
such as the Price AA slow velocity, the Price pygmy, and the Price AA winter meter. In the
Philippines, aside from the Price AA, only the Price pygmy type is being used by the DPWH.

1. Price AA Meter
Historically, most current-meter measurements made by the USGS and adopted in the Philippines
since the start of streamflow data collection activities in the country have been made with the
vertical-axis Price AA and the Price pygmy current meters, as shown in Figures 6-3A and 6-3B.
The basic components of the Price AA meter include the shaft and rotor (bucket wheel) assembly,
the contact chamber, the yoke, and the tailpiece. Figure 6-4 shows the assembly drawing of Price
AA current meter where the different parts are components of the meter are shown. The rotor,
or bucket wheel, is 0.127 m (5 in.) in diameter and 0.0508 m (2 in.) high with six cone-shaped cups
mounted on a stainless-steel shaft. A vertical pivot supports the vertical shaft of the rotor, hence
the name vertical-axis current meter. The contact chamber houses the upper part of the shaft and
provides a method of counting the number of revolutions the rotor makes. A reduction gear
(commonly referred to as the penta gear) on the lower part of the shaft allows counting every fifth
revolution of the rotor when it is activated. The penta gear is used in discharge measurements with
very high velocities. Contact chambers that can be used on the Price AA meter are described in a
later section of this chapter. The yoke is the framework that holds the other components of the
meter. A tailpiece is used for balance and keeps the meter pointing into the current.
When placed in flowing water, the rotors of the Price current meters turn at a speed proportional
to the speed of the water. For practical purposes, these current meters are considered non-
directional because they register the maximum velocity of the water, even though they may be
placed at an angle to the direction of flow.
Advantages of the vertical-axis current meter are:

 They operate in lower velocities than do horizontal-axis meters.
 Bearings are well protected from silt-laden water.
 The rotor is easily repairable in the field without adversely affecting the rating.
 USGS standard ratings apply to the Price AA and Price pygmy meters.
 A single rotor serves for the entire range of velocities.
Source: V.B., 2010, Discharge measurements at gaging stations

U.S. Geological Survey Techniques and Methods
Figure 6-3. A-Price AA current meter, B-Price Pygmy Current Meter

Source:2010, Manual on Stream Gaging, Volume I –Fieldwork, WMO-1044
Figure 6-4. Assembly drawing of the Price AA current meter
2. Price Pygmy Meter
A miniature version of the Price AA meter is the Price pygmy meter, as shown in Figure 6-3B,
which is used for measuring velocities in shallow depths. The Price pygmy meter is scaled two-fifths
the size of the standard meter and has neither a tailpiece nor a penta gear. The contact chamber is
an integral part of the yoke of the meter. The Price pygmy meter makes one contact for each
revolution and is used only for rod suspension.
3. Rating of Mechanical Current Meters
In order to determine the velocity of the water from the revolutions of the rotor of a mechanical
current meter, a relation must be established between the angular velocity of the rotor and the
velocity of the water turning it. This relation is referred to as the current-meter rating, and is
expressed in an equation or in tabular format.
Standard current-meter ratings have been defined for the Price AA and the Price pygmy. There is a
standard rating equation that can be used for the two types of Price current meters using the field
observation data of revolution and time obtained during measurements. However, some Regional
Hydrographers prefer the use of the established current meter ratings in determining the
corresponding velocity for the observed revolution and time. Table 6-1 show the velocity rating
table for Price AA. In the table, the velocities corresponding to a range of 1 to 200 revolutions of
the rotor within a period of 40 to 70 seconds are listed. It should be noted that the table applies
when the measurements are made with meter suspended by cable such as during bridge and boat
measurements. When meter is suspended by rod, the value of tabulated velocities should be
reduced by 2 per cent.
The same Table 6-1 should be applied for Pygmy current meter. However, the tabular velocity in
meter per second equals 0.30 or (30%) of revolutions per second.

Table 6-1 Standard Rating Table for AA Current Meters
Source: Hydrological Instruments, Teledyne Gurley Revised 1981
4. Care and Maintenance of the Vertical-Axis Mechanical Current Meter
There are a number of documents describing the care and maintenance of the vertical-axis current
meters. Among these, the most important have originated from the USGS, are by Smoot and
Novak (1968) and by Rantz (1982), and Office of Surface Water Technical Memorandum No. 89.07
(1989) and Office of Surface Water Technical Memorandum No. 99.06 (1999). These instructions
represent a long history of experience based on field use of the meters, as well as from individuals
in the Office of Surface Water Hydraulic Laboratory who have repaired and adjusted current
meters to calibrate them within close tolerances. A brief description of the recommended
procedure for checking the condition of a current meter, and for its care and cleaning during daily
field use, is presented in the next few paragraphs. For complete details, consult the above-
mentioned documents.
5. Recommended Procedure Before, During, and After Each Discharge Measurement

– Before each discharge measurement, make a visual examination of the meter cups or vanes,
pivot, bearing, and shaft for damage, wear, or faulty alignment. Inspect the bearing surface for
water. This will usually appear as a milky emulsification of oil and water on the lower bearing
and pivot, and in the contact chamber. If water is found, dry the meter parts and re-oil
because the presence of water will affect the performance of the meter. The lower bearing is
probably the most susceptible to the entrance of water.
– Spin the rotor to make certain it operates freely, and allows it to slowly return to a resting
position. If the rotor does not turn smoothly, or if it stops abruptly, then it is a sign of some

problem and it should be corrected before using the meter. Check the balance and alignment
of the meter on the hanger or wading rod. Be sure that the conductor wire does not
interfere with meter balance and rotor spin.
– During measurements, check the meter periodically when it is out of the water to be sure
that the rotor spins freely, and that there is no debris or other substance obstructing it.
– After a measurement is completed, make another visual inspection as described above to
ensure that nothing was damaged or caused the meter to malfunction during the
measurement. If there is a problem, you may have to make another discharge measurement.
– Timed spin tests (described later in this section) are not required for each discharge
measurement. The visual inspection described above (No. 4 is) preferred over timed spin
tests made in the field.
6. Recommended Procedure after a Day of Use in the Field

– Examine the pivot and bearing surfaces for wear and damage, especially the pivot point. The
pivot should feel sharp, not rounded or dull. It should not have a burr detectable visually or
with the fingernail. A magnifying glass is helpful in making this examination. If the pivot is dull
or burred, replace it with a new one.
– Clean and lightly oil the pivot, bearing, and upper shaft with current-meter oil. Do not use
regular machine oil, such as “3-in-1,” because it tends to become gummy when exposed to
water.
– Check and carefully adjust cat’s-whisker contacts, if necessary. Cat’s whiskers should be
made of simple bronze wire, not beaded wire.
– After replacing the contact-chamber cap, spin the meter to see if it is operating correctly, as
previously described. A timed spin test is not required.
7. Recommended Procedure after Each Field Trip
After each field trip, completely disassemble, inspect, and clean current meters. Make any necessary
repairs. Detailed instructions for the disassembly, inspection, and adjustment of Price AA (both
standard and magnetic head) and pygmy current meters are contained in the attachments to Office
of Surface Water Technical Memorandum No. 99.06 (1999). A timed spin test may also be
performed after each field trip, and after meter repairs.
8. Inactive Current Meters
Disassemble, inspect, and clean current meters as described above, prior to storing them. If the
period of storage is less than 1 year, the meter may be used without further maintenance if an
inspection and a spin test indicate it is operating properly. If the meter has been in storage longer
than 1 year, or an indeterminate period, complete inspection, cleaning, and adjustment before using
the meter.
9. Spin Tests
A timed spin test, made in the field before and after each discharge measurement, is no longer a
requirement as it was in the past. The visual tests as described above are adequate for checking the
meter in the field. Note “OK” or “free” in the spaces on the front sheet of the discharge
measurement for spin test information to indicate that the visual check of the meter was
acceptable. Perform the full-timed spin test under controlled conditions between field trips, when
the meter is suspect, and before and after repairs. Place the meter on a stable, level surface to
perform the spin test. There should be no wind currents or drafts that can affect the rotor spin.
Sharply spin the rotor while starting a stopwatch. Stop the stopwatch when the rotor comes to a
complete stop. The minimum, acceptable spin times are as follows:

All types of Price pygmy meters 0:45 seconds
All types of Price AA meters 2:00 minutes
These are considered to be absolute minimum spin times. Meters in good condition will perform
substantially better.
6.2.2.2 Sounding and Suspension Equipment

Sounding (determination of stream depth) is always done when making current-meter
measurements. Therefore, sounding equipment as used in stream gaging serves the dual purpose
of measuring the depth of water and suspending the current meter at the desired points.
Sounding is commonly done mechanically, the equipment used depending on the type of
measurement being made. The depth of water and the position of the current meter below the
water surface are measured by means of a rigid rod or a sounding weight suspended on a line or
cable. The line is controlled by a gaging reel.
a. Sounding and Suspension Rods
The sounding rod or suspension rod is a graduated rigid rod with a base plate. The rod is used for
the measurement of depth and as a support for the current meter up to depths of 4-5 m in
medium velocities (about 2 m/s). The current meter is made to slide on the rod and it is fixed in
position with a clamp screw. A standard rod is made of 20 mm diameter metal tubing in sections
of 1 m or 2 m in length and is graduated at intervals of 10 cm. For smaller streams that can be
waded, the lower 2 m portion of the rod is used only, it is then termed wading rod.
b. Sounding and Suspension Lines
A sounding line, or suspension line, is used from a cableway, boat or bridge when the stream is too
deep and swift for a rod to be used. A sounding line is essentially a cable to which a sounding
weight or sinker is attached. The current meter is generally attached to this cable. The higher the
velocity and the greater the water depth, the heavier the sounding weight required will be. For
guidance in the choice of sounding weights, the following formula may be used:
m = 5vd (2)
where
m = weight of the sounding weight (kg),
v = mean velocity (m/s),
d = depth (m).
The sounding weight should preferably be suspended below the current meter. In this way it
prevents damage to the current meter when the assembly is lowered to the stream bed to
determine the depth of the water. Weights are generally made in sizes of 10, 25, 50 and 100 kg and
are usually made of lead. They are streamlined and furnished with tail vanes to orient them parallel
to the current. The weight may be equipped with a ground contact which produces a signal when
the weight touches the stream bed.
The sounding and suspension lines are controlled by means of a gaging reel or winch, or by a
handline. Usually, the suspension line also serves for the transmission of the electrical impulses
from the current meter to the electrical counter by an inner insulated two-conductor electrical
cable.
Gaging reels consist of a drum for winding the suspension cable. a crank and ratchet for raising and
lowering the current meter assembly and for holding it in any desired position, and a counting
device indicating the length of line played out.

Handline suspension is a simple device operated by hand. It is used for making discharge
measurements from bridges, using weights up to 20 kg and for velocities up to 2 m/s. The
advantages of the handline are that it is easier to set up, eliminates the use of a gaging reel and
the equipment to support the reel, and makes discharge measurements from bridges with
vertical and diagonal members quicker and easier. The disadvantages of the handline are that it
requires more physical exertion, especially in deep streams, and there is a greater
possibility of making errors in determining the depths.
A handline consists of the following parts:

I. A hand cable made up of a heavy rubber-covered two-conductor electrical cable, tagged at
0.5-m intervals and about 10 m long.
2. Small hand reel.
3. A reverse-lay steel cable of diameter 2.5 - 3 mm with an inner insulated two-conductor
electrical cable, about 12 m long.
4. Connector and plugs for current meter.
5. Plugs for electrical revolution counter.
6.2.2.3 Width Measuring Equipment

The spacing of the gaging verticals in a cross section is measured from an initial point on the bank
of the stream. Bridges used regularly for making discharge measurements are commonly marked at
2, 5 or 10 m intervals by point marks. Spacing of verticals between the markings is measured with
a rule or pocket tape. For measurements made by wading, from unmarked bridges or from
boats, measuring tapes or tag lines are used.
The tag line is made of galvanized steel cable about 2 mm in diameter and brass tags at measured
intervals are used to indicate the distances. The standard lengths are 25, 50 and 100 m, but
other lengths can be obtained by special order. It is practical to wind the tag line on a canvas hand-
reel of 20-30 cm diameter.
6.2.2.4 Equipment for Measurement from Bridge

Streamflow measurements are frequently made from a bridge. The meter and sounding weight can
be supported by a handline, a bridge board, or by a sounding reel mounted on a crane. The Price
AA current meter is commonly used in this method of measurement.
a. Bridge Canes
Hand-operated portable cranes for bridge measurements are designed so that the superstructure
can be tilted forward over the bridge rail far enough to enable the current meter and weight
to clear the rail. Cranes can be easily moved by hand along the sidewalk or floor of the bridge.
Figure 6-5 shows a type A crane mounted on a three-wheel base. The hand-operated crane had
been widely used in the past for measuring discharge around the country using bridges. However,
there might only few units that exist at present.

Figure 6-5. Type A crane mounted on a three-wheel base
b. Bridge Boards
A bridge board is a portable platform made from wood or metal upon which a small reel can be
mounted. It is usually about 1.8 to 2.4 m long, with a sheave at one end over which the meter cable
passes, and a reel seat near the other end. The board is placed on the bridge rail so that the force
exerted by the sounding weight suspended from the reel cable is counterbalanced by the weight of
the sounding reel. The bridge board may be hinged near the middle to allow one end to be placed
on the sidewalk or roadway. Figure 6-6 shows a bridge board in use.

Figure 6-6. Discharge Measurement from a bridge using a bridge board
6.2.2.5 Equipment for Measurements from Boat

Measurements made from boats require some special equipment that is not used for any other
type of measurement:
1. A boat of sufficient size to support the gaging crew and the equipment.

2. Extra-large tag-line reel for use on wide streams.
3. A pair of oars.
4. A bailing device.
5. A life jacket for each crew member.
6. Outboard or inboard engine to power the boat.
An engine is required for gaging large rivers. The engine must be able to power the boat at a speed
at least 25 per cent greater than the expected maximum speed of the flow. The length of the boat
must be sufficient to ensure safe manoeuvrability. A simple rule for the selection of boats is
presented in equation below:
v = 1.3 v'L (3)

where
v’ = the maximum relative speed of the boat in m/s and
L = the waterline length of the boat in m
An engine is usually not required on small streams where the boat can be attached to a cable
stretched across the river.
In a boat measurement, the current meter may be suspended on a rod or on a cable using a
bridge board. Specially designed extendable boat-booms or boat cranes are available for boat
measurements. By means of a boom, the current meter may be placed and operated so as to
be unaffected by any disturbance in velocities that may be caused by the boat itself.
6.2.2.6 Miscellaneous Equipment

Several other items of equipment that have not been mentioned are necessary when current meter
measurements are made. These are the timers, headset, and waders.
a. Timers
In order to determine the velocity at a point with a current meter, it is necessary to count the
revolutions of the rotor during a certain interval of time, usually 40 to 60 seconds. The velocity is
then obtained from the current-meter rating table. The time interval is measured to the nearest
second with a stop watch.
The stop watch commonly used is a still-movement type graduated to the fifth of a second. One
complete revolution of the large hand is made in 60 seconds. A smaller dial on the face of the
watch indicates the number of minutes the watch has been running up to 30 minutes. Depressing
the stem of the watch starts it, a second depression of the stem will stop it, and a third depression
resets the watch to zero. The watches should be checked periodically to be certain they are
correct and accurate.
b. Headset
The revolutions of the current-meter rotor must be counted during the observation of velocity. An
electrical circuit built into the current meter closes every time the rotor of the current meter has
made a set number of revolutions intervals. A battery and headphone, as shown in Figure 6-7, are
parts of the electrical circuit, and an audible click can be heard in the headphone at each electrical
closure. Some Hydrographers have adapted compact, comfortable hearing-aid-type phones to
replace headphones. Beepers that can be heard without the headset are also sometimes used. Do
not use a headset, or similar device, with the magnetic contact chamber because arcing can weld
the contacts. Measure the time interval to the nearest second with a stopwatch.

Figure 6-7. A-Analog stopwatch, B-current meter headset
c. Waders
Waders or high boots are needed when wading measurements are made. The waders should be
loose-fitting for easy removal in case of emergency. Unfortunately, waders are not available for use
by the Regional Hydrographers.
6.2.3 The Current Meter Measurement Site

A prospective gaging station location should be examined for the availability of discharge measuring
sites for the various stages expected. One of the aspects of this examination is to ascertain that
there will be a measuring site at low flow where the velocities will be in the range where the
current meter can measure them accurately. The suitability of cross sections at bridges for
accurate discharge measurements at high stages and the suitability of the bridges themselves as
measuring structures should be evaluated. If there are no suitable bridges, a site for a cableway or
footbridge should be selected. In the following, some characteristics of a good gaging site are
discussed. It is usually not possible to satisfy them all. However, these criteria should be used and
the best site available selected. Sometimes, different measuring cross-sections will be required for
the different stages of flow, especially for the low-water measurements.
The site selected should comply as far as possible with the following requirements:
a) The channel at the measuring site should be straight and of uniform cross-section and slope in
order to minimize abnormal velocity distribution. When the length of the channel is restricted,
it is recommended for current-meter measurement that the straight length upstream should be
at least twice that downstream.
b) Flow directions for all points on any vertical across the width should be parallel to one another
and at right angles to the measurement section.
c) The bed and margins of the channels should be stable and well defined at all stages of flow in
order to facilitate accurate measurement of the cross section and ensure uniformity of
conditions during and between discharge measurements.
d) The curves of the distribution of velocities should be regular in the vertical and horizontal plans
of measurement.
e) Conditions at the section and in its vicinity should also be such as to preclude changes taking
place in the velocity distribution during the period of measurement.
f) Sites displaying vortices, reverse flows or dead water should be avoided.
g) The measurement section should be clearly visible across its width and unobstructed by trees,
aquatic growth or other obstacles.

h) Measurement of flow from bridges can be a convenient and sometimes safer way of sampling
width, depth and velocity. When gaging from a bridge with divide piers, each section of the
channel should be measured separately. Particular care should be taken in determining the
velocity distribution when bridge apertures are surcharged or obstructed.
i) The depth of water at the section should be sufficient at all stages to provide for the effective
immersion of the current-meter or float, whichever is to be used.
j) If the site is being considered as a permanent station, it should be easily accessible at all times
with all necessary measurement equipment.
k) The section should be sited away from pumps, sluices and outfalls, if their operation during a
measurement is likely to create unsteady flow conditions.
l) Sites where there is converging or diverging flow should be avoided.
m) In those instances where it is necessary to make measurements in the vicinity of a bridge, it is
preferable the measuring site be upstream of the bridge. However in certain cases and where
accumulation of ice, logs or debris is liable to occur, it is acceptable that the measurement site
be downstream of the bridge.
n) It may, under certain conditions of river flow or level, prove necessary to carry out current-
meter measurements on sections other than the original chosen location. This is quite
acceptable if there are no substantial unmeasured losses or gains to the river in the intervening
reach and so long as all flow measurements can be related to any stage value recorded at the
principal reference section.
6.2.4 The Current Meter Measurement Procedures
6.2.4.1 Measurement of Width

The first measurement made in a discharge measurement is usually the determination of horizontal
stationing (width) in the cross section being measured. Width needs to be measured using the
proper equipment and procedures that apply to the type of measurement being made (that is,
wading, bridge or boat). The measurement of the width of the channel and the widths of the
individual segments (to the verticals) may be obtained by measuring the distances from or to a fixed
reference point (initial point) on the bank of the stream. The distance is usually determined by use
of a measuring tape or tag line stretched across the stream. The intervals between the verticals,
that are the widths of the segments, shall be similarly measured.
6.2.4.2 Spacing of the Measuring Verticals

Measurement of depth shall be made at intervals close enough to define the cross-sectional profile
accurately. Based on IS 1192.1981 which is identical with ISO 748:2007 “Hydrometry –
Measurement of Liquid flow in Open Channels using Current Meters and Floats”, that in judging
the specific number n of verticals in small channels (<5 m) that are to be defined for the purpose of
determining flow at a particular location, the following criteria could be applied. These criteria shall
be the minimum requirement and only practical constraints of time, costs, or on site conditions
should result in a reduction of these numbers.
Channel width < 0.5 m n = 5 to 6

Channel width > 0.5 m and < 1 m n = 6 to 7
Channel width > 1 m and < 3 m n = 7 to 12
Channel width > 3 m and < 5 m n = 13 to 16
Channel width > 5 m n ≥ 22
For channel widths >5 m, the number of verticals shall be chosen so that the discharge in each
segment is less than 5% of the total, insofar as possible, and that in no case should exceed 10%. In
all instances, measurements of depth made at the water’s edge are additional to the above. The
first and the last verticals should be as close as practically possible to the water edge.

6.2.4.3 Measurement of Depth
The second measurement normally made at a vertical is the stream depth. Measurement of depth
shall be made at intervals close enough to define the cross-sectional profile accurately. The
number of points at which depth shall be measured should be the same as the number of points at
which velocity is measured. Depth should be measured using the proper equipment and procedure
depending on the type of measurement being made (wading, bridge or boat).
The depth of the vertical and the position of the current meter in the vertical are measured by a
graduated rod (wading rod) on which the current meter slides, or by a sounding line on which the
current meter and the streamlined sounding weight are suspended. The line is usually controlled
by a gaging reel with a depth indicator.
In order to obtain accurate depths by the sounding line, the sounding weight must be equipped
with an electrical bottom-contact which gives a signal when the weight touches the stream bed. If
the sounding weight is not sufficiently heavy to keep the line with 5% of the perpendicular to the
water surface, the angle between the sounding line and the vertical should be measured to the
nearest degree with a protractor. The angle should not exceed 30%.
In certain cases, for example during flooding events, it may be impossible to determine an adequate
profile of cross-section during the measurement. For such cases, the full profile shall be
determined by surveying methods, either before or after the measurement. However, it should be
recognized that this method is subject to errors due to possible erosion or deposition in the cross-
section between the time the profile is determined and the time of discharge measurement.
6.2.4.4 Measurement of Velocity

By definition, the discharge of a stream is the product of a stream cross-section and the component
of the flow velocity normal to that section. Consequently, in current-meter measurements, the
measuring cross-section is placed normal to the general direction of flow. This is checked either
visually or by a protractor.
The velocity is measured at one or more points in the vertical by observing the number of
revolutions of the current-meter rotor during a period of 40-60 seconds. Where the vertical-
velocity distribution is approximately parabolic and the depth is greater than about 60 cm, velocity
observation is made at 0.20 and 0.80 of the depth below the surface. There are other methods
available in the measurement of velocity such as Vertical-Velocity Curve, Two-Tenths-Depth
method and Three-Point methods. However in the Philippines, only the Sixth-Tenths-Depth and
the Two-Point method are commonly used and hence, only discussions of these two methods are
made in this section.
a. Two-Point Method
This is the preferred method for making midsection discharge measurements with point velocity
meters. In the two-point method of measuring velocities, observations are made in each vertical at
0.20 and 0.8 of the depth below the surface. The average of these two observations is used as the
mean velocity in the vertical. According to USGS, this method is based on many studies of actual
observation and on mathematical theory. Their experience has shown that this method gives more
consistent and accurate results than any of the other methods, except for the vertical-velocity
curve method which is not commonly applied in the country. Table 6-3 shows the depths where
the two-point method can be used for the Price AA as well as the Pygmy type current meter.

Table 6-3. Depth of Two-point Method
Depth, in m Current meter Velocity method

0.75 and greater Price Type AA 0.2 and 0.8
0.5 – 0.75 Price Type AA 0.6
0.1 – 0.5 Price Pygmy 0.6
0.5 and greater Price Pygmy 0.2 and 0.8
b. Six-Tenths-Depth Method
In the 0.6-depth method, an observation of velocity made at 0.6 of the depth below the water
surface in the vertical is used as the mean velocity in the vertical. This method is mostly applicable
whenever the depth is between the 0.5 – 0.75 m for a Price AA and between 0.1 – 0.5 m for Price
Pygmy type current meter. During times when the gage height in a stream is changing rapidly and a
quick measurement must be made, this method can also be employed.
6.2.4.5 Performing the Current Meter Measurement

When the width of the measuring cross-section has been measured and the positions of the
verticals in the cross-section have been determined, the appropriate equipment for the current-
meter measurement is assembled and the Measurement Notes are prepared in order to record the
observations. Figure 6-8 shows an example of the Field Measurement Note used by the Regional
Hydrographers which include the following information:
1. Name of River
2. Location of the Station
3. Gaging Station ID
4. Date
5. Time and gage height at the start of the measurement
6. Type of the current meter used
7. Spin time of the rotor before the measurement
8. Type of Measurement (wading, bridge or boat)
9. Method of velocity measurement (0.6, 0.2 and 0.8, float)
10. Name of Hydrographers
11. Other pertinent information regarding the accuracy of the discharge measurement and
conditions which might affect the stage-discharge relationship

Department of Public Works and Highways Issue Date: 14 September 2015
Bureau of Design Doc. Code: DPWH-BOD-WPD-QMSF-23
WATER PROJECTS DIVISION Revision No.: 0
Page No.: 1 of 2
STREAM DISCHARGE MEASUREMENT
STREAM DISCHARGE MEASUREMENT DATE: angle dist. width depth W rev time/ vel vel for area discharge
coef. from secs. at pt. mean hor.ang.
1. STREAM STATION 2. MEASUREMENT NO. 3. OBSERVER (Name of Gagekeeper) I.P.
4. RESULTS OF COMPUTATION 5. CONDITIONS

WIDTH AREA VELOCITY CROSS SECTION FLOW
MEAN MAX. MIN. STABLE TURBULENT
UNSTABLE NORMAL
DISCHARGE GAGE HEIGHT % DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS WEATHER LOW
RAINY
CLOUDY SUNNY
6. MEASUREMENT 7. COEFFICIENT
METHOD SECTIONS GAGE HEIGHT WATER METHOD HOR. ANGLE SUSPENSION
CHANCE SUSPENSION
8. CURRENT METER 9. SPIRIT LEVEL CHECK

DATE RATED METHOD OF SUSPENSION WATER SPIN CHECK BAR FOUND CHANGED TO
Cable - 1, Suspension Rod - 2 CHECK (sac)
BEFORE AFTER AT
METER NO. SUSPENSION (above bottom LEVELS OBTAINED ADJUSTMENT
of weight
11. METHOD OF CROSSING STREAMS AND LOCATION OF MEASURING CROSS SECTION

MEASUREMENT ERROR
METHOD LOCATION (bridge only) DISTANCE GAGE
EVALUATION
WADING EXCELLENT
CABLE UPSTREAM ABOVE GOOD
BOAT DOWNSTREAM BELOW FAIR
BRIDGE POOR (over 8%)
12. GAGE READING
TIME START FINISH RECORDER INSIDE OUTSIDE
0
WEIGHTED MEAN GAGE HEIGHT 0.1
GAGE HEIGHT CORRECTION 0.2
CORRECT MEAN GAGE HEIGHT 0.3
DEPTH, M
13. GAGE 0.4
RECORD REMOVE INTAKE FLUSHED GAGE HEIGHT OF ELEVATION ZERO OF GAGE: LWE 0.5
ZERO FLOW 0.6
YES NO YES NO 0.7
REMARKS: MEMBER OF THE PARTY: 0.8
0.9
1
NAME OF PARTY LEADER: SIGNATURE 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
DISTANCE, M
Figure 6-8. Example of Field Measurement Note

Once the equipment and the measurement notes have been prepared, the measurement can begin.
a. Wading Measurement
Current-meter measurement by wading are preferred, if conditions permit. Wading measurement

offer advantage over measurement from bridges and boats because the hydrographer can usually
choose the best of several available cross-sections for the measurement.
A tag line or tape spanned across the measuring cross-section at right angles to the general
direction of the flow. If the same measuring cross-section is used always and if it is practicable,
cross-section should be defined by clearly visible markers, one on each bank, for easy identification
and for holding the tag line. While placing the tag line, the hydrographer should obtain a general
idea of the proper spacing of the measuring verticals by observing the total width of the cross-
section and the geometry of the stream bed. The first velocity observation should always be taken
as close as possible to the bank.
With the current meter supported on a graduated wading rod, the velocity observations are taken
at the appropriate distances along the tag line keeping the rod in a vertical position. The
hydrographer should stand in a position that affects the flow of the water passing the current
meter as little as possible. This position is usually obtained by standing close to the tag line on the
downstream side, facing the bank with water flowing against the side of the leg and holding the rod
at the tag line at arm’s length.
Avoid standing in the water if the feet and legs would occupy a considerable part of the cross-
section of a narrow stream. In smaller streams where the width permits, stand on a plank or other
support rather than in the water.
With the use of Price meter, keep the wading rod in a vertical position and the meter parallel to
the direction of flow while observing the velocity. If the flow is not at right angles to the tag line,
measure the angle coefficient carefully. During measurements of streams with shifting beds, the
scoured depressions left by the hydrographer’s feet can affect soundings or velocities. Generally,
place the meter ahead of and upstream from the hydrographer’s body and feet. Record an accurate
description of streambed and water-surface configuration each time a discharge measurement is
made in a sand-channel stream.
b. Bridge Measurement
Highway or railway bridges may often be utilized for current-meter measurements. However,
measurements from bridges are usually less accurate than other types of measurements.
Contracted sections, piers and other obstructions affect the distribution of the velocities and it is
therefore necessary to use a large number of verticals as well as more observation points in each
vertical, especially close to the bridge piers and banks. Generally, there are two types of bridge
measurement using either rod or line suspension.

Rod Suspension from Bridge
Foot bridges may sometimes be used for gaging small streams. Although the procedure low flow
velocities may be the same as for a wading measurement, at high velocities it is often advisable to
measure the depth in the following manner:
1. For each selected vertical, a point is established on the bridge.

2. With this point as an index, the distance to the water surface is measured by lowering the
suspension rod until the base plate touches the water.
3. The rod is then lowered to the bottom of the stream and the rod reading is again noted at
the index point. The difference in the readings is the depth of water at the vertical.
Measuring the depth in this manner tends to eliminate errors that may be cause by the piling up of
water on the upstream face of the rod. The natural flow of water is not disturbed when measuring
from a foot bridge as is often the case when measuring from a boat or by wading.
Line Suspension from Bridge
For higher bridges and for greater depths, the current meter and weight have to be suspended on a
cable. The cable is controlled by a gaging reel mounted on a bridge crane. A handline may be used
with the smaller weights. No set rule can be given for selecting the upstream or downstream side
of a bridge for discharge measurements.
The advantages of using the upstream side of the bridge are:
1. The hydraulic conditions at the upstream side of the bridge opening are usually more
favourable.
2. Approaching drifts can be seen and avoided more easily.
3. The stream bed at the upstream side of the bridge is not like to be scoured as badly as the
downstream side.
The advantages of using the downstream side of the bridge are:
1. Vertical angles are easily measured on the downstream side as the sounding line will move
away from the bridge.
2. The streamlines may be straightened out when passing through a bridge opening with piers.
Whether to use the upstream or the downstream side of a bridge for a current-meter
measurement should be decided individually for each bridge after considering the factors
mentioned above and the conditions at the bridge such as location of the way-say and traffic
hazards.

c. Boat Measurement
Discharge measurement taken from a boat is a common way of measuring discharges when the
stream is too deep to wade. One limiting factor in the use of boats is high velocity of the water, as
personal safety has to be considered.
A heavy tag line is spanned across the river at the measuring section. The tag line serves the dual
purpose of holding the boat in position during the measurement, and of measuring the width of the
river and positioning the measuring verticals. The tag line is wound on a reel which is operated
from the stern of the boat as the boat is propelled across the river. On the bank, the slack of the
cable is taken up by means of a block and tackle attached to the reel and to an anchored support
on the bank. If there is traffic on the river, one man must be stationed on the bank to lower and
raise the tag line to allow the traffic to pass. Streamers should be fixed on the tag line so that it
may be seen by boat pilots.
A permanent supporting cable, crossed across the river, to which the boat is anchored during
discharge measurements, will often prove advantageous. This method is less laborious and safer for
the personnel performing the measurement, especially at high water conditions. A permanent
cable must be erected well above the highest flood level expected.
When a boat is used, the current meter should be held such that it is not affected by the
disturbances of flow caused by the boat and measurements should be taken at the front of the
boat. The minimum distance from the point of observation to the boat should preferably be greater
than 0.6 times the maximum width of the boat.
For measurements made by the one-point method, the current meter should be exposed for 120
seconds or for 150 revolutions whichever occurs later. If measurements are made at more than
one point in each vertical, the current meter should be exposed for a period of at least 30 seconds
at each point in the vertical. If the water velocity is known to be subject to periodic pulsations, it is
advisable that the current meter should be exposed at each selected point for at least two
(preferably three consecutive periods) consecutive periods of 60 seconds or for periods of
sufficient duration to cover at least two periods of pulsation and the average of all the separate
readings is taken as the velocity at the point. The velocity at the point should then be taken to be
the average of all the separate readings, unless it is apparent that the difference is due to some
cause other than pulsation of the flow.
The current meter should be removed from the water at intervals for examination, usually when
passing from one vertical to another.
More than one current meter may be used in determining velocities in the individual verticals;
different current meters being used for consecutive verticals. The averaging effect may tend to
reduce the systematic error of measurement.
In channels where the flow is unsteady, it is useful to correct for the variations in the total
discharge during the period of the measurement not only by observing the change in the stage, but
also by continuously measuring the velocity at some conveniently chosen point. Experience has
shown that, provided the variations in the discharge are small, the velocity distribution is not
modified significantly.
6.2.5 Computation of Current Meter Measurement
6.2.5.1 The Arithmetic Mid-section Method

In the midsection method of computing a current-meter measurement, it is assumed that the
velocity sample at each vertical represents the mean velocity in a rectangular subsection. The

subsection area extends laterally from half the distance from the preceding observation vertical to
half the distance to the next, and vertically from the water surface to the sounded depth.
The cross section is defined by depths at verticals 1,2,3,4 . . . n. At each vertical the velocities are
sampled by current meter to obtain the mean velocity for each subsection. The subsection
discharge is then computed for any subsection at vertical x by use of the equation,
(𝑏𝑖 − 𝑏(𝑖−1) 𝑏(𝑖+1) − 𝑏𝑖

𝑞𝑖 = 𝑣𝑖 [( )+ ( )] 𝑑𝑖
2 2
(4)
𝑏(𝑖+1) − 𝑏(𝑖−1)
= 𝑣𝑖 [ ] 𝑑𝑖
2
Where
qi = discharge through subsection i,
vi = mean velocity at vertical i,
bi = distance from initial point to vertical i,
b(i-1) = distance from initial point to preceding vertical,
b(i+1) = distance from initial point to next vertical, and
di = depth of water at vertical i.
Thus, for example, the discharge through subsection 4 (heavily outlined in Figure 6-9) is
𝑏5− 𝑏3
𝑞4 = 𝑣4 [ 2
] 𝑑4 (5)
The procedure is similar when x is at an end section. The “preceding vertical” at the beginning of
the cross section is considered coincident with vertical 1; the “next vertical” at the end of the
cross section is considered coincident with vertical n. Thus,
𝑏2− 𝑏1
𝑞1 = 𝑣1 [ 2
] 𝑑1 (6)
and
𝑏𝑛− 𝑏(𝑛−1)
𝑞𝑛 = 𝑣𝑛 [ 2
] 𝑑𝑛 b (7)
For the example shown in Figure 6-9, q1, is zero because the depth at observation point 1 is
zero.
However, when the cross-section boundary is a vertical line at the edge of the water as at location
n, the depth is not zero and velocity at the end section may or may not be zero. Equations 6 and 7
are used whenever there is water only on one side of an observation point such as at the edge of
the stream, piers, abutments and islands. It usually is necessary to estimate the velocity at an end
section because it normally is impossible to measure the velocity accurately with the current meter
close to a boundary. There also is the possibility of damage to the equipment if the flow is
turbulent. The estimated velocity is usually made as a percentage of the adjacent section. The
summation of the discharges for all the partial sections is the total discharge of the stream. An
example of the measurement notes is shown in Figure 6-10.

Note:
1,2,3……n : Observation verticals
b1, b2, b3,……. Bn : Distance, in meters, from initial point to the observation vertical
d1, d2, d3,……. Dn : Depth of water, in meters, at the observation vertical
Dashed lines : Boundaries of subsections, the one heavily outlined is discussed in text.
Figure 6-9. Definition sketch of mid-section method of computing

Cross-section area for discharge measurement
A summary of the discharge measurement, including gage readings before, during, and after the
discharge measurement, is prepared as a part of the discharge measurement. This summary is
sometimes referred to as a front sheet. This form will also be available for download from the
Streamflow Management System website where Regional Hydrologists can use to record their
discharge measurement data. Summary sheets can be enhanced to show additional information
about the gage, the discharge measurement, and other measurements made during the course of
the visit to the gaging station.

Page No.: 1 of 2
October 26, 2007 coef. from secs. at pt. mean hor.ang.
89.0 LWE
Rio Chico River, Zaragoza, Nueva Ecija Froilan Escosa
4. RESULTS OF COMPUTATION 5. CONDITIONS 95.0 4.50 0.92 50 42 0.811 0.870 4.140 3.600
WIDTH AREA VELOCITY CROSS SECTION FLOW 60 44 0.928
MEAN MAX. MIN. STABLE TURBULENT 98.0 3.00 2.70 44 42 0.715 0.796 8.100 6.444
44.00 45.59
0.572 0.928 0.161 UNSTABLE NORMAL 54 42 0.876
DISCHARGE GAGE HEIGHT % DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS WEATHER LOW 101.0 3.00 2.00 40 46 0.595 0.670 6.000 4.017
RAINY 48 44 0.744
26.078 11.63
CLOUDY SUNNY 104.0 3.00 2.70 36 40 0.615 0.632 8.100 5.119
6. MEASUREMENT 7. COEFFICIENT 38 40 0.649
METHOD SECTIONS GAGE HEIGHT WATER METHOD HOR. ANGLE SUSPENSION 107.0 3.00 1.50 20 40 0.345 0.457 4.500 2.054
CHANCE SUSPENSION 34 41 0.568
0.60, 0.20, 0.80 d 12 2
110.0 3.00 0.90 30 41 0.502 0.577 2.700 1.557
8. CURRENT METER 9. SPIRIT LEVEL CHECK 40 42 0.651
DATE RATED METHOD OF SUSPENSION WATER SPIN CHECK BAR FOUND CHANGED TO 113.0 3.00 0.70 20 40 0.345 0.345 2.100 0.725
Cable - 1, Suspension Rod - 2 CHECK (sac)
622-G
BEFORE AFTER AT 116.0 3.00 0.65 24 42 0.393 0.393 1.950 0.766
METER NO. SUSPENSION (above bottom LEVELS OBTAINED ADJUSTMENT
of weight 119.0 3.00 0.55 18 42 0.297 0.297 1.650 0.490
80
11. METHOD OF CROSSING STREAMS AND LOCATION OF MEASURING CROSS SECTION 122.0 3.00 0.45 16 44 0.253 0.253 1.350 0.342
MEASUREMENT ERROR
EVALUATION 125.0 3.00 0.80 12 42 0.200 0.227 2.400 0.544
WADING EXCELLENT 16 44 0.253
X CABLE UPSTREAM ABOVE GOOD 128.0 3.00 0.65 10 44 0.161 0.161 2.600 0.419
BOAT DOWNSTREAM BELOW FAIR
BRIDGE X ALONG THE GAGE POOR (over 8%) 133.0 5.00
12. GAGE READING RWE
TIME START FINISH RECORDER INSIDE OUTSIDE
3:30 PM 11.63
4:15 PM 11.63
0.00

GAGE HEIGHT CORRECTION
1.00
DEPTH, M
CORRECT MEAN GAGE HEIGHT
13. GAGE 1.50
RECORD REMOVE INTAKE FLUSHED GAGE HEIGHT OF ELEVATION ZERO OF GAGE:
ZERO FLOW 30 486 m 2.00
YES NO YES NO
Gerardo Orteo Rommy Sicat
3.00
Eulogio Sigua
70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
NAME OF PARTY LEADER: SIGNATURE
DISTANCE, M
Rosalinda P. Tapang
Figure 6-10. Example of measurement notes

6.2.5.2 The Arithmetic Mean-section Method
The mean-section method was used by the Bureau of Research and Standards (BRS) prior to the
transfer of streamflow data collection and processing to the Bureau of Design. It differs from the
midsection method in computation procedure. Partial discharges are computed for partial sections
between successive verticals. The velocities and depths at successive verticals are each averaged,
and each partial section extends laterally from one vertical to the next. Discharge is the product of
the average of two mean velocities, the average of two depths, and the distance between verticals.
This is repeated for each partial section. The additional discharge in the partial sections adjacent to
each bank is estimated on the assumption that the velocity and depth at the banks are zero. If,
however, this discharge is a significant part of the total flow then the mean velocity in the vicinity of
the bank should be estimated, or measured if possible. The total discharge is obtained by summing
the discharges from all of the partial sections, including the end sections near each bank. A study by
Young (1950) concluded that the midsection method is simpler to compute and is a slightly more
accurate procedure than the mean section method. This is also the conclusion stated in ISO 748.
6.2.6 Accuracy of Current Meter Measurements

The accuracy of a discharge measurement is dependent on many factors, including the equipment
used, the location and characteristics of the measuring section, the number and spacing of verticals,
the rate of change in stage, the measurement of depth and velocity, presence of debris in the
measuring section, wind, experience of the hydrographer, and various conditions that can occur
during the process of making the measurement. The evaluation of the accuracy of a measurement
has long been a qualitative assessment that takes some or all of these factors into account. A
quantitative measure of the accuracy for some discharge measurements can also be made. The
following two sections of this chapter describe these methods.
6.2.6.1 Qualitative Evaluation

Every discharge measurement should be evaluated for accuracy using the qualitative method.
Historically, this has been the preferred method, and the hydrographer should make this evaluation
immediately after making the measurement. It is difficult to provide written guidelines for making a
qualitative evaluation of accuracy. A good qualitative evaluation depends mostly on the experience
and training of the hydrographer. Several of the factors that should be considered by the
hydrographer are as follows:
Measuring section—Consider factors such as the uniformity of depths, the smoothness of the
streambed, the streambed material (that is, smooth sand; small, firm gravel; large rocks; soft muck;
and so forth), the ability to accurately measure the depth, the approach conditions, presence of
bridge piers, and other conditions that would affect measurement accuracy.
Velocity conditions—Consider smoothness of velocity, uniformity of velocity, very slow velocity,

very high velocity, turbulence, obstructions that may affect the vertical velocity distribution, use of
one-point or two-point method, length of counting (40 or more seconds versus half-counts), and
other factors that affect accuracy of velocity measurements.
Equipment—Consider the type of current meter used (Price AA, Price pygmy, acoustic, or
electromagnetic), the type of depth-sounding equipment, and the condition of the equipment.
Spacing of observation verticals— Stream width ≤ 5 m, the number of observation verticals is given
in Section 6.4.2.2. However, if width is > 5 0, use about 25 to 30 verticals for a discharge
measurement, spaced so that no more than 5 percent of the total discharge is contained in each
subsection. Although this is frequently difficult to attain, except in unusual cases, no more than 10
percent of the total discharge should be in a subsection. Otherwise, the accuracy will be negatively
affected.

Rapidly changing stage—although discussed in previous sections of this chapter, this condition
should also be considered when assessing the accuracy of the measurement. Using the shortcut
methods previously described will result in less accurate measurements of discharge.
Wind—Wind can affect the accuracy of a discharge measurement by obscuring the angle of the
current, or by creating waves that make it difficult to sense the water surface prior to making
depth soundings. Wind can also affect the vertical-velocity distribution, particularly near the
surface, and can cause vertical and (or) horizontal movement of the current meter while making a
boat measurement, introducing possible error in velocity measurements
The qualitative method of assessing the accuracy of a discharge measurement requires that the
hydrographer consider all of the above items and their cumulative effect on the measurement
accuracy.
The front page of the discharge measurement note sheet has space for describing (1) the cross
section, (2) the flow, (3) the weather, and (4) any other flow conditions that relate to the accuracy.
These descriptions, along with the type of equipment, number of verticals, velocity measurement
method, and other measurement conditions, should provide the basis for rating the measurement
as excellent (2 percent), good (5 percent), fair (8 percent), or poor (more than 8 percent). For
instance, a measurement might be rated as excellent (2 percent) if (1) the cross section is smooth,
firm, and uniform; (2) the velocity is smooth and evenly distributed; (3) the equipment is in good
condition; (4) the two-point velocity measurement method was used; and (5) weather conditions
are good (no wind). On the other hand, if several of these factors make it difficult to accurately
measure depth and (or) velocity, the measurement might be rated fair (8 percent), or even poor
(more than 8 percent).
6.2.7 Uncertainties in Discharge Measurements

All discharge measurements, no matter how carefully made, are subject to uncertainty. The
measurement uncertainty can be thought of as a quantitative measure of the dispersion of the
measured discharge about the true discharge. This uncertainty arises because each measurement is
subject to errors of unknown magnitude. The total uncertainty in a discharge measurement may
arise from several sources, including:
 Uncertainty in the measurement of the cross-sectional area, which in turn arises from the
following:
 uncertainty in measurements of width; and
 uncertainty in measurements of depth;
 Uncertainty in the measurement of the water-velocity profile, which in turn arises from the
following:
 instrument uncertainty;
 pulsation and turbulence in open-channel flow;
 deviation from our assumptions about the vertical velocity distribution; and
 uncertainty due to oblique angles in the flow velocity;
 Uncertainty due to deviation from assumptions used in the computation procedures; and
 Other random or systematic errors.
These component uncertainties can be combined to estimate the total uncertainty of a single
discharge measurement. Where feasible, values for these component uncertainties should be
estimated independently for each site. The uncertainty is often expressed as a standard deviation. If
we assume that measurement errors are normally distributed, then this uncertainty can be used to
construct confidence intervals for the measured discharge value. For example, the true discharge
can be expected to be within one standard deviation of the measured value at the 68-percent
confidence level. At the 95-percent confidence level, the true discharge can be expected to be
within two standard deviations of a single measured value.

6.2.8 Measurement of Discharge by Float Method
When conditions are such that it is not feasible to use mechanical current meter equipment, other
methods maybe employed for measuring discharge. In the Philippines, only the float method is the
only available option aside from the current meter method.
Floats are seldom used in stream gaging but are useful in an emergency for measuring high
discharges under the following circumstances:
1. No conventional or optical current meter is available.
2. A current meter is available but the measurement structure-bridge or cableway-has been
destroyed, and equipment for measuring from a boat is unavailable.
Surface floats are used in those situations, and they may be almost any distinguishable article that
floats, such as wooden disks; bottles partly filled with water, soil, or stones; or oranges. Floating
distinguishable pieces of drift may be used if they are present in the stream.
Two cross sections are selected along a reach of straight channel for a float measurement. The
cross sections should be far enough apart so that the time the float takes to pass from one cross
section to the other can be measured accurately. A travel time of at least 20 seconds is
recommended, but a shorter time may be used for streams with such high velocities that it is not
possible to find a straight reach of channel having adequate length. The water-surface elevation
should be referenced to stakes along the bank at each cross section and at one or more
intermediate sites. Those elevations will be used at a later date, when conditions permit, to survey
cross sections of the measurement reach, and the end stakes will be used to obtain the length of
the reach. The surveyed cross sections will then be used to derive an average cross section for the
reach.
In making a float measurement a number of floats are distributed uniformly across the stream
width, and the position of each with respect to distance from the bank is noted. The floats should
be introduced a short distance from the upstream cross section so that they will be traveling at the
speed of the current when they reach the upstream section. A stopwatch is used to time their
travel between the end cross sections of the reach. The estimated position of each float with
respect to the bank is also noted at the downstream cross section.
In the absence of a bridge or cableway from which to introduce the floats in the stream, the floats
will have to be tossed in from the stream bank. If that situation exists, at a wide stream, it may be
impossible to position any floats in the central core of the stream where most of the flow occurs.
A measurement of discharge made under those conditions would be meaningless. However, the
difficulty of introducing floats at intervals across the entire width of a wide stream can be
overcome if a boat can be obtained for the purpose.
The velocity of a float is equal to the distance between the ends cross sections divided by the time
of travel. The mean velocity in the vertical is equal to the float velocity multiplied by a coefficient
whose value is dependent on the shape of the vertical-velocity profile of the stream and on the
depth of immersion of the float with respect to stream depth. A coefficient of 0.85 is commonly
used to convert the velocity of a surface float to mean velocity in the vertical.
The procedure for computing the discharge is similar to that used in computing the discharge for a
conventional current-meter measurement. The discharge in each subsection of the average cross
section is computed by multiplying the area of the subsection by the mean vertical velocity for that
subsection. The total discharge is equal to the sum of the discharges for all subsections.
Float measurements of discharge that are carefully made under favourable conditions may be
accurate to within ±10 percent. Wind may adversely affect the accuracy of the computed discharge
by its effect on the velocity of the floats. If a non-uniform reach is selected and few floats are used
in the cross section, measurement results may be in error by as much as 25 percent.

6.2.9 Quality Assurance and Quality Control
It should be the goal of each hydrographer to make discharge measurements of the highest quality
and with as little error as possible. As explained in the earlier sections of this chapter there are
many actions that must be performed before, during, and after the actual measuring process. In the
many implicit decisions that must be made during the course of a discharge measurement, the
hydrographer, through training and experience, must develop a keen sense of what is correct and
incorrect through hydrologic/engineering judgment, and strive to continually take the correct
course of action in making a discharge measurement. This is commonly known as quality assurance
and quality control, sometimes referred to as QA/QC. Some of the QA/QC functions are implicit;
that is, they are generally understood, performed automatically, and are not specifically defined in
the measurement notes and sometimes must be accomplished through hydrologic/engineering
judgment. Careful regard for safety, good hydrologic/engineering judgment, and observance of
proper procedure are implicit functions that cannot be over-stressed in making a precise and
accurate discharge measurement. On the other hand, some actions are explicit, such as performing
regular spin tests of current meters, or making check measurements when the first measurement
may be suspect. Following are some of the QA/QC actions that should be observed for making
high-quality discharge measurements. These are not all inclusive, and each hydrographer should
always include and document any other actions that relate to the quality of the measurement.
These QC/QA actions are highly recommended for adaptation in the Philippines.
 Care of current meters, current profilers, and sounding equipment - Previous sections of this
chapter describe the proper care of current meters, current profilers, and sounding equipment.
Current meters are especially susceptible to damage and misalignment while in use, as well as
in transit, if they are not properly protected. The hydrographer should follow all established
guidelines to ensure that the stream gaging equipment, especially the current meter and (or)
profiler, are in good working condition. While making a discharge measurement, the current
meter should be periodically observed and checked to be sure it is operating smoothly and has
not become fouled by debris, ice, or other obstructions.
 Spin tests of current meters - one of the requirements for maintaining and checking current
meters is a periodic, timed spin test under controlled conditions. The procedure for making a
timed spin test is described in a previous section of this chapter. In addition, before, during, and
after every discharge measurements, check that the rotor is turning smoothly and does not
come to an abrupt stop.
 Carefulness, good judgment, and proper procedure - it is the Hydrographers responsibility to

apply proper procedures with care and good judgment while making streamflow
measurements. These implicit functions of QA/QC should be observed at all times.
 Computing and plotting the measurement on site - Compute a discharge measurement as soon
as possible after it is completed. Do this at the site before leaving. If the measurement does not
plot within 5 percent (or other specified percentage) of the rating curve in use, or if it is not in
line with the previous trend of measurements, try to find an explanation. For instance, there
may be an obvious change of the control that would explain the deviation. All such explanations
should be documented in the measurement notes. If a satisfactory explanation cannot be found,
then make a check measurement.
 Making check measurements - If possible, while making a check measurement, select a different
cross section from the original section and use a different current meter. Make the check
measurement as close in time and gage height to the original measurement as possible.
 Checking discharge measurements - In general, hand- computed discharge measurements are

not checked for mathematical errors. Nevertheless, check measurements that do not plot
within an acceptable percentage of the rating curve, or within the previous trend of

measurements. Likewise, check measurements that define a significant extrapolation of the low
end or high end of a rating curve.
 Documentation of QA/QC - Document in the measurement notes, if possible, all measures

taken to ensure that discharge measurements are accurate and of high quality. Some QA/QC
measures require specific documentation independent of the measurement notes. For example,
current-meter spin tests have specific forms that document the spin-test results and all repairs
to the meter.
6.2.10 Safety Requirements

Practicing personal and overall safety is of utmost importance when working near, in, and above
water. Detailed description of the safety requirements is not included in this Manual; however,
each hydrographer should be familiar with, and should observe the necessary safety requirements
when they are in the field during discharge measurements.
6.2.11 Field Procedures

As mentioned in the earlier section of this Manual that after the width of the measuring cross-
section has been measured, the positions of the verticals in the cross-section have been
determined, and the appropriate equipment for the current-meter measurement is assembled, the
Measurement Field Notes should then be prepared in order to record the observations.
a. Field Notes
Field Measurement Note used by the Regional Hydrographers should include all important
information pertinent to the gaging station and the data obtained during the conduct of discharge
measurement. An example of Stream Discharge Measurement form used by the Regional
Hydrographers is shown in Figure 6-10 and includes the following:
1. Name of River
2. Location of the Station
3. Gaging Station ID
4. Date
5. Time and gage height at the start of the measurement
6. Type of the current meter used
7. Spin time of the rotor before the measurement
8. Type of Measurement (wading, bridge or boat)
9. Method of velocity measurement (0.6, 0.2 and 0.8, float)
10. Name of Hydrographers
11. Other pertinent information regarding the accuracy of the discharge measurement and
conditions which might affect the stage-discharge relationship
b. Data Storage
All completed paper copies of Stream Discharge Measurement forms should be collated within the
appropriate station folder and stored properly for safekeeping. The data from the field notes
should be transmitted by the Regional Hydrographers through the web-based entry form for
discharge measurement as soon as the Hydrographers return to the office or anywhere they have
access to the internet after their field measurement.

c. Transmission
Shown in Figure 6-11 is the path the collected discharge measurement data will follow from the
field to transmission through the web-based entry form and into the central server of the
Streamflow Management System in DPWH Main.
Each region will be provided with a username and password in order for them to login and access
the “Data Encoding” Option of the website where they can download the data entry forms (as
shown in Figure 6-12 and 6-13) to input their collected field data and upload it back to the
website.
An important advantage with the development of the streamflow website is that field data can
reach DPWH-BOD within a shorter period of time, and in most cases data is retrieved real-time.
In the existing system, collection of field notes and stream discharge measurement sheets takes one
to three months. It takes another month for the field data from the regional offices to finally reach
the DPWH Central Office in Metro Manila.
Figure 6-11. Data flow for Discharge Measurement Collection

Figure 6-12. Streamflow Management System Homepage and Login window

Current Meter position
Pt. Description
Method Current Meter Depth of measure
Station A SAMPLE STATION IP
Gage Ht 1.42
Date 2014-10-23 LWE 1 2 3 16 17 RWE
Time 08:00 AM
Elev of Zero gage 17.21
Condition of flow Turbulent
Weather Cloudy
Conducted by Edgar B. Garcia Equation of Velocity
Checked by Adelina P. Gomez Area (Left) Area (Right) = C1 + C2 * Rev / Time
CROSS SECTION
( STANDARD: FACING DOWNSTREAM )
equation of velocity = c1 + c2 * Rev / Time
Pt.Desc Dist From IP Depth Depth of Rev Time c1 c2 Velocity Mean Area Area Area Q WS Bed
Measure Vel Left Right Elev Elev
m m m N s m/s m/s sq.m sq.m sq.m cu.m/s m m
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LWE 3 18.63 18.63

1 4.4 0.18 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.784 0.126 0.180 0.306 0.240 18.63 18.45
0.8D 0.007538 0.675303
2 6.4 0.15 0.6D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73 0.733 0.158 0.150 0.308 0.226 18.63 18.48
0.8D 0.007538 0.675303
3 8.4 0.13 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.135 0.130 0.265 0.201 18.63 18.50
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
4 10.4 0.12 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.123 0.120 0.243 0.184 18.63 18.51
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
5 12.4 0.08 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.090 0.080 0.170 0.129 18.63 18.55
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
6 14.4 0.02 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.035 0.015 0.050 0.038 18.63 18.61
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
7 16.4 0.00 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.005 0.000 0.005 0.004 18.63 18.63
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
8 18.4 0.00 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 18.63 18.63
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
9 20.4 0.06 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.060 0.045 0.105 0.080 18.63 18.57
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
10 22.4 0.00 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.015 0.000 0.015 0.011 18.63 18.63
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
11 24.4 0.05 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.076 18.63 18.58
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
12 26.4 0.05 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.050 0.050 0.100 0.076 18.63 18.58
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
13 28.4 0.15 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.125 0.150 0.275 0.209 18.63 18.48
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
14 30.4 0.26 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.233 0.260 0.493 0.374 18.63 18.37
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
15 32.4 0.42 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.380 0.420 0.800 0.607 18.63 18.21
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
16 34.4 0.19 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.248 0.190 0.438 0.332 18.63 18.44
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
17 36.4 0.22 0.6D 46 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.78 0.759 0.213 0.054 0.266 0.202 18.63 18.41
0.8D 43 40.00 0.007538 0.675303 0.73
RWE 37.05 18.63 18.63
TOTAL = 3.937 2.988
SUMMARY:
Area = 3.937 sq.m
Velocity = 0.759 m/s 0.42
Q= 2.988 cu.m/s
Figure 6-13. Example of Excel spreadsheet template for Discharge Measurement

available for download from the website

7. COMPUTATION OF DISCHARGE USING SIMPLE STAGE-DISCHARGE
RELATION
7.1 Introduction
This chapter describes methods and procedures for the determination of the stage-discharge
relation by correlating water level to discharge. A stream gaging station is a selected site on an open
channel for making systematic observations for the purpose of determining records of the discharge
and gage heights of the stream. At present, most stations nationwide are non-recording stations
equipped with wooden staff gage and read regularly three times a day by an observer. The term
gage height is often used interchangeably with stage, the former being the more appropriate term
when referring to a gage.
Stage (gage height) and discharge of a stream both vary most of the time. In general, it is not
practical to measure the discharge continuously. However, to obtain a continuous record of the
gage height at a site is relatively simple and less expensive. Then, if a relation between gage height
and discharge exists, an observed record of gage height can easily be converted into a record of
discharge, which is the information more commonly used in the design of structures, floodplain
management plans, etc.
The operations necessary to develop the stage discharge relation at a station include making a
sufficient number of discharge measurements usually by current meter and establishing a discharge
rating curve and are called the calibration or rating of the station. The rating curve is developed by
plotting measured discharge against the corresponding gage height and drawing a smooth curve of
relation between these two quantities.
At a new station many discharge measurements are needed to define the stage-discharge relation
throughout the entire range of stage. Periodic measurements are needed thereafter to either
confirm the permanence of the rating or to follow changes (shifts) in the rating. A minimum of 10
discharge measurements per year is recommended, unless it has been demonstrated that the stage-
discharge relation is unvarying with time. In that event the frequency of measurements may be
reduced. It is of prime importance that the stage-discharge relation be defined for flood conditions
or as a result of the variable channel and control conditions. It is essential that the stream-gaging
program have sufficient flexibility to provide for the non-routine scheduling of additional
measurements of discharge at those times.
If the discharge measurements cover the entire range of stage experienced during a period of time
when the stage-discharge relation is stable, there is little problem in defining the discharge rating for
that period. On the other hand, if, as is usually the case, discharge measurements are lacking to
define the upper end of the rating, the defined lower part of the rating curve must be extrapolated
to the highest stage experienced. Such extrapolations are always subject to error, but the error
may be reduced if the analysis has knowledge of the principles that govern the shape of rating curves.
7.2 The Stage-Discharge Relation
7.2.1 General
When a new river gaging station has been established, the general practice is initially to carry out a
series of discharge measurements well-distributed over the range of discharge variation, in order to
establish quickly the discharge rating curve. Usually, there are no difficulties involved in measuring
the lower and medium discharges. However, to obtain measurements at the higher stages is often a
difficult task and may take time. Thus, at a majority of gaging stations, discharge measurements are

not available for the high flood stages and the rating curve must be extrapolated beyond the range of
available measurements.
Very few rivers have absolutely stable characteristics. The calibration, therefore, cannot be carried
out once and for all, but has to be repeated as frequently as required by the rate of change in the
stage-discharge relation. Thus, it is the stability of the stage-discharge relation that governs the
number of discharge measurements that are necessary to define the relation at any time and to
follow the temporal changes in the stage-discharge relation. If the channel is stable, comparatively
few measurements are required. On the other hand, in order to define the stage-discharge relation
in sand-bed streams up to several discharge measurements a month may be required because of
random shifts in the stream geometry and the station control.
Sound hydrological practice requires that the discharge rating curve is determined as rapidly as
possible after the establishment of a new station. Unless the discharge rating curve is properly
established and maintained, the record of stage for the station cannot be converted into a reliable
record of discharge.
7.2.2 The Stage-Discharge Control

The subject of stage-discharge controls has been discussed earlier in Chapter 6, but a brief discussion
is given below.
The relation of stage to discharge is usually controlled by a section or reach of channel downstream
from the gage that is known as the station control. A section control may be natural or manmade; it
may be a ledge of rock across the channel, a boulder-covered riffle, an overflow dam, or any other
physical feature capable of maintaining a fairly stable relation between stage and discharge. Section
controls are often effective only at low discharges and are completely submerged by channel control
at medium and high discharges. Channel control consists of all the physical features of the channel
that determine the stage of the river at a given point for a given rate of flow. These features include
the size, slope, roughness, alignment, constrictions and expansions, and shape of the channel. The
reach of channel that acts as the control may lengthen as the discharge increases, introducing new
features that affect the stage-discharge relation.
Knowledge of the channel features that control the stage-discharge relation is important. The
development of stage-discharge curves where more than one control is effective, and where the
number of measurements is limited, usually requires judgment in interpolating between
measurements and in extrapolating beyond the highest measurements. That is particularly true
where the controls are not permanent and the various discharge measurements are representative
of changes in the positioning of segments of the stage-discharge curve.
7.2.3 The Point of Zero Flow

When constructing discharge rating curves, the gage height of zero flow, also termed the "point of
zero flow" is important information especially helpful when shaping the lower part of the curve. The
point of zero flow is the gage height at which the water ceases to flow over the control. This gage
height should be determined by field surveys whenever the flow is sufficiently low to allow an
accurate determination. Stream gages are usually established at an arbitrary datum. The elevation of
gage zero is decided on the day of establishment and set below the lowest stage anticipated at the
site. It is therefore only in a very few cases that the zero of the gage will correspond by coincidence
to the point of zero flow. The control section is defined by surveying a close grid of spot-levels over
a reach of the stream downstream from the station site or by surveying a sufficient number of cross-
sections.

The point of zero flow will be the lowest point in the controlling section. In those cases the control
is well-defined by a rocky barrier over which the water flows, usually, it is very easy to locate the
point of zero flow and obtain its correct gage height value.
Determination of the point of zero flow from soundings taken during current meter measurements
is not possible. These soundings might have been taken in any cross-section of the river in the
vicinity of the gage and will only give the correct point if the soundings happened to be taken in that
particular cross-section containing the control.
7.2.4 Complexities of Stage Discharge Relations

Stage-discharge relations for stable controls such as a rock outcrop and manmade structures such as
weirs, flumes and small dams usually present few problems in their calibration and maintenance.
However, complexities can arise when controls are not stable and/or when variable backwater
occurs. For unstable controls, segments of a stage-discharge relation may change position
occasionally, or even frequently. This is usually a temporary condition which can be accounted for
through the use of the shifting-control method.
Variable backwater can affect a stage-discharge relation, both for stable and unstable channels.
Sources of backwater can be downstream reservoirs, tributaries, tides, ice, dams and other
obstructions that influence the flow at the gaging station control. Methods of developing complex
ratings for variable backwater conditions will not be covered in this Manual.
Another complexity that exists for some streams is hysteresis, which results when the water surface
slope changes due to either rapidly rising or rapidly falling water levels in a channel control reach.
Hysteresis ratings are sometimes referred to as loop ratings, and are most pronounced in relatively
flat sloped streams. On rising stages the water surface slope is significantly steeper than for steady
flow conditions, resulting in greater discharge than indicated by the steady flow rating. The reverse is
true for falling stages. Details on hysteresis ratings will not be discussed in this Manual as well.
Future updating of this Manual will be necessary when cases of variable backwater conditions or
hysteresis have been reported to exist in any of the gaging stations nationwide.
7.3 Establishment of Discharge Rating Curve
7.3.1 General
The discharge rating curve is established from a graphical analysis of discharge measurements that
are plotted on graph paper or with the use of computer, either arithmetically or logarithmically
ruled. A correct analysis of the proper shape and position of the rating curve requires knowledge of
the channel characteristics at the particular gaging site being considered, knowledge of open channel
hydraulics and considerable experience and judgment.
In all stream gaging stations nationwide, single-gage stations are employed. The employment of a
single-gage station depends upon the assumption that the stage in a cross-section of a stream is a
unique function of the discharge only. This manual deals with the simple stage-discharge only and
where variable backwater effects are not present.
7.3.2 Simple Stage-Discharge Relations
7.3.2.1 List of Discharge Measurements

The first step before making a plot of stage versus discharge is to prepare a list of discharge
measurements that will be used for the plot. At a minimum this list should include at least 12 to 15
measurements, all made during the period of analysis. If the rating is segmented then more
measurements may be required. These measurements should be well distributed over the range in

gage heights experienced. It should also include low and high measurements from other times that
might be useful in defining the correct shape of the rating and for extrapolating the rating. Extreme
low and high measurements should be included wherever possible.
For each discharge measurement in the list, it is important that at least the following items are
included:
(a) Unique identification number;
(b) Date of measurement;
(c) Gage height of measurement;
(d) Total discharge;
(e) Accuracy of measurement;
(f) Rate-of-change in stage during measurement, a plus sign indicating rising stage and a minus sign
indicating falling stage.
Other information might be included in the list of measurements that is as important as well. For
instance, names of Hydrographers making the measurement, time of measurement, difference
between inside and outside gage readings (if any), location of measurement, method of measurement
and notes about the condition of the control. Table 7-1 shows a typical list of discharge
measurements summarized from the field notes (Figure 7-1), listing the above items including a
number of items in addition to the mandatory items. The discharge measurement list may be
handwritten for use when hand-plotting is done or the data may be a computer list where a
computerized plot is developed.
7.3.2.2 Graphical Plot of Discharge Measurements

The rating curve as developed for a single gage station will give the value of the normal discharge,
that is, the discharge under uniform steady flow conditions for a given stage. Stage-discharge
relations are usually developed from a graphical analysis of the discharge measurements plotted on
either rectangular coordinate or logarithmic plotting paper. In a preliminary step the discharge
measurements available for analysis are summarized in a table. Discharge is then plotted as the
abscissa, corresponding gage height is plotted as the ordinate, and a curve or line is fitted by eye to
the plotted points using ship curves on a rectangular coordinate. The plotted points carry the
identifying measurements which are numbered consecutively in chronological order so that time
trends can be identified.
A peculiarity of most rating curve plots is the parameters plotted along the ordinate and abscissa
scales are interchanged from the standard engineering practice. For rating curves where gage height
is the independent variable, gage height always is plotted as the ordinate, and the dependent variable
as the abscissa. This designation allows gage height, which is measured in a vertical direction, to be
plotted in a vertical direction. The rating curve slope for this method of plotting is defined as a
horizontal distance divided by a vertical distance.

Table 7-1. Typical List of Discharge Measurements
Station: Rio Chico River, DPWH Zaragosa, Nueva Ecija
Velocity (m/s) Gage Method of Location of

Width Area Discharge Method of
No. Date Height Sections Crossing Measuring Cross
(m) (sq.m.) Mean Max. Min. (m3/s) Measure-ment
(m) Stream Section
1 10-25-06 36.00 70.28 0.564 0.784 0.143 39.620 11.58 0.2, 0.8 d 8 Cable Along the gage
2 05-31-07 41.00 76.20 0.432 0.717 0.233 32.881 12.04 0.6, 0.2, 0.8 d 16 Cable Along the gage
14 08-20-08 57.00 169.67 0.574 0.739 0.420 97.324 14.12 0.6 d 9 Wading Along the gage
15 09-18-08 59.00 231.43 0.589 0.968 0.200 136.206 14.50 0.2, 0.8 d 11 Wading Along the gage
16 10-29-08 38.00 79.66 0.520 0.653 0.298 41.385 11.28 0.2, 0.8 d 6 Wading Along the gage
24 04-28-10 36.00 5.40 0.314 0.446 0.000 1.693 10.90 0.6 d 9 Wading Upstream
25 06-30-10 36.00 9.00 0.474 0.651 0.000 4.265 12.80 0.6 d 9 Wading Upstream
26 07-30-10 36.00 64.50 0.527 0.744 0.305 34.013 12.80 0.2, 0.8 d 11 Wading Upstream

Page No.: 1 of 2
August 25, 2009 coef. from secs. at pt. mean hor.ang.
80.0 LWE
Rio Chico River, Zaragoza, Nueva Ecija Froilan Escosa
4. RESULTS OF COMPUTATION 5. CONDITIONS 83.0 3.00 5.24 32 40 0.548 0.616 15.720 9.676
WIDTH AREA VELOCITY CROSS SECTION FLOW 40 40 0.683
MEAN MAX. MIN. STABLE TURBULENT 86.0 3.00 4.23 38 42 0.619 0.619 12.690 7.855
42.00 121.68
0.562 0.717 0.376 UNSTABLE NORMAL 38 42 0.619
DISCHARGE GAGE HEIGHT % DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS WEATHER LOW 89.0 3.00 4.00 30 42 0.490 0.587 12.000 7.038
RAINY 40 40 0.683
68.358 14.39
CLOUDY SUNNY 92.0 3.00 3.34 34 40 0.582 0.565 10.020 5.661
6. MEASUREMENT 7. COEFFICIENT 32 40 0.548
METHOD SECTIONS GAGE HEIGHT WATER METHOD HOR. ANGLE SUSPENSION 95.0 3.00 3.00 30 40 0.514 0.599 9.000 5.387
CHANCE SUSPENSION 40 40 0.683
0.60, 0.20, 0.80 d 13 2
98.0 3.00 3.05 32 42 0.522 0.620 9.150 5.668
8. CURRENT METER 9. SPIRIT LEVEL CHECK 42 40 0.717
DATE RATED METHOD OF SUSPENSION WATER SPIN CHECK BAR FOUND CHANGED TO 101.0 3.00 3.10 30 40 0.514 0.507 9.300 4.710
Cable - 1, Suspension Rod - 2 CHECK (sac) 32 44 0.499
622-G
BEFORE AFTER AT 104.0 3.00 3.20 34 42 0.554 0.570 9.600 5.472
METER NO. SUSPENSION (above bottom LEVELS OBTAINED ADJUSTMENT 36 42 0.586
of weight 107.0 3.00 2.90 30 44 0.468 0.499 8.700 4.337
80
34 44 0.529
11. METHOD OF CROSSING STREAMS AND LOCATION OF MEASURING CROSS SECTION 110.0 3.00 2.70 30 44 0.468 0.495 8.100 4.010
MEASUREMENT ERROR 32 42 0.522
EVALUATION 113.0 3.00 2.50 30 44 0.468 0.495 7.500 3.713
WADING EXCELLENT 32 42 0.522
X CABLE UPSTREAM ABOVE GOOD 116.0 3.00 2.40 32 42 0.522 0.506 7.200 3.643
BOAT DOWNSTREAM BELOW FAIR 30 42 0.490
BRIDGE X ALONG THE GAGE POOR (over 8%) 119.0 3.00 0.90 30 40 0.514 0.445 2.700 1.202
12. GAGE READING 24 44 0.376
TIME START FINISH RECORDER INSIDE OUTSIDE 122.0 RWE
5:00 AM 14.39
5:45 AM 14.39
0.00
0.50
GAGE HEIGHT CORRECTION 1.50
2.00
DEPTH, M
CORRECT MEAN GAGE HEIGHT
2.50
13. GAGE 3.00
RECORD REMOVE INTAKE FLUSHED GAGE HEIGHT OF ELEVATION ZERO OF GAGE: 3.50
ZERO FLOW 30 486 m 4.00
YES NO YES NO 4.50
Neil Edwin Timbol Rommy Sicat 5.50
6.00
Eulogio Sigua
70 80 90 100 110 120 130
NAME OF PARTY LEADER: SIGNATURE
DISTANCE, M
Rosalinda P. Tapang
Figure 7-1. Example of Discharge Measurement Notes

a. Arithmetic Plotting ScalesThe simplest type of plot uses an arithmetically divided plotting
scale as shown in Figure 7-2. Scale subdivisions should be chosen to cover the complete range
of gage height and discharge expected to occur at the gaging site. Scales should be subdivided in
uniform, even increments that are easy to read and interpolate.
They should also be chosen to produce a rating curve that is not unduly steep or flat. Usually the
curve should follow a slope of between 30° and 50°. If the range in gage height or discharge is
large, it may be necessary to plot the rating curve in two or more segments to provide scales that
are easily read with the necessary precision. This procedure may result in separate curves for low
water, medium water and high water. Care should be taken to see that, when joined, the separate
curves form a smooth, continuous combined curve.
The use of arithmetic coordinate paper for rating analysis has certain advantages, particularly in the
study of the pattern of rating shifts in the lower part of the rating. A change (shift) in the low-flow
rating at many sites results from a change in the gage height of effective zero flow, which means a
constant shift in gage height. A shift of that kind is more easily visualized on arithmetic coordinate
paper because on that paper the shift curve is parallel to the original rating curve. The two curves
are separated by a vertical distance equal to the change in the value of the gage height of zero flow.
A further advantage of arithmetic coordinate paper is the fact that the gage height of zero flow can
be plotted directly on arithmetic coordinate paper, thereby facilitating extrapolation of the low
water end of the rating curve. That cannot be done on logarithmic paper because zero values
cannot be shown on that type of paper.
For analytical purposes arithmetic scales have practically no advantage. For this reason, logarithmic
plotting should always be used initially in developing the general shape of the rating. The final curve
may be displayed on either type of graph paper and used as a base curve for the analysis of shifts. A
combination of the two types of graph paper is frequently used with the lower part of the rating
plotted on an inset of rectangular coordinate paper or on a separate sheet of rectangular
coordinate paper.
Source: How to establish stage-discharge rating curve, Hydrology Project, New Delhi 1999
Figure 7-2. An example of stage-discharge rating curve

b. Logarithmic Plotting Scales
General
The logarithmic representation of the stage discharge relation is commonly used because it
produces the best graphical form of a standard rating curve and readily adapts to the use of
ship drafting curves. Also, the logarithmic form of the rating curve can be made to approach a
straight line, or straight line segments, by adding or subtracting a constant value to the gage
height scale on the logarithmic graph paper. There are several other advantages that the
logarithmic form has, as:
1) A percentage distance off the curve is always the same regardless of where it is located.
Thus, a measurement that is 10 percent off the curve at high stage will be the same
distance away from the curve as a measurement that is 10 percent off at low stage,
2) Halving, doubling or adding a percentage to the gage height has no effect, the curve will
merely shift position but retain the same shape,
3) It is easy to identify the range in stage, for which different controls are effective,
4) The logarithmic form may be described by a simple mathematical equation that is easily
handled by electronic computers,
5) The curve can easily be extrapolated.
Regarding extrapolations, however, one has to be careful. If the control does not change
character at the higher stages, the same discharge equation will cover the whole range in stage
and the rating curve can be extrapolated up to the highest observed water level. If the control
changes either shape or character as the stage increases, the rating curve will consist of more
than one segment. In these cases, an extrapolation of the first segment up to the higher stages
will of course introduce serious errors.
Logarithmic Equation
The general equation of the relation between stage and discharge is given as:
𝑄 = 𝐾(𝐻 − 𝐻𝑜 )𝑛 (8)
Taking logarithms of the power type equation results in a straight line relationship of the form:
log(𝑄) = 𝑛 log(𝐻 − 𝐻𝑜 ) + log(𝐾) (9)

Or
𝑌 = 𝐵𝑋+𝐴 (10)
Where:
Q = Discharge (m3/s)
H = Measured gage height (m)
Ho = Gage height corresponding to Q=0
B = n, slope of the line (gradient)
A = log (K), intercept on the (log y)-axis, where log x = 0
Equation (8) is a parabolic equation which plots as a straight line on double logarithmic graph
paper. The equation will apply to cross-sections of rectangular, triangular, trapezoidal,
parabolic and other geometrically simple sections. Many natural streams approximate to these
shapes making equation (8) a general discharge equation.
The logarithmic discharge equation is seldom a straight line or a gentle curve for the entire
range in stage at a gaging station. Even if the same channel cross-section is the control for all
stages, a sharp break in the contour of the cross-section causes a break in the slope of the
rating curve. Also, the other constants in Equation (8) are related to the physical characteristics
of the stage-discharge control.

If the control section changes at various stages, it may be necessary to fit two or even more
equations, each corresponding to the portion of the range over which the control is the same.
If, however, too many changes in the parameters are necessary in order to define the
relationship, then possibly the logarithmic discharge equation may not be suitable and a curve
fitted by visual estimation would be better.
Estimating Gage Height of Zero Flow (a)

There are three methods of estimating the point of zero flow apart from making a field survey.
However, if at all possible, the estimates should always be sought verified by field visits and
inspection of longitudinal and cross-sectional profiles at the measuring section.

Trial and Error Procedure
All discharge measurements available are plotted on log-log paper and a median line balanced
through the scatter of data points. Usually, this line will be a curved line. Various trial values,
one value for each trial, are added or subtracted to the gage heights of the measurements until
the plot obtained forms a straight line. The trial value forming the straight line is the value of
𝐻𝑜 (Figure 7-3).
Source: Manual Procedures in Operational Hydrology Volume 4, NORAD 1979

Figure 7-3. Trial and error method of finding Ho
All the plotted data points may be used in the trial operation. However, it is better to use only
a few points selected from the median line first fitted to the points. Note that when a quantity
has to be added to the gage height readings of the measurements in order to obtain a straight
line, then 𝐻𝑜 will have a negative value, and vice versa. That is, the zero of the gage is in this
case positioned at a level above the point of zero flow and the point of zero flow will
consequently give a negative gage reading.
Note that when a quantity has to be added to the gage height readings of the measurements in
order to obtain a straight line, then Ho will have a negative value, and vice versa. That is, the
zero of the gage is in this case positioned at a level above the point of zero flow and the point
of zero flow will consequently give a negative gage reading.

Figure 7-4. Schematic illustration of how a curved line is transformed
into a straight line on logarithmic paper

Arithmetical Procedure
All discharge measurements are plotted on log-log paper (Figure 7-4). An average line drawn
through the scatter of points has resulted in the solid curved line. Three values of discharge Q1,
Q2, and Q3 are selected in geometric progression, that is, two values Q1 and Q3 are chosen from
the curve, the third value Q2 is then computed according to
𝑄22 = 𝑄1 𝑄3 (9)
The corresponding gage heights read from the plot are hl, h2, and h3. It is now possible to verify
that
ℎ1 ℎ3 − ℎ22
𝐻𝑜 = (10)
ℎ1 + ℎ3 − 2ℎ2
The solid curved line may now be transformed into a straight line by subtracting 𝐻𝑜 from each
value of the gage height h and re-plotting the new values.

Figure 7-5. Graphical determination of H0
Graphical Procedure
As above in Figure 7-5, three values of discharge in geometric progression are selected, but
this time from a plot on arithmetical graph paper. The points are A, B, and C as illustrated in
Figure 7-5. Vertical lines are drawn through A and B and horizontal lines are drawn through
B and C intersecting the verticals at D and E respectively. Let DE and AB meet at F. Then the
ordinate of F is the value of Ho.
The last two methods are based on the assumption that the lower part of the stage-discharge
relation including the selected points is a part of a parabola. In most cases this assumption
holds and the method will give acceptable results on the condition that there are enough
discharge measurements available to satisfactorily define the curvature of the lower part of the
rating curve.

Estimating the Constants K and n
After a straight line plot of the discharge measurements on double logarithmic graph paper has
been obtained, the constant B and A of flow equation (8) can be worked out in three ways;
namely, arithmetically, statistically and graphically.
The stage-discharge relation must first be analyzed from a plot on log-log graph paper in order
to establish whether the rating curve is composed of one or several straight line segments,
each having its own constants B and A. The constants for each separate segment must be
calculated separately.
A least square method is normally employed for estimating the rating curve coefficients. The
values of c and b may be worked out statistically according to the Method of the Least Squares.
That is, the sum of the squares of the deviations between the logarithms of the discharges
measured and estimated by a mean curve should be a minimum.
According to this the values of B and A are obtained from the following equations:
∑(𝑋) − 𝑁 𝐿𝑜𝑔 𝐾 − 𝑛 ∑(𝑋) = 0 (11)
∑(𝑋𝑌) − ∑(𝑋) 𝐿𝑜𝑔 𝐾 − 𝑛 ∑(𝑋 2 ) = 0 (12)
Where:
∑(𝑌) = the sum of all values of log Q
∑(𝑋) = the sum of all values of log (h-a)
∑(𝑋)2 = the sum of all values of the square of (X)
∑(𝑋𝑌) = the sum of all values of the product of (X) and (Y)
𝑁 = the number of observations
𝑁 ∑𝑁 𝑁 𝑁
𝑖 (𝑋𝑖 𝑌𝑖 )−(∑𝑖 𝑋 )(∑𝑖 𝑌 )
𝐵= 2 (13)
𝑁(∑𝑁 2 𝑁
𝑖 𝑋 )− (∑𝑖 𝑋 )
∑𝑁 𝑁
𝑖 𝑌𝑖 −𝐵 ∑𝑖 𝑋𝑖
𝐴= (14)
𝑁
The value of coefficients, K and n of power type equation can then be finally obtained as:
𝐵 = 𝑛 and 𝐾 = 10𝐴
It should be emphasized however that it is a common practice when using the Method of Least
Squares, to give all the discharge measurements an equal statistical weight in spite of the fact
that most of the measurements available for defining the relation will always be located at the
low and medium stages. Thus, an extrapolation of the discharge formula to the higher stages,
where at best very few and usually no data points are available, will be biased by the greater
number of low-lying data points. It follows that extrapolation of discharge formulas developed
by use of the Method of Least Squares should be done carefully and always checked against
other methods of extrapolation.
c. Computer plotting of discharge measurements and rating curves
Plotting of discharge measurements and rating curves, either arithmetic plots or logarithmic
plots, is best done by computer. These plots can be viewed on the computer monitor and/or
plotted on paper forms. Advantages of computer plots are:

a) Selection of measurements for plotting can be made quickly and easily;
b) Scale changes can be made and measurements re-plotted quickly;
c) Various values of Ho can be easily tried for the purpose of defining a straight-line rating on
logarithmic plots;
d) Separate rating segments, representing different control conditions, can be easily and
quickly plotted;
e) Rating analysis, as described in the subsequent section, is accomplished easily;
f) Plotting errors are virtually eliminated.
Logarithmic plots of rating curves must meet the requirement that the log cycles are square.
That is, the linear measurement of a log cycle, both horizontally and vertically, must be equal.
Otherwise, it is impossible to hydraulically analyze the resulting plot of the rating. This
requirement for square log cycles should always be tested because some computer programs
do not include this as an automatic feature.
7.3.3 Procedures for Establishing the Discharge Rating Curve

The following steps have been found practicable:
1. All discharge measurements are plotted on ordinary arithmetical graph paper, gage height on
vertical scale and discharge on horizontal scale. If the point of zero flow has been obtained by
an actual field survey, this point must also be included in the plot. The scales should be so
selected that the mean direction of the plot approximately follows the diagonal of the graph
sheet from left to right. Uncommon odd scales should not be used; suggested scales for the
gage height are 1:5, 1:10, and 1:20, preferably 1:10. A curve is fitted to the data points by visual
estimation or computer plotting.
2. At equal gage height increments, the discharge is selected from the curve and tabulated
together with its gage height. Usually, increments in gage height of 0.10 m are practical,
however, at the lower part of the curve where the curvature is greatest, it may sometimes be
better to use increments of 0.05 m; at the upper part of the curve increments of 0.20 m may
often be preferable.
3. The 1st and 2nd series of differences of the discharges are calculated and smoothed. From the
smoothed series of 1st differences, adjusted values of the discharge are calculated. Re-plot
adjusted discharge values on arithmetical graph scale. Inspect the plot, adjust if necessary.
When the rating curve is of a fairly regular shape, it is not considered necessary to use the 2nd
differences in order to smooth the 1st differences.
4. Plot final adjusted discharges against their corresponding gage height on double logarithmic
graph paper; draw a smooth curve through the data points by means of ship drafting curves if
done manually or by computer plotting.
5. Estimate Ho by trial and error. That is, add or subtract trial values for Ho to the gage height
until the curve drawn on log-log graph paper becomes transformed into a straight line, or into
two or more straight line segments. Usually, the following instances will occur:
a) One single straight line. Produced by a complete section control of regular shape, often the
crest of a rapid or a waterfall.
b) One single broken line consisting of two straight line segments, each with a different slope
but the same H. Produced by a complete section control having a sharp break in the cross-
sectional contour but otherwise of regular shape.

c) Two or more disconnected straight line segments each with its own slope n and Ho. The
most common case produced by a compound control of various combinations, usually
section control at low stage.
d) Sometimes it happens that the plotted curve cannot be transformed into straight line
segments, or rather, the segments will be so short and numerous that the logarithmic
representation of the curve would not be practical. Produced by a very irregular control,
Ho as obtained from a field survey or by the arithmetical and graphical techniques is valid
for the lowest segment only and for one single line. The "trial and error" technique has to
be used for the upper segment or segments. The trial and error technique is not too time
consuming, after some practice it will be found that only few trials are necessary in order
to find the correct Ho. It is not necessary to plot all the incremental data points of the table
during the trials. Inspecting the straight line plot, one last adjustment of the tabulated
discharges may prove necessary.
6. Inspect the straight line plot, one last adjustment of the tabulated discharges may prove
necessary.
7. When the curve has been found acceptable, the mathematical equation for each segment is
calculated.
7.3.4 Rating Tables

The rating table is a tabular representation of the rating curve and is a useful tool for converting
gage height readings into discharges once established.
The discharges entered in the 0.00-column are the final adjusted values in the rating curve, and give
the discharge for every 0.10 m increments in gage height. Intermediate values are obtained by
interpolating between the values of the 0.00-column; the difference between adjacent discharges
should increase smoothly or be the same as the preceding difference. With the use of computer,
the rating table is easily established by means of the discharge equation.
7.3.4.1 Rating Table Smoothness analysis

One method of analyzing the smoothness of a rating curve and/or rating table can be done by
studying the differences between successive values of the dependent variable. To make this task
easy for the Hydrographer, the rating table should display the computed differences (traditionally
referred to as first differences) of the dependent variable between every tenth values of the
independent variable displayed in the rating table. For instance, if gage height is incremented every
0.01 m in the rating table, then the difference between discharges corresponding to gage heights at
0.01 m intervals should be computed and displayed.
7.3.4.2 Verification of the Rating Curve

The stage-discharge relation is checked from time to time by discharge measurements at
a low stage and at a medium or high stage, and always during and after major floods. If a
Significant departure from the established rating curve is found, further checks are made. If the
difference is confirmed, sufficient discharge measurements are made to redefine the curve in the
range in which the relation has altered and a new rating curve is made.
If a particular change of the rating curve can be attributed to a definable incident in the
history of the station, the new curve should apply from the time of that incident.

7.3.5 Extrapolation of Rating Curves
7.3.5.1 General
Extrapolation of the rating curve in both lower and upper directions is often necessary. If the
point of zero flow has been obtained, the curve may be interpolated between this point and the
lowest discharge measurements without much error. But, if the point of zero flow is not available,
it is not advisable to extrapolate far in this direction.
In the upper part of the curve extrapolation is almost always necessary. Only in very few cases
have discharge measurements been obtained at about the highest flood peak observed. Though
there are methods of extrapolation such as through the series of differences which is another way
in establishing stage-discharge relations, however, such method is not commonly practised and
hence not discussed in this manual.
For a logarithmic extrapolation has been proven to be a reliable method but only for shorter
extensions only. If, however, extended extrapolations have to be made, special methods must
be used, some of which will be described in the following section.
7.3.5.2 The Stage-Velocity-Area Method

The best method to use is the extension of the gage height against the mean velocity
curve. A plot with stage as the ordinate and the mean velocity as the abscissa gives a curve
which, if the cross-section is fairly regular and no bank overflow occurs, tends to become
asymptotic to the vertical at higher stages. That is, the rate of increase in the velocity at the
higher stages diminishes rapidly and this curve can therefore be extended without much
error. Further, by plotting the stage-area curve (stage as ordinate, area as abscissa) for the same
cross- section as that from which the mean velocity was obtained, the area can be read off at any
stage desired. Discharge for a given (extended) gage height is obtained by the product of area and
mean velocity read using extrapolated stage-area and stage-velocity curves (Figure 7-6).
The area is obtained by a field survey up to the highest stage required and is therefore a known
quantity.

Figure 7-6. Extrapolation of Rating Curve based on Stage-Area/Stage-Velocity Method
7.3.5.3 The Manning Formula Method

A slight variation of the stage-area-velocity method is the use of Manning’s equation of steady
flow. In terms of the mean velocity the Manning equation is given as:
𝑄 = 𝑁𝐴𝑅2/3 𝑆1/2 (14)

1
Where: 𝑁 = 𝑛

Hence:
1
𝑄 = 𝑛
𝐴𝑅2/3 𝑆1/2 (15)
where
n = Manning’s roughness coefficient
A = area of cross-section, m2
R = hydraulic radius, m
S = slope of water surface (m/m)
Q = discharge, m3/s
may be used for extrapolation of rating curves. In terms of mean velocity the formula may be
written
1
𝑉 = 𝑛 𝑅2/3 𝑆1/2 (16)
1
For the higher stages, the factor 𝑆1/2 becomes approximately constant. Equation 15 and 17 can
𝑛
therefore be rewritten as:
𝑄 = 𝐾𝐴𝑅2/3 (17)
and
𝑉 = 𝐾𝑅2/3 (18)

Figure 7-7. Extrapolation of K
By using various values of V from the known portion of the stage against mean-velocity curve
and the corresponding values of R, values of K can be computed by equation 18 for the range
in stage for which the velocity is known. By plotting these values of K against the gage
height, a curve is obtained that should asymptotically approach a vertical line for the higher
stages (Figure 7-7). This K-curve may then be extended without much error and values of K
obtained from it for the higher stages. These high stage values of K combined with their respective
values of A and R 2/3 using equation 7.3.8 will give values of the discharge Q which may be used to
extrapolate the rating curve. A and R is obtained by field surveys and is known for any stage
required.

7.3.6 Shifting Control
7.3.6.1 General
Shifts in the control features occur especially in alluvial sand-bed streams. However, even in solid
stable stream channels shifts will occur, particularly at low flow because of aquatic and vegetal
growth in the channel, or due to debris caught in the control section.
In alluvial sand-bed streams, the stage-discharge relation usually changes with time, either gradually
or abruptly, due to scour and silting in the channel and because of moving sand dunes and bars.
These variations will cause the rating curve to vary with both time and the magnitude of flow.
Nevertheless, runoff records at a particular location may be of great importance and observations
and measurements have to be carried out the best way possible.
7.3.6.2 The Stout Method

For making adjustment for shifting control, the Stout Method has been used by the National Water
Resources Council (NWRC) and later the Bureau of Standards (BRS) in the streamflow data
management. In this method, the gage heights corresponding to discharge measurements taken at
intervals are corrected so that the discharge values obtained from the established rating curve may
be the same as the measured values. From the plot of these corrections against the chronological
dates of measurements, a gage height correction curve is made. Corrections from this curve are
applied to the recorded gage heights for the intervening days between the discharge measurements.
An ordinary staff gage is established at the best available site on the river and readings taken at
appropriate intervals, three (3) times a day. Discharge measurements are made as often as found
necessary, and may be required as often as once or twice a week. How often discharge
measurements need to be taken depends on several factors, such as the hydraulic conditions in the
river, the accuracy and the feasibility based on economic and other factors.
Figure 7-8. The Stout Method of correcting gage height readings

when control is shifting

7.3.6.3 The Stout Method when control is shifting
The measurements are plotted against observed gage height on ordinary graph paper and a median
curve is fitted to the points. Most of the subsequent discharge measurements will deviate from the
established curve. For points lying above the curve, a small height, h, must be subtracted from the
observed gage height in order to make these points lie on the curve. That is, minus corrections are
applied to all points above the curve, plus corrections are applied to points lying below the curve
(Figure 7.8a). Next, a correction graph is made as shown in Figure 7.8b. The plus and minus
corrections are plotted on the date of measurement and the points connected by straight lines or a
smooth curve. Gage height corrections for each day are now obtained directly from this correction
graph, remembering that the parts of the graph below the abscissa axis give minus corrections and
the parts above give plus corrections.
When discharge measurements plot within 5 percent of the rating curve, with some plus and some
minus deviations, it is acceptable to use the curve directly without adjustment for shifting control.
It is not too important how the median curve is drawn between the measurements. Different
curves will give different corrections and the final result will be approximately the same.
Extrapolation of the curve, however, has to be done with care.
A rating of this type requires much work in order to obtain good results. The accuracy depends on
the hydraulic conditions in the river and on the number and accuracy of the discharge
measurements and the gage height readings. The reliability is much less than for a station with a
permanent control. The Stout Method presupposes that the deviations of the measured discharges
from the established stage-discharge curve are due only to a change or shift in the station control,
and that the corrections applied to the observed gage heights vary gradually and systematically
between the days on which the check measurements are taken.
In fact, the deviation of a discharge measurement from an established rating curve may be due to 1)
gradual and systematic shifts in the control, 2) abrupt random shifts in the control, and 3) error of
observation and systematic errors of both instrumental and personal nature.
The Stout Method is strictly appropriate for making adjustments for the 1st type of errors only. If
the check measurements are taken frequently enough, fair adjustments may be made for the 2nd
type of error also. However, the drawback of the Stout Method is that the error of observation
and the systematic errors are disregarded as such and simply mixed with the errors due to shift in
control, although the former errors may be at times of a higher magnitude than the latter. This
means that "corrections" may be applied to a discharge record when in reality the rating is correct.
The apparent error is not due to shifting control but to faulty equipment or careless measuring
procedure.
7.3.6.4 Computation of Shifts for stage-discharge ratings

The shift information that should be computed for discharge measurements applicable to stage
discharge rating curves is as follows:
(a) Rating shift, Sr – This shift is the numerical difference between the gage height, Hr, which
corresponds with the rating curve discharge for the measurement, and the gage height, Hm, of the
discharge measurement. The resulting algebraic sign should be observed. The equation is:
𝑆𝑅 = 𝐻𝑅 − 𝐻𝑀 (18)
(b) Measurement percent difference, D – This is the percent difference between the
measured discharge, Qm, and the rating curve discharge, Qr, that corresponds to the gage height of
the discharge measurement. This represents the difference between the measured discharge and
rating discharge if no shift is applied. The equation is:

(𝑄𝑀 −𝑄𝑅 )
𝐷= 𝑄𝑅
𝑋100 (19)
(c) Shifts for the gage height of zero flow, S0 – If the gage height of zero flow, H0, is
determined either when a regular discharge measurement is made, or independently during a visit
to the gaging station, then it is possible to compute a shift for that gage height if the rating curve is
defined down to zero flow. This information can be very useful as an aid in defining the low end of
a shift curve. The equation for computing the shift for the gage height of zero flow is similar to
equation 5.6 for computing the rating shift, and is:
𝑆0 = 𝐻𝑅 − 𝐻0 (20)
Because the discharge corresponding to H0 is by definition zero, it is not possible to compute a

measurement percent difference.

8. PRIMARY COMPUTATIONS
Primary computations are the functions that convert input data of gage height into time series of
unit values, daily values, monthly values and annual values of discharge. In the past primary
computations were generally performed by hand. Today, almost exclusively, primary computations
can be performed using computers.
The primary computation process will require the use of at least one rating curve. To carry out the
conversion process previously developed data and information will be required, such as time series
of input variables, shift curves and rating tables. The conversion should be carried out with minimal
interaction from the Hydrographer and should produce files of information that can be used to
produce tables and graphs that commonly are referred to as primary output.
8.1 Daily value computations
8.1.1 Daily Mean Values

Daily mean values, frequently referred to as daily values, consist of arithmetic mean of selected
parameters and are computed from the files of unit values. Daily mean values may be computed
for gage height and discharge. A file of all computed daily mean values should be saved for
future use and archiving.
8.1.1.1 Daily Minimum and Maximum Values

The minimum and maximum values for some of the parameters, usually gage heights and discharge
are required for each day. These values are determined from the unit value files for the various
parameters, and the selection process should consider all recorded and interpolated unit values for
each day, including the extra readings of gage heights for each day.
8.1.1.2 Summary of primary computations

Primary computations include the determination of unit values and daily values for numerous
parameters. It is important and necessary to summarize these results in tables that can be used for
review, analysis and publication. Standard formatted tables include unit values, primary
computations and daily value tables.
8.1.1.3 Daily values

A daily values table is a listing of the daily values for each day of the year at a gaging station.
Generally, daily values are the daily mean discharges for a gaging station. In addition, the daily values
table should show monthly and annual totals, means and extremes, as appropriate.
8.2 Hydrograph plots

Hydrographs are useful for graphical viewing, verification, editing and comparisons of streamflow
information, including most of the basic information that contributes to the primary computation of
streamflow records. Hydrograph plots of unit values of discharge along with comparative plots of
gage height and supplementary data such as peak discharge, peak stage and discharge
measurements, provide an excellent means of reviewing and editing primary computations.
Hydrograph plots provide a graphical summary of the records for visual presentation and
publication.
Daily values hydrograph is one of the most common methods for displaying the results of
streamflow computations for a gaging station. This hydrograph usually is a plot showing the daily
values for a year. Daily value hydrographs usually are plots of daily mean discharge for a gaging
station but can also be used to display gage height. When more than one daily values file is shown
on a daily values hydrograph plot, each should be clearly identified by a distinctive plotting symbol.

Individual scales should be shown for each parameter, labelled with the correct parameter name
and units of measurement.
The abscissa for daily values hydrographs is a time scale, with days being the primary subdivision.
Months and years are secondary subdivisions. The ordinate should be logarithmic for discharge
plots, unless otherwise specified by the Hydrographer. Other daily values parameters should be
plotted using linear scales. The range of the ordinate scale for the primary parameter should default
to one that will include the full range of the daily values for the time period being plotted.
8.3 Computation of Extremes

For most discharge gaging stations it is required that the maximum peak stage and discharge, the
secondary peak stages and discharges and the minimum discharge be computed for each water
year. The maximum peak stage and discharge, and the minimum discharge are referred to as the
annual peak and annual minimum.
8.3.1 Annual peak stage and discharge

The annual peak stage and discharge are defined as the highest instantaneous (unit value) gage
height and discharge associated with the highest flood peak that occurred during the year. The
annual peak stage and discharge and the associated date and time, should be determined for every
gaging site. With the Streamflow Management System, the date and time can be automatically
given.
8.3.2 Annual minimum discharge

The annual minimum discharge is defined as the lowest instantaneous (unit value) discharge that
results during the year. The electronic system should determine the annual minimum discharge
and the associated date and time for the year.
8.4 Estimating missing records

Complete records of daily discharges, and other parameters, are necessary in order to compute
monthly and annual totals and other statistics. Complete records are also needed to compute total
runoff from a drainage basin, to calibrate runoff models and to compute chemical and sediment
loads. Data sometimes are missing because of instrument failures and other reasons, thus not
permitting the normal computation of daily records. Therefore, it is necessary to make estimates
of discharge or other hydrologic parameters for these periods of missing records.
However, estimation of missing records should be kept to a minimum. For example, in some cases
it may be reasonable to estimate unit values of gage height for the purpose of computing daily
values of discharge, provided the gage height can be estimated with reasonable accuracy.
8.4.1 Simple Interpolation

Problem of missing data is widespread. Gages can be damaged during storm, power supplies may
run out or observers might go walk-about. Various techniques are available for filling in estimates
of missing data, and some of these can be used to extend a record back in time for statistical
analyses.
Short gaps can be filled from straight-line interpolation (graphical or numerical) between correctly
recorded discharges. A formula for linear interpolation is given in Figure 8-1. It should be
emphasized that this method is applicable for missing data for short or limited duration only.

Figure 8-1. Simple linear interpolation
8.4.2 Drainage Area Weighting

Drainage area weighting or drainage area ratio method is a widely used technique in many cases
where limited streamflow monitoring data are available or in some cases missing information. This
method is applicable in areas where the drainage basins are of similar size, land use, soil types and
experience the similar rainfall patterns. Discharge can be estimated by drainage area weighting
using the following equation:
𝐴𝑢𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑
𝑄𝑢𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 = 𝐴𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑠
𝑥 𝑄𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 (20)
Where:
𝑄𝑢𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 = Q at ungaged location
𝑄𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 = Q at gaged location
𝐴𝑢𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 ` = Q at ungaged location
𝐴𝑔𝑎𝑔𝑒𝑑 = Q at ungaged location
8.4.3 Regression method

Multiple, stepwise, regression is a useful method of relating time series discharge data of one
gaging station to concurrent time series discharge data of one or more nearby reference gages.
Regression equations can be developed for specific ranges of discharge, for instance, low flows,
medium flows, and/or high flows. They also can be developed for seasonal periods.
A regression equation can be applied to provide estimated discharges for periods of missing
record. In addition, the same regression equation should be used to compute discharge values for
short time periods adjacent to the estimated period where discharges are known. These adjacent
periods sometimes can be used for verifying the accuracy of the regression results, and for adjusting
the estimated discharges during the period of missing record to more closely fit the adjacent
known records.
8.5 Monthly and annual value computations

Monthly and annual values of stage and discharge should be computed for each station as required.
All computations of monthly values should be based on the rounded results of daily values and all
computations of annual values should be based on rounded results or either daily or monthly
values, as indicated. In the Philippines, annual values are commonly computed for each gaging
station for the calendar year, January through December.

8.5.1 Monthly and annual values of stage
Monthly and annual values of stage should be computed for those stations where stage routinely is
measured for defining the gage height fluctuations of a stream. For most of the gaging stations,
gage height is measured for the purpose of computing the discharge.
The monthly discharge values that should be computed re the following
8.5.2 Monthly and annual values of discharge

Monthly and annual values of discharge should be computed for gaging stations where daily
discharge is routinely computed and streamflow is the parameter of primary interest. Also
included in the computations are generally designated on the basis of streamflow conditions,
drainage basin size, natural runoff conditions and other factors that may affect the hydrologic value
and need for the computed parameters.
Some of the monthly and annual values monthly values that are required are the following:
(a) Monthly total discharge – Total of all daily mean discharges for each month;
(b) Monthly mean discharge – The mean of all daily mean discharges for each month, and is
computed by dividing the monthly total discharge by the number of days in the month;
(c) Monthly minimum daily discharge – The lowest daily mean discharge for each month;
(d) Monthly maximum daily discharge – The highest daily mean discharge for each month.
The monthly discharge values that are optional are as follows:

(a) Monthly runoff volume – This is the monthly total discharge, converted to a volume;
(b) Monthly runoff depth – The monthly total discharge volume, converted to a depth, millimeters,
that would uniformly cover the drainage basin;
(c) Monthly mean unit runoff – The monthly mean flow that would emanate from 1 km2 of
drainage area, if the flow were uniformly distributed throughout the drainage basin.
The annual discharge values that are required are as follows:

(a) Annual total discharge – The total of all daily mean discharges for the year;
(b) Annual mean discharge – The mean of all daily mean discharges for the year, and is computed
by dividing the annual total discharge by 365 or by 366 for leap years;
(c) Annual minimum daily discharge – The lowest daily mean discharge for the year;
(d) Annual maximum daily discharge – The highest daily mean discharge for the year.
The annual discharge values that are optional are as follows:

(a) Annual runoff volume – The annual total runoff volume is computed by summing the monthly
values of runoff volume for the year;
(b) Annual runoff depth – The annual total runoff depth is computed by summing the monthly
values of runoff depth for the year;
(c) Annual mean unit runoff – The annual mean unit runoff is computed by dividing the annual
mean discharge by the drainage area.

9. REVIEW, APPROVAL, AND FINALIZATION OF RECORDS
Gaging station records are reviewed at various points during the process of entering, analysing,
interpreting, and computing the streamflow information. These records generally are referred to as
working reviews that usually are made by the user as the records are processed. This report refers
to a number of places during the process of producing a streamflow record where such reviews
should be made. Working reviews are a normal function of the record production process, and the
electronic processing system provides the user with numerous aids to make this process as easy as
possible.
A formal review should be made after the records have been processed and the user is satisfied
that the records are complete and accurate. This final review should be made by a senior reviewer
who is designated to make such reviews. This review ultimately results in the approval and
finalization of the records for publication and archival if the reviewer finds that the records are
complete and accurate. If this review reveals deficiencies in the records, the reviewer can return
the records to working status.
The formal review should have access to all of the same review functions that are used in the
record processing steps. These review functions would include all output tables, such as the
discharge measurement summary tables, the level summary tables, the unit values tables, the
primary computation tables, the daily values tables, and any other table produced during the
record processing. Of even greater importance, the final reviewer should have easy access to
graphs such as the rating curves, hydrographs, and daily values hydrographs. The reviewer also
should have access to the comments file and should be allowed to enter comments. If a station
analysis has been prepared, the reviewer should be allowed to review and edit, as appropriate.
When the review is complete and the records are considered acceptable and accurate, they
should be designated as approved. The approved records are ready for publication and archiving.
Records that are flagged as approved should be protected from any further changes or revisions.
In the event that a change to an approved record is required, the records must be set back to
working status.

10. ARCHIVING
Data archiving is a complex subject that deals with the permanent retention, protection, and
accessibility of original records, and other records that support published scientific studies and
analyses. With the advent of electronic media for collection and analysis of hydrologic data and
information, it has become increasingly difficult to define the method by which these records should
be archived. A brief summary of the archiving recommendations for electronic data and information
will be given as follows: (Hubbard, 1992).
The following list of electronic data and information is not all inclusive, but at a minimum these items
should be placed in permanent electronic archives.
• All original data for automated data-collection sites such as the gage height observations
transmitted by the Gage Keepers
• All non-automated data collected in electronic format, such as discharge measurement notes
• All approved files of edited and calculated data, such as unit values and daily values of gage height,
velocity, correction values, shift adjustments, discharge, and other parameters resulting from the
processing of the gaging station records.
• All approved algorithms, rating curves and other transformation information required for the
processing of the records.
• All documents specific to a gaging station, such as station descriptions, station analyses, station
manuscripts, level summaries, and comment files.

11. APPLICATION OF STREAMFLOW DATA
11.1 Flood Frequency Analysis
Flood frequency analyses are used to predict design flood for sites along a river. The objective of
frequency analysis is to relate the magnitude of events to their frequency of occurrence through
probability distribution. Log Pearson Type III is a frequency distribution widely used worldwide.
Design discharge magnitude and frequencies for rivers can be estimated using Log Pearson Type III
distribution analysis with base 10 logarithmic transformation of annual maximum daily discharges.
The peak discharge at selected recurrence intervals (Return Period) of 2, 5, 10, 25, 50 and 100
year, were computed with the equation:
log 𝑄𝑇𝑟 = 𝑀 + 𝐾𝑇𝑟 S (21)
QTr= T-year flood from log-Pearson Type III distribution, m3/sec

M= mean of the logarithmic annual mean monthly discharge
KTr= scale factor that is a function of the skew coefficient and recurrence interval
S= standard deviation of the logarithmic transformed annual maximum discharge
Frequency Factors K for Gamma and log-Pearson Type III Distributions (Haan, 1977) and skew
coefficient is used to find the KTr values for the selected recurrence intervals. The computed skew
coefficient that is between two given skew coefficients in Table 11-1 can be linearly extrapolated
between the two numbers to get the appropriate K value.
The mean, standard deviation and skew coefficient of station data may be computed using the
following equations:
∑𝑛
𝑖 (log 𝑄−𝑎𝑣𝑔(log 𝑄))
2
𝑉𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 = 𝑛−1
(22)
𝑆𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑑 𝑑𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 𝜎 log 𝑄 = √𝑉𝑎𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 (23)
𝑛 ∑𝑛
𝑖 (𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑄−𝑎𝑣𝑔(𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑄))
3
𝑆𝑘𝑒𝑤 𝐶𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡 = (𝑛−1)(𝑛−2)(𝜎𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑄)3
(24)
Q = annual maximum daily discharge

n = number of items in data set
To show the results of the frequency analysis graphically, the annual maximum daily discharge is
plotted against the corresponding non-exceedance probability in Log Pearson Probability paper:
1
𝑁𝑜𝑛 − 𝐸𝑥𝑐𝑒𝑒𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑏𝑎𝑏𝑖𝑙𝑡𝑦 = (1 − 𝑇𝑟
) ∗ 100 (25)

𝑛+1
𝑇𝑟 = (26)
𝑚
Tr = return period for each discharge value

m = the rank
11.2 Flow Duration Analysis

Flow duration curve is a cumulative frequency curve that shows the percent of time a specified
discharge were equalled or exceeded during a given period. It also shows the flow characteristics
of a river throughout the range of discharges, without regard to the sequence of occurrence. If the
period upon which the curve is based represents the long-term flow of a river, the curve may be
used to predict the distribution of future flows for water-related studies.
For flow-duration statistics to be reliable indicators of probable future condition, a minimum of 10

years of record typically is used (Searcy, 1959). The equation used to compute the exceedance
probability, which also is referred to as the flow-duration percentile, is given as:
𝑚
𝑃 = ((𝑛+1)) ∗ 100 (27)
Where:
P = the probability that a given flow will be equaled or exceeded (% of time)
m = the ranked position, from highest to lowest, of all daily mean flows
n = the total number of daily mean flows
To determine the flow for a specific flow duration percentile, interpolation between the discharges
associated with percentiles on either side of the specific percentile may be needed. Flows that are
equal to each other also would be given separate m rank values. With the equation above, high
flows are assigned low percentiles and low flows are assigned high percentiles.

Table 11-1. Frequency Factors K for Gamma and log-Pearson Type III Distributions
(Haan, 1977, Table 7.7)
Recurrence Interval In Years
1.0101 2 5 10 25 50 100 200
SKEW Percent Chance (>=) = 1-F
COEFF. Cs 99 50 20 10 4 2 1 0.5
3 -0.667 -0.396 0.42 1.18 2.278 3.152 4.051 4.97
2.9 -0.69 -0.39 0.44 1.195 2.277 3.134 4.013 4.904
2.8 -0.714 -0.384 0.46 1.21 2.275 3.114 3.973 4.847
2.7 -0.74 -0.376 0.479 1.224 2.272 3.093 3.932 4.783
2.6 -0.769 -0.368 0.499 1.238 2.267 3.071 3.889 4.718
2.5 -0.799 -0.36 0.518 1.25 2.262 3.048 3.845 4.652
2.4 -0.832 -0.351 0.537 1.262 2.256 3.023 3.8 4.584
2.3 -0.867 -0.341 0.555 1.274 2.248 2.997 3.753 4.515
2.2 -0.905 -0.33 0.574 1.284 2.24 2.97 3.705 4.444
2.1 -0.946 -0.319 0.592 1.294 2.23 2.942 3.656 4.372
2 -0.99 -0.307 0.609 1.302 2.219 2.912 3.605 4.298
1.9 -1.037 -0.294 0.627 1.31 2.207 2.881 3.553 4.223
1.8 -1.087 -0.282 0.643 1.318 2.193 2.848 3.499 4.147
1.7 -1.14 -0.268 0.66 1.324 2.179 2.815 3.444 4.069
1.6 -1.197 -0.254 0.675 1.329 2.163 2.78 3.388 3.99
1.5 -1.256 -0.24 0.69 1.333 2.146 2.743 3.33 3.91
1.4 -1.318 -0.225 0.705 1.337 2.128 2.706 3.271 3.828
1.3 -1.383 -0.21 0.719 1.339 2.108 2.666 3.211 3.745
1.2 -1.449 -0.195 0.732 1.34 2.087 2.626 3.149 3.661
1.1 -1.518 -0.18 0.745 1.341 2.066 2.585 3.087 3.575
1 -1.588 -0.164 0.758 1.34 2.043 2.542 3.022 3.489
0.9 -1.66 -0.148 0.769 1.339 2.018 2.498 2.957 3.401
0.8 -1.733 -0.132 0.78 1.336 1.993 2.453 2.891 3.312
0.7 -1.806 -0.116 0.79 1.333 1.967 2.407 2.824 3.223
0.6 -1.88 -0.099 0.8 1.328 1.939 2.359 2.755 3.132
0.5 -1.955 -0.083 0.808 1.323 1.91 2.311 2.686 3.041
0.4 -2.029 -0.066 0.816 1.317 1.88 2.261 2.615 2.949
0.3 -2.104 -0.05 0.824 1.309 1.849 2.211 2.544 2.856
0.2 -2.178 -0.033 0.83 1.301 1.818 2.159 2.472 2.763
0.1 -2.252 -0.017 0.836 1.292 1.785 2.107 2.4 2.67
0 -2.326 0 0.842 1.282 1.751 2.054 2.326 2.576
-0.1 -2.4 0.017 0.846 1.27 1.716 2 2.252 2.482
-0.2 -2.472 0.033 0.85 1.258 1.68 1.945 2.178 2.388
-0.3 -2.544 0.05 0.853 1.245 1.643 1.89 2.104 2.294
-0.4 -2.615 0.066 0.855 1.231 1.606 1.834 2.029 2.201
-0.5 -2.686 0.083 0.856 1.216 1.567 1.777 1.955 2.108
-0.6 -2.755 0.099 0.857 1.2 1.528 1.72 1.88 2.016
-0.7 -2.824 0.116 0.857 1.183 1.488 1.663 1.806 1.926
-0.8 -2.891 0.132 0.856 1.166 1.448 1.606 1.733 1.837
-0.9 -2.957 0.148 0.854 1.147 1.407 1.549 1.66 1.749
-1 -3.022 0.164 0.852 1.128 1.366 1.492 1.588 1.664
-1.1 -3.087 0.18 0.848 1.107 1.324 1.435 1.518 1.581
-1.2 -3.149 0.195 0.844 1.086 1.282 1.379 1.449 1.501
-1.3 -3.211 0.21 0.838 1.064 1.24 1.324 1.383 1.424
-1.4 -3.271 0.225 0.832 1.041 1.198 1.27 1.318 1.351
-1.5 -3.33 0.24 0.825 1.018 1.157 1.217 1.256 1.282
-1.6 -3.88 0.254 0.817 0.994 1.116 1.166 1.197 1.216
-1.7 -3.444 0.268 0.808 0.97 1.075 1.116 1.14 1.155
-1.8 -3.499 0.282 0.799 0.945 1.035 1.069 1.087 1.097
-1.9 -3.553 0.294 0.788 0.92 0.996 1.023 1.037 1.044
-2 -3.605 0.307 0.777 0.895 0.959 0.98 0.99 0.995
-2.1 -3.656 0.319 0.765 0.869 0.923 0.939 0.946 0.949
-2.2 -3.705 0.33 0.752 0.844 0.888 0.9 0.905 0.907
-2.3 -3.753 0.341 0.739 0.819 0.855 0.864 0.867 0.869
-2.4 -3.8 0.351 0.725 0.795 0.823 0.83 0.832 0.833
-2.5 -3.845 0.36 0.711 0.711 0.793 0.798 0.799 0.8
-2.6 -3.899 0.368 0.696 0.747 0.764 0.768 0.769 0.769
-2.7 -3.932 0.376 0.681 0.724 0.738 0.74 0.74 0.741
-2.8 -3.973 0.384 0.666 0.702 0.712 0.714 0.714 0.714
-2.9 -4.013 0.39 0.651 0.681 0.683 0.689 0.69 0.69
-3 -4.051 0.396 0.636 0.66 0.666 0.666 0.667 0.667
Source: http://streamflow.engr.oregonstate.edu/analysis/floodfreq/skew.htm

GLOSSARY
Data Item / Term Definition
Structure at the two ends of a bridge used for transferring the loads
Abutment from the bridge superstructure to the foundation bed and giving
lateral support to the embankment.
Any of the various units of the national/local government, e.g.
Agency department, bureau, authority, office, instrumentality or GOCC and
LGU.
Alluvial Soil or earth material which has been deposited by running water.
The total value of damages caused by floods over a twelve month
Annual Flood Loss
period.
Annual Maximum Flood Discharge The highest momentary peak discharge in a year.
The chance or probability of a natural hazard event (usually a rainfall
Annual Risk of Exceedance or flooding event) occurring annually and is usually expressed as a
percentage.
Area A bounded, continuous, two-dimensional (2-D) surface.
The average riverbed profile in a cross section survey which is set in
Average Riverbed order to establish the elevation of the longitudinal profile and to
compute the area of river cross section.
The rise of water level that occurs immediately upstream from a
Backwater structure (e.g. dam) or obstructions in a river to a considerable
distance brought about by the presence of structure.
An alluvial deposit at the mouth of a stream or at any point in the
Bar stream itself which causes an obstruction of flow and to navigation, in
the case of a bay or inlet.
Hillside slopes on which the vegetation has entirely or partly vanished
Bare Slope Land
or declined.
A weir equipped with series of sluice gates to regulate the water
Barrage
elevation at its upstream side.
Bed Material The material of which the riverbed is composed.
Bedrock Strong rock underlying surface deposits of soil and weathered rock.
A structure carrying a road over a road, waterway or other feature,
with a clear span over 3.0 meters along the centerline between the
Bridge inside faces of supports. A bridge may have an independent deck
supported on separate piers and abutments, or may have a deck
constructed integral with supports.
Catchment Area Alias Catchment
The area from which a lake, stream or waterway receives surface
Basin, Watershed, Drainage Basin,
water which originates as precipitation.
River Basin
In a river, the place or location of observation point where the
Control Point
planned discharge is observed and fixed.
The determination of the precise position of a number of stations
Control Surveying
which are distributed over a large area.
A ground cover plant that is grown and harvested for profit or
Crop
subsistence.
A structure (mostly pipe or box culvert) under a road, railway or
embankment, whether of single or multiple barrel construction,
Culvert
generally with a width of less than five (5.0) meters per opening
measured between inside wall faces.
Agreed standard point of stated elevation denoted by a permanent
Datum benchmark on solid immovable structure, from which elevations are
measured or to which they are referred.
Any uprooted trees and other materials carried by the water in the
Debris
creek or river.
The mechanical or chemical processes through which sediments
Deposition
accumulate in a resting place.
Design Discharge The calculated discharge based on the frequency of a return period.
Period assumed in the design for which the infrastructure is required
Design Life to perform its function without replacement or major structural
repair.
Drainage Basin Alias, Catchment
The area from which a lake, stream or waterway receives surface
Area, Catchment Basin, Watershed,
water which originates as precipitation.
River Basin
Drainage Network An array of linear elements representing the flow of surface water.
Groundwater Water that exists below the water table in the zone of saturation.
Depth at which soil pore spaces or fractures and voids in rock
Groundwater Table
become completely saturated with water.
A specific mode of activity and type of coverage applied or allocated
Land Use
to an earth surface area.
Maximum Flood Level The highest recorded flood level.
The average height of the sea for all stages of the tide. Mean sea level
is obtained by averaging observed hourly heights of the sea on the
Mean Sea Level
open coast or in adjacent waters having free access to the sea, the
average being taken over a considerable period of time.
The probability, expressed in years, where phenomena (i.e., flood,
Return Period
rainfall) of a targeted size/magnitude will likely to occur.
Runoff Surface water of an area of land.
Lowering of stream-bed or undermining of foundations by erosive
Scour
action of flowing water.
Scoured Depth Total depth of water from surface to a scoured bed level.
A stream or other body of water, surface or underground, which
Tributary contributes its water, either continuously or intermittently, to another
and larger stream or body of water
Tributary River A confluence river usually smaller that the main river.
Velocity The rate and direction of change in the position of an object
A base measurement point, or set of points, from which all elevations
Vertical Datum
are determined
Waterway General term denoting a river, stream and other similar tributary area.
A low dam built across a river to raise the level of water upstream or
Weir
regulate its flow.
REFERENCE CITATIONS
Manual on Stream Gaging, Volume I – Fieldwork, Volume II – Computation of Discharge,

2010, World Meteorological Organization WMO-No.1044
Manual on Stream Gaging, Volume II – Computation of Discharge, World Meteorological

Organization, 2010, WMO-No.1044
S.E. Rantz and others, 1982, Measurement and Computation of Streamflow: Volume 1.
Measurement of Stage and Discharge, Geological Survey Water-Supply Paper 2175
S.E. Rantz and others, 1982, Measurement and Computation of Streamflow: Volume 2.
Computation of Discharge, Geological Survey Water-Supply Paper 2175
Turnipseed, D.P., and Sauer, V.B., 2010, Discharge measurements at gaging stations: U.S.
Geological Survey Techniques and Methods book 3, chapter A8, 87 p. (Also available
at http://pubs.usgs.gov/tm/tm3-a8/.)
V.B. Sauer, 2002, Standards for the Analysis and Processing of Surface-Water Data and Information
Using Electronic Methods, Water-Resources Investigations Report 01-4044
sten A. Tilrem, 1979, Stream Discharge Measurements by Current Meter and Relative Salt
Dilution, Manual Procedures in Operational Hydrology Volume 1, Establishment of Stream Gaging
Stations, chapter 1-4: Ministry of Water, Energy and Minerals of Tanzania and Norwegian Agency
for International Development.
Dilution, Manual Procedures in Operational Hydrology Volume 2, Operation of Stream Gaging
Stations, chapter 1-3: Ministry of Water, Energy and Minerals of Tanzania and Norwegian Agency
for International Development.
Dilution, Manual Procedures in Operational Hydrology Volume 3, Stream Discharge
Measurements by Current Meter and Relative Salt Dilution, chapter 1-2: Ministry of Water, Energy
and Minerals of Tanzania and Norwegian Agency for International Development.
Dilution, Manual Procedures in Operational Hydrology Volume 4, Stage-Discharge Relations at
Stream Gaging Stations, chapter 1-3: Ministry of Water, Energy and Minerals of Tanzania and
Norwegian Agency for International Development.
2008, Hydrometry-Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channel using Current Meters or Floats,
Bureau of Indian Standard Preliminary, Doc WRD 01 (499),
1981, Velocity Area Method for Measurement of Flow of Water in Open Channel (First Revision),
Indian Standards Institutions
2002, Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels, Part 1 Establishment and Operation of a
Gaging Station, Indian Standard IS 15119 (Part 1)
2002, Measurement of Liquid Flow in Open Channels, Part 2 Establishment of the Stage-Discharge
Relation, Indian Standard IS 15119 (Part 2)
Reginald W. Herschy, 2008, Streamflow Measurement, Third Edition, CRC Press

Robert R. Holmes, Jr. Field Methods for Hydrologic and Environmental Studies, Chapter 1, Surface
Water Data Collection
1999, DHV Consultants BV & DELFT HYDRAULICS with HALCROW, TAHAL, CES, ORG & JPS,
Hydrology Project, How to establish stage discharge rating curve, Training Module #SWDP-29
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
This manual is part of the deliverables of a technical assistance provided by USAID under its Water
Security for Resilient Economic Growth and Stability (Be Secure) Project which intends to improve
analysis and sharing of water resources data. The Technical Services for Support to the National
Hydrologic Data Collection Program (NHDCP) – Digitization of Streamflow Data supports the
Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) to transform its current stream flow data
sets into a format that is readily available and easy to evaluate and manage.
This manual was prepared by Royal HaskoningDHV (RHDHV) in partnership with Woodfields
Consultants Incorporated (WCI). The team is supervised by Shiela dela Torre, Water Services
Specialist, USAID Be Secure Project. The technical consltants are: Wouter de Hamer – RHDHV
Country Director; Ms. Adorable Jacinto, WCI Senior Hydrologist; Joseph Ocampo, WCI Senior
Programmer; Marylene Labitan, RHDHV Civil Engineer; Mariane Pajarillo, RHDHV Civil Engineer;
Dirk Voesenek, RHDHV Program Expert.
Many people contributed to the development of this document, either as peer reviewers, Technical
Working Group members or as part of the supervision team to support the NHDCP. They are:
Department of Public Works and Highways
Raul C. Asis, Undersecretary for Technical Services

Dante B. Potante, Director Bureau of Design (BOD)
Adriano M. Doroy, BOD Assistant Director
Leonardo Lingan, BOD Chief of Water Projects Division (WPD)
Richelieu I. Felipe Lim, BOD Chief of Hydrology Section
Richard Lomboy & Mark Joseph Rivera, Engineer II, BOD-WPD
Mary Jane Pantoja, DPWH Information Management Service
The various regional hydrographers in Region 6 (Ma. Flores Deslate, Juanita Espinosa, and Meldy
Alquisola), Region 8 (Rommel Gilang, Edgar Garcia and Adelina Gomez), Region 9 (Henry Jumawan
and Mark Jomer Calma), Region 10 (Teofila Borja and Jaime Banaag), Region 11 (Eddie dela Rama),
and in Region 12 (Noel Castano and Alinair Deron).
Other government agencies and institutions:
Allen Lowe & Carnilo Orevillo - Local Water Utilities Administration (LWUA); Jeremy Borlongan
& Patrick Tonociono - National Economic and Development Authority (NEDA); Roselyn Tolentino
& Gilmar Ballatan - National Irrigation Administration (NIA); Director Sevillo David. Jr, Ph.D., Luis
Rongavilla and Emmie Ruales-National Water Resources Board (NWRB); and General Manager
Chito Vasquez, Zamboanga City Water District (ZCWD).
USAID Philippines
Dani Newcomb, Division Director, Office of the Environment, Energy and Climate Change
Joanne Dulce, Contract Officer Representative, Office of the Environment, Energy and Climate
Change
USAID Be Secure Project
Mona Grieser, Chief of Party; Ariel Lapus (Be Secure Water Services Team Leader); Demosthenes
Redoble (Sr. Technical Specialist), and Rene Capiz (Water Services Coordinator).
AECOM International Development
3101 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 900 Arlington, Virginia USA 22201
www.usaid.gov
-- --
(f ~
Republic of the Philippines
Manila
~
MAR 02 2017
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Implementation of the 2016 Revised
) Implementing Rules and Regulations
NO. 25 _
)
)
of Republic Act 9184
Series of 20~lU"~'(7
The 2016 Revised Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) of Republic Act (RA) 9184 was
approved by the Government Procurement Policy Board (GPPB) through its Resolution 13-
2016 dated 9 August 2016 which became effective on 28 October 2016, sixty (60) days
after its publication in the Official Gazette on 29 August 2016.
In view of the above, it is hereby directed that all procurements of locally funded contracts
for civil works, goods and services and consulting services shall be in accordance to the said
revised IRR.
e downloaded from the Official Gazette and GPPB website.

12.1 NEP
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7XR01224
c97';? 1.3~ l'uVI
o.3-Ii3, ~/7
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
MANILA
t.fAR 02 2017,
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: DPWH Standard Specification for
) ITEM 728 - High Flow Epoxy
Noo 26 _
)
)
Mortar for Submerged and Wet
Concrete Structures
Series of 2017 xj <d. 41. f}
In line with the mandate of the Department in providing effective standard specifications in
the implementation of various infrastructure projects and in view of the need of setting a
standard specification for high flow epoxy mortar for submerged and wet concrete
structures, the attached DPWH Standard Specification for Item 728 - High Flow
Epoxy Mortar for Submerged and Wet Concrete Structures is hereby prescribed, for
the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
This specification shall form part of the D H Standard Specificationsfor Highways, Bridges
and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Editio .
IS
rsecretary for Technical Services
Officer-In-Charge Department of Public Works and Highways
1111111111111111111111111111111111111
14.1.2 FET/RPF WIN7U01438
Department Order No.~ Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 728 - High Flow Epoxy Mortar
for Submerged and Wet Concrete Structures
Page lof4
DPWH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR

ITEM 728 - HIGH FLOW EPOXY MORTAR FOR SUBMERGED AND WET CONCRETE
STRUCTURES
728.1 Description
This item shall consist of repairing and re-casting of severely damaged reinforced concrete
structures, in wet or submerged conditions such as pile, footing of pier and bottom of pile
cap using High Flow Epoxy Mortar in accordance with these Specifications and as indicated
on the Plans.
728.2 Material Requirements
The high flow epoxy based mortar is characterized by good mechanical properties and
adhesion both in dry, wet and underwater conditions. It shall be composed of three-
component polymer grout consisting of modified epoxy resin, modified amine hardener and
properly formulated aggregates.
728.2.1 High Flow Epoxy Mortar Properties
The supplier shall provide copies of certified tests of all the properties of high flow epoxy
mortar for submerged and wet concrete structures being tested complying with the
requirements of the ASTM standards as shown on Table 1.
Table 1 - Properties of High Flow Epoxy Mortar for Submerged and Wet Concrete Structures
PROPERTY TEST METHOD UNIT SPECIFICATION

Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 - 1.8 ± 0.2
Potlife - min. 40 Min
Consistency - - Flowable
Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 N/mm2 50 Min
Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D 695 N/mm2 5000 Min
Flexural Strength ASTM D 790M N/mm2 20 Min
linear Shrinkage ASTM C 531 mm/mm 0.0015 Max
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion ASTM C 531 mm/mmoC 0.00004 Max
Bond Strength (Concrete)
• Air-cured ASTM C 882 N/mm2
15 Min
• Wet 15 Min
• Underwater-cured 10 Min
Pull-Off Bond Strength to
Concrete
• Dry ASTM D 7234 N/mm2
1.5 concrete
failure (Min)
• Wet 1.5 concrete
failure (Min)
The epoxy mortar shall be approved by the Engineer through Mill Certificate of the supplier.
Department Order NO.~ Series of 2017
Page 2 of 4
728.3 Construction Requirements
728.3.1 Removal of Damaged Concrete
Damaged concrete within the marked out areas shall be removed using light mechanical
breakers or hammer and chisel, cutting to expose the reinforcement and a sound concrete
substrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer, without breaking out behind the reinforcement.
728.3.2 Concrete Surface Preparation
All concrete surfaces that are to be in contact and repaired with the epoxy grout shall be
prepared by mechanical scrubbing to remove loose materials, surface laitance, organic
contaminants and moss.
728.3.3 Additional or Replacement of Rebar
The Contractor shall report to the Engineer any rebar that has 10% or more section loss as
a result of corrosion. Additional or replacement rebar shall be provided as instructed by the
Engineer. The new rebar shall be cleaned to the same standard as the existing rebar and
shall be lapped on the side of the existing bars and spot welded on one side. The new
rebar may also be tied to the existing rebars using tie wires. It should be fixed along its
length at suitable intervals to prevent sagging.
The corroded rebars shall be cleaned and then applied with anti-corrosion primer to
prevent further corrosion. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer'sapproval for the rebar
prior to proceeding with application of the epoxy grout.
728.3.4 Setting Formworks
Formworks for re-casting of concrete structures must be very rigid and well-supported to
prevent the sagging of the mortar due to its own weight. The formworks shall withstand
the pumping forces if the mortar is to be pumped into the forms.
728.3.5 Mixing and Placing of Epoxy Mortar
The epoxy mortar shall be mixed in accordance to the procedures specified by the
manufacturer. A recommended method of mixing is the use of a pail can mixer or an
electric mixer with a jiffy type blade that prevents whipping of air into the mixture.
The hardener component is added and then mixed to the base resin component for two (2)
minutes or until the mixture becomes uniformly mixed. The aggregate is then gradually
added into the resin mixture and mixed until uniform mortar is obtained.
The mixed epoxy mortar should be used within the prescribed working time of the
manufacturer.
The epoxy mortar is pumped into the entry port of the formworks using a grout pump, until
the mortar outflows from the exit port.
Page 3 of 4
728.3.6 Curing of Epoxy Grout
The epoxy mortar shall be cured for at least three (3) days before the removal of
formworks.
728.3.7 Field Test
Compressive tests and preparations of specimens shall be performed as specified by ASTM D

695 with curing time of seven (7) days.
728.3.8 Delivery and Packaging
High Flow Epoxy Mortar for Submerged and Wet Concrete Structures shall be delivered in a
pre - packed packaging to project site in original packages, containers, labeled with the
name of the manufacturer and lot number.
728.3.9 Handling and Storage
Wear suitable mask, gloves, boots and protective glasses to avoid ingestion, inhalation, skin
and eye contact. Mix and use in a well ventilated area.
Containers of materials such as base resin and hardener shall be tightly closed and stored in
a dry and cool shaded place. It shall not be stored near acids.
728.3.10 Equipment
Grout pump suitable for epoxy mortars shall be used for placing of grout. Specifications of
grout pump shall be in accordance to the recommendation of the manufacturer of the epoxy
mortar.
Below are the recommended specifications of grout pump:
PROPERTY REQUIREMENT
Discharge 2.2 L IV 10.3 L / min.

Discharge Pressure Max 1.4 MPa
Hopper Capacity 7.5 L IV 27 L
728.4 Method of Measurement
The quantity to be paid for shall be based on the number of cubic meters of high flow epoxy
mortar placed on the repaired/ re-casted structures and accepted by the Engineer. The
measurement made for rebar shall be in accordance to Item 404 - Reinforcing Steel.
Department Order NO.~ Series of 2017
Page 4 of 4
728.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted works, as prescribed in Section 728.4, Method of Measurement, shall be paid
for at the contract unit price for high flow epoxy mortar. Removal and disposal of existing
rebar and furnishing and installing of new rebar shall be paid for as specified in Item 404 -
Reinforcing Steel. The unit price of High Flow Epoxy Mortar shall cover full compensation
for all materials, labor, equipment, supervision and related necessary works, necessary to
complete the Item.
Payment shall be made under:
Pay Item
Description Unit of Measurement
Number
High Flow Epoxy Mortar for Submerged and
728 (1) Cubic Meter
Wet Concrete Structures
References:
1. Alphatec 841 High Flow Underwater CUre Epoxy Grout Alpha Kogyo KK
Yokohama/ Japan
2. Repairs of Underwater Structures Alpha Kogyo KK Yokohama/ Japan
3. Japan Industrial Standards (lIS)
4. Bridge Repair Manual r Edition (Improvement of Quality Management for Highways and Bridge
Construction and Maintenance, Phase 11)/ Department of Public Works' and Highways (DPWH) and
Japan International Corporation Agency (lICA)
5. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
• ASTM D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of
Plastics by Displacement
• ASTM D 695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics
• ASTM D 790M - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
• ASTM C 531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes
• ASTM C 882M - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with
Concrete by Slant Shear
• ASTM D 7234 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete
Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers
MANILA
a2 MAR 2011
DEPARTMENT
ORDER ) SUBJECT: Specification on The Use of
) Advera in Warm Mix Asphalt
No. 29 _
)
)
(WMA) in Bituminous Concrete
(Hot Laid) and Gap Graded Hot
Series of 201~C>,)."'.17 Mix Asphalt (Stone Mastic
Asphalt) Surface Courses
In line with the continuing efforts to upgrade the construction technology thru adoption
of successful research studies, this Department has approved the Specification on The
Use of Advera in Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) in Bituminous Concrete (Hot-Laid) and
Gap Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Stone Mas' Asphalt) Surface Courses, subject to the
specifications hereto attached. A Certifi of Conditional Approval had been issued by
this Department allowing the use ~dvera in WMA in DPWH road projects from
February 27, 2017 until Feb 26,2022.
IS
secretary for Technical Services
Officer-in-Charge
11111111111111111111111111111 11111111
14.1.2 FEfjRPF'
WIN7U01441
SPECIFICATION ON THE USE OF ADVERA IN WARM MIX ASPHALT (WMA) IN
BITUMINOUS CONCRETE (HOT-LAID) AND GAP GRADED HOT MIX ASPHALT
(STONE MASTIC ASPHALT) SURFACE COURSES
1.0 Description
This Specification shall consist of constructing a Bituminous Concrete (Item 310) and/or Gap
Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Item 734) Surface Courses composed of aggregates, mineral filler
and bituminous material and the addition of Advera in Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) mixed in a
central plant, constructed and laid warm on the prepared base in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-section
shown on the Plans.
Advera is a powder-form mineral containing 18-20% moisture used in the manufacture of

WMA. WMA that is produced is 20°C to 30°C lower than the equivalent Hot Mix Asphalt
(HMA).
2.1 Compositionand Quality of BituminousMixture (lob-Mix Formula)
Same as Subsection 307.2.1 - Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture (Job-Mix

Formula), for Item 310 and Subsection 734.2.1 - Composition and Quality of Stone Mastic
Asphalt Mixture for SMA, except with the addition of Advera in WMA. The mixing
temperature shall be made 20°C to 30°C lower than the mixing temperature of conventional
asphalt. The Job-Mix Formula for Item 310 - Grading "0" and Item 734 - Grading "B" shall
be added with 0.25% (2.5 kgs/tonne) Advera in WMA.
2.2 Warm Mix Asphalt
Advera is an inorganic chemical, in powder form, containing 18% - 25% moisture that is
chemically and structurally bound.
Advera shall be stored under cover away from precipitation. Its shelf life is indefinite as
long as it is stored properly.
Typical addition rate shall be 0.20% - 0.25% on the weight of the asphalt mix. The criteria
for adjusting rate shall be as follows:
a) Hot Mix Compaction Aid - When utilized as HMA with WMA technology, the dosage
rate of Advera in WMA shall be 0.10% to 0.20% on the asphalt
b) If the asphalt content is above 7%, dosage of Advera in WMA shall be increased to
0.30% of the asphalt mix.
2.3 Bituminous Material
It shall be Penetration Grade Asphalt Cement and shall conform to the requirements of Item
702, Bituminous Materials. The grade of the bituminous material shall be specified in the
Plans.
SpecifICation on The Use Of Advera in Warm Mix Asphalt In Bituminous Concrete (Hot Laid)
and Gap Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Stone Mastic Asphalt) Surface Courses
Page 2 of 3
2.4 Aggregates
Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix Surface
Course-General and Item 310 and Subsection 734.2.4 - Fine Aggregates for Item 734, SMA.
2.5 Stabilizing Additives
Cellulose fibers, either pure or bitumen coated if to be used as additives to SMA, shall
conform to the specifications of Subsection - 734.2.5 Stabilizing Additives of Item 734, SMA.
2.6 Mineral Filler
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant Mix Surface Course-
General.
2.7 Hydrated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 307, Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course-
General.
2.8 Proportioningof Mixtures
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 307.2.6 - Proportioning of Mixture for

Item 310 and Subsection 734.2.7 - Proportioning of Mixture for Item 734, SMA
3.0 ConstructionRequirements
The construction requirements shall be in accordance whenever applicable, with Item 307.3
- Construction Requirements.
3.1 Operations
a) Plant Equipment shall be thoroughly heated up prior to the manufacture of WMA.

This includes drum, slate conveyors and silos. Once the equipment is heated to HMA
temperatures, it shall be brought down slowly to warm mix asphalt target.
b) Test density in the field shall be correlated with laboratory cores.
c) Bag house shall be checked to make sure temperatures remain above dew point.
d) Material shall be sampled from truck for all testing requirements.
e) Silo Storage - As with any mix, the storage time in a silo shall be minimized.
The area to be paid for under this item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of
asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the thickness and density of
Specification on The Use Of Advera in Warm Mix Asphalt In Bituminous Concrete (Hot Laid)
and Gap Graded Hot Mix Asphalt (Stone Mastic Asphalt) Surface Courses
Page 3 of 3
the cores taken in accordance with Subsection 307.3.10 - Acceptance, Sampling and
Testing.
5.0 Basisof Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 4.0 - Method of Measurements,

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Bituminous Concrete and/or Gap Graded Hot
Mix Asphalt Surface Courses with Advera, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, handling, mixing, hauling, placing, rolling,
compacting, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Specification.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Square Meter

Hot-Laid with Advera
Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) with Advera Square Meter
14.1.2 FET/JFS
References: 1. FINAL REPORT - Pilot Road Research Project on the Use of "Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) -Advera"
2. DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports Volume II, 2012 Edition
a. Item 307 - Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course - General
b. Item 310 - Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot-Laid
c. Item 734 - Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA)
CENTRAL OFFICE
Manila
Product Accreditation II
This is to certify that II
;\
ADVERA \1
IIII
Supplied by: II
CCT Chemicafs, Inc. I
l1nit 302, .Jl{a6ang 'Business Tower 'Bui{ding, 1216 .Jlcacia .Jlvenue
!I
J'vtaariga{ 'Business Parfi, .Jl{a6ang, J'vtuntin{uya City
il
is duly accredited for use in DPWH projects as an additive to Hot Mix Asphalt I
(HMA) and Stone Mastic Asphalt (SMA) in order to produce Warm Mix Asphalt I
(WMA) subject to its specifications (hereto attached) pursuant to the provisions
of DPWH Department Order No. 189, Series of 2002.
This accreditation shall remain in force until expiry date printed below,
subject to its compliance with the requirements of the aforementioned
Department Order.
Conditional Approval Number 0024

Date Issued March 02, 2017
Expiry Date March 01, 2022
L C. ASIS
rsecretary for Technical Services
Officer- In-Charge
fJfj1l /iJ .0 t'W If
a3. n ~ U)f7
Manila
t1 6 MAR 20! (4
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Guidelines for Streamlining

River Basin Master Plan and
NO.
33 ~
)
Feasibility Study of Flood
Control and Drainage
Series of 20fijP.3 .tl
n
One of the policies enshrined in the IRR of RA 10121 or the Disaster Risk Reduction and
Management Act is to ''Adopt a disaster risk reduction and management approach that is
holisti~ comprehensive, integrated and proactive in lessening the socio-economic and
environmental impacts of disasters including climate change and promote the involvement
and participation of all sectors and all stakeholders concerned, at all levels, especially the
community'~ It is then critical that the flood control and drainage structures are carefully
planned and designed, and the flood control projects have a flood control plan , based on
the forecasted river phenomenon which is likely to occur as a result of the discharges
corresponding to the design flood frequencies. Moreover, the Master Plan shall promote
nonnstructural measures such as watershed management, flood hazard mapping, warning
and evacuation system, land use planning, zoning for high risk areas, etc.
The Master Plan incorporates the flood control policy, strategy, target flood magnitude and
main infrastructure works, etc. in the river system. Feasibility studies of prioritized projects
proposed in the Master Plan are conducted within the framework of socio-economic
importance.
In order to accelerate the conduct of master plan and feasibility studies which shall serve as
basis for priority flood control and drainage studies, the UPMO-Flood Control Management
Cluster (UPMO-FCMC) and the Regional Offices (ROs)/District Engineering Offices (DEOs)
shall pursue the conduct of these studies, in coordination with the Planning Service. The
Planning Service shall ensure no. duplication in the conduct of these studies between UPMO
and ROs/DEOs.
The following guidelines are set and prescribed, consistent with existing laws and
management policies of the Department.
1. Under the DPWH Performance Governance System (PGS) Scorecard being developed for
2017·,2022, the 120 priority principal river basins as identified under the JICA-Assisted
Nationwide Flood Risk Assessment Study (NaFRA Study) will be prioritized.
2. Areas of Responsibilities between the UPMO-FCMCand ROs will be as follows:
Res. onsible Office 1_ River Basins

LJP~'IO-FCMC Major River Basins and Principal River
Basins traversin two 2 or more ROs.
Regional Offices (ROs)/District Principal River including drainage in flood
L.f!:l!~ineering Offices DEOs affected areas in a region.
Major River Basins - Drainage area of more than 1400 sq. km.
Principal River Basins - Drainage area of more than 40 sq. km.
D.O. No. 33 s.2017
Guidelines for Streamlining River Basin Master Plan and Feasibility Study of Flood Control and Drainage
Page 2 of 2
3. A Steering Committee (SC) and Technical Working Group (TWG) shall be created to
provide direction and guidance; monitor the progress of the study; and review and
evaluate the results and recommendations of the study.
4. Considering the limited expert local consultants, award for each consulting firm shall not
be limited to one (1) contract. However, strict monitoring of overlapping of consulting
personnel shall be conducted by the Procurement Service for Consultancy Services and
the proposed TWG.
5. The Terms of Reference (TOR), Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) and criteria for
the selection of consultants will be approved based on the delegated authorities of the
ROs. Only in the case that the cost of consulting services is above the RO delegated
authority shall the TOR, ABC and selection criteria be endorsed for approval by the DPWH
Central Office.
6. The templates for the TOR, ABC and selection criteria will be jointly formulated by the
Planning Service, Bureau of Design, Bureau of Construction, UPMO-FCMC and
representatives from the ROs to provide uniformity in the procurement of consulting
services.
This order takes effect immediately.
~~---
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
2.5 EKS 1111111111111111111111111111111111111

WIN7B00456
f9-&t17. /~ ,()~~
tU. :l...L- J.j:>t7

MANILA
Z 1 MAR 2017
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Standard Specification on

) Subgrade Improvement and
No. 35 _
)
)
Pavement Levelling Using GEOLIFT
High Density Polyurethane
Series of 2017 x:r~.W.ll Injection System
In line with the continuing efforts to upgrade the construction technology thru adoption of
successful research studies, this Department has approved the use of GEOLIFT High
Density Polyurethane Injection System for Subgrade Improvement and
Pavement Levelling, subject to the specifications hereto attached. A Certificate of
Conditional Approval has been issued by this Department accrediting its use in DPWH road
projects from March 9, 2017 until March 8, 2022.
This Order takes effect immediately.
~~-~---
MARKA. VILLAR r
Secretary
14.1.2 FET/RPF
111111111111111I111111111111111111111
WIN7U01447
Department Order No.~.r • Series of 2017
Stanclard Specification on Subgrade Improvement and Pavement Levelling
Using GEOUFT High Density Polyurethane Injection System
Page 1of 3
STANDARD SPEOFICATION ON SUBGRADEIMPROVEMENT AND PAVEMENT

LEVELLING USING GEOLIFT HIGH DENSITY POLYURETHANE
INJECTION SYSTEM
1. Description
This Specification shall consist of densification, voids filling, undersealing of subbase and
subgrade soils and stabilization of joints of concrete pavement slabs using GEOLIFf, a high
density polyurethane injection system in accordance with this Specification and in conformity
with the treatment plan as directed by the Engineer.
2. Material Requirements
The material to be injected shall be a high-density polyurethane material, as approved by

the Engineer. It shall consist of a polyurethane-foaming mixture having properties and
performance that will not be significantly affected by excess water in the soil. The
manufacturer shall certify that the material has properties that conform to the requirements
speCified in Table 1.
Table 1: High density polyurethane material properties
Property Test Method Requirement

Density, average ASTM D 1622 64.218 kgfm3
Compressive Strength, minimum ASTM D 1621 413.7 KPa
Water Absorption, maximum ASTM D2842 0.20% by volume
3. Construction Requirements
3.1 Injection Equipment
High Density Polyurethane Injection machine shall be designed for low and medium output
foam application up to 9 kgfmin at 13,790 KPa. Injection ports shall be placed on the drilled
holes where the injection gun will be attached to pump material into the subbase. A 16 mm
drill bit shall be used to penetrate the PCCP.The length of the drill bit may vary depending
on the depth needed. Laser level shall be used to measure movement of the PCCP.
3.2 Pavement Profile of the Treatment Area
The Contractor shall provide a pavement profile of the treatment areas from laser level
measurements of each area where high density polyurethane injection is to be performed.
Each profile shall be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer prior to performing the
polyurethane injection. Any laser levels used shall be required to control both the target
longitudinal profile at the same time as the cross-fall. Target level for each comer of each
PCCP slab should be calculated first and the laser level used to give an audible signal when
target level for each comer reached.
Department Order No. ~ Series of 2017
Standard Specification on Subgrade Improvement and Pavement Levelling
Using GEOUFr High Density Polyurethane Injection System
Page 2 of 3
3.3 Testing before Injection of Polyurethane Material
Before injection of polyurethane material, the Contractor shall conduct Dynamic Cone
Penetration (DCP) testing in accordancewith ASTMD6951 "Standard Test Method for Use of
the Dynamic Cone Penetrometer in Shallow Pavement Applications" to determine the
locations, and depth of the holes. The Contractor shall prepare a DCP testing plan that
includes a minimum of five (5) DCPtests per 1,000 meters. The Engineer shall review the
testing plan and provide comments within seven (7) working days. DCP testing shall not
commence until the testing plan is approved by the Engineer.
3.4 Treabnent Plan
The holes shall be drilled through the pavement and above the area requiring treatment.
The Contractor/Applicator shall be fully responsible to identify the location and to treat the
voids and stabilize the base to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall review
the treatment plan within seven (7) working days. Work shall not commence until the
treatment plan is approved by the Engineer.
3.5 Injection of Polyurethane Material
The polyurethane material shall be injected through a 16 mm injection ports inserted into
the drilled holes to the proper depth, or depths, as shown in the treatment plan. The rate
and amount of material injected to obtain proper densification of the subbase and subgrade
soils shall be determined by the Engineer.
Continuous laser level or dial indicator micrometer readings shall be monitored by the
Contractor during injection to determine sufficient material usage and soils densification as
indicated by pavement movement. Injection shall cease immediately as soon as the affected
area is raised to the required grade.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any excessivepavement lifting or pavement damage
that may occur as a result of the Contractor's work. The Contractor shall repair any subject
areas to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the Contractor's expense.
Upon completion of the injections, the Contractor shall perform a minimum of three (3)
additional DCP tests as per approval of the Engineer to verify the effectivity of the
treatment. If any adjustments in the depths or pattern of the injection points are needed,
the Contractor shall propose the adjustments for approval by the Engineer prior to further
injection. Once the adjustments have been approved, injection may proceed.
4. Warranty
The restored pavement shall not have a ± 5 mm difference in elevation to the adjacent
pavement blocks within one (1) year from the date of completion. In the event that more
than 5 mm of the movement in the injected area occurs, the Contractor shall restore the
pavement to the proper grade together with void filling and densification at no cost to the
Government.
Department Order No. J:L, Series of 2017
Standard Specification on Subgrade Improvement and Pavement Levelling
Using GEOUFT High Density Polyurethane Injection System
Page 3 of 3
5. Method of Measurement
The quantity of High Density Polyurethane Injection shall be measured for payment by the
area (sq.m.) of the pavement block raised and accepted. Payment shall be the full
compensation for furnishing the material specified, for performing polyurethane injection,
laser survey, and profiling in accordance with the specification and approved plans and for
furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
6. Basis of Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 5, Method of Measurement shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for High Density Polyurethane Injection System.
Pay Item
Number
High Density Polyurethane Injection Square Meter

MANILA
21 MAR 2011
DEPARTMENTORDER
,
J SUBJECT: DPWH Standard Specification for
) Item 1049 - Jet Grouting
No. 36 _
)
)
Series of 20~ ~.~.17
standard specification for soil stabilization, the attached DPWH Standard Specification
for Item 1049 - Jet Grouting is hereby prescribed, for the gUidance and compliance of
all concerned.
This specification shall form part of the on-going revision of the DPWH Standard
Specifications for Public Works Structures (Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems), Volume III, 1995 Edition.
This Order shall take effect immediately.
~~
Secretary

"111111 111111111111111111 11111" 1111

WIN7U01448
DPWH Standard Specification for
Item 1049 - Jet Grouting
1049.1 Description
This Item shall consist of installation, monitoring and testing of jet grouting in accordance
with this Specification and in conformity with location, lines, depth, spacing, and diameter
shown on the Plans.
1049.2.1 Cement Grout
The cement grout shall be of Portland Cement, water, and/or additives as approved by the
Engineer. Trial mixes shall be tested prior to commencement of work.
The quality as well as the suitability of the fresh grout shall be constantly assured by
measuring its density using a hydrometer.
1049.2.2 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement.
1049.2.3 Water
Water used shall be reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other
substances injurious to the cement grout produced. Water will be tested in accordance with
and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water. Drinkable water may be used without
test.
1049.2.4 Additives
Additives, if used, should be prepared according to the supplier's recommended

procedures/proportioning prior to being incorporated in the mix.
1049.3.1 General
The objective of the jet grouting is to improve the soil mass. Due to the specialized nature
of the work, a reputed specialist Contractor shall carry out jet grouting.
The Contractor shall construct jet grout columns of nominal diameter and spacing as
speCifiedin the plans.
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine and implement the systems and
criteria to ensure that speCifiedimprovement is achieved.
Department Order No . .1(, • Series of 2016
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1049 - Jet Grouting
ANNEX Page 2 of 7
The Contractor shall possess adequate equipment and instruments which are proven and
recognized locally and internationally for the execution of jet grouting works and for quality
assurance plan as required in this specification.
It shall have personnel with experience in the design, supervision and execution of jet
grouting works.
1049.3.2 Submittals
The following shall be submitted by the Contractor before the commencement of work:
a. A list of at least five (5) previously completed projects of similar scope and purpose. The
list shall include a description of the project and relative size.
b. Resumesof the management, supervisory and key personnel.
c. A ground movement monitoring plan.
d. A mix design for the project indicating sources and types of grout materials, with
volumetric proportions, and field test data from previous projects indicating compressive
strength achieved. If the Contractor intends to deviate from the material provided, they
shall submit, with the bid, evidence of satisfactory use of the proposed material from
past projects with similar soil conditions.
e. Work procedures, sequence, and control criteria (including parameters for each stage).
f. A general Work Procedures Plan outlining the spacing, location, depth and quantity of
grout to achieve the speCifiedcriteria of this specification.
g. Proposeddisposal area of waste materials.
The following shall be submitted by the Contractor during the Work:
a. Accurate daily records of all jet grouting locations, depths of treatment, start and stop
times, all jetting parameters, and grout injected for each location.
b. Any changejs in the predetermined grouting program required due to a change in the
subsurface conditions.
1049.3.3 Site Investigation and Trial
1049.3.3.1 Provision
All factual site investigation information and all interpretative reports relevant to the design
of jet grouting works, including assessments of any soil contamination, shall be made
available to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall ensure that the soil information is adequate to characterize the ground
to be treated and all physical and geotechnical properties required for jet grouting works
such as particle size distribution, density, organic content, strength characteristics and
groundwater level.
Jet grouting is typically very effective in cohesionless soil and cohesive soil of low plasticity.
Highly plastic soil shall require special consideration.
1049.3.3.2 Hazard Assessment
All information relevant to the safe implementation of the proposed grouting works,
including the location of all known buried and over-site services and the nature, proximity
Department Order No. j' ISeries of 2016
ANNEX Page 3 of 7
and condition of adjacent structures, shall be obtained by the Contractor before work
commencement. If underground utilities are anticipated, a thorough investigation may be
necessary to ensure location, condition and protection requirements. If a building in distress
is involved, a relevant building survey shall be carried out by the Contractor prior to
initiating any work.
1049.3.3.3 Trial Columns
An appropriate preliminary field trial section shall be constructed to verify the jet grouting
system and the design grouting parameters. Trial section location shall be agreed upon by
the Engineer within the treatment area. A trial section shall consist of a single module
comprised of at least three (3) jet grout columns. The quality of jet grout columns shall
conform to the design requirements and to be verified using the appropriate testing method.
Tests will be performed at the center of the module prior to and after grouting. Where
excavation is possible, assessmentof the geometric and mechanicalcharacteristicsof the jet
grout column should be made by visual inspection. Laboratory tests on samples recovered
by coring or excavation shall be made.
Prior to commencement of production grouting, trial section shall be performed. If the pre-
production trial sections indicate that the required ground improvement has not been
achieved, the Contractor shall revise the Work ProcedurePlan and re-test.
1049.3.4 Tolerance
1049.3.4.1 Setting Out
Setting out shall be carried out from reference lines and points shown in the plans.
Immediately before commencement of jet grouting works, the jet grout column positions
shall be marked with suitable identifiable pins or markers.
1049.3.4.2 Position
The maximum permissible deviation of the center of each grouting point from the correct
center point as shown in the setting out drawing shall be 150 mm in any direction unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer.
1049.3.4.3 Verticality
Jet grouting for vertical borehole shall be carried out as near vertical as possible.
1049.3.5 Length, Diameter and Spacing of the Jet Grout Columns
The length, diameter and spacing of the jet grout columns shown on the Plansare indicative
only and shall be adjusted to suit actual site conditions when deemed necessary.
1049.3.6 Compressive Strength
The average unconfined compressive strength of the selected working columns shall be a
minimum of 1.0 MPa.This shall be confirmed through laboratory tests on samples collected
from backflow on site.
Department Order No. 9(, ISeries Of 2016
ANNEX Page 4 of 7
1049.3.7 Grouting Equipment
The jet grouting equipment shall be specialized equipment and sufficiently powerful to
ensure a properly formed soil-cement column for treatment area. It shall have the following:
a. Drilling rig shall be capable of drilling down to the required depth.

b. The cement grout batching plant shall include all storage cribs, weather proof shelter,
pumps, automatic mixers, agitator and regulating devices required to continuously
measure and mix cement grout.
c. Cement grouting plant shall be capable of effectively batching, automatically mixing and
maintaining grout mixtures in suspensionand of delivering grout into jet grouting system
in a continuous flow at required pressure.
d. The cement grout mixer shall be a high speed colloidal type and capable to operate up
to 1,500 rpm.
e. High-pressure pumps shall be able to produce high-pressurizedjet at variable pressures
to cut and mix the in-situ soil.
f. The jet grouting equipment shall be able to provide at least 400 bar at nozzle for water
jetting. The equipment shall provide for continuous positive return flow during jet
grouting operation.
g. The jet grouting system shall be able to operate at different rotation and withdrawal
rates within the required range in order to complete the work and produce the required
jet grout columns.
h. Real time measuring and recording devices shall be provided throughout the drilling and
jet grouting operation such as column number, time, depth, pressures, flow rates,
rotation speed, etc.
Spare parts and equipment shall be available on site to maintain jet grouting equipment in
satisfactory operation condition at all times during execution of the jet grouting work.
1049.3.8 Obstructions
In the event of obstruction/s preventing the drilling operation, the Contractor shall inform
the Engineer immediately. Remedialoptions shall include:
a. Reposition the grouting point a short distance from the original position.
b. Additional grouting pOint/s around the obstructions.
c. Excavate, remove the obstruction/s, backfill and compact to the desired density and
reinstall the jet grout column.
1049.3.9 Execution of Jet Grouting
1049.3.9.1 Pre-treatment
Working platforms shall be designed, constructed and maintained in a manner suitable for
the safe movement and working of the grouting equipment. Material used to provide
working platforms shall be suitable for the ground conditions on which it is placed and shall
not prevent the drilling operation.
Site working levels for the treatment shall be provided and maintained throughout the
duration of the grouting works.
Department Order No. ~, Series of 2016
ANNEX Page 5 of 7
1049.3.9.2 Treabnent
Before starting the jet grouting works, a method statement should be submitted including
grouting parameters, sequence of execution and quality control procedures.
Unless otherwise specified, drilling of 100 mm to 150 mm diameter shall be carried out to
the required depth. Once at the designated depth, the in-situ soil will be eroded by highly
pressurized water or cement grout jet and cement grout will be injected and mixed with the
in-situ soil through grout nozzlejs at the monitor. The monitor is rotated and lifted at
required constant speed to achieve a continuous jet grout column.
If the jet grouting operation is interrupted for any reason, to ensure continuity of the
column, re-drilling and re-grouting may be required upon confirmation from the Engineer on
site.
The Contractor shall adjust the mix design and working parameters, if necessary,
throughout the course of the work in order to achieve the requirement for the jet grout
columns with the approval of the Engineer.
1049.3.9.3 Supervision
Execution shall be full-time supervised by trained and experienced personnel.
1049.3.10 Drilling and Grouting Records
Comprehensive records shall be kept. The record shall include the following:
a. Contract, section
b. Grout hole reference number
c. Water-cement ratio
d. Pressures during jet grouting
e. Flow rates
f. Withdrawal rate
g. Rotation speed
h. Time for drilling, jet grouting and overcoming obstructions
i. Details of constructions, delays and unusual ground
j. Features of spoil return, that is, color, quantity and density
k. Presence of ground deformation (plus estimate if detected) monitored using precise level
I. Any other information as may be required by the Engineer.
1049.3.11 Quality Control
1049.3.11.1 General
The following quality control measures shall be implemented for each grout hole:
a. Evaluation of the continuous drilling and grouting records from computer output
b. Grout and spoil density tests (daily)
c. Grout cubes tests (weekly)
d. Ground deformation monitoring (where speCified)
Department Order No. ./tS , Series of 2016
ANNEX Page 6 of 7
Any lost or damaged jet grout hole as the result of mechanical failure of equipment,
inadequacy of grout, air, or water supplies, or improper drilling or injection procedures shall
be backfilled with cement grout and replaced by another hole, drilled and injected by the
Contractor at no additional cost.
Equipment for mixing, holding, and pumping grout shall be in a secure location and shall be
operated in a way that the spillage of material will be minimized. No material will be allowed
to enter storm drains or other drainage courses.
1049.3.11.2 Spoil Return
Spoil return is the most important quality control indicator on the site. During jet grouting, a
visual observation of the flow and features of the spoil shall be maintained. An unexpected
reduction in spoil return shall be investigated and dealt with immediately. If there is
negligible spoil return, it should be ensured that there is no clogging of the borehole annulus
and the jetting parameters may have to be revised. Three (3) cube samples shall be
collected from spoil return during jetting at different levels of each column for subsequent
laboratory tests.
During jet grouting, spoil return shall be channeled to silting pond, tank or other collection
structures. The Contractor shall regularly dispose all waste materials to the approved
disposal area/location.
The work to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of meters of jet grout columns
that are satisfactorily constructed.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 1049.4 shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Jet Grouting which price and payment shall include the cost of
furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessaryto complete the work, including trial
columns, coring, testing and disposal of waste materials. Every completed jet grouted
columnjs shall be supported with Jet Grout Pile Data.
Payment will be made under:
Descri .on Unit of Measurement

Jet Groutin 600 mm dia. Meter
Department Order No. .1" , Series of 2016
DPWH Standard SpecifICation for Item 1049 - Jet Grouting
ANNEX Page 7 of 7
References:
a) American Society for Testingand Materials (ASTM)

b) DPWHStandard Specificationsfor Highways Bridges and Airports, VolumeII
c) Specification for Jet Grouting, G&PGeotechnicsSDNBHD
d) The Soilcrete - Jet Grouting Process,Keller Group, UK
e) Bauer Jet Grouting Processand Equipment, Bauer, Denmark
f) Jet grouting, Menard Polska
!J.?7. /,3 ~~&J#
~~ LV~ 'wI"
Manila
9 MAR 20t7
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Mechanics of Ranking Offices and
Personnel as Basis for the Grant of
NO.
44 ~
)
Performance - Based Bonus (PBB) for
FY 2016
serie-s-o-f-2-0-7u-7-Oj.- ~. 17
In connection with the implementation of a performance-based incentive system in this

Department pursuant to EO No. 80 dated July 20, 2012 and EO 201 dated February 19,
2016 and as provided under MC No. 2016-01 dated May 12, 2016 issued by the Inter-
Agency Task Force (IATF) on Administrative Order (A.O.) No. 25, the following mechanics of
ranking offices and personnel as basis for the grant of Performance-Based Bonus (PBB)
for FY 2016 are hereby prescribed:
EVALUA nON OF OFFICES
Implementing Offices
The implementing offices (Regional Offices, District Engineering Offices and Unified Project
Management Office Clusters) shall be ranked based on their respective performance and
accomplishments (of set targets) for CY 2016 using the following criteria: a) Construction
Accomplishment/ b) Design Audit and Assessment Performance/ c) Quality Control
Performance in Project Implementation' d) Maintenance Implementation and Practices/ e)
Absorptive Capacity,' and f) Procurement "Supervision of DEOs" is another additional
criterion in evaluating the performance of each Regional Office. Except "Maintenance
Implementation and Practices" and "Procurement'; the same criteria shall also be applied in
evaluating the performance of each Unified Project Management Office (UPMO) Cluster,
Distribution
Criteria (Implementing Offices) Percentage (%) Weight
ROs DEOs UPMO Clusters
Construction Accomplishment 20 20 40
Design Audit and Assessment 20 20 nja
Performance
Quality Control Performance in Project 20 20 40
Implementation
Maintenance Implementation and 10 20 nja
Practices
Absorptive Capacity 10 10 20
Procurement 10 10 n/a
Supervision of DEOs 10 nja nja
TOTAL 100% 100% 100%
D.O. NO ...1!L s. 2017
Mechanics of Ranking Offices and Personnel as Basis for the
Grant of Performance - Based Bonus (PBB) for FY 2016
Page 2 of 3
OSEC Proper, Bureaus and Services
On the other hand, the performance of the offices in the Central Office (OSEC Proper,
Bureaus and Services) shall be evaluated based on the targets each office has accomplished
in accordance with their respective approved Annual Goals and Operations Plans for FY
2016, and confirmed by the Management Committee (ManCom).
Criteria (OSEC Proper, Bureaus &. Services)
Areas of Evaluation
ht
o erational Plan Accom lishment
PGSBalanced Scorecard Accom lishment
Re ular functions' Accom lishment
Total
Distribution of Performance of Offices/Delivery Units
Rating/ Cateaory Distribution

Best 15%
Better 30%
Good 55%
EVALUA nON OF PERSONNEL
The personnel shall be ranked based on their individual performance targets which must be
aligned with the office performance targets, they have committed and accomplished for the
last two (2) rating periods using the Department's existing and established Performance
Evaluation Systems (PES) categorized as follows:
• Individual Performance Commitment and Review (IPCR) for January to June 2016 and
July to December 2016 for 1st and 2nd level positions
• Performance Appraisal System for District Engineers (PADE) for District Engineers
• Career Executive Service Performance Evaluation System (CESPES)for 3rd level positions
The personnel's performance outputs shall be evaluated based on their performance ratings
for the last two (2) semesters as reflected in their respective IPCRs (January to June 2016
and July to December 2016), and PADE and CESPE5, both for FY 2016. Employees in the
offices that ranked Good, Better and Best shall be entitled to PBB in varying rates provided
they got a performance rating of at least Satisfactory, and have rendered at least nine
(9) months of service as of December 31, 2016.
D.O. No.~ s. 2017
Mechanics of Ranking Offices and Personnel as Basis for the
Grant of Performance - Based Bonus (PBB) for FY 2016
Page 3 of 3
RATES OF THE FY 2016 PSS
The PBB rates of individual employees shall depend on the performance ranking of the
offices where they belong, based on the individual's monthly basic salary as of December
31, 2016, as follows, but not lower than PhPS,OOO:
% of Monthl Basic Sala

65%
57.5%
50%
This Order supersedes Department Order No. 78, series of 2016 and shall take effect
immediately.
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
17.1 EPPjUARM Department of Public Works and Highways

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7K00497
ANNEX
Definition of Terms
Construction Accomplishment measures the performance of the Regional Offices /

District Engineering Offices / Unified Project Management Offices based on their actual
physical accomplishment in the implementation of DPWH Infrastructure projects generated
from the Project Monitoring System (PMS).
The ratings are computed based on the total releases (carry over and current year projects),
20% of which represent their accomplishment under the pre-construction stage and 80%
under the construction stage using the following formula:
% Total Carry Over Releases(x) = Total Carry Over Releases

Total Carry Over Releases+ Total Current Year Releases
% Total Current Year Releases(y) = Total Current Year Releases

Total Carry Over Releases+ Total Current Year Releases
a = Pre-construction Accomplishment (Carry Over) Rating = (ax+by)0.2 + (cx+dy)0.8

b= Pre-construction Accomplishment (Current Year)
c= Construction Accomplishment (Carry Over)
d = Construction Accomplishment (Current Year)
Design Audit and Assessment Performance covers the evaluation/assessment of

detailed architectural and engineering design and processes undertaken by the Regional and
District Engineering Offices as to compliance with the latest edition of DPWH Design
guidelines, Criteria and Standards (DGCS) and other existing applicable laws, codes and
Department Orders/Issuances relative to design.
formula:
Percentage Rating %
Areas of Evaluation Wei ht
Project Office Project Office
I.
15%
15%
II. 30%
15%
5%
5%
5%
III.
10%
30%
850/0 150/0 0.000/0 0.00%
100% 100%
Quality Control Performance in Project Implementation is an appraisal of the quality
control and construction procedures in the implementation of DPWH projects including
maintenance undertakings. It takes into account the capability of the organizational unit to
implement, resource-wise, the DPWH quality assurance program.
The ratings are computed based on the following formula:
Responsibility Area Weight

a. Effectiveness of Quality Control Implementation
a.1 Timeliness of testing materials

10%
relative to its use in the project
75%
a.2 Ability to implement quality
15%
control policies
a.3 Quality of completed works 50%
b. Project Supervision
b.1 Personal Adequacy 7.5% 15%
b.2 Personal Competence 7.5%
c. Adequacy/Reliability of Laboratory Equipment and 10%
Facilities
TOTAL 100%
Maintenance is the capability of the field offices (Region and District Engineering Offices)
to provide the requisite maintenance action/s on defects and deficiencies on our road
network and other government infrastructures in a timely and efficient manner employing
the highest quality of completed maintenance works in accordance with existing
Departmental policies and standards.
The criteria for the computation of the performance rating on maintenance of Regional and
District Engineering Offices are as follows:
1) Road Condition and Evaluation Division (RCMED)

The basis of the assigned percentage is the semestral inspection of all national roads
and bridges of the District Engineering Offices to measure compliance to Department
Order No. 13, s. 2011. The degree/level of maintenance is reflected on the total
quality of the defects noted during actual field inspection, the response provided by
the DEOsto correct/repair the noted defects within the prescribed response times
and the acceptability of their submitted justification as to circumstances like in
unwarranted delay in completing the rectification works are considered in computing
the performance rating. Meanwhile, the Regional Offices are rated based on the
performance of the DEOsin their respective jurisdiction;
2) Policies and Standards Division (PSD)

The assigned percentage is based on two factors: (1) the timeliness or the prompt
submittal of all required documents needed by the Bureau for the PSDto prepare
draft policies and guidelines; and (2) the quality and completeness of the requisite
submittal. Specific to these requirements, among others, is the adherence by the
DEOson their Annual Maintenance Work Program as to utilization of maintenance
funds for labor, equipment and materials;
3) Safety and Disaster Management Coordination Division (SDMCD)
The assigned percentage is based on the average score of participants during the
Training/Workshops conducted by the BOM, since these training/workshops are
interactive. Adherence/compliance to the provisions of Department Order No.15, s.
2015 are likewise considered in the computation of percentage points.
4) National Buildings Service Division (NBSD)

The assigned percentage is based on the prompt submittal of requisite documents
and the quality of the submitted reports. Specific to these requirements are the
timeliness and quality of submittal of the DEOs Monthly Accomplishment Reports on
completed maintenance activities for the repair of Other Public Buildings (OPB), and
Flood Control and Drainage Structures, and the complete and verified inventory of
these structures.
Absorptive Capacity is the ability of an agency to maximize the use of available financial
resources. This can be computed as obligation over allotment.
% = Obligation
Allotment
Procurement refers to the acquisition of Goods, Consulting Services, and the contracting
for Infrastructure Projects by the Procuring Entity.
Procurement shall also include the lease of goods and real estate. With respect to real
property, its procurement shall be governed by the provisions of Republic Act No. 8974,
entitled "An Act to Facilitate the Acquisition of Right-of-Way Site or Location for National
Government Infrastructure Projects and for Other Purposes", and other applicable laws,
rules and regulations.
Th e ratlnQs are compute d on t h e ~0 IIOWInQ ormu a:

Criteria Value (Maximum)
A.Compliance in Civil Works Registry Report of awarded
contracts posted/updated in the CWR against total number
of contracts processed
5%
No. of Contracts Awarded / Completed 2.5%=
x5%
No. of Contracts Bid out
B. Compliance to on -time submission of Certificate of
Compliance to PhilGeps posting
2.5%
On-time Submission 2.5% =
Non-submission or Late Submission 0 =
C. Compliance to submission of Agency Procurement
Compliance and Performance Indicators (APCPI)
2.5%
On-time Submission 2.5% =
Non-submission or Late Submission =0
OVERALL COMPLIANCE
10%
Sum of A B & C
Operational Plan Accomplishment is the successful completion of the day-to-day tasks
required to achieve the organizational unit's strategic goals based on the approved
operational plan.
The rating is computed based on the following formula:
% Operational Plan Accomplishment = No. of Initiatives Completed x 100

No. of Proposed Initiatives
PGS Balanced Scorecard Accomplishment is the successful implementation of the

organization's strategy translated into concrete and quantifiable outcomes by measuring
whether the operational activities of an organizational unit is aligned with its larger-scale
and long term objectives and strategies relating to social impact, external stakeholders,
processor, people and resource stewardship.
The ratings are computed based on the following formula:
% per measure = Actual 2016 Accomplishment

Target 2016 Accomplishment
Then, take the AVERAGE PERCENTAGE of all PGS Measures

E1'f"J. f.J () f!(N!t1 ~

lft(./D, ~(7
Manila
1 0 APR 2011 i
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Implementation of the Quality

) Workplace Standards Checklist
NO.
52 _
)
)
Series of 201~'j).(7
To ensure effective implementation of ISO 9001:2015 Quality Management System all

Bureaus, Services, Unified Project Management Offices, Regional Offices and District
Engineering Offices are hereby required to implement the Quality Workplace Standards.
This checklist is aimed to promote a clean and conducive workplace and to maintain facilities
in order to provide an optimum working environment for the employees of the Department.
Workplace audits will be based on these guidelines on the areas only where it is applicable.
This Department Order shall in no way be used as justification for office renovations and other
similar activities.
Copies of this Standards (DPWH-QWS) will be provided by the Records Management Division
(RMD) of the Human Resource and Administrative Service (HRAS).
This Order shall supersede D.O. 91, Series of 2013 and shall take effect immediately.
Deparltrent of Public Works and Highways

1111111111111111I11111111111111111111
WIN7P01520
11.1.1 ETC/NSP/BEY
~-
Issue Date: 1 0 APR 2017
Doc. Code: DPWH - QWS
Quality Workplace Standards
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. 1 of 6
Component Standards (Y IN) Remarks

APPLICABLETO ALL 1. All items are free from unwanted items
COMPONENTS such as stains, dusts, cobwebs,
garbage, etc. at all times.
2. Cracks, dents, scratches, deterioration
and other defects are labeled and
reported to the Facilities Management
Division or the General Services
Section or to appropriate office holding
the function.
DOORS 3. Doors have clear signage and kept
closed at all times.
Standard sizes of signage
• Main Door - 45 em x 10 em
• Conference Room/Dining
Area/Male / Female Comfort
Rooms/ Storage Rooms - 30 em x
Bem
• Push / Pull - 16 em x 9 em
WALLS & FLOORS 4. Paintings and other decorations do not
occupy more than 50% of the
available wall and floor space and kept
free from dusts at all times.
5. Clear and updated transaction/
process flow for client services are
posted in Receivinq Areas.
TABLES 6. Desks/ tables are uniform in size, type
and color in each areal location,
7. Table top contains (as necessary)
laptop, computer monitor, keyboard,
mouse, 1 file box for current files.
Personal items such as table top
calendar, picture frame or mirror
should occupy a space not bigger than
A4 size paper.
8. Conference tables, when not in use are
placed at the center, with chairs
around tucked under the table, and no
personal items, files, supplies, boxes
are placed in the room.
Issue Date: 1 a APR 2017
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. 20f6
9. Name of staff is posted on the visible

corner of the table (uniform to all
desks/tables).
10. Layout of individual tables and desks
are arranged according to units and
functions and provides clear
passageways.
11. Computer desktop, UPS and AVR
placed on an appropriate
compartment and trash bins are
located under the table; No other
items such as file boxes, shoes and
bags are placed under the table.
12. First level table drawers are used for
office supplies which are neatly
arranged and free from dusts and
unnecessary items at all times.
13. Bottom drawer is used to store
personal items such as bags, mugs,
cellphones, shoes, slippers and the like
but no food is kept in workstation,
pantry is provided for all food items of
the staff.
14. Eating is not allowed in individual
tables/ desks/ cubicles anytime of the
day.
15. At the start of the day, S-minute seiso
is practiced to wipe the table tops and
equipment, and arrange drawers.
16. At the end of the day, table top is
cleared from documents, paperworks,
office supplies, and other items except
the allowed items mentioned above.
17. During the absence of the staff, a
signage of "On-Leave or On Fieldwork"
is placed on top of the desk.
CHAIRS 18. Chairs are uniform in size, type and
color in each areal location.
19. Chairs, when not in use are tucked
under the table.
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. 3 of 6
20. Only one pillow may be placed on the

chair but size is not bigger than the
size of the long envelope.
21. Only one jacket or shawl may be
placed on the back seat during the day
but is kept inside the personal drawer
at the end of the day.
EQUIPMENT 22. Equipment such as LCD projector,
sound system, etc. are placed in
cabinets (as appropriate) with lock for
security.
23. Kitchen appliances such as
refrigerator, microwave oven, water
dispenser, oven toaster, air pot, and
the like are kept in the dining area
only.
24. Equipment are operated by OFFICE
employee only.
25. Equipment are turned off and
unplugged (as necessary) when not in
use.
26. Equipment are labeled with clear
instructions for proper use (as
necessary).
27. Maintenance labels are attached and
updated during maintenance.
28. One location is assigned for each
division for the telephones, fax
machines, and printers where pen and
notepads are provided near the
telephones, and paper supplies placed
near the fax machine and printer.
29. Computer monitors are on power-
savina mode.
WIRES AND CABLES 30. Wires and cables are neatly bundled
with appropriate cable tie, arranged at
straight line and right angles, safely
covered with moldings when on floor
or walls, and strategically placed to
prevent accidents.
Issue Date: 1 0 APft 2017
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. 4 of 6
WHITE BOARD 31. White boards are clear of writings and

postings at the end of the day and
when not in use.
32. Whiteboard markers and eraser are
kept with the white board.
33. White boards, when not in use, are
placed at one corner of the room.
CABINETS 34. With labels that are visible from one-
meter distance, clear titles, and color
coded.
Standard size of label - 4.7 em x 11.8
em
35. Confidential files and expensive
supplies are kept in locked cabinets,
and keys are kept by an assigned
personnel.
36. Uniform in size, color and sizes in each
location/ area.
37. File boxes and big items are arranged
systematically inside the cabinets (e.g.
heavy items on the floor).
38. Record folders are labeled clearly
according to the QMS RDS Form,
DPWH-QMSP-02-F01.
STORAGEAREAS 39. Use of supplies follow "first-in, first-
out" rule.
40. Inventory of supplies is monitored
through stock cards. Stock card form
can be downloaded in the downloads
section in the Department's intranet
website.
http://dpwhweb/downloads/index. htm
41. Each department has an assigned
personnel to supervise the release of
stocks and records.
BOOKS, 42. Inventory of official references or
MAGAZINES AND documents are maintained, and
REFERENCE logbook for borrowed and returned
MATERIALS documents kept and monitored.
TRASH BINS 43. Trash bins are placed under the table
or at the corner of the room.
Issue Date: 1 0 APR 2017
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. S of 6
44. No leftover food and watery trash is

thrown on these bins, restroom and
pantry trash bins with sealable covers
are used instead.
45. Trash bins should not be overflowing
and emptied at the end of the dav.
SINK TOP IN 46. Sink top may contain the dish rack,
DINING AREAS soap dish and other kitchen equipment
but should not occupy more than 60%
of the top space.
47. Sink top is kept dry when not in use.
48. No unwashed and/or disorganized
utensils and plates are left in the sink.
CLEANING 49. Cleaning materials are kept under the
MATERIALS AND sink or inside cabinets in the dining
SUPPLIES area.
50. Cleaning materials are maintained
clean and no over spilling for cleaning
supplies.
ITEMS THAT 51. Toners of printers and photocopiers,
REQUIRE SPECIAL fax films, and batteries are collected by
DISPOSAL Facilities Management Division or the
General Services Section every month
for selling.
52. One box for scrap papers is placed in
one corner of the photocopying area.
53. Confidential documents are shredded
accordinqlv.
COUNTER/ 54. Signage are posted, such as: Start
FRONTLINE DESKS your transaction here, name of
frontline staff.
55. Counter top contains the computer
monitor, keyboard, mouse, pens in a
pencil holder or tied appropriately to
the counter top, necessary forms
placed trays, and client feedback form
with pens, drop box and clear sign of
"WE VALUE YOUR FEEDBACK,THANK
YOU" located at one end of the
counter; no personal items on counter
top at all times.
•
Revision No.: 2
Page No. 6 of 6
56. Computer desktop is placed under the

counter table.
57. Counter cabinets are used to store
personal items, which are limited to
bags, mugs/ water bottles, and a pair
of shoes, are neatly arranged at all
times.
CLIENT CHAIRS IN 58. Chairs, sofa and benches are arranged
FRONTLINE in such a way that there is a clear
COUNTERS passageway to the counter at the
center, and spaces between rows of
chairs provide clear passageway as
well.
59. Color, type and size are uniform per
areal location.
BULLETIN BOARDS 60. One bulletin board is allowed for each
Division/ Section.
61. Size, color and type are uniform in
each areal location.
62. Contains memo, announcements,
events, performance/ project
monitoring, policies, etc. with clear and
visible labels.
63. Paper posts are covered with
transparency films to protect from
easy deterioration.
64. Kept updated and neatly arranged by
the assiqned person.
PRAYERALTARS 65. One location is assigned for each floor.
66. Table allotted is not bigger than the
individual desk.
67. Water vase is cleaned at the start of
the day and spoiled flowers are
replaced by fresh ones.
DfI7./.d ./Jf7~#
Republic of the Philippines ¥- I(r ~67

Manila
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Policy on Creation of Bids and

) Awards Committees
NO. _54 )
)
Series of 201~.II.,.,
Pursuant to the provisions of Section 11 of Republic Act No. 9184, otherwise known as the
Government Reform Act, and its Implementing Rules and Regulations, Bids and Awards
Committee (BAC) for Civil Works, Consultancy, and Goods and Services are created in the
Central Office.
The Committee members shall undertake the procurement process strictly in accordance
with rules, regulations and guidelines applicable thereto.
Regular members of the BAC, who shall be on a "jury duty" type of assignment until the
Notice of Award is issued by the Head of the Implementing Entity, shall have a fixed term of
one (1) year reckoned from the date of appointment, renewable at the discretion of the
Secretary. In case of resignation, retirement, separation, transfer, reassignment, removal or
death, the replacement shall serve only for the duration of the unexpired term.
The term "jury duty" shall be understood to mean a state by which the members give
utmost priority to BAC assignment over all the other duties and responsibilities until the
requirements for the said assignments at hand are completed.
The BAC shall be assisted by the Procurement Service that shall serve as the BAC
Secretariat. The Technical Working Group (TWG) which shall be organized by the committee
Chairman shall perform functions as may be directed.
All expenses to be incurred including the honoraria/allowances of the personnel involved

shall be properly charged against any available funds of the Department, subject to the
usual accounting and auditing rules and regulations.
This Order supersedes Department Order No. 43 Series of 2017 and shall take effect
immediately.
1.2 ECA/RCA

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7102922 .
MANILA
1 0 APR 20111
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT Standard Specification on the Use of

) KT - Hyper Durability Epoxy Asphalt
Noo 5·5 _
)
)
Pavement Technology on Bituminous
Concrete Surface Course, Hot - Laid
Series of 20~.,.".17
successful research studies, this Department has approved the use of KT - Hyper
Durability Epoxy Asphalt Pavement Technology on Bituminous Concrete Surface
Course, Hot - Laid, subject to the specifications hereto attached.
A Certificate of Conditional Approval had been issued by this Department accrediting the use
of KT - HDP in DPWH road projects from March 9, 2017 until March 8, 2022.

11111111111111I1111111111111111111111
14.1.2 FET/RPF WIN7U01456
STANDARD SPECIFICATION ON THE USE OF KT - HYPER DURABILITY EPOXY
ASPHALT PAVEMENT TECHNOLOGY ON BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE
COURSE, HOT - LAID
1. Description
This Item shall consist of constructing a Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, composed of
aggregates, mineral filler and bituminous material with the addition of KT - Hyper Durability
Epoxy Binder mixed in a central plant, constructed and laid hot on the prepared base in
accordance with this Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical
cross-section shown on the Plans.
Epoxy asphalt pavement technology - is a kind of epoxy admixture that is added to

asphalt/bituminous mixture to improve its inherent characteristics (high fluid resistance,
dynamic stability and durability) and the resistance to rutting of the resulting asphalt
pavement.
2.1 Composition and Quality of Bituminous Mixture (lob-Mix Formula)
The epoxy asphalt mixture shall be composed of aggregate, mineral filler, hydrated lime,
and Epoxy asphalt as binder.
At least three weeks prior to production, the Contractor shall submit in writing a job-mix
formula for each mixture supported by laboratory test data along with samples and sources
of the components and viscosity-temperature relationships information to the Engineer for
testing and approval.
Each job-mix formula submitted shall propose definite single values for:
1. The percentage of aggregate passing each specified sieve size.

2. The percentage of Epoxy asphalt to be added.
3. The temperature of the mixture delivered on the road.
4. The kind and percentage of additive and mineral filler to be used.
After the job-mix is established, all mixture furnished for the project shall conform thereto
within the following ranges of tolerances:
Passing No. 4 and larger sieves + 7 percent

Passing No.8 to No. 100 sieves (inclusive) + 4 percent
Passing No. 200 sieve + 2 percent
Bituminous Material + 0.4 percent
Temperature of Mixture + lOuC
Should a change in source of material be proposed or should a job-mix formula prove

unsatisfactory, a new job-mix formula shall be submitted by the Contractor in writing and be
approved by the Engineer prior to production.
Standard Specification on the Use of KT - Hyper Durability Epoxy Asphalt Pavement
Technology on Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Hot - Laid
Page 2 of 4
Approval of a new job-mix formula may require laboratory testing and verification.
The mixture shall have a minimum compressive strength of 1.4 MPa.
The mixture shall have a mass percent air voids with the range of 3 to 5.
The mixture shall also have an index of retained strength of not less than 70 when tested by
MSHTO T 165 "Effect of Water on Compressive Strength of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures': For aggregates having maximum sizes over 25 mm, AASHTO T 165 will be
mcx:1ifiedto use 150 mm cylindrical specimens. The 150 mm (cylinders will be compacted by
the procedures outlined in AASHTO T 167 "Compressive Strength of Hot Mix Asphalt
Mixtures" mcx:1ifiedto employ ten (10) repetitions of a molding load of 9.6 MPa, with no
appreciable holding time after each application of the full load.
2.2 Bituminous Material
Epoxy asphalt is a two-phased chemical system in which a thermosetting amine epoxy

(continuous phase) is blended with conventional asphalt (diSperse phase). Epoxy resin
consists of the main resin and hardener which are stored separately. Table-l shows the
standard of two (2) elements and Table-2 shows the standard of mixed epoxy resin. The
epoxy asphalt, which is the combination of epoxy resin composed of the two mixed
elements and asphalt with a fixed ratio of 25:75 respectively, begins with irreversible
chemical reaction that increases the stiffness and strength of the mixture. After curing,
epoxy resin forms a three-dimensional continuous phase in which asphalt is dispersed. Such
a mixture is not only tough but also elastic at typical pavement service temperatures up to
70 degrees Celsius, providing high fatigue resistance. Epoxy asphalt is a thermoset material,
does not soften as much as conventional asphalt binders at high temperatures, has gocx:1
resistance to aging and chemical attack and is permeable to water and salts, in part due to
its low void pavement design.
Table - 1 Standard of EpOXY Resin

Tests Standard Value Test Method
Viscosity@25°C (mPa . s) 10000 - 15000 ASTM 0 2393
Epoxy equivalents weight

(gjeq) 180 - 200 ASTM 0 1652
Main Resin
Flash Point, Cleveland open
cup (0C) ~240 ASTM 0 92
Density@25°C (gjcm3) 1.00 - 1.25 ASTM 0 1475
Viscosity@25°C (mPa . s) 5 - 80 ASTM 0 2393
Amine Value (mgKOHjg) 180 - 230 ASTM 0 7237

Hardener
Flash point, Cleveland open
cup (0C) ~145 ASTM 0 92
Density@25°C (gjcm3) 0.75 - 1.00 ASTM 0 1475

Department Order No. ~ Series Of 2017
Page 3 of 4
Table - 2 Standard of Combined EPOXY Resin
Standard Value Test Method

~ 5.0 ASTM D 638
>50 ASTM D 638
2.3 Aggregates
Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Item 703, Aggregates of the DPWH
Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
2.4 Mineral Filler
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 703 A, Mineral Filler of the DPWH Standard
Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
2.5 Hydrated Lime
It shall conform to the requirements of Item 701, Construction Lime of the DPWH Standard
2.6 Mixing Temperature
The mixing temperature is made at a higher temperature of 175°C with a minimum

temperature of 170°C. The compaction temperature was set to a minimum of 155°C.
2.7 Proportioning of Mixtures
The proportion of bituminous material on the basis of total dry aggregate shall be from 5.0
to 8.0 mass percent. The exact percentage to be used shall be fixed by the Engineer in
accordance with the job-mix formula and the other quality control requirements.
During the mixing operation, one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0) mass percent of hydrated lime, dry
aggregate basis, shall be added to the mixture. The lower percentage limit is applicable to
aggregates which are predominantly calcareous.
The construction requirements shall be in accordance whenever applicable, with Section

307.3 of Item 307, Bituminous Plant-Mix Surface Course - General in DPWH Standard
The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of
asphalt pavement placed, compacted and accepted based on the thickness and density of
the cores taken in accordance with Item 307, Subsection 307.3.10 (Acceptance, Sampling
and Testing) of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
Volume II, 2012 Edition.
Page 40f 4
5. Basisof Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Subsection 4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Epoxy Asphalt Pavement, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, handling, mixing, hauling, pladng, rolling,
compacting, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.

I
Epoxy Asphalt Pavement
I Square Meter
REFERENCES:
L DPWH StilndDrd SpecificQtions for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume 11,2012 Edition
2. KlNDAIKASI Website httD://www.kindai-kasei.co.iD/
3. Technical Report of Technical Services Division (TSD) BRS
4. AmeriaJn Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D 2393 - Test Method for Viswsity of Epoxy Resins and Related Components
ASTM D 1652 - Standard Test Method for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins
ASTM D 92 - Standard Test Method for Rash and Rre Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester
ASTM D 147S - Standard Test Method for Density of liquid Coatings, Inks, and Related Products
ASTM 7237 - Standard Test Method for Free Cyanide and Aquatic Free Cyanide with Row Injection
Analysis (FlA) Utilizing Gas Diffusion Separation and Amperometric Detection
ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
5. AmeriaJn Association of Stilte Highway and Transportation Offlcials (AASHTO)
MSHTO T 16S - Standard Method of Test for Effect of Water on Compressive Strength of Compacted
Bituminous Mixtures
MSHTO T 167 - Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Hot Mix Asphalt
t)91;, /J~P.J#
Republic of the Philippines !fir ~r~~~/7

Manila
1 5 MAy 2011
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Conditions as to When "As-Built" Plan

) can be Used as Reason for Final
NO. 66_
)
)
Variation Order
Series of 20~J,.f7
It has been observed that there are Implementing Offices in the Department that are
processing Final Variation Orders only after the "As-Built" Plan is approved by the concerned
DPWH Officials since the said approved "As-Built" Plan is one of the requirements in the
processing of Final Variation Order as per D.O. No. 156, Series of 2015. As a consequence,
all works under the Final Variation Order are those that were already accomplished and
actually incorporated for the completion of the project even without an approved variation
order. Implementing Offices simply use the approved "As-Built" Plan as the reason for the
approval of Final Variation Order.
Pursuant to Section 3 Annex "E" of the Revised IRR of RA 9184, all works under a variation
order of a project should be undertaken only in accordance with the following:
3. CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH CONTRACTORS IS TO START WORK

UNDER VARIATION ORDERS AND RECEIVE PAYMENTS
3.1. Under no circumstances shall a contractor proceed to commence work

under any Change Order or Extra Work Order unless it has been
approved by the Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized
representative.
3.2. However, under any of the following conditions, the procuring entity's
representative/Project Engineer may, subject to the availability of
funds and within the limits of his delegated authority, allow the
immediate start of work under any Change Order or Extra Work
Order:
i) In the event of an emergency where the prosecution of the work

is urgent to avoid detriment to public service, or damage to life
and/or property; and/or
ii) When time is of the essence;
Provided, however, That such approval is valid on work done up to

the point where the cumulative increase in value of work on the
project which has not yet been duly fully approved does not exceed
five percent (5%) of the adjusted original contract price;
D.O. No. 66 s.2017
Conditions as to When "As Built" Plan can be Used as Reason for Final Variation Order
Page 2 of 2
Provided, further, That immediately after the start of work, the

corresponding Change Order or Extra Work Order shall be prepared
and submitted for approval in accordancewith the above rules herein
set. Payments for works satisfactorily accomplished on any Change
Order or Extra Work Order may be made only after approval of the
same by the Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized
representative.
Provided, finally, That for a Change Order or Extra Work Order

involving a cumulative amount exceeding five percent (5%) of the
original contract price, no work thereon may be commenced unless
said Change Order or Extra Work Order has been approved by the
Head of the Procuring Entity or his duly authorized representative.
In view of the foregoing, all Implementing Offices are hereby directed to observe the
conditions as to when the "As-Built" Plan can be made as reason for items of work to be
covered by a proposed Final Variation Order, as shown in the table below.
Not Acceptable
Conditions for
Acceptable (Requires Prior Approval
Undertaking Works
of Variation Order)
1. In the event of emergency
when prosecution of work
is urgent
Works which are Urgent,
The cumulative amount
completed without prior
2. Time is of the essence exceeding 5% of the
approval of Variation Order
adjusted original contract
and incorporated in the "As-
The cumulative increase in price
Built" Plan
value of work does not
exceed 5% of the adjusted
original contract price
This order shall take effect immediately.
6.1 TCA/AMD/WRO

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7W02004
~
--". -
- -
- -
~
Manila
1 5 MAY 2017
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Minimum Design Standards for

) Industry Roads Under the DTI-
NO. 68 )) DPWH Convergence Program for

Roads Leveraging Linkages for
Series of 201((jZlf".,.,.17 ) Industry and Trade (ROLLIT)
In line with the mandate of the DPWH to ensure the quality and safety of road
infrastructure, hereunder are the prescribed minimum design standards in preparing the
engineering design of industry road projects included in the Department of Trade and
Industry (DT!) - DPWH Convergence Program for ROLLIT, for the guidance and compliance
of all concerned.
Design Element Requirement
Pavement Type Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (PCCP)
Pavement Width Minimum of 6.70m for two lanes
Pavement Thickness Minimum of 280mm (11 inches)

Shoulder
• Width Minimum of 1.50m
• Material Minimum gravel surfacing
Roadway Cross Slope 1.50%
Radius of Horizontal Curve Minimum of 50m

Length of Tangent between Point Minimum of 30m
of Curvature (PC) and Point of
Tangency CPT)of reverse curve
Length of Vertical Curve Minimum of 60m
Design Speed Terrain Type: (Minimum Values)
• Flat - 60kph
• Rolling - 40kph
• Mountainous - 30kph
Longitudinal Grade Minimum of 0.50% and maximum of 8% on cut
sections
Side Slope Ratio (H:V) Cut Slope Material Type: (Prescribed Values)
• Common Materials - 1:1 to 1.5:1
• Soft/Rippable Rock - 0.5 : 1 to 1: 1
• Hard/Solid Rock - 0.25: 1 to 0.5: 1
Minimum fill slope of 1.5: 1
DO No. ~ s. 2017
Minimum Design Standards for Industry Roads Under
the DTI-DPWH Convergence Program for ROLUT
Page 2 of 2
Design Element Requirement

Road Drainage Structure Box Culvert - 2S-year flood
Pipe Culvert - 2S-year flood
- Minimum diameter
of 910mm
Slope Protection As needed
Road Safety Provisions Refer to DPWH Highway Safety Design based on
DPWH Highway Safety Design Standards (May 2012)
• Part 1: Road Safety Design Manual
• Part 2: Road Signs and Pavement Markings
Manual
Bridges • Permanent Structures (Concrete or Steel)
• Structural design based on AASHTO HL-93
Loading, using peak ground acceleration for
seismic analysis and 50-year flood frequency for
hydraulic analysis
Nevertheless, the corresponding design analysis for each design element shall still be
undertaken to determine if the design values exceed the above-stated minimum
requirements. If so, the computed design values shall be adopted.

1111111III111111111111111111111111111
WIN7R01410
~?.l3 pt',;JH
0I~"1 ~u,('7

MANILA
o 8 JUN 2111 j
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECf DPWH Standard Specification on

) Item 1045 - Aluminum Panel
No. 77 _
)
)
Series of 201~.Dlt.(1
standard specification for aluminum panels, the attached DPWH Standard Specification
on Item 1045 - Aluminum Panel is hereby prescribed, for the gUidance and compliance
of all concerned.
Specifications for Public Works Structures - Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structure and Water Supply Systems, Volume III, 1995 Edition.

<...
~~-----
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
"III " I 11111111111111111111111111111

WIN7U01483
14.1.2 FET/RGT
DPWH Standard Specification on
Item 1045 - Aluminum Panel
1045.1 Description
This Item covers the use of aluminum panel as perforated ceiling panel and shall consist of
furnishing and installing materials, tools, labor and equipment necessary for aesthetic
purposes as indicated on the Plans and in accordance with this Specifications.
1045.2.1 Aluminum
The aluminum shall be high strength, heat-treatable alloy which provides good formability and
weldability and good corrosion resistance. It shall be suitable for a wide variety of architectural
applications and of commercial quality unless specified in the Plans. It shall conform to the
applicable requirements of ASTM B 209M, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum
Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1045.2.2 Thickness
Thinner material perforate easier and faster. Table 1045.2.2 shall be used as reference in
determining thickness of panel. It shall have a gauge thickness tolerance of + 0.2 mm.
1045.2.2 Thickness Gauge
Gauge Thickness Gauge Thickness

(mm) (mm)
2 6.544 18 1.024
3 5.827 19 0.912
4 5.189 20 0.812
5 4.621 21 0.723
6 4.115 22 0.644
7 3.665 23 0.573
8 3.264 24 0.511
"'"
nnr ...••...
9 L.::1UO L-:::J 0.455
10 2.588 26 0.405
11 2.305 27 0.361
12 2.053 28 0.321
13 1.828 29 0.286
14 1.628 30 0.255
15 1.450 31 0.227
16 1.291 32 0.202
17 1.150
From B&S Gauge Table
1045.2.3 Panel Shape and Size
Panel shape and sizes shall be as indicated in the Plans or as approved by the Engineer.
Aluminum panels shall be equipped with perimeter welded metal frames, return edges,
Department Order No. 7" Series of 2017
I
DPWH Standard Specification on Item 1045 - Aluminum Panel

Annex Page 2 of 4
bordersr mounting holesr attachment bracketsr and clips. It shall be dimensioned as indicated
on the Plans and as approved by the Engineer with a width and length tolerances of + 2.0
mm and + 4.0 mm respectively.
1045.2.4 Perforations
1045.2.4.1 Shape and Size
The shape of perforations shall be as indicated on the Plans using the following standard
shapes:
1. Round perforations shall be spaced in centers in straight line or in 60 degrees staggered

pattern provided with the percent of open area and hole size as specified on the Plans.
2. Square perforations shall be placed in straight line or in staggered pattern provided with
the percent of open area.
3. Slotted perforations shall have round or square ends in straight liner end staggered or
side staggered pattern with side bar and wide end bar provided with the percent of open
area.
In any cases that a custom shape perforations is needed for functional requirementr spacing
and size of perforation shaH be provided.
The hole diameter should not be less than the thickness of the aluminum panel.
1045.2.4.2 Pattern
Staggered pattern perforations shall have an unfinished end pattern that appears incomplete
at both ends of the sheet.
For staggered perforationsr both Round and Squarer the pattern stagger shall be in the short
dimension of the sheet. Holes in a straight row pattern shall be parallel to long dimension of
sheet.
Slotted Perforation - Slots shall be identified if to be furnished parallel with either the length
or width of the sheet.
1045.2.5 Margin
The "margin" on a perforated sheet or plate refers to the distance from the edge of the sheet
to the first perforation along the same dimension. "No margin" refers to the last row or set of
perforations extending off the sheet or plate.
The long side of a sheet shall be supplied with minimum margins. The short side of a sheet
will have either minimum margins or no margins.
Department Order No. !1!1., Series of 2017
Annex Page 3 of 4
1045.3.1 Installation
Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop

drawings.
1. Before installing a perforated ceiling, the room/site conditions should be assessed.

The area should be weather tight (windows and doors in place) and have a stable,
dry environment. The ceiling panels should only be installed after the wet trades,
such as plaster and screed-work have been completed and the environment is dry
and stable.
2. Check soffit and fix perimeter option at specified height.
3. Select correct top fixings for substrate.
4. Level and fix perimeter trims.
5. Install top fixings for hanger.
6. Ensure U-profiles are installed parallel, level and with the slots aligned. Do not
exceed the recommended installation centres for U-profiles. Joints must be
staggered.
7. Level and fix wall anchors.
8. Install brackets and secondary clip-in profiles to U-profiles
9. Install the ceiling panels.
10. Cut perimeter panels to the required size with electric shears.
11. Install other components in the ceiling plane.
12. Touch up damaged finish with paint supplied by the Manufacturer and matching
original coating
1045.3.2 Finishing
Perforated panels shall be coated with the following:
1. Polyester powder coating

Electrostatically applied colored polyester povlJdercoating heat cured to chemically
bond finish to metal substrate.
2. Polyurethane coating
Thermoset enamel with 1.0 mil dry film thickness.
In addition to polyester powder and thermoset polyurethane color coatings, the anodized and
Mill finishes are applicable to aluminum as approved by the Engineer.
Color shall be as indicated on the Plans or as approved by the Engineer.
1045.3.3 Inspection
When items not meeting specification requirements are discovered, their existence shall be
called to the attention of the manufacturer prior to installation. Possible use of such items may
be adjudicated among the responsible parties involved, based on the nature of the deficiency
and the effect on the performance of the ceiling.
Department Order No.~, Series of 2017
Annex Page 4 of 4
When rejection occurs, the manufacturer shall have the right to examine the rejected material.
After removal of the portion not conforming to the specification, resubmission of the lot shall
be permitted.
The inspection of specific ceiling areas for acceptability shall be made with lighting conditions
corresponding to that of final building occupancy. If temporary lighting must be used, care
shall be taken to position lights such that temporary conditions will approximate the final
lighting condition.
1045.4. Method of Measurement
The area to be paid for shall be the number of square meter of the ceiling to be covered with
aluminum panel, placed and accepted as the completed work, measured from edge to edge.
1045.5. Basis of Payment
The quantity determined in subsection 1045.4 shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price which
price constitute full compensation including labor, materials, tools and equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Payment will be paid under:
Unit of
Pay Item No. Description
Measurement
1045 (1) Perforated Ceiling Panel Square Meter
acg
References:
1. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

2. Ametco Manufacturing Corporation, Perforated Steel, Stainless Steel, Aluminum and Plastic.
3. Designers, Specifiers and Buyers Handbook for Perforated Metals, Industrial Perforators Association
publication.
4. Technical Specification of A!udecor A!uminum Composite Panels
5. Armstrong Metal Ceilings
6. http://www .vivalda.co. uk/products/decorative-cladding/aluminium-composite-panel/
7. http://www.metalsdepot.com/products/alum2.phtml?page=Perforated%20Aluminum%20Sheet
8. https://www.ametco.com/pdfs/400557ametcoperfproducts.pdf
9. http://www.hendrickmfg.com/tech-info
10. https://www.unc.edu/ •••rowlett/units/scales/sheetmetal.html
11. http://www.engineershandbook.com/Tables/gauge2.htm
12. https: / /www.sapagroup.com/en-US/profiles/6061-t6-aluminum-properties/
13. www.esabna.com/us/en/education/blog/understanding-the-aluminum-alloy-designation-system. cfm
~'J./3AMH
~~ "'-~t7
MANILA
08 JUN 20tlj
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification on the

) Use of Forta-Ferro Fibers on Portland
No. 78 _
)
)
Cement Concrete Pavement
Series of 201~ ~.t7
successful research studies, this Department has approved the use of Forta-Ferro Fibers
on Portland Cement Concrete Pavement, subject to the specifications hereto attached.
A Certificate of Conditional Approval has been issued by this Department accrediting the use
of Forta-Ferro in DPWH road projects from April 25, 2017 until April 24, 2022.
~0
MARK A. VILLAR ~
---
Secretary
14.1.2 FET/RGT
"/1/ " I 111111111111111111111/1111111

WIN7U01484
STANDARD SPECIFICATION ON THE USE OF FORTA-FERRO FIBERS ON
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETEPAVEMENT
1. Description
This Specification shall consist of Portland Cement Concrete, with Folta-Ferro Fibers,
constructed on the prepared base in accordance with this Specification and in conformity
with lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-section shown on the Plans.
2.1 Portland Cement
Cement shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.1,

"Portland Cement" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
2.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine Aggregate shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.2,

"Fine Aggregate" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
2.3 Coarse Aggregate
"Coarse Aggregate" shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection

311.2.3, Coarse Aggregate of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and
Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
2.4 Water
Water shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.4, "Water"

of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012
Edition.
2.5 Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.5,

"Reinforcing Steel" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
2.6 Joint Fillers
Joint fillers shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.7, "Joint
Fillers" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II,
2012 Edition.
2.7 Chemical Admixtures
Chemical admixtures, if speCified or permitted, shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M 194, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
Department Order No. '7 g • Series of 2017
Standard Specification on the Use of Forta-Ferro Fibers on Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
Page 2 of 9
Fly Ash, if specified or permitted as a mineral admixture and not exceeding 20%
partial replacement of Portland Cement in concrete mix shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete.
2.8 Forta-Ferro fibers
It shall be added to the concrete mix to produce some desired modifications to the
properties of concrete, but not as partial replacement of cement. It shall be applied in the
dosage rate of 1.0 kg of Forta-Ferro fibers for every one (1) cubic meter of concrete.
2.9 Curing Materials
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.9, "Curing

Materials" of the DPWHStandard Specificationsfor Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
2.10 Calcium Chloride/Calcium Nitrate
It shall conform to AASHTO M 144, Standard Specification for Calcium Chloride if

specified or permitted by the Engineer, as accelerator.
2.11 Storage of Cement and Aggregate
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.11, "Storage of

Cement and Aggregate" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and
2.12 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.2.12,

"Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete" of the DPWHStandard Specifications
for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
To achieve smooth pavements with values for International Roughness Index (IR!)
of not more than 3.0 mjkm, the Contractor shall consider tightening the ranges and
tolerances of mix design components to produce a more consistent mix and include revised
target values in the Contractor's Quality Control Planand Method Statement.
3.1 Quality Control of Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.1, "Quality

Control of Concrete" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and
3.2 Equipment
Department Order No. ']& • Series of 2017
Page 3 of 9
Equipment shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.2,

"Equipment" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
3.3 Preparation of Grade
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.3, "Preparation

of Grade" of the DPWH Standard Specificationsfor Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
To achieve smooth pavements with values for International Roughness Index (IRI)
of not more than 3.0 m/km, the Contractor shall ensure that the subgrade or base is
prepared using equipment with a control system capable of smooth adjustments to
automatically follow the surface shape (elevations and grades) required. The preferred
method is laser control following a surface shape input to the onboard computer.
3.4 Setting Forms
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.4, Setting Forms

Edition.
To ensure compliance to the maximum International RoughnessIndex (IRI), check

using appropriate surveying instruments shall be used at 5.0 m intervals along the top
portion of the forms with a tolerance of +/- 0.001 m.
If any of the form is disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the form shall be
reset and rechecked.
3.5 Conditioningof Subgradeor BaseCourse
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.5., "Conditioning

of Subgrade or Base Course" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges
and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
3.6 Handling, Measuringand BatchingMaterials
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.6, "Handling,

Measuring and Batching Materials" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
3.7 Mixing Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.7, "Mixing

Concrete" of the DPWHStandard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
Department Order No. '7 f . Series of 2017
Page 4 of 9
3.8 Limitation of Mixing
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.8, "Limitation of

Mixing" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
3.9 Placing Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.9, "Placing

Concrete" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
3.10 Test Specimens
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.10, "Test

Specimens" of the DPWH Standard Specification for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume
II, 2012 Edition.
3.11 Strike-off of Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.11, "Strike-off of

Concrete and Placement of Reinforcement" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for
Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
3.12 Joints
Joints shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.12, "Joints"

Edition.
3.13 Final Strike-off (Consolidation and Finishing)
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.13, "Final Strike-

off (Consolidation and Finishing)" of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
3.14 Surface Test
Paved shoulders shall be subjected to surface test using a 3-m straight-edge. All
areas within the carriageway shall be subjected to surface test using an approved profiling
system. The profiling system shall qualify as Class 1 roughness measurement device and
shall conform to the latest version ASTM E 950M, Standard Test Method for Measuring the
longitudinal Profile of Traveled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling
Reference.
The components of the profiling system shall be validated on regular basis per
manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that the system is properly calibrated. Validation
reports shall be generated, for presentation to the Engineer, confirming that the validations
are current and within tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
Department Order No. '7 f . Series of 2017
Page 5 of9
The acceptable International Roughness Index (IRI) for concrete pavements shall be
not more than 3.0 m/km for National Primary Road, measured in 100 meter sections, at the
time of completion.
Prior to any testing, the road surface for test shall be cleaned of loose or deleterious
material by brooming or other approved means. Survey shall only be conducted on dry
pavement surfaces only. Wide-beam lasers are recommended for textured surfaces like
diamond ground, diamond grooved or tyned surfaces where they yield lower IRI values than
single point or spot lasers.
Prior to data collection, a test segment with a length of 500 meters will be selected
at site for repeatability test. The repeatability test shall be witnessed by the authorized
representative of the Contractor and the Engineer. Five profile runs will be made on the test
segment for repeatability test. The profile runs for repeatability are acceptable if the average
IRI of the two wheel paths satisfy the following criteria:
a. The IRI values of each of the five (5) runs are within 1% of the mean IRI of the
selected runs.
b. The standard deviation of IRI of the selected runs are within 2% of the mean IRI.
If the runs do not meet the above criteria, the Profiling Team shall determine if the
variability between runs are due to operator or equipment error, and make additional runs
until five (5) runs free of equipment or operator errors are obtained. Where necessary an
accuracy calibration test shall be conducted in comparison with a Class 1 Profiler (Walking
Profiler, or similar) to resolve said errors.
If the IRI values from the profile runs (for repeatability) meet the above criteria,
three (3) runs per lane per site should be conducted for acceptance measurement. The IRI
value for the lane shall be the average IRI of the two wheel paths for the three (3) runs
combined.
If the IRI value of the whole concrete pavement meets the required value
regardless if there are areas found to have exceeded the required IRI value, no correction
shall be required, provided that the areas with exceedance have an IRI value within the
tolerance limit of 0.5 m/km.
However, if the IRI value of the whole concrete pavement falls beyond the
prescribed IRI of 3.0 m/km for National Primary Roads and exceeds the allowable tolerance,
the Contractor may opt to undertake corrective action, otherwise, pay adjustment shall be
made. The completed concrete pavement shall be accepted on a LOT basis. A LOT shall be
considered as 100 linear meters of a lane of pavement. If the length of the last lot is less
than 100m, it shall be considered as a separate lot. LOT disincentive pay/pay deduction will
be calculated as described in the table below:
Department Order No. '7' • Series of 2017
Page 6 of 9
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (PCCP)

Pay Adjustment Table
IRI Acceptance Tolerance
lOT IRI Value (m/km) lOT Pay Adjustment, % of Item Cost
3.50 and below 100%
3.51 to 4.00 90%
4.01 to 4.50 70%
4.51 to 5.00 55%
5.01 to 5.50 35%
5.51 to 6.00 15%
Above 6.00 0%
If the contractor undertakes corrective action, further IRI Survey will be conducted
to validate if the pavement irregularities had been eliminated. Only one IRI survey will be
done after the corrective action takes place. If the IRI value of the whole concrete
pavement meets the prescribed IRI value of 3.0/km for National Primary Road and any 100
m sections exceeding the prescribed value are within the allowable tolerance after
correction, no reduction in payment will be made; otherwise, pay adjustment shall be made
based on the above Pay Adjustment Table.
3.15 Curing
Curing shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.15, "Curing"

Edition.
3.16 Removal of Forms
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.16, Removal of

Forms of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II,
2012 Edition.
3.17 Sealing Joints
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.17,Sealing Joints

Edition.
Joint sealer equipment/machine capable of efficiently blowing up dust from

transverse contraction/weakened plane and longitudinal joints and pressure filling the same
with an appropriate sealing compound shall be used for this purpose.
3.18 Protection of Pavement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.18, Protection of

Pavement of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports.
Department Order No. 2!., Series of 2017
Page 7of9
3.19 Concrete Pavement - Slip Form Method
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.19, Concrete

Pavement-Slip Form Method of the DPWHStandard Specificationsfor Highways, Bridges and
The preferred method in establishing proper grade profile is by laser control

following a surface shape input to the onboard computer.
Where the alternative of gUide wires are to be used, they should be properly
tensioned, installed parallel to the edges of the construction at both sides of the work area
and maintained at fixed height and tension in order to meet the maximum IRI. For flat
terrain, guide wire shall be supported at 10.0 m intervals. For curves and tie-ins to existing
pavement, guide wire shall be supported at 5.0 m intervals. Appropriate surveying
instruments shall be used to check guide wire elevations at 5.0 m intervals with a tolerance
of +/- 0.001 m.
3.20 Acceptance of Concrete
No acceptance and final payment shall be made for the completed concrete
pavement unless core test for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay
Roads where the Implementing Office is allowed to waive such test, and for National
Primary Roads where the concrete pavement shall also meet the International Roughness
Index (IRI) criteria at the time of completion. The concrete pavement shall only be
considered accepted if it meets the specified IRI value at the time of completion.
The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of
all sets of three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength,
fc' and no individual strength test result is deficient by more than 15% of the specified
strength, fe'. A set shall consist of a minimum of three (3) concrete beam specimens.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected
unless the Contractor can proVide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of
concrete represented by failed test results is acceptable in place. At least three (3)
representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is
considered deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so that
there will be at least impairment of strength of the structure. The obtaining and testing of
drilled cores shall be in accordance with AASHTO T 24, Standard Method of Test for
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beamsof Concrete.
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if the
average strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of, and if no single core is less than
75% of, the speCifiedstrength, fe'.
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this
Subsection, and it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the structure due to
structural considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at an adjusted price due to
strength deficiency of concrete specimensas specified hereunder:
Page 8 of 9
Deficiency in Strength of Percent (%) of Contract

Concrete Specimens, Price Allowed
Percent (%)
less than 5 100

5 to less than 10 80
25 or more 0
3.21 Openingto Traffic
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.21, "Opening to

Traffic" of DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II,
2012 Edition.
3.22 Tolerance in PavementThickness
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 311.3.22, "Tolerance in

Pavement Thickness" of DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
The area to be paid for under this Specificationshall be the number of square meters
(m2) of concrete placed and accepted in the completed pavement with or without rebar
reinforcement. The width for measurements will be the width from outside edge to outside
edge of completed pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise
required by the Engineer in writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the
center line of each roadway or ramp. Any curb and gutter placed shall not be included in the
area of concrete pavement measured.
s. Basisof Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 4, Method of

Measurement, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement with Forta-Ferro fibers which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials, for mixing, placing, finishing all concrete, for furnishing and placing
all joint materials, for sawing weakened plane joints, for fitting the prefabricated center
metal joint, for facilitating and controlling traffic, and for furnishing all labor, equipment,
tools and incidentals necessaryto complete the Specification.
Department Order No. 7L...- Series of 2017
Page 9 of 9
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
Portland Cement Concrete with Square Meter

Forta-Ferro fibers
HIJ./J~l'tJlt
Republic of the Philippines ,<;. "9- ~r7

Manila
8 JUN 20tlJ
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Guidelines for Geotagging

) Infrastructure Projects in Contract
NO. 79 _
)
)
Management Stages
Series of 201~~"7
In order to improve transparency and accountability, Construction personnel shall capture

geotagged photographs of all infrastructure projects for implementation in accordance with
the Guidelines for Geotagging Infrastructure Projects in Contract Management Stage. The use
of geotagging technology will provide a more transparent and accurate reporting of project
accomplishments.
Definition of Terms
Infrastructure Project Include the construction, improvement, rehabilitation, demolition,

Alias Civil Works, Works, repair, restoration or maintenance of roads and bridges, railways,
Capital Outlay Project, airports, seaports, communication facilities, civil works
Capital Project components of information technology projects, irrigation, flood
control 'and drainage, water supply, sanitation, sewerage and
solid waste management systems, shore protection, energyj
power and electrification facilities, national buildings, school
buildings, hospital buildings and other related construction project
of the government. To be classified as a capital outlay project,
the works must extend the life of the asset by more than 1 year.
Civil Works Contract A binding agreement between the Agency and a Contractor or
Alias consultant and the specific plan or design to complete terms
Construction Project identified in the Contract.
Contract Management
For all Civil Works Contracts, staff from the Construction DivisionjSection of the Implementing
Offices must capture geotagged photographs showing the location of the Contract.
There are three (3) specific stages and purposes for capture of these photographs:
'Before' photos shall be captured during the conduct of the joint field
Before as-staked survey to ensure that the contract is in the same location as
the actual ro'ect and to confirm site availabili and condition.
'During' photos shall be captured at least once for the entire duration
During of the project to show physical progress and, potentially, for billing
ur oses
'After' photos shall be captured during final inspection and should be
After uploaded before or on the day of issuance of Certificate of
Com letion to show the com leted infrastructure
The number and type of photographs to be taken shall be as follows:
Type Of
Location Photographs to be taken
Infrastructure
Linear: Roads, Start, Start: take photographs no greater than five (5)
Bridges, Flood Intermediate, and meters away from the start of the contract site,
Control Structures End facing the start of the contract site.
Intermediate: take as many photos as needed,
at an interval of no less than one hundred (100)
meters.
End: take photographs no more than five (5)

meters away from the end of the contract site,
facinq the end of the orooosed site.
Point: Office If flagpole is At least four (4) photographs showing the
buildings, school available, get the contract site.
buildings, day location there. • Front
care centers, Otherwise, get • Right
municipal the location no • Left
buildings and greater than five • Back/Rear
other similar meters from the
infrastructu re door of the For the After Photos, the entire structure should
building (or the be captured in the photograph.
closest area in
front of the
building where
GPS signal is
available)
Photographs shall be taken using the attached Mobile Data Collection System Project
Monitoring Manual. All photographs will be visible through the Project and Contract
Management Application (PCMA). Project Engineers (PEs) shall be responsible for the review
and quality assurance of these photographs. Appropriate training shall be conducted by
personnel from the Bureau of Construction (BOC) with the assistance of the Information
Management Service (IMS).
~~
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
11.1.1 ETC/RBC/NSP
1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7P01548
ANNEX A
Mobile Data Collection System

Project Monitoring
User Manual
Table of Contents
List of Figures ................................................................................................... 3
List of Tables ..................................................................................................... 3
List of Photos .................................................................................................... 3
1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Subject...........................................................................................................1
1.2 Purpose ..........................................................................................................1
1.3 Audience ........................................................................................................1
1.4 Other Documentation ......................................................................................1
2 Definition of Terms ...................................................................................... 1
3 About ODK ................................................................................................... 2
4 ODK Process Flow for DPWH ....................................................................... 3
5 Minimum Requirements for Mobile Device ................................................. 4
6 Mobile Device Initialization......................................................................... 4
7 Mobile App Requirements ........................................................................... 4
8 ODK Collect’s Main Menu ............................................................................ 6
8.1 Get Blank Form ...............................................................................................6
8.2 Edit Saved Form .............................................................................................7
8.3 Delete Saved Form ..........................................................................................8
9 Fill Blank Form (survey proper) .................................................................. 8
9.1 Start of survey ................................................................................................9
9.2 Select Region................................................................................................ 10
9.3 Enter Project Component ID .......................................................................... 10
9.4 Summary of Project Component Details .......................................................... 11
9.5 Confirm Summary of Project Component ........................................................ 11
9.6 Infrastructure Type for Geotagging Purposes .................................................. 12
9.7 Purpose of Geotagging .................................................................................. 12
9.8 Guidelines for Recording Location and Geotagging Photos ............................... 13
9.9 Record Location Coordinates.......................................................................... 14
9.10 Capture Photos ............................................................................................. 14
9.11 Enter Landmark Visible in the Photo ............................................................... 16
9.12 Type of Photo ............................................................................................... 16
9.13 Record End Location (for road, dike, spur dike and revetment projects only) .... 18
9.14 Accomplished by ........................................................................................... 18
9.15 Save Form and Exit ....................................................................................... 18
10 Mobile Data Collection System .................................................................. 20
10.1 Process Flow................................................................................................. 20
10.2 GeoSetter ..................................................................................................... 24
10.3 ODK Briefcase............................................................................................... 27
10.4 Using ODK Briefcase ..................................................................................... 28
11 Post-processing tools ................................................................................ 32
11.1 Export csv file from ODK Aggregate Server ..................................................... 32
11.2 Import csv file to a GIS web app .................................................................... 33
11.3 ArcGIS Tools ................................................................................................. 38
List of Figures
Figure 1: General ODK Process Flow ..........................................................................2
Figure 2: ODK Process Flow for DPWH .......................................................................3
Figure 3: Mobile Data Collection Process .................................................................. 20
List of Tables
Table 2: ODK Process Flow for DPWH ........................................................................3
Table 4: Summary of Mobile Data Collection Process ................................................. 21
Table 5: Folder Structure ......................................................................................... 23
Table 6: Three Folders for Processing ...................................................................... 33
Table 7: Input-Output for P2L .................................................................................. 41
List of Photos
Photo 1: Open Source Mobile Apps ............................................................................5
Photo 2: ODK Collect Main Menu................................................................................6
Photo 3: Offline loading of ODK blank form ................................................................7
Photo 4: Edit Saved Form ..........................................................................................7
Photo 5: Delete Saved Form ......................................................................................8
Photo 6: Fill Blank Form ............................................................................................9
Photo 7: Default Start of Survey ................................................................................9
Photo 8: Select Region ............................................................................................ 10
Photo 9: Project Component ID ............................................................................... 10
Photo 10: Summary of Project Component ............................................................... 11
Photo 11: Confirm Summary of Project Component ................................................... 12
Photo 12: Infrastructure Type for Geotagging Purposes ............................................ 12
Photo 13: Purpose of Geotagging ............................................................................. 12
Photo 14: Affected Station Limits ............................................................................. 13
Photo 15: Record Coordinates.................................................................................. 14
Photo 16: Setting-up the GPS Map Camera App ........................................................ 15
Photo 17: Geotagging Photos .................................................................................. 15
Photo 18: Priority Level of Damages ......................................................................... 16
Photo 19: Type of Photos ........................................................................................ 16
Photo 20: Progress Photos ....................................................................................... 17
Photo 21: Add/Do Not Add More Photos ................................................................... 17
Photo 22: Record End Location ................................................................................ 18
Photo 23: Accomplished By...................................................................................... 18
Photo 24: Save Form and Exit .................................................................................. 19
Photo 25: GeoSetter Main Page ............................................................................... 24
Photo 26: Drag Photos in the File Area ..................................................................... 25
Photo 27: Filter Images with Coordinates ................................................................. 26
Photo 28: Check the Location of the Photos .............................................................. 26
Photo 29: Set-up Storage Folder for ODK Briefcase ................................................... 28
Photo 30: ODK Briefcase Pull Stage .......................................................................... 29
Photo 31: ODK Briefcase Push Stage ........................................................................ 30
Photo 32: Export csv file using ODK Briefcase ........................................................... 31
Photo 33: Sign-in to DPWH-MDCS Server ................................................................. 32
Photo 34: Export csv file from Server ....................................................................... 32
Photo 35: Download csv file from Server .................................................................. 33
Photo 37: Save CSV File to Raw Folder ..................................................................... 34
Photo 38: Post-processing of CSV File: Line Folder .................................................... 35
Photo 39: Post-processing of CSV File: Point Folder................................................... 35
Photo 40: Production Folder .................................................................................... 36
Photo 41: Log-in to ArcGIS On-line .......................................................................... 37
Photo 42: Adding CSV Layer to Web App .................................................................. 37
Photo 44: ArcToolbox .............................................................................................. 38
Photo 45: Add tool in ArcToolbox ............................................................................. 39
Photo 46: Open ArcToolbox ..................................................................................... 39
Photo 47: P2L Window ............................................................................................ 40
Photo 48: Input-Output for P2L ............................................................................... 41
Photo 49: Adding Geotagged Photos ........................................................................ 42
Photo 50: Assigning Output Folder ........................................................................... 43
Photo 51: DateTime as Sorting Field ........................................................................ 44
Photo 52: Assigning Folder for Output Line ............................................................... 44
Photo 53: Run the P2L Tool ..................................................................................... 45
Photo 54: Sample Output by P2L ............................................................................. 45
Photo 55: Attribute Table ........................................................................................ 46
Photo 56: Adding Field ............................................................................................ 46
Photo 57: Adding Field ............................................................................................ 47
Photo 58: Sample Attribute Table............................................................................. 47
Photo 59: Using Field Calculator ............................................................................... 48
Photo 60: Attribute Table with Additional Data.......................................................... 49
Mobile Data Collection System – Project Monitoring
User Manual
Page 1 of 49
1 Introduction
1.1 Subject
This document provides 1) the guidelines for recording location and geotagging photos of
DPWH-implemented projects and 2) step-by-step procedures on using the open source
mobile application for DPWH-implemented projects, which is part of the mobile data
collection system (MDCS) recently set up in the Department.
1.2 Purpose
The geotagging guidelines and procedures discussed on this manual shall be used by
DPWH to enhance its documentation and monitoring system for Before and After stages
of project completion through recording of GPS-based location and capturing geotagged
photos for DPWH-implemented projects.
The mobile application for project monitoring (hereafter, MDCS-PM) shall also aim to
complement the Project and Contract Management Application (PCMA).
1.3 Audience
This document is intended primarily for engineers from Bureau of Construction (BOC),
project engineers and monitoring engineers from District Engineering Offices (DEOs)
and Regional Offices (ROs). Experience in operating Android-powered mobile devices
and basic ArcGIS applications are useful but not necessary.
1.4 Other Documentation

A user manual on how to build XLSForm – file format being used by Open Data Kit
(ODK) tools – using MS Excel is also available for those who are interested on designing
and deploying other ODK-based survey forms.
2 Definition of Terms
Geotagging – the attachment of geographical identification to electronic media such as
photographs, video or any file. One of its simplest forms is the attachment of x and y
coordinates to a photograph, so that the location at which the photograph was taken
can be shown automatically in a map. Any electronic file, including a Word document or
a PDF can be geotagged.
User Manual
Page 2 of 49
Georeferencing – aligning geographic data to a known coordinate system so it can be

viewed, queried, and analyzed with other geographic data. Georeferencing may involve
shifting, rotating, scaling, and skewing (ESRI)
Mobile device – portable computing device such as a smartphone or tablet computer

(Oxford Dictionaries)
Open-source software (OSS) – computer software with its source code made available
with a license in which the copyright holder provides the rights to study, change and
distribute the software to anyone for any purpose (St. Laurent, 2008)
Project Component – distinct task or activity in the life cycle of a project that needs to
be tracked separately for management and monitoring purposes. Examples of Project
Component include Feasibility, Right-of-Way, Civil Works, Supervision and Lump Sum
(MYPS Operations Guide V 1.2)
3 About ODK
The platform used in developing MDCS-PM is based on Open Data Kit (ODK). ODK is an
open-source suite of tools that helps organizations author, field, and manage mobile
data collection solutions. The main goals of ODK are to make open-source and
standards-based tools which are easy to try, easy to use, easy to modify and easy to
scale. There are three general requirements in using ODK: design a form; setup a
server; and connect the device to that server.
Figure 1: General ODK Process Flow

User Manual
Page 3 of 49
Once those three items have been accomplished, the user is ready to conduct data
gathering. The user shall need three tools: Build or XLSForm (to design the survey
form), Collect (that runs on an Android mobile device to download and fill-in the
survey) and Aggregate (for hosting the survey form and gathering the survey results).
4 ODK Process Flow for DPWH

In using the ODK tools, the DPWH shall refer to the process flow illustrated below:
Figure 2: ODK Process Flow for DPWH
Table 1: ODK Process Flow for DPWH

Process Flow No. Description Tools In-charge
1 Design XLSForm using MS Excel. The XLSForm Offline IMS
XLSForm will be converted to XForms, which converter, ODK
will be loaded in the mobile device to gather Validate, ODK
data. Collect
2 Set up a dedicated server using PostgreSQL ODK Aggregate IMS
to aggregate and house the data that will be
collected by the mobile app.
3 Load the XForm into the android mobile ODK Collect BOC
device
4 Collect data in the field using the XForm ODK Collect BOC
loaded in the android mobile device.
5 Upload the collected data from mobile device ODK Aggregate, BOC
to ODK Aggregate (server) using ODK ODK Briefcase
User Manual
Page 4 of 49
Process Flow No. Description Tools In-charge

Briefcase.
6 Download the data in csv format from ODK ODK Aggregate, BOC
Aggregate server to desktop computer using ODK Briefcase
ODK Briefcase
7 Post-process the csv file and import it to a MS Excel, BOC
GIS web app for further visualization and ArcGIS Online
analyses
Process flow numbers 1 and 2 are discussed in a separate manual intended for
programmers, system and network development personnel.
5 Minimum Requirements for Mobile Device

For better results in using ODK-based mobile app such the MDCS-PM, the users should
make sure that they are using a mobile device that has the minimum technical
specifications. The users should use a uniform/standard mobile device for data gathering.
Using a mobile device that does not meet the minimum specifications can result to sub-par
output or data not being collected properly. The users may get in touch with Mr. Fortunato
Bergania, Jr. of User Support Division at local 43567 for details on minimum specifications
and how to procure the required mobile devices.
6 Mobile Device Initialization

It is a good practice for users to always check the GPS capability of their mobile devices.
This will help the users to ensure that the data being collected have coordinates or
geotagged.
Make sure that your device is GPS-capable. To check this, the user shall go to device’s
Settings and turn on Location
Make sure the camera app of your device is also GPS-capable: Open device’s camera
app  go to camera’s Settings  turn on Location or GPS or GPS tag
Once the device has been set-up, the users shall go out in an open area to perform an
actual test of the GPS capability of the device. It is also highly advisable for the user to
perform GPS initialization if the user has spent too much time inside an enclosed area (e.g.
inside a room or vehicle) before resuming data gathering.
7 Mobile App Requirements

The user shall download two (2) mobile apps: ODK Collect and GPS Map Camera. The
user shall download the mobile apps directly from Google Playstore. Copying the mobile
apps through Bluetooth or other file-sharing app is not advisable because it can lead to
problems/issues.
User Manual
Page 5 of 49
ODK Collect is the main app that the users will need in collecting data including location
and geotagged photos.
GPS Map Camera, on the other hand, is a camera app that already embeds the GPS
coordinates on top of the photo and can be used as the default camera app for ODK
Collect. By showing the coordinates before capturing the photo, GPS Map Camera
allows the user to ensure that the photos will be geotagged.
Both mobile apps are available in Google Playstore for free.
Photo 1: Open Source Mobile Apps

User Manual
Page 6 of 49
8 ODK Collect’s Main Menu

From the Home Page of mobile device, select the ODK Collect app icon. By clicking
the ODK Collect app icon, the default Main Menu of ODK Collect will appear.
Photo 2: ODK Collect Main Menu
8.1 Get Blank Form
It is important that users will only use one blank form throughout the course of data
gathering. Using multiple blank forms will result to different databases making data
consolidation extremely difficult.
While the user can directly download the form from the DPWH Server to his/her
mobile device, this is not possible as of the moment since it requires the mobile
device to be connected to the Intranet. Connecting the mobile device to the Intranet
is not allowed as per the Department’s IT Policy. In this case, loading a blank form
to the mobile device will be done manually/offline.
It is highly advisable for BOC distributes the copy of blank form (.xml file) and
corresponding media folder during the training session with Regional Offices (ROs)
and Project Engineers (PEs) to ensure that all users will just use one and the same
blank form.
BOC shall copy the folder containing the files mdcs_pm3.xml and mdcs_pm3-
media sub-folder and paste these files to storage/odk/forms of the user’s mobile
device.
User Manual
Page 7 of 49
Photo 3: Offline loading of ODK blank form
8.2 Edit Saved Form

This allows the user to edit previously saved or finalized form.
From ODK Collect Main Menu, select Edit Saved Form.
Select the form the user wishes to edit.
Photo 4: Edit Saved Form

User Manual
Page 8 of 49
8.3 Delete Saved Form

This allows the user to delete a previously saved or finalized form. This is useful
when the user has to free up space on his/her device to gather more data. Make
sure all SAVED DATA have been backed-up in the PE’s computer before
performing this operation.
From ODK Collect Main Menu, select Delete Saved Form.
Select the form(s) the user wishes to delete.
Click Delete Selected
Photo 5: Delete Saved Form
9 Fill Blank Form (survey proper)

From the ODK Collect Main Menu, select Fill Blank Form
Select Mobile Data Collection System – Project Monitoring 3.

User Manual
Page 9 of 49
Photo 6: Fill Blank Form
9.1 Start of survey
Every time the users will fill up a blank form, this screen will appear showing how they
will go forward/backward with the survey form.
Photo 7: Default Start of Survey

User Manual
Page 10 of 49
9.2 Select Region
The user shall choose the region where s/he belongs. This entry will facilitate post-
processing of data gathered from the field.
Photo 8: Select Region
9.3 Enter Project Component ID
The mobile app has preloaded data on DPWH-implemented projects, which are sourced
from PCMA, which in turn, generated from MYPS.
Photo 9: Project Component ID

User Manual
Page 11 of 49
9.4 Summary of Project Component Details
Upon entering a valid Project Component ID, a summary of details pertaining to that
Project Component will appear to check if the user if surveying the right project
component.
If the user entered a Project Component ID that is not yet in the preloaded dataset, this
portion will appear blank but the user can still proceed to the next steps.
Photo 10: Summary of Project Component
9.5 Confirm Summary of Project Component
The user shall confirm (by a simple Yes or No) if the Summary of Project Component is
correct or not. If user selects No, the user can provide the correction on the next step.
These corrections will be forwarded to the PCMA and MYPS teams for their verification.
Note that the user cannot make changes on preloaded data within the mobile app.
User Manual
Page 12 of 49
Photo 11: Confirm Summary of Project Component
9.6 Infrastructure Type for Geotagging Purposes
The user shall specify the infrastructure type that will be geotagged.
Note that the answer to this portion shall determine the structure of the proceeding
questions.
Photo 12: Infrastructure Type for Geotagging Purposes
9.7 Purpose of Geotagging

The user shall also specify whether the purpose of geotagging is for BEFORE or AFTER
project completion. The option PROGRESS PHOTOS shall be selected for dredging activity
only.
Photo 13: Purpose of Geotagging

User Manual
Page 13 of 49
9.8 Guidelines for Recording Location and Geotagging Photos
The user shall refer to the following guidelines and procedures in geotagging location and
photos for before and after stages of DPWH project component. Note that these images
are also available in the mobile application.
Photo 14: Affected Station Limits

User Manual
Page 14 of 49
9.9 Record Location Coordinates
The user shall record GPS coordinates following the same guidelines in 9.8.
Photo 15: Record Coordinates
9.10 Capture Photos
After recording the location, the user will start capturing geotagged photos for
before/after stages of DPWH project component. The user should note that this is a
repeating process.
The user shall select Add Group to start capturing photos. The user shall also use
the GPS Map Camera app (discussed above) in capturing photos during
the survey.
In the GPS Map Camera, click the Settings (lower right corner) and do the
following:
o For GPS Use, set it to roughly GPS location (if the user thinks that there is a
good signal in the area, s/he can choose good GPS location instead.
o For Prompt Dialog, set it to disable to prevent dialog box to popping up.
Set the information that will appear on top of the picture by clicking the second icon
from the upper-left corner. The user may check all the information. If the mobile
device has Internet connection, the map and address will be available. If the mobile
device has no Internet connection (offline) only the Latitude, Longitude, Date and
Time will appear.
If the coordinates (Lat-Long) are not visible, the user may need to do GPS
initialization of the device and camera app again.
User Manual
Page 15 of 49
Photo 16: Setting-up the GPS Map Camera App
The user should wait for the coordinates to appear on top of the photo before
capturing and saving the photo.
Photo 17: Geotagging Photos

User Manual
Page 16 of 49
9.11 Enter Landmark Visible in the Photo
Once the photo has been taken, the user shall enter the Landmark visible in the photo.
Photo 18: Priority Level of Damages
9.12 Type of Photo
The user shall then classify each photo that s/he will capture. For every infrastructure
type, there is a corresponding list of types of photo. In the case of dredging, an
additional entry Description of Progress Photos will appear.
Photo 19: Type of Photos

User Manual
Page 17 of 49
Photo 20: Progress Photos
After this, the Do Not Add Group – Add Group will appear again. If the user
wishes to get more photos, s/he can select Add Group and follow the previous
steps. Once the user has finished capturing photos, s/he can select Do Not Add and
proceed to the next step.
Photo 21: Add/Do Not Add More Photos

User Manual
Page 18 of 49
9.13 Record End Location (for road, dike, spur dike and revetment
projects only)
The user shall record the end location for line projects including road, dike, spur dike and
revetment.
Photo 22: Record End Location
9.14 Accomplished by
The user shall enter his/her name, position and office following this format: First Name
Last Name, Position, Office.
Photo 23: Accomplished By
9.15 Save Form and Exit
After completing the form, the user can save it and exit to start a new form for another
project component. Note that the form name is automatically formatted to Project
Component ID and Project Description.
User Manual
Page 19 of 49
Photo 24: Save Form and Exit

User Manual
Page 20 of 49
10 Mobile Data Collection System

Given the current structure and limitations of ODK tools, the GIS Consultants formulated
a process flow that will facilitate the submission and backing-up of data from PEs to to
ROs to BOC.
10.1 Process Flow
Figure 3: Mobile Data Collection Process

User Manual
Page 21 of 49
Table 2: Summary of Mobile Dat Collection Process

Process Assigned Details
1. Gather data using the mobile PE/DEO  Refer to the step-by-step
app for project monitoring procedures for using the mobile
(MDCS-PM) app.
2. Once all project components PE/DEO  The designated desktop
under a PE have been surveyed, computer of PE must have at
the odk folder from the mobile least 250 GB of hard drive
device will be copied to the storage (to be expanded as the
designated desktop computer in need arises).
the PE  PE shall create a folder inside
Drive C of its desktop computer
(e.g., pe_mobile_app folder)
 PE must copy the ENTIRE odk
folder from its mobile device to
the desktop computer.
 PE should NEVER delete the
contents of this pe_mobile_app
folder. This serves as the data
back up at PE level.
 PE will open the instances
folder* inside the odk folder
(check below the folder
structures for details on which
folder to open/copy)
 PE shall modify the name of the
folders inside the instances
folder by ADDING _region_pe
(e.g., _ncr_sm for South
Manila) AT THE END of the
default folder name. DO NOT
REMOVE/MODIFY the folder’s
default name.
3. Copy the instances folder (from RO, PE  The RO shall assign a contact
the previous step) to a flash person for all mobile app
drive/ external hard drive (EHD) matters. RO shall provide the
and hand-carry it to the regional name and contact details of this
office. personnel to BOC and IMS.
 The Regional IT Support Officer
(RITSO) shall set up a shared
folder (i.e., region_mobile_app)
inside RO Admin Server
 Inside shared folder, RITSO will
create a folder with a default
name region_mobile_app (e.g.,
ncr_mdcs_fc).
 Inside this folder, a subfolder
instances will be created. Inside
the instances folder, each PE
User Manual
Page 22 of 49
under that RO will have its own

subfolder (i.e., pe_mobile_app)
 The RITSO will then map the
shared folder (i.e.,
region_mobile_app) in a
dedicated computer (with at
least a storage of 250GB, to be
expanded as the need arises) of
designated RO user.
 RO shall notify BOC as soon as
the instances folder is ready for
copying based on agreed
schedule among RO, BOC and
IMS.
4. Set up a shared folder in the BOC, IMS  BOC in close coordination with
DPWH Main Server to IMS shall create a shared folder
consolidate the regional (i.e., boc_mdcs) inside the
submissions DPWH Main Server.
 This shared folder has the
regional_submissions folder,
which will consolidate all the
submissions from the regions.
 This shared folder will also have
the upload folder, which will be
connected to ODK Briefcase
(located inside the BOC desktop
computer). Using ODK
Briefcase, the submissions of all
regions will be uploaded to the
DPWH ODK Aggregate Server
more seamlessly.
5. Auto sync the instances folder of BOC, IMS,  Based on an agreed schedule,
each RO to a shared folder RO (RITSO) the IMS in close coordination
housed in the DPWH server. with BOC and RO-RITSO shall
automatically copy the contents
of instances folder per region
(inside regional_submissions/
mobile_app / region /
instances) on a per batch basis
to control the bandwidth
consumption of the
Department.
 Auto sync shall commence from
the moment BOC notify IMS
that the instances are ready for
copying.
6. Copy the contents of instances BOC  BOC shall (manually)
folder (per region) to the consolidate all the regional
instances folder (inside upload/ submissions by copying these
mobile_app) files into upload/ mobile_ app/
User Manual
Page 23 of 49
instances. At this point, the

instances folder will contain
submissions from different
regions (not sorted by region
anymore).
7. Connect the upload/ mobile_app BOC  Detailed step-by-step
folder to ODK Briefcase. procedures on how to use ODK
Briefcase are provided below.
Table 3: Folder Structure

Main Folder Sub-folder 1 Sub-folder 2/ file Sub-folder 3/file Sub-folder 4/file
odk forms blank form (.xml)
(This is the media
folder that will instances submissions accomplished
be copied by (PE shall copy (PE shall modify forms (.xml)
PE to its this folder to a the name of this photos (.jpeg)
desktop flash drive/ EHD folder by ADDING
computer) to a designated _region_pe AT
desktop THE END of the
computer in the default name
RO)
metadata
boc_apps regional_submis mobile_app (e.g. region instances
(shared folder sions MAFS) (e.g. ncr, region (this folder is
inside the i, car, etc.) auto sync to the
DPWH Server) contents of
instances folder
at the RO level)
upload mobile_app (e.g. instances
(this folder is MAFS) forms
connected to the (BOC and IMS
ODK Briefcase shall provide the
located inside contents of this
the BOC subfolder)
designated
desktop
computer)
User Manual
Page 24 of 49
10.2 GeoSetter
GeoSetter is a free desktop tool, which the PE and RO engineers can use in validating the
coordinates/location for their geotagged photos. This desktop tool shall allow the user to
double check his/her geotagged photos before submitting to BOC.
The user shall ask RITSO to install GeoSetter in his/her desktop computer
Once installed, the user shall click GeoSetter icon
The GeoSetter main page has two main areas: the left side shows the area for
files/photos while the right side shows the map.
Photo 25: GeoSetter Main Page

User Manual
Page 25 of 49
Drag the instance folder (where the photos are located) to the file area (left side) of
GeoSetter.
Photo 26: Drag Photos in the File Area
Filter the images with coordinates. If there are photos that have no coordinates, the
user were not able to capture geotagged photos properly and may have to repeat the
data gathering process.
User Manual
Page 26 of 49
Photo 27: Filter Images with Coordinates
The user can click on the photo (with coordinates) and will see the corresponding
location icon in the map. The user can check if the location icon on the map indicates
the right location for the photos.
Photo 28: Check the Location of the Photos

User Manual
Page 27 of 49
10.3 ODK Briefcase

Note: The next steps are primarily intended for BOC-Project Monitoring Division (PMD),
which will use the ODK Briefcase.
The seventh step in the mobile data collection process discussed in 10.1 mentioned ODK
Briefcase. This ODK tool facilitates consolidation of data gathered by different users and
aggregate those data in a dedicated DPWH server.
ODK Briefcase can do the following:
o Pull blank forms and submissions (finalized forms) from ODK Collect or ODK
Aggregate Server into a local ODK Briefcase Storage location.
o Push blank forms and submissions from ODK Briefcase Storage location to ODK
Aggregate Server.
o Export submissions to a CSV file for processing by other applications.
Download and Install ODK Briefcase to your desktop. BOC shall coordinate with IMS-SAS
for setting up Java and ODK Briefcase on its designated computer.
o Download and install Java 7 or higher to your computer:

https://java.com/en/download/
o Download ODK Briefcase: https://opendatakit.org/downloads/download-info/odk-
briefcase/)
BOC shall create a folder (e.g., drive c/boc_mdcs/mobile_app) in his/her desktop

computer to serves as storage area for all ODK Briefcase-related files.
IMPORTANT REMINDERS on the use of ODK Briefcase:
ODK Briefcase does not discriminate between incomplete and finalized forms on the
device. It will pull ALL data off of the device. This can cause problems during later
pushes, and especially, if you are encrypting your finalized forms. To keep your data set
clean, you must ensure that all forms are complete before being pulled off of
the device.
ODK Briefcase cannot discriminate between duplicates of the same filled-in form. After
you pull the data into ODK Briefcase, it is important that you delete it from
ODK Collect. Otherwise, the next time you follow this process, you will end up with
two copies of the filled-in forms from the first pull.
User Manual
Page 28 of 49
10.4 Using ODK Briefcase

10.4.1 Assigning a folder for ODK Briefcase Storage
Open ODK Briefcase by double-clicking this icon:
On the right corner of ODK Briefcase Main Menu, click Change.

The user should locate the folder previously created in his/her desktop computer to
serves as ODK Briefcase Storage. All files that will be pulled/pushed to/from ODK
Briefcase will be located in this folder.
Once the folder has been selected, the user should press OK.
Photo 29: Set-up Storage Folder for ODK Briefcase

User Manual
Page 29 of 49
10.4.2 Pull Stage
The Pull Stage refers to extracting files from the shared folder (inside the DPWH Main
Server) to a BOC’s designated computer for mobile app data (i.e., drive
c/boC_mdcs/mobile_app).
Open ODK Briefcase.

Select Pull.
Under Pull data from, select Custom Path to ODK Directory.
Under ODK Directory, select this folder boC_mdcs/upload/mdcs_pm3 and click
Choose. The list of forms located on this folder will appear.
Under Forms to Pull, check Mobile Data Collection System – Project Monitoring
3 and press Pull.
The word SUCCESS! will appear once all data have been extracted from the shared
folder to the local computer of BOC.
Photo 30: ODK Briefcase Pull Stage

User Manual
Page 30 of 49
10.4.3 Push Stage
The Push Stage refers to sending the submissions from desktop computer of BOC to
DPWH dedicated server for mobile data: http://dpwh-mdcs/ODKAggregate/
Open ODK Briefcase.

Select Push.
Under Push data to: select Aggregate 1.0
Under URL: enter http://10.0.10.112/ODKAggregate/ and press Connect
BOC shall coordinate with IMS-SAS for the user name and password.
Under Forms to Push, check Mobile Data Collection System – Project
Monitoring 3 and click Push.
The phrase Successful Upload! will appear to indicate successful upload of data to
http://dpwh-mdcs/ODKAggregate/
Photo 31: ODK Briefcase Push Stage
10.4.4 Exporting csv file

Open ODK Briefcase.
Select Export.
Under Form, select Mobile Data Collection System – Project Monitoring
3.
Under Export Type, it should be .csv and media files.
Under Export Directory, user shall enter where the exported files will be
stored.
Select Export (lower right-corner)
User Manual
Page 31 of 49
The word SUCCEEDED! will appear on the lower left-corner to indicate

successful exporting of csv and media files.
Photo 32: Export csv file using ODK Briefcase

User Manual
Page 32 of 49
11 Post-processing tools
Note: The next steps are primarily intended for BOC-PMD, which will use the Post-
Processing Tools for data gathered by the district and regions.
11.1 Export csv file from ODK Aggregate Server
Note: While ODK Briefcase allows user to export csv and media files, a more typical way
of exporting csv file is by logging in the dpwh-mdcs server.
This will only work using DPWH Intranet connection.

Open the web browser and type http://dpwh-mdcs/ODKAggregate/
BOC shall coordinate with IMS-SAS for the user name and password.
Under Form, select Mobile Data Collection System – Project Monitoring 3.
Click Export (upper right-corner)
Photo 33: Sign-in to DPWH-MDCS Server
A dialog box, click Export again.
Photo 34: Export csv file from Server

User Manual
Page 33 of 49
The most recent exported csv file will appear on top of the list of previously exported
files. Click the file under Download File to download the csv file.
Photo 35: Download csv file from Server
11.2 Import csv file to a GIS web app

11.2.1 Create three folders
For a more strategic and organized process in importing a csv file to a GIS web app,
the users shall create first three folders that will have the following description:
Table 4: Three Folders for Processing

Name of folder Description
1. raw contains the raw files directly from the ODK Aggregate Server
(reference: Step 11.1)
2. post_processed contains the files that have been edited/processed
3. publication contains the consolidated and edited file. The filename of csv file
inside this folder should always remain the same
11.2.2 Saving exported csv file
Following the step-by-step procedures in 11.1 above, go to Exported Submissions.

Right click on the top-most link under Download File.
Press Save link as and save it inside raw folder the user previously created.
For the file name, append the date of export using the format:
default_export_name_yyyy_mm_dd_time.
User Manual
Page 34 of 49
Photo 36: Save CSV File to Raw Folder
11.2.3 Post-process/edit raw csv file
BOC shall designate engineers who will post-process the raw data. Post-
processing includes, but not limited to, changing of date format, replacing
underscores with spaces, etc.
To be more efficient and strategic, BOC will assign post-processors for specific
regions. Each post-processor shall ensure the accuracy of data or regions
assigned to him/her. S/he shall not add/delete columns and/or rows to the csv
file.
Under the post_processed folder, there will be sub-folder for each region.
Under each regional folder, there will be two sub-folders: line and point. Line
refers to projects such as road, dike, spur dike and revetment that has start and
end coordinates. Point, on the other hand, refers to projects such as buildings,
gates, channels, dams, bridges and dredging that has only one coordinate. Each
post-processor shall name the csv file the same way the raw csv file was named
appending region name and line or point i.e.
default_export_name_yyyy_mm_dd_time_region_line
User Manual
Page 35 of 49
Photo 37: Post-processing of CSV File: Line Folder
Photo 38: Post-processing of CSV File: Point Folder

User Manual
Page 36 of 49
11.2.4 Consolidate post-processed data for importing to a GIS web app
BOC shall assign a consolidator responsible for consolidating the changes made
by the post-processors.
The consolidate csv file shall be saved inside the production folder using the
name of mobile app as the default name (i.e.,
Project_Monitoring_Mobile_App3_results_2015_05_12_line.csv or
Project_Monitoring_Mobile_App3_results_2015_05_12_point.csv). The name of
the file inside the production folder should always remain the same.
Photo 39: Production Folder

User Manual
Page 37 of 49
11.2.5 Import csv file to GIS web app
Open web browser and copy and paste this link:

http://dpwh.maps.arcgis.com/home/item.html?id=4be2402fe8254a499e0133f
ab2af86c8
BOC shall coordinate with BID-DAS for the username and password of this
web app.
Photo 40: Log-in to ArcGIS On-line
Open Mapviewer
Select Add layer from File
Choose the csv file inside the production folder
Select IMPORT LAYER.
Locate the features using Latitude and Longitude
Select ADD LAYER.
Photo 41: Adding CSV Layer to Web App

User Manual
Page 38 of 49
11.3 ArcGIS Tools

11.3.1 Photos-to-Points-to-Lines (P2L)
Note: ArcMap must be installed in the desktop computer of the users for these tools to
work. BOC shall coordinate with IMS-SAS regarding availability and installation of
ArcMap.
Open ArcMap and then open ArcToolbox by clicking this icon
Upon clicking the ArcToolbox, ArcMap display should appear like below:
Photo 42: ArcToolbox

User Manual
Page 39 of 49
Right-click on the ArcToolbox and then select Add Toolbox.
Photo 43: Add tool in ArcToolbox
The Add Toolbox window will prompt. Open the folder where the P2L toolbox is located.
Select the P2L.tbx and click Open to add the P2L Toolbox to the ArcTool.
Photo 44: Open ArcToolbox

User Manual
Page 40 of 49
Check if the P2L toolbox is added. The ArcToolbox should now have the Tool Box. Click
the icon on the left side of the Tool Box to see if the P2L tool is there.
Double-click the P2L tool to open it. The P2L window would prompt. It
should look like this:
Photo 45: P2L Window

User Manual
Page 41 of 49
The P2L tool has four (4) input requirements that the users need to accomplish before
launching the tool.
Photo 46: Input-Output for P2L
Table 5: Input-Output for P2L

Input Requirement Description
Folder contains the geotagged photos the user wants to process
Output Point users should identify the name and location of the output point
shapefile that will be produced by the Geotagged Photos to point
process
Field Name (optional) field name of point shapefile used to sort the connection of each
feature
Output Line users should identify the name and location of the output line
shapefile that will be produced by the points to line process
Click on the browse icon to locate the folder of the geotagged photos. Select the
folder of geotagged photos and click Add.
User Manual
Page 42 of 49
Photo 47: Adding Geotagged Photos
Click on the browse icon to assign the folder where the output points will be
stored. Assign the name of the output points. Use the project component ID (PCID) of
your geotagged photos. Click Save once users have finished naming their points.
User Manual
Page 43 of 49
Photo 48: Assigning Output Folder
Click the dropdown icon to see the different fields of your points. Select the DateTime
field as your sorting field to properly connect the points.
User Manual
Page 44 of 49
Photo 49: DateTime as Sorting Field
Click on the browse icon to assign the folder where the output Line will be
stored. Assign the name of the output line. Use the FCID of your geotagged photos.
Click Save once users have finished naming their line.
Photo 50: Assigning Folder for Output Line

User Manual
Page 45 of 49
Once all of the input data requirements have been accomplished, users can now click
OK to apply the conversion.
Photo 51: Run the P2L Tool
The image below shows the sample output of the geotagged photos to line process.
Photo 52: Sample Output by P2L

User Manual
Page 46 of 49
To edit the attribute, right-click on the line layer found in the table of contents. Select
Open Attribute Table.
Photo 53: Attribute Table
The attribute table of the line shapefile will prompt. The users should add a new field for
identification. To add a new field, click on the menu icon. Select Add Field.
Photo 54: Adding Field

User Manual
Page 47 of 49
The Add Field window will prompt. Use the following for input requirements and then
click OK to add new field.
Name: PCID
Type: Text
Length: 8
Photo 55: Adding Field
The attribute table should now have a new field in it. Notice that the field do not have
any information yet. The users should populate the field with the proper FCID.
Photo 56: Sample Attribute Table

User Manual
Page 48 of 49
To add the PCID, right-click on the PCID field name. Select the Field Calculator. A
notification will prompt, click Yes to proceed.
Photo 57: Using Field Calculator

User Manual
Page 49 of 49
Type in the text box the FCID of the line (e.g., “F20001LZ”). Do not forget to put text
between “ “. Click OK to add the FCID to the attribute table.
The attribute table should now look like this.
Photo 58: Attribute Table with Additional Data

M OBILE D ATA C OLLECTION S YSTEM – P ROJECT MONITORING
USE R MANUAL
DPWH Mobile Data Collection System

Project Monitoring
User Manual Version 3.0

May 2016
6l-9? r~~~,JII-
~'~-~f/
DEPARTMENTOF PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
Manila
o8 JUN 2017
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Allocation of the Authorized 3.5%
Deductions from Projects Funds for
NO.
80 ~
)
Engineering and Administrative
Overhead (EAO) for FY 2017
Series of 201(zjl>" ..••
.f'l
Consistent with the commitment of the Department to fast track project implementation and the
timely completion of all infrastructure projects, whether foreign-assisted or locally-funded, with
the active participation of the District Engineering Offices in the implementation of
Centrally/UPMO and Regional managed projects, and in accordance with Section 11, Special
Provisions of General Appropriations Act (GAA) FY 2017, the breakdown of allocation of the
authorized Engineering and Administrative Overhead Expenses for Capital Outlay projects is as
follows:
For Foreign-Assisted Projects:
Percenta e of Deductions/Retentions from Pro"ect Fund

District
Regional Office TOTAL
Central Office Equipment Engineering
(RO)
CO /PMO Office DEO
2.25% 0.25% 0.25% 0.75% 3.50%
For Locally-Funded Projects:
Percentage of Deductions/Retentions from Proiect Fund

District
Implementing
Central Office Regional Engineering TOTAL
(CO)
Office Office (RO) Office (DEO)
Central Office / 0.50% 1.00% 3.50%
2.00%
PMO- Implemented
RO -Implemented .50% 2.00% 1.00% 3.50%
DEO- Implemented .50% 0.50% 2.50% 3.50%
For those directly released to the Regional Offices and District Offices, which are authorized to
deduct not more than 2.50% and 2.00% , respectively, of project cost for EAO expenses, the
breakdown of allocation which shall apply to locally-funded projects, shall be as follows:
DO No. to , s. 2017
Allocation of the Authorized 3.5% Deductions from Project Funds
For Engineering and administrative Overhead (EAO) for CY2017
Page 2 of 2
For Directly Released to RO and DEO:
Percentage of Deduction/Retentions from Project

Implementing Fund
TOTAL
Office District Engineering Office
Regional Office (RO)
(DEO)
RO -Implemented 2.00% 0.50% 2.50%
DEO - Implemented 2.00% 2.00%
For Local Infrastructure Program, an EAO of one percent (1%) and for other infrastructure
projects of other departments/agencies being implemented by DPWH, an EAO of one half
percent (.50%) of the project cost per Section 11 of the Special Provisions of the GAA, shall be
imposed and shall be released fully to the Implementing Unit.
It is provided further that the engineering and administrative overhead expenses shall not be
authorized for infrastructure projects costing One Million (P1,OOO,OOO.00)
and below.
This Order supersedes Department Order No. 22 series of 2016, and shall take effect immediately.
~'
MARK A. VILLAR ~---
Secretary Departrrent of Public Works and Highways
11I111111111111111111I111111111111111
8.1 MAP WIN7004128
SJt'J. IJI)~
'9 ~.v, .Ll> /7

MANILA
l 8 JUllOU-1
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification on

) Item 1104 - Auxiliary System
No. 87 _
)
)
Series of 201~ .7· ""·/7
In order to provide specifications for grounding systems which are specified in the
Department Order No. OS, Series of 2017 (Revised Standardized Pay Items of Works for Civil
Works Construction for Infrastructure Projects), and also, in line with the mandate of the
Department in providing effective Standard Specifications in the implementation of various
infrastructure projects, the attached DPWH Standard Specification on Item 1104 -
Auxiliary System is hereby prescribed, for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
~~
. MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
14.1.2 FET/RGT

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7U01493
DPWH Standard Specification of
Item 1104 - AUXILIARY SYSTEM
1104.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of all materials, components, and
equipment to complete the requirements for Auxiliary System in accordance with the Plans
and Specifications.
1104.2 Definition
Backbone. A fadlity (e.g. pathway, cable or conductors) between telecommunications

rooms, or floor distribution terminals, the entrance facilities, and the equipment rooms
within or between buildings.
Bundled Cable. An assembly of two or more cables continuously bound together to form a
single unit.
Cable. An assembly of one or more insulated conductors or optical fibers, within an

enveloping sheath.
Cross-connect. A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their

interconnection or cross-connection.
Coaxial Cable. A telecommunications cable of consisting of round center conductor

surrounded by a dielectric surrounded by a concentric cylindrical conductor (shield) and an
optional insulating sheath.
Connector (Jack). A female telecommunications connector that may be keyed or unkeyed

and may have six or eight connector that may be positions, but not all the positions need to
be equipped with jack contacts. Jacks are typically used to terminate cable at the user end
and are inserted into faceplates to create connection point for the user's equipment cord.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI). Radiated or conducted electromagnetic energy

that has an undesirable effect on electronic equipment or signal transmissions.
Enclosure. The case or housing of apparatus, or the fence or walls surrounding an

installation to prevent personnel from accidentally contacting energized parts or to protect
the equipment from physical damage.
Entrance Facility (telecommunications). An entrance to building for both publiC and

private network service cables (induding wireless) induding the entrance point of the
building and continuing to the entrance room or space.
Equipment Room (ER). An environmentally controlled centralized space for

telecommunications that houses main or intermediate cross-connect. An ER can contain
equipment to support all of the following: entrance protection, cable infrastructure pathway,
data and voice services, PBX, demarcation point, wireless, paging, fire/smoke detection,
security alarm systems, radio, area of rescue assistance equipment, CATV and video
conferencing.
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1104 - Auxiliary System
Annex Page 2 of 19
Firestop. A fire-rated material, device, or assembly of parts installed in a penetration of

firerated barrier.
Firestopping. The process of installing listed, fire-rated materials into penetrations in fire-
rated barriers to reestablish the fire-resistance rating of the barrier.
Horizontal Cabling. 1) The cabling between and including the telecommunications

outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect. 2) The cabling between and including the
building automation system outlet or the first mechanical termination of the horizontal
connection point at the horizontal cross-connect.
Jumper. An assembly of twisted pairs without connectors, used to join telecommunications

Circuits/links at the cross - connect.
Listed. Equipment included in a list published by an organization, acceptable to the

authoriry having jurisdiction that maintains periodic inspection of production of listed
equipment, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets appropriate
standards or has been tested and found satiable for use in a specified manner.
Optical fiber. Any filament made of dielectric materials that guides light.
Optical fiber cable. An assembly consisting of one or more optical fibers.
Outside plant. Telecommunications infrastructure designed for installation exterior to

buildings.
Patch cord. A length of cable with a plug on one or both ends.
Patch panel. A connecting hardware system that facilitates cable termination and cabling
administration using patch cords.
Pathway. A facility for the placement of telecommunications cable.
Permanent Link. A test configuration for a link excluding test cords and patch cords.
Plenum. A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and
that forms part of the air distribution system.
Pull Point. A pull point is a space use to transition between floors for backbone and
horizontal cabling within a building system.
Sleeve. An opening, usually circular, through the wall, ceiling, or floor to allow the passage
of cables.
Telecommunications Room (TR). A TR is a special purpose room designed to a single

floor. In buildings with multiple floors, TR's shall be vertically stacked to form a backbone
pathway. The TR is the point in the voice and data infrastructure that the backbone and
horizontal distribution systems are connected to each other. A TR can contain equipment to
support all of the following: cable infrastructure, data and voice communications, wireless
(satellite), paging, fire/smoke detection, security alarm systems, radio, area of rescue
assistance equipment, CATVand video conferencing.
Annex Page 3 of 19
Standard References Acronyms:
ANSI. American National Standards Institute
EIA. Electronic Industries Alliance
ICEA. Insulated Cable Engineers Association
ITE. Information Technology Equipment
NEC. National Electrical Code
PEC. Philippine Electrical Code
TIA. Telecommunication Industry Association
1104.3 General
The Contractor approved manufacturer and Site Engineer are held responsible to be familiar
l
with the provisions contained herein and is assumed to possess the knowledge manpower l l
and materials applicable to the completion of the installation.
All materials and equipment shall be brand new and shall conform to the Philippine Electrical
Codel Philippine Electronics Codel the National Electrical code and other acceptable
references and shall be approved by the Engineer.
1104.4.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) is the most popular and is generally the best option for
school networks. UTP quality may vary from extremely high-speed cable to telephone-grade
wire. Four (4) pairs of cable wires exist inside the jacket.
1104.4.1.1 Categories of Unshielded Twisted Pair:
1. Category 1: Alarm systems voice only (telephone wire)l characteristics specified up to

l
o (MHz) and other noncritical applications.

2. Category 2: Voicel EIA-2321 data to 4 Mbps (Local Talk)1 characteristics specified up to
o (MHz) and the lower speed data.
3. Category 3: lOBase Ethernetl 4-Mbit/s token ringl 100BaseT41 100VG-AnyLANI basic
rate ISDNI data to 10 Mbps (Ethernet) and characteristics specified up to 16 (MHz).
Generally the minimum standard for new installations.
4. Category 4: 16-Mbit/s token ring. Not widely used data to 20 Mbps (16 Mbps token
l
ring) and characteristics specified up to 20 (MHz).

Department Dreier No. ~ Series of 2017
Annex Page 4 of 19
5. Category 5: TP-PMD, SONet, OC-3 (ATM), lOOBaseTX.The most popular for new data
installations, data to 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet) and characteristics specified up to 100
(MHz).
1104.4.1.2 Unshielded Twisted Pair Connector
An RJ-45 connector is the standard connector for an unshielded twisted pair cabling. This is
a plastic connector that looks like a large telephone-style connector. The placement of a slot
allows the RJ-45 to be inserted only one (1) way.
1104.4.2 Coaxial Cable
Coaxial Cabling has a single copper conductor at its center. A plastic layer prOVides
insulation between the center conductor and a braided metal shield. The metal shield helps
to block any outside interference from f1uorescentslights, motors and other computers.
1104.4.2.1 Two (2) Types of Coaxial Cable
1. Thin Coaxial. Thin coaxial cable is also referred to as thinnet. lObase2 refers to the
specifications for thin coaxial cable carrying Ethernet signals. The two (2) refers to the
approximate maximum segment length being 000 meters. Thin coaxial cable is popular
in school networks, especially linear bus networks.
2. Thick coaxial. Thick coaxial cable is also referred to as thicknet. 10Base5 refers to the
specifications for thick coaxial cable carrying Ethernet signals. The five (5) refers to the
maximum segment length being 500 meters. Thick coaxial cable has an extra protective
plastic cover that helps keep moisture away from the center conductor.
1104.4.3 Optical Fiber Cable
Optical Fiber Cable shall consist of 50{125 mm or 62.5{125 mm multicode optical fibers or
single mode optical fibers, or a combination of these media. Individual fibers and group of
fibers shall be identifiable in accordance with the requirements pf EIAmA. The cable shall
be listed and marked as required under the applicable electrical code and local building code
requirements.
1104.4.3.1 Physical Cable Specification:
1. Inside Plant Cable
The mechanical and environmental specifications for inside plant optical fiber cable shall be
in accordance with AN5I/ICEA 5-83-596, Fiber Optic Premises Distribution cable.
Two (2) and four (4) - fiber cables intended for horizontal or centralized cabling shall
support a bend radius of 25 mm under no-load conditions. 2-and 4-fiber cables intended to
be pulled through horizontal pathways during installation shall support a bend radius of 50
mmm under a pull load of 222 N. All other inside plant cables shall support a bend radius of
ten (10) times the cable outside diameter when not subject to tensile load, and 15 times the
cable outside diameter when subject to tensile loading up to the cable's rated limit.
Annex Page S of 19
2. Outside Plant Cable
The mechanical and environmental specifications for outside plant optical fiber cable shall be
in accordance with AN5I/ICEA 5·87·640, Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communication Cable.
Outside plant optical fiber cables shall be of a water-block construction and meet the
requirements for compound flow and water penetration as established by AN5I/ICEA 5-87-
640, fiber Optic Outside Plant Communication Cable. Outdoor cable shall have a minimum
pull strength of 2670 N. Outside plant cables shall support a bend radius of ten (10)
times the cable outside diameter when not subject to tensile load, and 20 times the cable
outside diameter when subject to tensile loading up to the cable's rated limit.
1104.4.4 Balance Twisted - Pair Cables
1104.4.4.1 Recognized Categories
The recognized categories of twisted·pair cabling are:
1. Cat5e Cable
This designation applies to 100 Q cables whose transmission characteristics are specified up
to 100 MHz.
2. Cat6 Cable
This designation applies to 100 Q cables whose transmission characteristics are specified up
to 16 MHz.
1104.4.4.2 Horizontal Cable
The cable shall consist of 22 AWG to 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid conductors that
are formed into four (4) individually twisted-pairs and enclosed by a thermoplastic jacket.
1104.4.4.2.1 Physical Design of Horizontal Cables:
1. Insulated Conductor
The diameter of the insulated conductor shall be 1.22 mm maximum.
2. Pair Assembly
The cable shall be restricted to four (4) twisted-pair conductors. The pair twist lengths shall
be chosen to ensure compliance with the transmission requirements of this Standard.
Annex Page 6 of 19
3. Color Codes
Color Code for the horizontal shall be as follows:
Table 1 - Color Code for 4- air Horizontal Cable

Conductor Color Code Abbreviation
Identification
Pair 1 White-Blue
Blue
Pair 2 White-Ora
Oran e
Pair 3 White-Green
Green
Pair 4 White-Brown
Brown
The wire insulation is white and a colored marking is added for identification. For cables with
tightly twisted-pairs (all pairs less than 38 mm per twist) the mate conductor may serve as
the marking for the white conductor. A white marking is optional.
4. Cable Diameter
The diameter of the completed cable shalt be less than 6.35 mm.
5. Breaking Strength
The ultimate breaking strength of the cable, measured in accordance with ASTM D 456~
"Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of
Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable, shall be 400 N minimum.
6. Bending Radius
Twisted-pair cables shall withstand a bend radius of 25.4 mm at a temperature of 20°C ± 1

°C, without jacket or insulation cracking, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4565,
''Standard Test Methods for Physical and Environmental Performance Properties of
Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable". For certain applications
(e.g. pre-cabling buildings in cold climate), the use of cables with a lower temperature
bending performance of -30°C ± 1 °C shall be considered.
1104.4.4.2.2 Other Design Requirements of Horizontal Cable:
1. The proximity of horizontal cabling to sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) shall

be taken into account.
2. One transition point (TP) shall be allowed between different forms of the same cable
type (where undercarpet cable connects to round cable).
3. A minimum of two (2) telecommunications outlets shall be required for each individual
work area. The first outlet: 100 ohm UTP; and, the second outlet: 100 ohm UTP, 150
Ohm STP-A or 62.5j1251Jm multimode fiber.
Anne< Page 7 of 19
4. Grounding shall conform to applicable building codes, as well as ANSl/TlA-607,

"Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunication
System~
5. Additional outlets may be provided. These outlets are in addition to and may not replace
the minimum requirements of the standard.
6. Bridged taps and splices shall not be allowed for copper-based horizontal cabling. Splices
shall be allowed for fiber.
7. Multi-unit cable shall be allowed, provided that they meet hybrid crosstalk requirements.
8. The horizontal cabling shall be configured in a star apology; each work outlet is
connected to a horizontal cross-connect (HC) in a telecommunication closet (TC).
9. In addition to the 90 meters of horizontal cable, a total of 10 meters shall be allowed for
work area and telecommunications closet patch and jumper cables. Each work area shall
have a minimum of two (2) information outlet ports, one (1) for voice and one (1) for
data.
1104.4.4.3 Backbone Cable
Multipair backbone cables consist of 22 AWG to 24 AWG thermoplastic insulated solid

conductors that are formed into one or more units of balanced twisted pairs. The units are
assembled into binder groups of 25 pairs or part thereof following the standard industry
color code of ANSljICEA S-80-57(i "Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair
Indoor Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems'~
The groups are identified by distinctly colored binders and assembled to form the core. The
core shall be covered by a protective sheath. The sheath consists of an overall thermoplastic
jacket and may contain an underlying metallic shield and one or more layers of dielectric
material applied over the core.
1104.4.4.3.1 Physical Design of Backbone Cables:
1. Insulated Conductor
The diameter of the insulation conductor shall be 1.22 mm maximum.
2. Pair Assembly
The pair twist lengths shall be specified to ensure compliance with the transmission
requirements of the ElA/TIA-568 B.2, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted - Pair Cabling Components'~
3. Color Code
For backbone cables with more than 25 pairs, the core shall be assembled in units or sub-
units of up to 25 pairs. Each unit or sub-unit shall be identified by a color-code binder. Color
coding shall be in accordance with ANSljICEA 5-80-576, "Category 1 & 2 Individually
Annex Page 8 of 19
Unshielded Twisted Pair lndoor Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems'~ Binder
color-code integrity shall be maintained whenever cables are specified.
4. Core Wrap
The core wrap may be covered with one or more layers of dielectric material of adequate
thickness to ensure compliance with the dielectric strength requirements.
5. Core Shield
When an electrically continuous shield is applied over the core wrap, it shall comply with
requirements of ElA/TlA-568-B.2, "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted - Pair Cabling Components'~
6. Jacket
The core shall be enclosed by a uniform, continuous thermoplastic jacket.
1104.4.4.3.2 Other Design Requirements of Backbone Cables
1. Equipment connections to backbone cabling shall be made with cable lengths of 30 m or

less.
2. The backbone cabling shall be configured on a star topology. Each horizontal cross-
connect is connected directly to a main cross-connect or to an intermediate cross·
connect, then to main cross-connect.
3. The backbone shall be limited to no more than two (2) hierarchical levels of cross-
connects (main and intermediate). No more than one (1) cross-connect may exist
between a main and a horizontal cross-connect and no more than three-cross-connect
may exist between any two (2) horizontal cross-connects.
4. Cross-connects for different cable types shall be located in the same facilities.
5. A total maximum backbone distance of 90 m is specified for certain applications. This

distance is for uninterrupted backbone runs. (No intermediated cross-connect).
6. The proximity of backbone cal»ing to sources of electromagnetic interferences (EMI)

shall be taken into account.
7. The distance between the termination in the entrance facility and the main cross-
connect shall be documented and shall be made available to the service provider.
8. Recognized media may be used individually or in combination, as required by the

installation. Quantity of pairs and fibers needed in individual backbone runs depends on
the area served.
9. Multipair cable shall be allowed, provided that it satisfies the power sum crosstalk
requirements.
10. Bridge taps shall not be allowed.

Annex Page 9 of 19
11. Main and intermediated cross-connect jumper or patch cord lengths shall not exceed 20
m.
12. Avoid installing in areas where sources of high levels of EMI/RFI (Electromagnetic
Interference/Radio Frequency Investigation) may exist.
13. Grounding shall meet the requirements as define din the EIA/TIA 607, "Generic
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises".
1104.4.5 Building Entrance
1104.4.5.1 Service Entrance Pathways
1. A minimum of 101.6 mm conduit or duct made of PVC type B, C or 0, multiple plastic

duct, galvanized steel fiber glass shall be used for underground facilities approved by the
Engineer.
2. Appropriate encasement shall be provided.
3. No more than two (2) 90 degree manufactured bends shall be allowed (10 times the
diameter).
4. Drain slope shall not be less than 304.8 mm per 30.48 m.
5. Recommended conduit fill varies but shall not exceed 40% for more than two (2) cables.
6. Maintenance holes (typically 24 Mpa concrete) shall be equipped with sump, corrosion-
protection pulling iron, cable racks, grounded ladder and only such power and light
conductors as required for telecommunications supports per National Electrical Code
requirements.
1104.4.5.2 Entrance Facilities
1. Entrance facilities shall include the pathways for outside carrier services, interbuilding
backbone alternate entrance and antenna entrance pathways. The entrance facilities
shall consist of a termination field interfacing any outside cabling to the intrabuilding
backbone cabling.
2. The local telephone carrier shall be required to terminate cabling within 15.24 meters of
building penetration and to provide primary voltage protection.
3. In buildings larger than 1,858.06 usable sq. meter, a locked, dedicated, enclosed room is
recommended. Beyond, 6,503.21 sq.m., a locked, dedicated room is required, with a
plywood termination field provided on two (2) walls. In buildings up to 9,290.30 usable
sq. m., a wall-mounted termination field may serve as the entrance facility, using a 3f4
inch plywood, 2.44 m high. Beyond 9,230.30 sq.m, rack-mounted and free-standing
frames may also be required. The follOWing table is a guideline to determine the
minimum space requirement for entrance fadlity:
Annex Page 10 of 19
GrossBuilding
Floor Space Plywood Field Room Dimension Field RoomDimension
464.52 2.44 m hi h x 11.89 m wide

929.03 2.44 m hi h x 11.89 m ( A room recommended
1 858.06 2.44 m hi h x 12.80 m beyond this level)
3 716.12 2.44 m hi h x 20.73 m
4645.15 2.44 m hi h x 27.43 m
5574.18 2.44 m hi h x 29.26 m A dedicated room re uired
7432.24 2.44 m hi h x 36.58 m 3.66 m x 1.92 m
9 290.30 2.44 m hi h x 2 walls 3.66 m x 1.92 m
18 580.61 2.44 m hi h x 2 walls 3.66 m x 2.74 m
37 161.22 2.44 m hi h x 2 walls 3.66 m x 3.96 m
46451.52 2.44 m hi h x 2 walls 3.66 m x 4.75 m
55 741.82 2.44 m hi h x 2 walls 3.66 m x 5.58 m
Rule of 11Iumb: Allow 0.093 sq.m of plywood wall mount for each 18.58 sq.m. area of floor space.
1104.4.6 Equipment Room
An equipment room is essentially a large telecommunications room that may house the main
distribution frame, PBXs, secondary voltage protection, etc. The equipment room is often
appended to the entrance fadlities or a computer room to allow shared air conditioning.
Security, fire control, lighting and limited access.
Number of Equipment RoomFloor

Workstation S
1 -100 13.94
101- 400 37.16
401 - 800 74.32
801 - 1 200 111.48
Rule of Thumb: Provide 0.070sq.m. of equipment room floor space
for every 9.29 sq.m of user workstation area.
1. Location
Typically, rooms shall be located away from sources of electromagnetic interference

(transformers, motors, x-ray, induction heaters, arc welders, radio and radar) unless
interference is less than 3 Vim across the frequency spectrum. Avoid sources of flooding.
2. Perimeters
Typically, no false ceiling. All surfaces shall be treated to reduce dust. Walls and ceiling shall
be painted white or pastel to improve visibility.
3. Door
The door shall be a minimum of 0.9 m wide and 2 m high, with no doorsill, hinged to open
outward (code permitting), slide side-to-side, or be removable. The door shall be fitted with
a lock. If it is anticipated that large equipment will be delivered to the entrance room, a
Annex Page 11 of 19
double door, 1.8 mm wide by 2.3 m high, with no doorsill or center post, is recommended.
If the door must open inwards, the size of the room (floor space) shall be increased
accordingly.
4. Exterior Windows
The telecommunications space shall not have exterior windows, as exterior windows may
increase heat load.
5. Other
Typically, no piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment or power cabUng shall be allowed to

pass through the equipment room. No unrelated storage.
6. Heat, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
HVAC shall be provided on 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, 17.78 °C to 23.89 °C, 30 to
55% humidity, and positive pressure.
7. Lighting
Lighting shall be a minimum of 500 lux in the horizontal plane and 200 lux in the vertical
plane, measured one (1) m above the finished floor in the middle of all aisles between
cabinets and racks.
Lighting fixtures shall not be powered from the same electrical distribution panel.
Dimmer switches shall not be used.
8. Electrical
Typically, a minimum of two (2) dedicated 20/25 A, 220/230 VAC duplex outlets on separate
circuits is required. Convenient duplex outlets shall be placed at 1.83 m intervals around the
perimeter. Emergency power shall be considered and supplied if available.
9. Contaminants
Telecommunications building spaces shall be protected from contaminants and pollutants

that could affect operation and material integrity of the installed equipment. The level of
contaminants can be reduced using barriers, positive room pressure, and absolute filters or
other means.
1104.4.7 Telecommunications Rooms
The telecommunications room on each floor is the junction between backbone and
horizontal pathways. It contains active voice and data telecommunications equipment,
termination fields and cross-connect wiring. More than one (1) telecom room per floor shall
be required if distance to a work area exceeds 91.44 meters, of if floor area served excess
929.03 sq. meter. Recommended room sizing is 3.05 m x 3.35 m for each 929.03 sq. m area
served .
Annex Page 12 of 19
There are a minimum of three (3) 101.6 mm firestopped backboned sleeves in the floor at
the left side if a plywood termination field, which are ideally located near the door. A fire
extinguisher is recommended.
1. Door
The door shall be a minimum of 0.9 m wide and 2 m high, with no doorsill, hinged to open
outward (code permitting), slide side-to-side, or be removable. The door shall be fitted with
a lock. If it is anticipated that large equipment will be delivered to the entrance room, a
double door, 1.8 mm wide by 2.3 m high, with no doorsill or center post, is recommended.
If the door must open inwards, the size of the room (floor space) shall be increased
accordingly.
2. Exterior Windows
The telecommunications space shall not have exterior windows, as exterior windows may
increase heat load.
3. Heat, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
HVAC shall be provided on 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, 17.78 °C to 23.89 °C, 30 to
55% humidity, and positive pressure.
4. Lighting
lighting shall be a minimum of 500 lux in the horizontal plane and 200 lux in the vertical
plane, measured one (1) m above the finished floor in the middle of all aistes between
cabinets and racks.
Lighting fixtures shall not be powered from the same electrical distribution panel.
Dimmer switches shall not be used.
5. Electrical
Typically, a minimum of two (2) dedicated 20/25 A, 220/230 VAC duplex outlets on separate
circuits is required. Convenient duplex outlets shall be placed at 1.83 m intervals around the
perimeter. Emergency power shall be considered and supplied if available.
6. Contaminants
Telecommunications building spaces shall be protected from contaminants and pollutants

that could affect operation and material integrity of the installed equipment. The level of
contaminants can be reduced using barriers, positive room pressure, and absolute filters or
other means.
1104.4.8 Telecommunication Closet
A telecommunication closet is the area within a building that houses the telecommunications
cabling system equipment. This includes the mechanical terminations and/or cross-connect
for the horizontal and backbone cabling system.
Annex Page 13 of 19
1104.4.8.1 Telecommunication Closet Design Requirements
1. Closets shall be designed and equipped in accordance with ANSI/ElA/TIA 569-A,.

"Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces/~
2. Cable stress from tight bends, cable ties, and tension shall be avoided by well-designed
cable management.
3. Cables and cords used for active equipment connections are outside the scope of the
standard (10 m total allowed for patch cords and equipment cables on both ends of each
link).
4. Only standards-compliant connecting hardware shall be used.
5. Equipment connections at a cross-connect may be made by way of interconnections or

cross-connections between cabling subsystems and for connections to equipment with
multiport connectors. Interconnections are used for connections to equipment with
single-port connectors.
1104.4.9 Pathways
1104.4.9.1 Intra-building Backbone Pathways
1. Within a building, the intra-building backbone pathways extend between the entrance
facilities, equipment room and telecommunication rooms.
2. Telecom rooms shall be stacked vertically above each other on each floor, and provided
with a minimum of three (3) 4-inch sleeves (a stub of conduit through the floor) for less
than 4,645.15 sq. m served.
3. An equivalent 101.6 m x 304.8 m slot may be used in lieu of three (3) sleeves.
Firestopping is required.
4. If rooms are not vertically aligned, then 101.6 m horizontal conduit shall be reqUired.
5. Include no more than two (2) 90 degree bends between pull points. Pulling iron or eyes
embedded in the concrete for cable pulling is recommended. Fill shall not exceed 40%
for any run greater than two (2) cables.
1104.4.9.2 Horizontal Pathways
Horizontal pathways extend between the telecommunications room and the work area.
Horizontal pathways should be earthed in accordance with local electrical codes and in
accordance with AS/CIF 5009. A variety of generic pathway options are described. Choice of
pathway(s) is left to the discretion of the Professional Electronics Engineers. The most
commonly employed pathway consists of cable bundles from the telecom room along the ]-
hooks suspended above a plenum ceiling, which fan out once a work zone is reached. They
then dropped through interior walls or support columns or raceways, and terminate at an
information outlet (I/O). Other options include the following:
Department Order No. .JL Series of 2017
Annex Page 14 of 19
1. Underfloor Duct
Single or dual-level rectangular ducts embedded in greater than 63.5 mm concrete flooring.
2. Flushduct
Single-level rectangular duct embedded flush in greater than 25.4 mm concrete flooring.
3. Multi-channel Raceway
Cellular raceway ducts capable of routing telecom and power cabling separately in greater
than 76.2 m reinforced concrete.
4. Cellular floor
Pre-formed hollow or steel-lined cells are provided in concrete with header cuts from the
telecom room arrange at right angles to the cells.
5. Trenchduct
A wide, solid tray, sometimes containing compartments, and fitted with as flat top (with
gaskets) along its entire length, It is embedded flush with the concrete finish.
6. AccessFloor
Modular floor panels supported by pedestals, used in computer rooms and equipment
rooms.
7. Plenum/Ceiting
Bundled cables, suspended above a false ceiling, fan out to drop through walls, power poles
or along support columns to baseboard level.
8. Conduit
To be considered only when outlet locations are permanent, device density low and
flexibility (future changes) are not required.
9. Cable Trays
Options include channel tray, ladder tray, solid bottom, ventilated and wireway.
10. Perimeter Pathways
Options include surface raceway, recessed, molding and multichannel (to carry separate
power and lighting circuits).
Rule of Thumb: Typically, size of horizontal pathways by providing 645.16 mm of cross-

section area for every 9.29 sq.m of workspace area of being served.
Annex Page 15 of 19
1104.4.10 Modular Connectors (Jacks/OUtlets)
1. Furnish and install modular connectors consisting of RJ45 8-position modular jacks,
meeting or exceeding transmission performance of Category 6a.
2. Modular connectors shall be mounted in modular cover plates.
3. Modular connectors shall be UL Usted and comply with EIA/TIA.
4. All modular jacks shall be blue in color when utilized for "data" and red in crnor when
utilized for ''voice'', unless otherwise directed by the Contractor. Confirm all colors with
Networking and Telecommunications prior to ordering materials.
5. Furnish and instalf keystone style jacks as may be required to be compatible with special
assemblies such as poke-thru assemblies.
6. Apply blank inserts to all unused openings. Blank inserts shall be International White in
color.
1104.4.11 Cable Management and Ladder Rack
1. All materials and equipment to be furnished shall be brand new and standard products
of a single manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such equipment.
2. Ladder rack shall be constructed of rectangular steel tubing.
3. Junction for ladder rack shall be constructed of solid tubular steel.
4. Cable straps shall be manufactured for the specific use of bundling cable.
1104.4.12 Cabinets, Racks and Enclosures
1104.4.12.1 Equipment Rack
1. Equipment rack shall be either freestanding or wall mounting equipment

cabinet/enclosures and sized as required in the drawings.
2. Minimum rack width shall be 480 mm.
3. Can accommodate a load of 90.72 kgs per shelving provision and support a total load of
at least 544.31 kgs.
4. Equipment rack shall be equipped with the following:
4.1 Hinged doors with reversible swing and lock for protection.
4.2 Grounding busbar kit inside equipment rack.
4.3 Power strip with surge protection and have a minimum of 6-receptacle outlets on
the power strip (if any).
Department Order No. .1L Series of 2017
Annex Page 16 of 19
4.4 Vertical wire management extending the full height of the rack inducting both
sides: front and back.
4.5 Contain knockouts for cable accessed along the top, bottom, or rear panels.
4.6 Freestanding cabinets shall be accessible from both front and back.
4.7 Provision for additional rack mounted fans and exhaust vents or if possible air
ducts.
1104.4.12.2 Enclosure! Cabinet
1. Equipment cabinet shall be either freestanding or wall mounting equipment/enclosures

and sized as required in the drawings.
2. Equipment cabinet shall be modular steel unit and with Gauge#16 or better, grade steel.
3. Each cabinet shall have a backboard for device mounting. Backboard shall be fire
retardant treated plywood and 20 mm thick.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, cabinet shall have a hinged cover with locking device.
1104.4.13 Patch Panel
The patch panel shall include the following features:
1. Category 6 Patch panel shall be lU high and support 24 modular jack ports or 2U high
and support 48 modular jack ports and shall accept RJ-45, 8-Position modular plugs.
2. Patch Panels shall terminate the building cabling on an IDC (Insulation Displacement
Connector) type connector or module.
3. Category 6 UTP modular jack insulation displacement contacts shall be capable of

terminating solid conductors from diameter 0.05 mm to 0.065 mm (24 to 22 AWG).
4. The installed system shall comply with the Category 6 performance characteristics as
required by TIA and ISO Standards.
1104.4.14 Patch Chords
Patch cords shall be provided when patching of voice and/or data circuits is required at the
cross-connections. The patch cords supplied shall able to support the designed
specifications.
The patch cord shall include the following features:
1. RJ 45 Cat 6 patch cords shall be installed for the user work area.
2. Patch cords shall be factory terminated with 4-pair UTP stranded cable.
Annex Page 17 of 19
1104.4.15 Faceplate
1. Furnish and install a single gang modular cover plate with one (1), two (2), three (3),
and four (4) modular outlet openings for "Voice"and "Data" as indicated on the Plans.
2. Modular cover plates shall be plastic or stainless steel as required to match electrical
plates unless otherwise speCified by the Contractor. Plastic modular furniture cover
plates shall match the furniture's kick plate color when possible.
3. Furnish and install 106-style modular mounting frames where required to adapt to
surface raceway as may be provided by this Spedfication.
4. A clear label shall be provided for application
1104.5.1 General
Installation of Auxiliary System shall be in accordance with the governing laws and approved
codes and standards.
1104.5.2 Submittals
The following shall be submitted by the Contractor:
1. Product Submittal. Submit physical sample, manufacturer's data sheets, listings,

certificates and approvals for all proposed equipment and materials. Where a page
shows more than one (1) type of product, identify the intended item to be used for the
project.
2. Shop Drawings
2.1 Submit fabrication and installation details of components.

2.2 Drawings on plan layout showing principal routings.
2.3 Methodology of support hanger installation.
3. Test Reports. Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. Test
reports shall be provided prior to the acceptance of the project. Summary of test reports
and individual test results shall be part of the close-out submittals and as-built plans.
4. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. Indicate application conditions and

limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage,
handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of the products.
5. Product Record Documents. Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling

appliances, and end-of-line devices.
6. Operation and Maintenance Data
6.1 Operation Data. Operating instructions.

6.2 Maintenance Data. Maintenance and repair procedures.
1104.5.3 Labeling
Department Order No. .-!L, Series of 2017
Annex Page 18 of 19
Each piece patch panel and outgoing cable from the patch panels shall be labeled.
Corresponding labeling and numbering shall also be provided on the telecom outlets.
1. Cables. Horizontal and backbone cables shall be labeled at each end.
2. Faceplates. A unique identifier shall be marked on each faceplate.
3. Rack, Panels and Wiring Modules. A unique identifier shall be marked on the connecting
hardware.
1104.5.4 Firestopping
All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local
inspection authorities prior to cabling system acceptance.
1. Apply fire-rated materials into penetrations in fire rated barriers such as penetrations to
floor slabs in the telecommunication riser/chase to establish the fire-resistance rating
and also to avoid fumes or gases from escaping or penetrating thru the barrier.
2. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed
with an appropriate firestop system.
1104.5.5 Quality Control
1. The Contractor shall require a duly Professional Electronics Engineer to be present at site
to supervise and inspect the progress of work. The PECEshall also be the one who will
certify the work at the completion of the project.
2. All equipment shall be brand new of a single manufacturer and conforming to the
recognized internationally accepted materials.
3. Installation of the system shall be governed by the provision of the latest edition of the
Philippine Electrical Code (PEC), Philippine Electronics Code and other existing rules and
regulations of the locaUtyand governing agendes.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for all supervision commissioning, tests and
l
adjustment for the system. Such work shall be performed by or under direct supervision
of a duly Professional Electronics Engineer.
5. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall present documentation to the Owner
before commissioning of the system.
1104.5.6 Commissioning and Testing
All cables and hardware shall be 100% tested for defects prior to installation and to verify
cable performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installation cable shall
be verified as useabte by the Contractor prior to system acceptance.
OPWH Standard Specification for Item 1104 - Auxiliary System
Annex Page 19 of 19
All UTP and fiber optic cable field testing shall be performed with an approved test device,
100% of cables installed shall be tested and all shall result to PASSremarks channel or
permanent link.
All field testers shall be factory calibrated every calendar year by the field test equipment
manufacturer.
1104.5.7 Warranty
The Contractor shall provide a system warranty covering the installed materials against
defects in workmanship, components, and performance and follow-on support after project
completion.
The quantity to be paid for payment shall constitutes all the completed and accepted work
in a manner prescribed in the several items involved.
The quantities measured as prescribed on Section 1104.5, Method of Measurement, shall be

paid for at the contract lump sum price for the Auxiliary System which price and payments
shall be full compensation for furnishing labor, equipment, supplies, materials, testing and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Unit of Measurement
Lum Sum
References:
1. The Cabling Handbook
2. Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 - Public Buildings and Other Related Structures
3. ANSl/ElA/TIA 569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces.
4. EIA/T/A 607, Generic Telecommunicaffons Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) for Customer Premises
S. EIA/TlA-568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted - Pair
Cabling Components
6. Internet: https:/ /www.csd.uoc.gr-hy435/material/TIA-EIAA-568-B.2.pdf
7. Internet:
https:/ /www.anixter.com/content/dam/ Anixter/Guide/7HOOllXO_ W&C_ Tech_Handbook
_Sec_06.pdf
8. Internet: http://www.csd.uoc.gr/-hy435/material/TIA-EIA-568-B.3.pdf
MANILA
. 1 B JUL 201]
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification on

) Item 1109 - Grounding Systems
No._8_8__ )
}
Series of 201~"7' ')11.'7
In order to provide specifications for grounding systems which are specified in Department
Order No. OS, Series of 2017 [Revised Standardized Pay Items of Works for Civil Works
Construction for Infrastructure Projects], and also, in line with the mandate of the
Department in providing effective Standard Specifications in the implementation of various
infrastructure projects, the attached DPWH Standard Specification on Item 1109 -
Grounding Systems is hereby prescribed, for the gUidance and compliance of all
concerned.
~v:::----
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
14.1.2 FETjRGT
Departrmnt of Public Works and Highways

1111111111111111I11111111111111111111
WIN7U01494
D.O. No. «- Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1109 - GROUNDING SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 8
DPWH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ITEM 1109 - GROUNDING SYSTEMS
1109.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all grounding system materials, labor, tools, equipment
and others in undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the Plans and
in accordance with this Specification.
1109.2 Materials Requirements
1109.2.1 Grounding System
Grounding system shall conform to the applicable material requirements of

NEC 250 - Grounding and Bonding and Philippine Electrical Code (PEe) Part I,
Article 2.50 - Grounding and Bonding.
1109.2.2 Exothermic Weld Connector
1109.2.2.1 General Material Requirements for Exothermic Weld Connector
Weld metals shall be manufactured with copper, copper oxides, aluminum, and minor
constituents for rate control, wetting and deoxidizing molten metals formed during reaction.
Formulations shall not contain caustic, toxic, or explosive substances including but not
limited to magnesium, and phosphorus. Weld metals shall easily be cleaned out of the
crucible after each shot. Cathodic protection and Rail formulations shall be free of tin.
Starting powder shall contain aluminum, copper oxide, and iron oxide. No phosphorus,
magnesium, caustic, toxic or explosive substances shall be present in formulation.
Molds for multiple uses shall be manufactured from graphite formulated for high
temperature applications and designed to provide an average of 50 connections
satisfactorily.
Remote ignition system products shall be manufactured for use with tubes of weld metal.
System shall be designed to allow initiation with battery pack or a flint ignitor without loss of
product to change initiation method.
Handle clamps shall be offset design to reduce excavation requirements of installer and to
achieve quick application of x-type grid connections.
1109.2.2.2 Quality Control
Products shall have a lot number and/or dated recorded on the product during manufacture
to provide traceability for quality assurance purposes.
1109.2.2.3 Marking
Weld metal shall be packaged indicating the date of manufacture or lot number on each box
label to assure that the received product are manufactured in accordance with current
specifications and toprovide maximum shelf life by allowing First In - First Out stock
rotation.
D.O. No. jt Series of 2017
Page 2 of 8
a. Weld metal shall have cartridge size, formula, and lot number clearly visible on the
container to aid in identifying intended use. UL marking shall be displayed in accordance
with the requirements for listed products. General safety instructions shall be provided in
each package of weld metal.
b. Molds made with graphite shall have permanent tag attached that clearly identifies mold
number, connection type, conductors, weld metal cartridge, and formula of weld metal.
One time use ceramic molds shall have mold number, connection type, and conductors
clearly marked on the package. UL marking shall be displayed in accordance with the
requirements for the listed products. Application instructions shall be provided with each
mold detailing the general safety procedures, general preparation and welding practice,
and information specific to each weld type to assure a quality connection each time.
1109.2.2.4 Packaging and Shipping
Weld metal shall be packaged in containers designed to maximize shelf life of the product
and prevent damage from atmospheric moisture normally encountered during use.
The product's package shall be designed to prevent damage or spilling during conditions
normally encountered during shipping from factory to customer point of use.
Product shall be packaged in a manner to prevent mixing of starting powders with weld
metal during transportation to assure customer is able to initiate reaction with flint ignitor.
1109.2.3 Air Terminal
Any aluminum alloy or solid copper product shall not come into direct contact with earth and
any bimetallic fitting and shall not be installed within 45.7 mm above earth level. Aluminum
products shall not be embedded in concrete or masonry, in direct contact with a surface
coated with alkaline paint, nor shall be installed in wet locations such as inside of
downspouts.
The two (2) classes of air terminals and its material requirements are the following:
Class I Material Requirements
Type of Conductor Copper Aluminum
Air Terminal, Solid Min. Diameter 9.5 mm 12.7 mm

Min. Diameter 15.9 mm 15.9 mm
Air Terminal, Tubular
Min. Wall Thickness 0.8mm 1.6 mm
Min. Size ea. Strand 1.1 mm dia. 1.6 mm dia.
Main Conductor, Cable Wt. per Length 278 g/m 141 g/m
Cross Sectional Area 29 m m2 50 mm2
Thickness 1.2 mm dia. 1.6 mm dia.
Main Conductor, Solid Strip
Width 25.4 mm 25.4 mm
Wire Size 0.9 mm2 2.0 mm2
Secondary Conductor, Cable
Number of Wires 14 10
Secondary Conductor, Solid Thickness 1.2 mm dia. 1.6 mm dia.
Strip Width 12.7 mm 12.7 mm
Class I shall be used on structures up to 23 m tall.

D.O. No. ~ Series of 2017
Page 3 of 8
Class II Material Requirements
Type of Conductor Copper Aluminum
Air Terminal, Solid Min. Diameter 12.7 mm 15.9 mm

Min. Size ea. Strand 1.2 mm dia. 1.8 mm dia.
Main Conductor, Cable Wt. per Lenqth 558 q/m 283 q/m
Cross Section Area 58 mm2 97 mm2
Wire Size 0.9 mm2 2.0 mm2
Secondary Conductor, Cable
Number of Wires 14 10
Secondary Conductor, Solid Thickness 1.2 mm dia. 1.6 mm dia.
Strip Width 12.7 mm 12.7 mm
Class II shall be used on structures greater than 23 m tall.
Other Specifications related to air terminal shall conform to the applicable requirements of
PEC Part 1.
1109.2.3.1 Base Supports
The air terminal bases are permitted to be stamped or cast construction. If stamped, the
thickness shall be 2.5 mm for aluminum and 1.5 mm for copper material. If casted, either
copper or aluminum shall be at least 2.3 mm thick. A base support must incorporate a
connector fitting for connection of the lightning conductor. The conductor contact area must
be at least 38 mm on all sides of the cable, and at least two mounting holes that will accept
a No. 10-24 or larger bolt or screw shall be provided in the support so that it can be
permanently and rigidly fastened. Bases shall not be limited to horizontal or vertical bases
since there are variety of air terminal bases types such as Universal Bases, Parapet Bases,
Saddle Bases, and others, whichever is best applicable as long as technical notes are
properly followed.
1109.2.3.2 Air Terminal Braces
Air terminals exceeding 600 mm in height shall be braced or supported at least one-half of
the terminal height. The brace shall be at least 6.35 mm rod, constructed from aluminum,
copper/copper alloy, stainless steel, or hot dipped galvanized if made of steel and shall be
flattened on the end for attachment to the structure with at least a 10-24 bolt or screw.
1109.2.3.3 Conductors
Specifications related to grounding conductors shall conform to the applicable requirements

of PEC Part 1.
1109.2.3.4 Grounding Electrodes
Air Terminals, main and secondary conductors plus all other ancillary parts are for the sole
purpose of conducting a lightning stroke to earth and dissipating it through the use of
various grounding electrode methods.
D.O. No . .it, Series of 2017
Page4of8
The grounding electrode shall be made of a rod of not less than 12.5 mm in diameter, and
203 mm in length and be of copper-clad steel, solid copper, or stainless steel. It shall not be
resistant to any corrosive condition existing at the installation or be suitably protected
against corrosion. The rod shall extend vertically not less than 254 mm into the earth and
below the frost line where possible.
Concrete encased shall only be used in new construction. It shall be of the same diameter
as with the main-size conductor. It shall be 6.1 m in length and be encased in at least
50 mm of concrete. Steel rebar shall also be permitted as a grounding electrode. At least
6.1 m of (#4 or 12.7 mm dia.) steel reinforcing bar shall be used for main-size conductor.
Overlapping at least 20-rod diameters shall be maintained if more than one piece is spliced
in the footing, using tie wire or welding.
A main-sized conductor can also be buried from each down conductor in the form of a
radial. A radial conductor must be at least 3.6 m in length and buried at least 750 mm
depth.
A ground ring shall be permitted if at least 450 mm under the earth and equal in size to the
main-size conductor.
Ground plate(s) shall be permitted if 0.186 sq. m or more in size and 0.81 mm thick or more
and buried not less than 450 mm under the soil.
Where there is shallow topsoil, a combination of the methods above shall be permitted to
provide an effective means for dissipating a lightning stroke.
1109.3 ConstructionRequirements
1109.3.1 GroundingSystem
1109.3.1.1 Earthor GroundElectrode
Earth electrode shall consist of one or more earth rods (also earth plate or earth matt),
interconnected by buried earthing tape or cable, which is to have a total combined
resistance value, during any season of the year and before interconnection to other earthed
systems or earthing means, not exceeding one (1) ohm. Distance between 2 rods shall not
be less than twice the length of one rod driven depth, or less than 1.83 m.
Main ring earthing resistance shall not exceed one (1) ohm or otherwise, it shall be indicated
on the Plans with the approval of the Engineer.
Ring type earth electrode shall consist of earthing conductors, in a closed loop, buried in
exterior wall foundations underneath the water-proofing, or alternatively at 0.6 m around
the perimeter of the building foundations, as shown on the Plans. It can also be buried
outside the structure at a depth of at least 0.7 m and at a distance of 1 m around the
external wall, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Connect all earthing conductors to
this ring. Insulated connection flags into the building, of same material as earthing
conductors, shall be located at positions of service entrance and main switchboard rooms,
terminating in bolt-type earth points (studs) or test links for connection of main earth bares).
Additional earth rods connecting with the earth ring shall be provided, as necessary, to bring
down the earth elec;:trode resistance to an acceptable value.
D.O. No. gt Series of 2017
Page 5 of 8
Functional earth electrode shall be provided separately from, but interconnected to the other
earth electrode(s) through suitably rated (470 V) spark gap. Functional earth electrodes
shall be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital
processors, computers etc.) as requiredj recommended by the Manufacturer.
Alternative Earth Electrode: Other types of earth electrode may be used, after approval of
the Engineer or as indicated in the Plans, including:
a) Copper plate(s)
b) Tape mats (strips)
1109.3.1.2 Main Earthing Terminal or Bar
Main earthing bar shall be provided at the point of service entrance or main distribution
room, and as directed by the Engineer or as shown on the Plans. Connect all earthing
conductors, protective conductors and bonding conductors to the main earthing bar. Two
(2) insulated main earthing conductors shall be provided, one (1) at each end of the bar,
connected via testing joints to the earth electrode at two (2) separate earth pits. Conductor
shall be sized to carry maximum earth fault current of system at point of application with
0
final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 C for at least five (5) seconds. Main
earthing conductors shall be at minimum of 120 mm2 or as otherwise required by the
Engineer or specified in the Plans. Main earthing bar shall be positioned at an accessible
location within the electrical room and clearly labeled.
The main earth bar shall be in the form of a ring or rings of bare conductors surrounding or
within an area in which items to be earthed are located. Where 2 or more rings are installed,
they shall be interconnected by at least two conductors, which shall be widely separated.
Testing joints (test links) shall be provided, in an accessible position, on each main earthing
conductor, between earthing terminal or bar and earth electrode.
1109.3.1.3 Earthing or Grounding Conductors
Protective conductors shall be separate for each circuit. Selection of sizes shall be indicated
in the Plans with the approval of the Engineer or in accordance with the Philippine Electrical
Code (PEe) requirements.
Protective conductors shall not be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like.
Continuity of Protective Conductors: Series connection of protective conductor from one

piece of equipment to another shall not be permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive
parts of the equipment shall not be used as protective conductors, but shall be connected by
bolted clamp type connectors andjor brazing to continuous protective conductors which shall
be insulated by molded materials. Conductor sheaths shall be of yellow-green colored PVC
with a minimum thickness of 1.5 mm.
Bare strip conductors only shall be used for earth electrodes or voltage control meshes.
Conductors buried in the ground shall normally be laid at a depth of 1000 mm below the
underground power cables in an excavated trench. The backfill in the vicinity of the
conductor shall be free of stones and the whole backfill shall be well consolidated. All
conductors not bur,ied in the ground shall be straightened immediately prior to installation
and supported clear of the adjacent surface.
Page 6 of 8
Earth Fault Loop Impedance: For final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet shall be such that disconnection of protective device on
over-current occurs within 0.4 seconds. For final circuits supplying only fixed equipment,
earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization shall be such that disconnection
occurs within five (5) seconds.
1109.3.1.4 Equipotential Bonding
Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: Connect all extraneous conductive parts of the

building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and dueling, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armor to nearest earthing terminals by
equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor shall not be
less than 1/2 of the protective conductor connected to respective earthing terminal with a
minimum of four (4) mm2•
a) Individual components of metallic structures of plant shall be bonded to adjacent

components to form an electrically continuous metallic path to the bonding conductor.
b) Small electrically isolated metallic components mounted on non-conducting building

fabric need not be bonded to the main earth bar.
c) Bolted joints in metallic structures including pipework, which do not provide direct
metallic contact shall be bridged by a bonding conductor or both sides of the joint shall
be separately bonded to earth unless the joint is intended to be an insulated joint for
cathodic protection or other purposes.
Main Equipotential Bonding: Main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other metallic
service pipes shall be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main earth
terminal or bar. Bonding connections shall be as short as practicable between point of
entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding shall be
made on the premise side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors shall not be less than
1/2 that of the earthing conductor connected thereto, and minimum of six (6) mm2•
1109.3.1.5 Identification and Protection of Earthing Components
Connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every bonding conductor
to extraneous conducting parts shall be labeled as follows, SAFE1Y ELECTRICAL
CONNECTION - DO NOT REMOVE.
Protective and earthing conductors shall be identified by combination of green-and-yellow

colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as approved by the
Engineer.
Source earthing conductor (or neutral earthing conductor) shall be identified along its entire
length by continuous black insulation labeled 'neutral earthing'. The neutral earthing ground
rod pit shall be also clearly identified.
Exposed external earthing or grounding conductor connection joints shall be protected from
corrosion with grease caps or bituminous tape or approved equal tape.
D.O. No.!L Series of 2017
Page 7 of 8
The earthing and lightning protection system for any new extension shall be suitably
connected to the existing system.
In general earthing conductor connections to structures, connections within the lightning

protection system conductors, shall be exothermic copper-weld type unless otherwise stated
in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
1109.3.2 Exothermic Weld Connector
Standard welding instructions shall be followed as indicated in the Plans.
1109.3.3 Air Terminal
1109.3.3.1 Air Terminal Placement Using the Standard Grid Placement Scheme
When establishing a zone of protection, the air terminal tip shall be located at not less than
250.0 mm above the protected object if the interval spacing shall not be more than
six (6) m between air terminals. If a 610 mm air terminal is used, the air terminal spacing
shall be increased to 7.6 m.
When the roof exceeds 15.24 m in length or width or both directions, the spacing shall be
increased up to 15.24 m between terminals on flat or gently sloping roofs. Pending roof
design, air terminals shall be permitted to be in a pattern not exceeding 15.24 m apart in
the center part of the roof plan. The perimeter edge spacing shall be up to 7.62 m between
terminals when 600 mm air terminals are used.
When the roof is pitched with eaves height of 15.24 m or less above the grade and having
no structural projections such as roof dormers or other projections, it requires protection
only to be mounted to the ridge of the projection roofline. Air terminals shall be mounted on
the ridge at spacing not greater than 7.62 m. If other projections are present such as a
dormer, irregular roof lines or lower or higher elevations that area may need air terminal
placement based on its physical size and shape. Air terminals 250 mm in height and spaced
not greater than 610 mm apart are permitted, interval spacing shall be increased to 7.62 m
when 600 mm terminals are installed.
The air terminal spacing shall be either 6.0 or 7.62 m pending on terminal height. Perimeter
and down conductors, with connections to ground rods shall also be indicated in the Plans.
1109.3.4 Testing (Basis for Acceptance)
The electrical grounding system shall be subjected to the 3-point or Fall-of- Potential
method prior to acceptance.
1109.4 Method of Measurements
All the units installed shall be measured and determined by the number of units approved
and ready for service as provided in the Bill of Materials and Quantities accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Page 8 of 8
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 1109.4 - Method of

Measurements, shall be paid for at the contract unit price for Grounding Systems, which
price and payment shall be the full compensation for furnishing all materials, handling,
storing, installation, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
Specification.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measure

1109 (2) Exothermic Weld Piece

Connector
References:
1. https://filipinoengineer.com/wiki/Philippine_Electrica 1_Code_Pa rt_1/Cha pter _2._ Wi ring_a nd_Protection/

Article_2.50_-_Grounding_And_Bonding - March, 2017
2. https:/ /www.mikeholt.com/mojonewsarch ive/G B-HTM L/HTM L/N ECArticle250Sections250. 20-

250.34.-v20020124.htm - March, 2017
3. https://www.lopol.org/article/general-req uirements-for-electrica I-earth ing-or-g rou nd ing-system-in-

building-construction - March, 2017
4. NEC 250
5. thermoweld® Grounding Specification for Exothermic Welding System
6. Philippine Electrical Code - Art 2.90 - Protection Against Lightning

MANILA
LO 4 AUG 2011

) Item 1105 Network Cabling
NO. 97 _
)
)
System
Series of 20~r.".':'
It has been the thrust of the Department to provide effective standard specifications in the
implementation of various infrastructure projects. As such, there is a need to set a standard
specification for the proper installation and connection of network cabling system. The
attached DPWH Standard Specification for Network Cabling System, Item
1105 is hereby prescribed for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
Specifications for Public Work Structures - Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structure and Water Supply Systems,Volume III, 1995 Edition.
MARKA. VILLAR
Secretary
14.1.2 FET/RGT Department of Public Works and Highways

\1\ 1\ \I 1111\1\1\1111\ 11111111I \1\ \11\

WIN7U01501
DPWH STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ITEM 1105 - NETWORK CABLING SYSTEM
1105.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of Network Cabling, equipment and
associated components to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation in
accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
1105.2. Definition
For the purpose of this item, the following terms shall be defined:
1. American Wire Gauge (AWG) - The standard gauge for measuring the diameter of
conductors.
2. Cable - Networking hardware used to connect one network device to other network
devices. Different types of network cables, such as coaxial cable, optical fiber cable,
and twisted pair cables, are used depending on the network's physical layer, topology,
and size.
3. Category 5 (CatS) and Category 6 (Cat6) - Performance classes for cables, jacks, and
other interconnection components.
4. Data Cabinet - A data cabinet is an enclosure with fitted, fixed or removable side panels
and doors. The cabinet contains a rack for mounting electronic hardware and
equipment.
5. Fiber Optic Cable - A cable containing one or more optical fibers that are used to carry
light. The optical fiber elements are typically individually coated with plastic layers and
contained in a protective tube suitable for the environment where the cable will be
deployed.
6. Insulation Displacement Connector (IDC) - A connector designed to be attached to the
conductor(s) of an insulated cable by a connection process which forces a selectively
sharpened blade through the insulation, bypassing the need to strip the conductors of
insulation before connecting.
7. Lucent Connector (LC) Adapter - A small form factor fiber optic connector.
8. Modular Jack - A connector with a recessed opening for making contact with multiple
conductors, usually for 4, 6, or 8 wires. Such a jack, when used with its matching plug,
makes for easy connection and disconnection to and from a communications network.
9. Network Cabling System - A complete system of cabling and associated hardware, which
provides a comprehensive telecommunications infrastructure. This infrastructure serves
a wide range of uses, such as to provide telephone service or transmit data through a
computer network.
10. Optical Fiber Connector - A mechanical device mounted on the end of a fiber optic cable,
light source, receiver or housing that mates to a similar device. It allows light to be
coupled, optically, into and out of a fiber optic cable. A connector allows a fiber optic
cable to be connected or disconnected repeatedly from a device.
11. Patch Cord - A length of cable with connectors on the ends that is used to connect an
end device to a power source.
12. Patch Panel - A device or unit featuring a number of jacks, usually of the same or similar
type, for the use of connecting and routing circuits for monitoring, interconnecting, and
testing circuits in a convenient, flexible manner.
13. U/RU (Rack Unit) - A standard unit of measure for designating the height in computer
enclosures and rack cabinets. A U equals 1.75 inches.
Department Order No. 1~, Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1105 - Network Cabling System
Page 2 of 8
14. Subscriber Connector (SC) Adapter - This contains the alignment sleeve for the precise
alignment of the connector ferrules. Available in simplex, duplex and higher density
configurations based on application needs.
15. Terminal Block - A screw-type electrical connector where the wires are clamped down to
the metal part by a screw. It is a connector which allows more than one circuit to
connect to another circuit. It often contains two long aluminum or copper strips that are
designed to connect different components. These strips create a bus bar for power
distribution that is sent to the connected components.
16. Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable - A cable made up of a bundle of twisted pairs.
The twisted pairs are usually 22 or 24 AWG sized wires twisted around each other. The
wires are typically made of copper with polyethylene (PE) or Fluorinated Ethylene
Propylene (FEP) insulation which is color coded depending on the application of the
cable being made.
1105.3.1 Data Cabinet
The data cabinet shall be made of powder coated metal. It shall have a quick release door,
removable side panels and adjustable front and rear panels, integrated locks on doors and
side panels for increased security, adjustable front and rear mounting profiles. The data
cabinet shall be either wall mounted or free standing.
1105.3.1.1 Wall Mounting Data Cabinet
The item cabinet shall either be 6U, 9U, 12U, 15U, 18U or 22U-/
1105.3.1.2 Free Standing Data Cabinet
This item shall be a 42U Universal Server Rack fully welded frame to proVide multiple
supports in all directions.
1105.3.2 Distribution Frame Panel
The distribution panel shall be used for backbone purposes. This item shall be a rack mount
fiber optic device with a 19 in. panel and SC Duplex Adapter. It shall have a splicing tray and
connectors to protect fusion splices and fiber excess.
1105.3.2.1 Sub-Distribution Frame Panel
This item shall be used to connect/transmit signal to the main distribution panel. It shall
have 12 ports, installed on the data cabinet.
1105.3.2.2 Main Distribution Frame Panel
This item shall be used to connect every optical distribution panel in the network. It shall
have 24 or 48 ports installed on the free standing data cabinet.
Department Order No.!l1., Series of 2017
Page 3 of 8
1105.3.3 Terminal Block
The terminal block shall be made of flame-retardant thermoplastic, with the base consisting
of horizontal index strips for terminating UTP cable conductors. It shall have bases available
in rack or frame configurations and for rack mounting with cable management hardware. It
shall have a minimum continuous current capacity of 15A at rated voltage of 380V. The
minimum size of terminal blocks shall be 2.5 mm2 and be suitable for clamping wire between
0.1 mm2 to 2.5 mm2• Terminal blocks used to connect cables of different voltage shall be
segregated into groups and be preferably identified by different color.
1105.3.4 Patch Panel
1105.3.4.1 UTP Patch Panel
The patch panel shall be category 6, lU high and shall support 24 modular jack ports or 2U
high and support 48 modular jack ports. It shall accept RJ-45, 8 position modular plugs. The
category 6 UTP modular jack insulation displacement contacts shall be capable of
terminating solid conductors from 0 0.5 mm to 0.65 mm (22 to 24 AWG).
The panel shall be used to link wall plate connection to the data switch located on the data
cabinet. Patch panels shall terminate the building cabling on an IDC type connector or
module.
1105.3.4.2 Fiber Connect Panel/Fiber Patch Panel
The fiber connect panel shall be modular with snap in SC or LC adapters. It shall be
equipped with a fixing mechanism that ensures cable retention and support of incoming
fiber optic cable and be able to accommodate both direct termination and splicing.
1105.3.5 Network Cable
The network cable shall either be fiber optic or copper with compatible connectors.
1105.3.5.1 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable
It shall be a CatS or Cat6 cable with compatible lObaseT, 100baseTX, and 1000baseT
Ethernet connection that shall be used to connect wall plate ports to the UTP Patch Panel.
When using Cat6 cable, it shall be ensured that all cabling components - jacks, patch
panels, patch cords and the like - must be Cat6 certified, and extra caution shall be given to
the proper termination of the cable ends.
1105.3.5.2 Fiber Optic Cable
It shall be an 8-core fiber (OM3 Multi-mode for indoor application and OSl Single-mode for
outdoor application) with either the subscriber connector (SC) or lucent connector (LC) that
shall be used to connect the Sub-Distribution Frame Panel to Main Distribution Frame Panel.
The configuration of the cable shall be such that it is arranged in tubes of 12 fibers. Fill
tubes will be used as required.
Department Order No.~, Seriesof 2017
DPWHStandard Specificationfor Item 1105 - Network Cabling System
Page 4 of 8
1105.3.6 Patch Cord
Patch cords shall be provided when patching of voice and/or data circuits is required at the
cross-connections. The patch cords supplied shall be able to support the designed
applications. Color coding of patch cords in the telecommunication closet shall be
considered, an example of this would be: blue colors for work stations, gray colors for voice,
red colors for servers, green colors for hub-to-hub connections, and yellow for other type of
connections.
1105.3.6.1 UTP Patch Cord
The UTP Patch Chord shall be a CatS or Cat6 with a data rate of l000Mbps. It shall be
assembled with a 3 or 5 meter cable length and RJ-45 male connector on both ends. This
shall be used to connect computers and peripherals to the network and data switches.
1105.3.6.2 Fiber Patch Cord
The Fiber Patch Chord shall be a 1 to 3 meter long, multimode graded index fiber with a 50
micron core with 125 micron cladding (multi-mode) and 9 micron core with 125 micron
cladding (single mode) to suit the installed fiber optic cable with LC or SC ceramic
connectors at each end. It shall be used to connect optical network equipment to the main
distribution panel.
1105.3.7 Wall Plate
The wall plate shall either be single, 2 or 3- gang port and sball have a modular outlet with
RJ-4S, coaxial video, RCA, s-video, and fiber optic connectors to connect computers and
peripherals to the network.
1105.3.8 Modular Jack
The modular jack shall be made of durable terminal with 8 pins compatible with CatS and
Cat6 cables for data connections or 4 pins compatible with standard six-position modular
connectors (RJll) for VOice/analogconnection.
1105.3.9 Floor Mounted Port
The floor mounted port shall either be a 2 or 3 gang port. It shall be made of steel/metal
with either gold or silver finish. The ports shall be made of a durable terminal with 8 pins
compatible with CatS and Cat6 cables/connectors.
1105.3.10 Network Equipment
1105.3.10.1 Core Switch
The core switch shall be used to interconnect data switches and shall serve as a gateway to
a wide area connection (WAN) or the internet. It shall have the following specifications:
1. Type: Layer 3
2. Port: 48 ports (non PoE)with 2 slots for Small Form-Factor Pluggable(SFP)uplink
Department Order No. 11-, Series of 2017
Page 5 of 8
3. Interface: 48 10/100//1000 mbps

4. Capacity: 104 Gbps
5. Form Factor: Rack Mounted
6. Power: 100 - 240 VAC /50/60 Hz
1105.3.10.2 Access Switch
The access switch shall link the connections coming from the patch panel to the core switch.
The following are the specifications for the access switch:
1. Type: Layer 2
2. Port: 48 ports/24 ports with 1 slot Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) uplink
3. Interface: 10/100/1000 mbps
4. PoE: optional
5. Capacity: 104 Gbps for 48 ports / 48 Gbps for 24 ports
6. Switch Form: Rack Mounted
7. Power: 100 - 240 VAC / 50/60 Hz
1105.3.10.3 Router
The router shall be used to connect satellite offices to the central connection. It shall have
the following specifications:
1. Port: 8 ports with 2 WAN Ports

2. Interface: 10/100/1000 mbps
3. Form Factor: Rack Mounted
4. Power: 90 - 240 VAC /50/60 Hz
1105.4.1 General
Installation of Network Cabling System shall comply with the governing laws and applicable
codes and standards such as the Philippine Electronics Code and the ANSIjTIA-568,
Telecommunications Standards.
Install all system components and cross-connect hardware according to manufacturers'

specifications and instruction as well as all applicable local codes and standards. All
horizontal and backbone cables shall be installed in the following manner:
1. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination.

2. All horizontal cables shall not exceed 90 meters from the telecommunications outlets in
the work area to the horizontal cross connect or FD.
3. The cable's minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter.
4. The maximum cable pulling tension of 25 Ibs. shall not be exceeded.
5. The cabling system and support hardware shall be installed so that It does not obscure
any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.
Department Order No.!U., Series of 2017
Page 6 of 8
6. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the standards,

manufacturers recommendations, and best industry practices.
7. Cablesshall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks.
8. Each panel or block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to
the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame.
9. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a
location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties.
10. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possibleto the termination point.
11. Optic fiber cable shall be of non-metallic construction. The optic fibers shall not be
constrained firmly against other fibers, strength members, moisture barrier compound or
any other cable components in order that the fiber strain is decoupled from the strain in
other components when the cable is under tension.
12. The wall plate shall be fairly near the work station, that the maximum length form the
work station can be no longer 5 m.
1105.4.3 Personnel Qualification
The installation of network cabling system, including wiring, cable termination and, testing
shall be done by a certified installer under the supervision of a duly registered Professional
Electronics Engineer (PECE)and / or certified designer for Network Cabling System.
The instalter shall be certified and experienced in the proper instaltation and testing of
network cabling and trained by a cabling system manufacturer.
1105.5 Testing
All cables and hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cable
performance under installed conditions. All conductors of each installed cable shall be
verified useable by the Contractor prior to system acceptance.
All UTP and fiber optic cable field testing shall be performed with an approved test device.
100% of cables installed shall be tested and shall all result to PASSremarks channel or
permanent link.
All field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar year by the field test equipment
manufacturer.
The work under this Item shall be measured by lump sum actually placed and installed
network cabling system as indicated on the plans. Cables shall be measured by roll while
other components shall be measured by set.
The quantity as determined in Section 1105.4 shall be paid for at unit price stipulated in the
Contract's Bill of Quantities. The payment shall constitute the full compensation for
furnishing all the necessary materials, providing necessary equipment and tools in installing
the Network Cabling System, labor cost and all the incidental expenses necessary to
complete the work.
Department Order No..ll, Series of 2017
Page 7 of 8
Pay Item
Number
1105 (1) a Data Cabinet, Wall Type Set
1105 (1) b Data Cabinet, Free Standing Set
1105 (2) a Distribution Frame Panel, Sub Set
1105 (2) b Distribution Frame Panel, Main Set
1105 (4) UTP Patch Panel Set
1105 (5) Fiber Connect Panel Set
1105 (6) UTP CATS Cable Roll
1105 (10) Patch Cord CATS Set
1105 (14) al Wall Plate, Single Set
1105 (14) a2 Wall Plate, 2 port Set
1105 (14) a3 Wall Plate, 3 port Set
1105 (15) al Floor Mounted, 2 port Set
1105 (15) a2 Floor Mounted, 3 port Set
1105(17) Network Cabling Lump Sum

Department Order No. 99, Series of 2017
Page 8 of 8
References:
1. DPWH Design Guidelines, Criteria and Standards: Volume 6 - Public Buildings and Other Related
Structures
2. Philippine Electronics Code
3. American National Standards InstitutefTelecommunications Industry Association

ANSI[TIA-568 - Telecommunications Standards
4. Internet
http://www.networkcablingsandiego.com/cabling-glossary/
http://www .datalan .co. uk/content/glossary .asp
https:/ /www.brocade.com/content/dam/common/documents/content-types/product-design-
guide/cabling-best -practices-ga-bp-036-02. pdf
OS:;'l.13~1?1iJ1l
,lJIl- tJ/. UJI'!-

MANILA
o4 AUG 2017
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Revision on the Adoption of the

) DPWH Standard Specifications for
NO. 99_
)
)
Highways,
Volume IIi
Bridges
for
and Airports,
Public Works
Series of 201CzjJ·~·17 Structures, Volume Illi and, Special
Items of Work (SPLs) in DPWH
Projects
In spite of the issuance of the Memorandum dated February 21, 2017 reiterating strict
compliance to Department Order No. 174, Series of 2015, it is observed that there are still
some DPWH Implementing Offices that prepare and submit technical specifications of various
Special Items of Work (SPL) to the Bureau of Research and Standards (BRS) without the
necessary technical references [e.g., ASTM, AASHTO, Philippine National Standards (PNS),
JICA Manuals, etc.] used in the preparation/formulation thereof which hinders the BRS from
effectively evaluating the same. Further, some SPLs are even prepared and submitted long
after the project has commenced and even just prior to the processing of the Contractor's
progress billing which gives an impression that the SPLs were just prepared to facilitate this
purpose. These actions not only cause undue delay in _f
project implementation but
violate/circumvent the provisions and defeat the very purpose of said policy issuance.
In view hereof and in order to address the issue, it is informed that henceforth, the use of
SPLs in DPWH infrastructure projects will no longer be allowed. The DPWH
Implementing Offices are hereby directed to strictly adopt the DPWH Standard Specifications
for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II and for Public Works Structures, Volume III to
avoid unnecessary delays during the implementation of various DPWH projects and to facilitate
the expeditious evaluation thereof by the DPWH Inspectors as to conformance with the Plans
and compliance to the prescribed Specifications.
However, in cases wherein items of work that are not found in the DPWH Standard
Specifications Volumes II and III are required to be utilized in DPWH infrastructure projects
to suit actual field conditions, the concerned implementing office shall submit the Generic
Technical Specifications of such with the corresponding references to the BRS. The submitted
Generic Technical Specifications shall serve as reference in the preparation of new DPWH
Standard Specifications which will eventually be included in the Project Contract
Management Application (PCMA) and then be established as Regular Items of Work upon
approval of the Secretary.
Department Order No. '1Q. Series of 2017
Revision on the Adoption of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II;
for Public Works Structures, Volume III; and, Special Items of Work (SPLs) in DPWH Projects
Page 2 of 2
This Order shall take effect immediately and shall supersede Department Order No. 174, Series
of 2015, (Adoption of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports,
Volume II, for Public Works Structures, Volume III and Special Items of Work (SPLs) in DPWH
Projects).
MARK A. VIL
Secretary

14.1.2 FET/RGT Office of the Secretary
II I 1\ " 11111111111\ 11111111I111111111

WIN7U01503
Manila
04 AUG 201l .J
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Prescribing a Consultant's

) Performance Evaluation System
NO. 100 _
)
)
(ConsPES) for Infrastructure Projects
Series of 20~",.".n
In line with the continuing efforts of the DPWH to improve the performance evaluation of
consultants for infrastructure projects, the revised Guidelines on Consultant's Performance
Evaluation System (ConsPES) for Infrastructure Projects is hereby prescribed for compliance
by all concerned.
This Order shall supersede Department Order No. 145, Series of 2016 and shall take effect
immediately.

MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7XS00319
End: Revised Consultant's Performance Evaluation System (ConsPES) Guidelines
12.1.2 FJZD/AAT/JABS/MGNO/NEP
Revised Consultant’s Performance
Evaluation System (ConsPES) Guidelines
Revised Consultant’s Performance Evaluation System (ConsPES) Guidelines
Page 2 of 7
Table of Contents
A. Objectives of ConsPES ……………………………………………………………………………………. 3
B. Guidelines …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 3
C. Basic Criteria and Weights by Type of Consulting Services …………………………………. 5
D. Basic Rating System ………………………………………………………………………………………. 6
E. Application of ConsPES Ratings ………………………………………………………………………. 6
F. List of Annexes ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 7

Page 3 of 7
A. Objectives of ConsPES
ConsPES seeks to achieve the following objectives:
1. To set an objective and consistent method to evaluate, measure, and rate a

Consultant’s performance in DPWH projects.
2. To provide the DPWH with a means to incentivize Consultants to perform good work.
3. To provide the DPWH essential inputs in the process of selecting Consultants for its
future consulting services project.
4. To give Consultants the opportunity to improve their job performance from one
ConsPES rating period to another.
B. Guidelines
1. ConsPES shall be used mainly for the most common types of consulting services
engaged by the DPWH – Feasibility Study (FS), Detailed Engineering Design (DED),
and Construction Supervision (CS). For other types of consulting services – e.g.,
preparation of Master Plan, specialized technical jobs such as geotechnical
investigations, traffic surveys, parcellary surveys, and institutional capacity
development - the Procurement Service (PrS) through its Consulting Services Division
(PrS-CSD) - shall customize ConsPES to fit the specific requirements of those
services, upon request of the concerned Implementing Unit (IU).
2. The evaluation and rating of a consultant’s performance, using ConsPES, shall be

done by a ConsPES Team to be formed by the Director of the PrS, with members
from the following offices to be designated by their respective heads of office, on a
project-to-project basis, depending on the type of consulting services involved:
FS DED CS
PrS–CSD PrS–CSD PrS–CSD
Planning Service – Project Bureau of Design (BOD) Concerned Cluster of
Preparation Division (PS- Unified Project
PPD) Management Office
(UPMO)
BOD Bureau of Construction BOC
(BOC)
3. The evaluation of the consultant’s performance, through ConsPES, shall be carried

out upon reaching the following milestones using the criteria given in ANNEX A:
a. 50% of contract period

b. 100% of contract period
4. The IU shall assign the corresponding points for each activity and/or deliverable
required in the Terms of Reference (TOR).
5. The IU concerned shall transmit the Consultant’s deliverables to the following

specialized offices, for review/evaluation of the specific aspects pertaining to their
offices:
Page 4 of 7
Specialized Offices FS DED CS Others

PS 
BOD  
BOC   
UPMO 
Bureau of Research and Standards 
Bureau of Quality and Safety 
Others
6. For each consultant’s deliverable (except for CS), the specialized offices responsible
for reviewing/evaluating the deliverable shall determine whether the
defects/deficiencies in the deliverable are major or minor based on their respective
checklists. Only one staff from the specialized office concerned shall be assigned to
review/evaluate a particular (or a specific aspect of) deliverable throughout the
entire contract period. The Director of the concerned specialized office shall
synthesize the results of its evaluation of each deliverable using the form in ANNEX
B (Summary of Findings) and submit this to the PrS-CSD. In addition, the IU must
furnish the PrS-CSD with the exchange of communication/correspondences (e.g.,
DPWH to Consultant vice-versa, DPWH office to another DPWH office, and the like).
7. For FS and DED, based on the Summaries of Findings for each deliverable submitted
by the concerned specialized offices, the ConsPES Team shall evaluate and rate the
performance of the consultant using the criteria in ANNEX A.
8. The ConsPES Team shall prepare the corresponding Intermediate Evaluation Report
(IER) indicating its performance rating using the form in ANNEX C and submit it to
the Director of the PrS for review and notation. The IER shall be submitted on the
following milestones with their respective weights:
IER No. Milestone Weight

1 50% of contract period 50%
2 100% of contract period 50%
9. Upon completion of the consulting services, the ConsPES Team shall compute the
final performance rating of the consultant, which is the sum of the weighted ratings
obtained in the two evaluation periods. The Team shall then submit its Final
Evaluation Report (FER) using the form in ANNEX D to the PrS Director for review.
10. The PrS Director shall recommend the approval of FER to the approving authority
concerned.
11. Prior to the approval of the FER, the PrS-CSD shall provide a copy of FER to the
consultant concerned for his information. If requested by the consultant within five
(5) calendar days from the date of receipt of the FER, the ConsPES Team shall
discuss with the consultant the said report.
12. The PrS-CSD shall maintain a ConsPES database which shall include, among other
things, the findings and performance ratings of the consultants evaluated.
Page 5 of 7
13. The latest ConsPES rating of the Consultant shall be used by the BAC as an input in
the shortlisting and evaluation of technical proposal of the Consultant for the next
bidding. The Consultant will be rated in two (2) phases as shown on the table below:
Consultant being Phase 1 Rating Phase 2 Rating

rated
FS Consultant Based on completed Based on implemented FS*, done
FS by DED Consultant/IU (not
necessarily the FS Consultant)
DED Consultant Based on completed Based on implemented DED*,

DED supervised by the CS Consultant/IU
(not necessarily the DED
Consultant)
CS Consultant Based on completed Based on the findings of the IU and

CS ConsPES Team during the Defects
Liability Period (DLP)
*provided the scope of works is the same, otherwise use the Phase 1 rating
14. The latest ConsPES Rating to be used in the succeeding biddings shall be the Phase
2 rating of the Consultant.
15. All the firms in a joint venture or association shall be given the same ConsPES rating
in a particular contract.
16. The ConsPES Rating of a consultant in a packaged contract, i.e., a contract with
multiple projects awarded to a single consultant, shall be computed by obtaining the
weighted (according to cost) average of its performance ratings in all projects in the
contract.
C. Basic Criteria and Weights by Type of Consulting Services
ConsPES shall use the following basic criteria, with their corresponding weights, for the
common types of consulting services – Feasibility Study, Detailed Engineering Design,
and Construction Supervision:
Phase 1:
Criteria Feasibility Detailed Construction
Study (FS) Engineering Supervision
Design (DED) (CS)
Quality (of Output) 50 60 60
Cost (of Output) 20 20 20
Schedule (of Deliverables) 30 20 20
Total 100 pts. 100 pts. 100 pts.
Page 6 of 7
Phase 2:
Criteria FS DED CS
as evaluated as evaluated as evaluated
after DED stage after CS stage after the DLP
Quality (of Output) 50 60 60
Cost (of Output)* 20 20 20
Schedule (of Deliverables)* 30 20 20
Total 100 pts. 100 pts. 100 pts.
*The same rating in Phase 1 will be used in Phase 2.
D. Basic Rating System
ConsPES shall use the following numerical and adjectival ratings:
Numerical Adjectival
95% to 100% Very Satisfactory
85% to <95% Satisfactory
70 to <85% Fair
<70% Unsatisfactory
E. Application of ConsPES Ratings
The ConsPES ratings shall be used by the concerned Bids and Awards Committees as
inputs in the shortlisting and the evaluation of technical proposals of consultants, as
follows:
PROPOSED
WEIGHTS
With Without
ConsPES ConsPES*
For Shortlisting:
1. Applicable Experience of Firm 25% 35%
2. Qualification of Personnel of the entire Firm 30% 40%
3. Job Capacity 20% 25%
4. ConsPES Rating 25% -
Total 100% 100%
For Evaluation of Technical Proposals
1. Applicable Experience of Firm 10% 10%
2. Work Plan and Methodology 15% 20%
3. Qualification of Personnel to be assigned to the Project 55% 70%
4. ConsPES Rating 20% -
Total 100% 100%
*For firms without ConsPES ratings, the weights in this column shall be used.
For the procurement - i.e., shortlisting or evaluation of technical proposals – of a specific

consulting services contract, the ConsPES rating to be used shall be that for a similar
completed services contract. In case the consultant has two or more ConsPES ratings,
the average ConsPES rating of the last two similar consulting services contracts shall be
used for shortlisting and evaluation of technical proposals.
Page 7 of 7
F. List of Annexes
Annex Title Responsible Office

A DPWH ConsPES Criteria and Rating System ConsPES Team
by Type of Services
 Feasibility Study (FS)
 Detailed Engineering Design (DED)
 Construction Supervision (CS)
B Summary of Findings Specialized Office
C Intermediate Evaluation Report (IER) ConsPES Team
D Final Evaluation Report (FER) ConsPES Team
E Monitoring Control for Construction -
Supervision of Flood Control Projects
ANNEX A
DPWH CONSULTANT’S PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM (ConsPES)

CRITERIA AND RATING SYSTEM BY TYPE OF SERVICES
A. FEASIBILITY STUDY (FS)
Criteria Points
1. Quality 50
1.1 Adequacy and accuracy of FS assumptions, data, analyses, and 20

outputs vs. Terms of Reference (TOR)
1.2 Cost-effectiveness of FS recommendation, including PED 20
1.3 Tenure of Consultant’s key personnel 10
2. Cost 20
2.1 Completeness of FS/PED cost estimates vs. TOR cost items/ 8

requirements
2.2 Comparison of FS/PED cost estimates with accepted benchmarks 12
3. Schedule 30
3.1 Adherence to schedule of accepted FS deliverables 30
Total 100
1. Quality: 50 Points
Criteria Weights Indicators Rating System
Errors/ Resubmissions
Inaccuracies/ (30%)
Deficiencies
(70%)
1.1 Adequacy and accuracy 40% a. Extent and 100%: Very 100%: Very
of FS assumptions, impact of Satisfactory – FS Satisfactory - No
data, analyses, and errors/ assumptions, data resubmission
outputs vs. Terms of inaccuracies/ and outputs required.
Reference (TOR) deficiencies in required no
covering the following: FS data, changes or only 85%: Satisfactory–
a. Engineering analyses, and minor ones for One (1)
surveys outputs, based clarity. No major resubmission
(topographic, on DPWH technical errors/ required to correct
geotechnical, review and inaccuracies/ the work.
hydrologic, etc.) validation.* deficiencies**
b. Traffic/market that influenced 70%: Fair–
surveys and b. Number of quality of FS Two (2)
analyses resubmissions outputs. resubmissions
c. Prel. engg design of corrected FS. required to correct
(PED) including cost 85%: the work.
estimates -------------- Satisfactory– 1-3
d. Economic evaluation *see Notes on documented 50%:
e. Environmental Phase 2 evaluation major errors/ Unsatisfactory–
impact (page 5).
DPWH Consultant’s Performance Evaluation System (ConsPES)
Criteria and Rating System by Type of Services
Page 2 of 18
f. Social and GAD inaccuracies/ Three (3) or more
g. ROW Plan and RAP deficiencies. resubmissions to
h. Preliminary value correct the work.
engineering 70%: Fair–
i. Risk analysis 4-6 documented
j. Financial and Value major errors/
for Money analyses inaccuracies/
for PPP deficiencies.
k. Operational analysis
l. Others 50%:
Unsatisfactory –
-------------- More than 6
Under this criterion, the IU documented
shall specify the weight/ major errors/
multiplier for each item inaccuracies/
(column 1.1) as indicated in deficiencies
the TOR. The weights may
vary from one project to --------------
another. **see Notes on
major FS defects/
deficiencies (page
5).
--------------
3 minor errors
shall be
equivalent to 1
major error.
1.2 Cost-effectiveness of FS 40% a. Extent of DPWH 100%: Very 100%: Very

recommendation, comments*** on satisfactory – satisfactory –
including PED. Consultant’s Evaluation results No resubmission
evaluation of readily accepted required.
alternatives, by DPWH with no
based on adverse 85%: Satisfactory –
economic cost- comments. One (1) revision/
benefit analyses resubmission
(CBA) and other 85%: Satisfactory before being
relevant criteria, – accepted by DPWH.
leading to Evaluation results
recommended required 1-3 70%: Fair –
most cost- major adverse Two (2) revisions/
effective scheme. comments by resubmissions
DPWH. before being
b. No. of revisions accepted by DPWH.
made 70%: Fair –
Evaluation results 50%:
-------------- required 4-6 Unsatisfactory –
***see Notes on major adverse Three (3) or more
DPWH comments comments by revisions/
on Consultant’s DPWH. resubmissions
evaluation of before being
alternatives (p.5). 50%: accepted by DPWH.
Unsatisfactory –
Evaluation results
Page 3 of 18
required more
than 6 major
adverse
comments by
DPWH.
1.3 Tenure of Consultant’s 20% Incidence of 100%: Very satisfactory – No
key personnel (Upon replacement of key replacement of key personnel over the
award of contract) personnel duration of the Consulting services.
(weighted
according to their 85%: Satisfactory – Replacement of less
roles) with or than 20% of the number of key
without valid personnel.
reasons.
70%: Fair – Replacement of 20-30% of
the number of key personnel.
50%: Unsatisfactory – Replacement of

project manager and/or more than 30%
of the number of key personnel.
--------------
Replacement (%) = (No. of
Replacement ÷ Total Number of Key
Personnel) x 100
2. Cost of Output: 20 Points
Criteria Weight Indicators Rating System
2.1 Completeness of FS/PED 40% Extent of coverage 100%: Very Satisfactory – Omissions/
cost estimates vs. TOR of FS/PED cost errors/ inaccuracies in cost items,
cost items/ elements: affecting less than 5% of total cost.
requirements materials, labor,
equipment, 85%: Satisfactory – Omissions/ errors/
indirect costs (cost inaccuracies in cost items, affecting 5%
of money, to less than 10% of total cost.
insurance,
contingencies, 70%: Fair – Omissions/ errors/
taxes, etc.), ROW, inaccuracies in some cost items,
etc., as reflected in affecting 10-20% of total cost.
the TOR (See DO
197, series of 2016 50%: Unsatisfactory – Omissions/
for factors. Level errors/ inaccuracies in cost items,
of accuracy is ± affecting more than 20% of total cost.
20%).
--------------
Variance (%) = [(Consultant’s Total
Cost Estimate – Sum of TOR Cost
Items) ÷ Sum of TOR Cost Items] x 100
Sign convention:
(+): If Consultant’s cost estimate is
above the sum of TOR cost items
Page 4 of 18
(-): If Consultant’s cost estimate is

below the sum of TOR cost items
Note: Variance shall be based on cost

elements that are:
a. excluded by the Consultant
b. included by the Consultant which
exceed the requirements of the
TOR and disapproved by DPWH.
c. understated/ overstated by the
Consultant
2.2 Comparison of FS/PED 60% Extent of variance 100%: Very Satisfactory – Total
cost estimates with of FS/PED cost variance less than 10%.
accepted benchmarks estimates vs.
accepted DPWH/ 85%: Satisfactory – Total variance
industry/ within 10-15%.
benchmarks/
standards (e.g., 70%: Fair – Total variance within 15-
cost per km of 20%, and/or variance for some major
road, cost/lineal items more than 20%.
meter of bridge,
cost/sq. m of 50%: Unsatisfactory – Total variance
bldg.) and vs. more than 20%, and/or variance for
required +/-20% major items more than 30%.
accuracy -
adjusted for --------------
special Variance (%) = [(Consultant’s Cost
characteristics. Estimate – Standard Cost) ÷ Standard
Cost] x 100
Sign convention:
(+): If Consultant’s cost estimate is
above the standard cost
(-): If Consultant’s cost estimate is
below the standard cost
Note: Use existing data per region /

province. Cost elements without
available benchmarks shall not be
evaluated.
3. Schedule: 30 Points
3.1 Adherence to schedule 100% Extent of actual 100%: Very Satisfactory – FS

of accepted FS time slippage deliverables completed/ submitted ahead
deliverables (delay) vs. of or on schedule.
original/approved
schedule for FS
deliverables, due
Page 5 of 18
to the 85%: Satisfactory – Slippage of less than
Consultant’s fault. 10% of original delivery period, due to
Consultant’s fault.
70%: Fair – Slippage of 10-15%, due to

Consultant’s fault.
50%: Unsatisfactory – Slippage of more

than 15%, due to Consultant’s fault.
--------------
Time Slippage (%) = [(Contract
Schedule – Actual Schedule) ÷ Contract
Schedule] x 100
NOTES:
*Phase 2 Evaluation
If the IU, together with the DED Consultant, finds additional errors and discrepancies in the
FS output during the DED phase (Phase 2), this criteria (Indicator A of 1.1) shall also be used
to compute the Phase 2 rating of the FS Consultant. The same rating in Phase 1 shall be
applied for other criteria.
**Major FS Errors/Deficiencies:
– Use of “table” survey instead of actual field survey (e.g., traffic, socio-economic, road
and river profile/cross-section surveys).
– Use of wrong benchmarks, coordinates.
– Use of inadequate/inappropriate assumptions (e.g., traffic parameters/adjustment
factors, VOC, growth rates).
– Errors in geotechnical investigation such as inadequate spacing and depth of boreholes.
– Wrong preliminary design analysis on the main frame that will affect the structural
integrity of the project (e.g., seismic coefficient, design flood level/return period).
– Inadequate preliminary design data used in structural analysis (e.g., thickness,
materials).
– Inadequate value engineering to determine the most cost-effective design.
– Non-compliance with major environmental requirements for environmentally critical
projects and projects in environmentally critical areas.
– Inappropriate cost estimate of right of way acquisition.
– Other major FS errors/deficiencies, as may be added by PS, depending on the project.
FS errors/deficiencies not stated above are considered minor FS errors/deficiencies.
***Possible adverse comments of DPWH on Consultant’s evaluation of

alternatives:
– Failure of the Consultant to meet the minimum number of proposed alternative schemes
as per TOR requirement.
– Major omission of a potential cost-effective alternative.
– Inadequate economic cost-benefit analysis to determine the most cost-effective
scheme.
– Non-consideration of possible conflict with other ongoing government infrastructure
projects.
– Use of secondary traffic data in traffic analyses.
– No reference/s cited for the report on the profiles of the location of the subject
project.
– Other adverse comments, as may be added by PS, depending on the project.
Page 6 of 18
B. DETAILED ENGINEERING DESIGN (DED)
Criteria Points
1. Quality 60
1.1 Adequacy and accuracy of DED surveys and plans, analyses, and 36
outputs vs. Terms of Reference (TOR)
1.2 Cost-effectiveness of DED 12
2. Cost 20
2.1 Completeness and accuracy of DED cost estimates in the DUPA vs. 8
TOR cost items/ requirements
2.2 Comparison of DED cost estimates with accepted benchmarks 12
3. Schedule 20
3.1 Adherence to schedule of accepted DED deliverables 20
Total 100
Inaccuracies/ (30%)
Deficiencies
(70%)
1.1 Adequacy and 60% a. Extent and 100%: Very 100%: Very
accuracy of DED impact of Satisfactory – DED Satisfactory – No
surveys and plans, errors/ surveys and plans, resubmission
analyses, and outputs inaccuracies/ analyses, and required.
vs. Terms of deficiencies in outputs required
Reference (TOR) DED surveys no/minor changes 85%: Satisfactory–
covering the following: and plans, for clarity only. No One (1)
a. Field analyses, and major technical resubmission
investigations/ outputs, based errors/inaccuracies/ required to correct
surveys on DPWH deficiencies** that the work.
(topographic, review and influenced quality of
geotechnical, validation* DED outputs. 70%: Fair– Two (2)
hydrologic, resubmissions
parcellary, etc.) b. Number of 85%: Satisfactory– required to correct
b. Design analyses resubmissions of 1-3 documented the work.
(geometric, corrected DED major
structural, seismic, ------------ errors/inaccuracies/ 50%:
hydro, etc.) *See Notes on deficiencies. Unsatisfactory–
c. Drawings Phase 2 evaluation Three (3) or more
d. Specifications (page 10). 70%: Fair– 4-6 resubmissions to
e. Bidding documents documented major correct the work.
f. Others errors/inaccuracies/
deficiencies (e.g.,
Page 7 of 18
Inaccuracies/ (30%)
Deficiencies
(70%)
-------------- wrong BM or seismic
Under this criterion, the coefficient).
IU shall specify the
weight/ multiplier for each 50%:
item (column 1.1) as Unsatisfactory–
indicated in the TOR. The More than 6
weights may vary from documented major
one project to another. errors/ inaccuracies/
deficiencies
------------
**See Notes on
major
errors/inaccuracies/
deficiencies (page
11).
--------------
3 minor errors shall
be equivalent to 1
major error.
1.2 Cost-effectiveness of 20% a. Extent of DPWH 100%: Very 100%: Very

DED comments on Satisfactory – satisfactory – No
Consultant’s Evaluation resubmission
evaluation of adequately used VE required.
alternative and other relevant
schemes, using criteria, and 85%: Satisfactory –
VE and other recommended most One (1) revision/
relevant criteria, cost-effective resubmission
leading to alternative readily before being
recommenda- accepted by DPWH accepted by DPWH.
tion of most with no/minor
cost-effective adverse comments. 70%: Fair –
alternative. Two (2) revisions/
85%: Satisfactory – resubmissions
b. No. of revisions/ Evaluation used before being
resubmissions relevant criteria, and accepted by DPWH.
made. recommended
alternative accepted 50%:
by DPWH, with Unsatisfactory –
minor comments by Three (3) or more
DPWH – with less revisions/
than 10% cost resubmissions
savings identified by before being
DPWH but missed accepted by DPWH.
by consultant (thru
VE).
Page 8 of 18
Inaccuracies/ (30%)
Deficiencies
(70%)
70%: Fair –
Evaluation required
substantive/major
comments/
involvement by
DPWH – with 10-
20% cost savings
identified by DPWH
but missed by
consultant (thru
VE).
50%: Unsatisfactory
– Evaluation
required extensive
involvement by
DPWH and major
reassessment with
more than 20% cost
savings identified by
DPWH but missed
by consultant (thru
VE).
--------------
Variance (%) =
[(Budgetary Cost –
Approved Cost per
Alternative Scheme)
÷ Budgetary Cost] x
100
1.3 Tenure of Consultant’s 20% Incidence of 100%: Very satisfactory – No replacement

key personnel (Upon replacement of key of key personnel over the duration of the
award of contract) personnel Consulting services.
(weighted
according to their 85%: Satisfactory – Replacement of less
roles) with or than 20% of the number of key personnel.
without valid
reasons 70%: Fair – Replacement of 20-30% of
50%: Unsatisfactory – Replacement of

project manager and/or more than 30% of
Page 9 of 18
--------------
Replacement (%) = (No. of Replacement
÷ Total Number of Key Personnel) x 100
2. Cost: 20 Points
2.1 Completeness and 40% a. Extent of 100%: Very Satisfactory – Omissions of

accuracy of DED cost coverage of cost items and errors/deficiencies in DUPA,
estimates in the DED cost affecting less than 5% of total cost.
DUPA vs. TOR cost elements:
items/ requirements materials, labor, 85%: Satisfactory – Omissions of cost
equipment, items and errors/deficiencies in DUPA,
indirect costs affecting 5-10% of total cost.
(cost of money,
insurance, 70%: Fair – Omissions of some cost items
bonds, and errors/deficiencies in DUPA, affecting
contingencies, more than 10% up to 15% of total cost.
profit, taxes,
etc.), ROW, etc. 50%: Unsatisfactory – Omissions of cost
as reflected in items and errors/deficiencies in DUPA,
the TOR (See affecting more than 15% of total cost.
DO 197, series
of 2016, for --------------
factors). Variance (%) = [(Consultant’s Total Cost
Estimate–Sum of TOR Cost Items) ÷ Sum
b. Adequacy of of TOR Cost Items] x 100
Detailed Unit
Price Analysis Sign convention:
(DUPA) (+): If Consultant’s cost estimate is above
the total approved cost
(-): If Consultant’s cost estimate is below
the total approved cost
Note: Variance shall be based on cost

elements that are:
a. excluded by the Consultant
b. included by the Consultant which
exceed the requirements of the
TOR and disapproved by DPWH.
c. understated/ overstated by the
Consultant
2.2 Comparison of DED 60% Extent of variance 100%: Very Satisfactory – Total variance
cost estimates with of DED cost within 5%.
accepted benchmarks. estimates vs.
DPWH/industry 85%: Satisfactory – Total variance within
benchmarks/ 5-10%.
standards (e.g.,
cost/km of road, 70%: Fair – Total variance within 10-15%,
cost/lineal m of and/or variance for some major items
bridge, cost/sq m more than 15%.
of bldg.), and vs.
Page 10 of 18
required +/-5-10% 50%: Unsatisfactory – Total variance more

accuracy - adjusted than 15%, and/or variance for major items
for special more than 20%.
characteristics.
--------------
Variance (%) = [(Consultant’s Cost
Estimate – Standard Cost) ÷ Standard
Cost] x 100
Sign convention:
(+): If Consultant’s cost estimate is above
the standard cost
(-): If Consultant’s cost estimate is below
the standard cost
Note: Use existing data per region /

province. Cost elements without available
benchmarks shall not be evaluated.
3.1 Adherence to 100% Extent of actual 100%: Very Satisfactory – DED

schedule of accepted time slippage deliverables completed and submitted
DED deliverables (delay) vs. ahead of or on schedule.
original/approved
schedule for 85%: Satisfactory – Slippage of less than
deliverables, due 10% of original delivery period, due to
to the Consultant’s Consultant’s fault.
fault.
70%: Fair – Slippage of 10-15%, due to
the Consultant’s fault.
50%: Unsatisfactory – Slippage of more

than 15%, due to the Consultant’s fault.
--------------
Time Slippage (%) = [(Contract Schedule
– Actual Schedule) ÷ Contract Schedule] x
100
NOTES:
*Phase 2 Evaluation
If the IU, together with the CS Consultant, finds additional errors and discrepancies in the
DED output during the CS phase (Phase 2), this criteria (Indicator A of 1.1) shall also be used
to compute the Phase 2 rating of the DED Consultant. The same rating in Phase 1 shall be
applied for other criteria.
Page 11 of 18
**Major DED Errors/Deficiencies:
– Use of table survey instead of actual field survey.
– Use of wrong benchmarks, coordinates, topographical data, mean sea level elevation.
– Errors in geotechnical investigation, such as inadequate spacing and depth of
boreholes, lack of understanding of subsurface condition.
– Wrong design analysis on the main frame that will affect structural integrity of the
project (e.g., seismic coefficient, design flood return period, maximum experienced
flood elevation).
– Inadequate design data used in structural analysis (e.g., thickness, materials).
– Inappropriate value engineering to determine the most cost-effective design.
– Non-consideration of socio-political issues – e.g., historical landmarks, densely
populated area - resulting in non-implementation or major realignment/revision of
project.
– Other major DED errors/deficiencies, as may be added by BOD, depending on the
project.
DED errors/deficiencies not stated above are considered minor DED errors/deficiencies.
Page 12 of 18
C. CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION (CS)
Criteria Points
1. Quality 60
1.1 Consultant’s efficiency in ensuring contractor’s compliance of its 30

construction work with the approved DED, particularly plans and
specifications
1.2 Quality of Consultant’s const. supervision (CS) system 24
2. Cost 20
2.1 Consultant’s efficiency in controlling cost overruns 20
3. Schedule 20
3.1 Consultant’s efficiency in ensuring contractor’s adherence to 8

approved construction schedule
3.2 Consultant’s prudent evaluation of proposed contract time extensions 6
3.3 Consultant’s timeliness in submitting required reports and documents 6
Total 100

1.1 Consultant’s 50% Incidence of 100%: Very Satisfactory – All
efficiency in ensuring construction workmanship stated in the SWA,
contractor’s defects/ carried out by the Contractor, and
compliance of its deficiencies** recommended by the Consultant
construction work stated in the for payment are in accordance
with the approved Statement of with the duly approved plans and
DED, particularly Works specifications. Noted
plans and Accomplished defects/deficiencies (if any) are
specifications* (SWA) within the acceptable tolerance set
recommended and prescribed in the
by Consultant monitoring/control matrix. (Please
-------------- for payment, refer to Annex E for Flood Control
*See Notes on Phase 2 but found by Projects)
evaluation (page 16). DPWH to be not
in accordance 85%: Satisfactory – SWA
with the recommended by Consultant for
approved plans payment is found by DPWH to
and have defects/deficiencies in major
specifications. work items requiring rectification
works and/or costing 10% and
-------------- below of the aggregate works
**See Notes on accomplished.
major
construction 70%: Fair – SWA recommended by
defects (page Consultant for payment is found by
16). DPWH to have defects/deficiencies
in major work items requiring
Page 13 of 18
rectification works and/or costing
20% and below of the aggregate
works accomplished.
50%: Unsatisfactory – SWA

recommended by Consultant for
payment is found by DPWH to
have defects/deficiencies in major
work items requiring
reconstruction and/or costing
above 20% of the aggregate
works accomplished.
--------------
Three (3) minor errors shall be
equivalent to one (1) major error.
1.2 Quality of 40% Incidence of 100%: Very Satisfactory – All the

Consultant’s const. deficiencies in five (5) criteria are satisfactorily
supervision (CS) the Consultant’s complied.
system: CS system***,
a. Organization of covering the 85%: Satisfactory – Has incurred
key personnel five (5) criteria 1-2 cases of major
b. Control of Quality (column 1). infractions/deficiencies in any of
of Workmanship the criteria.
(Inspection and --------------
supervision) ***See Notes 70%: Fair – Has incurred 3-4 cases
c. Control of Quality on major CS of infractions/deficiencies in any of
of Materials system the criteria.
(Sampling and deficiencies
testing) (page 18). 50%: Unsatisfactory – Has
d. Documentation incurred 5 or more cases of
[Reporting and infractions/deficiencies in any of
records the criteria.
management
(e.g., log book, --------------
test results, site Three (3) minor errors shall be
instructions, equivalent to one (1) major error.
progress reports,
etc.)]
e. Other
Management
Consideration
 Construction
Health and
Safety
Management
 Traffic
Management
 Environmental
Management
Page 14 of 18
1.3 Tenure of 10% Incidence of 100%: Very satisfactory – No
Consultant’s key replacement of replacement of key personnel over
personnel (Upon key personnel the duration of Consulting services.
award of contract) (weighted
according to 85%: Satisfactory – Replacement
their roles) with of less than 20% of the number of
or without valid key personnel.
reasons.
70%: Fair – Replacement of 20% -
30% of the number of key
personnel.
50%: Unsatisfactory –
Replacement of Project Manager
and/or more than 30% of the
number of key personnel.
2. Cost: 20 Points

2.1 Consultant’s 100% Incidence of 100%: Very Satisfactory – Each
efficiency in variation orders VO recommended by Consultant
controlling cost (VOs) with cost are approved by DPWH.
overruns. overruns,
recommended by 85%: Satisfactory – Each VO
Consultant, but recommended by Consultant is
disapproved/reduced reduced by less than 5% by
by DPWH, except DPWH.
VOs initiated itself
by DPWH and VOs 70%: Fair – Each VO
initiated due to recommended by Consultant is
fortuitous events. reduced by 5% up to 10% by
DPWH.
50%: Unsatisfactory –Each VO

recommended by Consultant is
disapproved or reduced by more
than 10% by DPWH.

3.1 Consultant’s 40% Extent of slippage of 100%: Very Satisfactory – Work
efficiency in planned accomplishments are completed
ensuring accomplishment vs. ahead of, or on schedule (+, or
contractor’s actual no slippage).
adherence to accomplishment.
approved 85%: Satisfactory – Has incurred
construction 10% and below negative slippage
schedule. due to Consultant’s laxity/fault.
Page 15 of 18
70%: Fair – Has incurred above
10% up to 15% negative slippage
due to Consultant’s laxity/fault.
50%: Unsatisfactory – Has

incurred above 15% negative
slippage due to Consultant’s
laxity/fault.
3.2 Consultant’s 30% Incidence of contract 100%: Very Satisfactory – All

prudent time extensions proposed contract time extension
evaluation of recommended by recommended by Consultants are
proposed Consultant but approved by DPWH
contract time disapproved/reduced
extensions by DPWH – except 85%: Satisfactory –The proposed
time extensions for contract time extension
VOs due to faulty recommended by Consultant is
DED, due to reduced by less than 5% by
fortuitous events or DPWH.
for VOs initiated by
DPWH. 70%: Fair –The proposed contract
time extension recommended by
Consultant is reduced by 5% up
to 10% by DPWH.
50%: Unsatisfactory –The

proposed contract time extension
recommended by Consultant is
disapproved/reduced by more
than 10% by DPWH.
3.3 Consultant’s 30% Extent of Consultant’s 100%: Very Satisfactory – All the
timeliness in compliance with required reports/documents are
submitting prescribed schedule satisfactorily prepared and
required reports to submit project submitted within the prescribed
and documents reports and other schedule
documents, e.g.:
85%: Satisfactory – All the
a. As-staked plans required reports/documents are
b. Progress reports satisfactorily prepared and
c. Request for submitted within 1-2 days behind
Payment of the prescribed schedule
Materials on Hand
d. Material Test 70%: Fair – All the required
results/report reports/documents are
e. Site instructions satisfactorily prepared and
f. Progress billings submitted 3-4 days behind the
g. As-built plans prescribed schedule
h. Recommendations
on VOs and time 50%: Unsatisfactory – All the
extensions required reports/documents are
satisfactorily prepared and
submitted above 5 days behind
the prescribed schedule, and/or
Page 16 of 18
Incomplete submission of
reports/documents
NOTES:
*Phase 2 Evaluation
If the IU and the ConsPES Team find construction defects/deficiencies during the Defects
Liability Period (Phase 2), this criteria shall be used to compute the Phase 2 rating of the CS
Consultant. The same rating in Phase 1 shall be applied for other criteria.
**Major Construction Defects:
General:
– Structural failure due to faulty construction.
– Inappropriate size and type of materials used for critical components of structures vs.
plans and specifications.1
– Inappropriate dimension of structures, such as insufficient thickness, width and/or
depth.1
– Inadequate concrete strength based on coring.1
1
Not included in Phase 2 evaluation
Roads and Bridges:

– Pavement or base failure, major cracks due to insufficient compaction, inadequate
concrete mix, especially on structural and load bearing components (e.g., girders,
columns, piles).
– Major scaling and faulting in PCCP.
– Asphalt raveling, shoving and corrugation.
– Scouring on bridge abutment.
– Erosion of earth materials from the top due to non-compliance with cut slope
requirement.
– Settlement of bridge approaches
a. Clearing and Grubbing
- No/insufficient clearing and grubbing done within the limits of the project
- Damage to structure designated to remain
- Improper disposal of materials/debris from the clearing and grubbing operations
- Insufficient provision of the required equipment for clearing and grubbing as per
POW
- Undisposed materials from excavation
b. Embankment
- Eroded/scoured embankment materials
- Embankment materials not spread and compacted in layers
- Deficient width/length/thickness of embankment
- Loosed/uncompacted in-placed embankment
- Presence of oversized aggregates/rubberized materials on the in-placed selected
borrow for topping
c. Subgrade Preparation
- Eroded/scoured subgrade
- Insufficient compaction on subgrade preparation
- Insufficient cut below subgrade level
- No/insufficient vertical control during subgrade preparation
- Insufficient provision of the required equipment for subgrade preparation as per
POW
Page 17 of 18
d. Aggregate Subbase Course
- Compaction of prepared aggregate subbase not done to full width
- Eroded/scoured/damaged aggregate subbase course shoulder
- Incorrect slope of aggregate subbase course shoulder
- Unsuitable aggregate subbase course material on the stockpile
- Deficient width/thickness of aggregate subbase course
- Irregular/uneven surface of aggregate subbase course materials
e. Aggregate Base Course
- Compaction of prepared aggregate base not done to full width
- Eroded/scoured/damaged aggregate base course shoulder
- Incorrect slope of aggregate base course shoulder
- Insufficient compaction of aggregate base course materials
- Oversized aggregates on the in-placed aggregate base course
- Deficient width/thickness of aggregate base course
- Irregular/uneven surface of aggregate base course materials
f. Pavement
- Chipped-off edges on the completed concrete pavement
- Concrete beam samples not meeting the minimum flexural strength requirements
- Concrete mix containing too much water, based on visual inspection and slump
test
- Concrete vibrator not being used during pouring of concrete
- Honeycombs on the exposed side of the concrete pavement
- Insufficient number of dowel bars in the on-going construction of the concrete
pavement
- Undersized dowel bars noted in the on-going concrete pavement which does not
conform as per approved plan
- Incorrect spacing of dowel bars in the on-going concrete pavement
Flood Control:
– Any/all deviation(s) determined to be beyond the tolerance set and prescribed in the
monitoring/control matrix of the Manual on Construction Supervision of Flood Control
Projects, shall be considered as major construction defects.
– Hairline cracks/ surface defects
– Stagnant water (for drainage)
– Erosion of soil materials (earthworks)
– Non-provision of mortar collar for pipes
– Scouring of riprap
– Non-compliance with standard requirements for the type/class of boulders (for dikes)
– Insufficient mortar for grouted riprap
– Severe cracks and settlement of structures
– Difficulty of opening and closing the gate, due to structural strain and deformation
– Non-compliance to designed slope
– Major cracks and failure of concrete structure like reinforced concrete canals, box
culverts and revetment due to inadequate design mix, insufficient compaction of
foundation (e.g. flood occurrence with magnitude below the designed flood level)
– Incurred damages to, and or failure of structure, due to fortuitous events (e.g.: flood
occurrence with a magnitude below the designed safety level) is considered major
construction defects.1
1
Not included in Phase 2 evaluation
Buildings and Other Infrastructure:

– Major cracks especially on structural and load bearing components (e.g., girders,
columns, piles).
Page 18 of 18
– Other major construction defects, as may be added by BOC and IO, depending on the
project.
Defects not stated above are considered minor construction defects.
***Major CS System Deficiencies:
a. Organization of key personnel

– Mismatch of personnel assigned to supervise the project vs. requirements.
 Lack of experience
 Frequent absence from project site.
b. Control of Work (Inspection and site instructions)

– Inadequate logistical resources for supervision (e.g., lack of testing equipment and
service vehicles).
– Poor construction records keeping, e.g., test results, defects noted and corrected.
– Failure to issue or enforce site instructions
– Laxity in enforcing health, safety, environmental requirements, and traffic
management.
c. Control of Quality of Materials (Sampling and testing)

 No accreditation
– Inadequate logistical resources for testing of materials (e.g., lack of testing
equipment and service vehicles).
d. Documentation [Reporting and records management (e.g., log book, test results, site
instructions, progress reports, etc.)]
– Frequent absence from project site.
e. Other Management Consideration

 Construction Safety Management
 Traffic Management
 Environmental Management
– Inefficiency of personnel assigned to supervise the project vs. requirements.

– Inadequate logistical resources for supervision (e.g., lack of testing equipment and
service vehicles).
– Laxity in enforcing health, safety, environmental requirements, and traffic
management.
– Other major CS system deficiencies, as may be added by BOC and IO, depending on
the project.
CS system deficiencies not stated above are considered minor CS system deficiencies.
ANNEX B
SUMMARY OF FINDINGS
CONSULTANT’S PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SYSTEM
PROJECT TYPE: Feasiblity Study (FS)
NAME OF PROJECT:
CONSULTANT/S:
DATE DATE FINDINGS BY THE SPECIALIZED OFFICE

RECEIVED BY RETURNED BY
NO. DELIVERABLES THE THE MAJOR ERROR / MINOR ERROR / REMARKS / STATUS
SPECIALIZED SPECIALIZED INACCURACIES / INACCURACIES /
OFFICE OFFICE DEFICIENCIES DEFICIENCIES
A. REPORTS
1 Inception Report
Inception Report No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
2. 2.
2 Capacity Improvement Study
Report
Capacity Improvement Study 1. 1.
Report No. __ 2. 2.
Capacity Improvement Study 1. 1.
Report No. __ 2. 2.
3 Traffic Survey and Analysis
Report
Traffic Survey and Analysis Report 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
Traffic Survey and Analysis Report 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
Summary of Findings (FS)
Page 2 of 5
DATE
DATE RECEIVED FINDINGS BY THE SPECIALIZED OFFICE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
NO. DELIVERABLES THE MAJOR ERROR / MINOR ERROR / REMARKS / STATUS
SPECIALIZED
SPECIALIZED INACCURACIES / INACCURACIES /
OFFICE
OFFICE DEFICIENCIES DEFICIENCIES
4 Topographic Survey Report
Topographic Survey Report No. 1. 1.

__ 2. 2.
Topographic Survey Report No. 1. 1.
__ 2. 2.
5 Geotechnical and Geological
Survey Report
Geotechnical and Geological 1. 1.
Survey Report No. __ 2. 2.
Geotechnical and Geological 1. 1.
Survey Report No. __ 2. 2.
6 Hydrological Survey Report
Hydrological Survey Report No. 1. 1.

__ 2. 2.
Hydrological Survey Report No. 1. 1.
__ 2. 2.
7 Utilities Survey Report
Utilities Survey Report 1. 1.

No. __ 2. 2.
Utilities Survey Report 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
8 Parcellary Survey Report
Parcellary Survey Report No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Page 3 of 5
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
Parcellary Survey Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
9 Highway Design Report
Highway Design Report No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Highway Design Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
10 Bridge Design Report
Bridge Design Report 1. 1.

No. __ 2. 2.
Bridge Design Report 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
11 Drainage Design Report
Drainage Design Report No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Drainage Design Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
12 Cost Estimate
Cost Estimate No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Cost Estimate No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
Page 4 of 5
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
13 Implementation Plan
Implementation Plan 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
Implementation Plan 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
14 Environmental and Social
Impact Assessment
Environmental and Social Impact
1. 1.
Assessment
2. 2.
No. __
Environmental and Social Impact
1. 1.
Assessment
2. 2.
No. __
15 Resettlement Action Plan
(RAP)
Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) 1. 1.
No. __ 2. 2.
16 Gender and Development
(GAD) Plan No. __
Gender and Development (GAD) 1. 1.
Plan No. __ 2. 2.
Gender and Development (GAD) 1. 1.
Plan No. __ 2. 2.
17 Interim Report
Interim Report No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Page 5 of 5
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
Interim Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
18 Draft Final Report
Draft Final Report No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Draft Final Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
19 Final Report
Final Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
Final Report No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
20 Drawing Volume
Drawing Volume No. __ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Drawing Volume No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
21 Appendices
Appendices No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
Appendices No. __ 1. 1.
2. 2.
22 Other Ancillary Works
Prepared by: Approved by:
(Name) (Name)
Division Chief Director, (Specialized Office)
ANNEX B
SUMMARY OF FINDINGS
PROJECT TYPE: Detailed Engineering Design (DED)
NAME OF PROJECT:
CONSULTANT/S:
DATE DATE FINDINGS BY THE SPECIALIZED OFFICE

RECEIVED BY RETURNED BY
NO. DELIVERABLES THE THE MAJOR ERROR / MINOR ERROR / REMARKS / STATUS
SPECIALIZED SPECIALIZED INACCURACIES / INACCURACIES /
OFFICE OFFICE DEFICIENCIES DEFICIENCIES
A. REPORTS
A.1 Inception Report

2. 2.
2. 2.
A.2 Value Engineering Report
Value Engineering Report No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Value Engineering Report No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
A.3 Road Safety Audit Report
(Preliminary)
Road Safety Audit Report 1. 1.
(Preliminary) No.___ 2. 2.
Road Safety Audit Report 1. 1.
(Preliminary) No.___ 2. 2.
Summary of Findings (DED)
Page 2 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
A.4 Road Safety Audit Report
(Final)
Road Safety Audit Report (Final) 1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
Road Safety Audit Report (Final) 1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
A.5 Geotechnical Investigation
Report
Geotechnical Investigation Report 1. 1.
No___ 2. 2.
Geotechnical Investigation Report 1. 1.
No___ 2. 2.
A.6 Preliminary Draft of Tender
Documents
Preliminary Draft of Tender 1. 1.
Documents No.___ 2. 2.
Preliminary Draft of Tender 1. 1.
Documents No.___ 2. 2.
A.7 Tender Documents (Final
Form)
Tender Documents (Final Form) 1. 1.

No.___ 2. 2.
Tender Documents (Final Form) 1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
A.8 Monthly Progress Report
Monthly Progress Report No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Page 3 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
Monthly Progress Report No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
A.9 Resettlement Action Plan
Report (Final Report)
Resettlement Action Plan Report 1. 1.
(Final Report) No.___ 2. 2.
Resettlement Action Plan Report 1. 1.
(Final Report) No.___ 2. 2.
A.10 Utility Relocation Plans
Utility Relocation Plans No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Utility Relocation Plans No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
A.11 Other Ancillary Works
B. Design
B.1 Hydrologic / Hydraulic

Design Report
Hydrologic / Hydraulic Design

1. 1.
Report No.___ 2. 2.
Hydrologic / Hydraulic Design
1. 1.
Report No.___ 2. 2.
Page 4 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
B.2 Highway/Geometric Design
and Calculation Report
Highway/Geometric Design and

1. 1.
Calculation Report No.___ 2. 2.
Highway/Geometric Design and
1. 1.
B.3 Study of Traffic Impact
during Construction
Study of Traffic Impact during

1. 1.
Construction No.___ 2. 2.
Study of Traffic Impact during
1. 1.
Construction No.___ 2. 2.
B.4 Quantity Calculations and
Price Analysis
Quantity Calculations and Price

1. 1.
Analysis No.___ 2. 2.
Quantity Calculations and Price
1. 1.
Analysis No.___ 2. 2.
B.5 Pavement Evaluation and
Design Calculation Report
Page 5 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
Pavement Evaluation and Design
1. 1.
Pavement Evaluation and Design
1. 1.
B.6 Bridge Evaluation and Design
Report
Bridge Evaluation and Design

1. 1.
Report No.___ 2. 2.
Bridge Evaluation and Design
1. 1.
Report No.___ 2. 2.
B.7 Structural Analyses and
Design Calculation
Structural Analyses and Design

1. 1.
Calculation No.___ 2. 2.
Structural Analyses and Design
1. 1.
Calculation No.___ 2. 2.
B.8 Cost Estimate
Cost Estimate No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Cost Estimate No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
B.9 Draft Final Design Report
Page 6 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
Draft Final Design Report
1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
Draft Final Design Report
1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
B.10 Final Design Report
Final Design Report No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Final Design Report No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
B.11 Other Ancillary Works
C. Drawings
C.1 Detailed Preliminary

Concept Design
Detailed Preliminary Concept

1. 1.
Design No.___ 2. 2.
Detailed Preliminary Concept
1. 1.
Design No.___ 2. 2.
C.2 Topographic Plans
Topographic Plans No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Topographic Plans No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
Page 7 of 7
DATE
RETURNED BY
BY THE
SPECIALIZED
OFFICE
C.3 Draft Final Design Drawings
Draft Final Design Drawings

1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
Draft Final Design Drawings
1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
C.4 Final Design Drawings
Final Design Drawings No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Final Design Drawings No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
C.5 Right-of-Way Plans
Right-of-Way Plans No.___ 1. 1.

2. 2.
Right-of-Way Plans No.___ 1. 1.
2. 2.
C.6 Parcellary and Subdivision
Plans
Parcellary and Subdivision Plans

1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
Parcellary and Subdivision Plans
1. 1.
No.___ 2. 2.
Prepared by: Approved by:
(Name) (Name)
Division Chief Director, (Specialized Office)
ANNEX C
INTERMEDIATE EVALUATION REPORT (IER) No. _____

I. Contract / Project Data
Contract No.: Project No.:
Project Type.: Feasibility Study (FS)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Telephone No.: Fax No.:
Project Manager:
Telephone No.: Email Address:
Contract Award Amount: Date of Award:
Project Cost: Completion Date:
Evaluation Rating:
Intermediate Evaluation Report for FS
Page 2 of 4
II. Performance Evaluation Summary
1. QUALITY – 50
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent and Impact of Errors/ Inaccuracies/ Number of

1.1 Adequacy and Accuracy of FS Deficiencies in FS data, analyses and outputs Resubmissions of
Assumptions, Data, Analyses and based on DPWH Review and Validation Corrected FS
Outputs vs. Terms of Reference
(TOR) covering the following: TOTAL Equivalent
RATING Quantity RATING
MAJOR ERRORS
A. [Name of deliverable]
B. [Name of deliverable]
C. [Name of deliverable]
Average Rating for Errors
Average Rating for Resubmissions
Rating = (Ave. Rating for Errors + Ave. Rating for Resubmissions) ÷ 2
Rating x 40%
Comments: (Please note any specific information in determining performance level)
Extent of DPWH Comments on Consultant's Number of Revisions

Evaluation of Alternatives Made
1.2 Cost-Effectiveness of FS Total No. of Adverse

recommendation, including PED Comments
Rating x 40%
Incidence of Replacement of Key Personnel (Weighted According to

their Roles) With or Without Valid Reasons
1.3 Tenure of Consultant's Key

Personnel Number of REPLACEMENT RATING
Rating x 20%
Rating (QUALITY) = Item 1.1(40%) + Item 1.2(40%) + Item 1.3(20%)

TOTAL SCORE FOR QUALITY = Rating(QUALITY) x 0.50
Page 3 of 4
2. COST OF OUTPUT – 20
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent of coverage of FS/PED cost elements: materials, labor,
equipment, indirect costs (cost of money, insurance, contingencies,
taxes, etc.), ROW, etc., as reflected in the TOR (See DO 197, series of
2016 for factors. Level of accuracy is ± 20%).
2.1 Completeness of FS/PED Cost
Estimates vs Terms of Reference
Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATING
(TOR) cost items/requirements
Rating x 40%
Extent of variance of FS/PED cost estimates vs. accepted DPWH/

industry/ benchmarks/ standards (e.g., cost per km of road, cost/lineal
meter of bridge, cost/sq. m of bldg.) and vs. required +/-20% accuracy
- adjusted for special characteristics.
2.2 Comparison of FS/PED Cost
Estimates with Accepted
Benchmarks Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATING
Rating x 60%
Rating (COST OF OUTPUT) = Item 2.1(40%) + Item 2.2(60%)
TOTAL SCORE FOR COST = Rating(COST OF OUTPUT) x 0.20
3. SCHEDULE – 30
Extent of Actual Time Slippage (Delay) vs. Original/Approved Schedule

3.1 Adherence to Schedule of Accepted
for FS Deliverables, due to Consultant's fault
FS
Deliverables
Date of
Date of Submission Percentage(%) of
Submission RATING
(Indicated in TOR) SLIPPAGE
(Consultant)
Rating
Rating (SCHEDULE)
TOTAL SCORE FOR SCHEDULE = Rating(SCHEDULE) x 0.30
Evaluation Rating = QUALITY(50%) + COST(20%) + SCHEDULE(30%)

Page 4 of 4
III. Recommendations
Evaluated by:
Designation Designation
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
ANNEX C

Project Type.: Detailed Engineering Design (DED)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Project Manager:
Evaluation Rating:
Intermediate Evaluation Report for DED
Page 2 of 4
1. QUALITY – 60
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent and impact of errors/

inaccuracies/ deficiencies in DED
Number of Resubmissions of
1.1 Adequacy and accuracy of DED surveys and plans, analyses, and
Corrected DED
surveys and plans, analyses, and outputs, based on DPWH review and
outputs vs. Terms of Reference validation
(TOR) covering the following:
TOTAL Equivalent
RATINGS Quantity RATINGS
MAJOR ERRORS
Rating x 60%
Extent of DPWH Comments on

Consultant's Evaluation of Alternatives,
based on Value Engineering (VE) and
Number of Revisions Made
Other Relevant Criteria Leading to
Recommended Most Cost-Effective
1.2 Cost-Effectiveness of DED Scheme
Deficiency RATINGS Quantity RATINGS
Rating x 20%


Personnel Number of REPLACEMENT RATINGS
Rating x 20%

Page 3 of 4
CRITERIA INDICATOR
2.1 Completeness of DED Cost Extent of coverage of DED cost elements: materials, labor, equipment,
Estimates in the DUPA vs TOR indirect costs (cost of money, insurance, bonds, contingencies, profit,
cost items/ requirements taxes, etc.), ROW, etc. as reflected in the TOR (See DO 197, series of
2016, for factors).
Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATINGS
Rating x 40%
Extent of Variance of DED Cost Estimates vs DPWH Industry

Benchmarks/Standards (e.g., cost/km of road, cost/lineal meter of
bridge, cost/sq meter of bldg.) and vs. Required (+/-)5-10% Accuracy
2.2 Comparison of DED Cost Adjusted for Special Characteristics
Benchmarks Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATINGS
Rating x 60%
3. SCHEDULE – 20

for DED Deliverables, due to Consultant's fault
3.1 Adherence to Schedule of
Accepted DED Deliverables
Date of
Date of
Submission Percentage(%)
Submission RATINGS
(Indicated in of SLIPPAGE
(Consultant)
ToR)
Rating
Rating (SCHEDULE)

Page 4 of 4
Evaluated by:
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
ANNEX C

Project Type.: Construction Supervision (CS)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Project Manager:
Evaluation Rating:
Intermediate Evaluation Report for CS
Page 2 of 4
1. QUALITY – 60
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Incidence of construction defects/ deficiencies stated in the Statement

of Works Accomplished (SWA) recommended by Consultant for
1.1 Consultant's Efficiency in payment, but found by DPWH to be not in accordance with the
Ensuring Contractor's Compliance approved plans and specifications.
of it's Construction Work with the
Deficiency Ratings
Approved DED, Particularly Plans
and Specification
Rating x 50%
Incidence of Deficiencies in the Consultant's CS System covering the

Five(5) Criteria
1.2 Quality of Consultant's
Construction Supervision (CS) No of Deficiencies Ratings
System
A. Organization of Key Personnel
B. Control of Quality of Workmanship
C. Control of Quality of Materials
D. Documentation
E. Other Management Considerations
Rating x 40%


Rating x 10%

Page 3 of 4
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Incidence of variation orders (VOs) with cost overruns, recommended by
Consultant, but disapproved/reduced by DPWH, except VOs initiated
itself by DPWH and VOs initiated due to fortuitous events.
2.1 Consultant’s Efficiency in
Controlling Cost Overruns Variation Order
RATINGS
TOTAL VARIANCE
Rating x 100%
Rating (COST OF OUTPUT) = Item 2.1(100%)
3. SCHEDULE – 20
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent of slippage of planned accomplishment vs. actual

accomplishment.
Ensuring Contractor’s
Adherence to Approved
Construction Schedule. Date of PLANNED Date of ACTUAL Percentage(%)
RATINGS
Accomplisment Accomplisment of SLIPPAGE
Contractor's Activity Under the

Auspices of CS Consultant
A. [Activity A]
B. [Activity B]
C. [Activity C]
Rating x 40%
Incidence of contract time extensions recommended by Consultant but

disapproved/reduced by DPWH – except time extensions for VOs due to
faulty DED, due to fortuitous events or for VOs initiated by DPWH.
3.2 Consultant's Prudent Evaluation
of Proposed Contract Time No. of Proposed Contract Time Extension
Extensions Recommended by Consultant but RATINGS
DISAPPROVED/REDUCED by DPWH
Rating x 30%
Page 4 of 4
Extent of Consultant’s compliance with prescribed schedule to submit

project reports and other documents
3.3 Consultant’s Timeliness in
Submitting Required Reports DATE OF
CONSULTANT
and Documents SUBMISSION SLIPPAGE in No.
ACTUAL DATE OF RATINGS
(Required by of Days
SUBMISSION
DPWH)
Deliverables
A. [Activity A]
B. [Activity B]
C. [Activity C]
Rating x 30%
Rating (SCHEDULE) = Item 3.1(30%) + Item 3.2(40%) + Item 3.3(30%)

Evaluated by:
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
ANNEX D
FINAL EVALUATION REPORT (FER) - Phase ____

Project Type.: Feasibility Study (FS)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Project Manager:
Evaluation Rating:
Final Evaluation Report for FS
Page 2 of 4
1. QUALITY – 50
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent and Impact of Errors/ Inaccuracies/ Number of

1.1 Adequacy and Accuracy of FS Deficiencies in FS data, analyses and outputs Resubmissions of
Assumptions, Data, Analyses and based on DPWH Review and Validation Corrected FS
Outputs vs. Terms of Reference
(TOR) covering the following: TOTAL Equivalent
MAJOR ERRORS
Rating x 40%
Extent of DPWH Comments on Consultant's Number of Revisions

Evaluation of Alternatives Made
1.2 Cost-Effectiveness of FS Total No. of Adverse

recommendation, including PED Comments
Rating x 40%


Personnel Number of REPLACEMENT RATING
Rating x 20%

Page 3 of 4
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent of coverage of FS/PED cost elements: materials, labor,
equipment, indirect costs (cost of money, insurance, contingencies,
taxes, etc.), ROW, etc., as reflected in the TOR (See DO 197, series of
2016 for factors. Level of accuracy is ± 20%).
2.1 Completeness of FS/PED Cost
Estimates vs Terms of Reference
Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATING
(TOR) cost items/requirements
Rating x 40%
Extent of variance of FS/PED cost estimates vs. accepted DPWH/

industry/ benchmarks/ standards (e.g., cost per km of road, cost/lineal
meter of bridge, cost/sq. m of bldg.) and vs. required +/-20% accuracy
- adjusted for special characteristics.
2.2 Comparison of FS/PED Cost
Benchmarks Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATING
Rating x 60%
3. SCHEDULE – 30

3.1 Adherence to Schedule of Accepted for FS Deliverables, due to Consultant's fault
FS Deliverables
Date of
Date of Submission Percentage(%) of
Submission RATING
(Indicated in TOR) SLIPPAGE
(Consultant)
Rating
Rating (SCHEDULE)

Page 4 of 4
Evaluated by:
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
Approved by:
Designation
Concurred by:
(Name of Consultant)
Designation
ANNEX D

Project Type.: Detailed Engineering Design (DED)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Project Manager:
Evaluation Rating:
Final Evaluation Report for DED
Page 2 of 4
1. QUALITY – 60
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent and impact of errors/

inaccuracies/ deficiencies in DED
Number of Resubmissions of
1.1 Adequacy and accuracy of DED surveys and plans, analyses, and
Corrected DED
surveys and plans, analyses, and outputs, based on DPWH review and
outputs vs. Terms of Reference validation
(TOR) covering the following:
TOTAL Equivalent
RATINGS Quantity RATINGS
MAJOR ERRORS
Rating x 60%
Extent of DPWH Comments on

Consultant's Evaluation of Alternatives,
based on Value Engineering (VE) and
Number of Revisions Made
Other Relevant Criteria Leading to
Recommended Most Cost-Effective
1.2 Cost-Effectiveness of DED Scheme
Deficiency RATINGS Quantity RATINGS
Rating x 20%


Rating x 20%

Page 3 of 4
CRITERIA INDICATOR
2.1 Completeness of DED Cost Extent of coverage of DED cost elements: materials, labor, equipment,
Estimates in the DUPA vs TOR indirect costs (cost of money, insurance, bonds, contingencies, profit,
cost items/ requirements taxes, etc.), ROW, etc. as reflected in the TOR (See DO 197, series of
2016, for factors).
Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATINGS
Rating x 40%
Extent of Variance of DED Cost Estimates vs DPWH Industry

Benchmarks/Standards (e.g., cost/km of road, cost/lineal meter of
bridge, cost/sq meter of bldg.) and vs. Required (+/-)5-10% Accuracy
2.2 Comparison of DED Cost Adjusted for Special Characteristics
Benchmarks Percentage(%) of VARIANCE RATINGS
Rating x 60%
3. SCHEDULE – 20

for DED Deliverables, due to Consultant's fault
3.1 Adherence to Schedule of
Accepted DED Deliverables
Date of
Date of
Submission Percentage(%)
Submission RATINGS
(Indicated in of SLIPPAGE
(Consultant)
ToR)
Rating
Rating (SCHEDULE)

Page 4 of 4
Evaluated by:
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
Approved by:
Designation
Concurred by:
Designation
ANNEX D

Project Type.: Construction Supervision (CS)
Project Name:
Consultant:
Address:
Project Manager:
Evaluation Rating:
Final Evaluation Report for CS
Page 2 of 4
1. QUALITY – 60
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Incidence of construction defects/ deficiencies stated in the Statement

of Works Accomplished (SWA) recommended by Consultant for
1.1 Consultant's Efficiency in payment, but found by DPWH to be not in accordance with the
Ensuring Contractor's Compliance approved plans and specifications.
of it's Construction Work with the
Deficiency Ratings
Approved DED, Particularly Plans
and Specification
Rating x 50%
Incidence of Deficiencies in the Consultant's CS System covering the

Five(5) Criteria
1.2 Quality of Consultant's
Construction Supervision (CS) No of Deficiencies Ratings
System
A. Organization of Key Personnel
B. Control of Quality of Workmanship
C. Control of Quality of Materials
D. Documentation
E. Other Management Considerations
Rating x 40%


Rating x 10%

Page 3 of 4
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Incidence of variation orders (VOs) with cost overruns, recommended by
Consultant, but disapproved/reduced by DPWH, except VOs initiated
itself by DPWH and VOs initiated due to fortuitous events.
Controlling Cost Overruns Variation Order
RATINGS
TOTAL VARIANCE
Rating x 100%
Rating (COST OF OUTPUT) = Item 2.1(100%)
3. SCHEDULE – 20
CRITERIA INDICATOR
Extent of slippage of planned accomplishment vs. actual

accomplishment.
Ensuring Contractor’s
Adherence to Approved
Construction Schedule. Date of PLANNED Date of ACTUAL Percentage(%)
RATINGS
Accomplishment Accomplishment of SLIPPAGE
Contractor's Activity Under the

Auspices of CS Consultant
A. [Activity A]
B. [Activity B]
C. [Activity C]
Rating x 40%
Incidence of contract time extensions recommended by Consultant but

disapproved/reduced by DPWH – except time extensions for VOs due to
faulty DED, due to fortuitous events or for VOs initiated by DPWH.
3.2 Consultant's Prudent Evaluation
of Proposed Contract Time No. of Proposed Contract Time Extension
Extensions Recommended by Consultant but RATINGS
DISAPPROVED/REDUCED by DPWH
Rating x 30%
Page 4 of 4
Extent of Consultant’s compliance with prescribed schedule to submit

project reports and other documents
3.3 Consultant’s Timeliness in
Submitting Required Reports
and Documents DATE OF
CONSULTANT
SUBMISSION SLIPPAGE in No.
ACTUAL DATE OF RATINGS
(Required by of Days
SUBMISSION
DPWH)
Deliverables
A. [Activity A]
B. [Activity B]
C. [Activity C]
Rating x 30%
Rating (SCHEDULE) = Item 3.1(30%) + Item 3.2(40%) + Item 3.3(30%)

Evaluated by:
Designation
Noted by:
Designation
Approved by:
Designation
Concurred by:
Designation
ANNEX E
Monitoring Control for Construction Supervision of Flood Control Projects
Page 2 of 9
Page 3 of 9
Page 4 of 9
Page 5 of 9
Page 6 of 9
Page 7 of 9
Page 8 of 9
Page 9 of 9
b4lt;. I.?J lll'~
tJt. ~, »;/7

MANILA
2 9 AUG 2017
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification on
) Item 1051 - Railings
No. 106 _
)
)
Series of 20CLJ it·,,- PI
In order to provide specifications for railings which are specified in Department Order No.
OS, Series of 2017 [Revised Standardized Pay Items of Works for Civil Works Construction
for Infrastructure Projects], and also, in line with the mandate of the Department in
providing effective Standard Specifications in the implementation of various infrastructure
projects, the attached DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1051 - Railings is
hereby prescribed, for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
~~
Secretary
--
14.1.2 FET/RGT

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7U01505
Department Order No.1E>r, , Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for ITEM 1051 - RAIUNGS
Page 1of 6
DPWH Standard Specification for ITEM 1051 - RAILINGS
1051.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing, fabricating and installing the railings for buildings and
other similar structures of the material or combination of materials in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with the Plans.
Railings shall be classified as concrete, wooden, masonry, stone, metal, stainless steel and
glass, in accordancewith the predominating material contained in each.
Railing shall not be considered a part of the structural system of the building unless it is stated
in the design.
1051.2.1 Concrete
It shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Section 900.2 Material

Requirements of Item 900, ReinforcedConcrete.
1051.2.2 Forms and Falseworks

Requirements of Item 903, Formworks and Falseworks.
1051.2.3 Lumber, Plywood and Other Related Materials

Requirements of Item 1003, Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1051.2.4 Hardware
This shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Section 1004.2 Material
Requirements of Item 1004, Hardware.
1051.2.5 Masonry
These shall conform to the requirements of Section 1046.2 Material Requirementsof Item 1046,
Masonry Works.
Department Order No.l.!?Y., Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for ITEM 1051- RAIUNGS
Page 2 of 6
1051.2.6 Mortar
Mortar shall consist of sand, cement and water conforming to the requirements of Item 405,
Structural Concrete, mixed in the proportion of one (1) part cement to three (3) parts sand by
volume, and sufficient water to obtain the required consistency.
1051.2.7 Reinforcing Steel
It shall conform to the requirements of Subsection 900.2.4, Metal Reinforcement of Item 900,
Reinforced Concrete.
1051.2.8 Stone
The stone shall be clean, hard, and durable and shall be subjected for the Engineer's approval.
Adobe stone shall not be used unless otherwise specified.
1051.2.9 Metal
Steel base metal to be welded shall be open-hearth or electric furnace steel conforming to
MSHTO M 183 unless otherwise shown on the approved Plans.
1051.2.10 Stainless Steel (Non-Ferrous Metal)
It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 276 M, Standard"Specification for Stainless Steel
Bars and Shapes or as called for in the Plans.
1051.2.11 Glass and Glazing

Requirements of Item 1012, Glass and Glazing.
Glass shall be laminated, heat strengthened, and tempered unless otherwise indicated in the
plans. If laminated glass were called for in the Plans it shall conform to ASTM
Specification C 1048, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT
Coated and Uncoated Glass and ASTM Specification C 1172, Standard Specification for
Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. The minimum thickness of glass shall be six (6) mm unless
otherwise Indicated in the Plans.
If glass is intended for exterior railing in-fill panels, it shall comply to the following:
1. Test shall be in accordance with ASTM E 2353-06, Standard Test Methods for
Performance of Glass in Permanent Glass Railing Systems, Guards & Balustrades. The
said standard evaluates static strength, impact resistance, and post-break retention.
DPWH Standard Specification for ITEM 1051- RAIUNGS
Page 3 of 6
2. Railing systems shall be in accordance to ASTM E 2358-04, Standard Specification for

the Performance of Glass in Permanent Glass Railing Systems, Guards, and Balustrades.
These systems include glazing in-fill, as well as structural glass railing types. The four
(4) levels of performance are shown below.
Performance ASTM E 935 ANSI Z97.1

Level (Structural A) (Safety Impact B)
(Minimum) (Minimum)
1 Concentrated load: 890 N Pass
Uniform Load: 290 N/m 230 J
Infill Horizontal Load: 220 N

Uniform Load: 730 N/m 542J
ATests performed as outlined in ASTM E 935, Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing
Systems and Rails for Buildings.
&rests performed as described in ANSI Z97.1 2015, For safety glazing materials used in buildings - safety
performance specifications and methods of test.
1051.2.12 Aluminum
It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 193, Standard Specification for Cast
Aluminum Alloy Railings Posts, ASTM B 221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and
Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes or ASTM B 308 - Standard
Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles or as called for in the
Plans.
1051.2.13 Painting, Varnishing and Other related works
These shall conform to the applicable requirements prescribed in Section 1032.2, Material
Requirements of Item 1032, Painting, Varnishing and Other Related Works.
1051.3.1 General
Railings shall be constructed in accordance with the Plans and shall not reflect any unevenness
in the structure/ building. All railing posts shall be set plumb unless otherwise indicated in the
Plans.
Department Order No. ~f Series of 2017
Page 4 of 6
1051.3.2 Concrete Railing
Concrete railing shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of Subsection 900.3
Construction Requirements of Item 900, Reinforced Concrete.
1051.3.2.1 Railing Cast-In-Place
Forms shall be secured to be smooth and tight fitting which can be rigidly held in line and grade
and removed without damage to the casted concrete structure.
Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with suitable material to have a
smooth surface which shall meet the approval of the Engineer or as shown in the Plans.
All moldings, panel work and bevel strips shall be constructed according to the detailed Plans
with mitered joints. All corners in the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean cut, and shall
be free from cracks, spalls, honeycombs and other defects.
1051.3.2.2 Precast Railings
Moist tamped mortar precast members shall be removed from the molds as soon as it is
practicable and shall be kept damp for a period of at least ten (10) days. Any member that
shows cracking of soft corners of surfaces shall be rejected.
1051.3.3 Wooden Railing
The construction requirements shall be in conformance, whenever applicable, with Section

1003.3.1 Quality of Materials of Item 1003, Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1051.3.4 Masonry Railing

1003.3.1 Quality of Materials of Item 1003, Carpentry and Joinery Works.
1051.3.5 Stone Railing
The maximum projection of stones beyond the pitch lines shall not be more than 50 mm.
1051.3.6 Metal Railing
The metal railing shall be fabricated in accordance with the dimensions shown on the approved
Plans. In case of welded railings, all exposed joints shall be finished by grinding or filing after
welding to give a neat appearance. Welding may be substituted for rivets or bolts with the
approval of the Engineer.
Department Order No.Il>C,.Series of 2017
Page 5 of 6
1051.3.7 Stainless Steel Railing
The metal railing shall be fabricated in accordance with the dimensions shown on the Plans.
During installation, stainless steel railing shall be free from rust and surface blemish. It shall be
rust free until ten (10) years after completion.
1051.3.8 Glass Railing

1012.3 Construction Requirements of Item 1012, Glass and Glazing
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear meters of specified railing materials
and sizes or by Lump Sum for actually completed and accepted measured from center to center
of end posts as shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.
The accepted quality, measured as prescribed in Section 1051.4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Railing, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing
and placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.

Meter
Lum Sum
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Meter
Department Order No.lPfI Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for ITEM 1051 - RAIUNGS
Page 6 of 6
REFERENCES:
1. ASTM A 276 M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
2. ASTM Specification C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated
and Uncoated Glass
3. ASTM Specification C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass
4. ASTM E 2353 16 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Glazing in Permanent Railing Systems,
Guards, and Balustrades
5. ASTM E 2358-04, Standard Specification for the Performance of Glass in Permanent Glass Railing Systems,
Guards, and Balustrades
6. ASTM E 935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for
Buildings
7. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes
8. ASTM B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles
9. AASHTO M 193 - Standard Specification for Cast Aluminum Alloy Railings Posts
10. ANSI Z97.1-2015 - For safety glazing materials used in buildings - safety performance specifications and
methods of test
11. DPWH Standard Specification for Highways, Bridges and Airports Volume 11,2012 Edition
12. DPWH Standard Specification for Public Works Structures Volume III, (Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood
Control and Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems)
13. Website www.alasswebsite.com.( 30-March-2017 14:00 MT) - Glass Association of North America (GANA)
14. Website www.lta.gov.sg (16-April-2017 11:00 MT) Singapore - Materials and Workmanship Specification
For Architectural Works
MANILA
fO 6 SEP 20111
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification for

) Item 1016 - Waterproofing
No. 110 _
)
)
Series of 20~ fjf.""~'7
standard specification for waterproofing, the attached DPWH Standard Specification for
Item 1016 - Waterproofing is hereby prescribed, for the guidance and compliance of all
concerned.
This specification shall form part of the on-going revision of the DPWH Standard Specifications
for Public Works Structures - Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage
Structure and Water Supply Systems, Volume III, 1995 Edition.
~- ~ ~~'
r----
J
MARKA. VILLAR
Secretary: Departrrent of Public Works and Highways
111111111111111111111111111I111111111
WIN7U01511
14.1.2 FETjRPF
AMENDMENT TO THE DPWH STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR
ITEM 1016 - WATERPROOFING
1016.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all waterproofing materials, labor, tools, equipment and
other facilities in undertaking the proper installation works required as shown on the Plans
and in accordance with this Specification.
1016.2.1 Cement-base Waterproofing
1016.2.1.1 Cement-base Waterproofing Powder Mix
1. Cement-base waterproofing powder mix shall be cement-base, aggregate type, heavy

duty, water-proof coating for reinforced concrete surface and masonry exposed to
water. The aggregates are graded and sized so as to mesh perfectly and are selected
for purity, hardness, strength and are non-metallic. When mixed with other
ingredients, the mix shall be a free flowing, water-proof coatings that possesses
strength durability and density.
2. Additive binders shall be of special formulation of acrylic polymers and modifiers in

liquid form used as additive with cement-base powder mix that improves adhesion and
mechanical properties.
3. Water shall be clean, clear and potable.

I
4. One (1) brand or type of waterproofing material shall be used on the project.
5. Waterproofing materials shall be stored in a weather-tight enclosure to avoid moisture

damage and absorption.
1016.2.1.2 Hydrolithic Waterproofing Mix
1. Hydrolithic waterproofing mix shall be of heavy cement-based coating compatible to

reinforced concrete wall. It must prevent built-up of water vapor which causes
blistering, flaking and peeling of paint films.
2. Material must thoroughly fill and seal pores and voids that it can be used against water
pressure on the interior surface of walls below grade.
1016.2.2 Built-Up and Preformed Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing
Primer shall be of asphalt cold applied, free from water and other foreign matters, and shall
conform to the specifications requirement defined in ASTM D 41, Standard Specification for
Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.
Department Order No. '/0, Series of 2017
Amendment to DPWH Standard Specification on Item 1016 - Waterproofing
Annex Page 2 of 6
BUilt-up membrane shall be made of smoothly woven fibers that are impervious to acid, heat,
dampness, and totting. It should permit complete penetration of asphalt compound or
bituminous coating in the woven glass fiber.
Built-up membrane shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 981M, Standard Guide for
Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing Systems for Building decks.
Preformed membrane shall be self-sealing flexible cold applied bituminous sheets bonded to
0.15 mm thick polyethylene film.
1016.2.2.4 Mopping Materials
It shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D 449M, Standard Specification for Asphalt Used
in Dampproofing and Waterproofing:
1. Type I - A soft, adhesive, "self-healing" asphalt that flows easily under the mop and
is suitable for use below grade under uniformly moderate temperature conditions
both during the process of installation and during service.
2. Type II - A somewhat less susceptible asphalt than Type I, with good adhesive and
"self-healing" properties, suitable for use above grade where it will not be exposed
to temperatures exceeding 50°C.
3. Type III - An asphalt less susceptible to temperature than Type II, with good
adhesive properties, and suitable for use above grade on vertical surfaces exposed
to direct sunlight or temperatures above 50°C
1016.2.3 Liquid Waterproofing

I
Liquid waterproofing alternate material shall be of elastomericor other substances applied in

liquid form and cured to an impervious membrane.
For long-term UV and weather resistance, a high performance synthetic rubber-based

membrane type of liquid waterproofing is highly suggested to be used. For tiled finishes that
is capable of accommodating expected structural movements, a waterborne flexible SBR
waterproof membrane can be used. For waterproofing shower recesses, bathrooms, laundries,
decks, balconies and rooftops, an elastomeric, one part, fiber reinforced, water based
polyurethane membrane can be used
Roof decks, balconies, toilet and bathrooms, gutters, parapet walls and other areas indicated
on the plans to be waterproofed shall first be rendered with cement-based waterproofing
before any type of waterproofing is applied.
1016.3.1 Surface Preparation
Concrete surface to be applied with waterproofing shall be structurally sound, clean and free
of dirt, loose mortar particles, paints, films, oil, protective coats, efflorescence laitance, etc.
All defects shall be properly corrected and carefully formed to provide a smooth surface that
is free of marks and properly cured prior to application works.
Department Order No. .J.LQ Series of 2017
Annex Page 3 of 6
Inside corners where vertical and horizontal structure meet shall be provided with cants
measuring 75 mm by 75 mm or rounded at corners a minimum of 75 mm radius.
1. Concrete slabs shall be properly graded to drain rainwater. Provide a minimum pitch
of 1: 100 to satisfactorily drain rainwater freely into the drainage lines, gutters and
downspouts.
2. Drainage connections and weepholes shall be set to permit the free flow of water.
3. Any expansion and contraction joints shall be cleaned, primed, fitted with a backing
rod and caulked with sealant.
4. Provide reglets of about 40 mm deep by 40 mm wide and 250 mm above floor finish
along walls or parapets for the termination of the membrane.
5. Prepared surfaces shall be cured and kept wet by sprinkling with water at regular
intervals for a period of at least three (3) days and allow surface to actually set within
seven (7) days.
6. Ensure that the prepared surface has completely set and all defects repaired.
7. When there is reasonable doubt as to the presence of moisture in the surface to be

applied with membrane, expose the same direct to sunlight for another two (2) days
or heat all suspected area using blow torch.
1016.3.2 Preformed or Built-up Membrane
1016.3.2.1 Application Procedure I
1. Prior to application of membrane concrete surfaces should be sound and cured

without the use of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to remove
oil dirt and other contaminants.
2. Apply asphalt primer at the rate of 4 liters per 9 square meter evenly by spraying or
by paint brush.
3. Application shall be done in one direction strip and by overlapping each other to
assure uniform thickness.
4. Allow primer to dry until it is ready to receive the next coat or layer as specified in
the manufacturing instructional manual.
5. As soon as primer coating is workable, lay a single layer of preformed or built-up

membrane smoothly free from irregularities and folds.
6. Lay preformed or bUilt-up membrane conforming to the size and shape of the surface
area to be covered.
7. Carefully lay side and end laps in order to assure an even thickness throughout the
whole surface area to be covered.
Department Order No.1l!-- Series of 2017
Annex Page 4 of 6
8. When the whole surface area is completely covered, apply a single coat of asphalt
primer at the rate of 11 to 15 liters per 9 square meters.
9. Meshes of treated woven glass fibers shall not be completely closed or sealed by the
primer coat, but shall sufficiently open to allow successive moppings of the ply
material to seep through.
10. Cover ply not more than the minimum amount of surfacing necessary to prevent
sticking on ply.
11. After application, the surface shall be uniformly smooth, free from irregularities folds
and knots.
12. Repeat the procedure until five (5) plies has been satisfactorily installed or as the
layers required are satisfied as specified in the Plans.
13. Where weather disturbance interrupt the work and exposing the membrane to
moisture, remove the layer exposed to moisture and repeat procedure until
completion of the process.
1016.3.2.2 Protective Coatings
1. Where laying of the built-up or preformed membrane conforms to the number of

plies required as shown on the Plans, lay a mixture or sand mastic in the proportion
of one (1) part asphalt or bituminous material and four (4) parts coarse screened
sand by volume using a steel trowel at an average of three (3) mm thick over the
surface of the membrane.
2. Then at the rate of four (4) liters per nine (9) square meter, apply aluminum heat
reflecting finish thoroughly over the dried sand mastit coating.
1016.3.2.3 Metal Cap Flashing
1. Provide cap flashing, gauge 24 plain G.!. as shown on the Plans.
2. Where cap flashing is connected to pre-formed lock in through-wall, form upper edge
of cap flashing to engage in pre-formed lock. Mallet lock down tight to provide a
spring action against base flashing.
3. At the rate of four (4) liters per 9 square meter, apply aluminum heat reflecting finish
thoroughly over the dried sand mastic coating.
4. Where cap flashing is terminated in raked joints or in prepared masonry or stone

reglet, flashing shall be fastened with wedge every 350 mm and fill reglet on vertical
surfaces, continuous with molten lead.
1016.3.3 Membrane Waterproofing Cement Topping
1. Provide concrete cement topping of at least 50 mm thick on the membrane after five
days where protective coatings has been applied.
2. Concrete cement topping should be class "A" with nine (9) mm pea gravel and
preferably provided with 2-way 6 mm dia. temperature steel bars.
Department Order No. I/0 • Series of 2017
Annex Page 5 of 6
1016.3.4 Liquid Waterproofing as Membrane
Before any coat of liquid waterproofing is applied, concrete cement surface shall conform to
the requirement defined in sub-section 1016.3.1, Surface Preparation.
1016.3.4.1 Application
1. Prior to application of membrane concrete, surfaces should be sound and cured

without the use of curing compound. Apply a coat of concrete neutralizer to removed
oil, dirt and other contaminants.
2. Apply a primer coat of elastomeric coating standard of the manufacturer at the rate
of 1.33 liters per 9.28 square meter over the surface area to be applied.
3. After the primer coat has dried penetrating and sealing the concrete surface areas,
apply twenty-five (25) dry mills of coating at the rate of 4 liters per 100 square meter
for three (3) coatings on the same concrete surface areas coated with liquid
waterproofing.
4. The concrete surface areas coated shall be allowed to dry in twenty-four (24) hours
if relative humidity is above 4.44 Centigrade.
5. Liquid waterproofing membrane may be applied by paint brush, airless spray, notched
trowel, squeegee or roller. Preferably, each coat shall have twenty (20) to twenty-
five (25) mill maximum thickness.
1016.3.4.2 Precaution
1. Liquid waterproofing membrane should not be applied unless the ambient

temperature is 4.44 Centigrade or higher and should not proceed during inclement
weather condition.
2. Extra care shall be observed by persons doing the application works especially those
that have skin sensitiveness must wear gloves while applying the liquid waterproofing.
The liquid water-proofing membrane compound is highly combustible.
1016.3.5 Protection of Membrane Waterproofing Surfaces in General
1. Concrete topping in situation where it is desirable to have a bond between membrane

waterproofing and topped, slab it is recommended that the concrete topping be
placed as the membrane dries, usually 48 hours after final coat is applied.
2. If a bond is not required, the membrane should be protected with asphalt asbestos
board or asphalt felt paper until such time as topping or concrete covering is applied.
Prior to topping or placing of concrete covering, the membrane shall be inspected and
initiate repair work where necessary.
3. Exposed membrane surfaces at concrete gutters and areas not frequently disturbed
may be allowed.
Department Order No. ,,0.
Series of 2017
Annex Page 6 of 6
4. Membrane waterproofing at basement shall be covered and protected by installing
tightly butted asphalt impregnated protection boards with a minimum thickness of 6
mm and preferably 12 mm on horizontal areas.
All projections and pipes must be protected with asbestos cloth approximately 6 mm thick.
Install the bituminous paving with extra care to avoid damage, lift or curl the underlying
protection boards.
This Item shall be measured in square meters for areas actually rendered with membrane
waterproofing and number of packages for integrally waterproofed areas accepted to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1016.4 shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for integral and membrane waterproofing work which price and payment
shall be full compensation for furnishing and applying integral and membrane waterproofing
materials including the use of equipment and tools, labor and incidentals necessary to
complete the work.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
1016 (l)a Waterproofing, Cement-base Square meter

I
1016 (l)b Waterproofing, Liquid Square meter
1016 (2) Built-up and Preformed Membrane Square meter
References:
1. ASTM D 41M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing.
2. ASTM D 449M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and Waterproofing.
3. ASTM C 981M - Design of Built-Up Bituminous Membrane Waterproofing Systems for Building
Decks.
4. http://glueideas.com/content-collection/Radfords-cyclopedia-of-construction-Vol-5-Cement-
Concrete-Machinery/Methods-of-Waterproofing_P5. html
5. https:/Itheconstructor .org/concrete/types-waterproofing-methods-construction/10856/
6. Bituthene 6000, product brochure
MANILA
a 6 SEP 2Dl1
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Amendments to DPWH Standard
Specification for Item 1603 -
NO. 111 l
)
Installation of Valves
Series of 201tj ","1.11
implementation of various infrastructure projects. As such, there is a need to set an
upgraded standard specification for water supply and plumbing devices for regulating and
controlling the flow and pressure of fluids. The attached amendment to DPWH Standard
Specification for Installation of Valves, Item 1603 (henceforth renamed as "Valves'?
is hereby prescribed, for the gUidanceand compliance of all concerned.
This specification shall form part of the revised 1995 edition of the DPWH Standard
Specifications for Public Work Structures (Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and
Drainage Structure and Water Supply Systems), Volume III, 1995 Edition.
~~--
f
MARK A,'VILLAR
Secretary .
14.1.2 FET/RGT

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7U01510
ITEM 1603 -VALVES
1603.1 Description
This Item shall consist the furnishing and installation of valves required as shown on the
Plans/Drawings and in accordancewith this Specification.
Bronze/Brass gate, globe and check valves which are corrosion resistant shall conform to
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) MSS SP-42
Specification for Corrosion Resistant Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves with Flanged Butt
Weld Ends. Valve stems shall be copper silicon alloy conforming to American Society of
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ASTM B98M Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar
and Shapes. All valves shall be full line size. And valves with 50 mm or smaller sizes shall be
threaded and have brass bodies, while valves larger than 50 mm shall be cast iron or brass
bodies.
1603.2.1 Gate Valve
Gate valves with sizes 50 mm or smaller shall be bronze material with screwed-in bonnet,
non-rising stem, solid wedge disc and threaded ends pressure rating PN20. And for valves
with sizes larger than 50 mm, it shall be Iron Body Bronze Mounted (IBBM) valves, cast iron
body bronze trim valves, with bolted bonnet, non-rising stem, solid wedge disc, flanged
ends, and renewable seat rings. Each gate valve shall be a full-way type with working parts
of non-corrosive material. J
1603.2.2 Globe Valve
Composition of globe valves shall be bolted bonnets, gUided faced disc, outside screw and
yoke, and flanged ends. For valves sizes 50 mm or smaller it shall be brass material and for
51 mm or larger it shall be cast-iron or brass subject as what is shown on the approved
Plans.
1603.2.3 Double Regulating Valve
Double regulating valve with sizes 50 mm or smaller shall be bronze material. For sizes 51
mm or larger, the valve shall be cast iron material. Valve shall be fitted with Ethylene
Propylene Diene Monomer Rubber (EPDM) coated regulating disk, double regulating device
and indicator, flanged in accordance with British Standards (BS) 4504 PN16 Flanged
Dimensions. For inside screw, non-rising copper alloy stem with back seating feature shall
be used.
1603.2.4 Check Valve
For double door type check valves, it shall have cast iron body, aluminum bronze or
stainless steel disc, stainless steel spring and hinge pin, and butyl rubber sheet. For wafer
style type check valves, it shall also have cast iron or semi-steel body, bronze disc, stainless
steel spring, and butyl rubber sheet.
Department Order No.l!.L, Series of 2017
DPWHStandard Specification for
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 2 of 7
1603.2.5 Butterfly Valve
Composition of butterfly valve shall be cast iron or ductile iron for the body while bronze,
aluminum-bronze or stainless steel for the disc. It will be Type 416 Stainless Steel for the
stem and Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer ClassRubber (EPDM)for the seat.
1603.2.6 Pressure Reducing Valve
For domestic water lines applications, pressure reducing valves shall be bronze material. For
Fire Protection Systems, pressure reducing valves are separated in two (2) categories.
Valves with 50 mm or smaller sizes shall be made of bronze while valves larger than 50 mm
shall be cast iron material. For pressure reducing valve used as temperature and relief valve,
either cast-iron or bronze material shall be used.
1603.2.7 Ball Valve
Ball valve sizes 50 mm or smaller shall have bronze or brass body, chromium plated or
stainless steel ball, steel handle with vinyl grip, and replaceable teflon seats. For sizes 51
mm or larger, valves shall have steel body, chrome or nickel plated steel or stainless steel
ball, replaceable teflon seats, steel stem and handle. Each ball valve shall be a full-way type
with working parts of non-corrosive material.
1603.2.8 Float Valve
The valve shall have '0' ring piston seals and resilient seated disk with dezincification
resistant bronze fabricated approved solder and shall be hydraulically tested to ensure
buoyancy and constructed in accordance with 8S 1968 Specification for Floats for 8all
Valves. Floats for valve sizes 80 mm and above shall be made of copper.
1603.2.9 Automatic Air Valve
The body of automatic air valve shall be bronze material including the accessories
complimentary to the valve subject on what is shown on the approved Plans.
1603.3 Construction ReqUirements
Valves shall be installed as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. All valves shall
be newly manufactured and provided with a position indicator. Flanged valves may be raised
or plain faced with serrated gaSket surface. When operating out of a buried valve which is
located more than 1.50 meters below the ground surface, extension shall be installed in the
valve box. The bottom of the extension shall be securely fastened to the operating nut of
the valve and the top of the extension shall be centered in the valve box. All valves 100 mm
and larger mounted in excess of 2.15 m above the floor in mechanical rooms shall be
equipped with chain operators, extend chains to within 2 m of floor. Arrows are used to
indicate direction of flow on check, globe, non-return, and eccentric plug valves. A control
valve shall be installed immediately ahead of each water supplied appliance and immediately
ahead of each slip joint or non-metallic fixture supply or appliance supply. All required
shutoff or control valves shall be accessible, a single control valve shall be installed on a
water supply line ahead of any automatic metering valve which supplies a battery of
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 3 of 7
fixtures. All materials shall conform to the applicable requirements of the American Society
of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS), and British
Standards (BS) for valve installation as per approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.1 Gate Valve
Furnished gate valves 300 mm and smaller shall be designed for minimum nominal pressure
PN16 non-shock water and gas working pressure or PN20 as specified. Valves 350 mm to
610 mm shall be designed to a minimum pressure PN10. All valves shall be in accordance
with ASME 81634 Standard for Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End No gate
valve shall be installed without the approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.2 Globe Valve
Globe valves shall be designed for minimum nominal pressure PN20 non-shock water. Globe
valve sizes 50 mm or smaller shall also be designed for gas working pressure. Valves shall
have union bonnets, integral seats, and renewable teflon discs. Valves shall remit disc and
bonnet replacement without removing valves from piping. For sizes 51 mm or larger, valves
shall be designed for nominal pressure PN16 water and gas working pressure. Discs and
seats shall be renewable without removing valves from line. All valves shall be in accordance
with ASME 816.34 Standard for Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End No globe
valve shall be installed without the approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.3 Double Regulating Valve I
Double regulating valve sizes 50 mm or smaller shall be designed for a nominal pressure
PN20. It shall be composed of parabOliC and slotted disk double regulating device, screwed
bonnet, rising stem, hand wheel operated with micrometer style indicator. Double regulating
valve with sizes 51 mm or larger shall be designed for a minimum pressure of PN16. All
valves shall be in accordance with ASME 816.34 Standard for Valves - Flanged, Threaded,
and Welding End No double regulating valve shall be installed without the approval of the
Engineer.
1603.3.4 Check Valve
For water and gas application sizes 50 mm or smaller, check valves shall be designed for
minimum nominal pressure PN20 non-shock water and gas working pressures. Valves shall
have renewable discs, side plugs and re-grindable integral seats. Discs shall be renewable
and seats shall be re-grindable without removing the valves from the line. For valves used
for water application, sizes 51 mm or larger shall be silent type, spring loaded of the double
door or wafer style. Valves shall be designed for minimum nominal pressure PN16 non-shock
water working pressure. All valves shall be in accordance with ASME 816.34 Standard for
Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End. No check valve shall be installed without the
Department Order No.l1L Series of 2017
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 4 of 7
1603.3.5 Butterfly Valve
Butterfly valves shall be designed for minimum nominal pressure PN16 for water service.
Valves shall have extended necks. Operator shall have 10-position lever lock for sizes 50 -
100 mm and totally enclosed and sealed worm gear actuators with 4 arm or wheel handle
for sizes 150 mm and larger. Infinite adjustment and memory stop options shall be included.
Valves shall be bi-directional suitable for drop-tight shut-off at full rated pressure with flow
in either direction. All valves shall be in accordance with ASME816.34 Standard for Valves-
Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End. No butterfly valve shall be installed without the
1603.3.6 Pressure Reducing Valves
1603.3.6.1 Domestic Water Lines
Pressure reducing valves shall be pilot-controlled, hydraulically operated, diaphragm type

with a low by-pass capability. The low-flow by-pass capability shall be achieved by using
balanced direct acting pressure reducing valve as an integral part of the main valve. At very
low flows when the main valve is almost completely closed to prevent the possibility of
cavitation, the direct acting valve shall by-pass the main valve and maintain flow.
The pressure reducing valves shall be suitable for maximum working pressure that exist
within the system and downstream pressure should be site adjustable between 200,000
Pascalto 400,000 Pascal. Refer to the Plansor drawings for the locations at which pressure
reducing valve shall be required. f
1603.3.6.2 Fire Protection Services
When required for installation in the Fire Protection Systems, the Pressure Reducing Valve
shall be direct acting and site adjustable type. The Pressure reducing valve shall be
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed and Factory Manual (FM) approved.
1603.3.6.3 Domestic Water Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
On hot water storage tanks, prOVidean ASME rated thermostatic, self-closing, temperature
and pressure relief valve, located in the relief valve openings of tanks. Valve shall have a
minimum thermal discharge capacity equal to the input capacity of the heater standard
pressure setting of 600 kPa and standard temperature setting of 100 degrees Celcius. Relief
valve pipe is needed to discharge to the floor drain.
1603.3.7 Ball Valve
Ball valves shall be non-blowout stem design. Quarter turn of handle shall fully open or close
the valve. Handle position shall indicate whether valve is open or closed. Handle stops shall
be a permanent integral part of the body. Valves with 50 mm or smaller sizes shall be
standard port, 2-piece construction with screwed ends. Valves shall be designed for
minimum nominal pressure PN25.
Department Order No.l!!...., Series of 2017
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 5 of 7
For sizes 51 mm or larger, valves shall be standard port with flanged ends. Valves shall be
designed for minimum PN16 working pressure. Where required for installation in the fire
protection system, the ball valves shall be FM approved. All valves shall be in accordance
with ASME 816.34 Standard for Valves - Flange4 Threade4 and Welding End No ball valve
shall be installed without the approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.8 Float Valve
Float valves shall be installed as indicated in the drawings to proVide consistent level control
in reserve supply water storage tanks. The valve shall meet the requirements for air gaps
and shall be constructed throughout in approved materials and shall prevent back phoning.
Inlet flow shall be co-axial with the piston movement, to ensure high discharge capacity and
smooth, quiet operation. Bronze equilibrium float valves 80 mm and above shall be flanged
end, flat faced and drilled to suit EN 1092-1 Flange Dimensions for PN16. Bronze equilibrium
float valve up to 50 mm shall be screwed end parallel and shall be provided complete with
back nut. Installation of Float Valve shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation
approved by the Engineer.
1603.3.9 Automatic Air Valve
Automatic air valves shall have a bronze body with bolted cover and a 9 mm top outlet.
They shall each incorporate a suitable float mounted on a stainless steel spindle terminating
in needle valve for closure against a stainless steel seating at the outlet. For low pressure
systems, the valve shall be proVided with a test cock and a brazed float, but for medium and
high pressure systems the float shall be of stainless steel. f
Automatic air valves for low pressure systems shall incorporate an internal ball check valve
at inlet to prevent air entry to the system. Automatic air valves for cold water services shall
be to the approval of the local water authority. No automatic air valve shall be installed
without the approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.10 Preparation and Installation of Valve
Provide valves at each piece of equipment to isolate equipment from its connection system.
Locate valves as necessary to proVide easy isolation and cleaning of strainers. Strainers shall
be installed ahead of all automatic valves and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings.
Provide a ball valve and 1.5 m of rubber hose in the blow off opening of each strainer.
Unions shall be provided adjacent to each screwed type valve and shall be on the outlet side
of the valve.
Properly align piping before installation of valves in an upright position, but if the Operator
installed the piping below the valves it will not be accepted. Install valves as per
recommendation of the manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Install all valves with
the stem in the upright position. Valves may be installed with the stem in the horizontal
position only where space limitations do not allow installation in an upright position or where
large valves are proVided with chain wheel operators. Prior to flushing of piping systems,
place all valves in the full-open position. Flanged valves shall be installed between flanges.
All installation of valve shall be as per approval of the Engineer.
Department Order No. J.1L Series of 2017
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 6 of 7
Unless otherwise specified, after final testing, all valves shall be internally and externally
dried, and internally coated with grease or sealant. And, unless otherwise specified in the
data sheet or purchase order, bronze and stainless steel valve shall not be painted or
coated.
1603.3.11 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Each valve must be provided with factory applied plastic end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe end damage and
eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of valve. Store valves inside and protect from
weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable
waterproof wrapping. Protect all fittings from moisture and dirt by storing inside and enclose
with durable waterproof wrapping.
1603.3.12 Testing
Each valve shall be subjected to Shell, Seat closure, Pressureand Leak Tests to know if the
valves are installed properly and functioning to its designed use. It shall be in accordance
with MSS SP-61 Standard for Pressure Testing of Valves. Necessary changes and
adjustments shall be made to ensure satisfactory operation of the valve or meter in the
system. Mill certificate shall be provided for the quality of the valve. All tests shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
1603.3.13 Guarantee and Service
All equipment, materials and workmanship shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year
from date of acceptance at any time within the period of guarantee and upon notification,
the Contractor shall repair and rectify the deficiencies, including replacement of each Valve.
Repair of casting by welding and/or impregnation is not permitted. Other repair methods
shall receive prior approval of the Engineer.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the installation and the number of valves installed.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 1603.4 Method of Measurement

shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the particular item listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation for
furnishing and placing all materials, including all labor, equipment tools and incidentals as
well as temporary works necessaryto complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Department Order No.l!.L Series of 2017
ITEM 1603 - Valves
Page 7 of 7
1603 (1) Gate Valve Each
1603 (2) Globe Valve Each
1603 (3) Double Regulating Valve Each
1603 (4) Check Valve Each
1603 (5) Butterfly Valve Each
1603 (6) Pressure Reducing Valve Each
1603 (7) Ball Valve Each
1603 (8) Float Valve Each
1603 (9) Automatic Air Valve Each
References:
1) American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASME 816.34 - Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
2) Journal regarding ASME 816.34 - www.valveandsealina.com
3) American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM 898M Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and
Shapes
4) Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry MSS SP-61-2009 Pressure Test of
Valves
5) L&T Valves Catalogue
6) Uniform Plumbing Code 2000
7) 8ritish Standard 8S-5154
8) European Standard EN 1092-1
9) Specifications for General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
lYt'J. /,3 ctI,Aol IT
Republic of the Philippines /t>-l)~ ~~q
Manila
2 8 SEPlOl]
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification for

) Item 1604 - Water Treatment
No, 123 _
)
)
Plant
Series of 20~.i>~1f
In order to provide specification for water treatment plant stated in Department Order No.
OS, Series of 2017 (Revised Standardized Pay Items of Works for Civil Works Construction for
Infrastructure Projects), and in line with the mandate of the Department to provide Standard
Specifications in the implementation of various infrastructure projects, the attached DPWH
Standard Specification for Item 1604 - Water Treatment Plant is hereby prescribed,
for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
This specification shall form part of the ongoing revision of the DPWH Standard Specifications
for Public Works Structures - Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage
. AIUT
ders~cretary
r-In-Chirge
14.1.2 FET/RGT Departrrent of Public Works and Highways

111111111111111I111111111111111111111
WIN7U01517
ITEM 1604 - Water Treatment Plant (WTP)
1604.1 Description
This Item covers the provision and installation of a complete modular/skid-type Water
Treatment Plant (WTP). This shall be capable of treating actual water quality of surface
water source based on the results of water analyses conducted and whose output water
quality shall comply with Philippine National Standards (PNS) for Drinking Water. The entire
treatment system may comprise of, but not limited to, Pre-Filtration Treatment System,
Activated Carbon Filtration, Water Softener System and Ultra-Filtration System or other
approved treatment processes that are applicable to deliver the required water quality for
drinking water.
1604.2.1 Pre - Filtration Treatment System
The Pre-Filtration Treatment System shall be composed of a Fiberglass or Composite Media

Tank, Bronze or Plastic Control Valve (top-mount), PVC Control Valves (front-mount) and
timer motor/controls. The system must use an Activated Filter Media (AFM) from pure green
and brown glass and manufactured under ISO 9001 :2008 quality system. It must exhibit a
self-sterilizing property. It must be compliant with the international standard NSF/ANSI 61
(NSF-61), and must bear a Water Quality Association (WQA) Gold Seal Certification for
Drinking Water System Components.
1604.2.2 Activated Carbon Filtration .J
The Filter Tanks shall be made of Fiber Glass Reinforced Plastic (FRP or GRP) and the
Activated Carbon Filters shall be Certified Food Grade compliant. It shall be equipped with
an automated valve of approved rated capacity based on the actual need and conditions,
flow meter and pressure gauges. Its control system shall be soft start Human Machine
Interface (HMI), Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), and its backwash pump shall have a
rated capacity based on actual design requirements.
1604.2.3 Water Softener System
The Raw Water Pump shall have a rated capacity adequate enough to deliver the required
volume of water. The bag filter shall also have a rated capacity that is consistent with the
requirement of the entire system. The resin shall be certified by the WQA to NSF/ANSI-61
Standard. Its particle range shall be 300 to 1,600 IJm and its specific gravity shall be 1.17.
1604.2.4 Ultra-Filtration System
The ultra-filtration system shall be capable of processing feed water with up to 500 parts per
million (ppm) total suspended solids (TSS) at 25°C and Turbidity of < 15 nephelometric
turbidity unit (NTU). It must be equipped or must have the following features: Hollow-Fiber
or Ceramic Ultra-Filtration (UF) Membranes, Stainless Steel Pumps, Valves, Pressure Gauges,
Corrosion-Resistant Piping, 3-Phase Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC) Motor, Automatic
Backwash System (Hollow-Fiber Only), Filtrate and Concentrate Flowmeters, Total Automatic
Operation with PLC Control, Self-Backwashing Sediment Strainer and Turbidity Meter.
Department Order No. 1Jl.3 , Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1604 - Water Treatment Plant (WTP)
Page 2 of 14
1604.3 Installation Requirements
All components of the water treatment system such as tanks, pumps, valves,
motors/controls and other similar equipment and appurtenances shall be located and so
installed to meet the requirements for sanitary protection of water quality, hydraulics of the
system and protection against interruption of service by fire, flood or any other hazard. In
this case, all equipment shall be elevated at least 16 cm above finished grade and all floors
shall drain in such manner that the quality of the potable water will not be endangered.
Electrical controls shall be located above grade.
Plug-and-play of individual parts shall be done in good workmanship. Installation shall be

watertight.
Supervision by a representative of the manufacturer shall be provided as to the assembly of

all mechanical equipment! appurtenances at the time of installation and initial operation.
1604.4 Water Quality Output Testing Requirements
The water treatment system shall deliver the required water quality based on the standard
parameters set forth in the Philippine National Standards (PNS) for Drinking Water and shall
therefore pass the permissible level of parameters or elements for microbiological, chemical,
physical and radiological quality as shown on the succeeding tables.
The Water Quality Test or Water Analyses shall be conducted duly by a Department of
Health (DOH) Accredited Testing Laboratoryl if not by a World Health Organization (WHO)
Accredited Laboratory, to verify compliance to PNS.
Table 1604.4.1 - Standard Methods of Detection and Values for

Microbiological Quality
Method of I * iI Units of
Parameters Vaue Point of Compliance
Determination i Measurement I
Total coliform Multiple Tube < 1.1 Most Probable Service reservoirs
Fermentation Number Water treatment works
Technique (MTFT) (MPN)100 mL Consumer's Taps
Refilling Stations
Chromogenic Absent i Water Haulers
substrate test I Water Vending Machines
!
(Presence-Absence) * <1.1 MPN/100 mL
Membrane Filter < 1 Total coliform
(MF) i colonies / 100
Technique I mL
Compliance to Total coliform
(a) For water systems analyzing at least 40 Consumer's Taps
samples per month, no more than 5% of the
monthly sample may be positive for total
Page 3 of 14
coliform; I
(b) For water systems analyzing fewer than 40 Consumer's Taps

samples per month, no more than one (1)
sample per month may be positive for total
coliform
At least 95% of standard samples taken in each Service reservoirs
year from each reservoir are total coliform I
negative I
No standard sample taken each month should Water treatment works
exceed maximum allowable value specified in Refilling stations
the above. Water haulers
Water vending machines
Fecal coliform Multiple Tube < 1.1 MPN/ 100 mL Service reservoirs
Fermentation Water treatment works
Technique (MTFT) Consumer's Taps
Refilling Stations
Membrane Filter < 1 Fecal coliform Point Sources (Level
Technique (MFT) colonies / 100 I)
II mL Water Haulers
Chromogenic < 1.1 ! MPN/l00mL !
Water Vending Machines
substrate test * I I
(Presence-Absence) --f---- I I ----~--
Heterotrophic Pour Plate <500 I Coliform FOrmingl Service reservoirs

Plate Count Spread Plate I Units (CFU) / mL I Water treatment works
Membrane Filter I I Consumer's taps nearest
Technique I J:the meter
I I Refilling Station
I
I Water Vending Machines
i
* Should be validated and approved by the Department of Health
Table 1604.4.2 - Standard Values for Inorganic Chemical Constituents with

r
I
·IU~-~--
I Maximum
Health Significance
-~----~------ ---I-----~~--------,
Method ofI
I Constituent I Level Remarks (Sources/Occurrence)
I Analysis I
! (mg/L) i
I Antimony 0.02 Antimony is a contaminant from pipe FAAS; EAAS;

and fitting materials. It is not a raw ICP/MS;
I water contaminant.
I Arsenic 0.05 For existing water supply systems. I ICP/MS; hydride I
I
I
Arsenic may be naturally occurring in I generation AAS; i
,I water sources. Where maximum level of I Silver 11
arsenic is unachievable, concentration I Diethyldithiocarba I'
in water supply must be kept as low as ! mate

I
possible. I Method, EAAS 1
!
IL I (Graphite furnace~
Department Order No. IIW. Series of 2017
Page 4 of 14
I AAS)
i I
I I I
II i
I
I
II
I
LBariUm--+
I
0.7 Barium occurs naturally as trace
elements in both igneous and
ICPjMS; FMS;
EMS, ICP
lI
I
I
Boron ----t--
I
0.5
sedimentary rocks.
Present in surface water due to
discharge of treated sewage effluent,
I ICPjMS;
[
ICPjAES I
I
I which still contains detergents; could be i I
I
I naturally occurring in certain areas. I i
I
I
I
I Maximum level has been elevated from I I
I
I
I
0.3 mgjL (PNSDW 1993) to 0.5 mgjL I I
I
I
(PNSDW 2007) because I I
I
I
I it is difficult to achieve in areas with I :
I I
high natural levels and limited access to I I
I
I treatment technology. I
I
rCadmium I
0.003
-
Cadmium is used in manufacture of ICPjMS; FMS
~
I
I II
steel, plastics and battery and released I
to the environment through wastewater I
I or fumes. Cadmium is released in water I
[
supply as impurity of the zinc coating of I
I i
galvanized pipes and solders and metal i
I
I
I fittings .. f !
Chromium 0.05 Chromium is widely distributed in the FAAS; EAAS, ICP,
(Total) Earth's crust. Occurs in wastewater in ICPjMS
certain industries such as chromium
plating of bumpers, grills and
ornaments.
Cyanide 0.07 Cyanides are occasionally found in Titrimetric;
(Total) drinking water primarily as a Colorimetric;
consequence of industrial Cyanide
contamination. Selective Electrode
Fluoride 1.0 In areas where high natural fluoride Ion
I
levels occur, the maximum level may be chromatography, I
difficult to achieve due to limited access Ion-selective I,
to treatment technology. electrodes; i
SPADNS (a I
i I
i reagent used to I
I
I
I
I
I measure f1ouride) I
i
i
I colorimetric; I
I, i
I I ! comPlexone. __ .1'1,'
l__~ ~ _,~ I Method ~~

Department Order No. I~.J I Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1604 - Water Treabnent Plant (WTP)
Page 5 of 14
Lead 0.01 Lead may be present in water primarily TFAAS; EMS; II
II from plumbing systems containing lead I ICPjMS; Anodic I
I pipes, solder, fittings or the service I Stripping I

I connections to the homes. Although it I Voltammetry; I
I
II
may be found naturally occurring in
certain areas, rarely is it present in
water supply as a result of its
J
I Dithizone I
I
I
l--~---
I Mercury 0.001
dissolution from natural sources.
Mercury is used in industries such as in
---------J
Cold vapor AAS; II
I (Total) the electrolytic production of chlorine, in ICP/MS

I electrical appliances, in dental amalgams i
I and as a raw material for various I
I mercury compounds. Mercury occurs I
! naturally in freshwater and groundwater I I',
i in the inorganic form. Methylation of 1
I I inorganic mercury occurs in freshwater I I

Ii ~ , ~_nd seawater. - I ' --~
Nickel 0.02 Nickel is very toxic and usually occurs in I ICP/MS; EAAS; I
water supply as a result of nickel or ICP; FAAS !
I nickel plated plumbing components.
.
II
I Although nickel could be naturally !
I occurring in certain areas, it is not I
I usually a raw water contaminant. I'
~trate----i 50 Nitrate concentration in groundwater I Cd Reduction '

1 I -------1 and surface water can reach high levels Method; IC;
I I
t Nitrite I 3 as a result of leaching or run-off'from I Capillary . I
I agricultural land or contamination from Ion electrophoresIs
II I
i human or animal wastes. Anaerobic I Colorimetric I
I I conditions may result in the formation I (Diazotization); IC; I
k I ~and persistence of nitrite. I ::~~tction , .•
I Selenium 1 0.01 Selenium occurs naturally in I AAS with hydride !
, groundwater sources. ! generation; I

i I Colorimetric, I
! j Auorometric,
I EAAS, I
L ~_---L-_~ _______'~ ~ ICP, ICPjMS ~
Table 1604.4.3 - Organic Chemical Constituents from Industrial Pollution

(with health significance) ---------,---------------1
Maximum I I
Constituent Level Sources
I Method of I
I Analysis I
(mg/L)
Benzene 0.01 Benzene may be introduced into GC/PID; GC/MS
water by industrial effluents and
atmospheric pollution due to
vehicular emissions.
Department Order No. /,u , Series of 2017
Page 6 of 14
Carbon I 0.004 From industrial discharges, carbon i GC/PID;

Tetrachloride I tetrachloride levels in anaerobic I GC/ELCD; I
1,2-
_ I
I
I
1.0
groundwater may remain elevated for
e-months or even years.
Dichlorobenzenes are widely used in
+i
I
GC/MS
GC/PID;
i
I
I
I
I
Dichlorobenzene I industry and in domestic products I GC/ELCD; I

I
1,4- i 0.30 such as odor-masking agents, 'I GC/MS II
Dichlorobenzene I chemical dyestuffs and pesticides I
.J I
~i,2~-------r 0.03 Used as an intermediate in the - I GC/PID; I
I
Dichloroethane I production of vinyl chloride and other I GC/ELCD; I
I chemicals and as a solvent. I GC/MS II
1,1- I 0.03 Used as monomer in the production I GC/PID;
Dichloroethene I of polyvinylidene chloride co-polymers I GC/ELCD;
II
I and as an intermediate in synthesis of I GC/MS II
I
i other organic chemicals. I
1,2-
I
! 0.05
---
Its presence appears as metabolites I
-
GC/PID; I
Dichloroethene I of other unsaturated halogenated I' GC/ELCD; I
i
I hydrocarbons in wastewater and GC/MS I
I
'I anaerobic groundwater, which may I
I indicate the simultaneous presence of I II
I
I more toxic organochlorine chemicals I I
i
~
Dichloromethane I
I
0.02
such as vinyl chloride.
Dichloromethane or methylene
_
chloride is widely used as a solvent

lI
!
GC/MS I I
I
i for many purposes includin9 coffee I

I decaffeination and paint stripping. I I
!
Di(2-ethylhexyl) 0.008 Used mainly as a plasticizer. I GC/MS I
I i
phthalate ! I !
Edetic Acid 0.6 Maximum value of 0.6 mg/L for EDTA Potentionmetric
(EDTA) as the free acid. stripping
Human exposure to EDTA arises analysis
directly from its use in food additives,
medicines, and personal care and
hygienic products.
Ethylbenzene 0.3 Primary sources are petroleum I
GC/PID; GC/MS
I
industry and use of petroleum i

products.
Nitrilotriacetic 0.2 Used primarily in laundry detergents GC with
acid (NTA) as a replacement for phosphates and nitrogenspecific
in the treatment of boiler water to detector
prevent accumulation of mineral
scale.
Polynuclear 0.0007 Used as coal-tar coating in drinking- GC/MS;
aromatic water distribution pipes reversephase
hydrocarbons HPLC with a
(PAHs) fluorescence
detector
Department Order No. I~ , Series of 2017
Page 7 of 14
i
Styrene I 0.02 Used in the production of plastics and I GC/PID; GC/MS
I . I
I resins I
Tetrachloroethene I 0.04 Used as solvent in dry cleaning I GC with ECD;
; industries and as a metal degreasing II GC/MS
solvent. I
Toluene 0.7 Used in the blending of petrol, as a GCI FID; GC/MS
I solvent and as a raw material in
II
I chemical production. It may penetrate
plastic pipes from contaminated soil.
Trichloroethene 0.07 Used in dry cleaning and metal GCI ECD;
degreasing processes. Trichloroethene GC/MS
in anaerobic groundwater may
degrade to more toxic compounds,
including vinyl chloride.
i
Vinyl chloride 0.0003 Used primarily for production of PVc. GC I ECD; FID ;
Migration of vinyl chloride monomer with MS for
from unplasticized PVC is possible confirmation
source of vinyl chloride in drinking
water. Degradation product of the
chlorinated solvents trichloroethene
and tetrachloroethene in
groundwater.
Xylene I
0.5 Used in blending petrol, as a solvent GC/MS; GCI FID
I
-- t
and as a chemical intermediate.
Table 1604.4.4 - Standard Value for OrgcU1icChemical

--- -
Constituents
,
(Pesticides) --- ---.--
.... _ _--_ _~.. ..
T I I
I Status in I
t Maximum I I
II the Remarks Method of

Constituent Level
I Philippines (Persistence) Analysis
i
I (J,lg/L) iI § !
Aldrin and Dieldrin
I
0.03 I Banned Highly persistent GC with ECD I

I I
(combined) Ii organochlorine
I
------------1
Atrazine 2.0
I
I Registered
I
compounds
Relatively stable in
soil and aquatic
GC/MS
_____ .J
I
I
II
I
I
II environments; half- I
I I
I II life measured in I
I I
I months, but is
II degraded by Ii
I
I !
I phytolysis and
t
I I
I I
I I microbial action in
I
-------1------
Carbofuran I 7.0 Registered
soil
0.007 mg/L is based
------ -
GC with
.. J
I
I
I
I I
I on the nitrogen phospho I
I
I I 1998 amendment to rus detector; i I
I I
the 1993 reverse-phase I
Department Order No. /O/J Seriesof2017 I
Page 8 of 14
, I I
I WHO GV HPLC with
I
I
I
I I fluorescence ,
I II detector
!
i
II II
Chlordane I 0.2 Banned Chlordane is highly GC JECD, GCjMS

I
persistent and has a
high bioaccumulation
potential.
DDT 1.0 I Banned* DDT is highly GC JECD, GCjMS I
II I
persistent.
I I
1,2-Dibromo- 1.0 Banned Highly soluble in GC jECD, GCjMS
3chloropropane I water
i
(DBCP)
2,4- 30.0 Registered 2,4 D is rapidly GCjECD, GCjMS I
I
Dichlorophenoxyac biodegraded in the I
etic acid (2,4-D) environment

I
i
Endrin 0.6 I Banned Endrin is highly GC j ECD, I
i i
I persistent GCjMS !
1,2-Dibromoethane 0.4 Banned Used also in industry GCjMS;
(Ethylene as solvent GCjELCD;
dibromide) WHO GV is GCjPID
provisional value due
to serious limitations
of the critical studies.
PNSDW adapts
•. _f
precautionary
approach.
Heptachlor and 0.03 I Banned Heptachlor is quite GCjMS;jGCjECD I
I
Heptachlor epoxide I persistent in soil
I I
(combined) I where it is i
I
i !
transformed into its
I
epoxide. Heptachlor
I
I
I epoxide is resistant to II
I !
further -----------------
degradation.
Lindane I
2.0
- ------t-----------
Restricted
r-------
GCjMS; GCjEC~~
i
I
J
MCPA [4-(2methyl- I 2.0 Registered Very soluble, highly GCjMS; GCjECD I
I I
4- I
I
mobile and can leach I
Ii
chlorophenoxy)acet I from soil. It has i
ic acid] limited persistence in
I
I
water. !
Pendimethalin 20.0 Registered Fairly immobile and GCjMS i
persistent in- soil i
i
-,---------::----r--------- f-'-------- --.J
Pentachlorophenol I 9.0 Banned WHO GV is GCj ECD, I
I I ,i
(PCP) I I provisional value due GCjFID, GCjMS
to serious limitations I
~
I ____
I
I __________ of the critical studies.
I
I
~---------- - I
Department Order No. I~ , Series bf 2017
Page 9 of 14
Table 1604.4.5 - Standard Values for Physical and Chemical Quality for
Acceptability Aspects
~ Maximumi---- ---------- !
Constituent I LeVelo(rmg/L) II Remarks I, Method of

Analysis
I Characteristic I I
Taste No I The cause of taste must be 'I Sensory
, objectionable
I I determined. Evaluation
I Taste Technique
Odor No The cause of odor must be Sensory
objectionable determined. Evaluation
odor Technique
Apparent 10 Color Units , Decomposition of organic materials Visual
'II
I I such as leaves or woods usually yield Comparison

I
I I coloring substances to water; . Colorimetric
I
True I 5 Color Units i Tannins, humic acid, and humates
Coor
i I from the decomposition of lignin; I
I I Insoluble form of iron and I
i manganese; colored suspended [
Turbidi~----+---5
I
NTU I ~r~:i~
I
increases with the qUantityt I Turbidimetry ~--
I I of suspended matters in water.
Aluminum I 0.2 I Aluminum sulfate is used in water ! FMS, EMS, ICP,
I I treatment as coagulants I Colorimetry
i I I Method
Chloride-------i---250.O --l Chloride in drinking waterdriginatesT Argen-tometriC---
I I from natural sources, sewage and I Method, IC
I industrial effluents, urban runoff, and I
I seawater intrusion. I
Copper 1.0 Copper in drinking water occurs FMS, EMS, ICP,
primarily as corrosion of interior of Neocuproine
copper plumbing especially with acid Method,
pH or high-carbonate waters with Bathocuproine
alkaline pH. Method
Hardness 300 as CaC03 Hardness is due to the presence of FMS, EMS, ICP,
naturally occurring divalent cations, Colori metry
such as calcium, magnesium, and Method
strontium resulting from contact of
acidic groundwater with rocks such
as limestone and dolomites.
Hardness beyond the standard value
maybe acceptable for drinking by the
consumers in certain areas.
Hydrogen 0.05 Hydrogen sulfide may be generated Methylene Blue
sulfide by microorganisms under anaerobic Method,
conditions in bottom of swamps, Iodometric
marshes, eutrophic lakes and Method
Department Order No. 1«.3ISeries of 2017
Page 10 of 14
I groundwater. I
-------.1 ..
Iron I 1.0
I I
Applicable for existing and new water I Phenanthroline,
II
i supply systems. Iron is found in I MS,

I I natural fresh waters. It may be I ICP, Colorimetric
I I present in drinking water as a result I Method
I of the use or iron coagulants or the I
I I corrosion of steel and cast iron pipes I
I
-·-·-----------~-------·--t-
Manganese I 0.4
Iduring
.
water distribution. I
-+-~-
I Applicable for existing and new water I Persulfate
I i supply systems. Manganese is , Method, AAS,
I I naturally occurring in many surface I ICP, ICP/MS
i I and groundwater sources,
I I particularly in anaerobic or low
._. I -19xidation conditions. _
pH 1 6.5 - 8.5 I The pH range is based on aesthetic Electrometric
consideration only. The acceptable method
I 5 - 7 for I range may be broader in the absence
product I of a distribution system. pH is
water that important as operational water
undergone quality parameter
reverse
osmosis or
I distillation
-- ..----.----..i~oc~~~------- .J . ~ _
Sodium I 200 -t[ Sodium is usually associated with MS (Flame

I
I chloride, thus, it may have the same I absorption
I [Isources in drinking water as I mode) , ICP/MS,
I chloride. Water softeners can add I Flame
I I significantly to the sodium content in I photometry
II I drinking water especially from water I
+--: l!efilling stations. I _
Sulfate I 250 I High levels of sulfate occur naturally I Turbidimetric
I in groundwater. I Method,
I I Ion
I I Chromatography,
I I Gravimetric
I ~thod
~ I .
Total Dissolved I 500 ! TDS in drinking water originate from i Gravimetric,
Solids (TDS) I I natural sources, sewage, urban I dried at 180°C
I I runoff and industrial wastewater. I
I < 10 for I I
I product I
I water that !
I undergone I
. reverse I
Department Order No. /Ol.! Series of 2017
I
Page 11 of 14
osmosis or I
distillation
I
process i
I
1
-----+--1- -~----.------.------.--------+_::__:_-----
Zinc 5.0 I Zinc may occur naturally in I FAAS, ICP,
Igroundwater. Concentration in tap ICP/MS
I Iwater can be much higher as a result I
_____
. L lgigissolutio~~t~inc !~om p.ipes.
Table 1604.4.6 Standard Values for Chemicals Used in Treatment and

--~------_._------
Disinfection
-
and
-----
Disinfection by-products
---
.- -------
Maximum i I
I Method of
Constituent Level I Occurrence
I Analysis
(mg/L) I
a. Contaminants from Treatment Chemicals
Acrylamide 0.0005 Residual acrylamide monomer GC/ELCD;

occurs in the use of anionic, HPLC with UV
cationic and non-ionic Detection
polyacrylamide coagulant aids;
Epichlorohydrin 0.0004 Epichlorohydrin is used for the GC /ECD,
manufacture of glycerol, GC/MS,
unmodified epoxy resins and GC/FID
water treatment resins.
b. Disinfection Chemicals
r
Chlorine Residual 0.3 min Detected at the farthest point of Iodometric;

I
i the distribution system Amperometric
1.5 max ! Detected at any point in the Titration; DPD
I
I distribution system Colorimetric

~ Method
------.--
....
Iodine Not recommended for long term disinfection Leuco Crystal

Violet!
Amperometric
Method
c. Disinfection by-products
Bromate 0.01 As DBP, bromate is formed IC

during ozonation when bromide
ion is found in water or in
concentrated hypochlorite
solutions used to disinfect
drinking water. The maximum
level is based on the recent
(2003) risk assessment as
reported in WHO Guidelines
(2004).
Department Order No. leu , Series of 2017
Page 12 of 14
----
Chlorite 0.7 I The maximum values for IC with

I chlorite and chlorate are suppressed
Chlorate 0.7 provisional values. When conductivity
chlorine dioxide is used as a detection for
disinfectant, chlorite or chlorate chlorate
levels may be allowed to
exceed the maximum level.
Difficulty in meeting the
maximum level is not a reason
for compromising adequate
disinfection.
Chloral hydrate 0.01 Chloral hydrate is formed as a GC JECD;
(trichloroacetaldehyde) by-product of chlorination when GCjMS
chlorine reacts with humic
acids.
Dibromoacetonitrile 0.07 Dibromoacetonitrile is produced GCj ECD
during water chlorination from
naturally occurring substances
including algae, fulvic acid and
proteinaceous material.
Dichloroacetic acid 0.05 I Chlorinated acetic acids are GCjECD;
I formed from organic material GCjMS
I during water chlorination.
--
Dichloroacetonitrile
--
~-~2-1 Dichloroacetonitrile is produced GCjECD
----
II during water chlorination

•
from
i naturally occurnngsubstances
! including algae, fulvic acid and
I
I proteinaceous material. --
~- j
Formaldehyde 0.9 I Formaldehyde in drinking water GCjECD

II results primarily from oxidation
I of natural organic matter during
I ozonation and chlorination. ---
1------ - -
Monochloroacetate 0.02 i Chlorinated acetic acids are GCj ECD;
I during water chlorination.
f-- ----- -----
Trichloroacetate 0.20----r-ctlIorinated acetic acids are - GC jECD;

-------J I
during water chlorination. ~-------
2,4,6trichlorophenol 0.2 I Chlorophenols are present in GCj

! drinking water as a result of the ECD;GCjMS
I chlorination of phenols, as by-
products of hypochlorite with
I phenolic acid, as biocides or as
I degradation products of
I phenoxy herbicides.
I ------~-----~--- - ---~
Department Order No, leU , Series of 2017
Page 13 of 14
Trihalomethanes -~
-Bromoform --- ----Cii--T Trihalomethanes are generated GC /ECD;
, --~._------~ principally as by-products of GC/MS
__ Dlbromochloromet~~ne 0.1 ~ chl,orination of drinking water,
Bromodichloromethane 0.06 i being formed from naturally
I occurring organic compounds.
Chloroform 0.2 I
AAS - Atomic Absorption Spectrometry

DPD -N,N-diethyl-p-phenylenediamine (under residual chlorine method)
EAAS - Electrothermal Atomic Absorption Spectrometry
ELISA - Enzyme-linked Immunosorbent Assay
FAAS - Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (FAAS)
FID - Flame Ionization Detector
GC - Gas Chromatography
GC/ECD - Gas Chromatography/Electron Capture Detector
GCjELCD - Gas Chromatograph/Electrolytic Conductivity Detector
GC/FID -Gas Chromatograph/Flame Ionization Detector
GC/MS - Gas Chromatography / Mass Spectrometry
GC/PID - Gas Chromatograph/Photoionization Detector
HPLC - High-performance Liquid Chromatography
ICP/AES - Inductively Coupled Plasma / Atomic Emission Spectrometry
ICP/MS - Inductively Couple Plasma / Mass Spectrometry (ICP/MS)
Table 1604.4.7 - Standard Values for Radiological Constituents

I Constituents I Activity Level (Bq/liter) !
I gross alpha activity I 0.1 (excluding radon) i

I gross beta 1.0 '
I radon I 11(MCL) I
The quantity to be paid for will be measured by lump-sum for the complete WTP as
furnished on site, in accordance with these specifications and as accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 1604.5, shall be paid for at the
Contract Unit Price for Water Treatment Plant which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing all materials, including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item.

1604 (1) Water Treatment Plant Lump-sum
(WTP), Modular/Skid Type
Page 14 of 14
References:
1. Philippine National Standards for Drinking Water 2007

2. ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System
3. NSF International Standard/American National Standard; NSF/ANSI61 - 2013 Drinking Water
System Components - Health Effects; USA, 2013
4. Water Quality Association; Gold Seal Certification Program's Gold Seal Logo Policy
5. European Standard AFNOR NF X 15-211:2009 Standard
6. British Standard BS 7989:2001
.J
~~ /.1 '/)~ff
Ic>~ .2-d~~Q

MANILA
19 OCT 2011

Item 743 - Geofoam as an Alternative
NO. 126 ~
)
Embankment Material
Series of 201l:{1".d.11
successful research studies, this Department has approved the DPWH Standard
Specification for Item 743 - Geofoam as an Alternative Embankment Material,
subject to the specifications hereto attached. A Certificate of Conditional Approval has been
issued by this Department allowing the use of geofoam as alternative embankment
material in DPWH road projects from September 8, 2017 until September 7, 2022.
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
.
D~:f¥1UILON
.
Offlcer- -Olarge
etary

14.1.2 FET/RGT Office of the Secretary
.J
\\ \ 1111\ \\1\1\1\11\ 11I1111\1\1111\11\

WIN7U01523
DPWH Standard Specification of Item 743 - GEOFOAM AS AN ALTERNATIVE
EMBANKMENT MATERIAL
143.1 Descri~on
This Specification shall consist of furnishing and installing expanded polystyrene (EPS)
geofoam as an alternative embankment material. It shall be in accordance with the lines,
grades and dimensions in the Plansand Specifications.
143.2 Definition
143.2.1 Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)- A type of foamed plastic formed by the expansion
of polystyrene resin beads in a molding process.
743..2.2 Geofoam - A block or planar rigid cellular foam polymeric material used in
geotechnical engineering applications.
743.3.1 Geotextile
Geotextile shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 715, Geotextiles of the
DPWHStandard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II.
743.3.2 Sand
Sand used for bedding shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 703,
Aggregates of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Hi9b..ways,Bridges and Airports,
Volume II.
743.3.3 Geofoam
Geofoam shall be expanded polystyrene (EPS)type. It shall conform to the requirements of

ASTM D 6817M, Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam. The
dimensions and physical property requirements of geofoam are listed in Tables 1 and 2,
respectively. Geofoam is resistant to fungi and mold and offers no nutritional value to
insects. Protection methods for termites include adding a termiticide during the
manufacturing process.
The compressive resistance at 1% strain is typically within the elastic limit of geofoam in
Table 1 and is accepted as the compressive resistance to limit long-term deformation under
structural load.
Geofoam shall contain sufficient flame retardants to meet a minimum oxygen index as
required in Table 1.
Table 1 Dimensions of Geofoam
Pro..,.:,"y Dimension, mm
Width 305 to 1219
LenClth 1219 to 4877
Thickness 25 to 1219
Department Order No. 102.'. Series of 2017
Specification on the Use of Geofoam as an Alternative Embankment Material
Page 2 of 5
Table 2 Physical Property Requirements of GeofoamA,B
Test Tvoe
Property
Method EPS12 EPS15 EPS19 EPS22 EPS29 EPS39 EPS46
DenSity, ASfM
11.2 14.4 18.4 21.6 28.8 38.4 45.7
min., ko/m3 01622 M
Compressive
Resistance, ASTM
15 25 40 50 75 103 128
min., kPa at 01621
1% strain
Compressive
Resistance, ASTM
35 55 90 115 170 241 300
min., kPa at 01621
5% strain
Compressive
Resistance, ASTM
40 70 110 135 200 276 345
min., kPa at 01621
10% strainA
Flexural
ASTM
Strength, 69 172 207 240 345 414 517
C203
mi'n., kPa
Oxygen
ASTM
Index, min., 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0 24.0
02863
volume%
A If yield occurs prior to 10% deformation, report compressive resistance and deformation at yield in addition to
compressive resistance at 1%, 5%, and 10% deformation .. J
8 For products that have an external skin, testing shall be undertaken with skins intact.
Unless otherwise specified, the acceptable dimension tolerance criteria on geofoam shall not
exceed + 0.5%.
743.3.3.1 Sampling of Geofoam
Sampling of geofoam shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 07557M, Sampling of

Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam Specimens.
743.3.4 Load Distribution Slab (LDS)
The load distribution slab (LOS) layer shall be made from a reinforced concrete slab placed
between the top of the geofoam blocks and the overlying pavement system.
743.3.4.1 Structural Concrete
Concrete used in the construction of LOS shall be Class A concrete conforming to the
requirements of Item 405, Structural Concrete of the OPWH Standard Specifications for
Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II.
Department Order No. liZ(', Series of 2017
Page 3 of 5
743.3.4.2 Reinforcing Steel Bars
Reinforcing steel bars used in the construction of LOS shall conform to the requirements of
Item 710, Reinforcing Steel and Wire Rope of the DPWH Standard Specifications for
Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II.
743.4 Design Considerations
Design considerations on the use of geofoam which assist in the determination of the
appropriate geofoam for geotechnical applications shall be in accordance with the applicable
requirements of ASTM D7180M, Standard Guide for Use of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS)
Geofoam in Geotechnical Projects or with the recommendations of the designer.
The determination of the design thickness of the LOS and pavement shall be based on the
recommendations of the designer.
743.5.1 Site Preparation
The natural soil subgrade shall be cleared of vegetation and any large or sharp-edged soil
particles and shall be planar prior to pladng the geotextlle and/or sand bedding layer. If no
sand bedding is used, the natural subgrade shall be cleared such that there shall be no
vegetation, or particles of soil or rock larger than coarse gravel, exposed at the surface.
Regardless of the subgrade material, the subgrade surface on which the geofoam blocks will
be placed shall be sufficiently planar prior to the placemenf of the first block layer. The
required smoothness shall be defined as a vertical deviation of no more than 10 mm over
any 3 m distance. There shall be no debris of any kind on the subgrade surface when the
geofoam blocks are placed.
743.5.2 Installation of Geotextile
There shall be no standing water on the subgrade within the area where the geotextile shall
be placed. The installation of geotextile shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Section 715.7, Installation of Item 715.
743.5.3 Laying of Sand Bedding
The main purpose of the sand bedding is to level the surface where the geofoam blocks
shall be placed. Sand shall be be spread evenly over the area where the geofoam blocks
shall be placed. It shall be laid to its required thickness of 150 mm.
743.5.4 Plaeement of Geofoam
The placement of geofoam shall be done after sand bedding was laid to its required
thickness and after utilities such as drainage pipes were installed. Geofoam blocks shall be
placed at locations shown on the approved Plans.
Page 4 of 5
The blocks shall be placed so that all vertical and horizontal joints between the blocks are
tight. To provide interlock between blocks, the principle of shear keys shall be considered. It
shall be done by interchanging the position of certain blocks between the bottom layer and
the blocks on the succeeding layer directly above it. The spacing of shear keys shall be 3 m
to 4.5 m.
The surfaces of blocks shall not be directly traversed by any vehicle or construction
equipment during or after placement of the blocks. At no time shall heat or open flames be
used near the blocks so as to cause melting or combustion of the geofoam blocks.
743.5.5 Load Distribution Slab (LOS) Construction
The LOS shall be constructed above the installed geofoam blocks as shown on the Plans. It
shall provide sufficient lateral confinement of unbound pavement layers when using
geofoam blocks.
743.5.5.1 Installation of Reinforcing Steel Bars
Installation of reinforcing steel bars shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements
of Section 404.3, Construction Requirements of Item 404 - Reinforcing Steel of the OPWH
Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports. The spacing of bars shall be in
conformance with the approved Plans,
743.5.5.2 Placing of Concrete Slab

.J
The placing of the concrete slab shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of
Section 407.3, Construction Requirements of Item 407 - Concrete Structures of the OPWH
Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports.
No vehicles or construction equipment shall traverse directly on the geofoam blocks or the
LOS.
743.5.6 Pavement System Construction
The pavement system shall be constructed above the LOS as shown on the Plans. The
construction of the pavement system shall be in conformity with the Plans and
Specifications.
743.6 Delivery, Storage and Handling
The geofoam blocks shall be handled in a manner so as to minimize physical damage to the
blocks. No method of lifting or transporting the blocks that creates dents or holes on the
block surfaces or losses of portions of the block shall be allowed.
If the geofoam blocks are to be stockpiled at the project site until placement, a secure
storage area shall be designated for this purpose. The storage area shall be away from any
heat source or construction activity that produces heat or flame. In addition, personal
tobacco smoking shall not be allowed in the storage area. Geofoam blocks in temporary on-
site storage shall be secured with sandbags and similar "soft" weights to prevent being
Department Order No. ~ Seriesof 2017
Page 5 of 5
dislodged by wind. The blocks shall not be covered in any manner that might allow the
bUildup of heat beneath the cover.
The quantity to be paid for under this item shall be the actual furnished and installed
geofoam measured in cubic meters as shown on the Plans.
The quantity as determined in Section 7.0 - Method of Measurement shall be paid for at unit
price stipulated in the Contract's Bill of Quantities. The payment shall constitute the full
compensation for furnishing all the necessary materialsf providing necessary equipment and
tools in installing geofoam as alternative embankment materialf labor cost and all the
incidental expenses necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item Description Unit of Measurement

Number
743 (1) Geofoam Cubic Meter
References:
1. Final Report - Pilot Research on the Use of Geofoam as Alternative Embankment Material
2. DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics
ASTM D 1622M - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics
ASTM D 2863 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastic (Oxygen Index)
ASTM D 6817M - Standard Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam
ASTM D 7180M - Standard Guide for Use of Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Geofoam in
Geotechnical Projects
ASTM D 7557M - Standard Practice for Sampling of Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam
Specimens
4. National Cooperative Highway Research Program Report 529 - Guideline and Recommended
Standard for Geofoam Applications in Highway Embankments
~ 1~I"JIr
/ /- .t.I .•~'1

MANILA
22 NOV 2017J
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Standard Specification on the Use

) of Roller-Compacted Concrete
No. 134 _
)
)
Pavement in Road Construction,
Item 311 (6)
Series of 201~ -.,,'"
successful research studies, this Department has approved the use of Roller-Compacted
Concrete Pavement in Road Construction, subject to the specifications hereto attached.
This specification shall form part of the next revised DPWH Standard Specification for
Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II under Item 311 Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement, Pay Item 311(6) Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavement.
,
.J
~t4-'MARK A. VILLAR
-
Secretary .~.
14.1.2 FETjRGT

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7U01535
Department Order No. 1.3t/. Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification on the Use of Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavement in Road Construction,
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 1of 23
DPWH Standard Specification on

The Use of Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavement
in Road Construction, Item 311 (6)
1. Description
This Item shall consist of pavement of roller compacted concrete, without reinforcement,
constructed on the prepared base in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity
with lines and grades, thickness and typical cross-section as shown in the Plans.
The Roller Compacted Concrete (RCe) is a dry concrete mix consist of aggregate, Portland
cement, other supplementary cementing materials (fly ash, slag, silica fume) and water with
zero-slump. It is a highly-compacted concrete placed using high-density asphalt paver and
compacted using vibratory rollers. It is constructed without forms, dowels or reinforcing steel,
and does not require finishing. It has higher percentage of fine aggregates, which allows tight
packing and consolidation of components.
It shall be limited to low to medium-speed (70. kph maximum) highway projects and for road
networks which require fast reblocking time such as main thoroughfares and junction points.
2.1 Portland Cement
It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 700, Hydraulic Cement. Portland
Cement Type I meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150.) "Standard
Specification for Portland Cement" shall be used unless otherwise provided for in the Special
Provisions.
Portland-Pozzolan Cement Type IP meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 24o.M (ASTM C

595) "Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cement" shall be allowed for use.
For both Portland Cement Type I and Portland-Pozzolan Cement Type IP, trial mixes shall be
done and shall meet the specification requirements of concrete. The AASHTOj ASTM provision
pertinent to the use of Portland-Pozzolan Cement Type IP shall be adopted.
Different brands or the same brands from different mills shall not be mixed nor shall they be
used alternately unless the mix is approved by the Engineer.
Cement which for any reason has become partially set or which contains lumps of caked
cement shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags shall not be used.
Samples of cement shall be obtained in accordance with MSHTO R 71 (ASTM C 183M)

"Standard Practice for Sampling and Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement".
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 2 of 23
2.2 Aggregates
Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the quality of aggregates shall conform
to ASTM C 33M "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates". Aggregates may be
obtained from a single source or borrow pit, or may be a blend of coarse and fine aggregates.
The aggregate shall be well graded without gradation gaps and conform to the following
gradation:
Table 1. Suggested Blend Gradation

Percent Passing by Weight
Sieve Number
Minimum Maximum
25 mm (1 in.) 100 100
19 mm (3/4 in.) 90 100
12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 70 90
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 60 85
4.75 mm (No.4) 40 65
1.18 mm (No. 16) 20 40
150 IJm(No. 100) 6 18
75 IJm(No. 200) 2 8
2.2.1 Fine Aggregate
It shall consist of natural sand, stone screenings or other inert materials with similar
characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong and durable particles. Fine
aggregate from different sources of supply shall not be mixed or stored in the same pile nor
used alternately in the same class of concrete without the approval of the Engineer.
It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of material passing the 0.075 mm
(No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) mass percent each of clay lumps or shale.
The use of beach sand will not be allowed without the approval of the Engineer.
If the fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the
weighted loss shall not exceed 10 mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic impurities. If subjected to
the colorimatic test for organic impurities and a color darker than the standard is produced, it
shall be rejected. However, when tested for the effect of organic impurities on strength of
mortar by AASHTO T 71, the fine aggregate may be used if the relative strength at seven (7)
and 28 days is not less than 95 percent.
The fine aggregate shall be well-graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to Table 2.
Department Order No. JM, Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 3 of 23
Table 2. Grading Requirements for Fine Aggregate

Sieve Designation Percent Passing by Weight
9.5 mm (3/8 in) 100
4.75 mm (No.4) 95 - 100
2.36 mm (No.8) -
1.18 mm (No. 16) 45 - 80
0.600 mm (No. 30) -
0.300 mm (No. 50) 5- 30
0.150 mm (No. 100) 0-10
2.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert materials
(coralline or dolomites) of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong,
durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings.
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other approved inert materials
of similar characteristics, or combinations thereof, having hard, strong, durable pieces and
free from any adherent coatings.
It shall contain not more than one (1) mass percent of material passing the 0.075 mm
(No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor more than 3.5 mass
percent of soft fragments .
.
J
If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test,
the weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by AASHTO T 96 "Standard
Method of Test for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and
Impact in the Los Angeles Machine".
If the slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg/m3• The gradation of the coarse
aggregate shall conform to Table 3.
Only one grading specification shall be used from anyone source.
Table 3. Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate

Sieve Size Mass Percent Passing
25 mm (1 in.) 100
19 mm (3/4 in.) 90-100
12.5 mm (1/2 in.) 70-90
9.5 mm (3/8 in.) 60-85
4.75 mm (No.4) 40-65
Department Order No. 1.3rt, Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 4 of 23
2.3 Water
Water quality shall be determined and tested in accordance with and meet the requirements
of ASTM C 1602M "Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic
Cement Concrete".
Water used in mixing, curing or other designated application shall be reasonably clean and
free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, grass or other substances injurious to the finished product. Water
will be tested in accordance with and shall meet the requirements of Item 714, Water. Water
which is drinkable may be used without test. Where the source of water is shallow, the intake
shall be so enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
2.4 Reinforcing Steel
RCC pavement, unlike conventional concrete pavement, cannot be reinforced with steel nor
include dowel bars to provide joint load transfer because steel reinforcement will hinder
compaction effort of equipment on the pavement section. Joint load transfer must rely on
aggregate interlock and base support for long-term joint performance.
2.5 Joint Fillers
Poured joint fillers shall be mixed asphalt and mineral or rubber filler conforming to the
applicable requirements of Item 70S, Joint Materials.
Preformed joint filler shall conform to the applicable requirements of Item 705. It shall be
punched to admit the dowels where called for in the Plans. The filler for each joint shall be
furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width required for the joint.
2.6 Cementitious Materials
In addition to cement and pozzolan used in RCC mixes, the other cementitious materials if
specified or permitted, such as fly ash, shall meet the required design strength and durability
requirements of the finished RCC, not exceeding twenty percent partial replacement of Roller
compacted in concrete mix and shall be based on its availability. It shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 618 "Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete".
2.7 Admixture
Chemical admixtures such as water-reducing, set-retarding and set-accelerating admixture

shall conform to ASTM C 494M "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete"
and must be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
Superplasticizers (Polycarboxylate) can be used in dry batch plant production to improve

workability and reduce mixing time, but a pavement test section must be constructed to verify
the proper admixture to use for a particular mix.
Department Order No.m Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 5 of 23
Extensive laboratory and field test must be conducted prior to any use of admixtures to
determine the effectiveness and proper dosage rates.
Admixturefs may be added to the concrete mix to produce some desired modifications to the
properties of concrete if necessary, but not as partial replacement of cement.
2.8 Curing Materials
Curing materials shall conform to the following requirements as specified:
Curing Materials Standard Description

"Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made
a) Burlap cloth AASHTO M 182
for Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats"
b) Liquid membrane "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-
ASTM C 309
forming compounds Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete"
c) Sheeting (film) "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for
AASHTO M 171
materials Curing Concrete"
Cotton mats and waterproof paper can be used.
2.9 Storage of Cement and Aggregate
All cement shall be stored, immediately upon delivery at the Site, in weatherproof building
which will protect the cement from dampness. The floor shallt5e raised from the ground. The
buildings shall be placed in locations approved by the Engineer. Provisions for storage shall
be ample, and the shipments of cement as received shall be separately stored in such a
manner as to allow the earliest deliveries to be used first and to provide easy access for
identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage buildings shall have capacity for
storage of a sufficient quantity of cement to allow sampling at least 12 days before the cement
is to be used. Bulk cement, if used, shall be transferred to elevated air tight and weatherproof
bins. Stored cement shall meet the test requirements at any time after storage when retest is
ordered by the Engineer. At the time of use, all cement shall be free-flowing and free of lumps.
The handling and storing of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation or
the inclusion of foreign materials. The Engineer may require that aggregates be stored on
separate platforms at satisfactory locations.
In order to secure greater uniformity of concrete mix, the Engineer may require that the
coarse aggregate be separated into two or more sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be
stored in separate bins or in separate stockpiles sufficiently removed from each other to
prevent the material at the edges of the piles from becoming intermixed.
Department Order No. \!c{. Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 6 of 23
2.10 Proportioning, Consistency and Strength of Concrete
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the soil compaction method as indicated
in ACI 327R -14 "Guide to Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavements". The Engineer shall
determine from laboratory tests of the materials to be used, the cement content and the
proportions of aggregate and water that will produce workable concrete with zero slump that
will achieve the required density with optimal compaction effort, a flexural strength of not less
than 3.8 MPa when tested by the third-point method or 4.5 MPa when tested by the mid-point
method at 14 days in accordance with AASHTO T 97 "Standard Method of Test for Flexural
Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading" and T 177 "Standard
Method of Test for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center-Point
Loading", respectively; or a compressive strength of 24.1 MPa for cores taken at 14 days and
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 24M "Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" and durable enough to endure in the given
environment.
The mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be accompanied with
certified test data from an approved laboratory demonstrating the adequacy of the mix design.
A change in the source of materials during the progress of work may necessitate a new design
mix.
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on:
Table 4. RCC Mix Design

Component Percent Composition (by Volume)
J
Cement 10 %
Water 13%
Air 1.5 %
Fine Aggregate 35%
Coarse Aggregate 40.5%
Alternately, dense and well-graded coarse and fine aggregates shall comprise the
75 to 85 percent of RCC mixture by volume.
The quantity of water is typically between 90 and 120 kilograms per cubic meter. The water
to total cementitious ratio, expressed as Wj(C+P), for RCC pavement mix shall generally fall
between 0.30 and 0.45 Wj(C+P) ratio, where the greatest positive influence on the final
strength of the RCC, with 28-day unconfined compressive strengths typically exceeding
41 MPa.
The total cementitious material content including the content in blended cements, unless
specifically directed by the Engineer, shall not exceed the weight of Portland cement in the
RCC mix and shall fall between the 240 and 360 kilograms per cubic meter in a wide range of
proportions of these materials.
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 7 of 23
The mixture shall have the consistency of damp, dense-graded aggregates, which is relatively
dry and stiff with almost zero slump.
Table 5. Properties of Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement

Properties Affecting Factors Specifications
Flexural Strength* Raw Materials, Mix Design 3000 KPa to 5,500 KPa @ 3 days
Mix Design and Paver Set-up
Compaction 98% (min)
alignment
Mix Design, Aggregates
Skid Resistance Properties, Curing, Surface 55 (min)
Texture, Surface Condition
Surface Texture Finishing 0.5
International Roughness Continuous Concrete supplies
3.0 (max)
Index (IRI) and Dump Trucks Specification
*Flexural strength shall conform to design requirement.
To achieve smooth pavements with values for International Roughness Index (IRI) of not
more than 3.0 m/km, the Contractor shall consider tightening the ranges and tolerances of
mix design components to produce a more consistent mix, and include revised target values
in the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and Method Statement.
3.1 Quality Control of Roller Compacted Concrete
3.1.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all materials during the handling,
blending, and mixing and placement operations.
Experienced and qualified personnel shall perform all batching or mixing operation for the
concrete mix, and shall be present at the plant and job site to control the concrete productions
whenever the plant is in operation.
3.1.2 Quality Control Plan
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a Quality Control Plan detailing his production control
procedures and the type and frequency of sampling and testing to ensure that the concrete
produced complies with the Specifications. The test method that may be used for making
specimens and determining densities of laboratory-produced RCC mixtures shall be in
accordance to ASTM C 1800M "Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Roller-
Compacted Concrete Specimens Using the Gyratory Compactor".
The Engineer shall be provided free access to recent plant production records, and if
requested, informational copies of mix design, materials certifications and sampling and
testing reports.
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 8 of 23
3.1.3 Quality Control Testing
The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection necessary to assure quality
control of the component materials and the concrete.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of fine and coarse
aggregates and for testing the concrete mixture for moisture content, temperature. He shall
conduct his operations so as to produce a mix conforming to the approved mix design.
3.1.4 Documentation
The Contractor shall maintain adequate records of all inspections and tests. The records shall
indicate the nature and number of observations made, the number and type of deficiencies
found, the quantities approved and rejected, and nature of any corrective action taken.
The Engineer may take independent assurance samples at random location for acceptance
purposes as he deems necessary.
3.2 Equipment
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the work
shall be approved by the Engineer as to design, capacity and mechanical condition. The
equipment shall be at the jobsite sufficiently ahead of the start of construction operations to
be examined thoroughly and approved.
3.2.1 Mixing Plant
Obtain the Engineer's approval of the mixing plant before starting RCC production. Use a
mixing plant capable of producing a homogeneous RCC mixture in the proportions defined in
the approved mixture design and conforming to the tolerances specified in ASTM C 94
"Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" for batch mixing plants or ASTM C 685
"Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing" for
continuous mixing plants.
Use a plant with production capacity sufficient to produce a uniform RCC mixture at a rate
compatible with the placement operation. The Engineer can halt operations if the plant is
unable to produce the RCC mixture sufficiently in quality or quantity, until operations are
adjusted or a plant meeting all requirements is obtained.
3.2.1.1 pugmill Plant
Pugmill plants shall be central plant type with a twin-shaft pugmill mixer, capable of
continuous mixing.
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 9 of 23
Provide synchronized metering devices and feeders to dispense the correct proportions of
aggregate, cement, supplementary cementing materials, and water for continuous mixing
within the tolerance requirements of ASTM C 685 depending on plant type.
Provide a surge or gob hopper attached to the final discharge belt to temporarily hold the
mixed RCC, in order to minimize segregation when loading into haul trucks, and to allow the
plant to operate continuously.
3.2.1.2 Batching Plant and Equipment
3.2.1.2.1 General
The batching shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for the fine aggregate and for
each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin, a hopper, and separate scale
for cement shall be included. The weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to
preclude dusting operation. The batch plant shall be equipped with a suitable non-resettable
batch counter which will correctly indicate the number of batches proportioned.
3.2.1.2.2 Bins and Hoppers
Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each size of coarse
aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant.
3.2.1.2.3 Scales
Scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the beam type or the spring less-
dial type. They shall be accurate within one-half percent throughout the range of use. Poises
shall be designed to be locked in any position and to prevent unauthorized change.
Scales shall be inspected and sealed as often as the Engineer may deem necessary to assure
their continued accuracy.
3.2.1.2.4 Automatic Weighing Devices
Unless otherwise allowed on the Contract, batching plants shall be equipped with automatic
weighing devices of an approved type to proportion aggregates and bulk cement.
3.2.2 Paving Machine
Obtain the Engineer's approval of the paving equipment before starting RCC placement. RCC
is placed using asphalt pavers equipped with a high-density screed capable of placing the RCC
material to a minimum of ninety percent of the reference density required in accordance with
ASTM D 1557 "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort 56,000 ft-lbfjft3 (2,700 kN-mjm3)" or equivalent test method, prior to any
additional compaction. Ensure that the paver is of suitable weight and stability, equipped to
spread, compact, and place the RCC mixture to the required thickness, cross slope, edge and
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 10 of 23
surface texture. Use of graders, bulldozers, or any equipment that does not provide
compaction during paving shall not be permitted, except as required for areas inaccessible to
a paving machine or requiring odd-shapes upon approval of the Engineer.
3.2.3 Compaction Equipment
Self-propelled lOT vibratory dual steel drum and/or pneumatic rollers capable of providing
primary and final compaction efforts necessary to meet the in-place density requirement of
ninety-eight percent minimum shall be used as appropriate, and in a manner comparable to
the test strip demonstration. Furnish each drum on steel drum vibratory rollers with a properly
operating scraper and brush. Only operate steel drum vibratory rollers in static mode for final
compaction. Never operate a roller or paver in vibratory mode when the equipment is not in
motion.
Walk-behind vibratory rollers or plate tampers shall be used only for compacting areas
inaccessible to larger rollers.
3.2.4 Dump Trucks
Dump trucks shall be used for transporting the RCC material from the plant to the paver.
Trucks shall be clean and equipped with open-bed with retractable protective covers to protect
the RCC material from rain, evaporation, heat and other detrimental weather conditions. A
sufficient number of trucks shall be provided to ensure adequate and continuous supply of
RCC material to the paver. Adequate size and clearance height must be established through
inspection to determine the compatibility of the truck with the.paving machine. No part of the
truck must hit the paving machine at any moment during the laying operation.
3.2.5 Water Truck
Water truck or other similar equipment shall be on-site and available for use throughout the
paving and curing process. The truck or device shall be equipped with a spray bar capable of
evenly applying a fine spray of water to the RCC, subgrade or subbase surface without
damage.
3.2.6 Concrete Saw
The Contractor shall provide concrete saws that are capable of sawing new RCC for crack
control with minimal raveling and to the depth shown on the plans. Saw cutting shall first be
tested on sample areas starting at 24 hours after laying to see if raveling will occur during
cutting. Test cuts shall be done at one (1) hour interval until desired quality is achieved or
until 48 hours. All saw shall be equipped with blade guards and guides or devices to control
alignment and depth.
The Contractor shall provide sawing equipment in adequate number of units and power to
complete the sawing with a water-cooled diamond edge saw blade or an abrasive wheel to
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 11of 23
the required dimensions and at the required rate. He shall provide at least one (1) stand-by
saw in good working condition and with an ample supply of saw blades.
3.3 Preparation of Grade
After the subgrade of base has been placed and compacted to the required density, the areas
which will support the paving machine and the grade on which the pavement is to be
constructed shall be trimmed to the proper elevation by means of a properly designed machine
extending the prepared work areas compacted at least 60 cm beyond each edge of the
proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density results from the trimming operations, it shall
be restored by additional compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use
the prepared subgrade or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected immediately ahead
of the placing concrete.
The subgrade or base shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed and shall conform
to the requirements specified in Item 105-Subgrade Preparation and Part D-Subbase and Base
Course of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges, and Airports, Volume II.
3.4 Setting of the String Line I Guide Lines
3.4.1 Setting of the String lines
String lines shall be used to guide the paver in laying RCCin grade, lift thickness and alignment
and must be installed with enough clearance as to not be disturbed during laying operations.
String lines to be used shall be sufficiently tough under tem;ion. String lines shall be set
sufficiently in advance of the point where concrete is being laid. After the string lines have
been set to correct grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped, mechanically or by hand, at
both the inside and outside edges of the base of the string lines. The string lines shall not
deviate from true line by more than one (1) cm at any point.
3.4.2 Grade and Alignment
The alignment and grade elevations of the string lines shall be checked and corrections made
by the Contractor immediately before RCC laying. Testing as to crown and elevation with
reference to the design, prior to placing of concrete can be made by means of holding an
approved template in a vertical position and moved backward and forward along the string
lines.
When any string lines have been disturbed or any grade has become unstable, the string lines
shall be reset and rechecked.
3.5 Conditioning of Subgrade or Base Course
When string lines have been securely set to grade, the subgrade or base course shall be
brought to proper cross-section. High areas shall be trimmed to proper elevation. Low areas
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 12 of 23
shall be filled and compacted to a condition similar to that of surrounding grade. The finished
grade shall be maintained in a smooth and compacted condition until the pavement is placed.
Unless waterproof subgrade or base course cover material is specified, the subgrade or base
course shall be uniformly moist when the concrete is placed. If it subsequently becomes too
dry, the subgrade or base course shall be sprinkled, but the method of sprinkling shall not be
such as to form mud or pools of water.
3.6 Test Specimens
As work progresses, at least one (1) set consisting of three (3) concrete beam test specimens,
150 mm x 150 mm x 525 mm shall be taken from each 270 m2 of pavement for 280 mm
depth or 250 m2 of pavement for 300 mm depth, or fraction thereof placed each day
(whenever applicable). Each set of specimens shall represent the volume of concrete not
exceeding 75 m3 placed each day. Test specimens shall be made under the supervision of the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all concrete and other facilities necessary in making
the test specimens and shall protect them from damage by construction operations. Cylinder
samples shall not be used as substitute for determining the adequacy of the strength of
concrete.
The beams shall be made by modifying the method described ASTM C 1435M "Standard
Practice for Molding Roller-Compacted Concrete in Cylinder Molds Using a Vibrating Hammer",
cured and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 23 "Standard Method of Test for Making and
Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field'" and AASHTO T 97 "Standard Method of Test
for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)".
3.7 Joints
Joints shall be constructed of the type and dimensions, and at the locations required by the
Plans or Special Provisions. All joints shall be protected from the intrusion of injurious foreign
material until sealed.
3.7.1 Longitudinal Joint
Longitudinal joints shall be cut straight and aligned to full depth with all excess materials
removed. The sawed area shall be thoroughly cleaned before paving the adjacent section.
The longitudinal joints shall be continuous. There. shall be no gaps in either transverse or
longitudinal joints at the intersection of the joints.
Longitudinal sawed joints shall be cut by means of approved concrete saws to the depth,
width and line shown on the Plans. Suitable guide lines or devices shall be used to assure
cutting the longitudinal joint on the true line. The longitudinal joint shall be sawed before the
end of the curing period or shortly thereafter and before any equipment or vehicles are allowed
on the pavement. If required, the joint shall immediately be filled with approved joint sealer.
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 13 of 23
3.7.2 Transverse Contraction Joint/Weakened Joint
When shown on the Plans, it shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting
grooves in the surface of the pavement. Sawed Contraction Joint shall be created by sawing
grooves in the surface of the pavement of the width not more than six (6) mm, depth should
be at one-third (1/3) of the concrete thickness, and at the spacing and lines shown on the
Plans, with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, it shall· be thoroughly cleaned
including the adjacent concrete surface.
Sawing of the joint shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
permit sawing without excessive raveling, usually 24 hours to 48 hours. All joints shall be
sawed before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking takes place. If necessary, the sawing operations
shall be carried on during the day or night, regardless of weather conditions. The sawing of
any joint shall be omitted if crack occurs at or near the joint location prior to the time of
sawing. Sawing shall be discounted when a crack develops ahead of the saw. In general, all
joints should be sawed in sequence.
3.7.3 Transverse Construction Joint
It shall be constructed when there is an interruption of more than 30 minutes in the concreting
operations. No transverse joint shall be constructed within 1.50 m of a contraction joint, or
plane of weakness. If sufficient concrete has been mixed at the time of interruption to form a
slab of at least 1.5 m long, the excess concrete from the last preceding joint shall be removed
and disposed off as directed.
3.7.4 Load Transfer Device
RCC pavement, unlike conventional concrete pavement, cannot be reinforced with steel nor
include dowel bars to provide joint load transfer because steel reinforcement will hinder
compaction effort of equipment on the pavement section. Joint load transfer must rely on
aggregate interlock and base support for long-term joint performance.
3.7.5 Pavement Thickness
RCC shall be placed in lifts of 101.6 mm (4 in.) minimum to 203.2 mm (8 in.) maximum or
254 mm (10 in.) maximum, if heavy pavers are used.
The avoidance of the reinforcement is considered in the thickness of the section, and
compensated with thicker sections if needed.
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 14 of 23
Table 6. Pavement Thickness
Category Thickness Vehicle Application

Low Traffic 100 - 150 mm Light weight vehicles, pick Residential & secondary roads
Thickness up and occasionally heavy Parking
weight trucks
Medium Traffic 150 - 230 mm Medium weight trucks, Industrial areas
Thickness occasionally buses & heavy Farm to market
weight trucks Parking
Heavy Traffic 200 - 330 mm Medium to heavy weight Primary roads
Thickness trucks Industrial parking
3.8 Trial Construction (Test Strips)
The Contractor shall conduct test strips that will be used to validate the design, method of
construction, curing process, joint construction, and field and laboratory testing of RCC for
any given project. The test strip shall be done prior to the actual paving operation. The test
strip should be constructed on an approved compacted base course using the same materials
and construction techniques that are proposed for the actual project. The test strip for the
project can be in non-production areas and can be left in place if satisfactory. The location of
the trial section shall be shown on the project drawings or located by agreement. and should
be long enough to provide adequate evaluation of the design and construction methods and
should be a minimum of two paver widths wide.
The equipment, placing, compaction procedures and joint forming methods shall initially
conform to the preliminary method statement, but during the tfial these may be varied if they
do not achieve the specified requirements, e.g. the in-situ plastic density; surface finish. Any
variations of method shall be recorded and the preliminary method statement modified to
reflect this experience. The trial shall include the formation of a longitudinal joint and if used,
a contraction joint. This trial section shall be constructed over an extended time period to
demonstrate the constructability at the specified or agreed time limits for joint/second layer
construction.
On both diagonals of the trial area a series of nuclear density measurements shall be taken
starting at 300 mm from each corner to assess the uniformity of compaction and the
achievement of ninety-eight percent of the plastic density at the maximum dry density or of
the intended plastic density of supply.
3.9 Transport to site
RCC mix shall be transported to site in non-agitating vehicles fully covered with sheeting to
prevent premature drying of the RCC or water gain from rain or other sources. Each delivery
shall be fully discharged. The maximum time between batching and delivery shall not exceed
60 minutes except where another time has been agreed as being technically appropriate, such
as when the RCC contains a retarder.
Department Order No.M Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 15 of 23
3.10 Placing of Roller Compacted Concrete
RCC placement shall follow the laying sequence approved by concerned parties with
consideration to equipment clearance and mobility of the heavy equipment to be used.
3.10.1 Base Conditioning
Prior to RCC placement, the prepared base shall first be moistened using appropriate sprayer
that will not create pools of water and muddy the surface. All deleterious materials should be
removed. When placing_RCC adjacent to existing RCC pavement, the construction joint must
be cut to the full depth and all excess and debris removed.
3.10.2 Laying Sequence
RCC shall be placed with a heavy-duty, self-propelled asphalt paving machine, utilizing high-
density single- or double-tamper bar screed to initially consolidate the mixture to a slab of
uniform thickness.
The paver will then be positioned on the starting point and be setup to correct grade and
level. The area where the paver hopper is facing should be cleared for backing of the dump
trucks.
The dump trucks carrying the RCC mix should be adequately covered to prevent loss of
moisture from the mix. Upon arrival, all deliveries shall be checked for moisture content and
loading and unloading time shall be recorded. Concrete sampJ~ will be obtained to test later.
The dump truck will then unload the RCC mix to the paver hopper and will move in tandem
with the paver. All RCC material shall be completely unloaded from each batch. The laid RCC
will then be checked for initial compaction by in-place density determination in accordance
with AASHTO T 191 "Standard Method of Test for Density of Soil In-Place by the Sand-Cone
Method" or any equivalent method approved by the Engineer.
Primary compaction shall be done by use of the approved steel drum roller in static mode
within 15 minutes of placement. After which, the pneumatic tire roller or steel drum roller
shall do the final compaction. The RCC shall be compacted to ninety-eight percent of the
maximum dry density determined in accordance with AASHTO T 180, Method D. "Standard
Method of Test for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg Rammer and a 457-
mm Drop". An in-place density determination in accordance with AASHTO T 191 or any
equivalent method approved by the Engineer shall be conducted to check the final compaction.
3.10.3 Curing
Immediately after compaction, curing compound shall be uniformly applied throughout the
laid RCC and covered for protection. Moisture loss must be prevented when there is a delay
in application of curing compound by using fine spray of water. Unless otherwise specified,
curing shall be done in accordance with one of the methods included in Subsection 3.12,
Department Order No.llt, Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 16 of 23
Curing. The curing media shall be applied at the appropriate time and shall be applied
uniformly and completely to all surfaces and edges of the pavement.
3.10.4 Joints
All joints shall be constructed in accordance with Subsection 3.13, Sealing of Joints.
3.10.5 Protection Against Rain
In order that the concrete may be properly protected against rain before the concrete is
sufficiently hardened, the Contractor will be required to have available at all times, materials
for the protection of the edges and surface of the unhardened concrete. Such protective
materials shall consist of standard metal forms or wood planks having a nominal thickness of
not less than 50 mm and a nominal width of not less than the thickness of the pavement at
its edge for the protection of the pavement edges, and covering material such as burlap or
cotton mats, curing paper or plastic sheeting materials for the protection of the surface of the
pavement. When rain appears imminent, all paving operations shall stop and all available
personnel shall begin placing forms against the sides of the pavement and covering the surface
of the unhardened concrete with the protective covering.
3.10.6 Straight-edge Testing and Surface Correction
During the paving operation, the surface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a
300 cm long straight-edge. For this purpose, the Contractor shall furnish and use an accurate
300-cm straight-edge swung from handles 100 cm longer than one-half (112) the width of the
slab. The straight-edge shall be held in contact with the surfacerin successive positions parallel
to the road center line and the whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other
as necessary.
Advances along the road shall be in successive stages of not more than one-half (V2) the
length of the straight-edge. Any depressions found shall be marked and repaired with
methodology agreed upon and approved by Engineer at a later time. High areas shall be
scraped down and compacted sufficiently to finish provided that RCC material is still fresh
otherwise these areas shall be marked and repaired with methodology agreed upon and
approved by Engineer at a later time.
Special attention shall be given to assure that the surface across joints meets the requirements
for smoothness, all overlapping RCC mix on adjacent sections shall be removed and finished.
Straight-edge testing and surface corrections shall continue until the entire surface is found
to be free from observable departures from the straight-edge and the slab conforms to the
required grade and cross-section.
3.11 Surface Test
Paved shoulders shall be subjected to surface test using a 3-m straight-edge. All areas within
the carriageway shall be subjected to surface test using an approved profiling system. The
profiling system shall qualify as Class 1 roughness measurement device and shall conform to
Department Order No. '5~ Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 17 of 23
the latest version ASTM E 950M "Standard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudinal Profile
of Traveled Surfaces with an Accelerometer Established Inertial Profiling Reference".
The components of the profiling system shall be validated on regular basis per manufacturer's
recommendations to ensure that the system is properly calibrated Validation reports shall be
generated, for presentation to the Engineer, confirming that tile validations are current and
within tolerances specified by the manufacturer.
The acceptable International Roughness Index (IRI) for concrete pavements shall be not more
than 3.0 m/km for National Primary Road, measured in 100 meter sections, at the time of
completion.
The road surface for test shall be cleaned of loose or deleterious material by brooming or
other approved means prior to any testing. Survey shall only be conducted on dry pavement
surfaces only. Wide-beam lasers are recommended for textured surfaces like diamond ground,
diamond grooved or tyned surfaces where they yield lower IRI values than single point or
spot lasers.
A test segment with a length of 500 meters will be selected at site for repeatability test prior
to data collection. The repeatability test shall be witnessed by the authorized representative
of the Contractor and the Project Engineer. Five profile runs will be made on the test segment
for repeatability test. The profile runs for repeatability are acceptable if the average IRI of the
two wheel/paths satisfy the following criteria:
a. The IRI values of each of the five (5) runs are within -ffile percent of the mean IRI of
the selected runs.
b. The standard deviation of IRI of the selected runs are within two percent of the mean
IRI
If the runs do not meet the above criteria, the Profiling Team shall determine if the variability
between runs are due to operator or equipment error, and make additional runs until five (5)
runs free of equipment or operator errors are obtained. Where necessary an accuracy
calibration test shall be conducted in comparison with a Class 1 Profiler (551 Walking Profiler
CS8800 or similar) to resolve said errors.
If the IRI values from the profile runs (for repeatability) meet the above criteria, three (3)
runs per lane per site should be conducted for acceptance measurement. The IRI value for
the lane shall be the average IRI of the two wheel paths for the three (3) runs combined.
If the IRI value of the whole concrete pavement meets the required value regardless if there
are areas found to have exceeded the required IRI value, no correction shall be required,
provided that the areas with exceedance have an IRI value within the tolerance limit of
0.5m/km.
However, if the IRI value of the whole concrete pavement falls beyond the prescribed IRI of
3.0 m/km for National Primary Roads and exceeds the allowable tolerance, the Contractor
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 18 of 23
may opt to undertake corrective action, otherwise, pay adjustment. The completed concrete
pavement shall be accepted on a LOT basis. A LOT shall be considered as 100 linear meters
of a lane of pavement. If the length of the last LOT is less than 100 m, it shall be considered
as a separate lot LOT disincentive pay/pay deduction will be calculated as described in the
Table 7:
Table 7. Pay Adjustment Table
IRI Acceptance Tolerance
LOT IRI Value (m/km) LOT Pay Adjustment, % of Item Cost
3.50 and below 100%
3.51 to 4.00 90%
4.01 to 4.50 70%
4.51 to 5.00 55%
5.01 to 5.50 35%
5.51 to 6.00 15%
Above 6.00 0%
If the contractor undertakes corrective action, further IRI Survey will be conducted to validate
if the pavement irregularities had been eliminated. Only one IRI survey will be done after the
corrective action takes place. If the IRI value of the whole concrete pavement meets the
prescribed IRI value of 3.0 m/km for National Primary Road and any 100 m sections exceeding
the prescribed value are within the allowable tolerance after correction, no reduction in
payment will be made; otherwise, pay adjustment shall be made based on the above Pay
Adjustment Table .
.J
3.12 Curing
Refer to Item 311.3.15, Curing of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges
and Airports, Volume II.
3.13 Sealing Joints
Joints shall be sealed with asphalt sealant soon after completion of the curing period and
before the pavement is opened to traffic, including the Contractor's equipment. Just prior to
sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign materials including membrane
curing compound and the joint faces shall be clean and surface dry when the seal is applied.
The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening to conform to the details shown
on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Material for seal applied hot shall be stirred during
heating so that localized overheating does not occur. The pouring shall be done in such a
manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. The use
of sand or similar material as a cover for the seal will not be permitted.
Preformed elastomeric gaskets for sealing joints shall be of the cross-sectional dimensions
shown on the Plans. Seals shall be installed by suitable tools, without elongation and secured
in placed with an approved lubricant adhesive which shall cover both sides of the concrete
Department Order No. \3«1. Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 19 of 23
joints. The seals shall be installed in a compressive condition and shall at time of placement
be below the level of the pavement surface by approximately six (6) mm.
The seals shall be in one piece for the full width of each transverse joint.
3.14 Protection of Pavement
The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both public traffic,
and traffic caused by his own employees and agents. This shall include watchmen to direct
traffic, and the erection of and maintenance of warning signs, lights, pavement bridges or
cross-overs, etc. The Plans or Special Provisions will indicate the location and type of device
or facility required to protect the work and provide adequately for traffic.
All boreholes after thickness and/or strength determinations of newly constructed asphalt and
concrete pavements shall be immediately filled/restored with the prescribed concrete/asphalt
mix after completion of the drilling works.
Any damage to the pavement, occurring prior to final acceptance, shall be repaired or the
pavement be replaced.
3.15 Acceptance of Concrete
No acceptance and final payment shall be made for the completed concrete pavement unless
core test for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads where the
Implementing Office is allowed to waive such test, and for Natronal Primary Roads where the
concrete pavement shall also meet the International Road Roughness (IRR) criteria at the
time of completion. The concrete pavement shall only be considered accepted if it meets the
specified IRI value at the time of completion.
The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of
three (3) consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, fc' and no
individual strength test result is deficient by more than fifteen percent of the specified
strength, fc'. A set shall consist of a minimum of three (3) concrete beam specimens.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected unless the
Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the quality of concrete
represented by failed test results is acceptable in place. At least three (3) representative cores
shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered deficient.
The location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so that there will be at least
impairment of strength of the structure. The obtaining and testing of drilled cores shall be in
accordance with AASHTO T 24 "Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete".
Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be considered adequate if the average
strength of the cores is equal to at least eighty-five percent of, and if no single core is less
than seventy-five percent of, the specified strength, fc'.
Department Order No.at Series of 2017
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 20 of 23
If the strength of control specimens does not meet the requirements of this Subsection, and
it is not feasible or not advisable to obtain cores from the structure due to structural
considerations, payment of the concrete will be made at an adjusted price due to strength
deficiency of concrete specimens as specified hereunder:
Table 8. Payment Adjustment

Deficiency in Strength of Concrete Percent (%) of Contract Price
Specimens, Percent (%) Allowed
Less than 5 100
25 or more 0
3.16 Opening to Traffic
The Engineer will decide when the pavement may be opened to traffic. The road will not be
opened to traffic until test specimens molded and cured in accordance with AASHTO T 23
"Standard Method of Test for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" have
attained the minimum strength requirements in Subsection 2.10 Proportioning, Consistency
and Strength of Concrete. If such tests are not conducted prior to the specified age the
pavement shall not be operated to traffic until 14 days after the concrete was placed. Before
opening to traffic, the pavement shall be cleaned and joint sealing completed.
3.17 Tolerance in Pavement Thickness
3.17.1 General
The thickness of the pavement will be determined by measurement of cores from the
completed pavement in accordance with AASHTO T 148 "Standard Method of Test for
Measuring Length of Drilled Concrete Cores".
The completed pavement shall be accepted on a lot basis. A lot shall be considered as 1,000
linear meters of pavement when a single traffic lane is poured or 500 linear meters when two
(2) lanes are poured concurrently. The last unit in each slab constitutes a lot in itself when its
length is at least one-half (112) of the normal lot length. If the length of the last unit is shorter
than one-half (V2) of the normal lot length, it shall be included in the previous lot.
Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramp, etc., will be grouped together
to form a lot. Small irregular areas may be included with other unit areas to form a lot.
Each lot will be divided into five (5) equal segments and one core will be obtained from each
segment in accordance with AASHTO T 24M "Standard Method of Test for Obtaining and
Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete".
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 21 of 23
3.17.2 Pavement Thickness
It is the intent of this Specification that the pavement has a uniform thickness as called for on
the Plans for the average of each lot as defined. After the pavement has met all surface
smoothness requirements, cores for thickness measurements will be taken.
In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, individual measurements which are in
excess of the specified thickness by more than five (5) mm will be considered as the specified
thickness plus five (5) mm and measurement which are less than the specified thickness by
more than 25 mm shall not be included in the average. When the average thickness for the
lot is deficient, the contract unit price will be adjusted for thickness in accordance with
Subsection 3.17.3, Adjustment for Thickness.
Individual areas within a segment found deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm shall be
evaluated by the Engineer, and if in his judgment, the deficient areas warrant removal, they
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with pavement of the specified thickness at
his entire expense. However, if the evaluation of the Engineer is that the deficient area should
not be removed and replaced, such area will not be paid.
When the measurement of any core is less than the specified thickness by more than 25 mm,
the actual thickness of the pavement in this area will be determined by taking additional cores
at no less than five (5) m intervals parallel to the center line in each direction from the affected
location until a core is found in each direction, which is not deficient in thickness by more than
25 mm. The area of slab for which no payment will be made shall be the product of the paving
width multiplied by the distance along the center line of the road between transverse sections
found not deficient in thickness by more than 25 mm. The thickness of the remainder of the
segment to be used to get the average thickness of each lot shall be determined by taking
the average thickness of additional cores which are not deficient by more than 25 mm.
3.17.3 Adjustment for Thickness
When the average thickness of the pavement per lot is deficient, payment for the lot shall be
adjusted as follows:
Table 9. Payment Adjustment

Deficiency in the Average Percent (0/0) of Contract Price
Thickness per lot (mm) per Lot
0-5 100% payment
6-10 95% payment
11 - 15 85% payment
16 - 20 70% payment
21 - 25 50% payment
More than 25 Remove and replace/ No payment

Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 22 of 23
+ No acceptance and final payment shall be made on completed pavement unless core test
for thickness determination is conducted, except for Barangay Roads where the implementing
office is allowed to waive such test.
The area to be paid for under this Item shall be the number of square meters (m2) of concrete
placed and accepted il) the completed pavement and completed pavement with wire mesh.
The width for measurements will be the width from outside edge to outside edge of completed
pavement as placed in accordance with the Plans or as otherwise required by the Engineer in
writing. The length will be measured horizontally along the center line of each roadway or
ramp. Any curb and gutter plaCed shall not be induded in the area of concrete pavement
measured.
S. Basisof Payment
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 4, Method of Measurement, shall

be paid for at the contract unit price for Roller compacted Concrete Pavement which price and
payment shall be full compensation for preparation of roadbed and finishing of shoulders,
unless otherwise provided by the Special Provisions, furnishing all materials, for mixing,
placing, finishing and curing all concrete, for furnishing and placing all joint materials, for
sawing weakened plane joints, for fitting the prefabricated center metal joint, for faciiitating
and controlling traffic, and for furnishing all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary
to complete the Item.

,
Pay Item Unit of
Description
Number Measurement
311 (6)al Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.15 thick, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)a2 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.15 thick, 7 days Square Meter
311 (6)a3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.15 thick, 3 days Square Meter
---.
311 (6)bl Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.20 thick, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)b2 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.20 thick, 7 days Square Meter
311 (6)b3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.20 thick, 3 days Square Meter
311 (6)cl Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.23 thick, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)c2 Roller Compacted Concrete flavement, 0.23 thick, i days Square Meter
311 (6)c3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.23 thick, 3 days Square Meter
311 (6)dl Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.25 thick, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)d2 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.25 thick, 7 days Square Meter
311 (6)d:3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.25 thick, :3days Square Meter
Item 311 (6)
Annex Page 23 of 23
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measurement
311 (6)e1 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.28 thiCk, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)e2 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.28 thick, 7 days Square Meter
311 (6)e3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.28 thick, 3 days Square Meter
311 (6)f1 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.30 thick, 14 days Square Meter
311 (6)f2 Roller"Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.30 thick, 7 days Square Meter
311 (6)f3 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement, 0.30 thick, 3 days Square Meter
References:
1. DPWH Standard Specifications Vol. II Roads, Highways and Airports 2013
2. AASHTO "Standard Specifications for Transportation Materials and Methods of Sampling and Testing, Part
I-Specifications and Part II-Tests.
3. ASTM t 31 Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
4. ASTM C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates
5. ASTM C 39 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
6. ASTM C 42 Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
7. ASTM C 78 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
8. ASTM C 150 Specification for Portland Cement
9. ASTM C 171 Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
10. ASTM C 3~ Specification for Uquid Membrane"Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
11. ASTM C 494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
12. ASTM C 496 Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
13. ASTM C 595 Specification for Blended HydrauliC Cements
14. ASTM C 618 Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Concrete
15. ASTM C 989 Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag f~lj-Use in Concrete and Mortars
16. ASTM C 1040 Test Methods for Density of Unhardened and Hardened Concrete In Place by Nuclear
Methods
17. ASTM C 1157 Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
18. ASTM C 1176 Practice for Making Roller-Compacted Concrete in Cylinder Molds Using a Vibrating Table
19. ASTM C 1240 Specification for Use of Silica Fume as a Mineral Admixture in Hydraulic-Cement Concrete,
Mortar and Grout
20. ASTM C 1435 Practice for Molding Roller-Compacted Concrete in Cylinder Molds Using a Vibrating Hammer
21. ASTM D 977 Specification for Emulsified Asphalt
22. ASTM D 1557 Test Methl:llts for laburamry Compattlun Characteristics uf Soil Using MOdlfietl EffOrt
23. ACI 327R -14 Guide to Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavements
24. PCA Guide Specification for Construction of Rolier-Compacted Concrete Pavements
25. ACPA Guide Specification: Roller-Compacted Concrete Pavements as Exposed Wearing Surface
Manila
2 2 NOV 2011
-
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Cost Estimation Manual for Low
Rise Buildings
NO. 137 l
.)
Series of 201~ ~.""'"'7
In line with the Department's Quality Policy to implement projects at the right cost, all
Implementing Offices are hereby directed to adopt the herein Cost Estimation Manual
for Low Rise Buildings in the determination of unit cost of Pay Items of Work involved in
the construction and repair/retrofitting of low rise building projects.
This Manual aims to enhance the technical capability of DPWH engineers in the preparation
and review of Program of Works (POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) and to
establish consistency in the format of preparation and serve as a uniform basis/reference in
the derivation of unit cost for each item of work. It shall be distributed to all concerned
offices of the Department and uploaded in the DPWH Intranet.
This Order shall be consistent with the implementation of D.O. No. 163, Series of 2015
"Standard Forms of Program of Works (POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC)"
with modification on its format and description of item numb8'r and scope of works (Annex
A) to conform with the DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works Structures, Volume
III (Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage Structures and Water Supply
Systems) and Standardized Pay Items of Work for Buildings as embodied in D.O. OS, Series
of 2017.
~~----
('
MARK A. VILLAR'
SecretarY
6.1.3 CSSD/BOC
Depa,trrent of Public Works and Highways
1111111111111I11111111111111111111111
WIN7W02039
Bureau of Construction
Cost Estimation Manual ._T
for Low Rise Buildings

FOREWORD
Consistent with its commitment to excellence, the Department of Public Works and
Highways (DPWH) has continuously formulated and developed guides and techniques in
various fields of the construction process. This is to ensure the highest standards of outputs
at the right cost. The DPWH has always endeavored to standardize all its processes to
facilitate prompt and efficient response to the needs of the Filipino people.
This Cost Estimation Manual for Low Rise Buildings provides Standard Cost Sheets for
common pay items of work in building construction in accordance with the DPWH Standard
Specifications for Public Structures (Volume III). This manual was purposely developed to
provide uniform reference/basis in unit cost estimation and in the preparation of Program of
Works (POW) and Approved Budget of Contract (ABC) in tt1e implementation of various
DPWH infrastructure projects.
~~
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7W02039
COST ESTIMATION MANUAL FOR LOW RISE BUILDINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
F()FlE:,",()Fl[) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TABLE: ()F C() NTE:NTS- - - - ------ - - - ---------- - - ---- - ---- - - --- - - ------ - - - ----- - ---- - --- - ii
[)E:FINITI()N () F TE:FlMS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- iii
UNITS, ABBFlE:VIATI()NS AN[) ACFl()NYMS----------------------------------------------- vi
PFlE:FACE:------ - - - - - - - - - - - ------- - - - ---------- - - ---- - ---- - - ---- - - ----- - - - ----- - ---- ---- ----- - vii
INTFl()[)UCTI()N----------------------------------------------------------------------------. 1
G E:N E:FlAL N ()TE:S- - - - - - -------- - - - --------- - - - ---- - ---- - - ---- - - ----- - - ------ - --- ---- --- - - -- - - 2
A. C()ST E:STIMA TI()N PFl()CE:SS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
B. STAN[)AFl[) [)E:TAILE:[) UNIT PFlICE: ANALYSIS ([)UPA) SHE:E:TS ------------------------- 10
B.1 Summary Table of Items of Work and Description --------------------------------------------. 11

Part A - Earthworks ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------. 23
.f
Part B - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Work --------------------------------------------------- 38

Part C - Finishing-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------, 49
Part D - Electrical ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 202
Part E - Mechanical ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 252
C. CALCULATI()N ()F CYCLE: TIME: F()Fl HAULING E:QUIPME:NT ------------------------------ 272
C.1 Estimated travel speed, loading/unloading time & allowance for delay -------------------- 273
C.2 Formula for the calculation of dump truck travel time ----------------------------------------. 273
C.3 Computation of cycle time -------------------------------------------------------------------------. 273
[). C()M PUT ATI()N ()F LAB()Fl FlATE:S ----------------------------------------------------------------- 274
D.1 Basis of Com putation' -------------------------------------------------------------------------------. 275

D.2 Condition for the usage of the labor rates ------------------------------------------------------. 275
D.3 Sample tabulation of labor rates for NCR -------------------------------------------------------- 276
E:. E:QUIPME:NT FlE:NTAL FlATE:S ------------------------------------------------------------------------. 277

E.1 List of equipment adopted in the standard DUPA with make, model and capacity ------- 278
ii
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Program of Works (POW)
_ - is the total estimated cost of the project which covers the Civil Works Cost,
Engineering Supervision and Administrative Overhead, Road Right-of-Way Acquisition Cost,
Construction Contingency, etc. The POW shall include information about the project location
and limits, quantity and unit cost for each item of work, construction duration, funding
source, equipment requirements, etc.
Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC)
- is the total estimated agency estimate (direct cost, indirect cost and tax) for civil
works contract of infrastructure projects, wherein it is the ceiling of award of contract for
government locally-funded projects and reference for comparison of bid costs of contractors
for both locally-funded and foreign-assisted projects.
Oetailed Unit Price Analysis (OUPA)
- is the determination of reasonable unit cost of each item of work which reflects the
breakdown showing the quantities of work items, unit prices of materials, equipment rental
rates, labor rates and DPWH-prescribed indirect costs including taxes.
Standard Labor Rates

.J
- are matrices prepared and issued by Department of Public Works and Highways
(DPWH) periodically showing the required compensation for manpower workforce of
different categories, which comprises the minimum wage as approved by the NWPC, DOLE
plus the monetary benefits.
ACEL Guidebook 2014
- is a guidebook where rental rates of commonly used equipment for infrastructure

projects are based. It is published by Association of Carriers and Equipment Lessors, (ACEL)
Inc..
Construction Materials Price Oata (CMPO)
- is a compilation of unit prices of construction materials updated quarterly per

District Engineering Office to be used as reference in the pricing of materials component of
the pay items of work in the preparation of DUPA, ABC & POW, including new items .of work
. involved in a va.
iii
DPWH Standard Specifications for Public Works and Highways
- commonly called as "Blue Book", is a compilation of detailed descriptions of work

items in constructing public works and highways projects such as roads, bridges, buildings,
etc. In other words, a compilation of specifications of standard works acceptable to the
DPWH.
- is composed of specifications containing detailed description of the workmanship,

material requirements, technical dimensions, materials proportion, datum lines and grades
and other established references to follow or adhere to, e.g. AASHTO,ASTM, etc.; basis of
measurement, payment and unit of measure/measurement; and basis of acceptance and
special details that would give the user a clear view of the work to be done.
Low Rise Building
"One-storey up to 5-storeys in height, i.e. from 3.00 m up to a maximum of

15.00 meters above established grade; while not generally requiring an elevator if the
building/structure is purely residential use; fire escapes and other safety systems are
mandatory for all low-rise buildings/structures."
Source: Implementing Rules and Regulations of
the National Building Code of the
Philippines (PD 1096), 2005 Revised
Edition
iv
UNITS AND ABBREVIATIONS ACRONYMS
0 diameter AASHTO American Association of State Highway

" inch and Transportation Officials
foot ABC Approved Budget for the Contract
% percent ACCU Air Cooled Condensing Unit
A ampere ACEL Association of Carriers and Equipment
bd-ft board-foot Lessors, Inc.
dm cubic foot per minute ACP Asphalt Concrete Pavement
-
cm centimeter ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
cyl cylinder BI Black Iron
ea each BOC Bureau of Construction
ft foot BOD Bureau of Design
ft3 cubic foot CFL Compact Fluorescent Lamp
Ga/# Gauge CHB Concrete Hollow Block
gal gallon CI Curb Inlet
h hour CMPD Construction Materials Price Data
ha hectare CP Contractor's Profit
hp horsepower CPMC Central Price Monitoring Committee
kg kilogram CWN Common Wire Nail
km kilometer DEO District Engineering Office
L liter DO Department Order
Is lump sum DOLE Department of Labor and Employment
m meter EAG Exhaust Air Grilles
m2 square meter ECC Employer's Compensation Contribution
m3 cubic meter ECOLA Emergency Cost Of Living Allowance
min minute EDC Estimated Direct Cost
mm millimeter EMT Electrical Metal Tubing
mt metric ton FAG Fresh Air Grille
pc piece FCU Fan Coil Unit
PhP Philippine Peso GI Galvanized Iron
psi pound per square inch HDPE High Density Polyethylene
thk thick IMC Intermediate Metal Conduit
tph ton per hour LED Light Emitting Diode
yd3 cubic yard NCR National Capital Region
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
NWPC National Wages and Productivity
Commission
OCM Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous
OS&Y Outside Screw/Stem and Yoke Valve
PACU Package Type Airconditioning Unit
PCCP Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
PE Polyethylene
PN Pressure Nominal
POW Program of Works
PPR-C Polyprophylene Random Copolymer
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
v
ACRONYMS
RC Reinforced Concrete
RCD Return Ceiling Diffuser
RCPC Reinforced Concrete Pipe Culvert
RLD Return Linear Diffuser
RO Regional Office
RPM Raised Pavement Markers
RSB Reinforcing Steel Bar
R_SC Rigid Steel Conduit
SCD Supply Ceiling Diffuser
SLD Supply Linear Diffuser
SPT Standard Penetration Test
SSS Social Security System
THHN Thermoplastic High Heat Nylon-coated
TW Thermoplastic Wire
TWHN Thermoplastic Water and Heat resitant
Nylon-coated
UPMO Unified Project Management Office
UPVC Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride
VO Variation Order
VRF Variable Refrigerant Flow
XLPE Cross-Linked Polyethylene
vi
PREFACE
The Department of Public Works and Highways, in pursuit of continuous

development in performing its mission, formulates standards and guidelines to establish
common bases in attaining desired outputs. This manual, Cost Estimation Manual for Low
Rise Buildings, encloses the scheme of deriving the unit cost of common items of work in
building construction using actual average productivity rates for labor-intensive or
equipment-based works in accordance with the guidelines established by the Department in
the preparation of Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC).
Since the Department also implements the construction of vertical structures like
buildings, the Bureau of Construction sees the necessity of establishing guidelines in
estimating cost for buildings aligned with the Department's mantra of implementing projects
at the right cost. Generation of this manual aims to provide a uniform basis in the
preparation of reasonable cost estimates specifically for Low Rise Buildings (up to five
storeys) which the Department is more involved of. Likewise, this manual will aid in
facilitating a more efficient review and evaluation of Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) and
Program of Works (POW).
Guidelines presented in this manual are structured to be more applicable for building
projects implemented by the DPWH but may also be used in general building construction.
Sources in the formulation of this manual were collated data from previously implemented
projects of the Bureau, contributed by nonetheless, its experienced engineers who have long
years of involvement in project implementation.
vii
INTRODUCTION
Development in construction technology drives the society to invest in building

structures designed with new innovations. In keeping up with the continuous progress in the
construction industry, the government likewise has been instituting measures in building
structures upgraded for resiliency at a reasonable cost.
The bulk of the involvement of the DPWH is in the construction of horizontal structures.
However, being one of the construction agencies of the government, it has been implementing
various vertical projects, specifically Low Rise Buildings (up to five (5) storey). It has also been
providing technical assistance on building construction to its own Implementing Offices and
other government agencies. Hence, as technical assistance and capacity building tool, this
cost estimation manual is formulated to establish a uniform basis or reference in the
preparation, review and evaluation of Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) and Approved
Budget for the Contract (ABC) particularly for government building projects. Further, this
manual aims to improve the accuracy of cost estimates and to facilitate a more efficient review
and evaluation of DUPA and Program of Works (POW) prepared by the Implementing Offices.
This manual covers only the common pay items of work in building construction with
details on the breakdown for costing of materials, labor, equipment including the overhead
cost and contingencies. Usage of this manual in the derivation of unit cost for DPWH projects
requires the user's input for unit rates of materials and labor based on the Department's
Construction Materials Price Data (CMPD) and Standard Labor Rates that are variable for
different locations (i.e. Regional and District Engineering Offices). This manual is limited only
to unit cost derivation, thus, methods and techniques in quantity take off are not discussed.
1
GENERAL NOTES
1. The capacity of equipment as presented in the standard cost sheet for each item of
work may be adjusted to a higher or lower capacity, provided the resulting unit cost is
more economical. Rental rates shall still be based on ACELGuidebook of 2014.
Example: In hauling of materials, use of Dump Truck with higher capacity of fifteen
(15) m3 instead of ten (10) m3 capacity as presented will result to a lower price, as the
capacity gets bigger, the lower the resulting cost of P45.46/m3 of hauling cost from
P54.10/m3• Furthermore, the utilization of a Payloaderwill be optimized.
2. The capacity of ten (10) m3 for the Dump Truck as presented, may be reduced in cases
of extraordinary conditions where the road has a very steep gradient, in a severely
deteriorated condition or in cases of bridges with load limitations. It is impractical
during the actual hauling to load the full capacity of the Dump Truck. A proper
explanation/justifications shall be made, however, in the preparation of estimate.
3. For items of work that involves hauling and disposal of materials where hauling distance
was indicated, in cases when actual hauling distance is shorter or longer than the
assumed hauling distance of 3 km in the standard cost sheets, corresponding
equipment hours for Dump Truck shall be adjusted based on the cycle time analysis.
The actual hauling distance should be the nearest possible disposal site determined by
the Implementing Office prior to the preparation of the ABC/POWand shall be indicated
in the DUPA.
4. For equipment utilization of less than one (1) day, the scheduled operating hours shall
be paid at operated cost per hour and the remaining hours of the minimum 8 hours a
day shall be considered for payment as bare rental rates.
5. The utilization of equipment other than the equipment model and capacity presented in
the standard cost sheets may be allowed, provided there is a corresponding justification
in the substitution. Rental rates of equipment should be based from ACELGuidebook or
the Bureau of Equipment Rental Ratesguidelines.
6. The presented DUPA is based on a one (1) gang of labor and equipment with the
specified output per unit. To increase the output, additional equipment and labor may
be added or an equipment with a higher capacity may be adopted.
7. The production outputs per item of work were established based on normal condition
and study conducted by the Bureau of Construction (BOC) field engineers during
construction of projects being implemented by the BOC.Any deviation to suit actual site
condition that tends to increase the total unit cost shall be subjected for approval by
the BOC.
2
8. The application of Mark-Up (OCM and Profit) shall be in accordance with the ranges of
the Total Estimated Direct Cost (EDe) of the project as prescribed under D.O. No. 197,
Series of 2016 or latest issuance.
9. The cost of materials component in the Standard Cost Sheets shall be based on the
latest Construction Materials Price Data submitted quarterly by the District Engineering
Offices, which includes payment of local taxes and hauling/delivery cost to site.
10. The cost of labor shall be based on the labor rates established for each District
Engineering Office, following the minimum labor wage as approved by the NWPC,
DOLE, plus monetary benefits calculated in accordance with D.O. No. 71, Series of 2012
or latest issuance.
,J
3
SECTION A
COST ESTIMATION PROCESS
.J
4
A. COST ESTIMATION PROCESS
Consultant
UPMO
Assistant Secretary
BOD & BOC Undersecretary
Secretary
District Engineering Office (DEO):
1. The Estimator shall determine the items of work involved based on the Approved Plans.
2. The Estimator shall prepare the DUPA, ABC & POW including its attachments applying
the items of work involved based on the latest standard labor rates & CMPD, standard
cost sheets and D.O. 22, Series of 2015 .
. ..0
3. The District Engineer shall approve the ABC & POW, if the project is within the Itmits of
authority delegated to him/her.
4. If beyond the authority of the DEO, forward the DUPA, ABC & POW and Approved
Construction Plans together with the required attachments to the Regional Office for
review/evaluation and approval, if the project is within the limits of the delegated
authority of the Regional Director.
5. If Planning and Design Division of the Regional Office will make an adjustment in the
quantities and delete/add pay item/s in the submitted construction plans, the ABC &
POW shall be adjusted accordingly by the District Engineering Office and resubmit the
same for approval.
Regional Office (RO):
1. The Estimator shall determine the items of work involved based on the Approved Plans.
2. The Estimator shall prepare the DUPA, ABC & POW including its attachments applying
the items of work involved based on the latest standard labor rates & CMPD, standard
cost sheets and D.O. 22, Series of 2015.
3. The Regional Director shall approve the ABC & POW, if the project is within the limits of
authority delegated to him/her.
5
4. If beyond the authority of the RO, forward the DUPA, ABC & POW and Approved
Construction Plans together with the required attachments to the Bureau of Construction
(BOC) and Bureau of Design (BOD) respectively, for review/evaluation for approval of
the Assistant Secretary for Technical Services, Undersecretary for Technical Services or
Secretary depending on the limits of authority.
5. If Bureau of Design shall make an adjustment in the quantities and delete/add pay
item/s in the submitted construction plans, the ABC & POW shall be adjusted accordingly
by the Regional Office and resubmit the same for approval.
Unified Project Management Office (UPMO):
1. The Consultant shall determine the items of work involved based on the Approved Plans.
2. The Consultant shall prepare the DUPA, ABC & POW including its attachments applying
the items of work involved.
3. The Project Director shall conduct review/evaluation of the proposed ABC & POW and
recommends its approval to the authorized approving official concerned.
4. Forward the ABC & POW and Approved Construction Plans together with the required
attachments to the Bureau of Construction (BOC) and Bureau of Design (BOD)
respectively, for review/evaluation to be approved by the Assistant Secretary for
Technical Services, Undersecretary for Technical Services or Secretary depending on the
limits of authority.
5. If the Bureau of Design shall make an adjustment in the quantities and delete/add pay
item/s in the submitted construction plans, the ABC & POW shall be adjusted accordingly
by the concerned UPMO and resubmit the same for approval.
Approval of the ABC 8r. POW shall be based on the following (or its latest
issuance):
1. Department Order No. 91, Series of 2012 - Authority of the Assistant Secretary for
Technical Services to Approve Plans, Program of Works and Approved Budget for the
Contract for DPWH Locally-Funded and Foreign-Assisted Civil Works Projects Costing
more than PhP50 Million up to PhP100 Million.
2. Department Order No. 95, Series of 2013 - Reissuance of D.O. No.9, S. 2011 Re:
Conduct of Pre-Procurement, Procurement, and Implementation Activities for DPWH
Foreign-Assisted Civil Works Projects.
3. Department Order No. 109, Series of 2014 - Approval of Plans, Program of Works
(POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract for DPWH Locally-Funded Projects
Costing PhP50 Million and below Implemented by Unified Project Management
Offices.
4. Department Order No. 140, Series of 2014 - Increased Limits of Delegated Authority
to Regional Directors to Approve Plans, Program of Work (POW) and Approved
Budget for the Contract (ABC) of Locally-Funded Projects.
5. Department Order No. 54, Series of 2011 - Revised Limits of Responsibilities and
Authorities of Concerned DPWH Offices and Officials in the Conduct of Pre-
Procurement, Procurement, and Implementation Activities for DPWH Locally-Funded
Civil Works Project.
6
PREPARATION OF DETAILED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS
1. General
a. Determine the scope of works based on approved plans and specification including
other requirements adopting the standard pay items of works per Department Order
No. 96, Series of 2016.
b. Calculate the quantity and cost of material component of every item of work based
on plans and specifications and prevailing prices of construction materials in the
Construction Materials Price Data (CMPD) with consideration of allowance for waste
and/or losses not to exceed 5% of the material's requirement.
c. Determine the appropriate quantity based on best norms and practices in the
construction industry and cost for manpower and equipment requirement to be used
based on Standard Labor Rates per Region and latest ACEL rates.
d. Determine the unit cost per item of work as presented in Item 5.
2. Determination of category of work supervisor
The appropriate number and category of supervisor including unskilled labor to be

deployed depends on the specific type and complexity of an item of work to be done. In
this l'!1anual, the labor force (crew or gang) were established based on actual study and
best practices observed during the construction of BOC implemented projects.
Example: Item gOO-Concrete Works
Forema n------------------------------------1
Skilled Worker (Mason, carpenter)----- 2
Unskilled Labor---------------------------- 6
3. Calculation of production output per hour of an item of work
The production output per hour of an item of work should be derived based on the
number of days and appropriate manpower and equipment utilized to complete the work
in accordance with the right construction methodology. In this manual, the production
output was derived by the Bureau of Construction (BOC) Engineers based on actual study
and best practices during the construction of BOC implemented projects.
Example: Item gOO-Concrete Works
Volume of Concrete = 21.50 cubic meter
Number of hours to complete the work which includes setting of equipment and
accessories, batching, delivery and pouring of concrete= 6 hours and 21 minutes
(6.85 hr)
Type and number of manpower utilized during pouring

Forema n---------------------------------- 1
Skilled Worker (Mason, Carpenter) --- 2
Unskilled Labor--------------------------- 6
7
Type and number of equipment and tools including lightings utilized during pouring:
Transit Mixer ------------------------------4

Pump-Crete --------------------------------1
Concrete Vibrator-------------------------- 2
Lighting System (if applicable) ----------1
Production output per hour=volume of concrete poured/number of

hours consumed to complete the
pouring session
= 25.5 cu.m/ 6.85 hr
= 3.72 cu.m/hr
4. Determination of percentages of Overhead, Contingency and Miscellaneous

(OCM) expenses, Profit and Value-Added Tax (VAT)
The percentages of OCM, Profit and VAT to be applied to the estimated direct cost (i.e.
cost of material, labor and equipment rental) should be based on Department Order
(DO) No. 197, Series of 2016 (Guidelines in the Preparation of Approved Budget for the
Contract) or latest issuance.
5. Determination of unit cost per item of work
Unit Cost=total unit direct cost (i.e. cost of materials, labor,

Equipment) plus indirect cost (i.e. OCM, Profit and
VAT)
J
Example: Item 900-Concrete Works
DETAILED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS (DUPA)
Ilsm No.!Descnplion 900 Structural Concrete

Unn of Measurement m'
Oulpuf per hour 3.72 m3
Designation No. ofPersonis No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhPI

A. Labor
a Construction Foreman 1 tOO 12943 12943

b..Skilled laborer 2 100 9510 19020
c Unskilled Laborer 6 tOO 73.26 439.56
Sub· Total for A 75$.19
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhPI
B. Equipment
a. Concrete Vibrator 2 1.00 91.25 18250

b Pumpc"'le 1 0.27 2,076.00 560 52
Minor Tools (10% of tebor Cost)
Sub· Total for B 743.02
C. 1,50221
D. Outpul per Hour
E. Direct Von Cos! (C .• 0) 403 82
Name and Specification Unit QlIIII1tity Unit Coal Amount (PhPI

F. Materials
a. Ready Mix, Class All/Class B/Class CiClass P, 7

ays/14 days! 28 days 105 3.475 GO 3,64875
8
6. Cost estimation techniques and best practices
a. Skills in the interpretation of the plans and specifications

b. Wide experience in actual construction and estimating works
c. Familiarity with different types of construction materials and
equipment
d. Consideration on actual site condition in the preparation of DUPA
i.e. hauling distance, terrain, etc.
e. Familiarity on laws, policies, guidelines and procedures
pertaining to the implementation of government infrastructure
projects to ensure cost estimates are done at the right cost
.J
9
SECTION B
STANDARD DETAILED UNIT

PRICE ANALYSIS (DUPA)
SHEETS
.J
10
B.1 SUMMARYTABLEOF ITEMSOFWORKAND DESCRIPTION
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
PART A EARTHWORKS
800( 1) Clearing and Grubbing (m2) 23
I-
800(2) Clearing and Grubbing (I.s.) 24
800(3)a Individual Removal of Trees (Small a, 150mm 0-300 mm 0) 25
Individual Removal of Trees (Small b, above 300 mm 0 up to

800(3)b 26
500 mm 0)
Individual Removal of Trees (Small c, above 500 mm 0 up to

800(3)c 27
750 mm 0)
Individual Removal of Trees (Small d, above 750 mm 0 up to

800(3)d 28
900 mm 0)
800( 4) Individual Removal of Trees (large, above 900 mm 0 ) 29
803( 1)a Structure Excavation (Common Soil) 30
803( 1)b Structure Excavation (Soft Rock) 31
803( 1)c Structure Excavation (Hard Rock) 32
803(2) Trimming Works .J

33
803(3) Soil Stabilization 34
804( 1)a Embankment from Structure Excavation 35
804( 1)b Embankment from Common Borrow by Equipment 36
804( 4) Gravel Bedding 37
PART B PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE WORKS

Structural Concrete (Ready Mix, Class AA/Class A/Class
900 B/Class C/Class P/Seal Concrete, 38
7 days/14 days/ 28 days)
Structural Concrete for Footing and Slab on Fill ( Ready Mix

900( 1) 39
Concrete, Class A, 7 days/14 days)
Structural Concrete for Footing Tie Beam, Column, Suspended

900( 1) Slab, Girder/Beam (Ready Mix Concrete, Class A, 7 days/14 40
days)
11 Summary Table of Items of Work and Description

Structural Concrete for Footing and Slab on Fill (Class A, 28

900( 1)c2 41
days)
Structural Concrete for Footing Tie Beam, Column, Suspended

900( 1) 42
Slab, Girder/Beam (Class A, 28 days)
901 ( 1) Lean Concrete (Ready Mix, 28 days) 43

.
901(1) Lean Concrete (Manual Mixing) 44
Reinforcing Steel of Reinforced Concrete Structures for One-

902( 1) 45
Storey, Grade 40/Grade 60
Reinforcing Steel of Reinforced Concrete Structures for Two

902(1 ) 46
upto Five Storey, Grade 40/Grade 60
903(2) Formworks and Falseworks (for two to five-storey building) 47
903(2) Formworks and Falseworks (for one-storey building) 48
PART C FINISHING
1OOO( 1) Soil Poisoning 49
1001 (1 )a 50mm0-100mm0 PVC Pipe, Series 600/ Series 1000 50
1001 (1 )a 150 mm - 300 mm 0 PVC Pipe, Series 600/ Series 1000 51
1001 ( 1)b 1 150 mm 0 Concrete Pipe 52

'.
1001 (1 )b2 200 mm 0 Concrete Pipe 53
1001 (1 )c 50 mm 0 - 100 mm 0 High Density Polyethylene (HOPE) Pipe 57
1001 (1 )c 150 mm 0 - 300mm 0High Density Polyethylene (HOPE) Pipe 58
1001 (2) PVC/HDPE Fittings 59
1001 (3) Concrete Gutter 60
1001 (6) Catch Basin (Concrete/CHB) 61
1001 (7) Junction Box (Concrete/CHB) 62
1001 (8) Sewer Line Works (lump sum) 63

1001 (9) Storm Drainage and Downspout (lump sum) 64
1002(2)a 13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Galvanized Iron Pipe 65
1002(2)a 65 mm 0 - 150 mm 0 Galvanized Iron Pipe 66
1002(2) Galvanized Iron Fittings 67
13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-

1002(3)a 68
C) Pipe, PN 10/ PN 16/ PN 20
63 mm 0 - 100 mm 0 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR

1002(3)a 69
C) Pipe PN 10/ PN 16/ PN 20
1002(3) Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Fittings 70
1002(4)a 13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Blue 71
1002(4)a 65 mm 0 - 100 mm 0 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Blue 72
1002(4) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings, Blue 73
1002(5) Plumbing Fixtures 74
1002(5) Water Closet! Urinal with Complete Accessories 75
Kitchen Sink/Scrub Up Sink/Slop Sink with Complete

1002(5) 76
Accessories
.J
Wall Hung/Countertop/Under Counter Lavatory with Complete
1002(5) 77
Accessories
1002(5)h Floor Drain Plates 78
1002(5) Soap Holder (Toilet Soap/ Liquid Soap) 79
1002(5) Toilet Tissue Holder/Dispenser 80
1002(5) Bidet! Faucet! Hose Bibb 81
1002(5)n Stainless Steel Grab bar 82
1002(5)0 Shower head/ Shower Valve 83
1002(5)p Facial Mirror 84
1002(6) Cold Waterline Pipes and Fittings 85
1002(7) Hot Waterline Pipes and Fittings 86
4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine Plywood/ 6 mm

1003(1 ) 87
Marine Plywood/ 6mm Ordinary Plywood on Metal Frame Ceiling

4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine Plywood/ 6 mm

1003(1 )a Marine Plywood/ 6mm Ordinary Plywood in Wood Framing 88
Ceiling
1003( 1)e Gypsum Board on Metal Frame Ceiling 89
4.5mm/ 6.0 mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5mm/ 6.0 mm 4' X 8' thk
fiber cement board/ 4.5mm Marine Plywood/ 6.0 mm Marine
1003(2) 90
Plywood/ 6.0 mm Ordinary Plywood on Metal Frame Double
Wall Partition
1004(2) Finishing Hardware 91
Residential Casement Steel Windows/ Heavy Duty Side-hinged

1005 92
Ventilator/ Projected Ventilator/ Awning Ventilator/ Grille Window
Hollow Steel Door/ Steel Flush Door/ Grille Door/ Steel Louver
1006 93
Door
1006(5) Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door 94
1007 Aluminum Glass Door (Sliding Type/Swing Type) 95

Aluminum Glass Window (Sliding/ Casement! Awning/ Fixed
1008 96
Type)
1009( 1)a Jalousie Window (Glass) 97
101 O( 1) Frames (Jambs, Sill, Head, Transoms and Mullions) 98
1010(2)a Hollow Core Flush Door 99
1010(2)b Wooden Panel Door 100
1011(1 ) Steel/ Aluminum Roll Up Door 101
10 12( 1) Tempered Glass Door (10 mm/ 12mm) 102
10 12( 1) Tempered Glass Windows (8 mm/ 10mm) 103
10 13( 1) Corrugated Metal Roofing 104
Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory (Ridge/Hip

1013(2) 105
Rolls/Flashings/Counter FlashingNalley Roll)
1013(2)c Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory (Gutter) 106
Prepainted Metal Sheets (Corrugated, Short Span/ Long Span,

1014 107
below 0.427 thk/ above 0.427 thk)
Prepainted Metal Sheets (Rib Type, Short Span/ Long Span,
1014 108
below 0.427 thk/ above 0.427 thk)
10 16( 1)a Waterproofing Cement Base 109

10 16( 1)b Liquid Waterproofing 110
1016(2) Built-up and Preformed Membrane 111
50mm 0 - 100mm 0 Roof Drain/Canopy Drain/ Gutter

1017 112
Drain with Strainer
10 18( 1) Glazed Tiles and Trims 113
1018 Unglazed Tiles/ Granite Tiles/ Synthetic Granite Tiles 114
10 19( 1) Wood TUes (Narra, Tanguile, others) 115
10 19( 1)d Laminated Wood Tiles 116
1020(1 ) Vinyl Tiles 117
1021(1)a Plain Cement Floor Finish 118
1021(3) Floor Topping 119
1023(1 ) Granolithic Marble Work 120
1024(1 ) Pea Gravel Finish 121
1026( 1) Pebble Washout Finish 122
1027(1) Cement Plaster Finish 123

.J
1032(1 )a Painting Works (Masonry Painting) 124
1032(1 )b Painting Works (Wood Painting) 125
1032(1 )c Painting Works (Metal Painting) 126
1032(2) Varnishing Works 127
1032(4) Ducco Finish 128
1034( 1) Damproofing (Polyethylene Sheets) 129
1038( 1) Reflective Insulation 130
1042(1) Stainless Steel Door and Frames 131
1043( 1) PVC Doors and Frames (set) 132
1045( 1) Perforated Aluminum Ceiling Panels 133
100 mm CHB Non Load Bearing/Load Bearing (including

1046 134
Reinforcing Steel)
150mm CHB Non-LoadBearing/ Load Bearing (including
1046 135
Reinforcing Steel)

1047(1) Structural Steel Roof Framing 136
1047(2)a Structural Steel Roof Framing 137
1047(2)b Structural Steel Roof Truss 138

- 1047(2)c Structural Steel Purlins 139
1047(3)a Metal Structure Accessories (Anchor Bolts) 140
1047(3)b Metal Structure Accessories (Sag rods) 141
1047(3)c Metal Structure Accessories (Turnbuckle) 142
1047(3)d Metal Structure Accessories (Crossbracing) 143
1047(4) Metal Structure Accessories (Crossbracing) 144
1047(5) Metal Structure Accessories (Steel Plates) 145
1048(1 ) Carbon Fiber (1 layer) 146
1048(2) Glass Fiber 147
1049( 1)a Jet Grouting (0.80 m diameter) 148
1052(1 ) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished 149

.J
1052(2) Treated Timber Piles, preserved, furnished 150
1052(3) Steel H-Piles, furnished 151
Precast Concrete Piles, furnished

1052(4)a.1 152
(400mm x 400mm - type A)

1052(4)a.2 153
(400mm x 400mm - type B)

1052(4)b.1 154
(450mm x 450mm - type C)

1052(4)b.2 155
(450mm x 450mm - type D)
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, furnished

1052(5)a 156
(400 mm x 400 mm)
Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, furnished

1052(5)b 157
(450 mm x 450 mm)
1052(6) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished 158
1052(7)a Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished (0.50 m x 0.35 m) 159

ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION .
PAGE NO.
Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished (0.50 m x 0.35 m),

1052(7)b 160
'Ready Mix Concrete)
1052(8) Untreated Timber Piles, driven 161
1052(9) Treated Timber Piles, driven 162
1052(10) Steel H-Piles, driven 163
1052( 11) Steel Pipe Piles, furnished and driven 164
1052(12) Structurql Steel Sheet Piles, driven 165
1052(13) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven 166
1052(14)a Precast Concrete Piles, driven (soft strata) 167
1052(14)b Precast Concrete Piles, driven (hard strata) 168
1052(15)a Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, driven (soft strata) 169
1052( 15)b Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, driven (hard strata) 170
1052( 16)a Test Piles, furnished and driven (type A, B, C or D), soft strata 171
1052( 16)b Test Piles, furnished and driven (type A, B, C or D), hard strata 172
Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 0.80 m 0, fc' = 28 MPa

1052(17)a 173
(ordinary soil condition) .J

1052( 17)b 174
(ordinary soil condition)
1052( 17)c 175
1052( 17)d 176
1052( 17)e 177
1052( 17)f 178
1052(18)a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells, furnished and driven 179
Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells, furnished and driven (Ready

1052(18)b 180
Mix Concrete)
1052(19)a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes, furnished and driven 181
Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes, furnished and driven (Ready

1052( 19)b 182
Mix Concrete)

1052(20) Pile Shoes 183
1052(23)a Bored Piles, 0.80 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 184
1052(23)b Bored Piles, 1.00 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 185
1052(23)c Bored Piles, 1.20 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 186
1052(23)d Bored Piles, 1.50 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 187
1052(23)e Bored Piles, 1.80 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 188
1052(23)f Bored Piles, 2.00 m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 189
1052( 24)a Permanent Casing (0.80 m 0) 190
1052(24)b Permanent Casing (1.00 m 0) 191
1052(24)c Permanent Casing (1.20 m 0) 192
1052(24)d Permanent Casing (1.50 m 0) 193
1052(24 )e Permanent Casing (1.80 m 0) 194
1052(24)f Permanent Casing (2.00 m 0) 195
1052(25) Splicing of RC Piles with Epoxy (400 mm x 400 mm) 196
1052(26) Splicing of RC Piles with Epoxy (450 mm x 456 mm) 197
1052(27)a Pile Integrity Testing (Sonic), ordinary soil condition 198

.
1052(27)b Pile Integrity Testing (PIT), ordinary soil condition 199
1052(22)b High Strain Dynamic Testing (PDA), ordinary soil condition 200
1052 (29) Micro Piles In Drilled Holes, 0.20m 0 (ordinary soil condition) 201
D. ELECTRICAL
15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)!lntermediate

11OO(1) 202
metal Conduit (IMC)! Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)
32 mm 0 - 40 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)! Intermediate

11OO(1) 203
. metal Conduit (IMC)! Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)
50 mm 0 - 65 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit! Intermediate metal

11OO(1) 204
Conduit (IMC)! Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)

80 mm 0 - 100 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)/ Intermediate

11 OO( 1) 205
metal Conduit (IMC)/ Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)
1100(3) 15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 Flexible Metal Conduit 206
1100(6) 15 mm 0 - 32 mm 0 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes 207
1100 PVC/RSC/IMC/ EMT Conduit Fittings 208
1100 Junction/ Utility/ Pull/ Square Box 209
1100(30) Conduit Works, Boxes and Fittings 210
1101(2) 1.6 mm2 - 5.5 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2) 211
1101(2) 8.00 mm2 - 22 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2) 212
1101(2) 30.00 mm2 - 38 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2) 213
1101(2) 50.00 mm2 - 60 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2) 214
1101 (2) 80.00 mm2 - 125 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHN/TWHN2) 215
1101(2) 150.00 mm2 - 250 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHNITWHN2) 216
1101(2) 325.00 mm2 - 400 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHN/TWHN2) 217
1101(2)a23 500.00 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHN/TWHN2} 218
1101(4) XLPE Electric Wires 219
1101(7) 2.00 mm2 - 5.5 mm2 Bare Copper Wire 220
1101 Switches 226
Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/

Heavy Duty Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type
1101 (GT)/ Weather Proof Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, 227
Grounding Type (GT)/ Pop-up Type/Floor Triplex Convenience
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)

ITEM NO . DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
•
Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT) /
Weather Proof Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle,
Grounding Type (GT)/ Special Purpose Convenience
1101 Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type for ACU, WH, etc/ 228
Explosion Proof Type Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle,
- Grounding Type (GT)/ Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle
with Ground Fault Circuit Interupter
Pop-up Type/Floor Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle,

Grounding Type (GT)/ Pop-up Type/Floor Duplex Convenience
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/ Explosion Proof Type
1101 229
Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/
Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle with Ground Fault Circuit
Interrupter
1101 (42) Wires and Wiring Devices 230
Panel Board with Main Breaker/Branches, 3 wires, 1 neutral, 250

1102 231
Amp - 400 Amp
Panel Board with Main Breaker/Branches, 3 wires, 1 neutral, 50
1102 232
Amp - 200 Amp
NEMA I (Enclosed Circuit Breaker) Single Phase or Three Phase
1102 233
Commercial/Industrial Type
NEMA 3R (Enclosed Circuit Breaker) Single P~ase or Three
1102 234
Phase Commercial/Industrial Type
.
Motor Control Center with main, branch breaker and motor

1102 235
starter (NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and 4X) Flush or Surface Mounted
Generator (Stand by and Continuous), Synchonizing Panel for

1102(8) 236
Generator, High Voltage Switch Gear
Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 AT, 70 AT,

1102 3P, 240V: NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x Flushed/ Surface 237
Mounted
Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 AT, 70 AT ,

1102 2P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x Flushed/ Surface 238
Mounted
Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, 125 AT, 205
1102 AT, 225 AT, 3P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x Flushed/ 239
Surface Mounted

Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, 125 AT, 200
1102 AT , 2P, 225 AT, 2P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x 240
Flushedf Surface Mounted
Low Voltage Switch Board Main 2500-4000 AT, 3P, 240V NEMA
1102 241
I with Breaker
1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Breaker 250-500 Amp 242
1103(1 ) Lighting Fixtures 243
Fluorescent Lighting Fixture with Ballast flight Emitting Diode

1103(2) 244
(LED) Bulb, 1 Bulb

1103(2) 245
(LED) Bulb, 2 Bulbs

1103(2) 246
(LED) Bulb, 3 Bulbs

1103(2) 247
(LED) Bulb, 4 Bulbs
Downlight/Pinlight Fixture with One- Compact Fluorecent Lamp

1103(5) 248
(CFL) or LED Bulb, 1 Bulb
Downlight/Pinlight Fixture with Two- Compact Fluorecent Lamp

1103(5) 249
(CFL) or LED Bulb, 2 Bulb
f
1103( 11) High Bay Aluminum Reflector, Dome Luminaire 250
1103(12) Die-Cast Aluminum Floodlight with Electrocoat Paint Finish 251
PART E MECHANICAL
1200 Air Conditioning and Refrigiration System 252
1201 (1 ) Water Pumping System 253
1202(1 ) Automatic Water Sprinkler System 254
1202(2)a Fire Pump with complete control and standard accessories 255
1202(2)b Jockey Pump with complete control and standard accessories 256
1202(3)a Sprinkler Head, upright/pendent/wall 257
1202(3)b Alarm Check Valve 258
1202(3)c Flow Meter 259
1202(3)d OS & Y Gate Valve 175 psi 260

1202(3)e Pressure Gauge 261
1202(3)f Pressure Relief Valve 262
1202(3)g Floor Control Valve 263
_ 1202(3)h1 Inspector Test Valve 264
1202(3)h2 Inspector Test Connection 265
1202(4) 25 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Black Iron (B.I.) Pipe 266
1202(4) 65 mm 0 -150 mm 0 Black Iron (B.I.) Pipe 267
1202 Fittings 268
1202(10) Fire Hose Valve siames 150 mm 0 x 2 w x 65 mm 0 with cap 269
1202( 11) Fire Hose Cabinet 270
1202(12) Fire Extinguisher 271

Item No./Description 800(1) Clearing and Grubbing

Unit of Measurement m2
2
Output per hour 500.00 m
Designation No. of Person/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District
b. Unskilled Laborer 2 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
3
a. Dumptruck (12 yd ) 2 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
d
b. Payloader (1.50 m ) 1 1.00
c. Bulldozer (155 hp), D65A-8 1 1.00
Note:
Assumed hauling distance is 3 km. If actual
hauling distance is shorter or longer than 3 km, the time
of dump truck will be adjusted accordingly based on the
hauling cycle analysis.
Based on assumed 150 mm cut all throughout. A

corresponding adjustment in the output shall be
computed based on the actual field requirements .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
D. Output per Hour = 500.00 m
E. Direct Unit Cost (C + D)
Name and Specification Unit Quantity Unit Cost Amount (PhP)
F. Materials
Sub - Total for F

G. Direct Unit Cost (E + F)
H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G
I. Contractor's Profit (CP) 10%/8% of G
J. Value Added Tax (VAT) 5% of (G + H + I)
K. Total Unit Cost (G + H + I + J)
23 Part A - Earthworks
Item No.lDescription 800(2) Clearing and Grubbing

Unit of Measurement Is
Output per hour 1.00 Is
Designation No. of Personls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. labor
See d~rivations for Item Nos. 800(1), 800(3) and 800(4)
Sub - Total for A

Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
See derivations for Item Nos. 800(1), 800(3) and 800(4)
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1.00 Is
F. Materials
See derivations for Item Nos. 800(1), 800(3) and 800(4)
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book, shall be based on the derived outputs of Item No. 800(1),
800(3), and 800(4)
Item No.lDescription 800(3)a Individual Removal of Trees (Small a, 150mm 0-300 mm 0)

Unit of Measurement ea
Output per hour 1.00 ea
Designation No. of Person/s No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 0.33 Labor Rates are variable per RegioniDistrict
b. Skilled Laborer 1 0.33 based on minimum wage as approved by
c. Unskilled Laborer 2 0.33 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
3
a. Backhoe (0.80 m ) 1 0.25 See latest ACEL rental rates.
b. Dumptruck (12 yd3) 1 0.17
c. Chain Saw 1 0.17
Minor Tools (5% of Labor Cost)
Note:
Add Boom Truck if necessary for trimming in urban
areas .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1.00 ea
F. Materials
a. Rope, 1" 0- 5 uses m 20.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
District based on the prevailing unit prices in
the locality which include payment of local
taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
established quarterly by Central Office Price
Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F

I. Contractor's Profit (CP) 10%1 8% of G
Item No.lDescription 800(3)b Individual Removal of Trees (Small b, above 300 mm 0 up to 500 mm 0)
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 0.67 Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict
b. SkiUed Laborer 1 0.67 based on minimum wage as approved by
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Backhoe (0.80 m3) 1 0.50 See latest ACEL rental rates.

c. Chain Saw 1 0.33
Note:
areas .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1.00 ea
F. Materials
a. Rope, 1" 0- 5 uses m 20.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
I. Contractor's Profit (CP) 10%/8% ofG
Item No.lDescription 800(3)c Individual Removal of Trees (Small c, above 500 mm 0 up to 750 mm 0)
A. labor
b. Skilled laborer 1 3.33 based on minimum wage as approved by
c. Unskilled laborer 2 3.33 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

3
b. Dumptruck (12 yd ) 1 1.67
c. Chain Saw 1 1.67
Minor Tools (5% of labor Cost)
Note:
areas .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Rope, 1" 0 -5 uses m 20.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 800(3)d Individual Removal of Trees (Small d, above 750 mm 0 up to 900 mm 0).
Designation No. of Personls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. Labor
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment

c. Chain Saw 1 3.33
Note:
areas.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
.
a. Rope, 1" 0- 5 uses m 20.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 800(4) Individual Removal ofTrees (large, above 900 mm (11)
A. Labor
b. SkiUed Laborer 1 8.33 based on minimum wage as approved by
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
3
a. Backhoe (0.80 m ) 1 6.25 See latest ACEL rental rates.
3
b. Dumptruck (12 yd ) 1 4.16
c. Chain Saw 1 4.16
Note:
areas .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Rope, 1" (11- 5 uses m 20.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: The presented DUPA is based on a one (1) gang of labor and equipment with the specified output of 1.00 ea for 8.33h.
To increase the output, additional equipment and labor may be added.
Item No.lDescription 803(1)a Structure Excavation (Common Soil)

Output per hour 20.00 m3
A. Labor
Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

a. COlTstructionForeman 1 1.00
based on minimum wage as approved by
b. Unskilled Laborer 3 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment

b. Dump Truck (12 yd3) 2 1.00
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 20.00 m3
F. Materials

Note: 1. Additional labor and/or equipment may be added for dispossal of surplus excavated material.
Item No./Description 803(1)b Structure Excavation (Soft Rock)

3
A. Labor

a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
3
a. Dump Truck (12 yd ) 2 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
3
b. Backhoe (0.80 m ) 1 0.50
c. Backhoe with Breaker (0.80 m3) 1 0.50
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
3
F. Materials

Item No.lDescription 803( 1)c Structure Excavation (Hard Rock)

A. Labor

a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
a. Dump Truck (12 yd3) 2 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
b. Backhoe (0.80 m3) 1 0.25
c. Backhoe with Breaker (0.80 m3) 1 0.75
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

Item No.lDescription 803(2) Trimming Works

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

Item No.lDescription 803(3) Soil Stabilization

Output per hour
A. Labor
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour =
F. Materials

Note: This Item shall depend on the method recommended by the designer. Attach at least 3 quotations from specialty
contractor.
Item No./Description 804(1)a Embankment from Structure Excavation

3
A. labor

a. CORStruction Foreman 1 1.00
b. Unskilled laborer 3 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Plate Compactor (5 hp) 1 0.75 See latest AGEL rental rates.

b. Backhoe (0.80 m3) 1 0.75
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

Item No./Description 804(1)b Embankment from Common Borrow by Equipment

A. Labor

a. CORStructionForeman 1 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
a. Plate Compactor 1 0.75 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Backhoe (0.80 m3) 1 0.75
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
Prices of materials are variable per Region!
a. Embankment Materials m3 1.25 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
(wI 25% Shrinkage Factor) the locality which include payment of local

Item No./Description 804(4) Gravel Bedding

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Plate Compactor 1 0.50 See latest ACEL rental rates.

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
3
F. Materials
Prices of materials are variable per Region/

a. Gravel Bedding (G1) m3 1.05 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
(wI 5% Shrinkage Factor) the locality which include payment of local

Item No./Description 900 Structural Concrete (Ready Mix, Class AAlClass A/Class B/Class C/Class P/Seal Concrete,
7 days/14 days/28 days)
3
A. labor

b. Skilled laborer 2 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
c. Unskilled laborer 6 1.00
Sub - Total for A

.
B. Equipment
a. Concrete Vibrator 2 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Pumpcrete 1 0.27
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix, Class AAlClass B/Class C/Class P, 7 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
3
days/14 daysl 28 days m 1.05 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for concrete pouring by pumpcrete. Item Nos. 900(1 )a1, 900(1 )b1, 900(1 )c1, 900(2)a,
900(2)b, 900(2)c, 900(3)a, 900(3)b, 900(3)c, 900(4)a, 900(4)b, 900(4)c, 900(5) and 900(6) shall used this cost sheet.
38 Part B - Plain and Reinforced Concrete Works

Item No./Description 900( 1) Structural Concrete for Footing and Slab on Fill ( Ready Mix Concrete, Class A, 7 days/14 days)
3
A. Labor

c. Unskilled Laborer 6 1.00 DOLERefer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

Minor Tools (10% of Labor Cost) 1 1.00
.f
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
3
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, 7 days/14 days m

3
1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total F
Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for concreting footings and slab on fill by using ready mix concrete and manual pouring of
concrete applicable for Item Nos. 900(1 )b2 and 900(1 )c2.

Item No.lDescription 900(1) Structural Concrete for Footing Tie Beam, Column, Suspended Slab, Girder/Beam (Ready Mix
Concrete, Class A, 7 days/14 days)
Note:
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment

,J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, 7 days/14 days m3 1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total F
Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for concreting footing tie beam, column, suspended slab, girderlbeam by using ready mix
concrete and manual pouring of concrete applicable for Item Nos. 900(1)a3, 900(1)a4, 900(1)a5, 900(1)a6, 900(1)b3,
900(1 )b4, 900(1 )b5, and 900(1)b6.

Item No./Description 900(1 )c2 Structural Concrete for Footing and Slab on Fill (Class A, 28 days)
3
A. labor

b. Unskilled laborer 4 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. One Bagger Mixer 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.

Sub - Total for B 0.00

C. Total (A + B) 0.00
3
F. Materials
a. Gravel 3 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m 1.00
b.Sand 3
m 0.50 the locality which include payment of local
c. Portland Cement bags 9.10 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for concreting footings and slab on fill by using manual mixing and manual pouring of
concrete.

Item No./Description 900(1) Structural Concrete for Footing Tie Beam, Column, Suspended Slab, Girder/Beam (Class A, 28 days)
Unit of Measurement
Output per hour
A. labor
- Labor Rates are variable per Region/District
b. Unskilled laborer 4 1.00
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of Hour/s Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment

Sub - Total for B .
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Gravel 3 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m 1.00
3
b. Sand m 0.50 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

I. Contractor's Profit (CP) 10%/ 8% of G
Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for concreting footing tie beam, column, suspended slab, and girder/beam by using manual
mixing and manual pouring of concrete applicable for Item Nos. 900(1 )c3, 900(1 )c4, 900(1 )c5 and 900(1 )c6. Ideally, this
cost sheet shall be used for one-storey to two-storey buildings involving one to two spans in remote areas.

Item No./Description 901(1) Lean Concrete (Ready Mix, 28 days)

3
A. Labor

c. Unskilled Laborer 6 1.00 DOLERefer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

b. Pumpcrete 1 0.27
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
3
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, Lean Concrete, 28days 3

1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
m
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 901(1) Lean Concrete (for manual mixing)

3
A. Labor

b. Unskilled Laborer 4 1.00 DOLERefer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

Sub - Total for B 0.00

C. Total (A + B) 0.00
3
F. Materials

a. Gravel m3 1.00
3
b.Sand m 0.50 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for lean concrete by using manual mixing and manual pouring of concrete.

Item No./Description 902(1) Reinforcing Steel of Reinforced Concrete Structures for One-Storey, Grade 40/Grade 60
Unit of Measurement kg
Output per hour 143.438 kg
A. La bor
a. COr:!struction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
a. Bar Cutter 1 0.50 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Bar Bender 1 0.50
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 143.438 kg
F. Materials
a. Deformed Reinforcing Steel kg 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. #16 Galvanized Iron Wire kg 0.015 the locality which include payment of local
c. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos 902(1 )a1 and 902(1 )a2.

Item No./Description 902( 1) Reinforcing Steel of Reinforced Concrete Structures for Two upto Five Storey
A. Labor
a. COllStruction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

c. Unskilled Laborer 12 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Bar Cutter 1 0.50 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Bar Bender 1 0.50
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 129.094 kg
F. Materials
a. Deformed Reinforcing Steel Prices of materials are variable per Region/

kg 1.00
b. #16 Galvanized Iron Wire kg 0.015 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 903(2) Formworks and Falseworks (for two to five-storey building)
A. Labor
Installation
b. Skilled Laborer 4 1.00
Stripping
b. Unskilled Laborer 6 0.56
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity Quantity No. of Dayls Daily Rental Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
=
Area 205.01 m2
a. H-Frame 1.7 m x 1.2m, set 40 14.00 Rental cost for scaffoldings may vary per
RegionlDistrict.
2 pes H-frames
4 pcs diagonal cross braces
4 pcs horizontal braces
8 pcs joint pins
b. Shoring Jack, 3.8 m full extension 62 14.00
c. Adjustable U-head Jack, 0.6m 80 14.00
d. Adjustable Base Jack, 0.6m 80 14.00
e. 1-1/2" GI Pipe x 6.0 m 62 14.00
f. 1-1/2" GI Pipe x 3.0 m 16 14.00
g. 1-1/2" GI Pipe x 4.0 m 32 14.00
h. 1-1/2" GI Pipe x 1.0 m 216 14.00
i. Tie Rod x 0.60m 278 14.00 .J
j. Round Wing Nut 558 14.00

Note:
Area of considerationwas basedon the total areaof
formworksfor 2 baysof standardschoolbuilding,9.5 m x
9.0 m, and heightof 3.2m.
Sub - Total for B
C. Sub - Total for C (B + Area)
4.5 m2
E. Direct Unit Cost (A + D) + C
F. Materials
Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
a. Phenolic Board (0.019 x 1.2 x 2.4) - 5 uses pc 0.347 the locality which include payment of local
c. Good Lumber - 3 uses bd ft 4.727 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost)
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This cost sheet analysis is only applicable for Formworks and Falseworks considering steel scaffoldings for two to five
storey buildings.
2. Area of consideration includes beams, columns, and suspended slabs.

Item No./Description 903(2) Formworks and Falseworks (for one-storey building)

2
Unit of Measurement m
A. Labor -
Installation
b. Skilled Laborer based on minimum wage as approved by
2 1.00
Stripping
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity Quantity No. of Dayls Daily Rental Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Minor Tools (10 % ofLabor Cost)
.J
Sub - Total for 6

C. Sub - Total for C (6 + Area)
E. Direct Unit Cost (A + D) + C
F. Materials
a. Ordinary Plywood - 3 uses Prices of materials are variable per Region/

pcs 0.347
b. Good Lumber - 3 uses bd ft 7.190 the locality which include payment of local
c. Assorted Common Wire Nails kg 0.21 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This cost sheet analysis is only applicable for Formworks and Falseworks considering wood scaffoldings for a one-storey
building.

Item No.lDescription 1000(1 ) Soil Poisoning

Unit of Measurement L
Output per hour 5.40 L
A. Labor

DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labar Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 5.40 L
F. Materials

a. Soil Poisoning L 1.00
Sub - Total for F

49 Part C - Finishing
Item No.lDescription 1001(1)a 50 mm ¢ -100 mm ¢ PVC Pipe, Series 6001 Series 1000
A. Labor

c. Unskilled Laborer
2 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 3.00m
F. Materials

a. 50 mm - 100 mm 0 PVC Pipe, Series 600/Series
m 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
1000
the locality which include payment of lacal
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1001(1)a1, 1001(1)a2,1001(1)a3, 1001(1)a5, 1001(1)a5, and 1001(1)a7.
Item No./Description 1001(1)a 150 mm - 300 mm 0 PVC Pipe, Series 6001 Series 1000
A. Labor

DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labar Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 4.00m
F. Materials
a. 150 mm 0 PVC Pipe, Series 6001 Series 1000 m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Usethiscostsheetforltem Nos.1001(1)a4,1001(1)a8,1001(1)a9,1001(1)a10and 1001(1)a11.
Item No./Description 1001(1)b1 150 mm f2J Concrete Pipe

Output 1.00 m
Designation No. of Person/s No. of Hour/s Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Plate Compactor (5 hp) 0.09

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1.00 m
F. Materials

a. Portland Cement m3 0.19
b.Sand bag 0.01 the locality which include payment of local
c. Concrete Pipe (150 mm ¢) m 1.00 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Sand Bedding/Selected sandy soil m3 0.05 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1001(1)b2 200 mm 12' Concrete Pipe

Output 1.00 m
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.00 m
F. Materials
m3 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl

a. Portland Cement 0.25
d Sand Bedding/Selected sandy soil m3 0.05
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1001(1)b3 250 mm 0 Concrete Pipe

Output 1.00 m
A. Labor

b. Skilled Laborer based on minimum wage as approved by
2 1.17
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.00 m
F. Materials

a. Portland Cement m3 0.32
b. Sand bag 0.02 the locality which include payment of local
3 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d Sand Bedding/Selected sandy soil m 0.06 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

Item No.lDescription 1001(1)b4 300 mm 0 Concrete Pipe

Unit of Measurement pc
Output 1 pc
A. Labor
a. COrlStruction Foreman 1 1.26 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
3 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

a. Portland Cement m 0.38
c. Concrete Pipe (300 mm (Il) m 1.00 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d Sand BeddinglSelected sandy soil m3 0.06 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

G. DirectUnit Cost (E + F)
Item No./Description 1001(1)b5 350 mm 121 Concrete Pipe

Output 1.00 m
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1.00 m
F. Materials

a. Portland Cement 0.44
b. Sand bag 0.03 the locality which include payment of local
3 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d Sand Bedding/Selected sandy soil m 0.07 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

Item No.lDescription 1001(1)c 50 mm (Il-100 mm (IlHigh Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe

Output per hour 3.00m
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 3.00 m
F. Materials
a. 50 mm 0 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1001 (1 )c1, 1001 (1 )c2, and 1001 (1 )c3.
Item No.lDescription 1001 (1)c 150 mm ¢ - 300mm ¢High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
oJ
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 150 mm 0 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1001(1 )c4, 1001(1 )c5, 1001(1 )c6 and 1001(1 )c7.
Item No./Description 1001(2)' PVC/HDPE Fittings

Output per hour 1 ea
A. Labor
(Labor cost for these items are to be consideredl included in the installation of pipes.) Labor Rates are variable per Region/District
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1 ea
F. Materials
a. PVC/HDPE Fittings (Elbowl Clean Out! Couplingl Prices of materials are variable per Region/
ea 1.00
Wyel Teel Reducerl P-trapl Bushingl Plug) the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. All items under Item No 1001(2) are considered as fittings. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1001(2)a to 1001(2)w.
Item No.lDescription 1001(3) Concrete Gutter

Output per hour
A. Labor
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
3
a. Item 900 - Reinforced Concrete m
b. Item 902 - Reinforcing Steel kg
a. Item 903 - Formworks and Falseworks m2
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. This item shall be based on the standard Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) of each component item such as
Item Nos. 900,902, and 903.
Item No./Description 1001 (6) Catch Basin (Concrete/CHB)

Output 1.00 ea
A. Labor
3
a. Item-803 - Structure Excavation m
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output =
1.00 ea
F. Materials
a. Item 900 - Reinforced Concrete m3

c. Item 1046 - CHB Wall m2
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. These items are variable in dimensions based on actual condition which combines component items, hence standard estimate
shall be based on the standard Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) of each component item such as Items 803, 900, 902
Item No.lDescription 1001 (7) Junction Box (Concrete/CHB)

Output 1.00 ea
A. Labor
a. Item 803 - Structure Excavation m3
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output =
1.00 ea
F. Materials
a. Item 900 - Reinforced Concrete m3

2
c. Item 1046 - CHB Wall m
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. These items are variable in dimensions based on actual condition which combines component items, hence standard estimate
shall be based on the standard Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) of each component item such as Items 803,900,902
and 1046.
Item No./Description 1001 (8) Sewer Line Works

Unit of Measurement I.s.
Output 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See derivations for Item Nos. 1001(1)a, 1001(1)c, and 1001(2).
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.00I.s.
F. Materials
See derivations for Item Nos. 1001(1)a, 1001(1)c, and 1001(2).
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book shall be based on the derived outputs of Item Nos. 1001 (1 )a, 1001 (1 )c,
and 1001(2)
Item No./Description 1001 (9) Storm Drainage and Downspout

Output 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See derivations for Item Nos. 1001(1)c, 1001(3), 1001(4), 1001(5), 1001(6) and 1001(7).
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B .
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
See derivations for Item Nos. 1001(1)c, 1001(3), 1001(4), 1001(5), 1001(6) and 1001(7).
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book shall be based on the derived outputs of Item Nos. 1001 (1 )c, 1001 (3),
1001(4), 1001(5), 1001(6) and 1001(7).
DETAILED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS CDUPA)
Item No./Description 1002(2)a 13 mm ¢ - 50 mm 0 Galvanized Iron Pipe

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

b. Skilled Laborer 1 2.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a.13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Galvanized Iron Pipe pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(1 )a1, 1002(1)a2, 1002(1)a3, 1002(1 )a4, and 1002(1 )a5.
Item No./Description 1002(2)a 65 mm 0- 150 mm 0 Galvanized Iron Pipe

Output 1 pc
A Labor
a. Construction Foreman Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

1 1.50
Sub - Total for A

.
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. 65 mm 0 - 150 mm 0x 6 m Galvanized Iron Pipe pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

I. Contractor's Profit (CP) •. 10%/8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(1)a6, 1002(1 )a7, 1002(1 )a8, and 1002(1 lag.
Item No.lDescription 1002(2) Galvanized Iron Fittings

Output per hour 1 pc
A Labor
(Labor.cost for these items are to be consideredlincluded in the installation of pipes.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Galvanized Iron Fittings (Elbowl Teel Reducer-Teel pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Socket! Couplingl Reducer Coupling)
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead. Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(2)b to 1001 (2)f.
Item No.lDescription 1002(3)a 13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipe, PN 101 PN 161 PN 20
Output 1 pc
A. Labor
a. COrlStruction Foreman 1 1.33 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. 13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 x 4.00 m Polyprophylene Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipe, PN 101 PN 161 PN pc 1.00
20 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(3)a1 to 1002(3)a18.
Item No.lDescription 1002(3)a 63 mm ¢ -100 mm ¢ Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipe PN 101 PN 161 PN 20
Output 1 pc
A. Labor
a. Con§truction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A

.
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. 63 mm 0 - 100 mm 0 x 4.00 m Polyprophylene Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipe PN 101 PN 161 PN pc 1.00 the locality which include payment of local
20Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipe taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(3)a 19 to 1002(3)a28.
Item No./Description 1002(3) Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Fittings

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

(Labor_cost for these items are to be considered/included in the installation of pipes.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output- 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Fittings (Elbowl Tee/ Female Threaded Tee/ Female
Elbow/ Female Threaded Adaptorl Male Threaded taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Adaptorl End Cap) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(3)b to 1001 (3)1.
"
Item No./Description 1002(4)a 13 mm ¢ - 50 mm ¢ Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Blue

A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per hour = 1 pc
F. Materials

a. 13 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 x 3 m Polyvinyl Chloride
pc 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
(PVC) Pipe, blue the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1002(4)a1, 1002(4)a2, 1002(4)a3, 1002(4)a4, 1002(4)a5, and 1002(4)a6.
Item No.lDescription 1002(4)a 65 mm 0-100 mm 0 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Blue

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 0.75 Labar Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials

a. 65 mm 0 100 mm 0 x 3 m Polyvinyl Chloride
pc 1.00 District based on the prevaifing unit prices in
(PVC) Pipe, blue the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1002(4)a7, 1002(4)a8, and 1002(4)a9.
Item No./Description 1002(4) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings, Blue

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
(Labor-cost for these items are to be consideredlincluded in the installation of pipes.) Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings, Blue (Elbowl pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Teel Tee-Reducerl Elbow Reducerl Socket! Couplingl
Reducerl Male Threaded Adaptorl Female Threaded taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Adaptorl Cap) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%110%/8% of G
Note: 1. Use thiS cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(4)b to 1001 (4)1.
Item No.lDescription 1002(5) Plumbing Fixtures

Output 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See df!rivation for Item Nos. 1002(5)a to 1002 (5)s.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
See derivation for Item Nos. 1002(5)a to 1002 (5)s.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book shall be based on the derived outputs of Item Nos. 1002(5)a to
1002(5)s.
Item No./Description 1002(5) Water Closet! Urinal with Complete Accessories

Unit of Measurement set
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Water Closet I Urinal with complete accessories set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)a and 1002(5)b.
Item No./Description 1002(5) Kitchen Sink/Scrub Up Sink/Slop Sink with Complete Accessories
Output 1 set
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

2.00
Sub - Total for A

,
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Kitchen Sink/Scrub Up Sink/Slop Sink with Prices of materials are variable per Region/
set 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
complete accessories
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)c, 1002(5)d and 1002(5)e.
Item No.lDescription 1002(5) Wall Hung/Countertop/Under Counter Lavatory with Complete Accessories
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Lavatory (Wall Hung/Countertop/Under Counter) set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)f and 1002(5)g.
Item No.lDescription 1002(5)h Floor Drain Plates

Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Floor Drain Plate set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1002(5) Soap Holder (Toilet Soapl Liquid Soap)

Output 1 pc
A Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Soap Holder (Toilet Soapl Liquid Soap) set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)i and 1002(5)j.
Item No./Description 1002(5) Toilet Tissue HolderlDispenser

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

b. Skilied Laborer 1 0.75 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Toilet Tissue Holder/Dispenser set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)k and 1002(5)1.
Item No./Description 1002(5) Bidet! Faucet! Hose Bibb

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
a. Con!)truction Foreman 1 0.40 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
E. Direct Unit Cost (C -;. D)
F. Materials
a. Bidet! Faucet! Hose Bibb set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1002(5)m, 1002(5)q, and 1002(5)r.
Item No./Description 1002(5)n Stainless Steel Grab bar

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 40 mm 1IlStainless Steel Grab Bar m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F

Item No.lDescription 1002(5)0 Shower headl Shower Valve

Output per hour 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Shower headl Shower Valve set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1002(5)p Facial Mirror

A. Labor
a. Con_struction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A .
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Facial Mirror m2 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1002(6) Cold Waterline Pipes and Fittings

Output per hour 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See derivation for Items 1002(1) to Items 1002(5)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1.00 I.s.
F. Materials
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book shall be based on the derived outputs of Item No.1 002(1)a to
Item No. 1001(5).
Item No./Description 1002(7) Hot Waterline Pipes and Fittings

Output per hour 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See derivation for Item Nos. 1002(3)a to 1002(3)1.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1.00 I.s.
F. Materials
See derivation for Item Nos. 1002(3)a to 1002(3)1.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book shall be based on the derived outputs of Item No.1002(3)a to 1002(3)1.
Item No./Description 1003(1 ) 4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine Plywood/ 6 mm Marine Plywood/ 6mm Ordinary Plywood
on Metal Frame Ceiling
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
D. Output per Hour = 1.243 m r
F. Materials
a. 4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine pc 0.365
Plywood/6 mm Marine Plywood/6mm Ordinary
Plywood
b.Metal Furring (size variable on plan and pc 1.131
and specifications ) 3m length
c. Carrying Channels (size variable depends on plans pc 0.357 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
and specifications)
d. Hanger Bars/Rod (size variable depends on plans pc 1 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
and specifications) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Channel clip pc 6
f. Wall Angle pc 0.238
g. Rivets pc 14
h. 1" Metal Screw pc 4
Note:
Quantities were derived from plans and
specifications of a standard school building with carrying
channels spaced by 1.20 m and metal furring spaced by
0.40 m on center.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1003(1 )a1, 1003(1 )b1, 1003(1 )c1, and 1003(1 )d1.
Item No./Description 1003(1)a 4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine Plywood/ 6 mm Marine Plywood/ 6mm Ordinary Plywood
in Wood Framing Ceiling
A. Labor
-
c. Unskilled Laborer 2 1.00 DOLE Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 4.5mm Fiber Cement Board/ 4.5 mm Marine
Plywood/6 mm Marine Plywoodl 6mm Ordinary Prices of materials are variable per Region!
pc 0.365
Plywood
b. Good Lumber bd.ft 9.257 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
c. Assorted Nails kg 0.139 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Note:
Quantities are derived from a ceiling system with
ceiling nailers spaced at 0.40 m on centers.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1003(1 )a2, 1003(1 )b2, 1003(1 )c2, and 1003(1 )d2.
Item No./Description 1003(1)e Gypsum Board on Metal Frame Ceiling

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment .
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour 1.340 m2
=
F. Materials
a. Gypsum Board pc 0.365
b.Metal Furring (size variable on plan and pc 1.13
c. Carrying Channels (size variable depends on plans Prices of materials are variable per Region!
pc 0.36 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
and specifications)
d. Hanger Bars/Rod «size variable depends on plans taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
pc 1.00
and specifications) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Channel clip pc 6 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Monitoring Committee
f. Wall Angle pc 0.238
g. Rivets pc 14
h. 1" metal screw pc 4
Note:
Quantities were derived from plans and
specifications of a standard school building with carrying
channels spaced by 1.20 m and metal furring spaced by
0.40 m on center.
Sub - Total for F
Item No./Description 1003(2) 4.5mml 6.0 mm Fiber Cement Boardl 4.5mml 6.0 mm 4' X 8' thk fiber cement boardl 4.5mm Marine
Plywood/6.0 mm Marine Plywood/6.0 mm Ordinary Plywood on Metal Frame Double Wall Partition
Unit of Measurement
Output per hour
A. Labor -

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 4.5mml 6.0 mm 4' X 8' thk fiber cement boardl Prices of materials are variable per Region/
4.5mm Marine Plywood/6.0 mm Marine Plywoodl 6.0 pc 0.730 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
mm Ordinary Plywood the locality which include payment of local
b. Metal Studs (size variable depends on plan and Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
specs.) 3 m length pc 1.181
c. Rivets Monitoring Committee.
pc 117.00
d. 1" Metal Screw pc 4.00
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1003(2)a1, 1003(2)b1, 1003(2)c1, 1003(2)d1 and 1003(2)e1.
Item No./Description 1004(2) Finishing Hardware

Output 1 set
A Labor
(Labor_ cost for these items are to be considered/included in the installation of doors, windows, and other fabricated materials.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output =
F. Materials
a. Finishing Hardwares (LocksetlLatches, Bolts, Door set 1.00 the locality which include payment of local
Closer, Knobs/Handles/ Hinges/ Ladderl Grab Bar) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1004(2)a to 1004(2)i.
Item No.lDescription 1005 Residential Casement Steel Windowsl Heavy Duty Side-hinged Ventilatorl Projected Ventilatorl
Awning Ventilatorl Grille Window
Output per hour 0.18m2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 1 0.25 See latest ACEL rental rates

Note:
It is assumed that fabrication of steel windows are
already completed. Thus, labor and equipment output
shall be based on installation time only.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
m
2 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
a. Residential Casement Steel Windowsl Heavy Duty 1.00
Side-hinged Ventilatorl Projected Ventilatorl Awning the locality which include payment of local
Ventilatorl Grille Window taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1005(1), 1005(2), 1005(3), 1005(4), and 1005(5).
Item No./Description 1006 Hollow Steel Door/ Steel Flush Door/ Grille Door/ Steel Louver Door
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 1 0.25 See latest AGEL rental rates

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Hollow Steel Door/ Steel Flush Doorl Grille Door/ District based on the prevailing unit prices
m2 1.00
Steel Louver Door in the locality which include payment of
b. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) local taxes and hauling cost to the project
site. Refer to the Construction Material
Price Data established quarterly by Central
Office Price Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1006(1), 1006(2), 1006(3) and 1006(4).
Item No./Description 1006(5) Fire Rated Fire Exit Steel Door

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 1 0.25 See latest ACEL rental rates

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
m
a. Fire rated Fire Exit Steel Door 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1007 Aluminum Glass Door (Sliding Type/Swing Type)

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of Hour/s Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Aluminum Glass Door (Sliding Type/Swing Type) 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1008 Aluminum Glass Window (Sliding/ Casement! Awning/ Fixed Type)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of Hour/s Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Aluminum Glass Window (Sliding/ Casement! Prices of materials are variable per Region/
2 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Awning/ Fixed Type) m 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1008(1 la, 1008(1 )b, 1008(1)c and 1008(1)d.
Item No./Description 1009(1)a Jalousie Window (Glass)


A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Jalousie Window (Glass) m2 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1010(1) Frames (Jambs, Sill, Head, Transoms and Mullions)
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 set
F. Materials
a. Jambs, Sill, Head, Transoms and Mullion set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Sub - Total for F

Item No.lDescription 1010(2)a Hollow Core Flush Door

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a.Holiow Core Flush Door m2 1.00
Sub - Total for F

DETAILED UNIT PRICE ANAlYSIS (DUPA)
Item No./Description 1010(2)b Wooden Panel Door

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Wooden Panel Door m 1.00
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1011(1) Steell Aluminum Roll Up Door

Output 1.00 set
A Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.00 set
F. Materials
a. Steell Aluminum Roll Up Door Set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1012(1) Tempered Glass Door (10 mml 12mm)

2
A. Labor
a. Co~truction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

Sub - Total for A .

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour =0.26 m2
F. Materials

a. Tempered Glass Door (10 mml 12mm) m 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1012(1 )d1 and 1012(1 )d2.

Item No./Description 1012(1) Tempered Glass Windows (8 mm/10mm)

2
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
.
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Tempered Glass Windows (8 mm/10mm) m2 1.00
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1012(1)e1 and 1012(1)e2.

Item No./Description 1013(1) Corrugated Metal Roofing

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No. of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Corrugated Roofing Sheet m 1.05
b. Tek screw/J-bolt with washers pc 10 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1013(2) Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory (Ridge/Hip Rolls/Flashings/Counter FlashingNalley Roll)
A. Labor

DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Sub - Total for A

Name and Capacity No. of Unitls No. of Hour/s Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Ridge/Hip Rolis/FlashingsNalley Roll! Counter
m 1.05 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Flashing (0.60 mm) the locality which include payment of local
b. Blind Rivets pc 19.00 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
c. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this costing sheet for Item Nos. 1013(2)a, 1013(2)b, 1013(2)e, and 1013(2)f.

Item No.lDescription 1013(2)c Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory (Gutter)

A. Labor
1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

a. Construction Foreman 1
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Gutter (0.6 mm) m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. 12" x 1" Plain GI Strap pc 3.00 the locality which include payment of local
c. Blind Rivets pc 16.00 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


OETAILEOUNIT PRICE ANALYSIS (OUPA)
Item No./Description 1014 Prepainted Metal Sheets (Corrugated, Short Spanl Long Span, below 0.427 thkl above 0.427 thk)
2
A. Labor

b. Skilled Laborer 1 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
c. Unskilled Laborer 2 1.00 Rates.
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No. of Unitls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. Prepainted Metal Sheets (Corrugated, Short
2
Spanl Long Span, below 0.427mm thkl above m 1.05 the locality which include payment of local
0.427mm thk) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
b. Tek screw/J-bolt with washers pc 10
c. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H .. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1014(1)a and 1014(2)a.

Item No.lDescription 1014 Prepainted Metal Sheets (Rib Type, Short Spanl Long Span, below 0.427 thkl above 0.427 thk)
2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Prepainted Metal Sheets (Rib Type, Short Spanl Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Long Span, below 0.427mm thkl above 0.427mm m2 1.00
thk) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
b. Tek screw/J-bolt with washers pc 10.00 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
c. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1014(1)b and 1014(2)b.

Item No.lDescription 1016(1)a Waterproofing Cement Base

2
A. Labor-

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
Unit Quantity Unit Cost Amount (PhP)
Name and Specification
F. Materials

a. Cement-based waterproofing m 1.05
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1016(1)b Liquid Waterproofing

2
Output per hour 5.772 ril
A. labor-

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Primer Coat gal 0.04 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Liquid Waterproofing gal 0.03 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1016(2) Built-up and Preformed Membrane

2
A. Labor -
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Asphalt Primer gal 0.10 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
2
b. Preformed Membrane m 1.05 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1017 50mm (11 - lOOmm (11 Roof Drain/Canopy Drain/ Gutter Drain with Strainer
Output 1 set
A. Labor -
a. Skilled Laborer 1 0.50 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. 50mm I1l - 100mm I1l Roof Drain/Canop Drain/ Prices of materials are variable per Region/
set 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Gutter Drain with Strainer
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1017(1 )a1, 1017(1 )a2, 1017(1 )a3, 1017(1 )a4, 1017(2)b1, 1017(2)b2, 1017(2)b3,
1017(2)b4, 1017(3)c1, 1017(3)c2 and 1017(3)c3

Item No.lDescription 1018(1) Glazed Tiles and Trims

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Glazed Tiles 2 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m 1.050
b. Cement bags 0.325 the locality which include payment of local
c.Sand 3
m 0.026 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Tile Grout bags 0.125
e. Tile Adhesive (25 kg) bags 0.143 Monitoring Committee.
f. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost)
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1018 Unglazed Tilesl Granite Tilesl Synthetic Granite Tiles
2
A. labor-

c. Unskilled laborer 5 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Unglazed Tilesl Granite Tilesl Synthetic Granite 2 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
m 1.050
b. Cement bag 0.325 the locality which include payment of local
c. Sand 3
m 0.026 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Tile Grout Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
bag 0.125
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this costing sheet for Item Nos. 1018(2), 1018(3) and 1018(4).

Item No./Description 1019(1) Wood Tiles (Narra, Tanguile, others)

2
A. labor-

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Wood Tiles m2 1.050 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
b. Glue Adhesive l 0.500 the locality which include payment of local
c. Cement bag 0.325 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d.Sand m3 0.026 established quarterly by Central Office Price
e. Polyurethane Floor Varnish Sealer l 0.400 Monitoring Committee.
f. Polyurethane Floor Varnish Topcoat l 0.200
g. Polyurethane Reducer l 0.06
h. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost)
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1019(1)d Laminated Wood Tiles

2
2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No. of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate . Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Laminated Wood Tiles 2 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m 1.050
b. Glue Adhesive L 0.500 the locality which include payment of local
d.Sand 3 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
m 0.026
e. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1020(1) Vinyl Tiles

A. Labor -

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Vinyl Tiles Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m2 1.050
b. Glue Adhesive L 0.500 the locality which include payment of local
d.Sand Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
m3 0.055
e. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1021 (1 )a Plain Cement Floor Finish

2
2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No. of UniUs No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Cement bag 0.726 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

b.Sand m3 0.055 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1021(3) Floor Topping

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

b.Sand m3 0.055 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1023(1) Granolithic Marble Work

2
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Marble chips 3 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m 0.726
b. Portland cement bag 0.055 the locality which include payment of local
c. Divider strips m 1.00 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1024( 1) Pea Gravel Finish

2
2
A. labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

b. Pea Gravel m 0.013 the locality which include payment of local
c.Sand m3 0.039 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1026(1) Pebble Washout Finish

2
A. Labor
-
a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per
b. Skilled Laborer 1 1.00 Region/District based on minimum wage as
c. Unskilled Laborer 2 1.00 approved by DOLE. Refer to the Schedule
of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

b. Pea Gravel m 0.013 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1027( 1) Cement Plaster Finish

2
2

-
A. Labor

c. Unskilled Laborer 4 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Cement bag 0.330 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl

b. Sand cU.m 0.027
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1032(1)a Painting Works (Masonry Painting)

A. Labor-

Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Concrete Neutralizer gal 0.02 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Concrete SealerlPrimer gal 0.04 the locality which include payment of local
c. Patching Compound gal 0.05 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Semi Gloss Latex (two coat only) gal 0.08 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F

·G. Direct Unit Cost (E + F)

Item No.lDescription 1032(1)b Painting Works (Wood Painting)


-
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.f
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Glazzing Putty gal 0.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Flat Wall Enamel gal 0.04 the locality which include payment of local
c. Enamel Quick Dry gal 0.04 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Paint Thinner I 0.25 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Tinting Color (Optional) pint 0.01 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1032(1)c Painting Works (Metal Painting)

2
2
A. Labor _

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Red Oxide Primer gal 0.04 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Enamel Paint gal 0.10
c. Paint thinner L 0.25 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Tinting Color (Optional) pint 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1032(2) Varnishing Works

A. Labor.

Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a.Varnish gal 0.04
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1032(4) Ducco Finish

2
A. Labor-

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Glazzing Putty gal 0.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. Flat Wall Enamel gal 0.04
c. Enamel Quick Dry gal 0.04 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Paint Thinner gal 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Tinting Color (Optional) pint 0.01 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1034( 1) Damproofing ( Polyethylene Sheets)


-
A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 6 mils Polyethylene Sheets Prices of materials are variable per Region/

m2 1.000
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1038(1) Reflective Insulation

2
A. Labor
-

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Reflective Insulation 2 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl

m 1.000
b. Consumbles (5% of Materials Cost) the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1042(1) Stainless Steel Door and Frames

2
A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.f
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. Stainless Steel Doors and Frames 2 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
m 1.000
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1043(1) PVC Doors and Frames

2
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials
a. PVC Doors and Frames 2 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
m 1.000
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1045(1) Perforated Aluminum Ceiling Panels


-
A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Perforated Aluminum Ceiling Pannel with frames Prices of materials are variable per Region/
m2 1.000
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1046 100 mm CHB Non Load BearinglLoad Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel)
2
No. of Person/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)

Designation
A . Labor .
Labor Rates are variable per
Region/District based on minimum wage
b. Skilled Laborer 2 1.00 as approved by DOLE. Refer to the
c. Unskilled Laborer 3 1.00 Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
No. of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)

Name and Capacity
B. Equipment
1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.

a. One-bagger mixer
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
2
F. Materials

a. 100 mm thk CHB (Non-Load BearinglLoad pc 13.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
cU.m 0.04 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
c.Sand Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d. Reinforcing Steel kg 3.24*
e. #16 Tie wire kg 0.05 Monitoring Committee.
'Quantity derived from 10mm 12'bars spaced at 0.4 m

vertically and every 3 layers of CHB
Sub - Total for F
J. Value Added Tax (VAT) 5% of(G + H + I)
(G + H + I + J)
K. Total Unit Cost
Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for Item Nos. 1046(1)a and 1046(2)a.

Item No./Description 1046 150mm CHB Non-LoadBearingl Load Bearing (including Reinforcing Steel)
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
a. One-bagger mixer 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 150 mm thk CHB (Load Bearing) pc 13.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
c.Sand cU.m 0.04 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Reinforcing Steel kg 3.24* Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. #16 Tie wire kg 0.05 established quarterly by Central Office Price
'Quantity derived from 10mm 12'bars spaced at 0.4 m

vertically and every 3 layers of CHB
Sub - Total for F
Note: 1. This cost sheet shall be used for Item Nos. 1046(1)b and 1046(2)b.

Item No./Description 1047(1) Structural Steel Roof Framing

Output per hour I.s.
A. Labor.
See derivations for Item Nos. 1047(2) - 1047(6)
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour -
F. Materials
Sub - Total for F

K.. Total Unit Cost (G + H + I + J)

Item No./Description 1047(2)a Structural Steel Roof Framing

Output per hour 85.00 k-g
A. Labor·
Fabrication
Erection
a. Skilled Laborer 3 0.49
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 1 0.75 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Cutting Outfit 1 0.25
c. Truck Mounted Crane (20-25 mt) 1 0.49
Minor Tools (10 % of Labor Cost)
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Structural Steel Framing including cross kg 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Acetylene kg 0.011 the locality which include payment of local
c. Oxygen kg 0.022 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Welding Rod kg 0.020 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1047(2)b Structural Steel RoofTruss

A. labor
Fabrication
1 1.00
Erection
a. Skilled laborer 3 0.49
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 1 0.75 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Cutting Outfit 1 0.25
c. Truck Mounted Crane (20-25 mt) 1 0.49
Minor Tools (10 % of labor Cost)
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Structural Steel Truss kg 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Acetylene kg 0.011
c. Oxygen kg 0.022 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Welding Rod kg 0.020 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1047(2)c Structural Steel Purlins

A. Labor-

c. Unskilled Laborer 4 1.00 DOLE.Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine 2 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.

.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Structural Steel Purlins kg 1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Welding Rod kg 0.020 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1047(3)a Metal Structure Accessories (Anchor Bolts)

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 90.45 kg
F. Materials
a. Anchor Bolt pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1047(3)b Metal Structure Accessories (Sagrods)

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
,J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Sagrod with nuts and bolts pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1047(3)c Metal Structure Accessories (Turnbuckle)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Standard Turnbuckle pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1047(3)d Metal Structure Accessories (Crossbracing)

Output 1 pc
A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Cross Bracing pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1047(4) Metal Structure Accessories (Crossbracing)

A. Labor-

b. Skilled Laborer 1 1.00 Region/District based on minimum wage as
approved by DOLE. Refer to the Schedule
of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Cross Bracing kg 1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

b. Consumables (3% of Material Cost)
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1047(5) Metal Structure Accessories (Steel Plates)

A. Labor -

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Plates kg 1.05 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1048(1)a Carbon Fiber (1 layer)

Output per hour 1 .20 m2
A. labor

Site Preparation based on minimum wage as approved by
b. Skilled laborer 2 0.71 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Rates.
Application
a. Skilled laborer 2 1.00
Sub - Total for A

Name and Capacity No. of Unit/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Surface Preparation
a. Portable Grinder 2 0.40 See latest ACEL rental rates.
b. Jack Hammer 1 0.20
c. Air Compressor 1 0.40
c. Speed Ventilator 1 0.40
d. Electric Drill 1 0.20
e. Chipping Gun 1 0.10
f. Paddle Mixer 1 0.20
g. Generator Set (20KVA) 1 0.10
Application
a.Saturator Machine 1 0.10
b. Generator Set (20 KVA) 1 0.10 .J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
Surface Preparation Prices of materials are variable per Region/

a. Clear Epoxy A gal 0.27 the locality which include payment of local
b. Clear Epoxy B gal 0.13 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
c. Kalcomine sack 0.18 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d. Cup Wheel established quarterly by Central Office Price
pc 0.30
e. Diamond Disk pc 0.10
Application
a. Carbon Fiber m2 1.05
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1048(2) Glass Fiber

2
Output per hour 1 .20 m2
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00 LabDr Rates are variable per RegiDn/District

Site Preparation based Dn minimum wage as approved by
DOLE. Refer tD the Schedule Df LabDr
Rates.
Application
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Surface Preparation
a. Portable Grinder 2 0.40 See latest ACEL rental rates.
b. Jack Hammer 1 0.20
c. Air Compressor 1 0.40
c. Speed Ventilator 1 0.40
d. Electric Drill 1 0.20
e. Chipping Gun 1 0.10
f. Paddle Mixer 1 0.20
g. Generator Set (20KVA) 1 0.10
Application
.J
a.Saturator Machine 1 0.10
b. Generator Set (20 KVA) 1 0.10
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
Surface Preparation Prices Df materials are variable per RegiDn/

District based Dn the prevailing unit prices in
a. Clear Epoxy A gal 0.27 the IDeality which include payment Df IDeal
b. Clear Epoxy B gal 0.13 taxes and hauling CDSt tD the project site.
c. Kalcomine sack 0.18 Refer tD the CDnstructiDn Material Price Data
d. Cup Wheel pc 0.30
MDnitDring CDmmittee.
e. Diamond Disk pc 0.10
Application
a. Glass Fiber m2 1.05
Sub - Total for F

J. Value Added Tax (VAT) 5%of(G+H+I)

Item No.lDescription 1049(1) Jet Grouting (0.80 m diameter)

A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
a. Jetting Machine 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Air Compressor 12 Bars/600 CFM 1 1.00
c. Water Tank/Pump 1 1.00
d. Agitator 1 1.00
e. Generator/Power Supply 1 1.00
f. High Pressure Pump 1 1.00
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Portland Cement bags 14.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Additives L 3.50 the locality which include payment of local
c. Consumables (5% of Material Cost) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F


"
Item No./Description 1052(1) Untreated Timber Piles, furnished

A. Labor -

b. Unskilled Laborer 4 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41 - 45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
(Unloading and Stockpiling)
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Untreated Timber (375 mm (II average) bd-ft 48.30 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Miscellaneous (5% of Materials Cost) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Note: Monitoring Committee.
Assumed average minimum diameter is 375 mm
for less than 12 m length. For beyond 12 m length and
bigger diameter, adjust the quantity in bd-ft accordingly.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OGM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G

Item No./Description 1052(2) Treated Timber Piles, preserved, furnished

A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41 - 45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.
Minor Tools (10% of labor cost)
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Treated Timber (375 mm ¢ average) bd-ft 48.30 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Miscellaneous (3% of Materials Cost) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Note:
Assumed average minimum diameter is 375 mm
for less than 12 m length. For beyond 12 m length and
bigger diameter, adjust the quantity in bd-ft accordingly.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(3) Steel H-Piles, furnished

A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Structural Steel Pile, W=159 kg/m m 1.00

(delivered at site) Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost)
Sub - Total for F


"
Item No./Description 1052(4)a.1 Precast Concrete Piles, furnished (400mm x 400mm - type A)
A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.05 See latest ACEL rental rates.

b. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.10
c. Plate Compactor (for Casting Bed) 1 0.28
d. Bar Bender 1 0.28
e. Bar Cutter 1 0.28
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
"

F. Materials
cU.m 0.168
a. Ready Mix concrete, Class AA-27.60MPa @ 28Days* Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforced Steel Bar, Grade 60 kg 40.45 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Tie Wire #16 (2% of RSB) kg 0.809
d. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 15.333 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Marine Plywood, 1/2" x 4' x 8' - 4 uses pc 0.268 established quarterly by Central Office Price
f. Assorted CWN (1kg/100bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.163 Monitoring Committee.
Casting Bed
a. Ready Mix Concrete, Class B cU.m 0.03
b. Good Lumber bd-ft 1.00
c. Base Course cU.m 0.06
Note:
*If no available Ready Mix Concrete at project site,
derive the cost of concrete using the Batching Plant or
One Bagger Mixer for small quantity.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(4)a.2 Precast Concrete Piles, furnished (400mm x 400mm -type B)
A. Labor

b. Skill8d Laborer 4 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.05 See latest AGEL rental rates.

.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
cU.m 0.168
a. Ready Mix concrete, Glass AA-27.60MPa @ 28Days* District based on the prevailing unit prices in
b. Reinforced Steel Bar, Grade 60 kg 48.69
c. Tie Wire #16 (2% of RSB) kg 0.974 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 15.333 established quarterly by Central Office Price
e. Marine Plywood, 1/2" x 4' x 8' - 4 uses pc 0.268 Monitoring Committee.
f. Assorted CWN (1 kg/1 OObd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.163
Casting Bed
Note:
*If no available Ready Mix Concrete at Project Site,
One Bagger Mixer for small quantity
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(4)b.1 Precast Concrete Piles, furnished (450mm x 450mm -type C)
A Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.05 See latest AGEL rental rates.

J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
cU.m 0.213
a. Ready Mix concrete, Class AA-27.60MPa @ 28Days' District based on the prevailing unit prices in
f. Assorted CWN (1 kg/1 OObd.ft of Lumber) kg 0.183
Casting Bed
Note:
'If no available Ready Mix Concrete at Project Site,
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(4)b.2 Precast Concrete Piles, furnished (450mm x 450mm -type D)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.05 See latest AGEL rental rates.
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
cU.m 0.213 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
a. Ready Mix concrete, Class AA-27.60MPa @ 28Days*
f. Assorted CWN (1 kg/1 OObd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.183
Casting Bed
Note:
"If no available Ready Mix Concrete at Project Site,
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(5)a Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, furnished (400 mm x 400 mm)
A. Labor -

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
(delivered at site)
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F


DETAilED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS (DUPA)
Item No./Description 1052(5)b Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, furnished (450 mm x 450 mm)

-
A. Labor

1 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
(delivered at site)
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(6) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Sheet Pile KSP II (delivered at site) kg 48.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(7)a Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished (0.50 m x 0.35 m)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.03 See latest AGEL rental rates.
b. One Bagger Mixer 1 0.25
c. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.25
d. Water Truck/Pump (16000 L) 1 0.03
f. Bar Bender 1 0.15
g. Plate Compactor (5 hp), for Casting Bed 1 0.03
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg 41.64 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Cement bag 1.66
d. Gravel m3 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
0.18
e. Plywood, 1/2" x 4' x 8' - 4 uses pc 0.24 Monitoring Committee.
f. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 12.40
g. #16 GI Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg 0.83
h. Assorted CWN (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.12
Casting Bed
a. Cement bag 0.296
b.Sand m3 0.019
c. Gravel m3 0.037
d. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd.ft 1.00
e. Base Course m3 0.08
Sub - Total for F
H. Overhead, Continoencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G

Item No.lDescription 1052(7)b Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, furnished (0.50 m x 0.35 m), (Ready Mix Concrete)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.03 See latest ACEL rental rates.

c. Plate Compactor (5 hp), for Casting Bed 1 0.03
d. Bar Cutter 1 0.22
e. Bar Bender 1 0.22
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B) J
F. Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg 41.64 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. Ready Mix Concrete, fc'=27.60 Mpa @28 days' m3 0.18
c. Plywood, 1/2" x 4' x 8' - 4 uses pc 0.24 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
f. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 12.40 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
g. #16 GI Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg 0.83 established quarterly by Central Office Price
h. Assorted CWN (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.12
Casting Bed
a. Ready Mix Concrete, Class B m3 0.037
d. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 1.00
e. Base Course m3 0.08
Note:
'If no available Ready Mix Concrete at project site,
One Bagger Mixer for small quantities.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(8) Untreated Timber Piles, driven

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
b. Drop Hammer 1 0.13
,J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Coco Log - 2 uses m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Good Lumber (Falsework) - 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
c. NaillSpike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Monitoring Committee,
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(9) Treated Timber Piles, driven

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
b. Drop Hammer 1 0.13
Sub - Total for B ,

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
b. Good Lumber (Falsework) - 4 uses bd-ft 16.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. NaillSpike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(10) Steel H-Piles, driven

A. Labor
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
b. Diesel Hammer (K25 or equivalent) 1 0.25
c. Drop Hammer 1 0.40
d. Cutting Outfit 1 0.15
e. Welding Machine (500 A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 0.10
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
c. Nail/Spike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Oxygen/Acetylene (1 set/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.032 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg 0.08 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Note:
Assumed weight of Steel H-Pile is 159 kglm
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Continoencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G

Item No./Description 1052(11) Steel Pipe Piles, furnished and driven

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
d. Welding Machine (500 A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 0.08
e. Cutting Outfit 1 0.08
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
E. Direct Unit Cost (G + D)
F. Materials
a. Tubular Pile (0.40 m ¢ x 9.50 mm thk) m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
(delivered at site) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
b. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg 0.048 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
c. Oxygen/Acetylene (1 set/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.019 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
d. Coco Log - 2 uses m 1.00 established quarterly by Central Office Price
e. Good Lumber (Falsework) - 4 uses bd-ft 16.00 Monitoring Committee.
f. Nail/Spike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16

Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost)
Note:
Assumed weight of Tubular Pipe Pile is 95.93
kglm
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(12) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, driven

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
d. Welding Machine (500 A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 1.00
e. Cutting Outfit 1 0.50
.f
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg 0.024 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. OxygenlAcetylene (1 set/5000 kg of Steel) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
set 0.0096
c. Coco Log - 2 uses m 0.18 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 1.55 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Assorted CWN (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.02 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(13) Precast Concrete Sheet Piles, driven


-
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
d. Jack Hammer 2 0.19
e. Air Compressor (356 - 450 cfm) 1 0.19
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
b. Good Lumber - 4 uses District based on the prevailing unit prices in
bd-ft 6.19
d. Assorted CWN (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.06 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Miscellaneous (2% of Materials Cost) established quarterly by Central Office Price
Sub - Total for F


DETAilED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS (DUPA)
Item No./Description 1052(14)a Precast Concrete Piles, driven (soft strata)

A. Labor •

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Jack Hammer 2 0.20
f. Air Compressor (356 - 450 cfm) 1 0.20
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Coco Log - 2 uses m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
d. OxygenlAcetylene kg 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OGM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG

Item No./Description 1052(14)b Precast Concrete Piles, driven (hard strata)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Minor Tools (10% of Labor Gost)
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
,
F. Materials
b. Good Lumber - 4 uses bd-ft District based on the prevailing unit prices in
16.00
d. Oxygen/Acetylene set 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052( 15)a Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, driven (soft strata)
A. Labor .

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
d. OxygenlAcetylene set 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(15)b Precast, Prestressed Concrete Piles, driven (hard strata)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
d. OxygenlAcetylene set 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(16)a Test Piles, furnished and driven (type A, B, C or D), soft strata
A. Labor .

b. Skilled Laborer 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
6
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.f
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
d.Oxygen/Acetylene set 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Fabricated RC Pile (delivered at site) m 1.00 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Note:
The unit cost of Fabricated RC Pile is dependent
on its type.
Please refer to the Direct Cost of
Item 1052(7)a
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(16)b Test Piles, furnished and driven (type A, B, C or D), hard strata
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
"

F. Materials
a. Coco Log - 2 uses m 2.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
d. Oxygen/Acetylene set 0.01 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Fabricated RC Pile (delivered at site) m 1.00 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Note:
The unit cost of Fabricated RC Pile is dependent
on its type.
Please refer to the Direct Cost of
Item 1052(7)a
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(17)a Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 0.80 m 0, fc' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor
a. Con~truction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Rates.
Fabrication of Cage Bar
d. Skilled Laborer 9 0.50
e. Unskilled Laborer 17 0.50
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Drilling Rig (300 hp) 1 0.26 See latest AGEL rental rates.
b. Crawler Crane (41 - 45 mt) 1 0.95
c. Crawler Crane (21 - 25 mt) 1 0.95
d. Dump Truck (12 yd3) 1 0.95
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.95
f. Generator Set (300 kW) 1 0.95
g. Bentonite Bin 1 0.50
h. Bentonite Mixer 1 0.50
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction !1l(7.5 hp) 1 0.74
j. Water Truck (16000 L) 1 0.74
k. Bar Cutter 1 0.50
I. Bar Bender 1 0.50
m. Welding Machine (500A), Electric Driven 1 0.71
n. Cutting Outfit 1 0.71
f
o. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.24
p. SPT & Desanding Machine 1 0.24
q. Portable Breaker, BHF30S 2 0.05
r. Air Compressor, Portable (126 - 160 cfm) 1 0.05
s. Lighting System/Tower Lights 1 0.95
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cu.m 0.55 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar' kg 205.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Tire Wire (2% of RSB) kg 4.10
d. OxygenlAcetylene (1 set/5000 kg. of RSB) set 0.041 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of RSB) kg 0.10 established quarterly by Central Office Price
Miscellaneous (3% of Materials, Bentonite and etc.) Monitoring Committee.
* Its quantity is variable depending on the actual design

H. Overhead, ContinQencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G

Item No.lDescription 1052(17)b Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 1.00 m 0, fc' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor

5
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.96
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction 11l (7.5 hp) 1 0.78
j. Water Truck (16000 L) 1 0.78
n. Cutting Outfit 1 0.73 .J

r. Air Compressor, Portable (126 - 160 cfm) 1 0.04
s. Lighting SystemlTower Lights 1 0.96
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cU.m 0.86 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar * kg 253.59 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Tire Wire (2% of RSB) kg 5.07 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.


Item No.lDescription 1052(17)c Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 1.20 m 0, fe' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor
a. Com~truction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Drilling Rig (300 hp) 1 0.35 See latest ACEL rental rates.
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.96
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction (Il (7.5 hp) 1 0.82
j. Water Truck/Pump (16000 L) 1 0.82
m. Welding Machine (500 A), Electric Driven 1 0.75
.J
r. Air Compressor, Portable (126- 160 cfm) 1 0.04
s. Lighting SystemfTower Lights 1 0.96
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cU.m 1.24 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
d. Oxygen/Acetylene (1 set/5000 kg. of RSB) set 0.06 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data


Item No./Description 1052(17)d Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 1.50 m 0, fc' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 1.00 LabDr Rates are variable per RegiDn/District

b. Skilled Laborer based Dn minimum wage as apprDved by
5 1.00
DOLE. Refer tD the Schedule Df LabDr Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.97
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction ¢ (7.5 hp) 1 0.86
s. Lighting SystemfTower Lights 1 0.97
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
E. Direct Unit Cost (C .;. D)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cU.m 1.94 Prices Df materials are variable per RegiDn/
District based Dn the prevailing unit prices in
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar' kg 387.77
the IDcality which include payment Df IDcal
c. Tire Wire (2% of RSB) kg 7.76 taxes and hauling CDSt tD the project site.
d. Oxygen/Acetylene (1 set/5000 kg of RSB) set 0.08 Refer tD the CDnstructiDn Material Price Data
MDnitDring CDmmittee.
Miscellaneous (3% of Materials, Bentonite and etc.)
• Its quantity is variable depending Dn the actual design


"
Item No./Description 1052(17)e Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 1.80 m 0, fe' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor

Region/District based on minimum wage as
approved by DOLE. Refer to the Schedule
c. Unskilled Laborer 6 1.00 of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.98
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction 11l(7.5 hp) 1 0.90
.J
r. Air Compressor, Portable (126-160 cfm) 1 0.02
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 Mpa @ 28 D cU.m 2.80 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
d. Oxygen/Acetylene (1 set/5000 kg of RSB) set 0.09 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
• Its quantity is variable depending on the actual design


DEl AILED UNIT PRICE ANALYSIS (DUPA)
Item No./Description 1052(17)f Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes, 2.00 m 0, fc' = 28 MPa (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.98
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction (1l (7.5 hp) 1 0.91

Minor Tools (10% of Labor)
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials .
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cU.m 3.46 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar' kg 490.33 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
d. OxygenlAcetylene (1 set/5000 kg of RSB) set 0.098 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data


Item No./Description 1052(18)a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells, furnished and driven
A. Labor

-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
f. Welding Machine (500A), GaslDiesel Driven 1 0.05
g. Cutting Outfit 1 0.05
h. One Bagger Mixer 1 0.17
i. Water Truck/Pump (16000L) 1 0.04
j. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.04
k. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.17
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Tubular Pile (0.40 m ~ x 9.50 mm thk)* m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg 29.547 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
C. Cement bag 1.194
d.Sand m' 0.063 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Gravel m' 0.126 established quarterly by Central Office Price
f. #16 Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg 0.591 Monitoring Committee.
g. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg 0.063

h. Oxy/Acetylene (1 kg/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.025
i. Coco Log- 2 uses m 1.00
j. Good Lumber (Falsework)- 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
k. Nail/Spike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16
Note:
*Assumed weight of Tubular Pipe Pile is
95.93 kglm
Sub - Total for F

Item No./Description 1052(18)b Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells, furnished and driven (Ready Mix Concrete)
A. Labor

b. Skilled Laborer .6 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
f. Welding Machine (500A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 0.06
h. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.01
i. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.05
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 2.00m .J
F. Materials
a. Tubular Pile (0.40 m ¢ x 9.50 mm thk)* m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg 29.547
c. Ready Mix Concrete fc'=20.7 MPa m' 0.132 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. #16 Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg 0.591 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
f. Oxy/Acetylene (1 kg/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.025
g. Coco Log- 2 uses m 1.00
h. Good Lumber (Falsework)- 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
i. Nail/Spike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16
Note:
'Assumed weight of Tubular Pipe Pile is
95.93 kglm.
If no available Ready Mix Concrete at project
site, derive the cost of concrete using the Batching
Plant or One Bagger Mixer for small quantity.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(19)a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes, furnished and driven
A. Labor
Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
f. Welding Machine (500A), GaslDiesel Driven 1 0.05
h. One Bagger Mixer 1 0.17
i. Water Truck/Pump (16000L) 1 0.04
j. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.04
k. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.17
Sub - Total for B

,oJ
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Tubular Pile (0.40 m (Il x 9.50 mm thk)* m. 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg. 29.547 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
d. Sand m3 0.063 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
e. Gravel m3 0.126 established quarterly by Central Office Price
1. #16 Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg. 0.591
g. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg. 0.063
h. Oxy/Acetylene (1 kg/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.025
i. Coco Log- 2 uses m 1.00
j. Good Lumber (Falsework)- 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
k. NaillSpike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg. 0.16
Note:
*Assumed weight of Tubular Pipe Pile is
95.93 kglm.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(19)b Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes, furnished and driven (Ready Mix Concrete)
A. Labor

6
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
f. Welding Machine (500A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 0.06
h. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.01
i. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.05
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
·oJ
F. Materials
a. Tubular Pile (0.40 m ¢ x 9.50 mm thk)* m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar kg 29.547 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Ready Mix Concrete fc'=20.7 MPa m' 0.132
d. #16 Tie Wire (2% of RSB) kg 0.591 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
f. Oxy/Acetylene (1 kg/5000 kg of Steel) set 0.025 Monitoring Committee.
g. Coco Log- 2 uses m 1.00

h. Good Lumber (Falsework)- 4 uses bd-ft 16.00
i. Nail/Spike (1 kg/100 bd-ft of Lumber) kg 0.16
Note:
'Assumed weight of Tubular Pipe Pile is
95.93 kglm.
If no available Ready Mix Concrete at Project
Site, derive the cost of concrete using the Batching
Plant or One Bagger Mixer for small quantity
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(20) Pile Shoes

A. Labor .

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Welding Machine (500A), Electric Driven 1 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
b. Bar Cutter 1 0.25
c. Bar Bender 1 0.25
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel Bar, Grade 40 kg 23.86 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Steel Plate (100+100) x 300 mm, 12 mm thk kg 6.00
c. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of Steel) kg 0.015 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(23)a Bored Piles, 0.80 m 0 (ordinary soil condition)

A. Labor
a. ConStruction Foreman 1 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.95
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction !2l (7.5 hp) 1 0.74
j. Water Truck (16000 L) 1 0.74
n. Cutting Outfit 1 0.71 J
r. Air Compressor, Portable (126 - 160 cfm) 1 0.05 ,
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 MPa @ 28 Days cU.m 0.55 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl


Item No./Description 1052(23)b Bored Piles, 1.00 m 0 (ordinary soil condition)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Drilling Rig (300 hp) 1 0.31 See latest ACEL rental rates.
b. Crawler Crane (41- 45 mt) 1 0.96
c. Crawler Crane (21- 25 mt) 1 0.96
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.96
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction 0 (7.5 hp) 1 0.78
j. Water Truck/Pump (16000L) 1 0.78
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
3
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 MPa m 0.86 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar * District based on the prevailing unit prices in
kg 253.59


Item No.lDescription 1052(23)c Bored Piles, 1.20 m "" (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
b. Crawler Grane (41- 45 mt) 1 0.96
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2G 1 0.96
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction"" (7.5 hp) 1 0.82
o. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.22 .J

s. Lighting System /Tower Lights 1 0.96
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
E. Direct Unit Cost (G + D)
F. Materials
3
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 MPa m 1.24 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl


Item No./Description 1052(23)d Bored Piles, 1.50 m 0 (ordinary soil condition)

A. Labor
- Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.97

Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
3
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa m 1.94 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl


item No./Description 1052(23)e Bored Piles, 1.80 m QJ (ordinary soil condition)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m\ LX80-2C 1 0.98
i . Water Pump, 100 mm suction QJ (7.5 hp) 1 0.90
n. Gutting Outfit 1 0.76

q. Portable Breaker 2 0.02
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
E. Direct Unit Gost (C + D)
F. Malerials
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fe' = 28 MPa m3 2.80 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Reinforcing Steel Bar * kg 451.98
e. Welding Rod (1 kg/2000 kg of RSB) kg established quarterly by Central Office Price
0.23


Item No.lDescription 1052(23)f Bored Piles, 2.00 m 0 (ordinary soil condition)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
e. Payloader (1.50 m3), LX80-2C 1 0.98

q. Portable Breaker 2 0.02
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
3
a. Ready Mix Concrete, fc' = 28 MPa m 3.46 Prices of materials are variable per Region!


Item No./Description 1052(24)a Permanent Casing (0.80 m (Il)

A Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41- 45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest AGEL rental rates.
b. Vibro Hammer wI Hydraulic Power Pack 1 0.50
c. Welding Machine (500 A), Gas/Diesel Driven 1 0.50
Minor Tools (10% ofLabor Cost)
Sub - Total for B

'.
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.025 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 set/2500 kg of Steel) set 0.082 the locality which include payment of local
c. Welding Rod (1 kgl500 kg of Steel) kg 0.409 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
Note:
Assumed length of Steel Casing without splicing
but with full weld = 12.00 meter, 2.50% additional quantity
of Steel Casing represents the collar of O.30 m for 12 m.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(24)b Permanent Casing (1.00 m ¢l

A. Labor •

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
b. Vibro Hammer w/ Hydraulic Power Pack 1 0.50
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.025 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 seU2500 kg of Steel) set 0.102
Note:
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(24)c Permanent Casing (1.20 m (Il)

A. Labor

1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41- 45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.
Sub - Total for B .J

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.025 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 set/2500 kg of Steel) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
set 0.122
Note: established quarterly by Central Office Price
Assumed length of Steel Casing without splicing Monitoring Committee.
but with full weld= 12.00 meter, 2.50% additional quantity
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(24)d Permanent Casing (1.50 m (11)

A Labor_

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
C. Total (A + B)
E. Direct Unit Cost (C .;-D)
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.025 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 set/2500 kg of Steel) set 0.153 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Note: established quarterly by Central Office Price
Assumed length of Steel Casing without splicing Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(24)e Permanent Casing (1.80 m !Il)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.025
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 set/2500 kg of Steel) set 0.163 the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(24)f Permanent Casing (2.00 m (ll)

A. Labor -
Labor Rates are variable per

Region/District based on minimum wage as
b. Skilled Laborer 4 1.00 approved by DOLE. Refer to the Schedule
c. Unskilled Laborer 6 1.00 of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Minor Tools (10% ofLabor Cost)
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, 10 mm thk m 1.03 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. Oxy/Acetylene (1 set/2500 kg of Steel) set 0.203
Note:
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(25) Splicing of RC Piles with Epoxy (400 mm x 400 mm)
- Designation No. of Person/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41-45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 0.50 ea --
F. Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel Bar (36 mm ¢ x 1.50 m)* kg. 51.83 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Concrete Epoxy for RC Piles (Part A & B) set 0.70 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Silica Sand gal 1.40 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Pipe Sleeve, 50 mm 0 GI m 3.00 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
* Depth of dowel will be as recommended by the

manufacturer of epoxy resin in order to develop
required pile joint strength.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(26) Splicing of RC Piles with Epoxy (450 mm x 450 mm)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted Crane (41-45 mt) 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B) .f
F. Materials
a. Reinforcing Steel Bar (36 mm 11l x 1.50 m)* kg 51.83 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Concrete Epoxy for RC Piles (Part A & B) District based on the prevailing unit prices in
set 0.80
c. Silica Sand gal 1.60 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Pipe Sleeve, 50 mm 0 GI m 3.00 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
Monitoring Committee .
• Depth of dowel will be as recommended by the

manufacturer of epoxy resin in order to develop
required pile joint strength.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(27)a Pile Integrity Testing (Sonic), ordinary soil condition
Output per hour 1.00 ea (assumed pile length = 30 m)
A. Labor

Pipe Installation
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Pile Integrity Testing (Sonic) and accessories 1 lot See latest AGEL rental rates.
(includes professional fee of Structural Engineer
and reports)
b. Welding Machine (500A), Electric Driven 1 4.00
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Black/GI Pipe & accessories 2"1Il x 6 m, Schedule 20 m 120.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
b. Welding Rod kg 0.10
Materials quantity component, equipment and
labor output may vary proportionately depending on
the pile length.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1052(27)b Pile Integrity Testing (PIT), ordinary soil condition
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a.Pile Integrity Testing and accessories 1 lot See latest ACEL rental rates.
(includes professional fee of Structural Engineer
and reports)
b. Grinding Machine and accessories 1 2.00
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Grinding Disc pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Note:
the pile length.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052(22)b High Strain Dynamic Testing (PDA), ordinary soil condition
Output per hour 1.00 ea (assumed pile 0= 1.50 m)
A. Labor

1 4.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
aDynamic Pile Testing 1 lot See latest ACEL rental rates.

(includes professional fee of Structural Engineer)
b. Truck Mounted Crane (45 mt) 1 4.00
c. Drop Hammer w/ accessories 1 4.00
d. 1 Air Compressor w/ 2 Jack Hammer 1 8.00
e. Concrete Vibrator 1 0.60
f. Cutting Outfit 1 2.00
g. Welding Machine (SODA), Electric Driven 1 2.00
J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1.00 ea
F. Materials
a. Steel Casing, L = 2 x Pile 0, thickness = 100 mm m 3.00

3
b. Ready Mix Concrete, 3000 psi m 5.57 the locality which include payment of local
c. Welding Rod (1 kg/SOD kg of Steel) kg 2.234 taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d.Oxy/Acetylene (1 kg/2500 kg of Steel) set 0.447
Miscellaneous (5% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Note:
the pile length.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1052 (29) Micro Piles In Drilled Holes, 0.20m 12' (ordinary soil condition)
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Drill Rig, Mechanical Rotary 1 0.74 See latest ACEL rental rates.
b. Truck Mounted Crane (25T) 1 0.95
c. Bar Bender 1 0.04
e. Bentonite Mixer 1 0.50
f. Bentonite Bin 1 0.50
g. Water Pump 1 0.50
h.Water Truck 1 0.50
i. Welding Machine 1 0.50
j. Tremie Pipe Set 1 0.24
k. SPT & Desanding Machine 1 0.24
I. Tower Light 1 0.50
m. Minor Tools (10% of Labor Cost)
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Ready Mix 0.033 cU.m Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Reinforced Steel Bar' 12.626 kg District based on the prevailing unit prices in
c. Welding Rod (1kg/2000kg of RSB) 0.006 kg taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
d. Miscellaneous (3% of Materials, Bentonite & etc.) Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
, Its quantity is variable depending on the actual design


Item No.lDescription 1100(1) 15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)/lntermediate metal Conduit (IMC)I
Electrical Metal Tubing (EMT)
Unit of Measurement length

Output per hour 1.333 length
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

1 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B '.
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1.333 lenqth
F. Materials
a. 15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 x 3.00 m Rigid Steel Conduit Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
(RSC)I Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)I Electrical length 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Metal Tubing (EMT) locality which include payment of local taxes
and hauling cost to theproject site. Refer to the
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) Construction Material Price Data established
quarterly by Central Office Price Monitoring
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(1)a1, 1100(1)a2, 1100(1)a3, 1100(2)a1, 1100(2)a2, 1100(2)a3, 1100(4)a1,
1100(4)a2, and 1100(4)a3.
202 Part D - Electrical

Item No.lDescription 1100(1) 32 mm 13- 40 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)I Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)I

A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

1
b. Skilnld Laborer 1 1.00 DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 1.250 length
F. Materials
a. 32 mm 0 - 40 mm 0 x 3.00 m Rigid Steel Conduit Prices of materials are variable per Region/
(RSC)I Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)I Electrical length 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Metal Tubing (EMT) locality which include payment of local taxes
and hauling cost to the project site. Refer to the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%1 12%1 10%1 8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(1 )a4, 1100(1 )a5, 1100(2)a4, 1100(2)a5, 11 OO( 4)a4, 1100(4)a5.

Item No./Description 1100(1) 50 mm 0 - 65 mm 0 Rigid Steel ConduiU Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)/

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A ,-

B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 0.516 length
F. Materials
a. 50 mm 0 - 65 mm 0 x 3.00 m Rigid Steel ConduiU Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)/ Electrical Metal District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
length 1.00
Tubing (EMT) locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(1)a6, 1100(1)a7,1100(2)a6, 1100(2)a7, 1100(4)a6and 1100(4)a7.

Item No./Description 1100(1) 80 mm 12)- 100 mm 0 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC)I Intermediate metal Conduit (IMC)I

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
,J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 80 mm 0 x 3 m Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) length 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
locality which include payment of local taxes
Construction Material Price Data established
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1100(1 )a8, 1100(1 )a9, 1100(1 )a1 0, 1100(2)a8, 1100(2)a9, 1100(2)a1 0, 1100(4)a8,
1100(4)a9 and 1100(4)a10.

Item No./Description 1100(3) 15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 Flexible Metal Conduit

A. Labor

1 1.00
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
'.
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 15 mm 0 - 25 mm 0 Flexible Metal Conduit m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(3)a1, 1100(3)a2 and 1100(3)a3.

Item No.lDescription 1100(6) 15 mm fZJ- 32 mm \11Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipes

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
.
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 15 mm fZJ- 32 mm fZJx 3.00 mm Polyvinyl Chloride Prices of materials are variable per Region!
length 1.05 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
(PVC) Pipes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, ContinQencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
J. Value Added Tax (VAT) 5% of(G + H + I)
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(6)a1, 1100(6)a2, 1100(6)a3, and 1100(6)a4.

Item No.lDescription 1100 PVC/RSC/ IMC/ EMT Conduit Fittings

Output 1.00 pc
A. Labor
(Labor cost for these items shall be considered/included in the installation of conduits.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"-
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.00 pc
F. Materials
a. Coupling/Elbow/End Bell/Clamp or others pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(7), 1100(8), 1100(9), 1100(10), 1100(11), 1100(12), 1100(13), 1100(14) and
1100(15).
208 Part 0 - Electrical

Item No.lDescription 1100 Junctionl Utilityl Pulll Square Box

Output 1.00 pc
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
".
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1.00 pc
F. Materials
a. Junctionl Utilityl Pulll Square Box pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1100(19), 1100(20). 1100(21), and 1100(22).

Item No./Description 1100(30) Conduit Works, Boxes and Fittings

Output 1.00I.s.
A. Labor
See Derivation for Item No.1100(1) to Item No. 1100(11)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
See Derivation for Item No. 1100(1) to Item No. 1100(11)
"-
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1.00I.s.
F. Materials
See Derivation for Item No.1100(1) to Item No. 1100(11)
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book, shall be based on the derived outputs of Item No. 11 OO( 1) to
Item No. 1100(11).

Item No.lDescription 1101(2) 1.6 mm2 - 5.5 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2)
Output per hour 25m
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 25m
F. Materials
a. 1.6 mm2 - 5.5 mm2 Electric Wire Prices of materials are variable per Region/
m 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
(TWITHHNITWHN2)
b. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) and hauling cost to the project site. Refer to the
Committee,
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead. Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
J. Value AddedTax (VAT) 5% of (G + H + I)
Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (2)a 1, 1101 (2)a2, 1101 (2)a3, 1101 (2)a4, 1101 (2)a5, 1101 (2)a6, and 1101 (2)a7.

Item No./Description 1101(2) 8.00 mm2 - 22 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. 8.00 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2) m 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
b. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1101 (2)a8, 1101(2)a9, and 1101 (2)a1 O.


A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"-
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 30.00 mm2 - 38 mm2 Electric Wire Prices of materials are variable per Region/
(TW/THHN/TWHN2)
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (2)a 11 and 1101 (2)a12.

Item No.lDescription 1101(2) 50.00 mm2 - 60 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2)

A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 50.00 mm2 - 60mm2 Electric Wire Prices of materials are variable per Region!
(TWITHHNITWHN2)
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1101(2)a13 and 1101 (2)a14.

A. Labor

c. UnsJ<iIIedLaborer 2 1.00
Sub - Total for A
.
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 80.00 mm2 - 125 mm2 Electric Wire Prices of materials are variable per Region/
(TW/THHN/TWHN2)
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (2)a15, 1101(2)a16and 1101 (2)a17.

Item No.lDescription 1101(2) 150.00 mm2 - 250 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2)
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

1 1.00
c. Unstdlled Laborer 4 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"-
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a.150.00 mm2 -250 mm2 Electric Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
(TW/THHN/TWHN2)
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead. Continqencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% of G
K. Total Unit Cost "
(G + H + I + J)
Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (2)a18, 1101 (2)a19 and 1101 (2)a20.

Item No.lDescription 1101(2) 325.00 mm2 - 400 mm2 Electric Wire (TWITHHNITWHN2)
A. Labor

c. Uns1<illed Laborer 4 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
-,
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 325.00 mm2 - 400 mm2 Electric Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
(TWITHHNITWHN2)
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101(2)a21, and 1101(2)a23.

Item No.lDescription 1101(2)a23 500.00 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2)

A. Labor

1 1.00
-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
..
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 500.00 mm2 Electric Wire (TW/THHN/TWHN2) m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
b. Consumables (3% of Materials Cost) locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1101(4) XLPE Electric Wires

Output per hour
A. Labor
(Labor cost shall be included in the Power Contract with MERALCO or Local Power Cooperative.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = 0
F. Materials
a. XLPE, Creosoted pole, anchor Rod, anchor log, (Materials cost included in the Power Contract with MERALCO
power load studs, pad mounted transformer, pole-type or Local Power Cooperative.)
transformer, transformer bracket, Aluminum
Conductor Steel-Reinforced (ACSR) powerfuse,
concrete pole, power transmission pole, pin insulator,
pole top pin, machine bolts and washers
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1101 (7) 2.00 mm2 - 5.5 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

c. Uns]<illed Laborer 1 1.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 2.00 mm2 - 5.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (7)a1, 1101 (7)a2, and 1101 (7)a3.

Item No.lDescription 1101 (7) 8.00 mm2 - 22.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

1 1.00
c. UnsKilled Laborer 1 1.00
Sub - Total for A
.
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 8.00 mm2 - 22.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead. ContinQencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (7)a4, 1101 (7)a5, and 1101 (7)a6.

Item No./Description 1101(7) 30.00 mm2 - 38.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 30.00 mm2 - 38.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
and hauling cost to the project site, Refer to the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (7)a7 and 1101 (7)a8.

Item No./Description 1101 (7) 50.00 mm2 - 60.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
".
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (7)a9 and 1101 (7)a1 O.

"
Item No.lDescription 1101 (7) 80.00 mm2 - 125.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
'.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 80.00 mm2 - 125.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire m 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Committee,
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (7)a11, 1101 (7)a12 and 1101(7)a13.

Item No./Description 1101(7) 200.00 mm2 - 250.00 mm2 Bare Copper Wire
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1101(7)a14 and 1101(7)a15.

Item No./Description 1101 Switches

Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No. of Unit/s No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
..
Sub - Total for 8
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 set
F. Materials
a. Switches set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (8) to 1101 (19).

Item No.lDescription 1101 Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)I Heavy Duty Convenience
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)I Weather Proof Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle,
Grounding Type (GT)I Pop-up Type/Floor Triplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)

Output 1 set
A. Labor-

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
,-
F. Materials

a. Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Type (GT)I Heavy Duty Convenience locality which include payment of local taxes
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)I Weather
set 1.00 Construction Material Price Data established
Proof Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, quarterly by Central Office Price Monitoring
Grounding Type (GT)I Pop-up Type/Floor Triplex Committee.
Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (20), 1101(22), 1101 (23) and 1101(31).

Item No./Description 1101 Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT) I Weather Proof Duplex Convenience
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)I Special Purpose Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding
Type for ACU, WH, etcl Explosion Proof Type Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type
(GT)I Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle with Ground Fault Circuit Interupter

Output 1 set

-
A. Labor
a. Skilled Laborer 1 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

0.30
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Type (GT) I Weather Proof Duplex Convenience District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)I Special locality which include payment of local taxes
Purpose Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding
Type for ACU, WH, ete! Explosion ProofType Duplex quarterly by Central Office Price Monitoring
Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type set 1.00 Committee.
(GT)I Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle with
Ground Fault Circuit Interupter
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (21), 1101 (24), 1101 (25), 1101 (30) and 1101 (32).

Item No./Description 1101 Pop-up Type/Floor Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/ Pop-up Type/Floor
Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/ Explosion Proof Type Single
Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/ Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle with
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter

Output 1 set -
A. Labor-

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
E. Direct Unit Cost (C + D) _J
F. Materials
a. Pop-up Type/Floor Single Convenience Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type (GT)/ Pop-up District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Type/Floor Duplex Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, locality which include payment of local taxes
and hauling cost to the project site_ Refer to the
Grounding Type (GT)/ Explosion Proof Type Single
Convenience Outlet/Receptacle, Grounding Type set 1.00
quarterly by Central Offiice Price Monitoring
(GT)/ Single Convenience Outlet/Receptacle with Committee
Ground Fault Circuit Interupter
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1101 (26), 1101 (27), 1101 (29), and 1101 (32).

Item No.lDescription 1101(42) Wires and Wiring Devices

Output 1.001.s
A. Labor
See derivation for Items 1101(1) to Item 1101(8).
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
See derivation for Items 1101(1) to Item 1101(8).
"-
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.001.s
F. Materials
See derivation for Items 1101(1)-ltem 1101(8).
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book, shall be based on the derived outputs of Item No. 1101 (1) to
Item No. 1101(8)

Item No./Description 1102 Panel Board with Main Breaker/Branches, 3 wires, 1 neutral, 250 Amp - 400 Amp
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Note:
Labor includes disassembling of Panel Board
component, fabrication of hole (conduit for main breaker
and branches), installation of fitting, alignment of panel
board enclosure, re-installation of circuit breaker
component and accessories, termination of wire, testing
and commissioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour - 1 set
F. Materials
a. Panel Board with Main Breaker and 8 Branches Prices of materials are variable per Region!
set 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
250 amp - 400 amp
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Additional 1 hr may be added every another 2 circuit branches, 1 hr per every additional main breaker (500-600Amp),
2 hrs per additional main breaker (800-1000Amp) and 4 hrs per additional 1200 Amp main breaker.
2. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1102(1 )a1 to 1102(1 )a12, 1102(2)a1 to 1102(2)a6, and 1102(2)b1 to 1102(2)b6.

Item No./Description 1102 Panel Board with Main Breaker/Branches, 3 wires, 1 neutral, 50 Amp - 200 Amp
Output 1 set
A. Labor

1 5.50
Note:
Labor includes disassembling of Panel Board
component, fabrication of hole (conduit for main breaker
and branches), installation of fitting, alignment of panel
board enclosure, re-installation of circuit breaker
component and accessories, termination of wire, testing
and commissioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B) .J
F. Materials
a. Panel Board with Main Breaker and 8 Branches 50 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
amp - 200 amp set 1.00 District based on the prevaifing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Additional 0.75 hr may be added every another 2 circuit branches, and deduction of 0.50 for 2 wires, 1 neutral.
2. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1102(1 )a1 to 1102(1 )a12, 1102(2)a1 to 1102(2)a6, and 1102(2)b1 to 1102(2)b6.

Item No./Description 1102 NEMA I (Enclosed Circuit Breaker) Single Phase or Three Phase Commercial/lndustrial Type
A. Labor

Note:
Labor Includes removal of circuit breaker,
Alignment, mounting and removal of hub/hole, installation of
pipe/fittings, re-installation of circuit breaker, termination of
wires, testing and commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
",
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. NEMA I Enclosed Circuit Breaker, plug-in or bolt Prices of materials are variable per Region!
set 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
type 15A T-70A T Flushed Mounted
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1102(4)a1 to 1102(4)a6 and 1102(4)b1 to 1102(4)b4.

Item No./Description 1102 NEMA 3R (Enclosed Circuit Breaker) Single Phase or Three Phase Commercial/Industrial Type
A. Labor

Note:
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. NEMA 3R Enclosed Circuit Breaker, plug-in or bolt set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
type 15AT-70AT Flushed Mounted District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1102( 4)a1 to 1102( 4)a6 and 1102( 4)b1 to 1102(4 )b6

Item No./Description 1102 Motor Control Center with main, branch breaker and motor starter (NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and 4X) Flush or
Surface Mounted
A. Labor

Note:
pipe/fittings, re-installation of circuit breaker, .termination of
Sub - T0tal for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Motor Control Center with main, branch breaker and Prices of materials are variable per Region/
set 1.00
motor starter (NEMA 1, NEMA 3R and 4X) Flush or District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Surface Mounted locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1102(8) Generator (Stand by and Continuous), Synchonizing Panel for Generator, High Voltage Switch Gear

A. Labor
Labor by Specialty Works or Manufacturer'sJSupplier's Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)

-
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Equipment Rental by Specialty Works or Manufacturer'sJSupplier's Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
Name and Specification Unit Quantity ,-

Unit Cost Amount (PhP)
F. Materials
a. Generator (Stand by and Continuous), Synchonizing Materials Cost by Specialty Works or Manufacturer'sJSupplier's
Panel for Generator, High Voltage Switch Gear Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 AT, 70 AT, 3P, 240V: NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x
Flushedl Surface Mounted
Designation No. of Personls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount
A. Labor

Note:
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount
B. Equipment
'.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
Name and Specification Unit Quantity Unit Cost Amount
F. Materials
Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
AT, 70 AT , 3P, 240x: NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Flushedl Surface Mounted locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) 15%/12%/10%/8% of G
I. Contractor's Profit (CP) 10%8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1102(4)a 1 to 1102( 4)a6.

Item No./Description 1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 AT, 70 AT, 2P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Note:
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 50 AT, 60 set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
AT, 70 AT, 2P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Flushedl Surface Mounted locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, 125 AT, 205 AT, 225 AT, 3P; 240V NEMA I, NEMA
3R, NEMA 4x Flushed/ Surface Mounted
Designation No. of Person/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount
A. Labor

Note:
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unit/s No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
125 AT, 205 AT, 225 AT, 3P, 240V NEMA I, NEMA District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
3R, NEMA 4x Flushed/ Surface Mounted locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) 15%/12%/10%/8% ofG
Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1102(4)a1 to 1102(4)a6.

Item No./Description 1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, 125 AT, 200 AT, 2P, 225 AT, 2P, 240V NEMA I,
NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x Flushedl Surface Mounted
Designation No. of Personls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount
A. labor
a. Coniitruction Foreman 1 5.00

b. Skilled laborer 1 5.00 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District
Note:
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount
B. Equipment
".
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker 100 AT, set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
125 AT, 200 AT , 2P, 225 AT, 2P, 240V NEMA I, District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
NEMA 3R, NEMA 4x Flushedl Surface Mounted locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1102 Low Voltage Switch Board Main 2500-4000 AT, 3P, 240V NEMA I with Breaker
A. Labor
Labor by Specialty Works or Manufacturer's/Supplier's Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Equipment Rental by Specialty Works or Manufacturer's/Supplier's Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)
-.
Sub - Total for B
C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a_ Low Voltage Switch Board Main 2500-4000 AT, 3P, Material Cost by Specialty Works or Manufacturer's/Supplier's
240V NEMA I with Breaker Quotation (attach at least 3 quotations)
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1102 Main Enclosed Automatic Breaker 250-500 Amp

Output 1 set
Designation No. of Personls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount
A. Labor

c. Uns5i11edLaborer 2 12.50
Note:
Alignment, mounting and removal of hublhole, installation of
pipelfittings, re-installation of circuit breaker, termination of
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity No of Unitls No. of Houris Hourly Rate Amount
B. Equipment
",
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 set
F. Materials
a. Main Enclosed Automatic Breaker 250-500 Amp set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) 15%/12%/10%1 8% of G

Item No./Description 1103(1) Lighting Fixtures

Output 1.001.s
A. Labor
See derivation for Item 1103(2)-ltem 1103(13) Labor Rates are variable per Region/District
. DOLE. Refer to the Schedule of Labor Rates .
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
See derivation for Item 1103(2)-ltem 1103(13)
-.
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1.001.s
F. Materials
See derivation for Item 1103(2)-ltem 1103(13) Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

H. Overhead, Contingencies & Miscellaneous (OCM) Expenses 15%/12%110%/8% of G
Note: 1. The "Iumpsum" unit of measurement as per Blue Book, shall be based on the derived outputs of Item 1103(2) to
Item 1103(13).

Item No./Description : 1103(2) Fluorescent Lighting Fixture with Ballast lLight Emitting Diode (LED) Bulb, 1 Bulb
Output 1 set
A. Labor
a. Construction Foreman 1 Labor Rates are variable per RegionlDistrict

1.00
Note:
Labor Includes installation of scaffolding,
alignment of fixtures, disassemble of lighting fixture,
permanent Installation of insullation material, testing and
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output =
.
1 set
F. Materials
a. 1 -20Watts-40Watts f10urescent lighting fixture, Box set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
type, Diffuser type, Mirrorized Aluminum Louver, District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Industrial type (Recessed and Surface Mounted) locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

1103(2)a29, 1103(2)a33, 1103(2)a33, 1103(2)a37, 1103(2)a41, 1103(2)a45, 1103(2)b1, 1103(2)b5, 1103(2)b9, 1103(2)b13,
1103(2)b17, 1103(2)b21, 1103(2)b25, 1103(2)b29, 1103(2)b33, 1103(2)b33, 1103(2)b37, 1103(2)b41, 1103(2)b45,
1103(2)c1, 1103(2)c6, 1103(2)c11, 1103(2)c16, 1103(2)c21, 1103(2)c26, 1103(2)c31, 1103(2)c36, 1103(2)c41, 1103(2)c46,
1103(2)c51, 1103(2)d1, 1103(2)d5, 1103(2)d9, 1103(2)d13, 1103(2)d17 and 1103(2)d21.

Item No./Description : 1103(2) Fluorescent Lighting Fixture with Ballast /Light Emitting Diode (LED) Bulb, 2 Bulbs
Output 1 set
A. Labor

c. Uns,killed Laborer 1 1.15
Note:
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 set
F. Materials
a. 2 -20Watts-40Watts f10urescent lighting fixture, Box set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
type, Diffuser type, Mirrorized Aluminum Louver, District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee,
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1103(2)a2, 1103(2)a6, 1103(2)a1 0, 1103(2)a14, 1103(2)a18, 1103(2)a22, 1103(2)a26,
1103(2)a30, 1103(2)a34, 1103(2)a46, 1103(2)b2, 1103(2)b6, 1103(2)b1 0, 1103(2)b14, 1103(2)b18, 1103(2)b22,
1103(2)b26, 1103(2)b30, 1103(2)b34, 1103(2)b46, 1103(2)c2, 1103(2)c3, 1103(2)c7, 1103(2)c8, 1103(2)c12, 1103(2)c13,
1103(2)c17, 1103(2)c18, 1103(2)c22, 1103(2)c23, 1103(2)c27, 1103(2)c28, 1103(2)c32, 1103(2)c33, 1103(2)c37,
1103(2)c38, 1103(2)c42, 1103(2)c43, 1103(2)c47, 1103(2)c48, 1103(2)c52, 1103(2)c53, 1103(2)c57, 1103(2)c58,
1103(2)d2, 1103(2)d6, 1103(2)d1 0, 1103(2)d14, 1103(2)d18, and 1103(2)d22.

Item No./Description 1103(2) Fluorescent Lighting Fixture with Ballast lLight Emitting Diode (LED) Bulb, 3 Bulbs
Output 1 set
A. Labor

c. Uns!<iIIed Laborer 1 1.25
Note:
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"-
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. 3-20watts-40watts f10urescent lighting fixture set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Box type, Diffuser type, Mirrorized Aluminum Louver, District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

1103(2)a30, 1103(2)a35, 1103(2)a39, 1103(2)a43, 1103(2)a47, 1103(2)b3, 1103(2)b7, 1103(2)b11, 1103(2)b15,
1103(2)b19, 1103(2)b23, 1103(2)b27, 1103(2)b30, 1103(2)b35, 1103(2)b39, 1103(2)b43, 1103(2)b47, 1103(2)c4,
1103(2)c9, 1103(2)c14, 1103(2)c19, 1103(2)c24, 1103(2)c29, 1103(2)c34, 1103(2)c39, 1103(2)c44, 1103(2)c49,
1103(2)c54, 1103(2)c59, 1103(2)d3, 1103(2)d7, 1103(2)d11, 1103(2)d15, 1103(2)d19, and 1103(2)d23.

Item No.lDescription 1103(2) Fluorescent Lighting Fixture with Ballast ILight Emitting Diode (LED) Bulb, 4 Bulbs
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Note:
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
",
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. 4-20watts-40watts flourescent lighting fixture set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
Box type, Diffuser type, Mirrorized Aluminum Louver, District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1103(2)a4, 1103(2)a8, 1103(2)a12, 1103(2)a16, 1103(2)a20, 1103(2)a24, 1103(2)a28,
1103(2)a32, 1103(2)a36, 1103(2)a40, 1103(2)a44, 1103(2)a48, 1103(2)b4, 1103(2)b8, 1103(2)b12, 1103(2)b16,
1103(2)b20, 1103(2)b24, 1103(2)b28, 1103(2)b32, 1103(2)b36, 1103(2)b40, 1103(2)b44, 1103(2)b48, 1103(2)c5,
1103(2)c1 0, 1103(2)c15, 1103(2)c13, 1103(2)c20, 1103(2)c25, 1103(2)c30, 1103(2)c35, 1103(2)c40, 1103(2)c45,
1103(2)c50, 1103(2)c55, 1103(2)c60, 1103(2)d4, 1103(2)d8, 1103(2)d12, 1103(2)d16, 1103(2)d20, and 1103(2)d24.

Item No.lDescription 1103(5) Downlight/Pinlight Fixture with One- Compact Fluorecent Lamp (CFL) or LED Bulb, 1 Bulb
A. Labor

Note:
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials

a. 1-8watts-21watts Downlight/Pinlight, set 1.00
Recessed/Surface Mounted with or without glass locality which include payment of local taxes
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

I. Contractor's Profit (CP) . 10%/8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1103(5)a, 1103(5)b, 1103(5)c, and 1103(5)d.

Item No./Description 1103(5) DownlightJPinlight Fixture with Two- Compact Fluorecent Lamp (CFL) or LED Bulb, 2 Bulb
Output 1 set
A. Labor

c. Uns_killed Laborer 1 0.75
Note:
commisioning.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
"0
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. 2- 8Watts-21 Watts DownlightlPinlight, set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region!
RecessedlSurface Mounted with or without glass District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1103(5)a, 1103(5)b, 1103(5)c, and 1103(5)d.

Item No.lDescription 1103(11) High Bay Aluminum Reflector, Dome Luminaire

Output 1 set
A. Labor

c. Uns_killed Laborer 2 1.50
Note:
Labor Includes, installation of scaffolding,
alignment of lighting fixture, termination of wire, testing,
commissioning and painting.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted, Scissor Lift, Rough Terrain 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental rates.
(Gas/Diesel)
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. High Bay Aluminum Reflector, Dome Luminaire set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Regionl
70Watts - 250 Watts District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

I. Contractor's Profit(CP) 10%/8% of G
Note: 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1103(11 )a1 and 1103(11 )a2.

Item No./Description 1103(12) Die-Cast Aluminum Floodlight with Electrocoat Paint Finish
Output 1 set
A. Labor

1.50
c. Uns.killed Laborer 2 1.50
Nole:
Labor Includes, installation of scaffolding,
alignment of lighting fixture, termination of wire, testing,
commissioning and painting.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
a. Truck Mounted, Scissor Lift, Rough Terrain 1 1.00 See latest ACEL rental raets.
(Gas/Diesel)
Sub - Total for B '.
C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a.Die-Cast Aluminum Floodlight with electrocoat paint set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
finish 70Watts - 250 Watts District based on the prevailing unit prices in the
Committee.
Sub - Total for F

Note: 1. Use this cost sheetfor Item Nos. 1103(12)a1, 1103(12)a2 and 1103(12)a3.

Item No.lDescription 1200 Air Conditioning and Refrigiration System

Output 1 I.s.
A. Labor

.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B .

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 I.s.
F. Materials
Sub - Total for F

252 Part E - Mechanical

Item No./Description 1201(1) Water Pumping System

Output 11.s.
A. Labor
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B) .
D. Output = 1 I.s.
F. Materials
See Items 1201(2) - 1012(12)
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(1) Automatic Water Sprinkler System

Output 11.s.
A. Labor
See Derivations for Items 1202(2) to 1012(12)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 11.s.
F. Materials
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(2)a Fire Pump with complete control and standard accessories
Output 1 set
A. Labor
Sub - Total for A
Name and Capacity .

No. of Unitls No. of HourIs Hourly Rate Amount (PhP)
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
Name and Specification Unit Quantity J Unit Cost Amount (PhP)
F. Materials

a. Fire Pump, complete with reinforced concrete
pad and following accessories: coupling and guard, the locality which include payment of local
mounted steel base plate, pump controller, flow taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
meter autorelease valve, suction and discharge set 1.00 Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
gauge, flow meter and other accessories specified established quarterly by Central Office Price
in mechanical plan and specification Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(2)b Jockey Pump with complete control and standard accessories
Output 1 set
A. Labor

-
Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output -
.J
F. Materials
a. Jockey Pump complete with controller and set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
NEMA 3R and other accessories: valve, suction District based on the prevailing unit prices in
and discharge gauge, flow meter and other
accessories specified in mechanical plan and Refer to the Construction Material Price Data
specifications established quarterly by Central OfficePrice
b. Consumables (5% of Materials Cost) Monitoring Committee.
Sub - Total for F

G. Direct Unit Cost (E+ F)

Item No.lDescription 1202(3)a Sprinkler Head, upright/pendent/wall

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

b. SkilTed Laborer 1 0.25 based on minimum wage as approved by
Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Sprinkler Head, upright/pendent/wall pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)b Alarm Check Valve

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

b. Skilfed Laborer 1 4.00
c Unskilled Laborer 1 4.00
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output -
F. Materials
a. Alarm Check Valve pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)c Flow Meter

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output -
F. Materials
a. Flow meter pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)d OS & Y Gate Valve 175 psi

A. Labor

b. Skilted Laborer 1 3.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
c Unskilled Laborer 1 3.00 Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
.
D. Output =
F. Materials
a. OS & Y Gate Valve 175 psi pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1202(3)e Pressure Gauge

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
oJ
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Pressure Gauge pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/

Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)f Pressure Relief Valve

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour -
F. Materials
a. Pressure Relief Valve pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)g Floor Control Valve

. Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Pressure Relief Valve pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(3)h1 Inspector Test Valve

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

Region/District based on minimum wage
as approved by DOLE. Refer to the
c Unskilled Laborer 1 0.75 Schedule of Labor Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Inspector Test Valve pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1202(3)h2 Inspector Test Connection

Output 1 pc
A. Labor

c Unskilled Laborer 1 6.00 Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output - 1 pc
F. Materials
a. Inspector Test Connector pc 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(4) 25 mm ¢ - 50 mm ¢ Black Iron (B.I.) Pipe

A. Labor

b. Skilfed Laborer 1 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
Note:
Straight line installation for ceiling height of up to
3.5m. Labor output includes setting, scafolding, cutting,
fixing of pipe from elbow, tee, flange, valve and painting.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
F. Materials
a. 25 mm 0 - 50 mm 0 x 6.00 m Black Iron (B.I.) Prices of materials are variable per Region/
length 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Pipe
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1202(4)a1, 1202(4)a2, 1202(4)a3 and 1202(4)a4.

Item No./Description 1202(4) 65 mm 0-150 mm l2I Black Iron (B.I.) Pipe

A. Labor

Note:
Straight line installation for ceiling height of up to
3.5m. Labor output includes setting, scafolding, cutting,
fixing of pipe from elbow, tee, flange, valve and painting.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
Name imd Specification Unit Quantity Unit Cost Amount (PhP)
F. Materials
a. 65 mm 0 -150 mm l2I x 6.00 m Black Iron (B.I.) Prices of materials are variable per Region/
length 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
Pipe
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1202(4)a5, 1202(4)a6, 1202(4)a7 and 1202(4)a8.

Item No./Description 1202 Fittings

Output per hour
A. Labor
(Labor.. cost for these items are to be consideredlincluded in the installation of pipes.)
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output per Hour = Output for these items are considered in the installation of pipes
F. Materials
a. B.l. 90 elbow/B.l. Tee/ Bell Reducerl Blind Prices of materials are variable per Region!
Flange/ Slip Flange/ Riser Nipple/ Threadolet! Pipe pc 1.00 the locality which include payment of local
Sleeve taxes and hauling cost to the project site.
b. Consumables (5% of material cost)
Sub - Total for F

Note 1. Use this cost sheet for Item Nos. 1202(4)b, 1202(4)c, 1202(5)a, 1202(5)b, 1202(6)a, 1202(6)b, 1202(7)a, 1202(8)a and
1202(9)a.

Item No./Description 1202(10) Fire Hose Valve siames 150 mm 11lx 2 w x 65 mm 11lwith cap
Output 1 set
A. Labor

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials

a. Fire Hose Valve siames 150 mm 0 x 2 w x 65 set 1.00 District based on the prevailing unit prices in
mm 0 with cap the locality which include payment of local
Sub - Total for F


Item No.lDescription 1202( 11) Fire Hose Cabinet

Output 1 set
A. Labor

b. Skitted Laborer 1 1.00 based on minimum wage as approved by
Rates.
Sub - Total for A
B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Fire Hose Cabinet set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


Item No./Description 1202(12) Fire Extinguisher

Output 1 set
A. Labor
a. Unskilled Laborer 1 0.50 Labor Rates are variable per Region/District

Sub - Total for A

B. Equipment
.J
Sub - Total for B

C. Total (A + B)
D. Output = 1 set
F. Materials
a. Fire Extinguisher set 1.00 Prices of materials are variable per Region/
Sub - Total for F


SECTION C
CALCULATION OF CYCLE TIME

FOR HAULING EQUIPMENT
272
C. CALCULATION OF CYCLE TIME FOR HAULING EQUIPMENT
C.l ESTIMATED TRAVEL SPEED, LOADING/UNLOADING & ALLOWANCE FOR DELAY
ROAD SURFACE DUMP TRUCK TRAVEL SPEED {km/h}

TERRAIN CONDITION
CONDITION LOADED EMPTY
PAVED 35 55
FLAT
UNPAVED 30 45
PAVED 30 40
ROLLING
UNPAVED 25 35
PAVED 20 30
MOUNTAINOUS
UNPAVED 15 25
LOADING TIME (min) 3
UNLOADING TIME (min) 2
ALLOWANCE FOR DELAY (min) 100/0 of Cycle Time
C.2 FORMULA FOR THE CALCULATION OF DUMP TRUCK TRAVEL TIME

FORMULA: T = D7R
Where T = Time, Time of Travel (h)

D = Distance, Hauling Distance (km)
R= Rate, Travel Speed (km/h)
C.3 COMPUTATION OF CYCLE TIME, T

Example: Average Hauling Distance = 2.00 km
J
Flat
Average Hauling Distance = 2.00 km
Loading Time = 3.00 min
Loaded Travel Time
First 200 m @ 20 kph = 0.60 min
Succeeding 1600 m@ 30 kph = 3.20 min
Next 200 m @ 20 kph = 0.60 min
Unload and Manuever = 2.00 min
Return Empty
First 200 m @ 30 kph = 0.40 min
Succeeding 1600 m@ 45 kph = 2.13 min
Next 200 m @ 30 kph = 0.40 min
Cycle Time, T = 12.33 min
Allowance for Delay = 1.23 min
Total Cycle Time, T = 13.56 minutes
NOTE:
The assumed travel time for loaded and unloaded dump trucks for each type of road surface and
terrain condition are for normal conditions. It may vary depending on traffic and road surface
conditions and other fa9:0rs provided that a detailed justification/explanation to be supported with
corresponding data and relevant information should be presented.
273
SECTION D
COMPUTATION OF LABOR RATES

J
274
D. COMPUTATION OF LABOR RATES
0.1 BASIS OF COMPUTATION
The estimated labor rates for each region/district office were computed in accordance with D.O.
40, Series of 2009, Re: Guidelines for the establishment of Construction Materials Price Data,
Standard Labor and Equipment Rental Rates (or latest issuance), and based on the minimum
wage rate as published by the National Wages and Productivity Commission, Department of
Labor and Emolovment (DOLE)'
The computed labor rates including all component costs such as basic wage plus emergency cost
of living allowance (ECOLA) and worker's statutory monetary benefits and others are in
accordance with the existing~ laws and government regulations. It shall be updated as the need
arises based on the latest issuances for new minimum wages by the NWPC/DOLE and/or any
amendments to the benefits of the workers.
0.2 CONDITIONS IN THE USAGE OF THE LABOR RATES
CASE I - In cases where project/s traverse/s certain barangays, municipalities, towns or

cities (with varying labor rates) of a concerned DEO, the average labor cost of
the said places shall be utilized by the DEO.
CASE II - In cases wherein project/s traverse/s certain provinces within the jurisdiction of
only one (1) Regional Office, the average labor cost of the said Regional Office
shall be utilized.
CASE III - In cases wherein project/s passes numerous pfovinces within the jurisdiction of
.two (2) or more Regional Offices, the average labor cost of the said Regional
Office with the longest work coverage or with largest major scope of works
shall be utilized.
275
~ II: II:
:)
000 1.0 1.0
....• ....• .....
0"\
1.0 Vl Vl m ,...
<t
~ ~ <iVl .n .n
....•
Vl 0"\ 0"\
....; ....;
00
II:
Q. 0
:I: ....• ....• 0
N 0
..... ....•
oci
0"\ 0"\ 0"\
<i
00
0
,...
~ Vl m ....• ....• 1.0 N N <t 00

II:
~ ~
00 00 m m
cri 0 ....; ....; oci
<t
.n m ~ oci ~
1.0 1.0
i Q. 0 0"\
0"\
N
0"\
<t
00
<t
00
00
,... ,... ,...
,... m
Vl
1.0
Vl
1.0
Vl
:I:
~ II: I-
0
m ,... ,... ,... ,...
00 Vl Vl
Vl
00 00 0 m
m m 0 0
"0
e
~ ~ Z
lci 0 N
0"\ N m
N ....;
m .....
0 ,...
0 0 lci
0"\ 0"\ 1.0 <t
m m 0"\ ....•
r'
'"
b.O
.::;
II: 0
~
Q. 0"\ 0 0
<t- m- ....•
N N N
- .....- ....•
N
0"\- 00- 00 ..... ....•
....• .....
1.0- <t-
b.O
'"
l-
~
e- § 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
~'" Ib
~
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
..... ..... ....• ....• ..... ..... ....• ..... .....
e 0..
'"
Vl V!
l-
e- ii:
O ~ :I:
N
Q) Z
~ !:; 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
:::> ~ 0 Vl Vl Vl 0 Vl Vl Vl Vl
Cf ...~ :I:...
en ~ 0
Vl
N
r'N N 0
m ..... ....• 0 00
N N N N .....
r' ....•r'
00
N
1.0
....• mr'
.....
b.O
·Vi U :E
o
'"
0.. 0 0..
o
- o
V!
V') >- U 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o
LLI '" ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ,...
0 o
''""
m
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cri N Vl-
0.. V! 0"\ 0"\ 0"\ 0"\ 0"\ 0"\ 0"\ 0-
~
a:: W
:::>
V!
V! - - - - - - -
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0"\ N
....• ..... ..... ..... ....• ..... ..... 0"\ 00 QJ
>
o
r::T >-
a:: '"
Ie ,... o
.0
co
e ~ :I:
:I:
I-
0
Vl
00
00
Vl
N
Vl
N ..... 00
0
00
0
0
0 m
QQ
~co
o
o
o &
CO ~ r'
> ....; .n 00
'" I- Z lci lci cri N N
<C
....I
0..
",- ..• 0~
rtl Q.,... <t 0 Vl
- - - - - - - -
1.0 <t
Vl
<t m
Vl 1.0
N .....
..... ....• ..... ..... ..... ....• ..... .....
1.0
N
1.0 0
,...
0"\
u
.s::
u c C
o
.....
0-
QJ
C
QJ
a:l
.•...
'" co 00"0
u.. 0 .•..o
QJ :p '';:; c: co
·u
e Cl: z'>" ~
V!
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
X
V>
>-
::> ::> co
.0.00
Ec: :sc: a
o
Vl
Z u m- > 00 0"\ 0 0 00 00 N 0
QJ co ci +
-o
<t "0
e zC
"0
0- ~ oci oci cri cri N cri lci .n .n C
o
000
U U 0
>-
:::>
i= ::E: :;::; ...
~ 00 ,...
m 1.0 0"\ 0"\ Vl 0 0 Vl 1.0
1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Vl <t
o
u
V>
o
...•..
m
N
I.n V') a.ri'
-OJ
QJ
-Q)
QJ
0-
~
co
0-
f;
<C ....•
....I ;:
C
e ~ ~ 0 o
:::>
a.. ~ ~ 0
0
0
Vl
0
~ .n
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
.0 *f; c.c.w ::::
::::> C m- :I: 0
,... N ,... ,...
Vl 0 .n .n 0 0
.J co
--'QJ c E E .0
CO ~ I- N ....•
<t <t 00 Vl o UJ UJ c
m ..... .....
~
e
:.;;;
.;::
~
~
Z 0"\ N <t <t
0 6 cri' ,...- ,...- 1.0- ui" Vl- m- .....
~ N ..... ..... ....• ..... ..... ..... ....• .....
0"\ 1.0
- f;
>-
E
•...
QJ
~
C
'';:;
c
~
110
C
c
~
co
V)
~ .0 C. C
~'"
QJ QJ QJ
"0
LLI V>
....I .IE.-
U
Vi
.!!!
C.
>-
co
N
M
OJ Ci1
a.a.E
0.
Q.
·c ~ ~ 0
00
0
0"\
0
0
0
0
0
<t
0
00
0
00
0
N
0
0 :;::;
"0
QJ QJ 0
en
<Coci oci cri cri N cri lci .n .n :; Vl
N ~a::a::~
~ ,...
m 1.0 0"\ 0"\ Vl 0 0 Vl 1.0 £
<C ~'" 0 00 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Vl <t E *QJ
QQ
b.O
~ 5 5
~ ~
c
V') b.O co
e >- E E ~
0 l- :s: £c: <! « u
M >-
:::>
V!
0 II:
~
.r;;
"'C "'0 'Vi
ci lti
"0
U 0
II: I-
0
00
Vl
1.0
0
Vl
0
Vl
0
<t
0
m m
0 0
N
0
0
Cl
u
o ~
~ ~ ~~ 8
~ n:I
e U ....; ....; ....; ....; ....; ....; ....; ....; ....;

0
...
~ .0:;
.~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~'" en co
a:l co ~ 15 N a..
e- S II II
O "
.0
.IE. e'"
OJ
.•...
~'"
:;::; '+-
'"
0..
0
-'"'" >-
~'" :~
vi" '"
0- z
·u 0
'"
Ie ·c i=
c:: :::> 0.. .9 .9co
'" ~ ...•
LI"l
ii: '"
0;
a u
-''e"_..c.•...OJ N
~
V! C. 0;
'"
u
0
"0
e
~
'"
2
0
-
0
C
QJ
0
.0
co
--' -
c.
0
C
QJ
0
.0
co
•...
0
.2 '" .0 E
.e-
"0
E 0
--' .0
'" Qj':::>"
OJ OJ
c. co
"0
U u..
c
:3 ::::
.::; co ~ "0
.0 --'
'+- c cr "'" :;< ~
~ co co
-
cr --'
N UJ Vl
0 e E "0E >- >- UJ •... "0 'f'
'":;::;
OJ ~
.!!! QJ > :;: .s::
co .~ ~
QJ
·E :;<C'"
'" ~ 0 coQJ :cQJ .99
... QQ
Ci :;<
0 >
QJ
--' :c ::; Vl Vl =>
i=
~ U~ V!
Z
0 ...o II:
:)
~
0 ci ....• ,...
w
i= N m <t Vl 1.0 00 0"\
bz
~ ~ 0 0 Z
U
u I- V!
0 ~ ~
-' o II:
SECTION E
EQUIPMENT RENTAL RATES
277
E. EQUIPMENT RENTAL RATES
Rental of equipment presented in the Detailed Unit Price Analysis (DUPA) are based on the prevailing "Association of
Carriers and Equipment Lessors, (ACEL) Inc." rental rates approved for use by the DPWH (Presently it is the 2014
ACEL Rates). Rental rates of equipment not indicated in the ACEL booklet shall be taken from the rental rates
prepared by the Bureau of Equipment. For simplicity in computation, the operated rental rates are preferred over the
bare rental rates as the former includes operator's wages, fringe benefits, fuel, oil, lubricants and equipment
maintenance.
E.! List of equipment adopted in the standard DUPA with make, model and capacity
HEEL
CAPACITY RENTAL RATE
DESCRIPTION
I MODEL
I ER
1. Earthmoving Equipment
1.1 Bulldozer D6H SERIES II PSDS/DD 165 PhP 3,379.00
1.2 Payloader LX80- 2C 1.50 m3/1.95 vd3 110 PhP 1,733.00
1.3 Motorized Road Grader G710A 140 PhP 2,173.00
2. Compaction Equipment
2.1 Plate Compactor 400-500 Gasoline Engine 5 PhP 123.00
3. Lifting Equipment
3.1 Crawler Crane All Models 21-25 mt 145 PhP 1,522.00
3.4 Truck Mounted Crane All Models 20-25 mT 200 PhP 1,631.00
3.5 Truck Mounted Crane All Models 31-35 mt 238 PhP 1,861.00
3.6 Truck Mounted Crane All Models 41-45 mt 246 PhP 2,606.00
3.7 Truck Mounted, Scissor Lift, Terrain Gas/Diesel Driven 40 ft hts x 46 ft range PhP 1,386.00
4. Excavating Equipment
3 3 99 PhP 1,537.00
4.1 Backhoe SE 130 LC-2 0.80 m /1.04 vd
3 3 99 PhP 1,998.10
4.2 Backhoe w/ Breaker SE 130 LC-2 0.80 m /1.04 vd
3
4.3 Backhoe, Wheel Mounted PW60N-l 0.28 m3/0.37 vd 50 PhP 922.00
4.4 Portable Breaker WACKER PORTABLE PETROL BREAKER, BHF30S 4 PhP 129.38
5. Foundation Equipment .J
5.1 Diesel Hammer K25 - DSL 7500 kg-m PhP 1,286.00

5.2 Vibro Hammer DPD600T Hydraulic Pile Driver 60 ton 201 PhP 2,123.00
Vibro Hammer w/ Hydraulic Power PhP 4,118.00
5.3 MHF12 w/ Hyd Power Pack 120 kN-m 222
Pack
5.4 Vibro Hammer VIBRO FONCEUR, PTC25H1A 45000 kg-m 272.22 PhP 3,069.00
C.M.V. TH18/65, 200 mm 11165
5.5 Drilling Rig m depth & 18000 kg-m Drill 300 PhP 12,637.00
Torque
6 Concreting Equipment
6.1 Concrete Screeder Wacker Truss Screed 5.50 PhP 545.00
6.2 Concrete Paver COMMANDER III, FOUR-TRACK PhP 6,765.00
6.3 One Bagger Mixer 4-6 ~/min PhP 172.00
6.4 Transit Mixer All Models 5-6 vd3 175 PhP 1,318.00
7 Hauling Equipment
7.1 Dump Truck All Models 12 vd3 290 PhP 1,420.00
7.2 Cargo/Service Truck All Models 2-5 mt 160 PhP 783.00
7.3 Boom Truck All Models 2-5 mt 160 PhP 1,017.90
7.4 Cargo/Service Truck All Models 9-10 mt 270 PhP 1,212.00
7.5 Water Truck/Pump All Makes 16000 L 360 PhP 2,450.00
8 Air Equipment
8.1 Air Compressor All Models 356-450 dm 130 PhP 965.00
8.3 Air Compressor, Portable All Models 120-160 dm 51 PhP 450.00
8.5 Diamond Drill CP-8 PhP 201.25
8.6 Jackhammer PhP 150.00
8.7 Pneumatic Drillina Machine PhP 170.00
278
SOLID SIZE tLY
DESCRIPTION OUTPUT/DISCHARGE (Ipm) ENTAL RA
CAPACITY (mm)
9 Pumping Equipment
9.1 Water Pump, 100 mm suction 0 2,667 50 16 PhP 266.25
9.2 Water Pump, 100 mm suction 0 1,800 7.50 PhP 123.38
9.3 Pumocrete PhP 2 076.00
DESCRIPTION MODEL RENTAL RATE

kW k
10 Power Generating Equipment
10.1 Generator Set All Makes 301-350 kW 375 PhP 872.87
10.2 Generator Set All Makes 700 kW 875 PhP 2,147.27
FLYWHE
NTAL RATE
I DESCRIPTION
I MODEL AMPERES
HORSEPO
11 Shop Equipment
11.1 Welding Machine Electric Driven/DC Output 500 PhP 391.00
11.2 Weldina Machine ,
Gas/Diesel Driven 300 48 PhP 371.00
FLYWHEEL
DESCRIPTION MODEL CAPACITY •• ~L RATE
II I HORSEPOWER
I
12 Special Support Equipment
12.1 Chainsaw HUSQVARNA 2100 CD with CR22, 7 ft Reach, 9 in Standard Blade PhP 75.36
13. Miscellaneous Equipment
13.1 Concrete Vibrator Flexible Shaft Type 2" Head !I} with 5 Amperes Gasoline Drive Unit PhP 91.25
13.2 Bar Cutter 25 mm Maximum Rebar 0 (Grade 40), Single Phase PhP 219.75
13.3 Bar Bender 25 mm Maximum Rebar 0, Three Phase PhP 351.50
14. Others
14.1 Drop Hammer w/ accessories 20 mt PhP 5,000.00
14.2 1 Air Compressor w/2 Jack Hammer PhP 1,265.00
14.3 Cutting Outfit PhP 45.45
Pile Integrity Testing (Sonic) &

14 4 accessories PhP 65,000.00
. (includes professional fee of Strcutural
Engineer and reports)
Pile Integrity Testing & accessories

14.5 (includes professional fee of Strcutural ,J PhP 37,000.00
Engineer and reports)
Dynamic Pile Testing

14.6 (includes professional fee of Structural PhP 103,000.00
Engineer)
Tower Height = 28 ft, No. of Lights = 4 x 1000 watts, hp = 10.50
PhP
14.7 Lighting System/Tower Lights
Generator = 5 kW 543.50
14.8 Bentonite Bin PhP 280.00
14.9 Bentonite Mixer PhP 173.00
15 SPT & Desandinq Machine PhP 559.00
15.1 Tremie Pioe Set PhP 320.00
279
~'J. ~~ u~~
I~_ 1/, ~q
MANILA
1.
1 1 DEe 2011
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specifications for

) Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOTION
No. 140 _
)
)
(WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC
TRAFFIC COUNTER/CLASSIFIER
Series of 201CL:r'·lI.f7 (ATC) EQUIPMENT
In order to ensure uniformity in the application/adoption of the Pay Items of Work, and in line
with the mandate of the Department to provide Standard Specifications in the implementation
of various infrastructure projects, the attached DPWH Standard Specifications on
Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOTION (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC TRAFFIC
COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATC) EQUIPMENT is hereby prescribed, for the guidance and
compliance of all concerned.
This Standard Specification will form part of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports, Volume II.
~~-'-
MARK A. VILLAR
.J
Secretary
14.1.2 FETjRGT
1111111111111I11111111111111111111111
WIN7U01547
D.O. No. l'ID. Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specifications for Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOTION (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC
TRAFFIC COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATC) EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 15
DPWH Standard Specifications for

Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOTION (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC TRAFFIC
COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATC) EQUIPMENT
627.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing all materials, supplies, tools, equipment including all labor,
orientation and training required for the Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier (ATe) capable of
counting and classifying ",ehicle types as it passes an in-ground or above-ground sensors and
Weigh-In-Motion (WIM) capable of recording both the vehicle's axle load and gross vehicle
weight installed perpendicular on and/or off the roadway in accordance with approved Plans
and this Specifications, or as required by the Engineer.
627.2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit all related documents which shall be subjected to the approval of
the Engineer. The final documentation shall be submitted by the Contractor based on the
Engineer's comments.
627.2.1 Product Data
The Contractor shall submit two (2) sets of User's and Operator's Manual and Installations
Manuals, which includes but not limited to procedures, sequences, tolerances and precautions.
One (1) copy shall be for the Engineer and one (1) for the end.Juser. One (1) set of electronic
copy shall also be submitted as a backup file. Submitted manuals must be up-to-date and
reflect any changes which occurred during installation. Contents shall include, but not limited
to, the following information:
1. Identification of items or components furnished on the job by tag number, model number
and manufacturer.
2. Complete description, function, specifications, descriptive literature on the components
and statement as to whether the item is "as specified" or "equivalent".
3. Manufacturer's original catalogue and technical data sheets for all components.
4. Parts list and spare parts to be provided/recommended.
5. Material, test and calibration certificates.
6. Recommended procedure for protection of equipment against damage, prior to
installation.
7. Operational procedures and shut-down procedures.
8. Maintenance, calibration, and troubleshooting instructions.
627.2.2 Drawings
The Contractor shall submit a completed engineered drawings and shop drawings to the
Engineer. Drawings shall include, but not limited to, the following:
1. Dimensions and layouts

2. Complete schematic and wiring and equipment installation diagram
3. Termination details
TRAFFIC COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATe) EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 15
The Contractor shall submit record drawings of work as actually constructed, complete with
schematics, wiring diagrams, installation drawings and other pertinent details as specified in
this section.
All materials and equipment shall be brand new and shall be an International Brand Name
with existence of at least five (5) years in the Philippines, and shall comply with the
requirements of relevant existing Philippine codes and standards.
627.3.1 ATC Data Logger/Machine
627.3.1.1 Purpose
The ATC machine shall measure and record the following data on a permanent or temporary
basis:
1. Vehicle classification: The machine shall have in-built standard vehicle classification
schemes, and optionally allow the user to create or modify the vehicle classification
scheme based on local vehicles.
2. As a minimum, the ATC system shall classify vehicles based on the approved vehicle
classification scheme stipulated in the DPWH Highway Planning Manual adopting twelve
(12) vehicle types, namely, motor-tricycles, passenger cars, passenger utilities, goods
utilities, small buses, large buses, rigid trucks (2 axles), rigid.f trucks (3+ axles), truck semi-
trailer (3 and 4 axles), truck semi-trailer (5+ axles), truck trailers (4 axles), and truck
trailers (5+ axles).
3. Traffic counts shall be recorded and stored by vehicle type, either in real-time/through
post-processing.
4. Vehicle speeds shall be recorded for each vehicle class, optionally binned into user
definable speed bins in real-time/through post-processing.
5. Vehicle occupancy shall be provided.
627.3.1.2 Functional Requirements
1. Vehicle speed range: The machine shall be capable of classifying vehicles within the
speed range of 15 km/hr to 130 km/hr.
2. Accuracy: The machine shall be capable of detecting, recording, and classifying traffic
data to within the accuracy tolerance of ±5 % or less.
3. Number of lanes to be covered in an installation: The machine shall be capable of

detecting the type of motor vehicle including the direction of travel for carriageway with
up to four (4) lanes maximum per direction.
4. Indication of data: The measured data shall be shown on the data processor or any
appropriate device in real time for Quality Assurance.
D.O. No.lYPSeries of 2017
Page 3 of 15
5. Print out of data: The machine must be possible to print the measured data out on
appropriate paper.
6. Capacity for data storage: The machine shall have sufficient internal memory to store
collected traffic data carrying a minimum of 30,000 vehicles/day/lane with a minimum
recording capacity of seven (7) days.
7. Data retrieval: The data shall be retrieved either through Manual (Direct or Wireless) or
Remote Transmission, as may be specified.
For Direct Manual Retrieval, downloading of data from the machine shall be achieved using
a laptop or notebook computer, personal data assistant (PDA), or a memory stick device
that uses an industry standard communication protocol and have sufficient memory to
download the full of the data logger without copying the files to a host computer.
Manual Retrieval via wireless shall download data from the machine using wireless
connection, which shall:
a. Use an industry standard communication protocol (e.g. Bluetooth)

b. Download the collected data files
c. Delete downloaded data files
d. Operate within 50 meters from the device
e. Be license exempt for its application
Remote transmission via telephony shall make the complete operation of the machine
available via software residing on a personal computer op~Jating remotely via fixed land
lines, GSM, GPRS, 34/4G data, mesh wireless. Functions to include, but not limited to, are:
a. View and set time and date in data logger

b. Monitor the operational state of the data collection
c. Monitor real time view of data
d. Monitor real time view of sensors
e. Monitor the data logger available memory
f. Download collected data files
g. Delete downloaded data files
h. Download revised classification schemes to the data logger
8. Climatic environment: The machine shall function normally in a temperature range

from 0 to 50 degree Celsius (measured at the surface of the sensor). The data processor
shall operate under temperature from 0 to 40 degrees Celsius.
9. Portability: The weight of the heaviest component/part shall not exceed 10 kg.
10. Protection: The machine shall be able to be fixed in place in a reasonably vandal-resistant
manner.
11. Power source: The machine shall be designed for battery power supply and shall be able
to operate continuously for no less than thirty (30) days without replacement of battery.
In addition, the system shall be capable of being powered by an AC adapter from
90V - 130Vj200 - 270V, whichever is applicable and where such power is available. The
D.O. No. ® Series of 2017
Page 4 of 15
supplier shall provide two (2) such AC adaptors per one (1) set as necessary. Solar
powered systems may be established that enable continuous charging of the batteries.
627.3.1.3 Permanent (In-ground) Roadside Cabinet
An unobtrusive roadside enclosure providing a secure and vandal resistant cabinet and steel
cage housing the ATC machine shall be provided. The enclosure shall be protected against
the infestation of rodents or other vermin.
627.3.1.4 Temporary (Above-ground) Counter Relocation
The temporary ATC machine shall be suitable for relocation. For this reason, it shall be capable
of being dismantled/constructed within one hour. All the components/parts shall not be
heavier than 50 kg for the purpose of relocation. The entire system shall be capable of being
transported by a pick-up truck with a cargo capacity of approximately 500 kg.
627.3.1.5 Temporary Protection
The temporary ATC is to be used outdoors. Accordingly, the entire system shall be sufficiently
protected against heat of sunlight, rain, wind, dust, electric surge, lightning and other harmful
action it receives when used outdoors. Where necessary, appropriate cover(s) for the
equipment or any other device as well as two (2) locks and two (2) ruggedized chains for
protecting the equipment from theft shall be provided.
627.3.1.6 Tools
.J
At least two (2) sets of tools required for dismantling and constructing each set of temporary
equipment for the purpose of relocation shall be provided.
627.3.1.7 Commissioning
The supplier shall be responsible for commissioning of the ATC including data processor,
sensor, and other associated devices within 30 days of delivery.
627.3.2 Permanent Weigh-in-Motion (WIM) Equipment
Stationary, permanent slow and high-speed weigh-in-motion (WIM) stations shall be equipped
with weighing equipment capable of recording both axle load and gross vehicle weight.
627.3.2.1 Functional Requirements
Permanent WIM shall comply with the following performance specifications:
1. WIM Type and Accuracy: The WIM type and accuracy shall be in accordance to
ASTM E 1318 Standard Specifications for Highway Weigh-in-Motion (WIM) Systems with
User Requirements and Test Methods.
The ASTM E 1318 specification defines WIM systems into four (4) types:
• Type I - high accuracy data collection systems, typically bending plate scale type WIM
at speeds f~om 16 to 130 km/hr
D.O. No.l!I!.- Series of 2017
Page 5 of 15
• Type II - lower cost data collection systems, typically piezoelectric scale type WIM at
speeds from 24 to 130 km/hr
• Type III - systems for use in a sorting application at weigh station entrance ramps
(bending plate or deep pit load cell type WIM) for weight enforcement at speeds from
16 to 130 km/hr
• Type IV - low-speed WIM for weigh enforcement at speeds from 3 to 16 km/hr
Accuracy
WIM Type
Single Axle Axle Group Gross Vehicle Weight
I
I ±20% ±15% ±10%

II ±30% ±20% ±15%
III ±15% ±10% ±6%
IV 5,400 kg ± 100 11,300 kg ± 500 27,200 kg ± 1,100
2. Load to be measured: Axle load and gross vehicle weight (GVW)
3. Mode of measurement: Slow and high speed weigh-in-motion.
4. Measurable tread distance of vehicle: 1.5 to 2.9 meters
5. Capacity: 30 tons per axle, shall be endurable for the maximum load of 40 tons per axle
without mechanical and electrical damage
6. Vehicle speed range: Depending on WIM type ranging fr.Gm 3 to 130 km/hr
7. Vehicle speed measurement accuracy: < 2%
8. Display of measured data: The measured data shall be displayed on a display device
within two (2) seconds after measurement.
9. Graduation: 100 kg or less
10. Print out: The measures axle load/GVW shall be printed out, at the option of the operator,
within 10 seconds after the measurement.
11. Capacity for data storage: Minimum 30,000 vehicles/ day/ lane with a minimum
recording capacity of one (1) week
12. Format of data retrieval: Comma-separated value or other open format
13. Climatic environment: WIM shall function normally under the temperature from 0 to
50 degrees Celsius (measured at the surface of the sensor) and after submerged in water
to the top of the sensor for 24 hours.
14. Sensor life: The sensor shall be functionally intact after 3,000,000 times of loading of
15 tons or more.
Page 6 of 15
15. Power source: The system shall be powered by an AC adapter from

90V - 130Vj200V - 270V. The supplier shall provide two (2) such AC adaptors per one (1)
set of equipment as necessary.
16. Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS): A UPSwith sufficient capacity to supply electricity
to the permanent WIM for 20 minutes shall be provided.
17. Protection against electric surge: The permanent WIM shall be protected against
electric surge which occurs when the electricity recovers after power failure when lightning
strikes the electricity supply system. The entire equipment of permanent WIM shall also
be protected against strike of lightning.
627.3.2.2 Data Transfer
The data shall be transferred as described in Subsection 627.3.1.2.7 of this Specification.
627.3.2.3 Installation
The supplier shall submit for approval the detailed design of permanent WIM installation,
including the manner of installation and structure of foundation.
627.3.2.4 Roadside Cabinet
An unobtrusive roadside enclosure providing a secure and vandal resistant cabinet housing
the counter electronic recorder shall be provided. The cabinet shall be proof against the
infestation of rodents. The supplier shall explain the proposed layout and size of cabinet
proposed . ..J
627.3.2.5 Commissioning
The supplier shall be responsible for installation and commissioning of the Permanent WIM
including computer, printer, data processor, sensor, and other associated devices within
45 days of notice from the Agency that the site has been completely prepared and is ready
for installation of the Permanent WIM equipment and associated equipment.
627.3.3 Portable Weighing Scales
Suitable for wheel and axle load surveys, the portable axle weighing systems shall consist of
two (2) weigh pads and a separate electronic readout unit and be suitable for traffic axle load
surveys.
627.3.3.1 Weigh Pad Features
1. Weigh Pad Size: The wheel weighing capacity of each weigh pad should be a minimum
of 15,000 kg. Each weigh pad should measure not less than 700 mm x 500 mm in area
and not exceed 35 mm in height and weigh less than 20 kg.
2. Active Weighing Area: The active weighing area of the weigh pad shall not be less than
700 mm x 400 mm. The active weighing area for static weighing shall be clearly delineated
in the upper surface of each weigh pad. The delineated marking shall be permanent and
resist scrubbing action of passing wheels.
D.O. No. 140 . Series of 2017
TRAFFIC COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATC) EQUIPMENT
Page 7 of 15
3. Load Application Footprint: The design of the weigh pad should ensure the sensitivity
of the weigh pad is immune to the effects of differing size of load applied footprint area
when the load is applied within the active weighing area described above. The smallest
footprint shall be 20 em x 15 cm. The largest footprint shall be 70 cm x 30 cm.
4. Weigh Pad Ruggedness: The effects of uneven surfaces shall not unduly reduce the
working life of the weigh pads. Partial warping caused by loads applied to the weigh pad
when resting on poor surfaces shall not cause failure to the weigh pad mechanism. It shall
be possible for a test shim of 10 mm height to be placed anywhere under the weigh pad
and for a load of 5,000 kg to be applied to the weigh pad without causing irrevocable
damage. Accidental cfropping of the weigh pads during their life is inevitable. The weigh
pad should be immune to knocks and bangs which would normally be expected for the
weigh pad to receive whilst being set out and installed ready for a weighing operation.
The weigh pad should also be able to withstand an average of at least three (3) Topple
Drops! and three (3) Accidental Drops2 per month. The weigh pads shall not fail when
subjected to these drops or cause the zero balance output from the measuring transducers
to exceed the zero range of any automatic zeroing system in use.
5. Static and Dynamic Weighing: The portable system should have the facility to weigh
vehicles both statically whereby each axle is stopped on the weigh pads or dynamically
whereby the vehicle is weighed without stopping at speeds up to 5 km/h.
6. Weigh Pad Levelers: If dummy ramps and platform levelers are required in the tender
specification, the manufacturer shall provide levelers that extend to a distance of at least
three (3) meters on either side of the weigh pads. The ramps at the end of the levelers
should be of sufficient length to ensure that the ramp gradient does not exceed 4 degrees.
The height of the levelers should be the same as the weigh pads to a tolerance
of ± 0.5 mm.
7. Connection to Readout Unit: The weigh pad shall be connected to the readout unit via
a cable or wireless connection. Systems which are designed to function with cables should
have a facility whereby the cable runs from the outside weigh pad passing through a
protected channel area in the nearside weigh pad. This ensures the outer weigh pad cable
run is not driven over during surveying.
627.3.3.2 Weighing Readout
Each weigh pad shall display the axle weight. The separate readout unit should display both
the wheel loads on each pad and the total axle load. The readout unit should have an integral
printer that will print out the vehicle axle weights, gross weight, time and date, ticket number,
number of axles and a space for manual entry of vehicle plate number. The ticket printer
should not be a ribbon type and should print onto a rugged, ultra violet proof and tamper
proof medium. A printed width of at least 60-mm should be used.
1 Topple Drop: The non-handle end of the weigh pad is rested on concrete ground such that the weigh pad is
perpendicular to the ground. A user holds the handle so that it does not topple over. The user moves his hand from
the weigh pad and the weigh pad is free to fall in either direction.
2 Accidental Drop: Th~ weigh pad is dropped from a height of 0.5 meters onto concrete ground. The initial position
before dropping is arbitrary.
Page 8 of 15
The following are the minimum requirements for the readout unit:
1. Display Resolution: The readout should display the individual axle weights to a resolution
of 10 kg or better. The internal resolution of the system should be better than 5 kg per weigh
pad.
2. Automatic Zero, Zero Tracking Rate, Zero Button and Zero Lamp: The system shall
incorporate an automatic tracking zero system to eliminate system zero drift caused by
temperature and other effects. However, the maximum zero tracking rate shall not be more
than 25 kg per secon9. A zero button used for the purposes of zeroing the display in the
event of large offsets shall be incorporated. Its range of operation shall be confined to a
maximum of 2,500 kg per weigh pad. A front panel zero lamp or indicator should
illuminate/activate when the sum of the two weigh pad weights is less than 12.5 kg.
3. Printed Information on Ticket: The ticket printer that should be integral to the readout
shall print out the following information:
• Each individual axle weight.

• The gross vehicle weight.
• If the vehicle was over maximum speed a warning should be given.
• The time and date.
• Unique ticket number which cannot be reset.
627.3.3.3 Data Storage and Communication Facilities
1. Data Storage: The storage within the readout unit shall store the weighing results of at
least 2,000 vehicles (or if recording by axle sufficient for 2;600 vehicles).
2. Output: The readout unit shall be able to transfer the stored data to an external PC as
described in Subsection 627.3.1.2.7 of this Specification. The data format shall be comma
separated value or other open format. The structure of the data format shall be clearly
explained by the supplier in the operating manuals provided.
627.3.3.4 Battery Supplies - Readout Unit and Weigh Pads
1. Readout unit: The battery for the readout unit should be integral and it should not be a
requirement to have to use an external battery. Facilities, however, for connection to an
external 12-volt battery should be provided. Battery life shall be 40 hours minimum between
charges. The battery technology used in the readout shall permit batteries to be charged
whilst they are at any state of charge and without unduly compromising battery life. The
supplier shall supply two (2) spare batteries for each readout unit.
2. Weigh Pads: The weigh pads should ideally obtain their operating supply from the readout
unit via the connecting cables to between the readout and the weigh pad. If, however, the
weigh pads run from battery power the requirements earlier shall apply.
3. Battery charger: The battery charger for the weigh pads and readout unit should accept
an input from 90V - 130V AC/200 - 270V AC and should be capable of re-charging the weigh
pads and readout unit within 8 hours. Each charger shall be supplied with two (2) AC
adapters.
D.O. No. $ Series of 2017
Page 9 of 15
627.3.3.5 Slow Speed Weigh-in-Motion
The unit shall be able to be operated as a slow speed in motion system at speeds of maximum
5 km/h. The readout electronics shall calculate the individual dynamic wheel weight values from
the weight profile as the wheel passes over. The measurement shall be taken when the wheel
load is centrally located between the leading and trailing edges of the weigh pad. If either wheel
load travels faster than 5 km/h over the weigh pad, the system shall unambiguously identify this
so that the vehicle can be re-weighed if deemed necessary by the supervising operator.
627.3.4 Road Traffic Sensor
The ATC and WIM shall work with any or combination of the following road traffic sensors for
the purpose of detecting vehicles passing through it:
1. Inductive loop cables
An inductive loop is a square of wire embedded into or under the road utilizing the principle
that a magnetic field introduced near an electrical conductor causes an electrical current
to be induced. In the case of vehicle detection, a large metal vehicle acts as the magnetic
field and the inductive loop as the electrical conductor. The ATC machine at the roadside
records the signals generated.
2. Pneumatic road tubes
Pneumatic road tube hoses are stretched across the road and connected at one end to
.f
the ATC machine, while the other end is sealed. When a pair of wheels pass through and
hits the tube, air pressure in the compressed tube activates the ATC machine which
records the time of the event. At least one road tube is needed for each direction on every
road for traffic counting.
3. Piezoelectric axle sensors
Piezoelectric axle sensors collect data by converting mechanical energy into electrical
energy. The piezoelectric sensor is mounted in a groove cut into road's surface. When a
car drives over the piezoelectric axle sensor, it squeezes it and causes a voltage signal.
The size of the signal is proportional to the degree of deformation. When the car moves
off, the voltage reverses. This change in voltage can be used to detect and classify
vehicles.
4. Other sensor types not indicated herein subject for the approval of the Department.
A minimum of two (2) road traffic sensors shall be installed in each traffic lane for the
purpose of capturing axle spacing and vehicle speed information.
Safety of road users through a suitable worksite traffic management shall be considered for
the entire duration of the installation. Temporary roadworks signs and traffic control devices
DPWH Standard Specifications for Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOllON (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMAllC
Page 10 of 15
to be used shall adhere with the provisions of existing Department manuals, issuances, and
policies.
For permanent locations with inductive loop vehicle detector system and/or piezoelectric axle
sensors, the sensors shall be fixed in a groove cut on the pavement in accordance with
ASTM E 2561 - Standard Test Method for Environmental Stress-Crack Resistance of Blow-
Molded Polyethylene Containers for inductive loops and ASTM E 2415 - Standard Practice for
Installing Piezoelectric Highway Traffic Sensors for piezoelectric sensors. It shall be
functionally intact after loading of 10,000,000 times vehicles of mixed traffic.
For temporary traffic counting locations using pneumatic road tubes, the sensor shall be
mounted on the pavement surface in accordance with ASTM E 1957 - Standard Practice for
Installi.ng Using Pneumatic Tubes with Roadway Traffic Counters and Classifiers. It shall be
functionally intact after loading of 500,000 times vehicles of mixed traffic. The height of the
sensor, including the material for fixing, when installed on the pavement surface, shall not
exceed 2.5 cm.
The design of the sensors shall prevent reversed assembly or improper installation.
The sensors shall operate in a temperature range from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius.
627.4.1 Delivery, Storage and Handling
The ATC and/or WIM system shall be delivered, handled and stored as recommended by the
manufacturer, together with the following provisions:
1. All components of the entire system shall be transported, handled, and stored carefully in
such a way which avoids any physical damage.
2. It shall be inspected upon delivery and any damage shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer.
3. Any component damaged during delivery, storage or installation shall be marked and set
aside.
4. Proposals for repair of any damaged component shall be submitted in writing to the
Engineer for approval.
5. No repairs to damaged component shall be attempted without the Engineer's approval.
6. Any damaged component deemed unsuitable for repair as suggested by the Engineer shall
be removed from site and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
627.4.2 Calibration and Acceptance Testing
Final acceptance of the system shall be based upon successful completion of the calibration
procedures at the required accuracy and confidence level.
D.O. No. /.!JP., Series of 2017
TRAFFIC COUNTER/ClASSIFIER (ATe) EQUIPMENT
Page 11 of 15
627.4.2.1 Axle Sensor BasedTechnology
The survey equipment shall be validated at each site against a number of reference vehicles.
This shall be done by measuring the reference vehicles axle spacing and confirming the axle
spacings are correctly measured by the recording equipment and that they are placed in the
correct vehicle classification bins by the equipment.
Vehicle speed measurement accuracy should be better than +5% coefficient of

variation (COV) with an appropriate distribution around the mean value.
Inter axle spacing measurement accuracy should be better than +5% (COV) with an
appropriate distribution around the mean value.
Traffic volume counts shall be +5% (COV) with an appropriate distribution around the mean
value.
The vehicle classification system shall comply with the tender requirements. This shall be
validated by observing vehicles visually and then confirming that they are correctly identified
by the traffic classifier. Careful attention shall be paid to motorcycles and multi-axle vehicles
as these are the most commonly misclassified. No more than 5% of the traffic volumes shall
be misclassified.
627.4.2.2 Non-Contact Sensors
The survey equipment must be validated at each site against a number of reference vehicles.
This is done by measuring the reference vehicles axle spacing anJl confirming the axle spacings
are correctly measured by the recording equipment and that they are placed in the correct
vehicle classification bins by the equipment.
Vehicle speed measurement accuracy should be better than +5% (COV) with an appropriate
distribution around the mean value.
Occupancy shall be + 5% (COV) with an appropriate distribution around the mean value.
Traffic volume counts shall be +5% (COV) with an appropriate distribution around the mean
value.
The vehicle classification system shall comply with the tender requirements. This shall be
validated by observing vehicles visually and then confirming that they are correctly identified
by the traffic classifier. No more than 5% of the traffic volumes shall be misclassified.
627.4.2.3 WIM System
Calibration and acceptance testing for the WIM system shall be in accordance with the
provisions outlined under Section 7.6 of ASTM E 1318. The test shall be conducted on-site by
the Engineer, in cooperation with the Contractor, immediately after WIM system has been
installed or modified.
627.4.3 Warranty
As each sub-component which makes up the ATC and WIM systems may come from different
suppliers with different warranties, a minimum warranty period of one (1) year is
recommended for ~IIcomponents after final acceptance.
Page 12 of 15
The supplier should warrant that the supplied equipment is free from defective materials and
agrees to remedy any defects or to furnish a new part in exchange for any part supplied
which, under normal installation, use and service discloses such defect, provided that the unit
is examined by the factory or authorized agent. All transportation charges should be paid by
the supplier, including those of the Department returning the parts.
If the equipment failure within the warranty period, the supplier should supply replacement
within a specified period.
627.4.4 Training
Training should be an integrated part of the delivery of the equipment. The cost of the
equipment shall include training of the Engineer in use and maintenance of the equipment
and analyzing the results.
A comprehensive training course for the operators conducted by a qualified/trained

professional shall be provided within 30 days of the initial commissioning covering the
following topics:
1. Installation, maintenance and handling of the machines including the ATC and WIM
machines, solar panels, batteries, and telecommunications (where applicable);
2. Quality assurance procedures for machine installation, setup, maintenance and ongoing
data collection;
3. Data collection procedures;
4. Processing and analysis of data;
5. Operation of data download machine and associated software;
.I
6. Updating of data collection software.
Competence certificate, brochures, and operations and maintenance manuals for each
participant trained shall be provided upon completion of the training period.
The work under this Item shall be measured by lump sum, lot, slot, and unit of what is actually
placed and installed as shown on the approved Plans and accepted to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
627.6 Basis for Payment
All works performed and accepted quantity measured as prescribed in Subsection

627.5 - Method of Measurement shall be paid for at the contract unit price for each of the
particular item listed in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall constitute full
compensation for the supply and installation of the ATC equipment, road sensors and all
associated accessories, civil and maintenance works, commissioning, testing, training, and
other incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
D.O. No.1!IL Series of 2017
Page 13 of 15
Payment will be made based on the following pay items of work:
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measure
627 (1) a1 Supply and Install Road Sensors, 2 lanes (Loop-piezo-Ioop) Lot
627 (1) a4 Supply and Install Road Sensors, > 6 lanes (Loop-piezo-Ioop) Lot
627 (1) b1 Supply and Install Road Sensors, 2 lanes (Dual piezo) Lot
627 (1) b4 Supply and Install Road Sensors, > 6 lanes (Dual piezo) Lot
Supply and Install Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier (ATC),
627 (2) a1 Lot
2 lanes (ATC without solar)
627 (2) a2 Lot
627 (2) a3 Lot
627 (2) a4 Lot
> 6 lanes (ATC without solar)
Supply and Install Automatic Traffic Counter/q~ssifier (ATC),
627 (2) b1 Lot
2 lanes (ATC with solar)
627 (2) b2 Lot
627 (2) b3 Lot
627 (2) b4 Lot
> 6 lanes (ATC with solar)
Supply and Install Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier (ATC)
627 (3) c1 Lot
with Remote Access Unit, 2 lanes
627 (3) c2 Lot
627 (3) c3 Lot
627 (3) c4 Lot
with Remote Access Unit > 6 lanes
Complete Installation of Local Wiring and Connection to ATC,
627 (3) c5 Lot
Commissioning and Testing
627 (4) a Supply and Install ATC Software
627 (5) a Supply and Install Solar Panel Lot
Supply and Install Permanent Type Weigh-in-Motion Axle Scale,

627 (6) a1 Lot
.2 lanes (Type I)
D.O. No. J.!Il, Series of 2017
Page 14 of 15
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measure
627 (6) a2 Lot
2 lanes (Type II)
627 (6) a3 Lot
2 lanes (Type III)
627 (6) b1 Lot
4 lanes (Type I)
627 (6) b2 Lot
4 lanes (Type II)
627 (6) b3 Lot
4 lanes (Type III)
627 (6) c1 Lot
6 lanes (Type I)
627 (6) c2 Lot
6 lanes (Type II)
627 (6) c3 Lot
6 lanes (Type III)
627 (6) d1 Lot
> 6 lanes (Type I)
627 (6) d2 Lot
> 6 lanes (Type II)
Supply and Install Permanent Type Weigh-in-M6tion Axle Scale,
627 (6) d3 Lot
> 6 lanes (Type III)
627 (7) a Lot
Type IV
627 (8) a Supply and Install Portable Weighing Scales Lot
627 (9) a Supply and Install WIM CPU/Console Lot
627 (10) a Supply and Install LED Display Lot
Complete Installation of Local Wiring and Connection to
627 (11) a Lot
CPU/Console, Commissioning and Testing
627 (12) a Supply and Install WIM Software Lot
627 (13) a1 Automatic traffic counter/classifier (ATC), In-ground survey type Set
Automatic traffic counter/classifier (ATC), On-ground survey
627 (14) a2 Set
type
627 (15) a Pneumatic road tubes Roll
627 (16) a Road tube cable grip, Figure 8 Piece
627 (16) b Road tube cable grip, Woven cable Piece
627 (16) c Road tube cable grip, End C-c1amp Piece
627 (17) a Road tube anchor, Center plate clamp Piece
627 (17) b Road tube anchor, Center lane flap Piece
627 (17) c Road tube anchor, Bitumen tape Roll
627 (18) a Replacement road case Piece
DPWH Standard Specifications for Item 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOllON (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMAllC
Page 15 of 15
Pay Item Unit of

Description
Number Measure
627 (19) a1 Battery pack, 6 V 4.5Ah Piece
627 (19) a2 Battery pack, 6 V 12Ah Piece
.627 (19) b1 Battery pack, Welded 6 V Piece
627 (19) b2 Battery pack, 36 Ah Piece
627 (20) a Inductive loop detector cable Roll
627 (21) a Piezoelectric axle sensor, Type I Set
627 (21) b Piezoelectric axle sensor, Type II Set
627 (22) a Remote access hardware Set
627 (23) a Solar panel Set
627 (24) a WIM strip scale Piece
627 (25) a Portable Weigh-in Motion Axle Scale (PWIM) Piece
627 (26) a Weighing scale indicator Piece
627 (27) a Load cell Piece
627 (28) a External axle weight/ticket printer Piece
627 (29) a Roll-up ramp/levelling pad Set
627 (30) a Conductor cable with shield Set
627 (31) a Concrete bollard/protection post Unit
627 (32) a Roadside Cabinet or Protection Cage with Identification Plate Unit
.J
627 (33) Weigh- In-Motion (WIM) Systems Lump Sum
627 (34) Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier (ATe) Equipment Lump Sum
References
1. Technical Specifications for WEIGH-IN-MOTION (WIM) SYSTEMS AND AUTOMATIC TRAFFIC

COUNTER/CLASSIFIER (ATe) EQUIPMENT - based on the submitted documents/references of the Bureau of
Quality and Safety
2. ASTM Standards: Designation E 1318-02, Standard Specification for Highway Weigh-in-Motion (WIM) Systems
with User Requirements and Test Methods.
3. Generic Equipment Specifications Weigh-in-Motion and Traffic Counting. 2006. The World Bank East Asia
Pacific Transport Unit.
4. NRTSP Traffic Data Collection Manual Version 3. 2015. Department of Public Works and Highways.
5. DPWH Highway Planning Manual. Chapter 10 Vehicle Classification and Data Collection.
6. METROCOUNT ROADPOD VP (MC5710) Vehicle Piezoelectric Counter Product Evaluation Report of Bureau of
Quality and Safety.
~~ 1"..:5 iJ,",~
Republic of the Philippines I".l ' /c/. ~ I'jt-
11 1 DEC 20111 Manila
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT: Revised Standard Pay Item List for
) Infrastructure Projects
NO. 143
_ )
)
Series of 201<z:~r:z·,t,I·17
To ensure uniformity in the application/adoption of the Pay Item Numbers for Pay Items of
Work involved in the preparation of the Design Plans and Quantities, Programs of Works
(POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) for Infrastructure Projects nationwide,
all implementing offices of the Department are hereby directed to use the revised Standard
Pay Item List as prescribed (Annex "Aft) for various pay items based on the DPWH
Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports (Volume II) and Buildings, Ports
and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage Structures and Water Supply Systems (Volume
III). This consolidates pay items subscript based on different dimensions/sizes,
classifications, and types of an item, and incorporates other new pay items not yet included
in the Blue Book but are deemed necessary in the actual implementation.
The revised Standard Pay Item List shall be adopted with the following considerations:
a. For projects already bid out/awarded/contracted, change of pay items number

description/unit of measure to conform with the standard pay items shall be effected
with the approval of the Head of Implementing Office (10);
b. For projects with already approved Plans, POW & ABC, change of pay items number
description/unit of measure to conform with the standard pay items shall be effected
r
with the approval of the Head of Implementing Office, prior to the bidding;
c. For pay items provided with a Certificate of Conditional Approval, also known as
pilot pay items, shall only be valid during the five-year evaluation span as defined
in their respective issuances of standard specification unless found successful and
approved as regular pay item. Starting for FY 2018-funded projects, the usage of
Special Pay Item (SPL) is not allowed.
If the pay items of work required in the DPWH Infrastructure Projects are not found in the
revised Standard Pay Item List, the concerned 10 is required to apply for its inclusion as a
regular pay item by submitting the Generic Technical Specification, i.e; materials
requirement, construction methodology, unit of measure, method of payment, etc. with
corresponding references to the Bureau of Research and Standards for evaluation and
approval. Non-compliance shall result in no payment to the contractor concerned on pay
items of work not included in the said Standard Pay Item list.
The Standard Pay Item List prescribed in this Department Order shall be adopted for all
infrastructure projects to be implemented for Of 2018 and onwards.
This Order supersedes Department Order 05, Series of 2017 and shall take effect
immediately. '
~~---
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary Departroont of Public Works and Highways
6.1 AMD/WRO
"III " I 111111111"11111111111 1111111
.\
WIN7W02042
STANDARDIZED PAY ITEMS OF WORK

FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
INFRASTRUCTURE PROJECTS
Volume II & III
October 5, 2017
VOLUME II

A.1.1 (1) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (2) Lump Sum
Basis)
A.1.1 (7) Month
A.1.1 (8) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (9) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (10) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (11) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (12) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (13) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (14) Lump Sum
Engineer
A.1.1 (16) Month
Engineer
Page 1
VOLUME II

A.1.1 (17) Month
the Engineer
A.1.1 (18) Month
Engineer
A.1.2 (1) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (2) Month
A.1.2 (3) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (4) Month
A.1.2 (5) Month
A.1.2 (6) Month
A.1.2 (8) Month
Basis (12 Seater)
A.1.2 (9) Month
Vehicle (12-seater)
A.1.3 (1) Month
Engineer
A.1.3 (2) Lump Sum
the Engineer
A.1.3 (3) Month
the Engineer
A.1.3 (4) Month
to the Engineer
A.1.4 Photographs
A.1.4 (1) Provision of Progress Photographs Each
A.1.4 (2) Provision of Progress Photographs Each
A.1.5 (2) Each
for the Engineer
Page 2
VOLUME II

B.1 Lump sum
for Contractor
B.7 (1) Occupational Safety and Health Program Month
B.7 (2) Occupational Safety and Health Program Lump sum
B.8 (1) Traffic Management Month
B.8 (2) Traffic Management Lump sum
B.10 Dayworks PS
B.20 Temporary Fence Lump sum
Page 3
VOLUME II
B.21 Temporary Bridge Lump sum

B.22 Support Equipment Lump sum
B.23 Staging Area Lump sum
B.24 General Scaffolding and Shoring Lump sum
B.25 Detailed Engineering and Architectural Design Lump sum
PART C - EARTHWORK

Page 4
VOLUME II
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
Page 5
VOLUME II
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE


Cribbing/
Cofferdamming
Page 6
VOLUME II

Granular Coarse
Material
104 (7) Embankment from structure excavation Cubic Meter


Page 7
VOLUME II





Salvaged Soil
Aggregate

Salvaged Soil
Aggregate
Page 8
VOLUME II

Salvaged Soil
Aggregate


Salvaged Soil
Aggregate


ITEM 210 – CRACK AND SEAT

210 (1) Crack and Seat Square Meter

Page 9
VOLUME II



303 (4) Asphalt Cement Penetration Grade Tonne
Page 10
VOLUME II

304 (2) Asphalt Cement Penetration Grade Tonne


back Asphalt
Page 11
VOLUME II

back Asphalt
back Asphalt
back Asphalt

306 (2) Tonne
Course




310 (1) a 30 mm Square Meter
Laid
310 (1) b 40 mm Square Meter
Laid
310 (1) c 50 mm Square Meter
Laid
Page 12
VOLUME II
310 (2) a Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Hot-Laid 30 mm Square Meter
310 (2) b Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Hot-Laid 40 mm Square Meter
310 (2) c Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Hot-Laid 50 mm Square Meter
Replacement
310 (4) a 30 mm Square Meter
Mastic
310 (4) b 40 mm Square Meter
Mastic
310 (4) c 50 mm Square Meter
Mastic
Mastic
310 (6) a Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, PMB 30 mm Square Meter
310 (6) b Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, PMB 40 mm Square Meter
310 (6) c Bituminous Concrete Surface Wearing Course, PMB 50 mm Square Meter

311 (1) b1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 13
VOLUME II
311 (1) e4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.28 m thick 1 day Square Meter
311 (1) f4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.30 m thick 1 day Square Meter
311 (1) g4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.33 m thick 1 day Square Meter
311 (1) h4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.35 m thick 1 day Square Meter
311 (1) i1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.38 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 14
VOLUME II
311 (1) i4 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.38 m thick 1 day Square Meter
311 (2) b1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 15
VOLUME II
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
Page 16
VOLUME II

with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)









Page 17
VOLUME II

311 (6) a1 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement 0.15 m thick 14 days Square Meter
311 (6) b1 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement 0.15 m thick 7 days Square Meter
311 (6) c1 Roller Compacted Concrete Pavement 0.15 m thick 3 days Square Meter
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Elasto
Barchip-Synthetic Fibers (Unreinforced)
Page 18
VOLUME II

Barchip-Synthetic Fibers (Reinforced)
Page 19
VOLUME II

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Forta-Ferro
Fibers (Unreinforced)


ITEM 400 – PILING
Page 20
VOLUME II

400 (16) a Test Piles, furnished and driven 400x400 mm Meter
400 (16) b Test Piles, furnished and driven 450x450 mm Meter
400 (17) a Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 0.80 Meter
400 (17) b Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 0.90 Meter
400 (17) c Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.00 Meter
400 (17) d Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.10 Meter
400 (17) e Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.20 Meter
400 (17) f Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.30 Meter
400 (17) g Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.40 Meter
400 (17) h Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.50 Meter
400 (17) i Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.60 Meter
400 (17) j Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.70 Meter
400 (17) k Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.80 Meter
400 (17) l Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 1.90 Meter
400 (17) m Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.00 Meter
400 (17) n Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.10 Meter
400 (17) o Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.20 Meter
400 (17) p Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.30 Meter
400 (17) q Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.40 Meter
400 (17) r Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.50 Meter
400 (17) s Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.60 Meter
400 (17) t Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.70 Meter
400 (17) u Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.80 Meter
400 (17) v Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 2.90 Meter
Page 21
VOLUME II
400 (17) w Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 3.00 Meter

400 (17) x Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 3.50 Meter
400 (17) y1 Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 3.0 x 6.5 Oval Meter
400 (17) y2 Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes 3.0 x 7.0 Oval Meter
400 (17) z Concrete Piles cast in Drilled Holes Rectangular Meter
400 (18) a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells 400mm dia. Meter
400 (18) b Concrete Piles cast in Steel Shells 500mm dia. Meter
400 (19) a Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes 400mm dia. Meter
400 (19) b Concrete Piles cast in Steel Pipes 500mm dia. Meter
400 (21) Splices Splice Can Each
Page 22
VOLUME II

400 (23) x1 Permanent Casing 3.50 16mm thick Meter
400 (23) x2 Permanent Casing 3.50 20mm thick Meter
400 (30) Rammed Aggregate Piers Cubic Meter
Page 23
VOLUME II
400 (31) Vibro Stone Columns Cubic Meter

400 (32) Modulus or Uplift Load Tests Each
400 (33) Steel Casing Linear Meter

401 (1) a1 Metal Railing Grade 36 Steel Meter
401 (1) a2 Metal Railing Grade 50 Steel Meter
401 (5) Pedestrian Railing Lump Sum


403 (1) a1 Structural Steel, furnished Grade 36 Kilogram
403 (1) a2 Structural Steel, furnished Grade 50 Kilogram
403 (2) a1 Structural Steel, fabricated Grade 36 Kilogram
403 (2) a2 Structural Steel, fabricated Grade 50 Kilogram
403 (3) a1 Structural Steel, erected Grade 36 Kilogram
403 (3) a2 Structural Steel, erected Grade 50 Kilogram
403 (4) a1 Structural Steel, furnished, and fabricated Grade 36 Kilogram
403 (4) a2 Structural Steel, furnished, and fabricated Grade 50 Kilogram
403 (5) a1 Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated, and erected Grade 36 Kilogram
403 (5) a2 Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated, and erected Grade 50 Kilogram
403 (7) Bolts with Nuts and Washers Lump Sum
Page 24
VOLUME II
403 (8) Rivets Lump Sum

403 (9) Removal and Replacement of Rivets Each



Valid Values
Pay Item Suffix

405 (1) c1 Structural Concrete 30.0 Mpa A 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (1) d1 Structural Concrete 36.0 Mpa A 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (1) e1 Structural Concrete 41.0 Mpa (Non-shrink) 7 days Cubic Meter
Page 25
VOLUME II
405 (2) c Structural Concrete 18.00 Mpa B Cubic Meter
405 (2) d Structural Concrete 16.50 Mpa B Cubic Meter
405 (4) c1 Structural Concrete 38.0 Mpa P 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (7) a Structural Concrete (Box Girder) 42.0 Mpa Y Cubic Meter
405 (7) b Structural Concrete (Segmental Box Girder) 55.0 Mpa Y Cubic Meter
405 (8) Protective Mortar (using PCM w/ Lithium) Square Meter
405 (9) a Structural Precast Concrete 7 days Square Meter
405 (9) b Structural Precast Concrete 14 days Square Meter
405 (9) c Structural Precast Concrete 28 days Square Meter
405 (10) a Structural Precast Concrete 7 days Cubic Meter
405 (10) b Structural Precast Concrete 14 days Cubic Meter
405 (10) c Structural Precast Concrete 28 days Cubic Meter

Page 26
VOLUME II
Page 27
VOLUME II
Installation, Tensioning and Grouting of Prestressing
406 (3) Box Girder Each
Steel

Thickness/Sizes Class Others
Page 28
VOLUME II


409 (2) Tightening/Retightening of High Tension Bolt Kilogram
Items.

ITEM 411 – PAINT


412 (2) Disk Rubber Bearing Shoe Steel Box Girder Each
ITEM 413 - EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEMS

Page 29
VOLUME II
413 (1) Preformed Sponge Rubber Joint Expansion Cubic Meter

413 (2) Preformed Cork Joint Expansion Cubic Meter
413 (3) a Premolded Expansion Joint Filler with Sealant 12 mm Cubic Meter
413 (3) b Premolded Expansion Joint Filler with Sealant 50 mm Cubic Meter
413 (4) a Expansion Joint Linear Meter
413 (4) b Expansion Joint Steel Finger Type Linear Meter
413 (4) c Expansion Joint Aluminum Cast Linear Meter
413 (4) d Expansion Joint Strip Seal Linear Meter
413 (4) e Expansion Joint Compression Seal Linear Meter
Rubber (Multiplex)
413 (4) f Expansion Joint Linear Meter
Expansion Joints
Modular
413 (4) g Expansion Joint Linear Meter
Expansion Device
413 (5) Cubic Meter
413 (6) a Asphaltic Plug Joints (APJ) for Bridges Each
413 (6) b Asphaltic Plug Joints (APJ) for Bridges Linear Meter
413 (7) a1 Expansion Dam for Bridges Steel Transverse Set
413 (7) a2 Expansion Dam for Bridges Steel Longitudinal Set
413 (8) Expansion Joint Steel Finger Type Kilogram

ITEM 415 – CABLE RESTRAINER

415 (1) Cable Restrainer Lump Sum
415 (2) Cable Restrainer Each
ITEM 416 – FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER

Page 30
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix

416 (1) a Carbon Fiber 1 Layer Square Meter
416 (1) b Carbon Fiber 2 Layers Square Meter
416 (1) c Carbon Fiber 3 Layers Square Meter
416 (1) d Carbon Fiber 4 Layers Square Meter
416 (1) e Carbon Fiber Plate Square Meter
416 (2) Carbon Fiber Lump Sum
416 (3) a Aramid Fiber 1 Layer Square Meter
416 (3) b Aramid Fiber 2 Layers Square Meter
416 (3) c Aramid Fiber 3 Layers Square Meter
416 (3) d Aramid Fiber 4 Layers Square Meter
416 (4) Aramid Fiber Lump Sum
416 (5) Glass Fiber Sheet Square Meter
416 (6) Glass Fiber Lump Sum

417 (1) b Bearing Devices Rubber Bearing Each
417 (1) c Bearing Devices High Damping Rubber Each
ITEM 418 – BRIDGE STEEL DECK

418 (1) Bridge Steel deck Square Meter
418 (2) Bridge Steel deck Kilogram
ITEM 419 – BRIDGE STEEL DECK

419 (1) Corrugated Steel Plate Kilogram
419 (2) Corrugated Steel Plate Square Meter

Page 31
VOLUME II
500 (3) a Lined Canal Rectangular CHB Linear Meter
500 (3) b1 Lined Canal Rectangular Concrete Linear Meter
500 (3) b2 Lined Canal V-Shape Concrete Linear Meter
500 (3) c1 Lined Canal Rectangular Masonry Linear Meter
500 (3) c2 Lined Canal V-Shape Masonry Linear Meter

501 (4) Underdrain Lump Sum
501 (5) Blind drain Lump Sum

Page 32
VOLUME II

502 (9) Berm Ditch Gutter Linear Meter
502 (10) U-Type Vertical Slope Ditch Precast Linear Meter
502 (11) Splash Pad Precast Each


Page 33
VOLUME II
504 (1) a Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 610 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (1) b Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 760 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (1) c Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 910 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (1) d Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 1070 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (1) e Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 1220 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (1) f Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe 1520 mm dia. Linear Meter
504 (2) a 610 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
504 (2) b 760 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
504 (2) c 910 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
504 (2) d 1070 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
504 (2) e 1220 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
504 (2) f 1520 mm dia. Linear Meter
pipe
610 mm dia., half-
504 (3) a Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
760 mm dia., half-
504 (3) b Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
910 mm dia., half-
504 (3) c Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
1070 mm dia., half-
504 (3) d Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
1220 mm dia., half-
504 (3) e Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
1520 mm dia., half-
504 (3) f Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter
silted
504 (5) Cleaning/Reconditioning of drainage structures Lump Sum
Page 34
VOLUME II





509 (1) a1 Sheet Piles Timber Furnished and Driven Linear Meter
509 (1) b1 Sheet Piles Steel Slope Protection Linear Meter
509 (1) b2 Sheet Piles Steel Cofferdamming Linear Meter
509 (1) c1 Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished Linear Meter
509 (1) c2 Sheet Piles Concrete Driven Linear Meter
Page 35
VOLUME II
509 (1) c3 Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished and Driven Linear Meter
509 (1) d1 Sheet Piles PVC Furnished Linear Meter
509 (1) d2 Sheet Piles PVC Driven Linear Meter


511 (1) a1 Gabions 0.5m x 1m x 3m Metallic Coated Cubic Meter
511 (1) a3 Gabions 1m x 1m x 2m Metallic Coated Cubic Meter
511 (1) b1 Gabions 0.5m x 1m x 3m PVC Coated Cubic Meter
511 (1) b3 Gabions 1m x 1m x 2m PVC Coated Cubic Meter
511 (2) a1 Mattresses 0.3m x 2m x 6m Metallic Coated Cubic Meter
511 (2) a2 Mattresses 0.3m x 2m x 6m PVC Coated Cubic Meter
511 (4) a1 Polyester Net Gabion 1 tonne Type I Each
511 (4) a2 Polyester Net Gabion 2 tonnes Type I Each
511 (4) b1 Polyester Net Gabion 1 tonne Type II Each
511 (4) b2 Polyester Net Gabion 2 tonnes Type II Each
Page 36
VOLUME II





Page 37
VOLUME II

517 (2) Replacement of Drain Pipe Lump Sum
517 (3) a Deck Drain Type-1 Cast Iron Each
517 (3) b Deck Drain Type-2 Cast Iron Each



ITEM 522B – LANDSLIDE PROTECTION SYSTEM

s Unit Of Measure
522B (1) Landslide Protection System Square Meter

Page 38
VOLUME II


1000±50 high,
500mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
500mm depth (min)
602 (6) Cast-in-place Guide posts Each

603 (3) a1 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Single W-Beam Linear Meter
603 (3) a2 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Single Thrie-Beam Linear Meter
Page 39
VOLUME II
603 (3) b1 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Double W-Beam Linear Meter
603 (3) b2 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Double Thrie-Beam Linear Meter
Eccentric Loader
Terminal (ELT)
Installation of Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including
603 (6) a W-Beam Linear Meter
Post
Installation of Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including
603 (6) b Thrie-Beam Linear Meter
Post

604 (6) Precast Concrete Fencing including Post Square Meter
604 (7) Precast Concrete Fencing including Post Each

Sharp Turn L or R
Sharp Turn L or R
Sharp Turn L or R
Reverse Turn L or R
Page 40
VOLUME II
Reverse Turn L or R
Reverse Turn L or R
Curve L or R
Curve L or R
Curve L or R
Winding Road L or R
Winding Road L or R
Hairpin Bend L or R
Hairpin Bend L or R
Intersection and
Road
Page 41
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Page 42
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Page 43
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Page 44
VOLUME II
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Page 45
VOLUME II
Road Width Sign

Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Narrows
Narrows

Narrows

Narrows

Narrows
Narrows
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End

Divided Road
Road Width Sign End

Divided Road
Page 46
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Page 47
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Page 48
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

Aircraft
Crossing Ahead

Crossing Ahead
Signs Slow Down
Pedestrian Crossing
Ahead

Ped Xing
Crossing
Crossing
Crossing

Page 49
VOLUME II

Position

without signal

without signal

without signal

with signal

with signal

with signal
Signs Alternative
Railway Crossing
Position
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Page 50
VOLUME II
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Page 51
VOLUME II
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Other Warning Signs
CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
LOW CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
Prone Area
Other Warning Signs
Aksidente Dito
Other Warning Signs
Traffic Ahead
Other Warning Signs
Other Warning Signs
Weighbridge Ahead
Page 52
VOLUME II
Priority Signs Left

Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Page 53
VOLUME II
Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ONE
x 750 mm
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ALL
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs
MERGING TRAFFIC;
mm
TWO WAY
TRAPIKO
TURN RIGHT
Page 54
VOLUME II

TURN LEFT
TURN RIGHT
TURN LEFT
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Page 55
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Page 56
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Page 57
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Overpass
Prohibitive or
Pedxing
Prohibitive or
tumawid gamitin ang
Overpass
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Page 58
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
605 (2) o4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R3-14 PB Restrictive Signs Each
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Page 59
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Speed Signs Speed
Speed Signs Speed

Speed Signs Speed

Speed Signs Speed

restriction Signs
restriction Signs
restriction Signs
restriction Signs
Speed Signs Speed
Restriction Signs
Parking Signs No
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
Worded) (Plate)
Page 60
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
Worded) (Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs
Meter Parking
Parking Signs
Hour Parking
Signs; Loading Zone

Unloading Zone
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Page 61
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
Signs
Parking Signs No
Signs
Parking Signs No
Loading/Unloading
Within Red-Painted
Curb
Parking Signs No
Stopping Anytime
Parking Signs No
Signs; BUS Stop
Parking Signs No
Signs; PUJ Stop
Parking Signs No
Signs; Bus-PUJ Stop
Block Intersection
Parking Signs Right
Broken White Lines
Miscellaneous Signs
Audible Warning
Device
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Page 62
VOLUME II
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Use Seat Belt Sign
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Page 63
VOLUME II
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Direction Signs
Advance Direction
Direction Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Page 64
VOLUME II
Town Name and
Signs Town Name
Town Name and

Signs Province Name
Town Name and
Signs Geographic
Feature
Town Name and
Signs Local
Government Boundary
Center 2km
Service Signs
Weighbridge Station
and Restrooms
or Cafes
Left 300m
Center
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Page 65
VOLUME II
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Route Markers Route
Number
Asian Highway Route
Markers
Asian Highway Route
Markers
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Page 66
VOLUME II
Expressway
Charges (Advance
Information)
Expressway
Direction Signs
Advance Exit Signs
distance
Advance Exit Signs
Advance Exit with
Distance plus RIGHT
LANE
Advance Exit Signs
Advance (NEXT EXIT)
Expressway Exit
Expressway Exit
EXIT…..KM
Expressway Exit
Expressway Exit
Numbered exit
Expressway Service
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
Signs Rest Area 2km
Expressway Service
Signs Rest Area
Page 67
VOLUME II
Expressway Service
2km
Expressway Service
2km
Expressway Service
Exit
Expressway Service
exit
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY 1 Km
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY 2 Km
End of Expressway
START EXPRWAY
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY
Ahead
Gates
Toll Signs Pay Toll
Ahead
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Lane Ends …..m
Page 68
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Ends Merge Left
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Merge Left
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Brakes
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Reduced Speed Now
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Page 69
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Supplementary Signs
USE OVERPASS
Supplementary Signs
CROSSING
Supplementary Signs
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
CHECK BRAKES
Signs REDUCE SPEED
RED SIGNAL
Page 70
VOLUME II
WITH CARE
ANYTIME WITH CARE
Signs DETOUR FOR
HIGH VEHICLES (L or
R)
Signs DETOUR FOR
R)
PEDESTRIANS
ON RED SIGNAL
USE RIGHT LANE
Signs MABAGAL NA
SASAKYAN MAMALAGI
SA KANAN
Page 71
VOLUME II
Signs TRAK AT BUS
MALUBAN KUNG
LULUSOT
ROAD
605 (5) b13 Traffic Instruction Signs 900mm X 600 mm S2-8B Each
Signs NO THROUGH
Signs ROAD CLOSED
(TWO) LANE
TRUCKS and BUSES
One-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers

605 (6) e1 Hazard Markers 450x600mm Chevron Signs Each
605 (6) e2 Hazard Markers 600x800mm Chevron Signs Each

Page 72
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix

Premixed
Reflectorized
Premixed
Reflectorized
Reflectorized
Thermoplastic
Reflectorized
Thermoplastic




Page 73
VOLUME II


612(2) Square Meter
Yellow
612(3) Square Meter
Pavement Markings

614 (1) a Waterstop 100 mm. Meter
614 (1) b Waterstop 150 mm. Meter
614 (1) c Waterstop 200 mm. Meter
ITEM 615 - NOISE BARRIER

615 (1) Noise Barrier Linear Meter

Page 74
VOLUME II


623 (1) a1 Supply & Install Local Controller Microprocessor type TS1 8 Signal Group Lump Sum
623 (2) Supply & Install Traffic Signal Flasher Controller TS4 Lump Sum
623 (3) a1 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TS5 Amber Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) a2 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TS6 Red Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) a3 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TS7 Green Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) b1 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 2 Aspect TS8 Lump Sum
623 (3) c1 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TS13 Amber Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) c2 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TS14 Red Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) c3 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TS15 Green Lens Lump Sum
623 (3) d1 Supply & Install Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TS16 Lump Sum
Page 75
VOLUME II
623 (4) Supply and Install Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TS21 Lump Sum
623 (5) Supply and Install Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TS22 Lump Sum
Type A Mast Arm 4m
623 (6) a Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TS23 outreach with concrete Lump Sum
pedestal
623 (6) b Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TS25 Type B Lump Sum
623 (6) c Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TS26 Type C Lump Sum
623 (6) d Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TS27 Type D Lump Sum
Type A Mast Arm 4m
623 (6) e Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TS24 outreach without Lump Sum
concrete pedestal
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (7) a Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TS28 Linear Meter
Pavement
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (7) b Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TS29 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (7) c Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TS30 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (7) d Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TS31 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (7) e Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TS32 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
623 (7) f Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TS33 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (7) g Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TS34 Linear Meter
Surface
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (7) h Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TS35 Linear Meter
Surface
623 (8) a Handhole TS36 Type B Each
623 (8) b Handhole TS37 Type A Each
623 (9) a Supply and Install Vehicle Detector TS38 Inductive Loop Type Lump Sum
623 (9) b Supply and Install Vehicle Detector TS39 Video Camera Type Lump Sum
623 (10) TS40 Lump Sum
Commissioning
623 (11) TS41 Site
Local Controller
Page 76
VOLUME II
623 (12) Customization of Local Controller TS42 Each

623 (13) a1 Local Controller Microprocessor type TSP1 8 Signal Group Each
623 (13) a4 Traffic Signal Flasher Controller TSP4 Each
623 (14) a1 Detector Card/Board TSP5 8 Channel Each
623 (14) a2 Detector Card/Board TSP6 16 Channel Each
623 (15) a1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSP7 Amber Lens Set
623 (15) a2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSP8 Red Lens Set
623 (15) a3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSP9 Green Lens Set
623 (15) b1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 2 Aspect TSP10 Set
623 (15) c1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSP15 Amber Lens Set
623 (15) c2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSP16 Red Lens Set
623 (15) c3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSP17 Green Lens Set
623 (15) d1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSP18 Set
623 (16) Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSP23 Set
623 (17) Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TSP24 Set
623 (18) a1 Mounting Bracket 200mm TSP25 Set
623 (18) a2 Mounting Bracket 300mm TSP26 Set
623 (19) a1 Arrow Mask 200mm TSP27 Each
623 (19) a2 Arrow Mask 300mm TSP28 Each
623 (20) a1 200mm 3 Aspect TSP29 Each
Page 77
VOLUME II

623 (21) a1 Traffic Signal Control Cable 4 Core TSP37 Meter
623 (22) Loop Detector Cable TSP42 Meter
623 (23) Loop Feeder Cable TSP43 Meter
623 (24) Loop Sealant TSP44 Pail
623 (25) Splicing Kit TSP45 Each
623 (26) Grounding Cable TSP46 Meter
623 (27) Electricity/Power Supply Cable TSP47 Meter
623 (28) Main Circuit Breaker TSP48 Each
623 (29) Mounting Strap TSP49 Roll
623 (30) Mounting Buckle TSP50 Box
623 (31) Terminal Board (20P) TSP51 Each
623 (32) Terminal Lugs TSP52 Each
623 (33) Grounding Rod & Connector TSP53 Set
623 (34) Local Controller Footing TSC1 Each
623 (35) a Footing TSC2 Type A (w/pedestal) Each
623 (35) b Footing TSC3 Type A (w/o pedestal) Each
623 (35) c Footing TSC4 Type B Each
623 (35) d Footing TSC5 Type C Each
623 (35) e Footing TSC6 Type D Each
623 (36) Loop Detector Installation TSC7 Slot
623 (37) Concrete Bollard TSC8 Each
623 (38) Protection Cage for Local Controller TSC9 Each

Page 78
VOLUME II
624 (8) Solar LED Street Light Each
624 (9) Underground Electrical Works Lump Sum
624 (10) Roadway Lighting Lump Sum

200mm X 100mm X
3" dia. (75mm)
prismatic lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
3" dia. (75mm)
lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
200mm X 100mm X
Page 79
VOLUME II
Panel Type -
Panel Type -
Panel Type -
Panel Type -


1000mm (40") X
75mm (3") dia.
Jersey Type -
Waterfilled
625 (4) f Road Safety Barrier System Concrete Cast-in-place Each
Barrels
Page 80
VOLUME II
Non-gating -
collapsible bays
Non-gating - High
(HMW/HDPE) side
panels
Non-gating - Shock
Mechanism
Truck-Mounted-
Attenuator (TMA)



Temporary Hazard
Markers
Temporary Hazard
Markers
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
mm - 200 mm)
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
mm - 200 mm)
Expanded
Foam
Page 81
VOLUME II
Double Reverse
Corrugated (DRC)
Galvanized Steel
Fabric
High Impact
Polymer
Interlocking
Blocks
HMW/HDPE
Plastic
Vehicle Mounted
Equipment
Board Equipment

Roadwork On Side
Road
Page 82
VOLUME II
600 x 1000 mm (size
B)
No Lines Do Not
Power Line Works in
Progress
Pedestrians Watch
Your Step
Page 83
VOLUME II
ITEM 627 - WEIGH-IN-MOTION (WIM) AND TRAFFIC COUNTING

627 (1) a1 Supply and Install Road Sensors 2 lanes Loop-piezo-loop Lump Sum
627 (1) a4 Supply and Install Road Sensors > 6 lanes Loop-piezo-loop Lump Sum
627 (1) b1 Supply and Install Road Sensors 2 lanes Dual piezo Lump Sum
627 (1) b4 Supply and Install Road Sensors > 6 lanes Dual piezo Lump Sum
Supply and Install Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier
627 (2) a1 2 lanes ATC without solar Lump Sum
(ATC)
(ATC)
(ATC)
627 (2) a4 > 6 lanes ATC without solar Lump Sum
(ATC)
627 (2) b1 2 lanes ATC with solar Lump Sum
(ATC)
(ATC)
(ATC)
627 (2) b4 > 6 lanes ATC with solar Lump Sum
(ATC)
Supply and Install Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier with Remote Access
627 (2) c1 2 lanes Lump Sum
(ATC) Unit
(ATC) Unit
(ATC) Unit
627 (2) c4 > 6 lanes Lump Sum
(ATC) Unit
Complete Installation of Local Wiring and Connection
627 (3) Lump Sum
to ATC including Testing & Commissioning
627 (4) Supply and Install ATC Software Lump Sum
Page 84
VOLUME II
627 (5) Supply and Install Solar Panel Lump Sum

Supply and Install Permanent Type Weigh-in-Motion High-speed WIM,
627 (6) a Lump Sum
Axle Scale sensor-based
Supply and Install Permanent Type Weigh-in-Motion Low-speed WIM, load
627 (6) b Lump Sum
Axle Scale cell-based
627 (7) Supply of Portable Weigh-in-Motion Axle Scale Lump Sum
627 (8) Supply and Install WIM CPU/Console Lump Sum
627 (9) Supply and Install LED Display Lump Sum
Complete Installation of Local Wiring and Connection
627 (10) Lump Sum
to CPU/Console including Testing & Commissioning
627 (11) Supply and Install WIM Software Lump Sum
In-ground survey
627 (12) a Automatic traffic counter/classifier (ATC) Each
type
On-ground survey
627 (12) b Automatic traffic counter/classifier (ATC) Each
type
627 (13) Pneumatic road tubes Roll
627 (14) a Road tube cable grip Figure 8 Each
627 (14) b Road tube cable grip Woven cable Each
627 (14) c Road tube cable grip End C-clamp Each
627 (15) a Road tube anchor Center plate clamp Each
627 (15) b Road tube anchor Center lane flap Each
627 (15) c Road tube anchor Bitumen tape Roll
627 (16) Replacement road case Each
627 (17) a Battery pack 6 V 4.5Ah Each
627 (17) b Battery pack 6 V 12Ah Each
627 (17) c Battery pack Welded 6 V Each
627 (17) d Battery pack 36 Ah Each
627 (18) Inductive loop detector cable Roll
627 (19) a Piezoelectric axle sensor Type I Set
627 (19) b Piezoelectric axle sensor Type II Set
627 (20) Remote access hardware Set
627 (21) Solar panel Set
627 (22) WIM strip scale Each
627 (23) Weighing scale indicator Each
627 (24) Load cell Each
627 (25) External axle weight/ticket printer Each
627 (26) Roll-up ramp/levelling pad Set
627 (27) Conductor cable with shield Set
627 (28) Concrete bollard/protection post Each
Page 85
VOLUME II
Roadside Cabinet or Protection Cage with

627 (29) Each
Identification Plate
627 (30) Portable Weigh-In Motion Axle Scale (PWIM) Piece
627 (31) Weigh-In-Motion (WIM) Systems Lump Sum
627 (32) Automatic Traffic Counter/Classifier (ATC) Equipment Piece
ITEM 628 - REPAIR AND RETROFITTING WORKS

628 (1) a Waterproofing on Deck Slab Square Meter
Rubber compound
628 (1) b Waterproofing on Deck Slab Square Meter
Membrane Type
628 (2) Epoxy Coating on Crack Linear Meter
628 (3) Epoxy Injection on Crack Linear Meter
628 (4) Replacement of Expansion Joint Linear Meter
628 (5) Waterproof Expansion Joint Linear Meter
628 (6) Caulking Meter
628 (7) Patching Square Meter
628 (8) Partial Deck Slab Replacement Cubic Meter
628 (9) Special Anti-Corrosion Paint Square Meter
628 (10) Dismantling and Reinstallation of Existing Signs Each
628 (12) Protective Coating for Concrete Structures Square Meter
628 (13) Bridge Seat Extension Cubic Meter
ITEM 629 - MISCELLANEOUS SLOPE PROTECTION

629 (1) Bamboo Cribbing Linear Meter
ITEM 630 - ATHLETIC OR SPORTS FIELD ITEMS

630 (1) Rubberized Playing Field Linear Meter
630 (2) Artificial Turf Linear Meter
ITEM 631 - CONCRETE ANCHORAGE

Page 86
VOLUME II
631 (1) Drill and Bond Dowels Linear Meter

631 (2) Drilling of Anchor Bolts Linear Meter
ITEM 632 - HIGH FLOW EPOXY MORTAR FOR SUBMERGED AND WET CONCRETE STRUCTURES
High Flow Epoxy Mortar for Submerged and Wet
632 (1) Cubic Meter
Concrete Structures






Page 87
VOLUME II




ITEM 709 – PAINTS




Page 88
VOLUME II

ITEM 714 – WATER

714 (1) Water Liter

715 (1) Geotextile Square Meter
715 (2) Separation Geotextile Square Meter
715 (3) Drainage Geotextile Square Meter
715 (4) Paving Fabric Square Meter
715 (5) Hydraulic Filter Square Meter
715 (8) Geotextile Bag Piece



Page 89
VOLUME II


733 (1) Liter
Products

Course, Hot-Laid

Bitumen

Page 90
VOLUME II

Page 91
VOLUME III
PART A - EARTHWORK

Page 1
VOLUME III

High Density
801 (5) c1 Removal of Pipes other than Pipe Culverts 50 mm dia. Linear Meter
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
Page 2
VOLUME III



803 (5) b Shoring, cribbing and drain excavation Cribbing/Cofferdamming Lump Sum

Page 3
VOLUME III
From
excavation



807 (3) a Softscape Trees Each
807 (3) b Softscape Shrubs Each
807 (6) a Hardscape fountains Each
807 (6) b Hardscape benches Each
807 (6) c Hardscape gazebos Each
807 (8) a Aquatic Plants Each
807 (8) b Aquatic Animals Each
807 (11) Column Guards Each
807 (12) Wheel Guards Each
Page 4
VOLUME III


900 (8) Structural Concrete 27.58 Mpa 28 days Cubic Meter

Page 5
VOLUME III

902 (1) a Reinforcing Steel (Deformed) Grade 40 Kilogram
902 (1) b Reinforcing Steel (Deformed) Grade 60 Kilogram
902 (2) Reinforcing Steel (Plain/Round) Kilogram


1001 (1) a1 Pipes and Fittings 50 mm dia. PVC Series 600 Meter
1001 (1) b1 Pipes and Fittings 150 mm dia. Concrete Meter
Page 6
VOLUME III
High Density
1001 (1) c1 Pipes and Fittings 50 mm dia. Meter
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
High Density
Polyethylene HDPE
1001 (5) a Catch Basin Concrete Each
1001 (6) Catch Basin Lump Sum
1001 (7) a Junction Box Concrete Each
1001 (10) Pipes with Fittings Connection Lump Sum
1001 (11) Septic Vault Concrete/CHB Lump Sum
1001 (12) Septic Tank PVC Lump Sum
1001 (13) Septic Tank PVC Each
1001 (14) Manhole Concrete/CHB Lump Sum
1001 (15) Manhole Concrete/CHB Each
1001 (16) a1 Inlets 150 mm dia. Concrete Inlet Meter
ITEM 1002 – PLUMBING WORKS

Page 7
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1002 (1) a Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 13 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) b Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 25 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) c Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 32 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) d Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 40 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) e Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 50 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) f Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 65 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) g Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 75 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) h Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 100 mm dia. Meter
1002 (1) i Galvanized Iron Pipes with Fittings 150 mm dia. Meter
Polyprophylene Random Copolymer (PPR-C) Pipes with
1002 (2) a1 20 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) a2 20 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) a3 20 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) b1 25 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) b2 25 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) b3 25 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) c1 32 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) c2 32 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) c3 32 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) d1 40 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) d2 40 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) d3 40 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) e1 50 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) e2 50 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) e3 50 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) f1 63 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) f2 63 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
Page 8
VOLUME III

1002 (2) f3 63 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) g1 75 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) g2 75 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) g3 75 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) h1 100 mm dia. PN 10 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) h2 100 mm dia. PN 16 Meter
Fittings
1002 (2) h3 100 mm dia. PN 20 Meter
Fittings
1002 (3) a PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 20 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) b PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 25 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) c PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 32 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) d PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 40 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) e PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 50 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) f PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 65 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) g PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 75 mm dia. Meter
1002 (3) h PVC Pipes (blue) with Fittings 100 mm dia. Meter
1002 (5) a Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (5) b Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Flush Type Set
1002 (6) Water Closet, Elongated, Automatic Flush Valve, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (7) a Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (7) b Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Flush Type Set
1002 (8) Sensor Type Set
Complete
1002 (9) a Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Push Button Type Set
1002 (9) b Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Lever Arm Type Set
1002 (10) Urinal, Automatic Flush Valve, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (11) a Kitchen Sink, Complete Stainless Set
1002 (11) b Kitchen Sink, Complete Aluminum Set
1002 (14) a Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (14) b Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (15) a Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (15) b Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Sensor Type Set
Page 9
VOLUME III

1002 (23) a Water Meter 20 mm dia. Piece
1002 (23) b Water Meter 25 mm dia. Piece
1002 (23) c Water Meter 32 mm dia. Piece
1002 (26) Cistern Lump Sum
1002 (27) Plumbing Works Lump Sum

1003 (1) e3 Ceiling Metal Frame Aluminum Metal Cladding Square Meters
1003 (1) f Ceiling Wood Frame Wood Square Meters
1003 (1) g1 Ceiling Wood Frame PVC Square Meters
1003 (1) g2 Ceiling Metal Frame PVC Square Meters
1003 (1) h Ceiling Lump Sum
Page 10
VOLUME III
1003 (2) f Wall Aluminum Metal Cladding Square Meters
1003 (2) g Wall Concrete Cladding Lump Sum
1003 (2) h Wall Lump Sum
1003 (4) Cabinets Each
1003 (9) Wall Frame Wood Each
1003 (13) Phenolic Board Each
1003 (15) c Moulding Precast Meter
1003 (15) d Moulding PVC Meter
1003 (15) e Moulding Steel Meter
1003 (21) Moulding Lump Sum
1003 (22) Modular Partition Square Meters
1003 (23) Modular Partition Lump Sum
ITEM 1004 – HARDWARE

1004 (1) Rough Hardware Lump Sum
1004 (2) Finishing Hardware Lump Sum
Page 11
VOLUME III

1005 (1) Residential Casement (Steel) Square Meters
1005 (7) Louver Window Square Meters

ITEM 1007 – ALUMINUM FRAMED GLASS DOORS

1007 (1) a Aluminum Framed Glass Door Sliding Type Square Meter
1007 (1) b Aluminum Framed Glass Door Swing Type Square Meter
1007 (2) Aluminum Framed Glass Door Lump Sum


Page 12
VOLUME III

Jambs, Sills, Head,
1010 (1) Frames Set


1012 (3) a Tempered Glass Doors 10mm Square Meter
1012 (3) b Tempered Glass Doors 12mm Square Meter
1012 (4) a Tempered Glass Windows 8mm Square Meter
1012 (4) b Tempered Glass Windows 10mm Square Meter
1012 (5) a Tempered Glass Walls/Barriers, etc. 6mm Square Meter
1012 (5) b Tempered Glass Walls/Barriers, etc. 8mm Square Meter
1012 (5) c Tempered Glass Walls/Barriers, etc. 10mm Square Meter

1013 (2) a1 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013 (2) a2 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013 (2) b1 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013 (2) b2 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
Page 13
VOLUME III
1013 (2) b3 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013 (2) b4 Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter
1013 (3) Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Plain GI Sheet Each

1013A (2) a1 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013A (2) a2 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013A (2) b1 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013A (2) b2 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
1013A (2) b3 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013A (2) b4 Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter




Page 14
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1017 (1) a Roof Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set
1017 (1) b Roof Drain with Strainer 75 mm dia. Set
1017 (1) c Roof Drain with Strainer 100 mm dia. Set
1017 (1) d Roof Drain with Strainer 150 mm dia. Set
1017 (2) a Canopy Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set
1017 (2) b Canopy Drain with Strainer 75 mm dia. Set
1017 (2) c Canopy Drain with Strainer 100 mm dia. Set
1017 (2) d Canopy Drain with Strainer 150 mm dia. Set
1017 (3) a Gutter Drain with Strainer 50 mm dia. Set
1017 (3) b Gutter Drain with Strainer 75 mm dia. Set
1017 (3) c Gutter Drain with Strainer 100 mm dia. Set

1018 (6) Textured Glazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (7) Textured Unglazed Tiles Square Meter


1020 (1) a Vinyl Floor Tile Square Meter
1020 (1) b Vinyl Floor Tile Lump Sum

Page 15
VOLUME III
1021 (1) c Cement Floor Finish with Floor Hardener Square Meter
1021 (3) c Floor Topping Dry-Shake Finish Square Meter
1021 (6) Nonslip Finish Square Meter
1021 (7) Scratched Finish Square Meter
1021 (8) Floated Finish Square Meter
1021 (9) Exposed Aggregate Finish Square Meter
1021 (10) Gloss-imparting Waxes Square Meter
1021 (11) Evaporation Reducers Square Meter
1021 (12) Floor Finishes Lump Sum



1024 (1) Pea Gravel Washout Finish Square Meter


Page 16
VOLUME III
ITEM 1027 – CEMENT PLASTER FINISH/DECORATIVE STONE

1027 (2) Simulated Red Bricks Square Meter
1027 (3) Decorative Stone Square Meter
1027 (4) Cement Plaster Finish Lump Sum





1032 (1) a Painting Works Masonry/Concrete Square Meter
1032 (1) b Painting Works Wood Square Meter
1032 (1) c Painting Works Steel Square Meter
Page 17
VOLUME III
1032 (5) Textured Finish Square Meter

ITEM 1034 – DAMP PROOFING

1034 (1) c Damp proofing Coal-tar pitch Square Meter
1034 (1) d Damp proofing Emulsified Asphalt Square Meter





Page 18
VOLUME III


1041 (1) Gypsum Board for Walls Square Meter
1041 (2) Gypsum Board for Ceilings Square Meter





Page 19
VOLUME III
1046 (4) AutoClaved Aerated Concrete Blocks Square Meter

1047 (2) c Structural Steel Cladding Kilogram
1047 (3) a Metal Structure Accessories Bolts Each
1047 (3) b Metal Structure Accessories Sagrods Each
1047 (3) c Metal Structure Accessories Turnbuckle Each
1047 (3) d Metal Structure Accessories Cross Bracing Each
1047 (5) Metal Structure Accessories Steel Plates Each
1047 (10) Metal Structure Accessories Lump Sum
ITEM 1048 – FIBER REINFORCED POLYMER

Pay Item Suffix
Description Valid Values Class Others Unit Of Measure
1048 (1) a Carbon Fiber 1 Layer Square Meter
1048 (1) b Carbon Fiber 2 Layers Square Meter
1048 (1) c Carbon Fiber 3 Layers Square Meter
1048 (1) d Carbon Fiber 4 Layers Square Meter
1048 (1) e Carbon Fiber Plate Square Meter
1048 (2) Carbon Fiber Lump Sum
1048 (3) a Aramid Fiber 1 Layer Square Meter
1048 (3) b Aramid Fiber 2 Layers Square Meter
1048 (3) c Aramid Fiber 3 Layers Square Meter
1048 (3) d Aramid Fiber 4 Layers Square Meter
1048 (4) Aramid Fiber Lump Sum
1048 (5) Glass Fiber Sheet Square Meter
Page 20
VOLUME III
1048 (6) Glass Fiber Lump Sum



1051 (6) Railing Lump Sum
1051 (7) Glass Railing Meter

1052 (4) a Precast Concrete Piles, furnished 400x400 mm Meter
1052 (4) b Precast Concrete Piles, furnished 450x450 mm Meter
1052 (5) a Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished 400x400 mm Meter
1052 (5) b Precast, Prestresssed Concrete Piles, furnished 450x450 mm Meter
Page 21
VOLUME III

Page 22
VOLUME III

Page 23
VOLUME III

1052 (28) a Micro Piles 0.20 Meter
1052 (28) b Micro Piles 0.25 Meter
1052 (28) c Micro Piles 0.30 Meter
1052 (29) a Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.20 Kilogram
1052 (29) b Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.25 Kilogram
1052 (29) c Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.30 Kilogram
ITEM 1053 – CARPET FLOOR TILES

1053 (1) a Carpet Floor Tiles Square Meter
1053 (1) b Carpet Floor Tiles Lump Sum

Valid Values
Pay Item Suffix
Panels


PART D - ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1100 – CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS (CONDUIT WORKS/ CONDUIT ROUGH-IN)
1100 (1) a Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 15 mm dia. Meter
Page 24
VOLUME III
1100 (1) b Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 20 mm dia Meter

1100 (1) c Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) d Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) e Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) f Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) g Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 65 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) h Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 80 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) i Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 90 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) j Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 100 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) k Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 125 mm dia Meter
1100 (1) l Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 150 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) a Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 15 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) b Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 20 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) c Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) d Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) e Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) f Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) g Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 65 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) h Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 80 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) i Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 90 mm dia Meter
1100 (2) j Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 100 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) a Flexible Metal Conduit 15 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) b Flexible Metal Conduit 20 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) c Flexible Metal Conduit 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) d Flexible Metal Conduit 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) e Flexible Metal Conduit 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) f Flexible Metal Conduit 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) g Flexible Metal Conduit 65 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) h Flexible Metal Conduit 80 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) i Flexible Metal Conduit 90 mm dia Meter
1100 (3) j Flexible Metal Conduit 100 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) a Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 15 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) b Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 20 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) c Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) d Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) e Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) f Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) g Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 65 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) h Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 80 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) i Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 90 mm dia Meter
1100 (4) j Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 100 mm dia Meter
1100 (5) a Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 10 mm dia Meter
1100 (5) b Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 15 mm dia Meter
Page 25
VOLUME III
1100 (5) c Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 20 mm dia Meter

1100 (5) d Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (5) e Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (5) f Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (5) g Rigid Type Flexible Non-Metallic Conduit 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) a Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 20 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) b Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 25 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) c Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 32 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) d Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 40 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) e Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 50 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) f Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 65mm dia Meter
1100 (6) g Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 75 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) h Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 90 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) i Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 100 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) j Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 110 mm dia Meter
1100 (6) k Polyvinyl Chloride Pipes (PVC/uPVC) 160 mm dia Meter
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
1100 (8) Boxes/Wire Gutter Lump Sum
1100 (9) Fittings and Accessories Lump Sum
Page 26
VOLUME III
Conduits, Boxes & Fittings (Conduit Works/Conduit

1100 (10) Lump Sum
Rough-in)
Repair/Replacement of Conduits/Pipes, Boxes, Fittings
1100 (11) Lump Sum
(Conduit Works/Rough-in)

1.6 mm dia.
1101 (1) a1 Electric Wire Solid Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2
1101 (1) b1 Electric Wire Stranded Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
8.0mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
14mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
22mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
30mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
60mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 27
VOLUME III
100mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
1101 (1) c1 Electric Wire 14 mm² ACSR Roll
1101 (1) d1 Electric Wire 1C X 4 XLPE Roll
Page 28
VOLUME III
1101 (1) e1 Electric Wire 2C X 4 XLPE Roll

1101 (1) f1 Electric Wire 3C X 4 XLPE Roll
1.6 mm dia.
1101 (2) a1 Electric Wire Solid Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2
1101 (2) b1 Electric Wire Stranded Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 29
VOLUME III
8.0mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
14mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
22mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
30mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
60mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
100mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 30
VOLUME III

1101 (2) d1 Electric Wire 2C X 4 XLPE Meter
1101 (2) e1 Electric Wire 3C X 4 XLPE Meter
1101 (2) f1 Electric Wire 14 mm² ACSR Meter
Page 31
VOLUME III

1101 (4)
plate)
1101 (5)
plate)
1101 (15)
Type (GT)
1101 (16) Duplex Convenience Outlets/Receptacles (GT) Set
1101 (18) Set
(GT)
1101 (19) Set
(GT)
1101 (20) Set
etc.
1101 (21) Set
1101 (22) Set
1101 (23) Set
1101 (24) Set
1101 (25) Set
1101 (26) Set
Interrupter (GFCI)
Page 32
VOLUME III

1101 (30) a Mica Tubing 6.35mm (1/4") Meter
1101 (30) b Mica Tubing 12.7mm (1/2") Meter
1101 (30) c Mica Tubing 19.0mm (3/4") Meter
1101 (30) d Mica Tubing 25.40mm (1") Meter
1101 (34) Repair/Replacement of Wires and Wiring Devices Lump Sum
ITEM 1102 – POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS, AND OTHER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION DEVICES
Unit Of Measure
1102 (1) Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Lump Sum
1102 (2) NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (4) Manual Transfer Switch with renewable Fuse Flushed Type Set
1102 (5) Manual Transfer Switch, Breaker Type Free Standing Set
1102 (6) Automatic Transfer Switch, Breaker Type Flushed Type Set
1102 (7) Automatic Transfer Switch, Breaker Type Free Standing Set
Pad Mounted Distrbution Transformer (OISC) with
1102 (8) Free Standing Lump Sum
Complete Accessories
Pad Mounted Power Transformer (OISC) with single or three
1103 (9) Free Standing Lump Sum
Complete Accessories phase
Pole Mounted Distribution Transformer (OISC) with
1102 (10) Pole type Lump Sum
Complete Accessories
Pole Mounted Power Transformer (OISC) with single or three
1102 (11) Pole type or Flatform Lump Sum
Complete Accessories phase
single or three Free Standing or
1102 (12) Dry Type Transformer Lump Sum
phase Flatform
1102 (13) Current Transformer Lump Sum
1102 (14) Potential Transformer Lump Sum
1102 (15) Isolation Transformer Lump Sum
single or three
1102 (16) a1 Generator Stand-by Lump Sum
phase
single or three
1102 (16) a2 Generator Continuous Lump Sum
phase
1102 (17) Synchronizing Panel for Generators Lump Sum
1102 (18) Solar Panel with inverter, battery and other devices Lump Sum
Page 33
VOLUME III

Repair/Replacement of Power Load Center,
1102 (23) Switchgear and Panelboards, and other Overcurrent Piece
Protection Devices
ITEM 1103 – LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS

1103 (1) Lighting Fixtures and Lamps Lump Sum
1103 (2) Repair/Replacement of Lighting Fixtures and Lamps Lump Sum

ITEM 1105 - NETWORK CABLING SYSTEM

1105 (14) Wall Plate Single (Voice/Data Outlet) Set
1105 (15) Wall Plate 2 port (Voice/Data Outlet) Set
1105 (16) Wall Plate 3 port (Voice/Data Outlet) Set
1105 (17) Floor Mounted 2 port (Voice/Data Outlet) Set
1105 (18) Floor Mounted 3 port (Voice/Data Outlet) Set
Page 34
VOLUME III
Network Equipment (Servers, Fire Wall, Repeaters,

1105 (19) Set
etc.)
1105 (21) UTP CAT5e Cable Roll

1106 (6) Data Digital Video Recorder Set
1106 (12) Digital Disc Recorder Set

1107 (12) Horn Set
1107 (13) Wires/Cables Lump Sum

Page 35
VOLUME III

1108 (5) a Biometric Scanner Face Set
1108 (5) b Biometric Scanner Finger Set
1108 (5) c Biometric Scanner Face/Finger Set

1109 (4) a Bare Copper Wire 2.0 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) b Bare Copper Wire 3.5 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) c Bare Copper Wire 5.5 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) d Bare Copper Wire 8.0 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) e Bare Copper Wire 14 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) g Bare Copper Wire 22 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) h Bare Copper Wire 30 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) i Bare Copper Wire 38 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) j Bare Copper Wire 50 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) k Bare Copper Wire 60 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) l Bare Copper Wire 80 mm2 Meter
1109 (4) m Bare Copper Wire 100 mm2 Meter
1109 (5) a Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 8.0 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) b Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 14 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) c Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 16 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) d Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 20 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) e Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 22 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) f Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 25 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) g Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 30 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) h Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 38 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) i Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 50 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) j Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 60 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) k Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 80 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) l Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 100 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) m Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 125 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) n Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 200 mm2 Piece
1109 (5) o Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 250 mm2 Piece
Page 36
VOLUME III
1109 (5) p Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 400 mm2 Piece
1109 (6) a Grounding Rod Copper Clad 14.2mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) b Grounding Rod Copper Clad 16mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) c Grounding Rod Copper Clad 17.2mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) d Grounding Rod Copper Clad 18mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) e Grounding Rod Copper Clad 20mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) f Grounding Rod Copper Clad 22mm dia x 3m Length
1109 (6) g Grounding Rod Copper Clad 25mm dia x 3m Length

1110 (4) Patient Bed Station Set
1110 (5) Corridor Lights and Zone Lights Set
ITEM 1111 - MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL/CIVIL WORKS

1111 (1) Reinforced Concrete Pedestal / Pole Lump Sum
1111 (2) Reinforced Concrete Envelop/encasement Lump Sum
1111 (3) Concrete Envelop/encasement Lump Sum
1111 (4) Handhole Lump Sum
1111 (5) Manhole Lump Sum
1111 (6) Cable Tray Lump Sum
1111 (7) Wire Trench Lump Sum
1111 (8) 2 Spool Insulator Wire Rack Set
PART E - MECHANICAL
Page 37
VOLUME III

Tube Axial Roof
Mounted
wall mounted,
Industrial Type
1200 (11) a Freon (Gas) 23 Kilograms
1200 (11) b Freon (Gas) 134a Kilograms
1200 (11) c Freon (Gas) 134b Kilograms
1200 (11) d Freon (Gas) 410a Kilograms
1200 (11) e Freon (Gas) 410b Kilograms
Package/Split
1200 (13) a Airconditioning Lump Sum
type
1200 (13) b Airconditioning VRF/VRV Lump Sum
Centralized Air-
1200 (13) c Airconditioning Lump Sum
Condition Ducting
1200 (14) Ventilation Lump Sum

1201 (2) Centrifugal Pump with control Set
1201 (3) Submersible Multi-Stage Deepwell Pump with control Set
1201 (4) Submersible Sump Pump with control Set
1201 (5) Submersible Sewage Ejector Pump with control Set
1201 (6) Booster Pump with control Set
1201 (7) Jet Pump with control Set
1201 (8) Water Tank Set
1201 (9) d Overhead Tank Concrete Set
Page 38
VOLUME III

1201 (12) Valves and Pipe Fittings Lump Sum
ITEM 1202 – FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER SYSTEM (AFSS)

1202 (1) Automatic Fire Sprinkler System (AFSS) Lump Sum
1202 (2) 250 - 1000 gpm Set
accessories
1202 (3) Set
accessories
1202 (4) 150 mm dia. Set
with cap
1202 (5) Fire hose cabinet assembly Set
CO2/HCFC123 with
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 with
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 wheeled
type
Fire Department connections 100 x 65 x 65 mm for
1202 (7) Set
Dry Type system
1202 (8) Fire Hydrant Set

1203 (1) a Electric Elevator up to 500 kgs Lump Sum
1203 (1) b Electric Elevator 501 - 1000 kgs Lump Sum
1203 (1) c Electric Elevator above 1000 kgs Lump Sum
1203 (2) Lift Elevator Lump Sum

Page 39
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix
1204 (1) Electric Dumbwaiter Lump Sum

1205 (1)
Vacuum Pump
1205 (2) Humidifier, Vacuum Trap Bottle, Outlets, Valves Piece

1206 (1) Set
1206 (2) Pipes Meter
ITEM 1207 - BOILER

1207 (1) Set
Pump
1207 (2) Pipes with Insulation Meter
1207 (3) Valves and Fittings Lump Sum

Page 40
VOLUME III


PART F – PILING
1300 (6) a Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished New Meter
1300 (6) b Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Rental Meter
Page 41
VOLUME III

Page 42
VOLUME III

1300 (28) a Micro Piles 0.20 Meter
1300 (28) b Micro Piles 0.25 Meter
1300 (28) c Micro Piles 0.30 Meter
1300 (29) a Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.20 Kilogram
1300 (29) b Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.25 Kilogram
1300 (29) c Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.30 Kilogram
1300 (31) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, extracted Meter
Page 43
VOLUME III



Valid Values
Pay Item Suffix


1404 (1) Filter Fabric Material Square Meter
1404 (2) Filter Aggregate Material Cubic Meter
Page 44
VOLUME III

1405 (1) Reinforcing Mat Square Meter


1407 (1) Tetrapod Piece
1407 (2) Tetrapod Cubic Meter
1407 (3) Hexapod Piece
1407 (4) Hexapod Cubic Meter
1407 (5) Tria Blocks Piece
1407 (6) Tria Blocks Cubic Meter

Valid Values
Pay Item Suffix

Page 45
VOLUME III


ITEM 1601 – FILL AND BACKFILL



ITEM 1604 – WATER TREATMENT PLANT

1604 (1) Water Treatment Plant Lump Sum
Page 46
VOLUME III



Cribbing/
Cofferdamming
Page 47
VOLUME III

1703 (1) a Dredging using cutter suction up to 300mm dia. Cubic Meter
1703 (1) b Dredging using cutter suction above 300mm dia. Cubic Meter
1703 (2) Dredging using amphibious excavator Cubic Meter
1703 (3) Dredging using backhoe on barge Cubic Meter
1703 (4) Dredging using backhoe on bank Cubic Meter
1703 (5) Dredging using clampshell Cubic Meter

From
excavation



Page 48
VOLUME III






Page 49
VOLUME III

1714 (1) a6 Gabions 0.5 x 1m x 2m Metallic Coated Cubic Meter
1714 (2) a1 Mattresses 0.3m x 2m x 6m Metallic Coated Cubic Meter
1714 (2) a2 Mattresses 0.3m x 2m x 6m PVC Coated Cubic Meter
1714 (4) a1 Polyester Net Gabion 1 tonne Type I Each
1714 (4) b1 Polyester Net Gabion 1 tonne Type II Each

1715 (2) Filter Fabric with Aluminum Frame Square Meter

Page 50
VOLUME III

1716 (6) a Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished New Meter
1716 (6) b Structural Steel Sheet Piles, furnished Rental Meter
1716 (23) a Permanent Casing 0.80 Meter
1716 (23) b Permanent Casing 1.00 Meter
1716 (23) c Permanent Casing 1.20 Meter
1716 (23) d Permanent Casing 1.50 Meter
1716 (23) e Permanent Casing 1.80 Meter
1716 (23) f Permanent Casing 2.00 Meter
1716 (23) g Permanent Casing 2.50 Meter
1716 (23) h Permanent Casing 2.80 Meter
1716 (23) i Permanent Casing 3.00 Meter
Page 51
VOLUME III

1716 (29) Structural Steel Sheet Piles, extracted Meter

1717 (2) a3 Sheet Piles Steel Extraction Meter
1717 (5) a1 Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Z-Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) a2 Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Hat Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) a3 Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Pipe Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (8) a1 Sheet Piles PVC Furnished Linear Meter
1718 (8) a2 Sheet Piles PVC Driven Linear Meter

Page 52
VOLUME III

1719 (2) Blind Drain Linear Meter
1719 (3) Granular Backfill Filter Material for underdrains Cubic Meter
1719 (4) a1 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Mortar (FRPM) 300mm dia. FRPM Pipe Meter
1719 (4) a2 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Mortar (FRPM) 200mm dia. FRPM Pipe Meter
1719 (4) b Fiber Reinforced Plastic Mortar (FRPM) 300mm dia. FRPM Perforated Pipe Meter
1719 (5) a1 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Flap Gate 300mm dia. FRP Flap Gate Each
1719 (6) a1 Rectangular Aluminum Flap Gate 2000 x 2000mm Aluminum Flap Gate Each
1719 (6) a2 Rectangular Aluminum Flap Gate 1700 x 1700mm Aluminum Flap Gate Each

1720 (3) a1 Catch Basins 610 mm dia. Each
Page 53
VOLUME III

1720 (4) a1 Concrete Covers 610 mm dia. Each
1720 (5) Metal Frames and Gratings, type Pair
1720 (6) Metal Frames and Covers Pair
1720 (7) Adjusting Manholes Each
1720 (8) Adjusting Catch Basin Each

1721 (1) Removing, Cleaning, Stockpiling Salvaged Culvert Pipe Linear Meter
Removing, Cleaning, and Relaying Salvaged Culvert
Pipe
1721 (3) Cleaning Culvert Pipe in place Linear Meter
1721 (4) Reconditioning Drainage Structures Each

1722 (1) d Fence Galvanized Square Meter
1722 (1) e Fence Precast Plant Box Linear Meter

1724 (1) Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (2) Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
Page 54
VOLUME III
1724 (3) Horizontal Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
t
1724 (4) Suction Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt & Nuts 6 -10mm carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
1724 (5) 6 -10mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
Nuts
1724 (11) Fuel Transfer Pump 0.187-0.75kW Set
1724 (13) Water Supply Centrifugal Pump 0.75 - 2.24kW Set
1724 (14) Portable Submersible Pump 0.75 -3.73kW Set
1724 (15) a1 Rectangular Flap Gate 610mm dia. Cast Iron Each
1724 (16) Pump House and Accessories Lump Sum

1.0 m3/s cap and
1725 (1) Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
1.0 m3/s cap and
1725 (2) Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
Suction Column Pipe Set with Flanges and Bolts and
1725 (3) 10mmt 700mmФ below Set
Nuts
Discharge Column Pipe Set with Flanges and Bolts and
1725 (4) 10mmt 700mmФ below Set
Nuts
t
1725 (5) Flapper Valve (Carbon Steel) 12mm 700mmФ below Set
20GPM, Manual Nozzle
1725 (6) Fuel Transfer Pump Hose Fuel Transfer 0.187-0.75 KW Set
Pump
1725 (7) Fuel Storage Tank 5,000 lts. Set
1725 (8) a Fuel Day Tank 1,000 lts. Set
Page 55
VOLUME III
above 1000 - 15000

1725 (8) b Fuel Day Tank Set
lts.
1725 (9) Steel Grating Stainless Steel Set
1m/3ft Metric / English
Aluminum meter stick
LDY type Metallurgy, (0.5 ton cap chain host

single overhead crance with trolley)
LDY type Metallurgy, (1 ton cap chain host


LDY type Metallurgy, (2 ton cap chain host



1726 (2) Generator Set Lump Sum
1726 (3) Local Panel Control Center (for Auxiliary Equipment) Lump Sum


1727 (2) a Overhead Crane Set
hoist with trolley)
Page 56
VOLUME III
(7.5 tons capacity

1727 (2) b Overhead Crane Set

1727 (2) c Overhead Crane Set
hoist with trolley)

1727 (3) a Gantry Crane Set
hoist with trolley)
(7.5 tons capacity

1727 (3) b Gantry Crane Set

1727 (3) c Gantry Crane Set
hoist with trolley)
Automatic trash rake complete with accessories ready
1727 (4) a for service Primary Set
Trash screen rake complete with accessories ready for
1727 (4) b service Secondary Set
1727 (5) Flood gate complete with accessories ready for service Set
Horizontal conveyor complete with accessories ready
1727 (6) Set
for service
Inclined conveyor and hooper complete with
1727 (7) Set
accessories ready for service
CONCURRED BY:
Director WALTER R. OCAMPO Director LEA N. DELFINADO

Bureau of Construction Bureau of Design
Director MEDMIER G. MALIG Director REYNALDO G. TAGUDANDO

Bureau of Quality and Safety Bureau of Research and Standards
Page 57
8'?'7. /~P'~
-1;2~ /1'.•.~/:Y--
MANILA
'5 DEC 2011]
DEPARTMENTORDER ) SUBJECT DPWH Standard Specification for

) Item 615 - NOISE BARRIER
No.
146 _
)
)
Series of 201(8rt-fl.t7
In order to ensure uniformity in the application/ adoption of the Pay Items of Work to be
used/ adopted by those who are involved in the preparation of the Design Plans and
Quantities, Program of Works (POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) for
Infrastructure Projects Nationwide, and to provide Specification to the above-mentioned
subject/ the attached DPWH Standard Specification for Item 615 - Noise Barrier is
hereby prescribed, for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
This Standard Specification forms part of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports, Volume II and is now included in the Project and Contract Management
Application (PCMA).
This Order shall take effect immediately .

. f
~~.
MARK A. VILLAR
,- ------
Secretary
14.1.2 FET/RGT
111111111111111111111111111I111111111
WIN7U01557
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 615 - NOISE BARRIER
Page 1of 6
615.1 Description
This Specification covers the minimum material, mechanical and noise reduction performance
requirements of noise barrier. This Item shall be used in conjunction with steel support posts
to provide noise abatement on both sidewalls of all bridges and on part of the approach
structures, along highway/f1yover, and in other applications requiring long term outdoor
durability, vandal resistance and ease of construction.
615.1.1 Design
The Contractor shall provide design calculation (as per latest AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications), shop drawings, erection methodology, and detailed erection plan for approval
by the Engineer. The design requirements shall be in accordance with these Specifications
and/or as indicated in the Plans.
The Contractor shall determine the final location plan, grades and elevation for ground/viaduct
mounted noise barrier wall and anchor bolts (furnish plans and elevations to develop the
foundation/installation drawings, including a complete elevation view of each wall section
including top and bottom elevations, project final ground/viaduct elevations established in the
field) for the duration of the project and no adjustment shall be made after shop drawing has
already been approved.
The base plate, post, anchor bolts inside side wall and noise barrier are to be designed
following the wind load (2.4 kN/m2) of AASHTO LRFD Artic!E} 3.8.1 same as bridge main
structures. The structural design detail of post and base plate shall be indicated on the Plans
for the minimum requirements referring to Item 403 - Metal Structures and
Item 409 - Welded Structural Steel.
615.1.2 Design Considerations
Placement of noise barrier walls on bridges and retaining walls should be avoided if possible.
These structures may cause increase in risk to traffic below during seismic events or in case
of vehicular impact. However, if necessary to place a noise barrier wall on a bridge or a
retaining wall, the following guidelines shall be considered as minimum requirements for
design and detailing of these walls:
1. The total height of noise barrier walls on bridges, from top of slab to top of noise barrier
wall, shall be limited to 245 cm.
2. The total height of noise barrier walls on retaining walls, from top of roadway to top of
noise barrier wall, shall be limited to 425 cm.
3. Noise barrier wall thickness shall be 17.5 cm minimum
4. Two layers of reinforcing bars shall be specified in the cross section, with 3.8 cm cover,
minimum, over both faces as shown in the attached detail.
5. The vehicular collision force shall be based on the LRFD Table A13.2-1 for design forces
for traffic railing. The transverse force shall be applied horizontally at 1.0 m height above
deck.
Page 2 of 6
Seismic Dead Load =

Axf x D
Where:
A = Acceleration on coefficient from the Geotechnical Report
D = Dead load of the wall
f = Dead load coefficient see Table below
Dead Load Coefficient f
Dead load coefficient, exce t on brid es - monolithic connection 1.0
Dead load coefficient, on bridges - monolithic connection 2.5
Dead load coefficient for connection of recast wall to brid e barrier 8.0
Dead load coefficient, for connection of precast walls to retaining wall or 5.0
moment slab barriers
7. Joints for noise barrier wall placed on bridges and retaining walls shall be plumb.
8. AASHTO LRFD Bridge design specifications shall be used for the structural design of noise
barrier walls.
Noise barrier walls on bridges and retaining walls shall be considered special design and shall be
designed on a case-to-case basis.
The design requirements for precast wall panel connections to bridge and retaining wall barriers
shall be different for cast-in-place construction. Changing the noise barrier wall type from cast-
in-place to precast requires approval of the Bridge Design Engineer.
If base plate of barrier shall be attached to traffic railing/ parapet, the Contractor shall provide
structural calculations for railing/parapet due to loads induced by the addition of noise barrier to
be approved by the Engineer .. .r
615.2 Materials Requirements
All materials delivered to the construction site should be visually inspected for proper dimensions,
cracks, voids, surface defects, inconsistency in color and texture, and any other damage or
imperfections.
615.2.1 Noise Absorption Panels
Table 615.2.1.1 Materials for Noise Barrier Fix Type
Name Size Rty Unit Weight Weight Material (Qty.jm3) Cover

(kq/m) (kq.)
1. Acoustic Panel 1960x95x500 4 - - - -
2. Acoustic Panel Fix W5x16 8 - - =1.6mm, L=311mm -
Plate Bended Sprinq Plate
3. Post W5x16 1 23.60 49.84 A 36
4. Top Plate PL-6x185x190 1 47.10 1.66 A 36
5. Top Plate Fix Plate L-30x30x5x190 2 2.16 0.82 A 36
Hot Dip
6. Base Plate PL-23x240x360 1 219.80 18.99 A 36
Galvanized
7. RB Plate 1 PL-12x65x230 2 94.20 2.82 A 36
Coating
8. RB Plate 2 PL-12x65x95.5 4 94.20 2.34 A36
9. Acoustic Panel PL-6x40x50 2 47.10 0.19 A36
Fixinq Plate
Page 3 of 6
Name Size Qty Unit Weight Weight Material (Qty./m3) Cover

(kq/m) (kg.)
10. Bolt Unloosen Nut M8x25 4 - - SUS304 -
& Washer
11. Fall Prevention j2j6.3x8281 mm 1 - - Wire Rope Covered with
Wire Nylon
12. Under Cover Plate 1.6x270x160x1990 1 - - A 36 Hot Dip
13. Anchor Plate 022x650 2 - - ASTM A 490 Galvanized
Coating
Table 615.2.1.2 Materials for Noise Barrier Joint Type

Name Size Qty. Unit Weight Weight Material (Qty./m3) Cover
(kq/m) (kq.)
1.Acoustic Panel 1960x95x500 4 - - - -
2.Acoustic Panel Fix For W5x16 8 - - =1.6mm, L=311mm -
Plate Bended Sorinq Plate
3. Post W5x16 1 23.60 49.84 A36
4.Too Plate PL-6x185x190 1 47.10 1.66 A36
Hot Dip
5.Top Plate Fix Plate L-30x30x5x190 2 2.16 0.82 A 36
Galvanized
6.Base Plate PL-23x240x360 1 219.80 18.99 A 36
Coating
7.RB Plate 1 PL-12x65x230 2 94.20 2.82 A 36
8.RB Plate 2 PL-12x65x95.5 4 94.20 2.34 A 36
9. Acoustic Panel PL-6x40x50 2 47.10 0.19 A 36
Fixinq Plate
10. Bolt Unloosen Nut M8x25 4 - - Stainless Steel Plate -
& Washer
11. Fall Prevention 06.3x8281 mm 1 - - r Wire Rope Covered with
Wire Nylon
12. Under Cover Plate 1.6x270x160x199 1 - - A 36 Hot Dip
13. Anchor Bolt 022x650 2 - - ASTM A490 Galvanized
Coating
14. Joint Plate PL-125*2180,
SM400, 4pcs
HDZ-55
615.2.2 Inspection Window
Inspection window shall be placed at every streetlight pole for maintenance and are provided
with the material component as shown on the Plans.
Table 615.2.1.3 Inspection Window (1960x95x1000)

NO. KINDS MATERIALS
1. PL Hiqh Corrosion Resistant Hot-Dip Zinc Coated Steel Plate 3.2t
2. PL Hiqh Corrosion Resistant Hot Zinc Coated Steel Plate 1.6t
3. PL Hiah Corrosion Resistant Hot Zinc Coated Steel Plate 2.3t
9. Eye Shaped Rinq For M8 SS400
10. . PL Hiqh Corrosion Resistant Hot-Dip Zinc Coated Steel Plate 3.2t
Page 4 of 6
NO. KINDS MATERIALS

11. PL Hiqh Corrosion Resistant Hot-Dip Zinc Coated Steel Plate 3.2t
12-1
PL 55400 HDZ35: 6t
12-2
13. PL High Corrosion Resistant Hot Zinc Coated Steel Plate 1.6t
21. Front Panel Aluminum Alloy Sheet - A5052P, LOt Louver Finish
22. Sound Absorbing Polyester Fiber
Material
31. Front Panel Aluminum Alloy Sheet - A5052P, LOt, Louver Finish
32. Sound Absorbing Polyester Fiber
Material I-
34. B.N.W M12 x 30 : SUS304
35. Grip SUS304
Axle M12 x 32.5 : SUS304
Pulley SUS316
36.
Washer t= 1.0 Teflon Resin ®
M12 Nut SUS304
37. Latch Lock ZINC ALLOY
38. Chloroprene Rubber t= 2.0 x Ox30
39. Rivet SUS305
40. PL 55400 HDZ35: 9t
41. B.N.W M8 x 25 : SUS304
42-1
PL 55400 HDZ35:6t
42-2
43. Wire Rope <:p6.3x1678 NYLON COATED
44. Nut Washer Ml0: 55400
45. B.UN.W M8x15 : SUS304
Department Order No.1!I! Series of 2017
Page 5 of 6
615.2.3 Sound Absorption Panels
Sound absorption panels' minimum requirement shall be indicated on the Plans or in

accordance with Table 615.2.1.4 below:
Table 615.2.1.4 Minimum Requirements for the Sound Absorption Panels

Component of Noise Panel Minimum Performance Required
1. Front Panel Material Aluminum Alloy (Louver Finish)
2. Back Panel Material High Corrosion Resistant Hot-dip Zinc Coated (1.6 mm)
3. Sound Absorbing Material Polyester Fiber
4. Sound Absorption Ratio* More than 100% (400 Hz); more than 90% (1000 Hz)
5. Strength for Wind Load More than 2.4 kN/m2
6. Fall Prevention Wire Should be included
* Method for measurement of sound absorption coefficient in a reverberation should conform to the
acceptable standard indicated in the Plans or as approved by the Engineer.
Prior to construction, shop drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor including fabrication
details, handling/transportation, and construction procedures for all wall elements including
connections for approval by the Engineer.
Extra efforts should be made during construction stages as well as in the design stage to avoid
holes, slits or gaps, either with the adjoining panels, along the bottom edge or gaps for road
traffic signs, lighting poles, fire hydrants, construction joints or expansion joints.
In most cases, recess should be formed along the barrier to accommodate the street furniture
as far as possible.
When the installation of a noise barrier interferences with the access to existing, or proposed
fire hydrants, the noise barrier installation should include fire hose access openings and
associated identification signs. Location and demand for these openings to be established in
cooperation with local fire department.
615.3.1 Workmanship
The noise barrier panel shall exhibit good workmanship and be free of burrs, cracks, or other
objectionable defects, which would adversely affect the barrier's performance or serviceability.
Panels assembled together with caulked joint shall not permit light leaks through horizontal
joints.
All damaged panels will be rejected either at the fabrication shop or on the construction site
even after installation.
The posts shall be set vertically with levelling nuts and shall be fixed by double nuts to avoid
loosening due to traffic vibration. When the galvanized casting is damaged, galvanized
painting repair shall be done.
Department Order No. Wf4 Series of 2017
Page 6 of 6
615.3.2 Warranty and Maintenance
The material and installation of the noise barrier system, including landscaping materials, shall
be guaranteed for a minimum period of five (5) years from the date of initial Certification and
Performance Acceptance. A final unconditional warranty inspection shall be prepared by the
Engineer after five (5) years from the date of original Initial Certification and Performance
Acceptance of the barrier to certify that there are no deficiencies/ defects of any component
of the barrier system; this includes but shall not necessarily limited to grading, berm, posts,
panels, landscape materials and soil condition.
The quantities to be measured and paid for shall be the actual lengths of noise barriers
installed and materials test results accepted by the Engineer.
The accepted quantities measured as prescribed in Section 615.4 - Method of Measurement

shall be paid at the Contract unit price as shown in the Bill of Quantities which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing, installing and all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
- -r
615 (1) Noise Barrier (H = 2.0 m) Linear Meter
615 (2) Noise Barrier Lump Sum
Reference:
1. FHWA Highway Noise Barrier Design Handbook (Final Report, February 2000)
2. DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways, Bridges and Airports, Volume II, 2012 Edition.
a. Item 403 - Metal Structures
b. Item 409 - Welded Structural Steel.
3. Comments from Different DPWH Offices
a. Bureau of Construction
b. Bureau of Design
c. Bureau of Quality and Safety
d. UPMQ-RMC2
e. Bureau of Maintenance
fi.?1/. (5 .L:>""~
''<' jl'~ .]A)!,?
MANILA
Il5 DEe201~
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT Amendments to DPWH Standard

) Specification for ITEM 706 -
147 )
)
CONCRETE, CLAY, PLASTIC AND
FIBER PIPE (Item 706.14.2
Structured Wall Pipe - High Density
Polyethylene Pipe)
In order to ensure uniformity in the application/ adoption of the Pay Items of Work to be
used/ adopted by those who are involved in the preparation of the Design Plans and
Quantities, Program of Works (POW) and Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC) for
Infrastructure Projects Nationwide, and to provide material requirements to the
aforementioned expansion joints, the attached DPWH Standard Specifications for
Item 706.14.2 Structured Wall Pipe - High Density Polyethylene Pipe are hereby
prescribed, for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
This Standard Specifications form part of the DPWH Standard Specifications for Highways,
Bridges and Airports, Volume II and now included in the Project and Contract Management
Application (PCMA).
. .r
~~---
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
14.1.2 MLL/RGT
111111111111111111111I11111I111111111
WIN7U01550
Item 706 - Concrete, Clay, Plastic and Fiber
Pipe
706.1 Non-Reinforced Concrete Pipe
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86M (ASTM C 14M), Standard
Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe for the
specified internal diameters, wall thickness, length, straightness and strength classes.
706.2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 170M (ASTM C 76), Standard
Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe or
AASHTO M 242M (ASTM C 655), Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load
Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe for specified internal diameters, wall thickness, length,
reinforcement and strength classes.
Reinforced elliptically shaped concrete pipe conforming to the requirements of

AASHTOM 207M (ASTMC 507), Standard Specification for Reinforced ConcreteArch Culvert,
Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe shall be furnished where specified. Unless otherwise specified,
pipe wall design and use of elliptical reinforced concrete arch culvert pipe shall meet the
requirements of AASHTOM 206M (ASTM C 506), Standard Specification for Concrete Arch
Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe
Precast reinforced concrete and sections shall conform to the requirements of the cited
specifications to the extent which they apply.
. f
706.3 Perforated Concrete Pipe
This pipe intended to be used for underdrainage shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTOM 175M (ASTMC 444M), Standard Specificationfor Perforated Concrete Pipefor the
specified types, internal diameters and slot length and spacing.
706.4 Concrete, Clay Drain and Perforated Clay Drain Tile
The concrete drain tile with internal diameter from 100 mm to 900 mm that are intended to
be used for surface and subsurface drainage shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTOM 178M(ASTMC 412), Standard Specificationfor ConcreteDrainTile for the specified
internal diameter, wall thickness, length, shape, strength and absorption.
Clay drain and perforated clay drain tile shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 4, Standard Specification for Clay Drain Tile and Perforated Clay Drain Tile for the
specified sizes and strengths.
706.5 Porous Concrete Pipe
This non-reinforced concrete pipe for use in underdrains shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 176M (ASTM C 654), Standard Specification for Porous Concrete Pipe for the
specified internal diameters, strength and porosity or rate of infiltration tests.
Department Order NO.l5:f:f:rSeries of 2017
DPWH Standard Specifications for Item 706, Concrete, Clay, Plastic and Fiber Pipe
ANNEX Page 2 of 4
706.6 Vitrified Clay Lined Reinforced Concrete Pipe

Designs for fully lined or half lined pipes of the specified strength classes shall be submitted
by the manufacturer for approval by the Engineer. The applicable requirements of
AASHTO M 170M (ASTM C 76), Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm
Drain, and Sewer Pipe shall govern. Uner or liner elements, shall be clay of first class quality,
sound, thoroughly and perfectly burned without warps, cracks or other imperfections and fully
and smoothly salt glazed.
706.7 Perforated Vitrified Clay Pipe
This pipe intended to be used for underdrainage shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength,
and Perforated for pipe with full circular cross-section, for the specified diameters and strength
class.
706.8 Vitrified Clay Pipe
This pipe intended to be used for the conveyance of sewage and storm water shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM C 700, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra
Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated for pipe with full circular cross-section, for the
specified diameters and strength class.
Pipe and fittings for sewers of 150 mm to 600 mm diameter shall be extra strength vitrified
clay pipe conforming to the applicable requirements.
706.9 Cradle Invert Clay Pipe
This pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTMrC 700, Standard Specification
for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated and
ASTM C 1208M, Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Joints for Use in
Microtunneling, Sliplining, Pipe Bursting, and Tunnels.
706.10 Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe
Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
706.11 Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe
Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
706.12 Reinforced Concrete D-load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe
Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
706.13 Plastic and Polyethylene Corrugated Drainage Pipe or Tubing
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 252, Standard Specification for
Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe.
Department Order No . .J.!B., Series of 2017
ANNEX Page 3 of 4
706.14 High Density Polyethylene Pipe
706.14.1 Solid Wall Pressure Pipes
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 714, Standard Specification for
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter and shall be based upon
the DIPS, outside diameter sizing system. The dimension ratio (DR) of pipe to be installed
shall also be either shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
706.14.2 Structured Wall Pipe
Thermoplastic pipes and fittings with a structured wall and smooth inside surface, including
different jointing systems for gravity and low pressure applications, such as storm drain,
sewer,and sea outfall, with a large diameter of ONliD 250 to ON/ID 4000mm,inside diameter
based polyethylene (PE) pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F 894, Standard
Specification for Polyethylene (PE) large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe.
706.15 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains
and Sewers
These sections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 259M, Standard Specification
for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Section for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers and
ASTM C 1433, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections
for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers.
706.16 Acrylonibile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Composite Sewer Pipe

r
This pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 264 (ASTM D 2680), Standard
Specification for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) and Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Composite Sewer Piping.
706.17 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Drain Pipe
This pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 278, Standard
Specification for Class PS46 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe or AASHTO M 304, Standard
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Profile Wall Drain Pipe and Fittings Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter, ASTM D 2729, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings and ASTM F 679, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
706.17.1 General Requirements
A. Pipes
1. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
a. The designated sizes on the drawings refer to outside diameters.

Department Order No. m Series of 2017
ANNEX Page 4 of 4
a.1. For sanitary uPVC pipes and fittings sizes 57 mm up to 160 mm shall conform to
AASHTO M 278 or AASHTO M 304 or ASTM D 2729.
a.2. For uPVC sizes 160 mm and up shall conform to ASTM F 679, Standard
Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
B. Joints
1. All joints shall be elastomeric ring and should be machine installed fixed seal made of
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) rubber bonded with stiff polypropylene
ring unless approved otherwise by the Engineer.
2. Double sockets or slip on sockets may be used adjacent structures or special fittings.
3. Solvent welded joints may be used for buried fittings if assembled in the
manufacturer's workshop under the Engineer's supervision. Solvent shall be as per the
pipe manufacturer's recommendation.
4. Solvent or welded fittings may be used for exposed piping, if approved by the Engineer.
Solvent cemented joints shall be allowed provided that the designed strength can be
attained for at least 24 hours and shall be subjected to internal pressure of 0.17 MPa
using water as the test medium within one (1) hour. Examine the joint for leakage .
. f
References:
1. ASTM F894, Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile WaR Sewer
and Drain Pipe.
2. ASTM F 679, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity
Sewer Pipe and fittings.
3. DENR Administrative Order No. 2000 - 02 January 06, 2000 (Chemical Control Order for
Asbestos.)
4. DIN 16961 - Thermoplastics Pipes and fittings with Profiled Wall and Smooth Pipe Inside.
89~y./) ,,1I1~
1'2, /6,.J,l)q

MANILA

Item 1110 - Nurse Call System
NO. 148 ~
)
Series of 201~ I'
n.,•.
implementation of various infrastructure projects. As such, there is a need to set a standard
specification for the proper installation and connection of network cabling system. The
attached DPWH Standard Specification for Nurse Call System, Item 1110 is
hereby prescribed for the guidance and compliance of all concerned.
This specification shall form part of the on-going revision of the DPWH Standard Specifications
for Public Work Structures - Buildings, Ports and Harbors, Flood Control and Drainage
~ v::::---
MA~K,A. VILLAR
SecretarY
14.1.2 FET/RGT
1111111111111111I11111111111111111111
WIN7U01551
DPWH STANDARD SPECIFICATION
FOR ITEM 1110 - NURSE CALL SYSTEM
1110.1 Description
This Item shall consist of furnishing and installation of Nurse Call System, equipment and
associated components to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation in health
care facilities in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
1110.2. Definition
1110.2.1 Nurse call System
Nurse call system primarily provides means for a patient to signal the nursing staff that
assistance is needed. Additionally, nurse call system shall provide means for communications
between staff members to serve administrative as well as emergency signaling
requirements.
1110.2.2 Types of Systems
1110.2.2.1 Tone Visual Nurse Call System (TVS)
A tone visual nurse call provides audible signaling and visual annunciation of patient calls.
Two (2) call priority levels are pOSSible (normal calls and emergency calls from toilet
emergency stations). Tone visual systems are used primarily in hospital ancillary areas such
as physical therapy, radiology, hydrotherapy and emergency departments or other
treatment areas where patients may be left unattended and where voice communication to
a central location is not required by the staff.
1110.2.2.2 Audiovisual Nurse call System (AVS)
An audiovisual nurse call system provides audible signaling, visual annunciation, patient-to-
staff communication, staff-to-staff communication, and intercommunication between master
station annunciators.
Audiovisual systems can be divided into two (2) basic groups: basic hardwired systems and
microprocessor-controlled systems. Microprocessor-controlled systems can provide more
levels of calls on the system, can be programmed for swing room and call transfer, and have
reduced cabling requirements over hardwired systems.
1110.3.1 General
The nurse call system shall be audiovisual type or tone visual type. All nurse call equipment,
conduits, switching devices, wires and cables shall conform to the Philippine Electrical Code
(PEC), ANSI jUL 1069, Safety Standard for Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment and
the Manufacturer's recommendations.
All nurse call equipment shall be from an authorized Manufacturer to maintain compatibility
of equipment in a system.
Department Order No. I/lf . Series of 2017
DPWH Standard Specification for Item 1110 - Nurse Call System
Page 2 of 5
1110.3.2 Area Control Unit (ACU)
The area control unit (ACU) shall enclose all equipment for automatic switching, storage,
logic, signaling, circuit· protection system and interconnection circuitry required to provide
specified nurse call functions and shall be mounted in a suitable cabinet complete with
hinged locking cover.
All equipment shall be completely solid state, using integrated circuits, and other semi-
conductor devices for all service functions and shall provide bi-directional data and audio
between associated stations and to the nurse call network.
The switching, storing, amplifying and signaling circuitry shall be mounted on modular
printed circuit boards and contain the following:
1. Solid state flasher circuitry and tone generators to provide a source of intermittent visual
and audible annunciation.
2. Solid state audio amplifier with independent talk/listen controls. Voice switching to be
performed by a transistorized switching circuit. Sensitivity control to be provided to set
level of operation.
3. Automatic Voltage Regulator
Power supplies shall be provided for each control unit equipment. Power supplies shall be
designed for continuous duty operation, overload protected, filtered and regulated so that
emergency AC supply transients do not affect system operation and shall be in accordance
with the Philippine Electrical Code (PEe).
1110.3.3 Nurse Call Console
The nurse call system shall be designed to have one (1) or more UL 1069 listed LED nurse
call consoles. It shall have three (3) panel sizes available; 28, 56, and 112 zones. Each zone
shall have a dedicated RBG LED. The nurse call console shall be wall mounted or desk
mounted. The construction must be powder coated steel in white or ivory.
The nurse console shall have a customizable template for names and/or room numbers to
identify the calling locations. There shall be a built-in adjustable sounder with a three (3)-
position switch for high, low and mute tone. The tone silence shall be momentary and re-
activate automatically with another call.
The nurse call console shall have a LED power indicator and a system power loss LED and
sounder for power supervision.
1110.3.4 Patient Bed Station

The patient bed station shall be pendant type wall/panel recessed or surface mounted
station for patient/staff communications. Stations shall be for single patient use only, with
privacy mode in addition to the standard system features. A receptacle on the station shall
accept a cordset with a single prong plug or multi-purpose controls as indicated.
A cordset, pendant control, shall be provided at each patient bed station, with the required
operational capabilities as indicated.
Deparbnent Order No. 142 . Series of 2017
Page 3 of 5
1110.3.5 Corridor Dome Lights and Zone Lights
Corridor dome lights and zone lights shall either be wall or ceiling mounted, with colored
lens or bulbs as indicated.
The lenses shall be multi-section with translucent plastic lenses with opaque partitions
separating the sections.
LED indicators shall be capable of producing a minimum of six (6) configurable colors per
the following schedule and shall be customizable:
1. Flashing (Slow) White - Routine Call

2. Flashing (Fast) White - Priority Call
3. Red - Emergency Pull Cord Station, Cord Out, Staff Emergency
1110.3.6 System Wiring
All wiring shall comply with the same standards as the nurse call equipment and with the
recommendations of the system Manufacturer. All wiring shall be free from shorts and
faults.
Wires and cables shall be insulated to prevent contact with signal or current carrying
conductors and shall be 99.9% shielded.

.f
1110.4.1 General
Installation of all Nurse Call System equipment shall comply with the governing laws, codes
and standards such as the Philippine Electrical Code (PEe) and the ANSI /UL 1069, Safety
Standard for Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment and shall also be in accordance
with the instructions/recommendations of the system Manufacturer.
Install all system components and hardware according to Manufacturers' instruction as well
as all applicable local codes and standards.
1. The system shall be designed and installed so that the installation, interfacing,
integration, combining, and/or consolidation of equipment actually employed does not
produce any undesirable visual or aural effects such as signal distortions, noise pulses,
glitches, audio or video hum bars, transients, ghosting, and the like.
2. All system components shall be mounted in the locations indicated on the Plans.
3. Enclosures shall be installed plumb and square. Each shall be permanently attached to
the building structure and held firmly in place.
4. Nurse call cabinets shall be mounted to house all required components.
5. Proper bend radius is maintained for each wire or cable as specified by the Manufacturer.
6. Wires or cables used in assembling consoles, panels, equipment cabinets and racks shall
be formed into harnesses that are bundled and tied. Harnessed wires or cables shall be
Department Order No. /." • Series of 2017
Page 4 of 5
combed straight, formed and dressed in either a vertical or horizontal relationship to

equipment, controls, components or terminations.
7. Wires and cables shall enter each equipment enclosure, console, cabinet, or rack in such
a manner that all doors or access panels can be opened and closed without removal or
disruption of the cables.
8. All nurse call wiring shall be continuous with no allowance for splicing.
9. All nurse call wiring shall be run in its own dedicated conduit and raceways.
10. Backup power supplies shall be installed in the area control unit (ACU) or in a separate
metal cabinet equipped with a hinged door and lock. If a separate cabinet is installed, it
shall be provided adjacent to the ACU. Where the backup power supply is already self-
contained in a housing, the unit shall be mounted adjacent to the respective equipment
cabinet. In all cases, backup power supplies shall be permanently mounted. Each backup
power supply shall be provided with full electrical supervision as described herein.
1110.4.3 Personnel Qualification
The installation of nurse call system, including wiring, cable termination and, testing shall be
done by a certified installer under the supervision of a duly registered Professional Electrical
Engineer (PEE) and / or certified designer for Nurse Call System.
The installer shall be certified and experienced in the proper installation and testing of nurse
call system and trained by the system manufacturer.
1110.5 Testing
All wires, cables and equipment shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and for
verification of performance under installed conditions. All installed equipment and wiring
shall be verified useable by the Contractor prior to system acceptance.
The work under this Item shall be measured by lump sum actually placed and installed
nurse call system as indicated on the Plans. System components shall be measured by set.
The quantity as determined in Section 1110.6 shall be paid for at unit price stipulated in the
Contract's Bill of Quantities. The payment shall constitute the full compensation for
furnishing all the necessary materials, providing necessary equipment and tools in installing
the Nurse Call System, labor cost and all the incidental expenses necessary to complete the
work.
Department Order No. I¥f. Series of 2017
Page 5 of 5
Pay Item
Number
1110 (2) Area Control Unit (ACU) Set
1110 (4) Patient Bed Station Set
1110 (5) Corridor Dome Lights and Zone Lights Set
References:
1. Philippine Electrical Code (PEC)

2. Underwriters Laboratory
ANSI /UL 1069 - Safety Standard for Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment
3. IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Systems in Health Care Facilities
4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities
5. Internet
https://www.nema.org/
~~ (oJ .LJ,.,..h
Republic of the Philippines /.2 ~.t~_.lIJ~

Bonifacio Drive, Port Area
Manila
2 1 DEe 2011,
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Guidelines for the Determination

) Of Appropriate Price Offer for
NO.
151 _
)
)
Outstanding Right-of-Way
(ROW) Claims
Series of 201~ J2.<lL.,'1
In line with the continuing efforts of the Department of Public Works and Highways to
streamline its operations for a more expeditious implementation of infrastructure projects, as
well as to effect the payment of outstanding Right-of-Way (ROW) claims, pertinent portions
of Section 5 of Republic Act (R.A.) No. 10752, otherwise known as An Act Facilitating the
Acquisition of Right-Of-Way Site or Location for National Government Infrastructure Projects,
is hereby reiterated, viz.
SECTION 5. Rules on Negotiated Sale. - The implementing agency may offer to

acquire, through negotiate sale, the right--of-way site or location for a national
government infrastructure project, under the following rules:
(a) The implementing agency shall offer to the property owner

concerned, as compensation price, the sum of:
(1) The current market value of the land, .r
(2) The replacement cost of structures and improvements therein;

and
(3) The current market value of crops and trees therein.
To determine the appropriate price offer, the implementing agency may engage
the services of a government financial institution with adequate experience in
property appraisa~ or an independent property appraiser accredited by the Bangko
Sentral ng Pilipinas (SSP) or a professional association of appraisers recognized by
the SSP to be procured by the implementing agency under the provisions of
Republic Act No. 9184, otherwise known as the "Government Procurement Reform
ActO and its implementing rules and regulations pertaining to consulting services.
If the property owner does not accept the price offer, the implementing agency
shall initiate expropriation proceedings pursuant to Section 6 hereof.
The property owner is given thirty (30) days to decide whether or not to accept
the offer as payment for his property. Upon refusal or failure of the property owner
to accept such offer or fails anchor refuses to submit the documents necessary for
payments, the implementing agency shall immediately initiate expropriation
proceedings as provided in Section 6 herein.
xxx
The provisions of subparagraph (a) herein shall also apply to outstanding daims
for right-of-way payments, except that the amount to be offered shall be the
Page 2 of 2
price at the time of taking of the property, including legal interest until
fully paid.
For further guidance of all implementing units, pursuant to the above-quoted Section S(a) and
the last paragraph of the same Section, all concerned implementing units are required to make
an offer to the property owner(s) concerned, as compensation price, the sum of:
(1) The market value of the land at the time of taking of the property;
(2) The replacement cost of structures and improvements therein at the time of
taking of the property;
(3) The current market value of crops and trees therein, at the time of taking of
the property; and,
(4) Legal interest.
To determine the marj<et value of the land, the replacement cost of structures and
improvements, and the current market value of crops and trees - all reckoned at the time of
taking - the implementing unit of this Department may engage the services of a government
financial institution with adequate experience in property appraisal, or an independent
property appraiser accredited by the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (BSP), or a professional
association of appraisers recognized by the BSP to be procured by the implementing unit
under the provisions of Republic Act No. 9184, otherwise known as the "Government
Procurement Reform Act," and its implementing rules and regulations which apply to
consulting services.
In addition to the foregoing, the computation of legal interest pursuant to BSP Monetary Board
Circular No. 799, s. 2013, shall be six (6) percent annually and shall be computed as follows:
No. of months since Actual Possession

Total Legal Interest = Appropriate Price Offer x .. r 12 x 6%
~~
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary \~

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN? A03181
VOLUME II

A.1.1 (1) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (2) Lump Sum
Basis)
A.1.1 (7) Month
A.1.1 (8) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (9) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (10) Month
Basis)
A.1.1 (11) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (12) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (13) Lump Sum
A.1.1 (14) Lump Sum
Engineer
A.1.1 (16) Month
Engineer
Page 1
VOLUME II

A.1.1 (17) Month
the Engineer
A.1.1 (18) Month
Engineer
A.1.2 (1) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (2) Month
A.1.2 (3) Each
Engineer
A.1.2 (4) Month
A.1.2 (5) Month
A.1.2 (6) Month
A.1.2 (8) Month
Basis (12 Seater)
A.1.2 (9) Month
Vehicle (12-seater)
A.1.3 (1) Month
Engineer
A.1.3 (2) Lump Sum
the Engineer
A.1.3 (3) Month
the Engineer
A.1.3 (4) Month
to the Engineer
A.1.4 Photographs
A.1.4 (1) Provision of Progress Photographs Month
A.1.5 (2) Each
for the Engineer
Page 2
VOLUME II

B.1 Lump sum
for Contractor
B.7 Occupational Safety and Health Program Month
B.8 Traffic Management Month
B.10 Dayworks PS
PART C - EARTHWORK
Page 3
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix


Page 4
VOLUME II
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
Page 5
VOLUME II


g

Granular Coarse
Material
Page 6
VOLUME II




Page 7
VOLUME II



Salvaged Soil
Aggregate

Salvaged Soil
Aggregate

Salvaged Soil
Aggregate

Page 8
VOLUME II

Salvaged Soil
Aggregate





Page 9
VOLUME II

303 (4) Asphalt Cement Pen. Gr. Tonne

304 (2) Asphalt Cement Pen. Grade Tonne
Page 10
VOLUME II


back Asphalt
back Asphalt
back Asphalt
back Asphalt

306 (2) Tonne
Course

Page 11
VOLUME II



Laid
Laid
Laid
310 (2) Bituminous Concrete Surface Binder Course, Hot-Laid 50 mm Square Meter
Replacement
Mastic
Mastic
Mastic
Mastic
Page 12
VOLUME II

311 (1) b Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Unreinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 13
VOLUME II
311 (2) b Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (Reinforced) 0.20 m thick 14 days Square Meter
Page 14
VOLUME II
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
with Wire Mesh)
Page 15
VOLUME II










Page 16
VOLUME II



ITEM 400 – PILING
Page 17
VOLUME II

Page 18
VOLUME II

Page 19
VOLUME II

Page 20
VOLUME II

401 (1) a Metal Railing Steel Meter


403 (1) Structural Steel, furnished Kilogram
403 (2) Structural Steel, fabricated Kilogram
403 (3) Structural Steel, erected Kilogram
403 (4) Structural Steel, furnished, and fabricated Kilogram
403 (5) Structural Steel, furnished, fabricated, and erected Kilogram


Page 21
VOLUME II


Page 22
VOLUME II
Page 23
VOLUME II
406 (2) a Prestressed Concrete T-Girder Lump Sum
406 (2) b Prestressed Concrete Box Girder Lump Sum

Page 24
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix



Items.

ITEM 411 – PAINT

Page 25
VOLUME II

ITEM 413 - PREFORMED SPONGE RUBBER AND CORK JOINT EXPANS ION FILLERS FOR CONCRETE PAVING AND STRUCTURAL CONSTRUCTION
413 (1) a Preformed Sponge Rubber Joint Expansion Cubic Meter
413 (1) b Preformed Cork Joint Expansion Cubic Meter

ITEM 415 – ELASTOMERIC, HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANT WITH SINGLE-SIZED AGGREGATES FOR BRIDGE EXPANSION JOINTS
415 (1) Cubic Meter
ITEM 416 – CARBON FIBER SHEET AND GLASS FIBER

ITEM 416A – CARBON FIBER PLATE


Page 26
VOLUME II

417 (1) b Bearing Devices Rubble Bearing Each
High Dumping Rubble
417 (1) c Bearing Devices Each
Bearing
ITEM 418 – ASPHALTIC PLUG JOINTS (APJ) FOR BRIDGES

418 (1) Asphaltic Plug Joints (APJ) for Bridges Each



Page 27
VOLUME II



Page 28
VOLUME II
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
pipe
610 mm dia., half-
silted
760 mm dia., half-
silted
910 mm dia., half-
silted
1070 mm dia., half-
silted
1220 mm dia., half-
silted
1520 mm dia., half-
silted

Page 29
VOLUME II





509 (1) Sheet Piles Timber Furnished and Driven Linear Meter
509 (2) a Sheet Piles Steel Slope Protection Linear Meter
509 (2) b Sheet Piles Steel Cofferdamming Linear Meter
509 (3) a Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished Linear Meter
509 (3) b Sheet Piles Concrete Driven Linear Meter
509 (3) c Sheet Piles Concrete Furnished and Driven Linear Meter

Page 30
VOLUME II





Page 31
VOLUME II






Page 32
VOLUME II


1000±50 high,
500mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
350mm depth (min)
1000±50 high,
500mm depth (min)
602 (6) Cast-in-place Guide posts Precast Each

Page 33
VOLUME II

603 (3) a1 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post W-Beam Linear Meter
603 (3) a2 Metal Guardrail (Metal Beam) Including Post Thrie-Beam Linear Meter
Eccentric Loader
Terminal (ELT)


Sharp Turn L or R
Sharp Turn L or R
Sharp Turn L or R
Reverse Turn L or R
Reverse Turn L or R
Reverse Turn L or R
Page 34
VOLUME II
Curve L or R
Curve L or R
Curve L or R
Winding Road L or R
Winding Road L or R
Hairpin Bend L or R
Hairpin Bend L or R
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Road
Page 35
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Road
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Junction Signs
Staggered Side Road
Junction L or R
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Intersection
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Page 36
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
Runabout Ahead
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Junction
Page 37
VOLUME II
Intersection and
Junction
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Merging
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Intersection and
Cross
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Signals Ahead
Page 38
VOLUME II
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Advance Warning of
Signs Give Way Sign
Ahead
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Road Width Sign
Narrow Bridge
Narrows
Narrows
Page 39
VOLUME II

Narrows
Narrows
Narrows
Narrows
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Width Sign End
Divided Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
Opening Bridge
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Uneven Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Page 40
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Hump
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Descent
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Steep Climb
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Spill Way
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Flood
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Page 41
VOLUME II
Road Obstacle Signs

Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Slippery Road
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Animal Crossing
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Road Obstacle Signs
Aircraft
Crossing Ahead

Crossing Ahead
Signs Slow Down
Pedestrian Crossing
Ahead
Page 42
VOLUME II

Ped Xing
Crossing
Crossing
Crossing


Position

without signal

without signal

without signal
Page 43
VOLUME II

with signal

with signal

with signal
Signs Alternative
Railway Crossing
Position
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
Advisory Speed
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
On Side Road
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … m
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Page 44
VOLUME II
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
Distance … km
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
When Wet
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Blind
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Aged
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Supplementary Signs
Playground
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
School
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Supplementary Signs
Disabled
Page 45
VOLUME II
Other Warning Signs

CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
LOW CLEARANCE
Other Warning Signs
Prone Area
Other Warning Signs
Aksidente Dito
Other Warning Signs
Traffic Ahead
Other Warning Signs
Other Warning Signs
Weighbridge Ahead
Priority Signs Left

Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
Page 46
VOLUME II

RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
TURNS; Disc Type
Direction Signs ONE
WAY; Disc Type
RIGHT; Disc Type
SPLIT; Disc Type
Direction Signs ALL
TRAFFIC; Disc Type
Page 47
VOLUME II
Direction Signs
Disc Type
Direction Signs TWO
WAY; Disc Type
Direction Signs NO
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ONE
x 750 mm
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs ALL
450 x 750 mm
Direction Signs
MERGING TRAFFIC;
mm
TWO WAY
TRAPIKO
TURN RIGHT
TURN LEFT
TURN RIGHT
TURN LEFT
Page 48
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Page 49
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Page 50
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Entry for Cars
Prohibitive or
Entry for Jeepneys
Prohibitive or
Entry for Bicycles
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Entry for Tricycles
Prohibitive or
Entry for Buses
Prohibitive or
Entry for Trucks
Prohibitive or
Trailer
Prohibitive or
Prohibitive or
Vehicle
Page 51
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Entry for Pushcarts
Prohibitive or
Overpass
Prohibitive or
Pedxing
Prohibitive or
tumawid gamitin ang
Overpass
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Right Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Page 52
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
605 (2) o4 Regulatory Signs 600 x 1000 mm R3-14 PB Each
Left Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
U Turn
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Prohibition of
Overtaking
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Page 53
VOLUME II
Prohibitive or
Restrictive Signs
Overtaking; Bawal
Lumusot
Speed Signs Speed
Speed Signs Speed

Speed Signs Speed

Speed Signs Speed

restriction Signs
restriction Signs
restriction Signs
restriction Signs
Speed Signs Speed
Restriction Signs
Parking Signs No
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
Parking (Disc)
Parking Signs No
Worded) (Plate)
Parking Signs No
Worded) (Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Page 54
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs No
(Plate)
Parking Signs
Meter Parking
Parking Signs
Hour Parking
Signs; Loading Zone

Unloading Zone
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
Waiting Signs
Parking Signs No
Signs
Parking Signs No
Signs
Page 55
VOLUME II
Parking Signs No
Loading/Unloading
Within Red-Painted
Curb
Parking Signs No
Stopping Anytime
Parking Signs No
Signs; BUS Stop
Parking Signs No
Signs; PUJ Stop
Parking Signs No
Signs; Bus-PUJ Stop
Block Intersection
Parking Signs Right
Broken White Lines
Miscellaneous Signs
Audible Warning
Device
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Restriction Signs
Page 56
VOLUME II
Miscellaneous Signs
Use Seat Belt Sign
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Pedestrian Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Crossing
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Bike Lane Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Miscellaneous Signs
Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Advance Direction
Signs Stack Signs
Page 57
VOLUME II
Advance Direction
Direction Signs
Advance Direction
Direction Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Signs
Town Name and
Signs Town Name
Town Name and

Signs Province Name
Town Name and
Signs Geographic
Feature
Page 58
VOLUME II
Town Name and

Signs Local
Government Boundary
Center 2km
Service Signs
Weighbridge Station
and Restrooms
or Cafes
Left 300m
Center
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Tourist Information
Signs
Route Markers Route
Number
Page 59
VOLUME II

Asian Highway Route
Markers
Asian Highway Route
Markers
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway Approach
Signs
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Information Signs
Prohibited on
Expressway
Expressway
Charges (Advance
Information)
Expressway
Direction Signs
Advance Exit Signs
distance
Advance Exit Signs
Advance Exit with
Distance plus RIGHT
LANE
Page 60
VOLUME II
Advance Exit Signs

Advance (NEXT EXIT)
Expressway Exit
Expressway Exit
EXIT…..KM
Expressway Exit
Expressway Exit
Numbered exit
Expressway Service
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
Lane 2km
Expressway Service
Signs Rest Area 2km
Expressway Service
Signs Rest Area
Expressway Service
2km
Expressway Service
2km
Expressway Service
Exit
Expressway Service
exit
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY 1 Km
Page 61
VOLUME II
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY 2 Km
End of Expressway
START EXPRWAY
End of Expressway
END EXPRWAY
Ahead
Gates
Toll Signs Pay Toll
Ahead
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Lane Ends …..m
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Ends Merge Left
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Merge Left
Page 62
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Brakes
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Reduced Speed Now
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Speed Limit Sign
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Minimum Speed Limit
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Page 63
VOLUME II
Expressway Traffic
Instruction and
Regulatory Signs
Supplementary Signs
USE OVERPASS
Supplementary Signs
CROSSING
Supplementary Signs
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
TRUCK USE LOW GEAR
Supplementary Signs
CHECK BRAKES
Signs REDUCE SPEED
RED SIGNAL
WITH CARE
ANYTIME WITH CARE
Signs DETOUR FOR
HIGH VEHICLES (L or
R)
Page 64
VOLUME II
Signs DETOUR FOR
R)
PEDESTRIANS
ON RED SIGNAL
USE RIGHT LANE
Signs MABAGAL NA
SASAKYAN MAMALAGI
SA KANAN
Signs TRAK AT BUS
MALUBAN KUNG
LULUSOT
ROAD
605 (5) b13 Traffic Instruction Signs 900mm X 600 mm S2-8B Signs NO THROUGH Each
ROAD
Signs ROAD CLOSED
Page 65
VOLUME II
(TWO) LANE
TRUCKS and BUSES
One-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers
Two-Way Hazard
Markers

Premixed
Reflectorized
Premixed
Reflectorized
Reflectorized
Thermoplastic
Reflectorized
Thermoplastic

Page 66
VOLUME II





612(2) Square Meter
Yellow
Page 67
VOLUME II

612(3) Square Meter
Pavement Markings


ITEM 620 – CHEVRON SIGNS


Page 68
VOLUME II


623 (1) Local Controller Footing TSC1 Unit
623 (2) a Footing TSC2 Type A (w/pedestal) Unit
623 (2) b Footing TSC3 Type A (w/o pedestal) Unit
623 (2) c Footing TSC4 Type B Unit
623 (2) d Footing TSC5 Type C Unit
623 (2) e Footing TSC5 Type D Unit
623 (3) a Handhole TSC6 Type B Unit
623 (3) b Handhole TSC7 Type A Unit
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (4) a Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC8 Linear Meter
Pavement
P.E Pipe Concrete
623 (4) b Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC9 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (4) c Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC10 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (4) d Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC11 Linear Meter
Pavement
623 (4) e Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC12 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
623 (4) f Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC13 Linear Meter
Sidewalk
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (4) g Trenching - Double Barrel 100mm dia. TSC14 Linear Meter
Surface
P.E. Pipe on Earth
623 (4) h Trenching - Single Barrel 100mm dia. TSC15 Linear Meter
Surface
623 (5) Concrete Bollard TSC16 Unit
623 (6) Protection Cage for Local Controller TSC17 Unit
623 (7) Traffic Signal Flasher Controller TSE1 Unit
Page 69
VOLUME II
623 (10) a1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE7 Amber Lens Set
623 (10) a2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE8 Red Lens Set
623 (10) a3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 200mm 1 Aspect TSE9 Green Lens Set
623 (10) c1 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE15 Amber Lens Set
623 (10) c2 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE16 Red Lens Set
623 (10) c3 Traffic Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 1 Aspect TSE17 Green Lens Set
623 (11) Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSE23 Set
623 (12) Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TSE24 Set
Type A Mast Arm 4m
623 (16) a Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE37 Unit
outreach
Page 70
VOLUME II
623 (16) b Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE38 Type B Unit
623 (16) c Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE39 Type C Unit
623 (16) d Supply & Install Traffic Signal Pole TSE40 Type D Unit
623 (18) Loop Detector Cable TSE46 Meter
623 (19) Loop Feeder Cable TSE47 Meter
623 (20) Loop Sealant TSE48 Pail
623 (21) Splicing Kit TSE49 Piece
623 (22) Grounding Cable TSE50 Meter
623 (23) Electricity/Power Supply Cable TSE51 Meter
623 (24) Main Circuit Breaker TSE52 Piece
623 (25) Mounting Strap TSE53 Roll
623 (26) Mounting Buckle TSE54 Box
623 (27) Terminal Board (20P) TSE55 Piece
623 (28) Terminal Lugs TSE56 Piece
623 (29) Grounding Rod & Connector TSE57 Set
623 (31) Install Pedestrian Signal Head, LED-type 300mm 2 Aspect TSI11 Set
623 (32) Install Pedestrian Pushbutton Assembly TSI12 Set
623 (33) TSI13 Unit
Commissioning
623 (34) Loop Detector Installation TSI14 Slot
623 (35) TSI15 Site
Local Controller
Supply & Install Meter Base, Service Entrance & Main
623 (36) TSI16 Site
Circuit Breaker
623 (37) Customization of Local Controller TSI17 Unit
Page 71
VOLUME II

624(1) b4 Single Arm Post, with Street Light 12m HPS 400W Each

200mm X 100mm X
3" dia. (75mm)
prismatic lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
3" dia. (75mm)
lenses
reflector
200mm X 100mm X
Page 72
VOLUME II
200mm X 100mm X
Panel Type -
Panel Type -
Panel Type -
Panel Type -


1000mm (40") X
75mm (3") dia.

Jersey Type -
Waterfilled
Page 73
VOLUME II
Barrels
Non-gating -
collapsible bays
Non-gating - High
(HMW/HDPE) side
panels
Non-gating - Shock
Mechanism
Truck-Mounted-
Attenuator (TMA)



Temporary Hazard
Markers
Temporary Hazard
Markers
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
mm - 200 mm)
(2.5m - 4 m) x (150
mm - 200 mm)
Lightweight Plastic
625 (6) a9 Traffic Control Devices Containment Fences Each
Units
Page 74
VOLUME II
Expanded
Foam
Double Reverse
Corrugated (DRC)
Galvanized Steel
Fabric
High Impact
Polymer
Interlocking
Blocks
HMW/HDPE
Plastic
Vehicle Mounted
Equipment
Board Equipment

Roadwork On Side
Road
Page 75
VOLUME II
600 x 1000 mm (size
B)
No Lines Do Not
Power Line Works in
Progress
Page 76
VOLUME II
Pedestrians Watch
Your Step







Page 77
VOLUME II
Pay Item Suffix




ITEM 709 – PAINTS




Page 78
VOLUME II

ITEM 714 – WATER

714 (1) Water Liter

715 (1) a Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) b Separation Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) c Drainage Geotextile Square Meter
715 (1) d Paving Fabric Square Meter
715 (1) e Hydraulic Filter Square Meter




Page 79
VOLUME II


733 (1) Liter
Products

Course, Hot-Laid

Bitumen

Page 80
VOLUME II
ITEM 739 - ALUMINUM CLADDING

ITEM 740 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE INJECTION AND CRACK REPAIR


Page 81
VOLUME III
PART A - EARTHWORK

Page 1
VOLUME III

High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
Page 2
VOLUME III
High Density
HDPE


803 (3) Soil Stabilization Square Meter

From
excavation
Page 3
VOLUME III





807 (3) a1 Softscape Trees Each
807 (3) a2 Softscape Shrubs Each

807 (6) a1 Hardscape fountains Each
807 (6) a2 Hardscape benches Each
807 (6) a3 Hardscape gazebos Each
807 (8) a1 Aquatic Plants Each
807 (8) a2 Aquatic Animals Each
807 (11) Column Guards Pieces
807 (12) Wheel Guards Pieces

Page 4
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix



Page 5
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

902 (1) b Reinforcing Steel (Plain/Round) Kilogram


Page 6
VOLUME III
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
High Density
HDPE
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 7
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 8
VOLUME III
50mm dia. x 32mm

dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm

dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
Page 9
VOLUME III
75mm dia. x 50mm

dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 150mm
dia.
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Clean Out Plug with
Adaptor
Clean Out Plug with
Adaptor
Clean Out Plug with
Adaptor

Page 10
VOLUME III
1001 (2) p Fittings 50 mm dia. HDPE P-trap Each
1001 (2) r1 Fittings 75 mm x 50mm HDPE Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
1001 (2) r4 Fittings 150mm x 75 mm HDPE Reducer - Sanitary Tee Each
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
45 deg.
Page 11
VOLUME III

dia. 45 deg.

dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
dia. 45 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
90 deg.
Page 12
VOLUME III

90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.

dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
dia. 90 deg.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
150mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
200mm dia. x 100mm
dia.
Page 13
VOLUME III
200mm dia. x 150mm

dia.
250mm dia. x 200mm
dia.
300mm dia. x 200mm
dia.
300mm dia. x 250mm
dia.
1001 (6) a Catch Basin Each
Concrete
1001 (7) a Junction Box Each

Concrete
ITEM 1002 – PLUMBING

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 14
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
50mm dia. x 40mm
1002 (2) g Fittings - Cast Iron Sanitary Tap Tee Piece
dia.
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
(45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
dia. (45 deg.)
Page 15
VOLUME III

(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
(90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
dia. (90 deg.)
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 16
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))

dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
Page 17
VOLUME III

dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
dia. (Unequal)
20mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
25mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
Page 18
VOLUME III
25mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 25mm

dia.
40mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
Page 19
VOLUME III
100mm dia. x 40mm

dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.

Page 20
VOLUME III
deg.))
deg.))

deg.))

deg.))
deg.))
Page 21
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))

deg.))

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Page 22
VOLUME III
20mm dia. x 13mm

dia.
25mm dia. x 13mm

dia.
25mm dia. x 20mm

dia.
32mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
32mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 25mm
dia.
40mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 13mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 20mm
dia.
Page 23
VOLUME III
50mm dia. x 25mm

dia.
50mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
50mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
65mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 32mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
75mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 40mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 50mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 65mm
dia.
100mm dia. x 75mm
dia.
110 mm x 50 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 63 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 75 mm x
110 mm dia.
110 mm x 90 mm x
110 mm dia.
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Page 24
VOLUME III
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Page 25
VOLUME III
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Female Threaded
Union
Page 26
VOLUME III

deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
deg.))
Female Threaded
(90deg.))
Female Threaded
(90deg.))
Female Threaded
(90deg.))
Page 27
VOLUME III
20 mm dia. x 13 mm
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
32 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
32 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
40 mm dia x 20 mm
dia.
40 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 32 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 40 mm
dia.
20 mm dia. x 13 mm
dia.
25 mm dia. x 13 mm
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.

20 mm dia. x 13 mm
dia.
25 mm dia. x 20 mm
dia.
Page 28
VOLUME III
32 mm dia. x 25 mm
dia.
40 mm dia. x 32 mm
dia.
50 mm dia. x 40 mm
dia.
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor
Female Threaded
Adaptor

1002 (9) a1 Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (9) a2 Water Closet, Elongated, Complete Flush Type Set
Water Closet, Elongated, Automatic Flush Valve,
1002 (9) a3 Sensor Type Set
Complete
1002 (9) b1 Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Tank Type Set
1002 (9) b2 Water Closet, Round Front, Complete Flush Type Set
1002 (9) b3 Sensor Type Set
Complete
1002 (10) a1 Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Push Button Type Set
1002 (10) a2 Urinal, Flush Valve, Complete Lever Arm Type Set
1002 (10) a3 Urinal, Automatic Flush Valve, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (11) a1 Kitchen Sink, Complete Stainless Set
Page 29
VOLUME III
1002 (11) a2 Kitchen Sink, Complete Aluminum Set

1002 (14) a1 Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (14) a2 Lavatory, Wall Hung, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (15) a1 Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Manually Operated Set
1002 (15) a2 Lavatory, Counter Top/Under Counter, Complete Sensor Type Set
1002 (17) Toilet Soap Holder Piece
1002 (18) Liquid Soap Dispenser Piece
1002 (19) Toilet Tissue Holder Piece
1002 (20) Toilet Tissue Dispenser Piece

Page 30
VOLUME III
Aluminum Metal
1003 (1) e3 Ceiling Metal Frame Square Meters
Cladding
Aluminum Metal
1003 (2) f Wall Square Meters
Cladding
1003 (4) Cabinets Piece
1003 (9) Wall Frame Wood Piece
1003 (13) Phenolic Board Piece
Page 31
VOLUME III

Item 1004 – HARDWARE

1004 (1) a Rough Hardware Nails Kilo
1004 (1) b Rough Hardware Screws Kilo
1004 (1) c Rough Hardware Bolts Kilo
1004 (2) a Finishing Hardware Lockset Set
1004 (2) b Finishing Hardware Latches Set
1004 (2) c Finishing Hardware Bolts Set
1004 (2) d Finishing Hardware Door Closer Set
1004 (2) e Finishing Hardware Knobs Set
1004 (2) f Finishing Hardware Handles Set
1004 (2) g Finishing Hardware Hinges Set
1004 (2) h Finishing Hardware Ladder Set
1004 (2) i Finishing Hardware Grab Bar Set
1004 (4) Hardware Lump Sum

1005 (1) Residential Casement Square Meters
1005 (5) Grille Window Square Meters

Page 32
VOLUME III
ITEM 1007 – ALUMINUM GLASS DOORS

1007 (1) a Aluminum Glass Door Sliding Type Square Meter
1007 (1) b Aluminum Glass Door Swing Type Square Meter
1007 (2) Aluminum Glass Door Lump Sum



Jambs, Sills, Head,
1010 (1) Frames Set

Page 33
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix




1013 (2) a Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013 (2) b Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013 (2) c Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013 (2) d Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
1013 (2) e Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013 (2) f Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter
1013 (3) Fabricated Metal Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Plain GI Sheet Piece

Page 34
VOLUME III

1013A (2) a Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Ridge/Hip Rolls Linear Meter
1013A (2) b Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 26 Flashings Linear Meter
1013A (2) c Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Gutters Linear Meter
1013A (2) d Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Downspouts Linear Meter
1013A (2) e Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Valley Rolls/Gutter Linear Meter
Counter Flashing
1013A (2) f Fabricated Asphalt Roofing Accessory gauge 24 Linear Meter
Gutter

1014 (2) Perforated Aluminum Ceiling Panels Eaves Square Meter



Page 35
VOLUME III


1018 (5) a Countertop Finish Granite Square Meter
1018 (5) b Countertop Finish Cement Plaster Square Meter
1018 (5) c Countertop Finish Glazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (5) d Countertop Finish Unglazed Tiles Square Meter
1018 (6) Counter Edging Linear Meter


1020 (1) Vinyl Floor Tile Square Meter

Page 36
VOLUME III
1021 (1) c Cement Floor Finish with Floor Square Meter




1024 (1) Pea –Gravel Washout Finish Square Meter


ITEM 1027 – CEMENT PLASTER FINISH

Page 37
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix

1027 (2) Simulated Red Bricks PN 142 Square Meter





1032 (1) a Painting works Masonry/Concrete Square Meter
1032 (1) b Painting works Wood Square Meter
1032 (1) c Painting works Steel Square Meter
Page 38
VOLUME III
1032 (5) Texture Finish Square Meter

ITEM 1034 – DAMPPROOFING






Page 39
VOLUME III


1041 (1) a Gypsum Board for Walls Square Meter
1041 (1) b Gypsum Board for Ceilings Square Meter




Page 40
VOLUME III


1047 (3) a Metal Structure Accessories Bolts Piece
1047 (3) b Metal Structure Accessories Sagrods Piece
1047 (3) c Metal Structure Accessories Turnbuckle Piece
1047 (3) d Metal Structure Accessories Cross Bracing Piece
1047 (5) Metal Structure Accessories Steel Plates Piece
ITEM 1048 – CARBON AND GLASS FIBER

ITEM 1048A – CARBON AND GLASS FIBER

Page 41
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix





Page 42
VOLUME III

Page 43
VOLUME III

Page 44
VOLUME III

1052 (29) Micro Piles 0.20 Meter
1052 (30) Permanent Casing (Micro Piles) 0.20 Kilogram
ITEM 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARES

Page 45
VOLUME III
1053 (1) Steel Tubular Mouldings Meter

1053 (4) Tubular Steel Handrails 150mm x 50mm Meter
1053 (5) Square Bar Railings (Solid) 19 mm Meter
Meter
1053 (6) Stair Brass Metal Nosing

Panels


PART D - ELECTRICAL
ITEM 1100 – CONDUITS, BOXES & FITTINGS
(Number) (Subscript) Diameter Class Others
1100 (1) a1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
Page 46
VOLUME III
1100 (2) a1 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
1100 (3) a1 Flexible Metal Conduit 15 mm dia. x 3m Meter
1100 (4) a1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 15 mm dia. x 3m Length
Page 47
VOLUME III

1100 (7) b2 Conduit Coupling 20 mm dia IMC Piece
1100 (7) c2 Conduit Coupling 20 mm dia EMT Screw Type Piece
Page 48
VOLUME III

1100 (9) a2 Locknut & Bushing 20 mm dia RSC Pair
1100 (9) b2 Locknut & Bushing 20 mm dia IMC Pair
Page 49
VOLUME III
Page 50
VOLUME III
1100 (12) a3 PVC/uPVC Elbow 32 mm dia . x 90 deg. Piece
Page 51
VOLUME III
1100 (12) a7 PVC/uPVC Elbow 75 mm dia. x 90 deg Piece

1100 (13) a2 Straight Connector 20 mm dia EMT Piece
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
1100 (14) a2 End Bell 20 mm dia Piece
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
Page 52
VOLUME III
Hot Dipped
1100 (14) a11 End Bell Piece
125 mm dia. Galvanized Steel
Hot Dipped
Galvanized Steel
1100 (14) b1 End Bell 20 mm dia PVC/uPVC Piece

Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Rigid Steel, Hot
Page 53
VOLUME III

1100 (17) a1 G.I. Wire GA #14 Kilo
1100 (17) a2 G.I. Wire GA #16 Kilo
1100 (18) PVC Solvent Cement 400 cc Can
1100 (19) a Octagonal Junction Boxes Metal Piece
1100 (19) b Octagonal Junction Boxes PVC/uPVC Piece

1100 (20) a Utility Boxes Metal Piece
1100 (20) b Utility Boxes PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (21) a Pull Box Metal Piece
1100 (21) b Pull Box PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (22) a Square Box Metal Piece
1100 (22) b Square Box PVC/uPVC Piece
1100 (23) Reinforced Concrete Pedestal Pole Lot
1100 (24) Red Lead Paint 1000 cc Can
1100 (25) a Grounding Rod Copper clad 16mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (25) b Grounding Rod Copper clad 20mm dia x 3m Length
1100 (25) c Grounding Rod Copper clad 25mm dia x 3m Length
Page 54
VOLUME III

1100 (30) Conduits, Boxes & Fittings Lump Sum

1100 (31) Hacksaw Blade Piece

1.6 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia. Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
8.0mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
14mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
22mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
30mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 55
VOLUME III
Roll
60mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
100mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2 Roll
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
1.6 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
2.0 mm dia.
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.6 mm dia. Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.2 mm dia. Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
2.0mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
3.5mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
5.5mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
8.0mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 56
VOLUME III
Meter
14mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
22mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
Meter
30mm2
TW/THHN/THWN2
38mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
50mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
60mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
80mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
100mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
125mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
150mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
200mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
250mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
325mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
400mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
500mm2 Meter
TW/THHN/THWN2
Page 57
VOLUME III
a8 Roll
Roll
c1 Roll
Page 58
VOLUME III
Meter
1101 (4) a7 Electric Wire 1C X 70 XLPE
Meter
Meter
1101 (4) c1 Electric Wire 3C X 4 XLPE
1101 (5) ACSR Wire/Cable Roll
1101 (6) ACSR Wire/Cable Meter
Meter
1101 (7) a1 Bare Copper Wire 2.0 mm2
Page 59
VOLUME III

1101 (9)
plate)
1101 (10)
plate)
1101 (20)
Type (GT)
Set
1101 (21) Duplex Convenience Outlets/Receptacles (GT)

1101 (23) Set
(GT)
1101 (24) Set
(GT)
Page 60
VOLUME III

1101 (25) Set
etc.
1101 (26) Set

1101 (27) Set
1101 (28) Set
1101 (29) Set
1101 (30) Set
1101 (31) Set
Interrupter (GFCI)
1101 (33) a1 Grounding Clamps for Electric Wires 8.0 mm2 Piece
1101 (36) a4 Mica Tubing 25.40mm (1") Meter
1101 (39) Vibrating Bell Set
1101 (40) Push button Set
Page 61
VOLUME III
1101 (41) Buzzer Set
ITEM 1102 – POWER LOAD CENTER, SWITCHGEAR AND PANELBOARDS

Unit Of Measure
1102 (1) a1 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (1) a2 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (1) a3 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a4 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a5 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) a6 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (1) b1 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (1) b2 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (1) b3 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b4 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b5 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (1) b6 Panelboard with Main & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (2) a1 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (2) a2 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
1102 (2) a3 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type NEMA 1 Enclosure Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a4 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a5 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) a6 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Plug-in Type Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (2) b1 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (2) b2 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (2) b3 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
Page 62
VOLUME III
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b4 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b5 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (2) b6 Panelboard with Main Lugs & Branch Breakers Bolt-on Type Free-Standing Set
4X
NEMA 1
Enclosure
NEMA 3R or NEMA
4X
1102 (4) a1 Safety Switch, Non-Fusible Type NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
NEMA 3R or
1102 (4) a2 Safety Switch, Non-Fusible Type Surface Type Set
NEMA 4X
1102 (5) a1 Fuse Cut-out Box NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (5) a2 Fuse Cut-out Box NEMA 1 Surface Type Set

NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (5) a3 Fuse Cut-out Box Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (5) a4 Fuse Cut-out Box Surface Type Set
4X
1102 (6) a1 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (6) a2 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
1102 (6) a3 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Free-Standing Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a4 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a5 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Surface Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (6) a6 Main Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Free-Standing Set
4X
1102 (7) b1 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Flushed Type Set
1102 (7) b2 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker NEMA 1 Enclosure Surface Type Set
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (7) b3 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Flushed Type Set
4X
NEMA 3R or NEMA
1102 (7) b4 Enclosed Automatic Circuit Breaker Surface Type Set
4X
Page 63
VOLUME III

1102 (8) a1 NEMA 1 Flushed Type Set
1102 (8) a2 NEMA 1 Surface Type Set
1102 (8) a3 NEMA 1 Free-Standing Set
1102 (8) a4 Flushed Type Set
1102 (8) a5 Surface Type Set
1102 (8) a6 Free-Standing Set
1102 (10) a Pad Mounted Transformer (OISC) Free Standing Set
1102 (10) b Pole Mounted Transformer (OISC) Pole type Set
1102 (11) Dry Type Transformer Set
1102 (12) a Generator Stand-by Set
1102 (12) b Generator Continuous Set
1102 (13) b1 High Voltage Switch Gear without metering facilities Free Standing Set
1102 (14) b2 Low Voltage Switch Gear without metering facilities Free Standing Set
1102 (15) c Synchronizing Panel for Generator Free Standing Set
1102 (16) Aluminum Copper Steel Reinforce (ACSR) Meter
1102 (17) Transformer bracket Set
1102 (18) Power fuse assembly Set
1102 (19) Lightning Arrester with fuse cut-off Set
1102 (20) Creosoted pole Piece
1102 (21) Concrete pole Piece
1102 (22) Pin type insulator Piece
1102 (23) Pole top pin Piece
1102 (24) Machine bolt Piece
1102 (25) Washer Piece
1102 (26) Kilowatt Meter with base Set
1102 (27) Power Load Center, Switchgear and Panelboards Lump Sum
ITEM 1103 – LIGHTING FIXTURE

1103 (1) Lighting Fixtures Lump Sum
Page 64
VOLUME III
Page 65
VOLUME III
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 66
VOLUME III
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 67
VOLUME III
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 68
VOLUME III
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic / Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Acrylic Prismatic
Diffuser
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 69
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 70
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 71
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 72
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 73
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 74
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Page 75
VOLUME III
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 76
VOLUME III
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser
Louvre / Prismatic
Diffuser



Page 77
VOLUME III

1103 (5) a1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) a2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) a3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts Recessed Set
1103 (5) a4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (152mmØ (6")) 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
1103 (5) b1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) b2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
1103 (5) b3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts Recessed Set
1103 (5) b4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/CFL (203mmØ (8")) 18watts to 21watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
1103 (5) d1 7watts to 16watts Surface Mounted Set
square)
1103 (5) d2 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Surface Mounted Set
square)
1103 (5) d3 7watts to 16watts Recessed Set
square)
1103 (5) d4 7watts to 16watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
square)
1103 (6) a1 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Tube lighting Fixture 1 - 8watts Box Type Surface Mounted Set
Page 78
VOLUME III
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
Page 79
VOLUME III
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
w/Prismatic
Diffuser
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 80
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm Surface
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 600mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 81
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Page 82
VOLUME III
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
Mounted
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
300 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Mirrorized
600 x 1200mm
Recessed
Troffer Type
Page 83
VOLUME III

1103 (7) a1 5.5watts E27 Base Surface Mounted Set
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
Receptacle Outlet
1103 (8) a1 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (76.2mmØ (3")) 2watts to 4watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a2 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (100mmØ (4")) 4watts to 5.5watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a3 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (152mmØ (6")) 5.5watts to 9watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a4 Down Light / Pinlight Fixture w/LED (203mmØ (8")) 9watts to 12watts Recessed Set
1103 (8) a5 5.5watts Recessed Set
Square)
Square )
Square)
(6"))
(6"))
Square)
Square)
1103 (8) a12 12watts to 18watts Recessed Set
(8"))
1103 (8) a13 12watts to 18watts w/glass cover Recessed Set
(8"))
Self contained Double Sided Exit Sign, Maintained Polycarbonate
1103 (9) a1 8watts, T5 Recessed Set
3hrs. duration w/ fluorescent lamp prismatic
Polycarbonate
Self contained Single Sided Exit Sign, Maintained 3hrs.
1103 (9) a2 8watts, T5 wall mounted Set
duration w/ fluorescent lamp
prismatic
Page 84
VOLUME III

1103 (9) a3 2 - 10watts Wall Mounted Set
Maintained 3hrs duration with Quartz Halogen Lamps
1103 (9) a4 6watts, 230volts Wall Mounted Set
Maintained 3hrs duration with 2- LED Lamps
Stainless Steel
Bracket Body and
Ribbed Surface or Pole
1103 (10) Obstruction Lighting Fixture 70w/80watts HPS-E Set
borosilicate glass Mounted
with wire retaining
harness
finish
finish
Die-Cast Aluminum Spot - Floodlight with electrocoat
gray paint finish inside and out. Enclosed, gasketed,
filtered optical with aluminum reflector and tempered
glass closure
Wall Type Luminaire (Bracket Light) with acrylic
1103 (13) polycarbonate globe diffuser complete with all Set
accessories
1103 (14) Post Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum
1103 (15) Garden Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum
1103 (16) Flood Lamp with Bulb Lump Sum

ITEM 1105 - NETWORK CABLING

Page 85
VOLUME III

1105 (10) Fiber Fusion Splicer Set
1105 (15) a1 Wall Plate Single Set

1106 (6) Data Video Recorder Set
1106 (11) Server CCTV Unit

Page 86
VOLUME III



1109 (3) Cadweld connector Piece
1109 (5) MD BCW Meter

1110 (4) Bed Station Set
1110 (5) Corridor Light Set
PART E - MECHANICAL
Page 87
VOLUME III

1200 (1) Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) inverter type Set
1200 (2) a1 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) Set
1200 (2) a2 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) wall mounted type Set
1200 (2) a3 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) ceiling mounted Set
1200 (2) a4 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) floor standing type Set
1200 (2) a5 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) ceiling cassette type Set
1200 (2) a6 Fan Coil Unit (FCU) duct type Set
1200 (3) a1 Air Cooled Condensing Unit (ACCU) Set
1200 (4) a2 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU wall mounted Set
1200 (4) a3 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU floor standing type Set
1200 (4) a4 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU ceiling mounted Set
1200 (4) a5 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU wall mounted inverter Set
1200 (4) a6 Package type Airconditioning unit PACU standing type inverter Set
ceiling mounted
inverter
1200 (5) a1 Window type airconditioning unit Set
1200 (5) a2 Window type airconditioning unit non-inverter type Set
1200 (5) a3 Window type airconditioning unit unit inverter type Set
1200 (6) Diffusers Piece
Page 88
VOLUME III

1200 (11) a1 Exhaust Air Grilles (EAG) Piece
1200 (12) a1 Fresh Air Grille Piece
1200 (13) a1 Backdraft Damper Piece
Tube Axial Roof
Mounted
wall mounted,
Industrial Type
Page 89
VOLUME III


1200 (24) Chiller Unit
1200 (25) Chilled Water Pump Unit
1200 (26) Cooling Tower Unit
1200 (27) Cooling Tower Pump Unit
Refrigerant Copper Pipe, Refrigerant Copper Pipe
Fittings & Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation
1200 (29) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Linear Meter
1200 (30) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Fittings Piece
1200 (31) a3 Branch Joint CMY-Y102L-G2 Piece
1200 (31) a4 Branch Joint CMY-Y102S-G2 Piece
1200 (31) a5 Branch Joint (Header) CMY-Y108-G Piece
1200 (32) a1 Refrigerant Copper Pipe Insulation Linear Meter
Page 90
VOLUME III
1200 (33) Ducts and Duct Insulation Linear Meter
Rectangular Galvanized Steel Sheet Air Duct, Supply &
Return
1200 (36) a1 Aluminum Flexible Duct Linear Meter
1200 (37) a1 Aluminum Flexible Duct Connector Piece
Page 91
VOLUME III

1200 (38) Rectangular Duct Work Insulation Square Meter
25mmØ, 32 kg/m3 w/
1200 (39) Fiberglass Insulation Square Meter
aluminum foil
1200 (40) Air Conditioning and Ventilating System Lump Sum
1200 (41) a1 Freon (Gas) 23 Kilograms
1200 (41) b1 Freon (Gas) 134a Kilograms
1200 (41) b2 Freon (Gas) 134b Kilograms
1200 (41) c1 Freon (Gas) 410a Kilograms
1200 (41) c2 Freon (Gas) 410b Kilograms

1201 (2) Centrifugal pump with control Set
1201 (3) Submersible multi-stage deepwell pump with control Set
1201 (4) Submersible sump pump with control Set
1201 (5) Submersible sewage ejector pump with control Set
1201 (6) Booster pump with control Set
1201 (7) Jet pump with control Set
1201 (8) Water tank Set
1201 (12) Valves Piece
Page 92
VOLUME III

1201 (15) a10 Float Valve 50mm dia Piece
ITEM 1202 – AUTOMATIC WATER SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1202 (1) Automatic Water Sprinkler System Lump Sum

1202 (2) Set
accessories

1202 (3) Set
accessories
1202 (4) a1 Sprinkler Head, upright 20 mm dia. Piece
1202 (4) a2 Sprinkler Head, pendent 20 mm dia. Piece
1202 (4) a3 Sprinkler Head, wall 20 mm dia. Piece
Page 93
VOLUME III
1202 (11) Inspector test valve 25 mm dia Piece
1202 (12) Inspector test connector 25 mm dia Piece

1202 (14) a6 B.I. 90 elbow 80 mm dia Piece
1202 (15) a6 B.I. Tee 80 mm dia Piece
Page 94
VOLUME III

1202 (16) a6 Bell Reducer 80/65 mm dia Piece
1202 (22) 150 mm dia. Set
with cap
1202 (23) Fire hose cabinet Set

CO2/HCFC123 with
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 with
bracket
CO2/HCFC123 wheeled
type
Page 95
VOLUME III

1203 (1) Electric Elevator Set
1203 (2) Traction or Hydraulic Machine and Car Set
Hoistway Doors, Counterweights, Guide Rails,
1203 (3) Piece
Annunciators, and Hall Position Indicators
1203 (4) Electrical Wires and Conduits Length
1203 (5) Electrical Wires and Conduits Meter

1204 (1) Machine Set
1204 (2) Car, Door and Cable Piece

1205 (1)
Vacuum Pump
Piece
1205 (2) Humidifier, Vacuum Trap Bottle, Outlets, Valves

1206 (1) Set
1206 (2) Pipes Length
ITEM 1207 - BOILER

Page 96
VOLUME III

1207 (1) Set
Pump
1207 (2) Pipes with Insulation Length


PART F – PILING
ITEM 1300 – PILING TO INCLUDE SHEET PILING
1300 (1) a1 Timber Pile Untreated Supply Linear Meter
1300 (1) a2 Timber Pile Untreated Drive Linear Meter
1300 (1) a3 Timber Pile Untreated Splice Linear Meter
1300 (1) b1 Timber Pile Treated Supply Linear Meter
1300 (1) b2 Timber Pile Treated Drive Linear Meter
1300 (1) b3 Timber Pile Treated Splice Linear Meter
1300 (2) a1 Steel Pile Supply Linear Meter
1300 (2) a2 Steel Pile Drive Linear Meter
1300 (2) a3 Steel Pile Splice Linear Meter
1300 (2) b1 Steel Pile Tubular Supply Linear Meter
1300 (2) b2 Steel Pile Tubular Drive Linear Meter
1300 (2) b3 Steel Pile Tubular Splice Linear Meter
1300 (3) a1 Concrete Piles Supply Linear Meter
Page 97
VOLUME III
1300 (3) a2 Concrete Piles Drive Linear Meter

1300 (3) a3 Concrete Piles Splice Linear Meter
1300 (3) b1 Concrete Piles Prestressed Supply Linear Meter
1300 (3) b2 Concrete Piles Prestressed Drive Linear Meter
1300 (3) b3 Concrete Piles Prestressed Splice Linear Meter
ITEM 1301 –TEST PILE

1301 (1) a Timber Untreated Linear Meter
1301 (1) b Timber Treated Linear Meter
1301 (2) a Test Pile Steel Linear Meter
1301 (2) b Test Pile Concrete Linear Meter
1301 (2) c Test Pile Tubular Linear Meter




Page 98
VOLUME III




1405 (1) Reinforcing Materials Square Meter


1407 (1) Tetrapad Piece
1407 (2) Tetrapad Cubic Meter
1407 (3) Hexapad Piece
1407 (4) Hexapad Cubic Meter
Page 99
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix





ITEM 1601 – BACKFILL AND FILL


Page 100
VOLUME III






Page 101
VOLUME III

g

1703 (1) Dredging-soils Cubic Meter

1704 (1) Embankment Cubic Meter




Page 102
VOLUME III
Pay Item Suffix






Page 103
VOLUME III



Page 104
VOLUME III



Page 105
VOLUME III

1717 (5) a Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Z-Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) b Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Hat Type Grade 50 Meter
1717 (5) c Furnished and Driven of Steel Sheet Pile Pipe Type Grade 50 Meter



Page 106
VOLUME III


1721 (1) Removing, cleaning, stockpiling salvaged culvert pipe Linear Meter

pipe
1721 (3) Cleaning culvert pipe in place Linear Meter

1722 (2) Fence Precast Plant Box Linear Meter
Page 107
VOLUME III
ITEM 1723 – DREDGING WORKS

1723 (1) Dredging Works Cubic Meter
1723 (2) a Disposal of dredged material Type A Cubic Meter
1723 (2) b Disposal of dredged material Type B Cubic Meter
1723 (2) c Disposal of dredged material Type C Cubic Meter

1724 (1) a Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (1) b Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (1) c Horizontal Axial Flow Pump above 1.0 m3/s cap Set
1724 (2) a Suction Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt & Nuts 6 -10mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set

1724 (2) b 6 -10mmt carbon steel 1500mmØ and below Set
Nuts

1724 (8) Fuel Transfer pump 0.187-0.75kW Set
1724 (10) Water supply Centrifugal pump 0.75 - 2.24kW Set
1724 (11) Portable submersible pump 0.75 -3.73kW Set

1.0 m3/s cap and
1725 (1) a Submersible Axial and Mixed Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
Page 108
VOLUME III
1.0 m3/s cap and

1725 (1) b Submersible Vertical Axial Flow Sewage Pump Set
below
1725 (2) a Suction Column Pipe set with Flanges and Bolt & Nuts 10mmt 700mmØbelow Meter

1725 (2) b 10mmt 700mmØ below Meter
Nuts
1725 (3) Flapper Valve 12mmt carbon steel 700mmØ below Set
1725 (4) Fuel transfer Pump 0.187-0.75kW Set
1725 (5) Fuel Storage Tank 5,000 ltrs. Set
1725 (7) Steel Grating Stainless steel Set
(0.5 ton capacity chain
hoist with trolley)
(1 ton capacity chain
hoist with trolley)
(1.5 tons capacity

hoist with trolley)
(2.5 tons capacity


1726 (2) Generator Set KvA Lump Sum
1726 (3) Local Panel Control center (for Auxiliary Equipment) Lump Sum

Page 109
M7. /J..~jJe.J1I
Republic of the Philippines OJ- - ¥_ .J.f)1?
Manila
'22 FEe 2017
DEPARTMENT ORDER ) SUBJECT: Revised Guidelines on the

Installation of Project Billboards
NO.
21 )
~
Series of 201<t3~'l'.'1'1. f7 )
For the information and guidance of the public about the on-going projects being
undertaken by the Department, the following guidelines shall be observed by all concerned
implementing offices in the preparation and installation of project billboards:
1. The new billboard design layout, dimension and letter sizes on white background, as
shown on the attached drawing, shall be depicted on a standard billboard measuring
1220mm x 2440mm (4ft. x 8ft.) using 12.S0mm (1/2 inch) thick marine plywood or
tarpaulin of the same size posted on Smm (3/16 inc'i) marine plywood.
2. All existing billboards of on-going projects shall be replaced with new one adopting
the above guidelines.
3. For each building project, the billboard shall be installed in front of the project site.
4. For each road/bridge/flood control project, two billboards shall be installed, one at
the beginning and one at the end of the project.
S. For road projects with length of 10 kilometers or more, additional billboard shall also
be installed at every S-kilometer interval.
6. Name(s) and/or picture(s) of any personages should not appear in the billboard.
7. No other billboards shall be allowed to be installed 100 meters before and 100
meters after all DPWH projects and in-between the project limits or within the road
right-of-way.
8. DPWH contractors shall not be allowed to place names of politicians or carry political
billboard on their equipment.
This order supersedes Department Order No. 141, Series of 2016, and shall take effect
immediately.
~~--
MARK A. VILLAR
Secretary
5.1.3 cbdjDLBjDBP

1111111111111111111111111111111111111
WIN7R01389
~
CONSTRUCTION OF (Name of Project and Location)
Sl CONTRACfOR
lilor:=
lil DATE STARTED
or:= CONTRACf COMPLETION DATE
lilor:=
lil CONTRACf COST :
EE lilor:= IMPLEMENTING OFFICE / CONTACf No. :
a
N
Sl SOURCES OF FUND
N
~ ~
DEPARTMENT OF
PUBLIC WORKS AND HIGHWAYS
TEXT 2920 or call (02)165-02 for any concern on this project
www.dpwh.gov.ph
t
320
2440mm
DPWH STANDARD PROJECT BILLBOARD

2017 DPWH Department Orders

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 DPWH Department Orders

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VOLUME II

PART A - FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER

Operation & Maintenance of Laboratory Building for

PART B - OTHER GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Pay Item Suffix Valid Values

Pay Item Suffix

ITEM 101 – REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS

101 (10) Removal of Existing Road Signs Each

ITEM 102 – EXCAVATION

ITEM 103 – STRUCTURE EXCAVATION

ITEM 104 – EMBANKMENT

Item 105 – SUBGRADE PREPARATION

ITEM 106 – COMPACTION EQUIPMENT AND DENSITY CONTROL STRIPS

ITEM 107 – OVERHAUL

PART D – SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE

ITEM 201 – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

ITEM 202 – CRUSHED AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

ITEM 203 – LIME STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

ITEM 204 – PORTLAND CEMENT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

Item 205 – ASPHALT STABILIZED ROAD MIX BASE COURSE

ITEM 206 – CHEMICALLY STABILIZED ROAD MIX SUB-BASE/BASE COURSE

ITEM 207 – PORTLAND CEMENT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE

Pay Item Suffix Valid Values

ITEM 208 – AGGREGATE STOCKPILE

ITEM 209 – ASPHALT TREATED PLANT MIX BASE COURSE

PART E - SURFACE COURSES

ITEM 301 – BITUMINOUS PRIME COAT

ITEM 302 – BITUMINOUS TACK COAT

ITEM 303 – BITUMINOUS SEAL COAT

ITEM 304 – BITUMINOUS SURFACE TREATMENT

304 (4) a Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 30 Tonne

304 (4) b Bituminous Surface Treatment - MC-Cut-back Asphalt Grade 70 Tonne

ITEM 304A – SLURRY SYSTEM FOR ROAD SURFACE TREATMENT

ITEM 305 – BITUMINOUS PENETRATION MACADAM PAVEMENT

ITEM 306 – BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE

ITEM 307 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX SURFACE COURSE - GENERAL

ITEM 308 – BITUMINOUS PLANT- MIX SURFACE COURSE, COLD-LAID

ITEM 309 – BITUMINOUS PLANT-MIX (STOCKPILE MAINTENANCE MIXTURE)

ITEM 310 – BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, HOT-LAID

ITEM 311 - PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Coralline

Portland Cement Concrete Pavement with Dolomites

ITEM 313 - ROCK ASPHALT, HOT LAID

PART F - BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

400 (16) Test Piles, furnished and driven Meter

400 (23) a10 Bored Piles 1.70 Meter

400 (24) j1 Permanent Casing 1.70 12mm thick Meter

ITEM 401 – RAILINGS

ITEM 402 – TIMBER STRUCTURES

ITEM 403 – METAL STRUCTURES

ITEM 404 - REINFORCING STEEL

ITEM 404A - EPOXY-COATED REINFORCING STEEL BARS

ITEM 405 – STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

ITEM 406 – PRESTRESSED CONCRETE STRUCTURES